Class J^JUU- 
 Book__JK_l©&— 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
( 
 
 A 
 
 PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 A GRAMMAR, EXERCISES, READING LESSONS, AND A COMPLETE 
 PRONOUNCING VOCABULARY. 
 
 BY 
 
 
 WILLIAM I, KNAPP, A.M., 
 
 TROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE IN MADISON UNIVERSITY, 
 NEW YORK, AND AUTHOR OF A " FRENCH READING-BOOK." 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 FRANKLIN SQUARE. 
 
 1868. 
 

 By Professor Knapp. 
 
 A Practical Grammar of the French Language : containing a 
 
 Grammar, Exercises, Reading Lessons, and a complete Pronouncing Vocabulary. 
 12mo, Half Leather, $1 T5. 
 
 Chrestomathie Francaise. A French Reading-Book: Contain. 
 
 ing I. Selections from the best French Writers, with References to the Author's 
 French Grammar. II. The Master-Pieces of Moliere, Racine, Boileau, and Vol- 
 taire ; with Explanatory Notes, Biographical Notices, and a Vocabulary. 12mo, 
 Half Leather, $1 75. 
 
 Published by HARPER & BROTHERS, Franklin Square, N. Y. 
 
 C3T" The above Works sent by mail, postage free, to any part of the United States 
 on receipt of the price. 
 
 Q-.W 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand eight hundred 
 and sixty-three, by Harpee & Brothebs, in the Clerk's Office of ths District Court 
 of the Southern District of New York. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 It has been the author's aim to present in the follow- 
 ing pages a clear, systematic statement of the laws and 
 usages of the French language, accompanied by sufficient 
 illustrations and exercises to enable the mind to compre- 
 hend them and the memory to retain them. 
 
 He does not claim, therefore, to have originated a "new 
 method," whereby the learner is promised a knowledge 
 of the language after a few weeks or months of applica- 
 tion, but he does claim to have prepared a useful book, 
 adapted to all classes of students in this department. 
 
 It has long been the writer's opinion that the chief 
 misfortune of books of this kind is, that their authors 
 were not American — men who could not anticipate the 
 practical difficulties which are constantly thronging the 
 path of the learner in this country, and who have neces- 
 sarily given us, so to speak, the French side of the sub- 
 ject, bringing into prominence rules and remarks clearly 
 comprehensible at first view, and contenting themselves 
 with a less prominent allusion to points of real difficulty 
 and importance. Whether we have succeeded in pre- 
 senting to our compatriots the American side, remains 
 for them to determine. 
 
 The division of the work into Paets contemplates the 
 various motives which lead to the study of French. 
 
 A large class of students pursue the study in detail, 
 desiring not only to become conversant with the litera- 
 ture, but also to acquire some facility in the practical use 
 of the language ; to such the whole work is dedicated. 
 
IV PKEFACE. 
 
 The exercises in Part Fourth will be translated in con- 
 nection with Part Second ; Part Third will be examined 
 in connection with the Reading Lessons in Part Fifth ; 
 and the idiomatic phrases in the Appendices and else- 
 where will always be found convenient for French com- 
 position or for conversation. 
 
 Another class require only such aid as will put them 
 in communication with the literature and with scientific 
 authorities at the least possible expenditure of time. For 
 such Part Second is specially adapted. It contains all 
 those forms and paradigms which make irp the accidence 
 of French Grammar, combined with sufficient syntactical 
 information to illustrate the use of the several parts of 
 speech. 
 
 The arrangement of the rules for pronunciation in Part 
 First is the result. of experience in the class-room. The 
 systematic treatment of the vowels, diphthongs, nasals, 
 consonants, etc., will, we are confident, afford a more cor- 
 rect knowledge of this important part of French Gram- 
 mar than may be found elsewhere. The writer's theory 
 of the nasal sounds has been proved, by oft-repeated trial, 
 to produce the desired result — a result so difficult of at- 
 tainment either by imitation or by the old method of 
 representation. It was found convenient to instruct the 
 learner to regard the m and n as merely indicating that 
 the foregoing vowel should have a nasal sound, which, 
 though not the whole truth (their existence being prop- 
 erly accounted for on etymological grounds), is never- 
 theless a very good guide until experience renders it un- 
 necessary. 
 
 Parts Second and Fourth, as intimated above, are de- 
 signed to accompany each other. Each subject in the 
 Etymological Part is furnished with a full set of exercises 
 for reciprocal translation, with references to the rules just 
 committed to memory, and such additional details as the 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 lesson may demand. Thus the learner is not only put in 
 possession of the forms and precepts of the language, but 
 those precepts are impressed upon the memory by a mul- 
 titude of examples, so as to secure the most thorough re- 
 sults in a comparatively short space of time. 
 
 The author has taken occasion in these pages to refer 
 to the Old French, or "Zangue cVo'il" whenever it seemed 
 desirable to point out the origin of a word or of a so-called 
 euphonic letter; and he hopes that these initiatory efforts 
 of his to popularize the results of modern science will be 
 regarded with the favor which they merit. 
 
 The Table of Verbal Endings on page 95 was inserted 
 into the text after the MS. of the present work was in the 
 hands of the compositors. It was at first intended for 
 the use of those who have made some attainments in the 
 ancient languages ; but its ready adaptation to all classes 
 of learners needs but a passing illustration. In the Third 
 Conjugation, the application of the terminations to the 
 stem does not always yiejl the actual form of the verb, 
 in which case the euphonic changes on page 97 are to be 
 noticed ; these will give repois instead of recevs by can- 
 celing the v before s, and lengthening e into oi ; just as 
 in Greek the termination eig results from e vq by dropping 
 v and lengthening e into a. Again, in the subjunctive, 
 repoive results from receve by lengthening the e before v 
 with e mute, into oi. 
 
 By pursuing this method, the acquisition of the verb 
 rests not so much upon the memory as upon the reason- 
 ing faculties of the student, and may serve as a very effi- 
 cient means of culture. 
 
 The Reading Lessons in Part Fifth were inserted to 
 secure completeness to the work, by furnishing a pro- 
 gressive collection of pieces for translation, supplied with 
 abundant references and rules, notes and explanations. 
 The Vocabulary at the close contains, besides the mean- 
 
VI PEEFACE. 
 
 ings of all the words, also a figured pronunciation of 
 each, which will be of decided value to the unaided stu- 
 dent. 
 
 Although the preparation of the present volume has 
 been executed chiefly from results obtained through 
 many years of practical experience, the author has not 
 failed to consult the most successful works on French 
 Grammar published in France and Germany during the 
 past few years. Aside from the standard helps, he has 
 availed himself of the folio wiDg : 
 
 Plotz, Lehrbuch der Franzosischen Sprache. Berlin, 1861. 
 
 Matzner, Franzosische Grammatik mit besonderer Berticksichti- 
 gung des Lateinischen. Berlin, 1856. 
 
 Girault-Duvivier, Grammaires des Grammaires. Paris, 1859. 
 
 Orelli, Altfranzosiscbe Grammatik. Zurich, 1848. 
 
 Her rig, Archiv f. das Studium d. neueren Sprachen u. Literaturen, 
 vols, xxx.-xxxiv. Braunschweig. 
 
 In conclusion, the author would gratefully acknowl- 
 edge his obligations to Henr^ Marsh, Esq., for his able 
 and experienced services, which have so largely contrib- 
 uted to the typographical accuracy of the work. 
 
 Hamilton, N.Y., Oct. 20th, 1863. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 OF THE ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Of the Alphabet 13 
 
 Of the Pronunciation 14 
 
 Accents 14 
 
 Pronunciation of the Simple Vowels 14 
 
 The Diphthongs 16 
 
 The Nasal Sounds 17 
 
 The Consonants 19 
 
 Mute Final Consonants 22 
 
 Important Eemarks 23 
 
 Orthography 24 
 
 Division of Syllables 24 
 
 The Apostrophe 25 
 
 The Hyphen 25 
 
 The Diaeresis 26 
 
 Exercises for Practice in Pronunciation 26 
 
 I. Simple Vowels 26 
 
 II. Diphthongs 26 
 
 III. Nasals 27 
 
 IV. Consonants 27 
 
 V. Mute Final Consonants 28 
 
 VI. Accidental Sound of Final Consonants 28 
 
 VII. Reading Lessons 28 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. 
 
 Introduction 30 
 
 Of the Article 31 
 
 The Definite Article , 31 
 
 The Indefinite Article 33 
 
 The Partitive Sense of Substantives , 34 
 
Vlll CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Of the Noun 37 
 
 Gender 37 
 
 Number 39 
 
 Case , 41 
 
 Of the Adjective 42 
 
 Plural of Adjectives 42 
 
 Feminine Gender 43 
 
 Degrees of Comparison 47 
 
 Of the Numerals 49 
 
 Pronunciation of the Numerals 50 
 
 Remarks on the Numerals 51 
 
 Of the Pronouns 52 
 
 Personal Pronouns 52 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 57 
 
 Relative Pronouns 59 
 
 The Relative Particles En and Y 63 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns 66 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 68 
 
 Idiomatical Uses of Ce 72 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns 72 
 
 Use of the Indefinite Pronouns : 
 
 First Class 73 
 
 Second Class 77 
 
 Third Class 78 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns followed by Que 80 
 
 Of the Verb 81 
 
 Of Moods 83 
 
 Of Tenses 83 
 
 Number — Person — Participles 85 
 
 Conjugation 86 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb "Avoir" 86 
 
 " " " " "JZtre" 88 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs conjugated Interrogatively 90 
 
 " " " Negatively 91 
 
 Conjugation of Regular Verbs 92 
 
 Paradigm of the First Conjugation 97 
 
 Euphonic Changes in Verbs of the First Conjugation 99 
 
 Paradigm of the Second Conjugation 100 
 
 Paradigm of the Third Conjugation 102 
 
 Paradigm of the Fourth Conjugation 104 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Verbs Interrogatively 106 
 
CONTENTS. IX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Verbs Negatively 110 
 
 " " " " Negatively and Interrogatively... 112 
 
 Formation of the Tenses 114 
 
 The Passive Verb 115 
 
 Conjugation of the Passive Verb 116* 
 
 Intransitive Verbs 120 
 
 Model Verb "Tomber" 122 
 
 Reflective Verbs 123 
 
 Model Verb " se Flatter" 123 
 
 Reciprocal Verbs 126 
 
 Unipersonal Verbs 126 
 
 Conjugation of l 'Neiger" 127 
 
 Irregular Unipersonal Verb "Y Avoir" 128 
 
 Irregular Verbs 130 
 
 Conjugation of Irregular Verbs 131 
 
 Defective Verbs 162 
 
 List of Irregular Verbs 167 
 
 Of the Adverb , 170 
 
 The Adverb Ne 173 
 
 Of the Preposition 173 
 
 Use of some Prepositions 175 
 
 Of the Conjunction 178 
 
 Uses of Que 180 
 
 Of the Interjection 181' 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Of the Article 183 
 
 Use of the Definite Article 183 
 
 Omission of the Definite Article 185 
 
 Repetition of the Article 186 
 
 Of the Indefinite Article 186 
 
 Omission of the Article in the Partitive Relation 187 
 
 Remarks on the Partitive 189 
 
 Of the Noun 190 
 
 Formation of the Feminine Gender of Substantives 190 
 
 Case 192 
 
 Compound Nouns 192 
 
 Plural of Compound Substantives 193 
 
 Of the Adjective 194 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Peculiarities of some Adjectives 195 
 
 Position of the Adjective 196 
 
 Government of Adjectives = 199 
 
 Of the Numerals 202 
 
 ' Of the Pronoun 204 
 
 Personal Pronouns 204 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 20G 
 
 Of the Verb 207 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with its Subject 207 
 
 Use of the Moods 209 
 
 Infinitive 209 
 
 Present Participle 210 
 
 Past Participle 211 
 
 Use of the Tenses of the Indicative Mood 214 
 
 Use of the Subjunctive Mood 219 
 
 Of the Kegimen of Verbs 222 
 
 Of the Indirect Regimen 226 
 
 Verbs employed Idiomatically 227 
 
 Of the Adverb 231 
 
 Observations on Adverbs 233 
 
 Place of the Adverb 235 
 
 Adverbial Phrases 236 
 
 Of the Preposition 238 
 
 Use of certain Prepositions 238 
 
 Of the Conjunction 246 
 
 APPENDICES TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 No. I. — French Versification 249 
 
 Of the different Kinds of Verse 249 
 
 Csesura 252 
 
 Rhyme 253 
 
 Poetic License 254 
 
 No. II. — Idiomatic Use of certain Verbs, with their Regimen .. 255 
 Familiar Phrases and Dialogues 259 
 
 No. III. — List of Abbreviations 280 
 
 No. IV. — Proper Names 283 
 
 Names of Persons 283 
 
 Names of Places 285 
 
 Proper Adjectives 289 
 
CONTENTS. XI 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Practical Exercises on the Rules contained in Part Second...... 292 
 
 Supplement to Part Fourth 388 
 
 Exercises on the Use of the Past Participle 388 
 
 " " " Subjunctive Mood 390 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 FRENCH READING LESSONS. 
 
 SECTION FIRST. 
 
 I. Miscellaneous Sentences 394 
 
 II. Miscellaneous Sentences — continued 395 
 
 III. On a Voyage 396 
 
 IV. On Landing in Europe 396 
 
 V. On Languages 397 
 
 VI. On the Railway 398 
 
 VII. The Letter 399 
 
 VIII. The Traveler and the Parisian 401 
 
 IX. Henry IV. and the Peasant 403 
 
 X. The Arab and his Horse. — By Bernardin de St. Pierre. 406 
 
 LITERARY ANECDOTES. 
 
 XI. Moliere and his Guests. — By Roche 407 
 
 XII. Gibbon and Voltaire. — By Roche 409 
 
 XIII. Voltaire and Tivon.— By Roche 411 
 
 XIV. Another — Voltaire and Piron. — By Roche 412 
 
 SECTION SECOND. 
 
 XV. The Two Neighbors. — By Lamennais 413 
 
 XVI. The Exile.— By Lamennais 415 
 
 XVII. The Poetry of Lamartine criticised by Didot. — By 
 
 Lamartine 416 
 
 XVIII. A Dream.— By George Sand 420 
 
 XIX. Proclamation to the Army. — By Napoleon 421 
 
 XX. Proclamation to the Army on the Eve of the Battle 
 
 of Austerlitz. — By NapoUon 423 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 SECTION THIRD. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XXI. A Serio-comic Adventure. — By Courier 424 
 
 XXII. "Pourboires" on the Rhine. — By Victor Hugo 428 
 
 XXIII. A Frozen Nose. — By Alexandre Dumas 433 
 
 XXIV, Of Fables.— By Nisard 43G 
 
 Vocabulary 441 
 
,43/7. 
 GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 OF THE ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 OF THE ALPHABET. 
 1. The French alphabet contains twenty-five letters, 
 
 viz. 
 
 A, a, pronounced ah. 
 
 N, n, pronounced e«. 
 
 B, b, 
 
 ' bay. 
 
 0, o, 
 
 ' oh. 
 
 C, c, < 
 
 say. 
 
 P, P, 
 
 « /^. 
 
 D, d, 
 
 day. 
 
 Q, q, 
 
 ' &# (see w, 12) 
 
 E, e, 
 
 ay. 
 
 R, r, 
 
 ' airr. 
 
 F, f, 
 
 *ff- 
 
 S, s, 
 
 ' ess. 
 
 G, g, 
 
 ' zhay (see 37). 
 
 T, t, 
 
 ' toy. 
 
 H, h, 
 
 ' ash. 
 
 U, u, 
 
 ' u or # (see 12) 
 
 I, i, 
 
 ' ee. 
 
 V, y, 
 
 ' vay. 
 
 J» J, ' 
 
 ' zhee (see 42). 
 
 X, x, 
 
 1 eeks. 
 
 K, k, 
 
 ' &aA. 
 
 Y, y, 
 
 * ee-grek. 
 
 L, 1, 
 
 ' e//. 
 
 Z, z, 
 
 ' 2CC?. 
 
 M, m, ' 
 
 ' em. 
 
 
 
 a. Of these leters, a, e, £, o, w, and y are simple voicels; 
 the remainder are called consonants. 
 
 b. W, w — called in French double ve — is found only in 
 foreign words which have been introduced into the lan- 
 guage ; as, wagon, railway car — from the English; Wal- 
 lon, a Walloon — from the Celtic. 
 
 ISF 3 For the figured pronunciation of any word in this Gram- 
 mar, see Vocabulary at the end. 
 
14 ® FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 2-5. 
 
 OF THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 2. Vowels are modified in their pronunciation and use 
 by certain marks, called accents, placed over them. There 
 are three accents in French, viz. : 
 
 a. The acute accent ('), found over e alone; thus, e. 
 
 b. The grave accent ( v ), found over e, a, and u; thus, 
 e, a, ii. 
 
 c. The circumflex accent ( A ), found over a, e, i,.o, u; 
 thus, a, e, i, 6, -d. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 
 3. A, a, has the sound of a in add; as, face, face; 
 glace, ice; fasse, may do. In some situations it equals 
 a m father ; as,' pas, step ; bas, low. 
 
 4. A, a, with the circumflex accent, has the sound of a 
 in marl ; as, baton, stick ; dme,soul; ipdte,pie. 
 
 5. E, e, without any accent, is silent : 1st, at the end of 
 a word; as, fade, insipid; plaie, wound; aimee, loved; 
 2d, generally at the end of a syllable, and also after a 
 vowel in the body of a word ; as, rarete, scarcity ; aime- 
 ra, will love ; paierai, I shall pay. 
 
 a. E without accent, at the beginning of a word, or 
 in the body of a word before x and double consonants 
 such as cc, ff, tt, 11, ss, has the sound of the English e in 
 like position, i. e.,e in met; as, effort, effort; essai, essay ; 
 exaucer, to listen to ; necessite, necessity ; nettoyer, to 
 cleanse. 
 
 b. Again, when e without accent comes after a single 
 consonant, with which it forms the first syllable of a pol- 
 ysyllabic word, its sound is scarcely perceptible, nearly 
 like e in defy rapidly enunciated, and the accentuation or 
 stress is laid on the following syllable ; as, demander, to 
 ask (d e mande) ; velours, velvet (v e lour). 
 
§6-13.] PRONUNCIATION. 15 
 
 c. Again, in such monosyllables as je, me, le, te, de, que 
 (ke), ce, etc., e has a sound somewhat similar to er in the 
 words barber, hatter, though deeper and more prolonged. 
 
 d. Finally, e without accent, standing between two 
 consonants in the same syllable (except when followed 
 by the letters enumerated in Rule 5, a), sounds like ai in 
 fair; as, mer, sea; terre, land; vertu, virtue; chercher, 
 to seek. 
 
 0. E, e, with the acute accent, has the sound of a in 
 made; as, cite, city ; pre, meadow ; aime, loved; reveil- 
 ler, to awake. 
 
 7. E, e, with the grave accent, has the sound of e in 
 there; as, per c, father ; frere, brother ; severe, rigid. 
 
 8. E, e, with the circumflex accent, has the sound of ai 
 in fair ; as, iete, festival ; tete, head. 
 
 9. I, i, with an accent or without it, has the sound of 
 ee, or of i in machine ; a.s,\ivve,book ; ami, friend; He, 
 island. 
 
 10. O, o, without accent, has two sounds — a long, like 
 o in tone, and a short sound, like o in corps ; it has, be- 
 sides, some other shades of sound, which can only be ac- 
 quired by the living voice. 
 
 11. 6, 6, with the circumflex, has the sound of o in 
 lone ; as, depot ; roti, roast beef; role, part. 
 
 12. IT, u. This sound has no equivalent in English : it 
 is the German u, and the Danish or Swedish y. Place 
 the tongue firmly against the front teeth of the lower 
 jaw, protrude the lips, approximate the same, and try to 
 pronounce the vowel e; this will give the French u 
 sound. Repeat the process until the sound can be se- 
 cured confidently without reference to the several steps 
 indicated ; bw, drunk ; du, of the; \u, read; &uy, hard ; 
 \ue, sight. 
 
 13. TJ, u, has the same sound as u simple, pronounced 
 with additional stress ; as, fl^te^z^e / stir, sure. 
 
16 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 14-21. 
 
 14. Y, y, has the same sound as the French i, i. e., like 
 ee (see 22). 
 
 THE DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 15. Ai has the sound of a in hate; as, aurai, I shall 
 have ; balaz, broom ; aie, have. 
 
 a. When followed by one of the letters s, d, or t, ai 
 has the same sound as the French vowel e, i. e., like ai 
 in hair; as, fait, made ; maison, house ; &\ais,Ihad; 
 auraz's, etc. 
 
 Exception. Ai in faisant,faisons,faisais, with its in- 
 flections and compounds (see 356 and 356, a), has the 
 sound of e in let. Voltaire wrote these words fesant, 
 fesais, etc. 
 
 16. Au and Eau have the sound of o in note ; as, chaud, 
 warm ; beau, fine ; eau, water ; nouvecw, new. Pro- 
 nounce sho, bo, o, noo-vo. 
 
 17. Ei has the sound of ey in they ; as, pezne, trouble ; 
 Yeine, vein ; reine, queen. 
 
 18. Eu and (Eu have each the same sound, which is 
 similar to i in bird, dirge. By prolonging this sound as 
 in singing, a very good pronunciation of eu and oeu may 
 be obtained; ^eu, little; soeur, sister ; woeu, icish ; heu- 
 reux, happy. 
 
 Exception. In the inflection of the verb avoir, when- 
 ever the diphthong eu occurs, it is sounded like the sim- 
 ple vowel u (see 12). 
 
 19. Ie final is sounded like ee ; as, partze, part ; voi- 
 rie, sewer. When followed by z, d, or ds, ie must be pro- 
 nounced in two syllables: thus, riez=zri-e; pzed— pi-e ; 
 &ssieds=a-si-e ; tabKer =tab-li-e. 
 
 20. Oi has the sound of wah, or ica in was, toatch ; as, 
 roi,king; \oi,law ; poivre, pepper. See further 390. ^ 
 
 21. Ou has the sound of oo in mood ; as, nous, we; 
 vows, you. 
 
22-26. 
 
 PKONUNCIATION. 
 
 17 
 
 22. Y in the body of a word, after a vowel, has the 
 power of two i's (*"-*), the first of which forms a diph- 
 thong with the foregoing vowel, and the second begins 
 the succeeding syllable, and is sounded like the English 
 ee or y consonant; thus, crayon, pencil, is equivalent to 
 crai-ion ; abbaye, to ab-bai-i ; pays, to pai-i ; voyez, to 
 voi-ie • appuyez, to ap-pui-ie. 
 
 23. The following diphthongs and triphthongs are 
 compound : 
 
 a. la has the sound of i ( 9 ) combined w 
 
 ith that of a (3). 
 
 b. Iai 
 
 " « 
 
 ' i(9) 
 
 u < 
 
 ' " 
 
 ai (15, 15 a). 
 
 c. Iau 
 
 " ' 
 
 *• C 9 ) 
 
 U ( 
 
 t a 
 
 aw (16). 
 
 d. leu 
 
 a i 
 
 ' *('9) 
 
 " ' 
 
 i [n 
 
 eu (18). 
 
 e. lo 
 
 it i 
 
 ' »"C9) 
 
 << « 
 
 t a 
 
 o(10). 
 
 /. Oua 
 
 a t 
 
 ' ou (21) 
 
 " ' 
 
 t a 
 
 a (3). 
 
 q. Ouai 
 
 it i 
 
 ; om(21) 
 
 U ( 
 
 t a 
 
 ai (15, 15 a). 
 
 h. Oue 
 
 a t 
 
 < ow (21) 
 
 " ' 
 
 t cc 
 
 e (5 et seqq.). 
 
 i. Oui 
 
 a t 
 
 ' OK (21) 
 
 it i 
 
 ' " 
 
 i(9). 
 
 y.ua 
 
 a i 
 
 ' W (12) 
 
 it t 
 
 t a 
 
 a (3). 
 
 *. Ui 
 
 a I 
 
 u (12) 
 
 a i 
 
 t a 
 
 i (9). 
 
 J. Ue 
 
 a t 
 
 u (12) 
 
 a i 
 
 t a 
 
 e (5 ei seqq.~). 
 
 w*. Uo 
 
 it i 
 
 ; u (12) 
 
 a i 
 
 t a 
 
 o(10). 
 
 THE NASAL SOUNDS. 
 
 24. A nasal sound is indicated by the association of a 
 voicel with either of the letters m or n. 
 
 25. There are four classes of nasal sounds: 
 
 1st Class i ^ m or "^ n I characteristic vowel sound, a in marl, 
 ' \ Em or En ( nasalized. 
 
 C Im or Ym "j 
 In or Yn I characteristic vowel sound, a in add, 
 Aim or Ain j nasalized. 
 Eim or Ein 1 
 
 b. 2d Class. 
 
 c. 3d Class. 
 
 Om 
 On 
 
 d.4thC,as,|UmorU„ 
 
 characteristic vowel sound, aw in thaw, nasal- 
 ized. 
 
 characteristic vowel sound, French eu 
 (18), nasalized. 
 
 26. The only office of m or n, then, is to indicate that 
 
 the vowel preceding has merged its natural sound into 
 
 an incidental one, and that, consequently, the effort to 
 
 enunciate it (the vowel) must be made through the nares 
 
 instead of the mouth. 
 
18 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 27-32. 
 
 Let us take any combination of the first class — am, for 
 example. The sound of a is like a in marl y isolate the 
 sound — at a! Observe that the effort is simple and nat- 
 ural. Now divert the same sound, and force it through 
 the nares, or nasal passage, and you have the required 
 nasal sound. Repeat this process with an, em, en, the 
 characteristic vowel sound being identical in all the com- 
 binations of the same class. 
 
 Again, let aim represent the second class. First ob- 
 tain the characteristic vowel sound — a in add ; divert 
 this as before, and proceed in this way with the other 
 classes until you can pronounce the nasals freely and 
 easily. 
 
 27. En. When en final is preceded by i or e with the 
 acute accent, it belongs to the second class of nasals ; as, 
 mien, mine — mi-in y men, nothing — ri-in ; Europee??, 
 European — europe-in. 
 
 28. Oin. The sound of this syllable is a combination 
 of oi (20) with the second class of nasals ; as, \oin,far y 
 soi?i, care. 
 
 29. M and n cease to indicate a nasal when followed 
 by a vowel, whether they be single or doubled. The let- 
 ters composing the nasal combination then recover their 
 original or alphabetic power. Thus im, em, un are na- 
 sals; but ine, emme, uni are pronounced respectively 
 een, em, ilnee. 
 
 30. In the words ennui, ennuyeux, ennuyer, emmener, 
 enorgueillir, ennoblir, en and em are nasal, by exception, 
 though followed by a vowel. 
 
 a. The word femme, woman, wife, is pronounced/tam. 
 
 31. The termination ent in the third person plural of 
 verbs is silent ; thus, ils donned, they give, pronounce eel 
 donne y ils sdmsiient, they loved=eelz aimay. 
 
 32. In the foreign words Amen, Jerusalem, Hymen, 
 and Eden, the final syllable is pronounced as in English. 
 
§ 33-39.] PKONUNCIATION. 19 
 
 THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 Those consonants which differ in their pronunciation 
 from the English are the following : 
 
 33. C before the vowels e, i, or y has the soft sound 
 of s in say ; as, cire, wax ; scene, scene ; (7id, a proper 
 name ; ciseau, scissors. 
 
 34. C before a, o, and u, or before another consonant, 
 has the hard sound of k; as, couteau, knife ; c&mf,pe?i- 
 knife; cupide, covetous ; corne, horn; craie, chalk, 
 
 35. When C before a, o, or u should have the soft sound 
 of s in say, & sign called the cedilla (,) is placed under it ; 
 as, facon, manner ; recu, received. 
 
 36. Ch has the sound of sh in sharp ; as, cAose, thing ; 
 cAacun, each one ; cAene, oak. 
 
 a. In words adopted from the Greek and Hebrew, ch 
 is usually sounded like k; as, OArist; cAretien, Chris- 
 tian; chaos, chaos ; orcAestre, orchestra. 
 
 37. G before the vowels e or i has the sound of s in 
 'pleasure, or z in azure; as, genou, knee; ^emir, to groan; 
 g ew&, people ; songe, dream; tinge, angel. 
 
 38. G before a, o, it, or before another consonant, has 
 the same sound as g in go, give ; as,^orge, throat ; #arde, 
 guard ; grace, grace. 
 
 a. When g should have a soft sound (37) before a, o, 
 it, a mute e is placed after it, the sole use of which is to 
 direct the pronunciation of the g as indicated in rule 37 ; 
 as, rnam/ea, he ate ; pigeon, pigeon; geb\e,jail. 
 
 b. In the syllables gua, guo, gui, gue, the it is wholly 
 silent, and the g preserves its hard sound (38) even be- 
 fore e and i ; as, guerre, war ; il legua, he bequeathed, 
 pronounced ghere, and il lega ; gui, ghee. 
 
 39. Gn is pronounced like ni in union ; as, dai#7ier, to 
 deign =dain-y ay ; regne, reign. In words terminated 
 in agne and ogne, the liquid gn has a more abrupt nasal 
 
20 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 40-4J 
 
 sound ; thus, AWemagne, Germany ; JLspagne, /Spain ; 
 Cologne, Poland ; Cologne, Cologne. 
 
 40. H is mute or aspirate ; h mute is wholly omitted 
 in pronunciation; as, Aabit, coat; Aabile, skillful ; Aeu- 
 reux, happy. 
 
 41. H. When A is aspirate it is equally silent, but serves 
 to prevent the elision of a foregoing vowel (63). The fol- 
 lowing list embraces those words in which A is aspirate: 
 
 Ha 
 
 Halo 
 
 Harpe 
 
 Hetre 
 
 Houle 
 
 Hableur 
 
 Halte 
 
 Harpeau 
 
 Heurt 
 
 Houlette 
 
 Hache 
 
 Hamac 
 
 Harper 
 
 Heurtoir 
 
 Houppe 
 
 Hachis 
 
 Haquenee 
 
 Harpie 
 
 Hibou 
 
 Houppelande 
 
 Haie 
 
 Haquet 
 
 Harpin 
 
 Hie 
 
 Honrdage 
 
 Hagard 
 
 Harangue 
 
 Harpon 
 
 Hideux 
 
 Houri 
 
 Haillon 
 
 Haras 
 
 Harpormer 
 
 Hierarchic 
 
 Hourvari 
 
 Haine 
 
 Harasser 
 
 Havir 
 
 Hie 
 
 Housard 
 
 Hair 
 
 Harder 
 
 Havre 
 
 Hisser 
 
 Hussard 
 
 Haire 
 
 Hardes 
 
 He 
 
 Hoquet 
 
 Houspiller 
 
 Halage 
 
 Hardi 
 
 Heler 
 
 Hoqueton 
 
 Houx 
 
 Halbran 
 
 Hardiesse 
 
 Hennir 
 
 Horde 
 
 Houssoir 
 
 Hale 
 
 Harem 
 
 Henri 
 
 Horion 
 
 Hoyau 
 
 Haleine 
 
 Hareng 
 
 Heraut 
 
 Hors 
 
 Hameau 
 
 Haletant 
 
 Hargneux 
 
 Here 
 
 Hotte 
 
 Hainpe 
 
 Hall age 
 
 Haricot 
 
 Herisser 
 
 Hottentot 
 
 Han 
 
 Halle 
 
 Haridelle 
 
 Hernie 
 
 Houblon 
 
 Hanche 
 
 Hallebarde 
 
 Harnacheur 
 
 He'ron 
 
 Houe 
 
 II an gar 
 
 Hallier 
 
 Harnais 
 
 Heros 
 
 Houille 
 
 Hanneton 
 
 Hanscrit 
 
 Hasard 
 
 Have 
 
 Hollande 
 
 Huguenot 
 
 Hanse 
 
 Hase 
 
 Hobereau 
 
 Hola 
 
 Huit 
 
 Hansiere 
 
 Hate 
 
 Hoc 
 
 Homard 
 
 Humer 
 
 Hanter 
 
 Hauban 
 
 Hoche 
 
 Hongre 
 
 Hunier 
 
 Happe 
 
 Haubert 
 
 Hocbement 
 
 Hon nir 
 
 Huppe 
 
 Happelourde 
 
 Hausse 
 
 Hochepot 
 
 Honte 
 
 Hure 
 
 Happer 
 
 Haut 
 
 Hocher 
 
 Huche 
 
 Hurlement 
 
 Hart 
 Haloir 
 
 Hautesse 
 Haro 
 
 Hochet 
 Herse 
 
 Huee 
 
 Hutte 
 
 42. J has the sound of s in pleasure or z in azure ; as, 
 Jurer, to sioear ; ■ Jardin, garden; g before e and i has 
 precisely the same sound (37). 
 
 a. e after J~is silent ; as, Jean, John. 
 
 43. L, when not preceded by the vowel i, has the same 
 sound as in English; as, va^lee, valley ; £ampe, lamp ; 
 ba£, hall. 
 
 a. In the syllables il final and ill in the body of a 
 
§ 44-47.] PRONUNCIATION. 21 
 
 word, I is called mouille, or liquid. The sound of this 
 liquid is like the English y consonant, or y in year ; as, 
 filler, to plunder, pronounced jt?ee-yay/ eveiller, to awake, 
 pronounced ay-vai-yay. The i is silent when it is pre- 
 ceded by a vowel or more, forming with it a diphthong 
 or triphthong; as, mobile, pronounced moo-yay; trav- 
 eller, pronounced trav-ah-yay ; travail, pronounced 
 trav-a y or trav-i v , with an after-sound of y in year. 
 
 Remark. Many individuals pronounce the liquid / or II like Hi 
 in William, but the most satisfactory authority — the people of 
 Paris — declare in favor of the rule we have given. 
 
 b. In the words fil, thread; mille and mil, thousand ; 
 ville, city, I is not liquid, but has the same sound as in 
 English, 
 
 c. In the words baril, barrel; £us\\,gun; outil, tool, I 
 is silent. Fils, son, is pronounced feess. 
 
 44. Qu has the sound of 7c; as, qui (pronounced Tcee), 
 loho ; que final sounds also like 7c ; as, logig^e, logic ; 
 ban que, bank ; germani^e, Germanic. 
 
 45. R is enunciated with greater force in French than 
 in English ; at the beginning of words it is uttered with 
 a trilling sound, which may be suggested in the beating 
 of the reveille by an expert drummer ; thus, rose, rose, 
 pronounced with a vibratory motion of the tongue against 
 the roof of the mouth, r-r-r-ose ; in the body of the word 
 r is pronounced with less effort; as, miroir, looking-glass ; 
 mourir, to die. R final is sounded, except in the syllable 
 er, which Equals e. 
 
 46. S between two vowels has the sound of the English 
 z; as, rose, pronounced roze ; chose, thing, pronounced 
 shoz. In other positions like the English letter. See 
 54,59. 
 
 47. T has the sound of the same letter in English ; as, 
 tete,7iead; table, table. 
 
 a. Ti has the sound of see (not tee) in all those words 
 
22 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 48-54. 
 
 in which the same syllable in English would be pro- 
 nounced sh; as, nafa'on, nation, pronounced nassion ; am- 
 bifo'eux, ambitious, pronounced ambissieu. 
 
 b. In many words having the ending tie, the t has the 
 same sound as in Rule 47, a; as, ^Yo^hQtie,pro}jhecy, yvo- 
 novLiicedprofeci; democratic, democracy, pronounced de- 
 mocracy. 
 
 c. In other words not comprehended under Rules 47, 
 a, b, — t has its proper sound ; as, amita'e, friendship. 
 
 48. Th is never pronounced as in English ; its sound 
 is that of a simple t; as, the, tea, pronounced te. 
 
 49. X has the sound oiks ; as, luxe, luxury • sea?e, sex. 
 In the words Xavier, Xenophon, Xante, Xerxes, and 
 some other proper names, it has the sound of gz. 
 
 a. Between e initial and a vowel, x has the sound of 
 gz ; as, eseercice, exercise ; examiner, to examine. 
 
 b. X has the sound of ss in Auxerre, JBruxelles, and of 
 z in deimeme, second y smeme, sixth. 
 
 MUTE PINAL CONSONANTS. 
 
 50. The following consonants are silent when they 
 terminate a word. 
 
 51. B and D; as, plom£>, lead, pronounced plom. 
 
 bore?,' shore, " bor. 
 
 granc?, great, " gran. 
 
 chauc?, icarm, " chau. 
 
 52. C final is mute only after nj as, blanc, white, pro- 
 nounced blan; but bee, beak, pronounced bek. 
 
 53. G and P; as, sang, blood, pronounced san. 
 
 \oug, long, " Ion. 
 
 drap, cloth, " dra. 
 
 loup, vjolf " lou. 
 
 54. S and T; as, nous, toe, pronounced noit. 
 
 clous, nails, " clou, 
 
 tout, all, " tou. 
 
 fort, strong, " for. 
 
§ 55-59.] PRONUNCIATION. 23 
 
 55. X and Z ; as, deuce, two, pronounced deu. 
 
 jeua?, plays, " jeu. 
 
 asses, enough, " «sse. 
 
 56. The final syllables err, ed, and es have the sound of 
 a simple e; as, nier, to deny, pronounced nie. 
 
 ipied, foot, " j^'e. 
 
 aimez, love, " aime. 
 
 Remark. In the words amer, bitter ; enfer, Ae//; hier, 
 
 hiver, winter; her, proud, and in monosyllabic words, as ?«er, 
 uer, etc., the er is sounded like «i>. 
 
 57. The final syllable e£ has the sound of a simple e (e 
 with grave accent) ; as, 
 
 sommetf, top, pronounced somme. 
 
 joue£, toy, " joue. 
 
 foue£, whip, " /bz^. 
 
 Ps in the words teni£>s, time, and corps, 6o<$/, is silent. 
 
 IMPORTANT REMARKS. 
 
 59. When a word terminated in a consonant is imme- 
 diately followed by another word beginning with a vowel 
 or an h mute, the final consonant is pronounced with the 
 following word ; as, peut-etre, perhaps, pronounced peu- 
 te-tre ; on doit avoir, one should have, pronounced on- 
 doi-ta-voir. In such a case, however, certain consonants 
 acquire an incidental power ; thus, 
 
 x and s are both sounded like z ; 
 d is sounded like t ; 
 
 g is sounded like Jc / as, 
 
 aux amis, to the friends, pr. 6-za-mi ; 
 
 vous avez, you have, -pr.v ou-za-v e ; 
 
 grand arbre, large tree, pr. gran-tarbr ; 
 
 long attachement, long attachment, pr. lon-ka-tach-men. 
 
 a. F, in the word neuf, nine, has the sound of v before 
 a vowel or h mute ; as, 
 
 neuf hommes, nine men, pronounced neu-vome. 
 
 neuf enfants, nine children, " neu-venfan. 
 
24 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 60-62. 
 
 60. If the final consonant is a nasal {11 or m), its sound 
 is not modified, but an n is pronounced {not written) be- 
 fore the vowel which introduces the following word ; as, 
 
 mon ami, my friend ', pronounced mon nami. 
 vain espoir, vain hope, " vain nespoir. 
 
 61. The t of the conjunction et, and (pronounced e),is 
 never attached to the following word commencing with 
 a vowel or h mute ; as, cceur et ame, heart and soul, pro- 
 nounced cceur e ame. 
 
 Remark. The union of the final consonant with the in- 
 itial vowel of a following word is not without many ex- 
 ceptions, which must be learned by experience, aided by 
 a skillful instructor. As a general guide, however, it 
 may be mentioned that the final consonant is never thus 
 sounded if there be a natural interval betw T een the two 
 words, as, for example, when &pause in reading or speak- 
 ing, or a mark of punctuation, intervenes. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 DIVIS10X OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 62. The syllables of words in French are divided according to the 
 following rules : 
 
 a. When a consonant occurs between two vowels it is read with the 
 following S} T llable ; as, lever, to rise, le-ver ; mener, to bring, to lead, 
 me-ner ; e'cu, crown (coin), e'-cu ; except x ; as, exercice, exercise, ex- 
 ercice. 
 
 b. When a vowel is followed by two consonants which may be pro- 
 nounced together at the beginning of a word, both consonants belong 
 to the following syllable ; as, e-branler, re-proche, re-gret. 
 
 c. If a vowel is followed by two consonants which can not be pro- 
 nounced together at the beginning of a word, the consonants are sep- 
 arated in reading ; as, al-ler, par-ler. 
 
 d. Ch, gn, ph, th are never separated ; but sp, st, sc are separated ; 
 as, e-chapper, i-gnoble, philoso-phe, e-there ; but, res-pect, as-pirer, des- 
 tine, dis-cuter. 
 
 e. If three consonants stand together in the body of a word, the first 
 is joined to the preceding syllable, and the two others are joined to the 
 
§ 63, 64.] ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 25 
 
 following syllable ; as, esprit, rem-plir, constant ; except mp and nc ; 
 as, comp-tais, fonc-tion. 
 
 f. Compound words are separated according to their components ; 
 as, long-temps, basse-cour. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 
 
 THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 63. This sign (') is employed to indicate the suppres- 
 sion of a vowel before a word commencing with another 
 vowel or an h mute. This suppression is called elision. 
 
 a. The vowel a is elided in the article la, the, and in 
 the pronoun la, her, before an initial vowel or h mute ; 
 as, l'ame, the soul ; Thumilite, the humility — for la dme, 
 la humilite ; je l'estime, I esteem her; je l'honore, I 
 honor her — iov je la estime,je la honore. 
 
 b. The vowel e is elided in the definite article le, the, 
 and in the pronoun le, him, it; also in the words je, me, 
 te, se, ce, de, ne, que, parce que, quoique, puisque, j usque, 
 quelque, whenever e precedes an initial vowel or h mute; 
 as, l'ami, the friend ; l'homme, the man ; je l'achete, I 
 buy it ; je n'ai pas, / have not. 
 
 c. The vowel i is elided in the conjunction si, if, when 
 it comes before il, he, or ils, they ; as, s'il a, if he has ; 
 s'ils sont, if they are. 
 
 d. Before onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the vow- 
 els preceding are, by exception, never elided ; thus we 
 write and pronounce le onze, le or la onzibne. 
 
 THE HYPHEN. 
 
 64. This sign (-) is employed to separate compound words; as, arc- 
 en-ciel, rainbow ; beau-frere, brother-in-law. 
 
 a. With verbs, when the pronominal subject is placed after them ; 
 as, aime-je ; suis-je ; n'etes-vous pas ? 
 
 b. Before or after ca, ci, and la; as, venez-ca; ci-git; ci-joint; cel- 
 ui-ci ; cet homme-la ; la-bas. 
 
 c. In compound numerals up to 100; as, vingt-deux ; dix-huit; 
 quatre-vingts. 
 
 B 
 
26 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 65. 
 
 THE DIURESIS. 
 
 65. The diaeresis (••) is placed over a vowel to indicate 
 that it does not form a diphthong with the foregoing vow- 
 el ; as, hair, to hate, pronounced ah-eer, in two syllables ; 
 poele, pronounced po-ell; Moise, mo-eez. 
 
 a. Over e final the diaeresis is placed to show that the 
 vowel is silent ; as, cigue, hemlock, pronounced see-gu, not 
 seeg / aigue, pronounced ai-gil. 
 
 EXERCISES EOR PRACTICE IN PRONUNCIATION. 
 Remarks. After having thoroughly mastered the fore- 
 going rules for pronouncing the French letters, the stu- 
 dent will next proceed to the subjoined exercises. The 
 sound of u, e, eu, that of the nasals and the liquids, will 
 demand the most constant care ; but by making frequent 
 reference to the section indicated by the figures, the di- 
 rections given may be fixed thoroughly in mind. The 
 learner should not fail to remember that most final con- 
 sonants are not pronounced, except when they are fol- 
 lowed by a word commencing with a vowel or h mute. 
 
 I. Simple Voioels. 
 
 Ba (3) ; male (4) ; mal (3) ; race (5) ; chanterai ; se- 
 couer (5, b) ; verre (5, d) ; de (5, c) ; lachete (6) ; de ; 
 des (7); hetre (8); reverie; rue (12); vie (9); lire; 
 noce (10) ; hote (11) ; vu (12) ; vue ; rue ; esclave (5 a) ; 
 le favori (5, c, 3, 9) ; mur (12). 
 
 II. Diphthongs. 
 
 Mai (15) ; gai ; plaie ; aimer (56) ; vrai ; haie ; laid 
 (15, a); niais (23,5); voyait (22); beau (16); chevaux 
 (16); maux (55) ; reine (17); Seine; baleine; Dieu (18, 
 23, d) ; lieu ; lueur ; feu; beurre ; eu, had (18, JExc.) ; 
 eusse, might have ; yens, I had; sortie (19); vie; plie; 
 lie; toi (20) ; voi'e; loi; noircir; oignure (39) ; mou (21); 
 
§65.] EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION". 27 
 
 ou ; boue ; boucher (56) ; tous ; moulu ; fou ; loyal (22) ; 
 royaume; moyen* (27) ; voyez; payer; obeir; il nia (23, 
 a) ; il ria; rernua (23,,;) ; conclue (23, 1) ; nuisible (23, 
 k); luire; puis (54); depuis; duo (23, m). 
 
 III. JVasals. 
 
 Elan (25, «); viande; certainement (29); plante; dans 
 (54) ; ample ; enfant ; riant ; riante ; remplir ; emporte 
 (25, a) ; rente ; tyran ; inculte (25, b) ; impoli ; timbre ; 
 moulin ; destin ; crin ; pain ; sain ; daim ; plainte ; im- 
 possible; frein; plein ; sein; oncle; raison (25, c); monde; 
 trompe; un (25, cl) ; parfum ; emprunte ; tribun ; Meung; 
 lien (27) ; vient; italien ; combien ; gardien; sien ; coin 
 (28); foin; poindre; moindre; lointain; saine (29) ; ami; 
 italienne; ennemi; inutile; immortel; annee; sonne; une; 
 lune; ils portent (31) ; ils donnaient (31) ; ils neigeraient 
 (31) ; ils aient (31) ; ils furent (31). 
 
 IV. Consoncmts. 
 
 In this section and the following, the final consonants which 
 should remain silent are printed in italics. See 50. 
 
 Ciseaua? (33) ; cerise (5, b) ; ce (5, c) ; cela (5, b) ; cit- 
 ron ; citoyen (27) ; clerc (5, d) ; corsaire (34) ; crane ; 
 cause ; ecurie ; convive ; 9a (35) ; percoir ; garcon ; pla- 
 ca£/ rancon; facon; chair (36) ; chapeau; chatf; cheval; 
 chandelier/ genie (37) ; rage; rouge; rougeole (38, a)\ 
 linge; age; gate (38) ; goulu; aigu; gloire; tigre; gui- 
 tare (38, £) ; longueur (38,5); legue ; legua; guerir ; 
 montagne (39) ; compagnie ; mignon ; cognee ; soigne ; 
 magnanime; regne; signe; ligne; ignorance; l'habitf (pro- 
 nounced labi), (40) ; la hache (41) ; la honte ; le hasarc?/ 
 l'homme; l'humain ; le Havre; sejour (42) ; Japon; ma- 
 jeur ; joli ; jaloua; / jeune ; jaune ; bailli (43, a) ; veille ; 
 oreille ; feuille ; betail ; tailleur ; cotillon ; brillan^ / fille ; 
 sommeil ; bataille ; bouilli ; seuil ; ecureuil ; mouille ; 
 quanc? (44) ; quantite; qui; que (5, c) ; quan^/ poetique; 
 
 * En, pronounced in, because an i is implied in the y. (See 22.) 
 
28 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 65. 
 
 magnifique; toise (46) ; lese ; faisanly raison ; nuisible; 
 etudie; tu; etre; education (47, a) ; aristocratie (47, b) ; 
 partie (47, c) ; mention (47, a) ; perfection ; initial ; mi- 
 nutieua;/ Venitien. 
 
 V. Mate Consonants. 
 
 'Venc? (51) ; fond; rond ; depend; laic? y banc (52) ; 
 flancy ran<7 (53) ; pointy trap (53) ; coup; has (54) ; las; 
 presy chats/* parapluiesy honimesy detruitfy benitfy \oit; 
 doi^y boitfy soitfy mo^y to£y debutfy cheveua; (55); lieuajy 
 studieuajy douce y nes (56) ; pied; allezy parlery porter/ 
 promenery evitesy boulangery craignesy archery bonnet 
 (57); rnuetfy prometfy met; remedy strict; insect; infect. 
 
 VI. Accidental Sound of final Consonants. 
 
 When a final consonant is sounded with the next word com- 
 mencing with a vowel, or h mute, that connection will be desig- 
 nated in the following section by a ligature, thus (^). 
 
 Dans nne (59) ; tu as envie; leshommes (pronounced 
 lezome) ; des enfanfey mes encriers / pas un mot; 
 beaux arbresy belles fanes; nouveaux habits y est alio 
 (pronounced e-talle) ; jeunes agneauary touthomme; 
 tout autre; doux azur; ils on£y quand il ; rendent-ils 
 (31, 54); vend-il; long espoir; neuf encriere (59, a); 
 neuf habits y mon ancien ami (60); vilain homme ; 
 en Espagne ; en Allemagne ; rien a dire ; bon a manger ; 
 Moise (65); laiique; heroine; pa'ien (27); Saiil. 
 
 VII. Reading Lessons^ 
 
 Tout dement sentiment dans un cceur sensible. 
 La felicite est la fortune du sage, et il n'y en a point 
 sans vertu. 
 
 Homines, soyez humains, c'est votre premier devoir. 
 L'etat cle la vertu tfest pas un etat sans peine. 
 
 * Both letters are silent; s, the plural-sign, is always mute except 
 (59) when sounded with a following initial vowel. 
 
 t The verbs in this section are printed in italics. The selections 
 arc drawn from various French authors. 
 
§ 65.] EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 29 
 
 Les erreurs clu cceur so?it bien plus dangereuses que 
 celles cle 1'imagination. 
 
 L'une des marques de la mediocrite* de l'esprit, est de 
 toujours conter. 
 
 La plupart des hommes emploient (31) la premiere 
 partie de leur vie a rendre 1' autre miserable. 
 
 II est plus ordinaire de voir un amour extreme qu'une 
 parfaite amitie. 
 
 Unhomme a qui personne ne plait, est bien plus mal- 
 heureux que celui qui ne plait a personne. 
 
 Les occasions nous font connaitre aux autres et a 
 nous-memes. 
 
 L'humilite est l'autel sur lequel'Dieu vent qu'on lui 
 offre des sacrifices. 
 
 II y a des mediants qui seraient moins dangereux s'ils 
 n'avaient (31) aucune bonte. 
 
 Le clesir deparattrehahileempeche souvent dele devenir. 
 
 On ne donne rien si liberalement que ses conseils. 
 
 L'amour-propre est le plus grand de tous les flatteurs. 
 
 Les langages, a, mon gre, sbnt comme les gouverne- 
 ments: les plus parfaits sont ceux oi\ il j a le moins 
 d'arbitraire. 
 
 Les vraies richesses sont chez nous. 
 
 II y a des sottises bien habillees, comme il y a des sots 
 tres bien vetus. 
 
 Le changement de modes est l'impot que l'industrie du 
 pauvre met sur la vanite du riche. 
 
 Le plus riche des hommes, c'est l'econome ; le plus 
 pauvre, c'est l'avare. 
 
 Heureux les Etats ou les princes eommandent (31) 
 avec douceur, et ou les sujets obeissent (31) avec amour. 
 
 Un arc toujours tendu^erc? bientot sa force. 
 
 Les hommes sentent (31) mieux le besoin de guerir 
 leurs maladies que leurs erreurs. 
 
PAET SECOND. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF ETYMOLOGY 
 AND SYNTAX. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 66. There are in French nine different sorts of words 
 
 or parts of speech, viz. : 
 
 L'Article, TJie Article. 
 
 Le Substantif, The Noun or Substantive. 
 
 L'Adjectif, The Adjective. 
 
 Le Pronom, The Pronoun. 
 
 Le Verbe, The Verb. 
 
 L'Adverbe, The Adverb. 
 
 La Preposition, The Preposition. 
 
 La Conjonction, The Conjunction. 
 
 L'Interjection, The Interjection. 
 
 a. Of these parts of speech, the Article, Noun, Adjec- 
 tive, Pronoun, and Verb are capable of inflection ; and 
 the Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection 
 are not capable of inflection. 
 
 b. The inflection of a word signifies the various changes 
 which take place in its termination to express number, 
 person, case, mood, tense, etc. 
 
 c. The inflection of Verbs is called conjugation ; that 
 of Articles, Nouns, Adjectives, and Pronouns is called 
 declension. 
 
 67. There are only two Genders in French; the mas- 
 culine and the feminine. Ail inflected parts of speech 
 except the verb have the two genders ; as, 
 
 (le livre, the booh. Ha maison, the house. 
 
 Masc. -<fle bon livre, the good Fern. < la baute maison, the high 
 
 (_ book. { house 
 
 Ha mz 
 
 .4 la hi 
 { hou 
 
§ 68-73.] ARTICLE. 31 
 
 All nouns in French, whether names of animals or in- 
 animate objects — of persons or things — belong to one of 
 these two genders ; thus, le garcon, the boy, and le pa- 
 pier, the paper, are both^nasculine ; whereas la mere, the 
 mother, and la plume, the pen, are both of the feminine 
 gender. 
 
 68. All inflected parts of speech have two Numbers in 
 French, the singular and the plural. The plural is gen- 
 erally formed by adding a mute s to the singular : ami, 
 friend ; amis, friends. 
 
 69. The French language has no Cases proper, like the 
 Latin and Greek languages. The inflection of substan- 
 tives is effected by means of prepositions (generally de, 
 of, and a, to) placed before them as in English ; thus, 
 
 de la table, of the table ; a la table, to the table ; 
 du papier, of the paper ; au papier, to the paper. 
 
 70. The French grammarians style the nominative case 
 the subject; the objective case, the direct regimen ; and 
 the possessive and dative cases, the indirect regimen. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article is a word placed before a noun to limit the 
 extent of its signification. 
 
 71. There are two articles in French : the definite, cor- 
 responding to the English the, and the indefinite, corre- 
 sponding to a or an. Each article has two forms in the 
 singular, one for the masculine gender, and one for the 
 feminine. 
 
 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 72. Before a masculine substantive of the singular num- 
 ber, commencing with a consonant, le is employed ; as, 
 
 le frere, the brother / le fils, the son ; 
 
 le plat, the dish ; le pont, the bridge. 
 
 73. Before a feminine substantive of the singular num- 
 ber, commencing with a consonant, la is employed ; as, 
 
32 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 74-7 8. 
 
 la soeur, the sister ; la reine, the queen ; 
 
 la porte, the door ; la viande, the meat. 
 
 74. Before a noun commencing with a vowel or h mute, 
 both le and la lose their vowel, and put an apostrophe in 
 its stead ; as, 
 
 l'arbre, the tree, for le arbre ; 
 l'eglise, the church, for la eglise ; 
 l'homme, the man, for le homme; 
 l'histoire, the history, for la histoire. 
 Remark. This omission of a vowel before another vowel or h mute 
 is called elision. See 63. 
 
 75. Before a noun beginning with an h aspirate, the 
 vowels suffer no elision ; as, 
 
 la honte, the shame ; le heros, the hero ; 
 
 la hache, the axe ; le hibou, the owl. 
 
 For a list of those words which commence with h aspirate, see 41. 
 
 76. Before a substantive of the plural number, what- 
 ever be the initial letter, les is used for both genders ; as, 
 
 les peres, the fathers ; les plumes, the pens ; 
 
 les meres, the mothers ; les papiers, the papers. 
 
 GEF 3 The plural article les is pronounced like lay ; before a fol- 
 lowing word commencing with a vowel or h mute, like lays or 
 laze. V with an apostrophe is pronounced the same as if it 
 constituted an integral part of the following word ; thus, l'arbre 
 — larbre; l'eglise = leglise ; l'homme — lomme, etc. 
 
 77. When the preposition de, of, or a, to, immediately 
 precedes le or les, these articles are contracted with the 
 preposition so as to form one word ; therefore, 
 
 instead of de le employ du, of the ; 
 
 instead of a le employ au, to the ; 
 
 instead of de les employ des, of the (plural) ; 
 
 instead of a les employ aux, to the " as, 
 du beurre, of the butter ; des hommes, of the men ; 
 au fils, to the son / aux enfants, to the children. 
 
 78. This contraction of the article and the preposition 
 
§ 79-82.] ARTICLE. 33 
 
 takes place only with the articles le and les : never with 
 V or la. Write therefore : 
 
 cle Fhabit, of the coat ; de la plume, of the pen ; 
 
 a Fhomrne, to the man ; cle la dame, of the lady. 
 
 EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATING THE CHANGES IN THE DEF- 
 INITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Masc ( le S arcon > the boy. F ( la plume, the pen. 
 
 du gallon, of the boy. q. ' < de la plume, of the pen. 
 
 J' ( au gallon, to the boy. *~ % 9' y\\& plume, to the pen. 
 
 Masc ( les g ar 9 ons > Me boys. Fem j les plumes, the pens, 
 
 pi ' \ des garcons, of the boys, p, ' < des plumes, of the pens. 
 [ aux garcons, to the boys. m ' ( aux plumes, to the pens. 
 
 -,, I l'ami, the friend. p il'herbe, the grass. 
 
 q. a ' C ' < de l'ami, of the friend. . c- C ' \ de l'herb.e, of the grass. 
 1 "' (a l'ami, to the friend. ln ^' I a l'herbe, to the grass. 
 
 j, r I les amis, the friends. p ( les herbes, the herbs, 
 
 p. " < des amis, of the friends. „, " < des herbes, of the herbs. 
 ( aux amis, to the friends. r ' ( aux herbes, to the herbs. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 79. Before a, noun masculine of the singular number 
 tin is employed ; as, 
 
 un livre, a book ; un pere, a father ; 
 
 un homme, a man ; un ami, a friend. 
 
 80. Before a noun feminine of the singular number ane 
 is employed ; as, 
 
 une assiette, a plate ; une femme, a woman / 
 
 une hache, an axe / une herbe, an herb / 
 
 une image, an image y une livre, a pound. 
 
 81. The indefinite article has no plural number, the 
 indeterminate sense of a substantive in the plural being 
 indicated in French by the partitive expression. See 85. 
 
 82. When the preposition de, of immediately precedes 
 the indefinite article, the vowel e is elided, and its place 
 is supplied by an apostrophe ; d'un, d'une, of a or an. 
 
 B2 
 
34 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 83-85. 
 
 EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATING THE USE OF THE INDEFINITE 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 [ nn chapeau, a hat. ( une plante, a plant. 
 
 Masc. d'un chapeau, of a hat. Fern. < d'une plante, of a plant. 
 { a un chapeau, to a hat. ( a une plante, to a plant. 
 
 un eleve, a pupil. ( une amie, a friend {lady). 
 
 Masc. ■{ d'un eleve, of a pupil. Fern. < d'une amie, of a friend. 
 
 a un eleve, to a pupil. ( a une amie, to a friend. 
 
 f un habit, a coat. I une heure, an hour. 
 
 Masc. < d'un habit, of a coat. Fein. < d'une heure, of an hour. 
 
 a un habit, to a coat. ( a une heure, to an hour. 
 
 REMARKS APPLYING TO BOTH ARTICLES. 
 
 83. Sometimes the articles are employed in French 
 when they should not be translated into English ; and, 
 on the other hand, they are sometimes omitted in French 
 when the English idiom would require them ; as, 
 
 Les hommes sont mortels, men are mortal. 
 La charite est une vertu, charity is a virtue. 
 II est charpentier, he is a carpenter. 
 
 Le general Dupont, General Dupont. 
 
 84. Sometimes the definite article is employed in French 
 where the indefinite would be required in English ; as, 
 
 Le beurre se vend vingt sous la livre, butter is sold for 
 
 twenty cents a pound. 
 Cette dentelle coute cinq piastres la verge, this lace 
 costs five dollars a yard. 
 For the rules on the use of both articles, see Syntax, Part Third. 
 IGF 3 The student should now turn to the exercises in Section 
 First, Part Fourth. 
 
 THE PARTITIVE SENSE OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 85. In English, when a noun is employed in an inde- 
 terminate or indefinite sense, the expression some or any 
 is placed before it or the noun is used alone. In French, 
 however, the article, combined with the preposition de, 
 must be«used before the substantive, and it then acquires 
 the signification of some or any ; as, 
 
§ 86-88.] ARTICLE. 35 
 
 du pain, some bread ; de l'encre, some ink ; 
 de la viande, some meat ; des habits, some coats. 
 
 86. When the preposition to in English is put before a 
 noun taken partitively, in French its equivalent d is placed 
 before de la, de V, du or des ; as, 
 
 a du pain, to some bread; a de l'encre, to some ink ; 
 a de la viande, to some meal; a des habits, to some coats. 
 Thus it is evident that the partitive is simply the defin- 
 ite article joined to the preposition de, in harmony with 
 foregoing rules (77, 78), but with this distinction, that 
 its signification is changed from of the to some or any. 
 Moreover, the preposition d, with the partitive, does not 
 unite with le or les, because it is not put immediately be- 
 fore them. 
 
 The unusual juxtaposition of two prepositions, as in a du, a de, 
 & des, may be explained by understanding or supplying a term 
 which has been apparently suppressed ; thus, a du papier, to 
 some paper, is equivalent to a portion of the paper ; a des ha- 
 bits, to some coats = to a part of the coats. 
 
 87. When an adjective precedes a noun taken in a par- 
 titive sense, the preposition de, without the article, is em- 
 ployed before both ; as, 
 
 de bon pain, some good bread; not du bon pain. 
 
 de bonne viande, some good meat ; not de la bonne 
 
 viande. 
 de beaux enfants, some fine children; not des beaux 
 
 enfants. 
 a de bon pain, to some good br ead ; not a du bon pain, 
 a de bonne viande, to some good meat ; not a de la 
 
 bonne viande. 
 a de beaux habits, to some fine coats ; not a des beaux 
 
 habits. 
 
 88. If the adjective follows the noun, the article is of 
 course retained ; as, 
 
 du papier blanc, some white paper ; 
 a des habits bleus, to some blue coats ; 
 de l'encre rouge, some red ink. 
 
36 FRENCH GRAMMAR. |_§ 88. 
 
 |^T" Particular attention should be given to the two 
 last rules in the exercises for translation. 
 
 a. "When, however, the adjective unites with the fol- 
 lowing substantive to form a single idea or a compound 
 term, the full partitive is employed ; as, 
 des jeunes filles, young girls; 
 des jeunes homines, young men ; 
 des petites maisons, lunatic asylums. 
 
 Remark. To ascertain when the partitive expression ought to he 
 employed, the learner has only to put the word some or any be- 
 fore the noun to be translated into French, and if they make 
 sense, the partitive equivalent should be used ; thus, have you 
 bread, may be expressed by have you any bread, and is conse- 
 quently rendered by avez-vous du pain ? Again, I have bread, 
 or some bread, j'ai du pain. 
 
 For further explanations, see Syntax, Part Third. 
 
 EXAMPLES TO ILLUSTRATE THE USE OF THE PARTITIVE 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 Du pain, bread. De 1' en ere, ink. 
 
 A du pain, to bread. A de l'encre, to ink. 
 
 Des livres, books. Des plumes, pens. 
 
 A des livres, to books. A des plumes, to pens. 
 
 De la soie, silk. De l'herbe, grass. 
 
 A de la soie, to silk. A de l'herbe, to grass. 
 
 Des soies, silks. Des herbes, herbs. 
 
 A des soies, to silks. A des herbes, to herbs. 
 
 De bon pain, good bread. Du beurre fi'&is, fresh butter. 
 A de bon pain, to good bread. A du beurre frais, to fresh 
 J)es pommes mures, ripe ap- butter. 
 
 pies, De bons livres, good books. 
 
 A des pommes mures, to ripe A de bons livres, to good 
 
 apples. books. 
 
 IE3 53 The student should now turn to the exercises in Section 
 Second, Part Pourth. 
 
§ 89-94.] noun. 37 
 
 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 89. A noun is the name of a thing or object of thought, 
 which makes complete sense of itself independent of oth- 
 er words; as, maison, house; Paris, Paris; ville, ciYy. 
 
 a. Nouns are divided into two classes, common and proper. A 
 common noun is the name applied to a whole species or to an entire 
 class of objects; as, homme, man; femme, woman; livre, booh. A 
 proper name is the name given to an individual or to a city ; in oth- 
 er words, it is a name given to distinguish one person from other per- 
 sons, one city from other cities; as, Pierre, Peter ; Jean, John; Vien- 
 ne, Vienna; Nouvelle Orleans, New Orleans. 
 
 b. Common nouns are farther divided into jiartial collectives and 
 general collectives. 
 
 c. A partial collective noun is one that expresses apart of the col- 
 lection ; as, partie, part ; quantite, quantity ; la plupart, the greater 
 part, most. A general collective noun is one expressing an entire 
 collection; as, nation, nation ; totalite, totality; peuple, people; ar- 
 mea, army. 
 
 90. To nouns belong gender, number, and case. 
 
 GENDEE. 
 
 91. Substantives in French have two genders, the mas- 
 culine and feminine ; all nouns belong to one of these 
 two genders. (See 67.) 
 
 92. Nouns which denote male beings, as well as the 
 employments of male beings, are masculine ; as, 
 Henri, Henry. Le chapelier, the hatter. 
 
 Le pere, the father. [er. Le roi, the king. 
 XJn ebeniste, a eabinet-mak- Le chat, the cat. 
 Le lion, the lion. Le chien, the dog. 
 
 93. Nouns which denote female beings, as well as the 
 employments of female beings, are feminine ; as, 
 Marie, Mary. La femme, the looman. 
 
 La sceur, the sister. La vache, the cow. 
 
 La bergere, the shepherdess. La reine, the queen. 
 
 94. Nouns which denote the names of trees, shrubs, 
 seasons, months, and days, are masculine ; as, 
 
V 
 
 38 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 95-98. 
 
 Le chene, the oak. Le printemps, the spring. 
 
 Le rosier, the rose-bush. Le dimanche, Sunday. 
 
 95. Nouns which denote the names of metals, minerals, 
 as well as the letters of the alphabet, and all words em- 
 ployed substantively, are masculine y as, 
 Le fer, the iron. Un a, an A. 
 L'acier, the steel. Le pourquoi, the why. 
 
 96. Nouns which denote the names of virtues, vices, 
 and sciences, are feminine; as, 
 La charite, charity. La chimie, chemistry. 
 La paresse, idleness. La logique, logic. 
 
 97. Nouns ending in age, ege, an, an, in, ent, ant, Ion, 
 ron, ou, eu, et, and at, are for the most part masculine; as, 
 Le partage, the share. Le chant, the song. 
 Le cortege, the retinue. Le vallon, the dale. 
 Le marteau, the hammer. Le bucheron, the woodman. 
 Le cadran, the dial. Le cou, the neck. 
 Le moulin, the mill. Le vceu, the wish. 
 Le batiment, the building. Le soufflet, the belloics. 
 
 98. Nouns ending in ion, son, ee, eur, .ance, ence, esse, 
 ine, ique, tie, te, and ure, are generally feminine ; as, 
 La passion, {lassion. La bonte, goodness. 
 La journee, the day. La diligence, diligence. 
 La lenteur, slowness. La cuisine, kitchen. 
 La vengeance, vengeance. La moitie, the half. 
 
 The above general rules for determining the gender of French 
 nouns are subject to many exceptions, which, however, will pre- 
 sent no serious obstacle to the student, provided he accustom 
 himself to associate the article with every substantive which 
 he commits to memory. In case the noun commences with a 
 vowel or an h mute, the definite article will, of course, fail to 
 guide him, since it is the same for both genders. To obviate 
 this embarrassment, the learner has only to employ the indefin- 
 ite article, which will point out the gender unequivocally ; thus, 
 un enfant, a (inale) child; une enfant, a {female) child; une 
 amitie, a friendship ; since V enfant or V amine would fail to point 
 out the gender. 
 
 98 bis. Some nouns have both genders, with a different 
 
§ 99-101.] noun. 39 
 
 signification under each ; the following embrace the prin- 
 cipal : 
 
 Le garde, the guard (person). La garde, the guard (act). 
 Le meiuoire, the memoir. La memoire, the memory. 
 Le voile, the veil. La voile, the sail. 
 
 Le tour, the turn ; trick. La tour, the tower. 
 Le mode, the mood. La mode, the fashion. 
 
 Le manche, the handle. La manche, the sleeve. 
 
 Le livre, the book. La livre, the pound. 
 
 Le poste, the post; position. La poste, the post-office. 
 Le page, the page (servant). lLa,ipage,thepage (of a book). 
 Un enseigne, an ensign. Une enseigne, a sign. 
 
 a. The noun gens, people., is masculine ; adjectives, however, which 
 have a special form for the feminine, agree with it in the feminine, 
 provided they stand before it ; as, les bonnes gens, the good people. 
 See further 903. J 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 99. Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the 
 plural. The singular number denotes but one object ; 
 as, le livre, the book. The plural number indicates more 
 objects than one ; as, les livres, the books. 
 
 Formation of the Plural. . 
 
 100. The plural of French nouns is formed, in general, 
 by the addition of a mute s to the singular ; as, 
 
 Le pupitre, the desk. Les pupitres, the desks. 
 
 La main, the hand. Les mains, the hands. 
 
 a. In the plural of words of more than one syllable, ending in ant 
 or ent, many authors and publishers reject the t ; thus they write and 
 print enfans, parens, instead of en/ants and parents. This exception has 
 its origin in old French use, which regularly rejected the t before s in 
 the formation of the plural. The monosyllable gent is still written gens 
 in the plural. These remarks apply also to adjectives and participles 
 in ant or ent. 
 
 101. Nouns ending in the singular in s, x, or z, remain 
 unchanged in the plural ; as, 
 
 W 
 
40 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 102-104. 
 
 Le nez, the nose. Les nez, the noses. 
 
 La voix, the voice. Les voix, the voices. 
 
 Le pas, the step. Les pas, the steps. 
 
 102. Nouns ending in au,eau,eu, or ceu,in the singu- 
 lar, add an x to form the plural ; as, 
 
 Le chapeau, the hat. Les chapeaux, the hats. 
 
 Le cadeau, the gift. Les cadeaux, the gifts. 
 
 Le voeu, the loish. Les voeux, the wishes. 
 
 Le feu, the fire. Les feux, the fires. 
 
 103. The following nouns in ou add x to form the plu- 
 ral. All others in ou follow the general rule (100). 
 
 Le bijou, the jewel. Les bijoux, the jewels. 
 
 Le caillou, the pebble. Les cailloux, the pebbles. 
 
 Le chou, the cabbage. Les choux, the cabbages. 
 
 Le genou, the knee. Les genoux, the knees. 
 
 Le hibou, the owl. Les hiboux, the owls. 
 
 Le joujou, £Ae toy. Les joujoux, ^Ae toys. 
 
 Le pou, the louse. Les poux, the lice. 
 
 104. Nouns terminated in al and c«7, form their plural 
 by changing those endings into aux ; as, 
 
 Le cheval, the horse. Les chevaux, the horses. 
 
 Le bail, the lease. Les baux, the leases. 
 
 Le travail, the toil. Les travaux, the toils. 
 
 a. Ciel, heaven, makes cieux in the plural. 
 
 (Eil, eye, makes yei^ in the plural [pronounced ee-o'\ 
 Aieul, ancestor, makes a'leux in the plural. 
 
 b. Proper names remain unchanged in the plural ; as, les deux Ca- 
 ton, the two Catos ; les deux Corneille, the two Corneilles ; there are, 
 however, some exceptions, e. g., the names of certain families and char- 
 acters well known in histoiy ; as, les Horaces et les Curiaces, the Ho- 
 ratii and Curiatii ; les Bourbons, the Bourbons; les Gracques, the Grac- 
 chi, etc. 
 
 c. The following substantives have, in the plural, an additional sig- 
 nification : 
 
 Le ciseau, the chisel. Les ciseaux, the scissors. 
 
 Le fer, the iron. Les fers, the fetters. + 
 
Les e'tats, dominions. 
 
 § 105-107.] noun. 41 
 
 Le gage, the pledge. Les gages, the ivages. 
 
 La lettre, the letter. Les lettres, literature. 
 
 Un Etat, a State. 
 
 Un etat, a condition. 
 
 La lunette, the telescope. Les lunettes, spectacles. 
 
 L'aboi, m., the barking. Les abois, the last gasp. 
 
 CASE. 
 
 105. The English possessive case is expressed in 
 French by the preposition de, of, placed before the name 
 of the possessor and after the name of the object pos- 
 sessed; as, 
 
 Le chapeau du garc on, the boy's hat or the hat of the 
 
 boy. 
 Le ble de l'epicier, the grocer's wheat or the wheat of 
 
 the grocer. 
 La plume de Guillaume, William's pen or the pen of 
 
 William. 
 La destinee de l'homme, maris destiny or the destiny 
 
 of man. 
 
 106. The name of the substance or material of which a 
 thing is made is placed after the thing specified, and con- 
 nected with it by the preposition de; as, 
 
 Une maison de pierre, a stone house; a house of stone. 
 Un habit de drap, a cloth coat ; a coat of cloth. 
 Une montre d'or, a gold watch / a icatch of gold. 
 a. The preposition de loses its vowel before a word 
 commencing with a vowel or h mute. (See 63, b) 
 
 107. Compound nouns, and nouns which are* used as 
 proper adjectives in English, must, in French, be con- 
 strued according to the foregoing rule ; as, 
 
 Le port de mer, the sea-port ; not le mer-port. 
 Le chemin de fer, the railroad ; the road of iron. 
 La ISTouvelle de Londres, the London News. 
 
 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Third, Part Fourth. 
 
42 French grammar: [§ 108-113. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 108. An Adjective is a word which expresses the qual- 
 ity of an object. It always takes the gender and num- 
 ber of the noun or pronoun to which it relates. 
 
 109. Adjectives in French have two numbers, the sin- 
 gular and the plural; as, 
 
 Un grand enfant, a large or tall child. 
 De grands enfants, large or tall children. 
 
 PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 110. The plural of adjectives, like that of substantives, 
 is, in genera], formed by adding an s to the singular ; as, 
 Le bon livre, the good book. De bons livres, good books. 
 Le petit arbre, the small tree. De petits arbres, small trees. 
 
 111. Adjectives terminated in the singular in s or x y 
 make no change in the plural ; as, 
 
 Un gros homme, a large De gros hommes, large men. 
 man-. 
 
 Un pere jaloux, a jealous Des peres ]&\o\\x, jealous fa- 
 father, thers. 
 
 112. Adjectives terminated in eau form their jDlural by 
 adding x to the singular ; as, 
 
 Le beau garcon, the hand- Les beaux garcons, the fine 
 
 some boy. boys. 
 
 Le nouveau livre, the new Les nouveaux livres, the new 
 
 booh. boohs. 
 
 113. Adjectives terminated in al form their plural by 
 changing al into aux ; as, 
 
 Un chemin egal, an even Des chemins egaux, even 
 
 road. roads. 
 
 Un mouvement general, a Des mouvements generaux, 
 
 general movement. general movements. 
 
 a. Several adjectives in al form their plural by adding 
 s to the singular. The principal are : amical, colossal) 
 
§ 114-116.] ADJECTIVE. 43 
 
 frugal, glacial, naval, final, fatal, initial, labial, medial, 
 nasal, natal, and theatral. 
 
 FEMININE GENDER. 
 
 114. Adjectives in French have two genders, the Mas- 
 culine and Feminine, according to the gender of the noun 
 with which they agree ; as, 
 
 Le raauvais voisin, the bad La mauvaise encre, the bad 
 
 neighbor. ink. 
 
 Le joli garcon, the pretty Les jolies iilles, the pretty 
 
 boy. daughters. 
 
 115. When the adjective ends in e silent, the feminine 
 remains without change ; as, 
 
 Un fils aimable, an amiable son. 
 
 Une fille aimable, an amiable daughter. 
 
 116. When the adjective ends in a consonant, or in 
 any other vowel than e silent, the feminine is formed by 
 the addition of an e without accent ; as, 
 
 Un corps sain, a healthy Une nature saine, a ichole- 
 body. some nature. 
 
 Un homme poli, a polite Une femme polie, a polite 
 man. woman. 
 
 Un homme d'un esprit pur, a man of pure mind. 
 
 Un verre d'eau pure, a glass of pure water. 
 
 Un garcon sense, an Intel- Une fille sensee, an intelli- 
 gent boy. gent girl. 
 
 a. Adjectives ending in er, besides adding an e mute 
 to form the feminine, require a grave accent over the first 
 e in the masculine termination ; as, 
 
 Mon cher ami, my dear Ma chere amie, my dear 
 
 friend. friend. 
 
 Un corps leger, a light Monnaie legere, light coin. 
 
 body. 
 
 b. The adjective grand, fern, grande, was invariable in 
 Old French (langue d'ohl), and is still so employed be- 
 
44 • FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 117-120. 
 
 fore certain feminine nouns. In these cases, however, 
 it is incorrectly accompanied by an apostrophe ; thus, 
 grand' mere, grandmother ; grand' peine, great difficul- 
 ty. Grand'' so written never assumes the plural sign ; 
 as, les grand' meres, the grandmothers. 
 
 117. Adjectives, which terminate in the masculine in 
 el, eil, en, on, et, as and os, form their feminine by doub- 
 ling the final consonant and adding mute e y as, 
 
 3£asc, cruel; fern., cruelle, cruel. 
 " bon ; " bonne, good. 
 " bas; " basse, low. 
 
 " ancien ; " ancienne, ancient. 
 " pareil; " pareille, like. 
 " sujet; " sujette, subject. 
 " gros ; " grosse, big. 
 
 118. Adjectives ending in the masculine in fov x form 
 the feminine by changing f into v, and x into s, at the 
 same time adding an e mute; as, 
 
 Naif, artless ; feni., naive. 
 
 Neuf, new y " neuve, 
 
 Heureux, happy y " heureuse. 
 
 Ambitieux, ambitious y " ambitieuse. 
 
 119. Adjectives ending in the masculine in teur, not 
 derived from verbs, form their feminine by changing that 
 termination into trice/ as, 
 
 A&ulateur, flattering; fern., adulatrice. 
 Consolateur, consoling y " consolatrice. 
 a. Those ending in eur, derived from verbs, change 
 that termination into euse to form the feminine ; as, 
 Trompeur, deceitful (from tromper, to deceive) y fern., 
 trompeuse. 
 
 120. The following five adjectives have another form 
 in the masculine singidar, which is employed when the 
 substantive following begins with a vowel or h mute; 
 thus: 
 
§ 121-123.] 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 45 
 
 ► before a vowel or h mute, < 
 
 j 
 
 bel. 
 
 nouvel. 
 fol. 
 mol. 
 „ vieil; as, 
 
 Beau, beautifuV 
 Nouveati, new 
 Fon, insane 
 Mou, soft 
 Vieux, old 
 
 Un bel arbre, a fine tree ; not beau arbre. 
 
 Un nouvel encrier, a new inkstand ; not nouveau en- 
 crier. 
 
 Un fol espoir, a foolish hope ; not fou espoir. 
 
 Le mol edredon, the soft down / not mou edredon. 
 
 Un vieil habit, an old coat ; occasionally vieux habit. 
 
 121. The feminine of these five adjectives is made from 
 the second masculine form by the addition of le ; as, 
 
 Bel 
 
 Nouvel 
 
 Fol 
 
 Mol 
 
 Vieil 
 
 become in the feminine < 
 
 belle, 
 nouvelle. 
 folle. 
 molle. 
 ^ vieille. 
 
 122. The plural of adjectives in the feminine gender 
 is formed, without exception, by adding an s to the sin- 
 gular; as, 
 
 3fasc, bon, good ; fern., bonne ; plar. masc, bons ; 
 plur. fern., bonnes. 
 
 Jfasc, ]di\, pretty / fern., jolie ; plur. masc, jolis ; plur. 
 fern., jolies. 
 
 3fasc, grand, great / fern., grande ; plur. masc, grands ; 
 plur.fem., grandes. 
 
 123. The following embrace the exceptions to all the 
 foregoing rules on the formation of the feminine gender 
 of adjectives : 
 
 Secret, secret ; fern., secrete. 
 
 Discret, discreet • 
 
 u 
 
 discrete. 
 
 Inquiet, restless ; 
 Complet, complete ; 
 Blanc, ichite ; 
 
 a 
 u 
 u 
 
 inquiete. 
 complete 
 blanche. 
 
46 
 
 FRENCH GEAMHAE. 
 
 [§ 124- 
 
 Doux, 
 
 sweet y 
 
 fern. 
 
 , douce. 
 
 Frais, 
 
 fresh y 
 
 u 
 
 fraiche. 
 
 Franc, 
 
 frank y 
 
 u 
 
 franche. 
 
 Faux, 
 
 false y 
 
 u 
 
 fausse. 
 
 Long, 
 
 long y 
 
 it 
 
 . longue. 
 
 Roux, 
 
 red ; 
 
 u 
 
 rousse. 
 
 Sec, 
 
 dry ; 
 
 u 
 
 seche. 
 
 Caduc, 
 
 decrepit y 
 
 a 
 
 cad u que. 
 
 Mai in, 
 
 malicious 
 
 > 
 
 raaligne. 
 
 Benin, 
 
 benign y 
 
 u 
 
 benigne. 
 
 Favori. 
 
 ; favorite y 
 
 a 
 
 favorite. 
 
 Grec, 
 
 Greek y 
 
 a 
 
 grecque. 
 
 Public, 
 
 public y 
 
 a- 
 
 publique. 
 
 Turc, 
 
 Turkish y 
 
 u 
 
 turque. 
 
 124. Adjectives may be employed substantively, the 
 noun being understood ; as, 
 
 Le malheureux, the unfortunate (man.) 
 La malheureuse, the unfortunate (woman). 
 Le pauvre, the poor (man). 
 La pauvre, the poor (woman). 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 The learner should note the effect of the inflectional e 
 on the pronunciation of the feminine of adjectives: 
 
 1. It restores the nasals to their alphabetic sound ; as, 
 fin (nasal) ; but fine (not nasal) — like feen. 
 
 bon (?iasal) ; but bonne (not nasal) — like bone. 
 
 2. It renders the mute consonants vocal y as, 
 bas (s mute) ; but basse — like bass. 
 
 grand (^mute) ; but grande — like gra'd (a nasal). 
 complet (t mute); but complete — like ko"- plait' 
 (ko" nasal). 
 
 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Fourth, Part Fourth. 
 
§ 125-131.] ADJECTIVE. 47 
 
 DEGREES OP COMPARISON. 
 
 125. Iii English, adjectives are compared in two ways : 
 by affixing the terminations er, est to the positive, or by 
 placing the adverbs more, most before the adjective. In 
 French the latter mode alone is employed. 
 
 126. The positive 'degree is the adjective in its simplest 
 form; as, grand, great; sage,vnse. 
 
 127. The comparative degree is of three sorts, accord- 
 ing as it expresses the relation of equality, superiority, 
 or inferiority. 
 
 127. The comparative of equality is formed by placing 
 aussi (so, as) before the adjective, and que (as) after it; 
 as, 
 
 Charles est aussi sage que mon frere, Charles is as wise 
 
 as my brother. 
 Le riche est aussi heureux que le pauvre (124), the rich 
 
 (man) is as happy as the poor {man). 
 
 128. The comparative of superiority is formed by plac- 
 ing plus (more) before the adjective, and que (than) after 
 it; as, 
 
 Jean est plus grand que Guillaume, John is taller than 
 
 William. 
 II est plus riche que sort voisin, he is richer than his 
 
 neighbor. 
 
 129. The comparative of inferiority is formed by plac- 
 ing moins (less) before the adjective, and que (than) after 
 it; as, 
 
 Mon ami est moins content que vous, my friend is less 
 
 contented than you. 
 II est moins savant que moi, he is less learned than I. 
 
 130. The superlative degree is of two sorts, the relative 
 and the absolute. 
 
 131. The superlative relative is formed by placing the 
 
48 FEENCH GRAMMAE. [§ 132-134. 
 
 definite article or & possessive pronoun before the com- 
 parative of superiority or inferiority ; as, 
 
 Le plus grand garcon de la ville, the tallest boy in the 
 
 city. 
 La plus belle fille du monde, the handsomest girl in the 
 
 icorld. 
 Les plus douces poires du marche, the sweetest pears in 
 
 the market. 
 Mon plus sage ami, my wisest friend. 
 a. The adjective may follow the substantive; in that 
 case, the article must be repeated before the noun and be- 
 fore the superlative ; as, 
 
 La somme la plus considerable, the most considerable 
 
 sum. 
 Les poires les plus douces, the sweetest pears. 
 
 132. The superlative absolute is formed by placing be- 
 fore the adjective one of the words tres, bien, fort, very ; 
 as, 
 
 Tres petit, very small. Bien joli, quite pretty. 
 
 Fort content, very well satisfied. 
 
 133. The following adjectives form their comparative 
 and superlative irregularly : 
 
 ~Bon,good. Meilleur, better. Le meilleur, best. 
 
 Mauvais, bad. Pire, icorse, Le pire, toorst. 
 
 Petit, little. Moindre, less. Le raoindre, least, 
 
 a. These adjectives are regularly inflected; as, meilleur, 
 fern., meilleure ; plur., meiWem^plur.fem., meilleurcs; la 
 meilleure ; les meilleurs, etc. 
 
 134. Than before a numeral is expressed by de in j)lace 
 of que; as, 
 
 Plus de dix hommes, more than ten men. 
 Moins de six plumes, fewer than six pens. 
 
 g§° The strident should now turn to the Exercises in Section ? 
 Fifth, Part Fourth. 
 
§ 136.] NUMERALS. m 51 
 
 REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 
 
 136. The ordinals premier and second (c=g) are in- 
 flected like any adjective, and agree in gender and num- 
 ber with the noun which they limit ; as, 
 
 Le premier jour de mars, the first day of March. 
 La premiere arrivee, the first arrival. 
 Le second volume, the second volume. 
 La seconde fois, the second time. 
 a. The cardinal mille is written mil in the computation 
 of years, when followed by another numeral. The En- 
 glish expression " in the year" is rendered in French by 
 en; if the number be less than a hundred, by Van ; as, 
 Mil huit cent soixante-deux, eighteen hundred and six- 
 ty-two. 
 Cent mille soldats, one hundred thousand soldiers. 
 En mil quatre-vingt-seize, in the year 1096. 
 L'an soixante-dix apres Jesus Christ, A.D. 70. 
 o. The numerals quatre-vingt and cent (when there are 
 several hundreds) assume an s when immediately fol- 
 lowed by a substantive expressed or implied ; as, 
 Quatre-vingts soldats, eighty soldiers. 
 Deux cents hommes, two hundred men ; 
 
 but, 
 Quatre-vingt-trois, eighty-three. 
 Deux cent vingt, two hundred and twenty. 
 c. In giving the day of the month, the cardinal num- 
 bers must be employed in French ; not the ordinals, as 
 in English, except le premier ; as, 
 
 Le deux avril (av-reeV), the second of April. 
 
 Le quatre juillet (zhoo-ee-yai'), the fourth of July ; 
 
 but, 
 Le premier juin (zhoo-a'), the first of June. 
 $dMr* The French employ no preposition in such cases : 
 the first June. 
 
52 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 137-139. 
 
 d. The cardinals are likewise employed in French in 
 speaking of sovereigns and princes, with the exception 
 of premier, and sometimes second ; as, 
 
 Charles douze, Charles XII. 
 Louis quatorze, Louis XIV. 
 Henri quatre, Henry IV. 
 
 but, 
 Francois premier, Francis I. 
 Charles second or deux, Charles II. 
 
 e. In speaking of Charles the Fifth (of Germany), and 
 of Pope Sixtus the Fifth, the Spanish or Italian word 
 quinto is employed, corrupted into quint (pronounced 
 7id~) ; as, Charles-Quint, Charles the Fifth. 
 
 Sixte-Quint, Sixtus t/ie Fifth. 
 E^T" The English the in such cases is not employed in 
 French. 
 
 2P For a further distribution of the numerals, see Syntax, Part 
 
 Third. 
 Skip 3 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Sixth, Part Fourth. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 137. Pronouns are words used to take the place of 
 nouns, to avoid the repetition of the latter. Pronouns 
 have three persons : the first person denotes the person 
 speaking; as, Je, J, Nous, toe / the second, the person or 
 thing spoken to ; as, Tu, thou, Vous, you ; and the third, 
 the person or thing spoken of; as, II, he, lis, they. 
 
 138. Pronouns are divided into six different classes, 
 viz. : personal, possessive, relative, interrogative, demon- 
 strative, and indefinite. Each of these classes will be 
 treated in order. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 139. Personal pronouns are those which are employed 
 to denote the names of persons or things. 
 
140-145.] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 53 
 
 140. In French there are two sorts of personal pro- 
 nouns, the conjunctive and disjunctive : the conjunctive 
 pronouns are known by their direct association with a 
 verb with which they agree; the disjunctive pronouns 
 are employed when the verb with which they agree is 
 either understood, or separated from them by other 
 words. 
 
 141. The conjunctive personal pronouns are : Je, I ; 
 Tu,thou; II, he, it; Elle, she, it; Nous, we; Vous, you; 
 lis, they {masc.) ; Elles, they {fern.) ; Se, one's self, him- 
 self, herself itself themselves. 
 
 142. The disjunctive personal pronouns are: Moi, I; 
 Toi, thou ; Lui, he ; Elle, she ; Nous, we ; Vous, you ; 
 Eux, they [masc) ; Elles, they {fern) ; Soi, one's self 
 etc. 
 
 143. The conjunctive personal pronouns have a subject 
 {^nominative case) and two objects — the direct and indi- 
 rect ; the direct object is governed by the verb directly ; 
 that is, no preposition is expressed or implied between 
 the verb and its pronoun-object; the indirect object is, 
 in English, governed by the preposition to, expressed or 
 understood. 
 
 144. The following is a tabular view of the conjunctive 
 personal pronouns, with their inflections : 
 
 Nominative. 
 Direct Ob. 
 
 Indirect Ob. 
 
 Nominative. 
 Direct Ob. 
 
 Indirect Ob. 
 
 Singular. 
 Je, /. 
 Me, me. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nous, we. 
 Nous, us. 
 
 Singular. 
 Tu, thou. 
 Te, thee. 
 
 Te, to thee. 
 
 Plural. 
 Vous, you. 
 Vous, you. 
 
 Vous, to you. 
 
 Person, Masc 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II, he, it. 
 
 Le, /urn, it. 
 
 Lui, to him. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 lis, they. 
 Les, them. 
 
 Leur, to them. 
 
 3d Person, Fern. 
 
 Singular. 
 Elle, she.it. 
 La, her, it. 
 
 Lui, to her. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Elles, they. 
 Les, them. 
 
 Leur, to them. 
 
 Reflect. Pron. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Wanting. 
 Se, one's 
 self. 
 Se, to one\ 
 
 Plural. 
 Wanting. 
 '■>&. them- 
 
 Se, to them- 
 selves. 
 
 145. TJ^e nominative case of conjunctive personal pro- 
 nouns is placed before the verb with which it agrees, ex- 
 
54 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 146-148. 
 
 cept in interrogative sentences, when it is placed imme- 
 diately after the verb, with a hyphen. See 64, a. 
 
 Je lis, I read. Lis-je? do I read? 
 
 J'ai, I have. Ai-j e ? have I? 
 
 Je vois, I see. Vois-je? do I see? 
 
 a. The pronouns je, one, te, le, la, and se, lose their vow- 
 el whenever they stand before another word commencing 
 with a vowel or h mate. See 63, a, b. 
 
 J'aime, 1 love, <*- f Je aime. 
 
 II m'obeit, he obeys me, ^ j II me obeit. 
 
 Us t'honorent, they honor thee, g <^ Us te honorent. 
 
 Nous l'estimons, ice esteem him, her, or it, to J Nous le or la estimons. 
 
 11 s'approche, he draws {himself) near, -2 [il se approche. 
 
 146. The tico objective cases (direct and indirect) of 
 the conjunctive personal pronouns are placed before the 
 verb which governs them ; as, 
 
 II me voit, he sees me. Me voit-il ? does he see me ? 
 
 Je vous entends, I hear you. Vous entends-je ? do J hear 
 
 you ? 
 J e te donne, I give (to) you. Ne me donne pas, do not 
 
 give me. 
 
 a. If the verb, however, is in the imperative mood, 
 without a negative, the pronouns in the objective cases 
 are placed after the verb, with a hyphen ; in this case 
 me becomes moi and te becomes toi ; as, 
 
 Donnez-moi, give me. Amuse-toi, amuse thyself. 
 
 Cherchez-le, seek him. Parlez-lui, speak to him. 
 
 Estimez-la, esteem her. Dites-leur, say to them. 
 
 Pretez-les, lend them. Donnez-nous, give (to) us. 
 
 147. The direct objective case is employed when the 
 pronoun is directly governed by the verb, that is, when 
 no preposition is understood before the pronoun ; as, 
 Je le vois, I see him. Je la vois, I see her. 
 
 Je vous vois, I see you. Je les vois, I see them. 
 
 II me voit, he sees me. L'entends-je? do I hear him? 
 
 148. The indirect objective is employed when the pro- 
 
§ 149-152.] pkoxouns. 55 
 
 noun is indirectly governed by the verb, that is, when in 
 English the preposition to would be understood or ex- 
 pressed before the pronoun ; as, 
 II lui donne, he gives (to) Je ltd ecris, I write to her. 
 
 him,. 
 II me parle, he sjieaks to me. II leur donne, he gives (to) 
 
 them. 
 Je t' ecris, J write to thee. II nous prete, he lends (to) 
 
 us. 
 
 149. If tioo pronouns in the objective case are govern- 
 ed by the same verb, the indirect objective is placed 
 first; as, 
 
 II me le donna, he gave it Je te la dirai, I will tell it 
 
 (to) me. (to) thee. 
 
 Je vous le prete, J lend it II nous les donne, he gives 
 
 to you. them to us. 
 
 150. The pronouns lui and leur, however, are, by ex- 
 ception, placed after pronouns in the direct objective 
 case ; as, 
 
 II le leur donna, he gave it to them. 
 II les lui preta, he lent them to him. 
 
 151. If the verb is employed in the imperative mood, 
 without a negation, the pronoun in the direct objective 
 case is put before the pronoun in the indirect objective; 
 this rule is without exception ; as, 
 Donnez-le-moi, give it (to) Pretez-la-lui, lend it to her. 
 
 me. 
 Dites-le-leur, tell it (to) them. Envoyez-les-nous, send them 
 
 to us. 
 a. But if the verb in the imperative mood be accompa- 
 nied by a negation, the objective pronouns are arranged 
 in the order required by the regular rule (149, 150) ; as, 
 "Ne me le pretez pas, do not lend it to me. 
 Ne le leur donne pas, do not give it to them. 
 
 152. Since there are but two genders in French, the 
 
5Q 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 153-157. 
 
 pronoun it is expressed by either the masculine or femi- 
 nine conjunctive pronoun, according to the gender of the 
 noun to which reference is made ; as, 
 
 Voyez-vous le livre ? Do you see the book f 
 
 Je le vois, I see it. Voyez-vous la plume ? Do you 
 
 see the pen f 
 Je la vois, I see it. Elle est petite, it (la plume) is 
 small. 
 
 153. The pronouns lui, to him, to her, and leur, to 
 them, refer to persons and animate objects only ; when 
 reference is made to things, y is employed. See 183. 
 
 154. The following is a tabular view of the disjunctive 
 personal pronouns, and their inflection : 
 
 1st 
 
 2d Person. 
 
 Person, Masc. 
 
 3d Person, Fern. 
 
 Reflect. 
 
 First. 
 
 Second. 
 Third.% 
 
 First. 
 
 Second. 
 
 Third. 
 
 Singular. 
 Moi, J. 
 De moi, of me. 
 S A moi, to vie. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nous, we. 
 Denous, of us. 
 \A. nous, to us. 
 
 Singular. 
 Toi, thou. 
 De toi, of thee. 
 V A toi, to thee. 
 
 Plural. 
 Vous, you. 
 De vous, of you. 
 N A vous, to you. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lui, he. 
 De lui, of him. 
 S A lui, to him. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Eux, they. 
 D'eux, of them. 
 X A eux, to them. 
 
 Singular 
 
 Elle, she, it. 
 D'elle, of her. 
 N A elle, to her. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Elles, they. 
 D'elles, of them. 
 V A elles, to them. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Soi. 
 Desoi. 
 N A soi. 
 
 Plural. 
 Soi. 
 De soi. 
 X A soi. 
 
 155. The disjunctive personal pronouns in the second 
 and third cases may be used after any preposition, as 
 well as after de and d; the conjunctive personal pro- 
 nouns are not employed with a preposition expressed ; 
 
 Pour moi, for me. Avec lui, with him. 
 
 Contre toi, against thee. Entre nous, between us. 
 
 156. They are also employed after conjunctions; as, 
 Vous et lui, you and he. Autant que moi, as much as I. 
 Nous ou eux, we or they. Mieux qu'elle, better than she. 
 
 157. The disjunctive personal pronouns are further em- 
 ployed in an answer to which the verb of the question 
 must be supplied ; as, 
 
 Qui est venu ? Who has come f Moi, I. 
 A qui ai-je donne la lettre? To whom have I given 
 the letter f A moi, to me. 
 
§ 158-161.] PRONOUNS. 51 
 
 158. The disjunctives are also employed when particu- 
 lar emphasis is laid on the pronoun ; as, 
 
 Moi, je l'ai dit, J said it, i. e., it is J who, etc. 
 In this case the disjunctive pronoun is redundant in 
 English, and is either omitted in translating, or it may 
 be expressed by circumlocution. 
 
 ^5T The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Seventh, Part Fourth. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 A possessive pronoun is a word used to determine a 
 certain object and to express the idea of possession. 
 
 159. There are two sorts of possessive pronouns, the 
 conjunctive and the absolute / the first are always accom- 
 panied by a noun, before which they stand, and the sec- 
 ond are not joined to a substantive, but are used with 
 the definite article. 
 
 160. The conjunctive possessive pronouns are, mon, 
 my ; ton, thy ; son, his, her • notre, our ; votre, your ; 
 leur, their. They are inflected as follows : 
 
 
 Gender. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Sing. No. 
 Plur. No. 
 
 Sing. No. 
 Plur. No. 
 
 Moil. 
 Mes. 
 
 Ma. 
 Mes. 
 
 Ton. 
 Tes. 
 
 Ta. 
 
 Tes. 
 
 Son. 
 Ses. 
 
 Sa. 
 
 Ses. 
 
 Masc. | Fern. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Notre. 
 
 Nos. 
 
 Notre. 
 
 Nos. 
 
 Votre. 
 Vos. 
 
 Votre. 
 
 Vos. 
 
 Leur. 
 Leurs. 
 
 Leur. 
 Leurs. 
 
 161. These pronouns always stand before the noun 
 which they qualify, and agree with it in gender and num- 
 ber/ as, 
 
 Mon pere, my father. Ma mere, my mother. 
 
 Son livre, his or her book. Sa plume, his or her pen. 
 De ses soeurs, of his or her A leurs meres, to their moth- 
 sisters, ers. 
 
 Remark. It will be seen by the above examples that the possess- 
 ive pronoun agrees in gender and number with the noun/o/- 
 
 C2 
 
58 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 '[§ 162-164. 
 
 lowing, or the possessor, and not with the object possessed, as 
 in English. This is a very important idiomatic difference be- 
 tween the two languages, and should be thoroughly compre- 
 hended. 
 
 162. If the feminine possessive pronouns ma, ta, sa, 
 come before a feminine noun commencing with a vowel 
 or h mute, the masculine forms of the possessive {mon, 
 ton, son) are employed ; this irregularity becomes neces- 
 sary to avoid the disagreeable sound produced by the 
 approximation of two vowels ; thus we say, 
 
 Mon ame, my soul, and not ma dme. 
 
 Son opinion, his opinion, " sa opinion. 
 
 Ton habitude, thy custom, " ta habitude. 
 a. In French the conjunctive possessive pronouns must 
 be repeated before each substantive ; as, 
 
 Mon'livre, ma plume et mes papiers sont sur la table, 
 
 my book, pen and papers are on the table. 
 Mes freres et mes cousins sont alles a la campagne, my 
 brothers and cousins have gone in the country. 
 
 163. The absolute possessive pronouns are united with 
 the definite article, and refer to a preceding noun (ante- 
 cedent), with which they agree in gender and number. 
 They are, Le mien, mine ; Le tien, thine; Le sien, his or 
 hers ; Le notre, ours ; Le votre, yours ; Le leur, theirs. 
 
 164. The absolute possessive pronouns are inflected as 
 follows : 
 
 
 Masc. Fern. I Masc. 
 
 Fem. | Masc. | Fem. 
 
 ! Sinq. 
 \ Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 Le mien. 
 Les miens. 
 
 La mienne. jLe tien. 
 Les nnennes. Les tiens. 
 
 La tienne. 
 Les tiennes. 
 
 Le sien. 
 Les siens. 
 
 La sienne. 
 Les siennes. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Le notre. 
 Les notres. 
 
 La notre. |Le votre. 
 Les notres. 1 Les votres. 
 
 La votre. 
 Les votres. 
 
 Le leur. 
 Les leurs. 
 
 La leur. 
 Les leurs. 
 
 Examples. 
 Mon chapeau et le tien, my hat and thine. 
 Ta plume et la mienne, thy pen and mine. 
 Ses livres et les tiens, his books and thine. 
 
§ 165-167.] pronouns. 59 
 
 Tes meres et les notres, thy mothers and ours. 
 Yos soeurs et les leurs, your sisters and theirs. 
 
 Remark. The prepositions de and a are united with the article 
 of the absolute possessive pronouns according to rules in Sec- 
 tions 77, 78 ; as, 
 
 Du mien, au mien, of mine, to mine. 
 Des miens, aux miens, of mine, to mine. 
 Des tiennes, aux tiennes, of thine, to thine. 
 And for the feminine gender, singular number, 
 
 De la mienne, a la mienne, of mine, to mine. 
 De la notre, a la notre, of ours, to ours. 
 
 165. Expressions such as "a friend of mine," "a neigh- 
 bor of yours," are turned into French by employing the 
 preposition de with a conjunctive possessive pronoun ; 
 thus, un de mes amis, un de vos voisins, one of my 
 friends, one of your neighbors. 
 
 %W The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Eighth, Part Fourth. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Eelative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun or 
 pronoun ; the noun or pronoun to which the relative refers is termed 
 the antecedent. Thus, Dieu, dont nous admirons la sagesse, est Pau- 
 teur des choses que nous voyons, et de celles qui nous sont cachees, 
 God, whose wisdom we admire, is the author of the things which we be- 
 hold, and of those which are concealed from us. In this phrase Dieu is 
 the antecedent of the relative dont ; choses is the antecedent oique, and 
 the pronoun celles the antecedent of qui. 
 
 166. The .relative pronouns are, Qui, who, which, that; 
 Dont, of whom, of which ; and Lequel, ivho, which. 
 
 167. The relative pronouns are inflected as follows: 
 N~om. Qui, icho, which, that. 
 
 1st Indir. obj. De qui, dont, of whom, of which. 
 2d Indir. obj. A qui, to whom. 
 
 Direct object. Que, xohom, ivhich. 
 
 [Masc, Lequel, Fern., Laquelle, ivhich. 
 • J " Duquel, " De laquelle, of whom, of which. 
 "* " Auquel, " A laquelle, to whom, to which. 
 
 I 
 
 Leqiicl, " Laquelle, whom, ivhich. 
 
60 FRENCH GEAJDIAE. [§ 168, 169. 
 
 [Masc, Lesquels, Fern., Lesquelles, which. 
 j " Desquels, " Desquelles, of whom, of which. 
 'I ' : Auxquels, ' ' Auxquelles, to whom, to which. 
 \_ " Lesquels, " Lesquelles, whom, which. 
 
 168. The nominative qui and the objective que refer 
 to both perso?is and things y as, 
 
 L'homme qui me parle, the man ic7io speaks to me. 
 La plume qui me plait, the pen which pleases one. 
 Les femmes qui pleurent, the loomen who are weeping. 
 Les jardins qui sont beaux, the gardens which are fine. 
 L'homme que je vois, the man whom I see. 
 La fleur que vous aimez, the flower which you like. 
 Les enfants que nous louons, the children whom we 
 
 praise. 
 Les maisons que je regarde, the houses which Hook at. 
 
 a. The relative qui and its objective que are invariable; 
 that is, they have but one form for both numbers and 
 both genders. 
 
 b. The objective que loses its e before a vowel or an h 
 mute; as, 
 
 La vie qu'il mene, the life ichich he leads. 
 
 Les maisons qu'ils achetent, the houses which they buy. 
 
 Remark. Relative pronouns in the objective case must always be 
 expressed in French, though in English they may be omitted ; 
 thus, le livre que vous lisez est amusant, the book you or that 
 you are reading is diverting. 
 
 169. The^rs^ indirect objective of qui, namely, de qui, 
 relates to persons only ; when reference is made to things 
 in this case, dont is employed, which can refer to persons 
 or things in both genders and numbers ; as, 
 
 L'homme de qui (or dont) je parle, the man of whom 
 
 I speak. 
 Le livre dont (not de qui) vous parlez, the book of 
 
 which you speak. 
 Les heros dont (or de qui) je lis, the heroes of whom 1 
 
 read. 
 
§ 170, 171.] PRONOUNS. 61 
 
 Remark. Lord is generally preferred to de qui, since the former 
 can refer to both persons and things, and the latter to persons 
 only. 
 
 170. The second indirect objective of qui, namely, d 
 qui, has likewise reference to persons only ; when the 
 relative in this case relates to things, auquel, a laquelle, 
 auxquels or auxquelles must be used, according to the 
 gender and number of the antecedent. Lequel and its 
 variations can refer to both persons and things ; as, 
 
 L'homme a qui (or auquel) je donne un livre, the man 
 
 to whom I give a book. 
 La dame a qui ( or d laquelle) je dois tant, the lady to 
 
 lohom J owe so much. 
 Le travail auquel (not d qui) je me suis consacre, the 
 
 work to which I have devoted myself. 
 La pensee a laquelle je me livre, the thought to which 
 
 I yield myself . 
 Les hommes a qui {auxquels) je donne un livre, the 
 
 men to whom I give a booh. 
 Les dames a qui {auxquelles) je dois tant, the ladies to 
 
 whom I owe so much. 
 Les pensees auxquelles je me livre, the thoughts to 
 
 which I yield myself. 
 
 171. Qui and lequel with its inflections may be em- 
 ployed after any preposition as well as after de and d ; 
 qui, it should be remembered, is, in all situations, re- 
 stricted to persons, while lequel can be used for per 'sons 
 or things ; as, 
 
 La maison dans laquelle il demeure, the house in which 
 
 he dwells. 
 L'homme avec qui (or lequel) je sortis, the man with 
 
 whom I went out. 
 Le baton avec lequel il frappe l'enfant, the stick with 
 
 ivhich he strikes the child. 
 Les plumes avec lesquelles j'ecris la lettre, the pens 
 
 with which I write the letter. 
 
62 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [172-174. 
 
 Remark a. It will be perceived that lequel, etc., always agrees in 
 gender and number with its antecedent. 
 
 Remark b. Lequel is a compound word made up of the definite 
 article le, the, and quel, which ; the former is inflected like the 
 article alone, and the latter according to the rules laid down 
 for the variations of the adjective. See 110, 117, 122. 
 
 172. The English relative 10/iose is rendered in French 
 by dont, followed by the definite article ; as, 
 
 L'homme dont le fils est malade, the man lohose son is 
 
 siclc. 
 Le maitre dont les eleves sont attentifs, the teacher 
 
 whose pupils are attentive. 
 La chambre dont les plafonds sont hauls, the room 
 
 whose ceilings are high. 
 
 Remark. Observe the literal construction of these sentences: The 
 man of whom the son, etc. ; the teacher ofivhom the pupils, etc. ; 
 the room of which the ceilings, etc. 
 
 173. If dont depends on the direct object of a verb, it 
 separated from that object ; thus, 
 
 L'homme dont vous louez le courage, the man whose 
 courage you laud. 
 Literally, the man of whom you praise the courage. 
 
 174. If the possessive case depends on a substantive 
 
 governed by a preposition, the relative duquel, de la- 
 
 quelle, desquels, desquelles, are employed, according to 
 
 the gender and number of the antecedent. 
 
 Observe that the relative is placed after the noun, not before it, as 
 in English : 
 
 L'ami a la fidelite duquel vous vous fiez, the friend in 
 
 ichose fidelity you confide. 
 Une femme sur la conduite de laquelle il n'y a rien a 
 redire, a woman concerning ichose behavior there 
 is nothing to censure. 
 Les amis a la fidelite desquels nous nous fions, the 
 friends in whose fidelity ice confide. 
 Remark. These examples are literally, the friend in the fidelity of 
 ichom, etc. ; a woman concerning the behavior of whom, etc. ; the 
 friends in the fidelity of whom, etc. 
 
175-178.] pronouns. 63 
 
 175. The relative pronoun quoi, what, which, is used 
 only after a preposition ; as, 
 
 C'est de quoi il se plaint, it is that of which he com- 
 plains. 
 C'est a quoi je pense, that is ivhat I am thinking of. 
 
 Remark. In French the preposition is always placed before the 
 relative which it governs, and never after it, as is sometimes 
 done in English. 
 
 1 76. The adverb oil, where, is often used as a relative 
 in French instead of lequel, etc. ; thus, ou, in which, to 
 which, at which; d'ou, from which, whence; par ou, 
 through which ; as, 
 
 La maison oi\ il demeure, the house in which he lives. 
 Le but oi\ il tend, the end at which he aims. 
 Le pays d'oi\ je viens, the country whence I come. 
 La ville par ou je passe, the city through which I pass. 
 ISP The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Ninth, Part Fourth. 
 
 THE RELATIVE PARTICLES 
 En and Y. 
 
 177. The relative particle en always refers to an ante- 
 cedent, and is employed for both genders and both num- 
 bers. 
 
 a. When en is the direct object of a verb, it is rendered 
 by some or any. 
 
 b. When it is the indirect object of a verb, it answers 
 to the English expressions of it, of him, of her, of that, 
 of them, of those, from there,.from them. 
 
 En as Direct Object. 
 
 178. The particle en is regarded as the direct object 
 of a verb whenever it takes the place oT a substantive 
 used partitively — see 85 — as, 
 
 Avez-vous du pain ? have you any bread? 
 Oui, j'en ai, yes, I have some. 
 
64 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§179,180. 
 
 Mangez-vous de la viande ? do you eat any meat? 
 
 Oui, j'en mange, yes, I eat some. 
 
 Recoit-il des plumes? does he receive any pens? 
 
 II en recoit, lie does receive some. 
 
 Avez-vous des freres ? have you any brothers ? 
 
 J'en ai, I have some. 
 
 a. En with a negation is translated by none, not any ; 
 
 as, 
 
 N'en avez-vous pas ? have you none ? 
 
 Je n'en recois pas, I receive none. 
 
 Remark. Thus en, employed as a direct object, bears the same re- 
 lation to verbs that its antecedent does to substantives, that is, 
 en in this-sense is used with a verb to correspond to a substan- 
 tive employed partitively. There are only a few positions in 
 which en direct object should be translated according to 177, b, 
 and these the context will easily indicate. 
 
 En as Indirect Object. 
 
 179. En is regarded as the indirect object (177, b) of a 
 verb whenever it takes the place of a term governed by 
 the preposition de, of, from, with; as, 
 
 Etes-vous occupe de cette affaire ? are you busy with 
 
 this matter? 
 Oui, j'en suis occupe, yes, I am busy with it. 
 
 Here en takes the place of de cette affaire. 
 Etes-vous content de ce livre ? are you satisfied with 
 
 this booh? 
 J'en suis content, I am satisfied with it. 
 Venez-vous de chez lui ? do you come from his house? 
 J'en viens, I do come from there. 
 Combien de sceurs avez-vous ? how many sisters have 
 
 you ? 
 J'en ai deux, I have two {of them). 
 ISP 3 In many examples the translation of en may be omitted, the 
 English idiom not requiring it. 
 
 180. En may refer to persons or things, but at the 
 present day its use is almost universally restricted to 
 
§ 181-185.] pronouns. 65 
 
 things. Thus it is better to write Je doute de lui than 
 
 J'en doute, in answer to the question De qui doutez- 
 
 vous ? of whom are you suspicious ? 
 
 Remark. The classic writers of the seventeenth century rarely 
 make any distinctions in the use of en, referring it to persons 
 and things. Modern usage, however, claims the difference we 
 have given above. 
 
 181. En is always placed before the verb which gov- 
 erns it, except when the verb is in the imperative mood 
 without a negative, in which case it follows it ; as, 
 
 J'en donne, I give some. 
 J'en doute, I doubt {of) it. 
 Apportez-en, bring some. 
 Donnez-m'en, give me some. 
 Procure-t'en, get some for thyself 
 lEP 3 Moi and toi are exchanged for ?>i' and V before en, as in Ex- 
 amples 4th and 5th. 
 
 182. The relative particle y generally refers to an an- 
 tecedent, and is employed for both genders and both 
 numbers. 
 
 183. Y answers to the English to it, to them, and is 
 employed before a verb which requires the preposition 
 to. It nearly always relates to inanimate objects. 
 
 Elle y est forcee, she is compelled to it. 
 Y a-t-il consenti ? has he agreed to it? 
 Je n'y consentirai jamais, Iicill never agree to it. 
 
 184. Y is also employed as an adverb of place, and an- 
 swers to the English there, thither y as, 
 
 Vous y avez ete, you have been there. 
 Y allez-vous ? are you going thither? 
 J'y vais, I am going there, 
 a. Before the future and the conditional of the verb aller, to- go, the 
 y, by exception, is never used. 
 
 185. The relative particle y is put before its verb, ex- 
 cept when the verb is in the imperative mood not accom- 
 panied by a negative / as, 
 
66 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 186, 187. 
 
 II y est, allez-y, he is there, go thither y 
 but N'y allez pas, do not go there. 
 
 a. I^is placed after personal pronouns in the objective 
 case, and if it occur with en, the latter is put after y ; as, 
 
 II t'y menera, he will conduct thee there. 
 
 Menez-nous-y, conduct us there. 
 
 II y en porta, he carried some there. 
 
 b. Exception. Moi, toi, le and la, are placed after y 
 when the verb is in the imperative without a negation y 
 as, 
 
 Menez-y-moi, conduct me there. 
 Menez-y-le, conduct him there ; 
 but Ne m'y menez pas, do not conduct me there. 
 
 I2P The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Tenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 186. The interrogative pronouns are qui, or qui est-ce 
 qui, icho y que, or qu'est-ce qui, what y quoi, after a prep- 
 osition, what y quel and lequel, which, what. 
 
 a. These pronouns are inflected as follows : 
 Nom. Qui? or qui est-ce qui ? who? 
 
 1st object. De qui? or de qui est-ce que? of whom? from whom? 
 2d object. A qui ? or a, qui est-ce que ? to whom ? for ivhom ? 
 Direct obj. Qui ? or qui est-ce que ? whom ? 
 
 Nom. Que ? or qu'est-ce qui ? what ? 
 
 1st object. De quoi? of what? 
 
 2d object. A quoi ? to ivhat ? 
 
 Direct obj . Que? or qu'est-ce que? what? 
 
 Nom. Quel? .Few., Quelle? P/., Quels? Fern., Quelles? 
 1st obj. Dequel? " De quelle? " De quels? " De quelles? 
 2c? obj. A quel ? " A quelle? " A quels? " A quelles? 
 
 Lequel is inflected the same when employed as an in- 
 terrogative as when relative. See 166. 
 
 187. Qui? who? whom? is employed for persons only y 
 
 as, 
 
9 r what do you wish ? 
 
 § 188-190.] pronouns. 67 
 
 Qui etes-vous ? ) 7 a 
 
 J: . . A . y tvho are you f 
 
 Qui est-ce qui vous etes r ) 
 
 Qui frappe a la porte ? who is knocking at the door? 
 
 Qui est-ce que vous cherchez? lohom do you seek? 
 
 De qui etes-vous estime? by whom are you esteemed? 
 
 188. Que? what? (before a vowel or h mute written 
 qit 1 ) is used of things only. It becomes quoi after a 
 preposition; as, 
 
 Que souhaitez-vous ? 
 
 Qu'est-ce que vous soubaitez 
 
 Qu'avez-vous ? what have you ? 
 
 Que cherchez-vous? what are you seeking? 
 
 De quoi parlent-ils ? of what are they speaking ? 
 
 A quoi pensez-vous? of what are you thinking? 
 
 189. Quel? which or what? is immediately followed 
 by a noun with which it agrees in gender and number. 
 It follows the inflection of an adjective in el; as, 
 
 Quel livre avez-vous ? which book have you ? 
 Quelle plume est-ce? what pen is it? 
 Quels hornmes cherchez-vous ? what men do you seek ? 
 Quelles femmes voit-il ? what women does he see ? 
 a. Quel is sometimes separated from its noun by some 
 form of the verb " to be y" as, 
 
 Quelle est son idee ? what is his idea ? 
 
 Quels sont vos devoirs ? what are your duties ? 
 
 190. Lequel relates to persons or things, and is trans- 
 lated by iohic7i, meaning luhich one or which ones ? It 
 always relates to a preceding or succeeding noun with 
 which it agrees in gender ; as, 
 
 Yoici deux epees, laquelle choisissez-vous? here are 
 
 two swords, which one do you choose ? 
 Laquelle de ces oranges voulez-vous ? which (one) of 
 
 these oranges do you wish ? 
 De tous les livres que vous avez lus, lesquels preferez- 
 
 vous ? of all the books which you have read, which 
 
 (ones) do you prefer ? 
 
68 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 191-196. 
 
 191. The English interrogative "ivhose" is expressed 
 in French by de qui and d qui; as, 
 
 A qui est cette maison ? tohose house is that ? 
 
 De qui avez-vous la montre ? whose loateh have you f 
 
 $W* The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Eleventh, Part Fourth. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are those which point out in 
 a definite manner the objects which they represent or to 
 which they belong. 
 
 192. The demonstrative pronouns are, ce, this or that; 
 celui, that or this one ; cela, that thing ; and ceci, this 
 thing. 
 
 a. These pronouns are inflected thus : 
 
 | Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 | 
 
 Singular. 
 'Plural 
 
 Ce. 
 Ces. 
 
 Cette. 
 Ces. 
 
 Celui. 
 Ceux. 
 
 Celle. 
 Celles. 
 
 Ceci, this. Cela, that. 
 No plural 
 
 193. Ce is placed before a masculine noun in the sin- 
 gular number not commencing with a vowel or an h 
 mute ; as, 
 
 Ce papier, this or that paper. 
 
 Ce heros (h aspirate; see 41), this or that hero. 
 Ce gant, this or that glove. 
 
 194. Get {t sounded) is employed when a noun in the 
 masculine singular commences with a vowel or A mute; as, 
 
 Cet homme, this or that man. 
 Cet encrier, this or that inkstcmd. 
 
 195. Cette is employed before a feminine noun in the 
 singular ; as, 
 
 Cette encre, this or that ink. 
 Cette femme, this or that woman. 
 Cette plume, this or that pen. 
 
 196. Ces is used before a plurcd noun of either gen- 
 der; as, 
 
§ 197, 198.] peonouns. 69 
 
 Ces homraes, these or those men. 
 Ces dames, these or those ladies. 
 Ces papiers, these or those papers. 
 
 197. From the examples given it will be seen that ee 
 and its variations may be translated this or that, these or 
 those / in reading, the context shows which term should 
 be used ; and in speaking, a nod or gesture indicates with 
 sufficient accuracy whether reference is made to a near 
 or to a remote object. But when emphasis or contrast 
 demands more specific language, the particles ci, here, 
 and la, there, are added to the noun by means of a hy- 
 phen ; thus, 
 
 Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou ce livre-la ? have you this book 
 
 or that booh ? 
 Voyez-vous cet homme-ci ou cet homme-la? do you* 
 
 see this man or that man f 
 Aimez-vous ces plumes-ci ? do you like these pens f . 
 
 These sentences would be literally, this book here ; that booh there ; 
 these pens here ; and are similar to the vulgar expressions this 
 here, that there, these here. 
 
 198. Celui qui, he who/ celui que, he whom/ celle qui, 
 she icho/ celle que, she iohom/ ceux qui, they who / ceux 
 que, they or those whom/ celles qui, they who (fem.) / 
 celles que, they or those whom (fem.), are employed in 
 speaking of persons. In all other cases celui refers to an 
 antecedent with which it agrees in gender and number / 
 as, 
 
 Celui qui est mecontent est malheureux, he who is dis- 
 contented is unhappy. 
 
 Celle qui est contente est heureuse, she ivho is content- 
 ed is happy. 
 
 Celui que tu aimes est malade, he whom thou lovest is 
 sick. 
 
 Ceux qui sont contents de leur sort sont heureux, they 
 who are contented with their lot are happy. 
 
70 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 199, 200. 
 
 Celle que vous cherchez est ici, she whom you seek is 
 here. 
 
 a. Any other relative pronoun (such as dont, duquel x 
 auquel) may follow celui, celle, etc. ; as, 
 
 Celui dont je vous ai parle* est venu, he of whom. I 
 spoke to you has come. 
 
 b. A preposition may be introduced between celui and 
 the relative accompanying it ; as, 
 
 Celui aupres de qui j'etais etait un petit ragot, he near 
 whom I was sitting teas a little clumpy. 
 
 199. When celui, celle, ceux or celles, relate to an an- 
 tecedent, i. e., when they represent a foregoing noun, they 
 may refer to persons or things, and then assume the gen- 
 der and number of the noun which they represent. 
 
 • a, Render celui de, celle de, ceux de, celles de, by that 
 of those of; as, 
 
 Cette maison et celle du charpentier, this house and 
 
 that of the carpenter. 
 Ces plumes et celles de l'ecolier, these pens and those 
 
 of the scholar. 
 Mes papiers et ceux de l'etranger, my papers and those 
 
 of the foreigner, 
 b. Render celui que, celle que, ceux que, celles que, by 
 that which or the one tohich, those which or the ones 
 which; as, 
 
 Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui que j'ai ? have you this 
 
 booh or the one lohich I have ? 
 J'ai les livres qu'il desire, mais non pas ceux que vous 
 lisez, I have the books which he desires, but not 
 those which you are reading. 
 
 200. Celui and its variations append the particles ci 
 and Id, in the same manner as that explained under ce 
 (Rule 19V), when employed in contrast. Celui-ci, celle- 
 ci, then are translated this o?ie ; celui-la, celle-la, ^Citf one; 
 ceux-ci, celles-ci, these ; ceux-la, celles-la, those ; as, 
 
§ 201.] PRONOUNS. 71 
 
 Quelle epee voulez-vous, celle-ci ou celle-la ? which 
 
 sioord will you have, this one or that one f 
 Lequel de ces hommes est le plus grand, celui-ci ou 
 celui-la ? which of these- men is the taller, this one 
 or that one f 
 Avez-vous ces livres-ci ou ceux-la ? have you these 
 
 books or those f 
 Mange-t-il ces pommes-ci ou celles-la? does he eat 
 
 these apples or those f 
 II ne mange ni celles-ci ni celles-la, he eats neither these 
 
 nor those. 
 a. Celui-ci, etc., relates to the last mentioned of two 
 or more persons or things, and celui-la, etc., to the first 
 mentioned ; each agrees in gender and number with the 
 noun to which it refers. Render celui-ci, etc., in this case, 
 by u the latter" and celui-la, etc., by " the former /" as, 
 J'ai une pomme et un ananas, celui-ci est doux, mais 
 celle-la est aigre, J have an apple and a pine-ap- 
 ple / the latter is siveet, but the former is sour. 
 201. Ceci, this, and cela, that, refer to an object which 
 is not mentioned. They correspond to the Latin hoc 
 and illud, this thing, that thing ; as, 
 
 Je n'aime pas cela, J do not like that. 
 Cela est admirable, that is wonderfid. 
 Prenez ceci, take this. 
 Ceci vous plait-il ? does this suit you ? 
 
 Remark. In conversation, cela is often reduced to ca ; as, Donnez- 
 moi 9 a, give me that. 
 
 a. The student should take care not to confound the 
 demonstratives ce, etc., with celui, etc. The distinction 
 between them is emphatic and clearly defined ; celui is 
 never followed by the noun with which it agrees, while 
 ce always is ; celui always refers to an antecedent {except 
 in Rules 198, a, b), while ce always agrees with the noun 
 following it. 
 
12 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 202-204. 
 
 Idiomatical Uses of"Ce." 
 
 202. Ce followed by a relative pronoun (qui, dont, que) 
 is equivalent to the English that ichich or what ; as, 
 
 Ce qui me fache c'est que je n'ai pas reussi, what {that 
 which) grieves me is that I have not succeeded. 
 
 Ce que je vous dis est vrai, ichat I tell you is tome. 
 
 Ce qu'elle vous dit est faux, ichat she tells you is false. 
 
 Ce dont vous avez besoin est a votre service, that of 
 which you stand in need is at your service. 
 
 Dites-moi ce qui vous y pensez, tell me ichat you think 
 of it, 
 
 203. Ce, followed by some form of the verb "to be" 
 signifies it; if the verb be plural, ce equals those. Ce, 
 in this sense, loses its vowel when it comes before a form 
 of the verb commencing with a vowel ; as, 
 
 C'est mon pere, it is my father. 
 
 Ce sont mes voisins, those are my neighbors. 
 
 C'est moi, toi, lui, it is I, thou, he. 
 
 Ce sont eux {idiom), it is they. 
 
 Remark. Ce, with a relative and with etre, has no inflection. It 
 is to he used instead of the personal pronoun il whenever it 
 signifies that, or, in other words, when it is employed in a de- 
 monstrative sense. 
 
 SEP 3 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twelfth, Part Fourth. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are those which express in an in- 
 definite or general manner the persons or things which 
 they represent. 
 
 204. Indefinite pronouns may be divided into three 
 classes, according as they are employed as adjectives, as 
 substantives, or as either adjectives or substantives. 
 
 a. The first class embraces those indefinite pronouns 
 which are employed as substantives, that is, are never 
 
§ 205, 206.] pronouns. 73 
 
 joined to a noun. They are, autrui, others; chacun, ev- 
 ery one, each y on, one, they y personne, no one, nobody ; 
 quelqu'un, some one, somebody y quiconque, whoever, 
 whosoever ; rien, nothing y l'un P autre, each other, one 
 another y l'un et 1' autre, both y ni l'un ni l'autre, neither. 
 
 b. The second class embraces such as are employed as 
 adjectives, that is, are always joined to a noun. They 
 are, quelque, some, any ; chaque, each, every y quel- 
 conque, any, any — whatever. 
 
 c. The third class embraces those which are employed 
 as substantives or as adjectives, according to their signi- 
 fication. These are, aucun, no, none y le meme, the same y 
 nul, no one, nobody ; pas un, none, not one ; autre, other ; 
 plusieurs, severed, many y tel, such, such a one y tout, cdl, 
 every thing. 
 
 USE OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 205. Autrui relates to persons only, is invariable, and 
 is always preceded by a preposition y as, 
 
 II remarque les defauts d'autrui, he observes the faults 
 
 of others. 
 Les droits d'autrui, the rights of others. 
 
 206. Chacun has either a distributive or a collective 
 signification. It has no plural in either sense. 
 
 a. Used distributively, chacun relates to both persons 
 and things, and signifies each one. Its feminine is cha- 
 cune. 
 
 Chacun d'eux fut surpris, each one of them icas sur- 
 prised. 
 
 Chacune d'elles fut surprise, each one of them was sur- 
 prised. 
 
 Chacun de ces tableaux, each one of these pictures. 
 
 b. Used collectively, chacun relates to persons only, 
 and signifies every body, every one y as, 
 
 D 
 
74 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 207, 208. 
 
 Chacun le sait, every body knows it. 
 Chacun fait des fautes, every body commits faults. 
 Chacun veut etre heureux, every body loishes to be 
 happy. 
 
 207. On signifies one, toe, they, people, in a vague, inde- 
 terminate sense. It is always used as a subject, and is 
 joined to the third person singular of verbs ; as, 
 
 On dit, on rapporte, they say, it is reported. 
 Peut-on savoir ? may one know f 
 a. The euphonic V is sometimes put before on when 
 one of the words et, si, oil, que, qui or ici, precedes ; as, 
 Si Ton veut, if one wishes. 
 Ici l'on parle francais, French is spoken here {here they 
 
 speak French). 
 Remark. This V, though called euphonic, is properly 
 the article definite; on (derived from homme ; horn, o?i) 
 signified, in Old French, man ; hence si Ton veut would 
 be literally, if the man wishes — the German loenn man 
 will. 
 
 208. Personne is always accompanied by the nega- 
 tive ne when it means no one, nobody. As a pronoun it 
 is mascidine, as a noun feminine ; as, 
 
 Personne ne le sait, nobody knows it. 
 
 Je ne connais personne, I am acquainted with no one. 
 
 Je ne le dirai a personne, I will tell it to no one. 
 
 a. Personne is employed without ne in interrogative 
 sentences and in expressions of doubt or uncertainty / also 
 after a comparative. It then signifies any body, any 
 one; as, 
 
 Personne a-t-il jamais connu ? etc., has any one ever 
 known? etc. 
 
 Je doute que personne le sache, I doubt whether any 
 body knows it. 
 
 II le fait mieux que personne, he does it better than any 
 
§ 209-211.] pronouns. 75 
 
 209. Quelqu'un is employed absolutely and relatively. 
 
 a. When used absolutely, it means somebody, any body, 
 and is always masculine singular y as, 
 
 Quelqu'un est venu, somebody has come. 
 Je dis a quelqu'un, I say to some one. 
 Quelqu'un est-il la ? is any body there f 
 
 b. When used relatively it means some or a?iy, and re- 
 lates to some noun (person or thing) with which it agrees 
 in gender and number. It is inflected thus : masc.plur., 
 quelques-uns ; fern, plur., quelques-unes. 
 
 Connaissez-vous quelques-uns de ces messieurs? do 
 
 you know any of these gentlemen f 
 Quelques-unes de ces dames viendront, some of these 
 
 ladies will come. 
 Donnez-moi quelques-unes de ces poires, give me some 
 
 of those pears. 
 
 210. Quiconque refers to persons only, and has no 
 plural; as, 
 
 Quiconque parlera anglais, sera mis a l'amende, iv/toso 
 shall speak English shall be mulcted. 
 
 Quiconque ne saura pas sa lecon sera marque, whoever 
 does not know his lesson shall be marked. 
 
 Dieu punira quiconque transgresse ses lois, God ivill 
 punish vjhomsoever transgresses his laics. 
 
 211. Rien is accompanied by the negative ne, and 
 then means nothing ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai rien, I have nothing. 
 Je ne dis rien, J say nothing. 
 a. Rien is employed without ne in interrogative sen- 
 tences, and in expressions of doubt or uncertainty. It 
 then signifies any thing ; as, 
 
 Y a-t-il rien de plus charmant ? is there any thing more 
 
 charming ? 
 Je doute qu'il y ait rien dans cette bouteille, I doubt 
 vihether there be any thing in that bottle. 
 
76 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 212, 213. 
 
 Remark. Rien is derived from the Latin rem, accusa- 
 tive of res, and means literally thing, so that the adverb 
 ne is essential to its negative sense. It is, however, oft- 
 en employed without ne, in a sentence containing no 
 verb ; thus, 
 
 Que vous a coute cela ? lohat did that cost you ? Rien, 
 nothing. 
 
 Supply the verb, and ne must accompany the pronoun ; 
 thus, Cela ne m'a rien coute, that cost one nothing. 
 
 212. L'un l'autre is susceptible of inflection ; thus, 
 3Iasc. sing., Fun 1' autre ; fern, sing., Tune l'autre. 
 Masc.plur., les uns les autres; fem.plur., les unes les 
 
 autres. 
 Of each other would be l'un de l'autre or les uns des 
 autres ; to each other, l'un a l'autre or les uns aux autres. 
 Thus, in general, a preposition is put between the pro- 
 nouns, not before both as in English ; as, 
 
 lis s'aiment l'un l'autre, they love one another. 
 Elles s'aiment l'une l'autre, they love one another (fern). 
 Nous nous fions l'un a l'autre, toe confide in one an- 
 other. 
 lis medisent l'un de l'autre, they slander each other 
 
 {they speak evil the one of the other). 
 Les voleurs se defient les uns des autres, thieves are 
 
 distrustful of one another, 
 a. Some — others, are expressed in French by les uns — 
 les autres or les uns — d'autres ; as, 
 
 Les uns s'amusent, les autres travaillent, some am-use 
 
 themselves, others are working. 
 Les uns disent que oui, d'autres disent que non, some 
 say yes, others say no. 
 
 213. L'un et l'autre signifies both {the one and the 
 other), 2indi agrees in gender and number with the noun 
 to which it refers. If a preposition occur, it must be re- 
 peated before each member of the pronoun ; as, 
 
§ 214-216.] PRONOUNS. 11 
 
 L'tin et l'autre sont bons, both are good. 
 
 lis seront punis l'un et l'autre, they shall both be pun- 
 ished. 
 
 Je le ferai pour l'un et pour l'autre, I will do it for 
 them both. 
 
 214. ~Ni l'un ni l'autre, neither (one nor the other) , 
 requires the negative particle ne before the accompany- 
 ing verb. Ni Vun ni V autre requires a verb to be put in 
 the singular number if the verb follow the pronoun, but 
 if the latter folloio the verb it must be plural ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre, I have neither. 
 
 lis n'etudient ni l'un ni l'autre, or ni l'un ni l'autre 
 
 n'etudie, neither of them studies. 
 Je ne le ferais ni pour l'un ni pour l'autre, I would do 
 
 it for neither of them. 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 215. Quelque, some or any ; plural quelques, a few, 
 is placed before a noun with which it agrees in number ; 
 as, 
 
 Quelque temps, some time. 
 
 Quelques poires, some pears, a few pears. 
 
 Quelque chose, something, any thing. 
 
 Avez-vous quelques livres? have you any boohs? 
 
 J'en ai quelques-uns, I have some, afeiv. 
 
 Avez-vous quelques plumes ? have you any pens f 
 
 J'en ai quelques-unes, I have some, or a few. 
 
 Remark. Some or any, a few, is expressed by quelques when the 
 noun follows, and by quelques-uns, -unes, when the noun is 
 omitted. 
 
 216. Chaque, each, every, is employed for persons and 
 things. It is always followed by a noun, and has no plu- 
 ral; as, 
 
 Chaque objet, each or every object. 
 Chaque age a ses facons, every age has its characteris- 
 tics. 
 
78 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 217-219. 
 
 Chaque femme, every woman. 
 Chaque personne, every individual. 
 
 217. Quelconque, any, any whatever, has no plural, 
 and always follows the noun. With a negative it may 
 be translated no, ?iothing whatever. 
 
 Pretez-moi un livre quelconque, lend me any book 
 (whatever). 
 
 II ne lui est demeure chose quelconque, nothing what- 
 ever has remained to him. 
 
 II n'y a homme quelconque, etc., no man whatever, etc. 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 218. Aucun, aucune, may be inflected, but rarely oc- 
 curs with a plural noun. Accompanied by the negative 
 ne, it signifies no, none y as, 
 
 Aucun ami ne me reste, no friend remains to me. 
 
 Je ne veux aucune de ces fleurs, I wish none of these 
 
 flowers. 
 a. Aucun rejects the negative in interrogative sentences 
 and in phrases expressive of an uncertainty ; it then sig- 
 nifies any, any one / as, 
 
 Y a-t-il aucun de vous qui le souflrit ? is there any of 
 
 you who woidd endure it f 
 Je doute qu'il y ait aucun auteur sans defauts, I doubt 
 lohether there be any author without defects. 
 
 219. Meme, plural memes, placed before a noun, agrees 
 with it like an adjective. With the definite article it sig- 
 nifies the same y as, 
 
 Le meme homme, the same man. 
 
 La meme chose, the same thing. 
 
 Ces livres sont les memes, these books are the same 
 
 (alike.) 
 a. Meme, added to a noun or pronoun, means self, 
 selves, or him — her — itself, etc. 
 
 Je l'ai fait moi-meme, I have done it myself. 
 
§ 220-223.] pronouns. 79 
 
 Le soldat meme s'est battu, the soldier himself has 
 
 fought. 
 Le roi lui-meme, the king himself 
 b. Meme is also used adverbially, in which case it is 
 invariable, and is equivalent to even; as, 
 ' Nous n'avons pas meme envie d'y aller, we have not 
 even a desire to go there. 
 
 220. NuL,/em. nulle, and pas un, pas une, are gov- 
 erned by the same remarks which have been applied to 
 Aucun — see 218 — as, 
 
 Nul n'est content de sa fortune, no one is satisfied with 
 
 his fortune. 
 Nul de nous ne sait, no one of us hioios. 
 Pas une de ces dames ne danse, not one of these ladies 
 
 dances. 
 Pas un ne s'echappa, not one made his escape. 
 
 221. Autre, other, \% employed in both genders and 
 both numbers ; as, 
 
 Un autre livre, another booh. 
 
 J'en connais une autre, I know another one (fern.). 
 
 Donnez-moi une autre plume, give me another pen. 
 
 222. Plusieurs, many, several, is employed both as a 
 noun and adjective. It is invariable. 
 
 Plusieurs hommes, several or many men. 
 Plusieurs choses, several things. 
 Plusieurs l'ont cru, many have believed it. 
 II s'applique a plusieurs choses a la fois, he applies him- 
 self to several things at once. 
 
 223. Tel, fern, telle, mas.plur. TELS,fem.plur. telles, 
 such, agrees with its noun in gender and number ; as, 
 
 II n'y a pas de tels animaux, de telles coutumes, there 
 
 are no such animals, no such customs. 
 Un tel avis, such an opinion. 
 Une telle chose, such a thing. 
 Telle est sa conduite, etc., such is his behavior, etc. 
 Tel que, such as. 
 
80 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 224, 225. 
 
 a. Tel in the sense of such a one, many a one, has no 
 plural; as, 
 
 Tel qui rit vendredi, dimanche pleurera, many a one 
 
 icho laughs Friday will weep Sunday. 
 Un tel, un tel homme, such a one, such a man. 
 224. Tout, preceded by the definite article, signifies 
 the whole, and in this sense is employed substantively ; 
 as, 
 
 Le tout est plus grand que la partie, the whole is great- 
 
 er than a part. 
 Je prendrai le tout, I will take the whole. 
 «. Tout, meaning every thing, is invariable ; as, 
 Tout tombe, every thing fades. 
 Elle croit tout, she credits every thing. 
 
 b. Tout, meaning: every, agrees with its substantive in 
 gender; as, 
 
 Tout homme est mortel, every man is mortal. 
 
 Toute chose, every thing. 
 
 A tout moment, at every instant. 
 
 c. Tout, followed by the article, means all, or the whole; 
 in this signification it agrees with its noun in gender and 
 number. Masc. tout, fern, toute, m.p. tous, f.p. toutes ; 
 as, 
 
 Toute la journee, the ichole day long. 
 Toutes les nouveautes, all the novelties. 
 Tous les hommes, all men. 
 Tout le temps, the whole time. 
 
 225. Quelque — que, signifies however, and is invaria- 
 ble; as, 
 
 Quelque belle qu'elle puisse etre, elle ne doit pas etre 
 
 vaine, hoioever beautiful she may be, she ought not 
 
 to be vain. 
 Quelque riches que vous soyez, ne meprisez pas le mal- 
 
§ 226-229.] verb. 81 
 
 heureux, however rich you may be, do not despise 
 
 the unfortunate, 
 a. Quelque — que, signifies whatever, audi then the first 
 member may take the sign of the plural ; as, 
 
 Quelques fautes qu'il ait commises, je lui pardonnerai, 
 
 whatever faults he has committed, I will forgive 
 
 him. 
 
 226. Qui que ce soit signifies whoso, ivhoever, and re- 
 lates to persons only. It has no plural ; as, 
 
 Qui que ce soit je veux lui parler, whoever he be,Ivnsh 
 
 to speak to him. 
 a. Quoi que ce soit signifies whatever, and relates to 
 things only. It has, likewise, no plural ; as, 
 
 Quoi que ce soit que vous arrive, ne vous decouragez 
 pas, whatever may befall you, do not be discour- 
 aged. 
 $3T The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Thirteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 227. A verb is a word which expresses affirmation. 
 Verbs are divided into six classes ; viz., 
 
 Active, Neuter, Reciprocal. 
 
 Passive, Reflective, Unipersonal. 
 
 228. An active verb is one which performs an action 
 on an object without the aid of a preposition. 
 
 Test. Every verb in French is active if it makes sense 
 with the words some one or something placed immedi- 
 ately after it ; as, 
 
 Je lis un livre, I read a booh. 
 
 J'aime mon pere, Hove my father. 
 
 Je ne hais personne, I hate no one. 
 
 229. Ap>assive verb is one which affirms that an action 
 has been received or suffered by the nominative or sub- 
 ject. 
 
 D2 
 
82 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 230-233. 
 
 Test. Put either of the words by some one or by some- 
 thing immediately after the verb, and if it makes sense the 
 verb is passive ; as, 
 
 Je suis frappe, 1 am struck. 
 
 Nous sommes perdus, we are undone. 
 
 II est hai, he is hated. 
 
 a. Any active verb may be made passive by employing with tbe act- 
 ive form some part of tbe verb etre, to be. 
 
 230. A neuter verb is one which either performs an 
 action on an object by means of a preposition, or it does 
 not admit of an object at all. 
 
 Test. A neuter verb in French may always be recog- 
 nized by the fact that it does not make sense with the 
 words some one or something placed immediately after 
 it; as, 
 
 Je viens,je dors, I come, I sleep. 
 
 J'arrive de France, I arrive from France. 
 
 II me parle, he speaks to me. 
 
 Je marche, I walk. 
 a. A neuter verb can not be made passive ; thus we can not say, je 
 suis marche, I am walked; je suis existe, I am existed. 
 
 231. A reflective verb is one which expresses an action 
 which falls on the subject ; as, 
 
 Je me lave, I wash myself. 
 
 II se leve, he rises {raises himself). 
 
 Nous nous flattons, ice flatter ourselves. 
 
 232. A reciprocal verb is one which expresses the mu- 
 tual action of two or more subjects on each other; as, 
 
 lis s'aimaient, they loved each other. 
 Jean et Guillaume se haissent, John and 'William hate 
 one another. 
 
 233. A unipersonal verb expresses what happens, and 
 is employed in the third person singidar only. With 
 unipersonal verbs the pronoun-subject il is rendered by 
 it : as, 
 
§ 234-238.] verb. 83 
 
 II neige, il pleut, it snows, it rains. 
 
 II se fait tard, it is getting late. 
 
 II faut, il arrive, it is necessary, it happens. 
 
 OF MOODS. 
 
 The mood or mode of a verb is the manner in which 
 the affirmation contained in the verb is expressed. In 
 French there are^ve moods, viz., 
 
 Infinitive, Indicative, Conditional, 
 
 Imperative, Subjunctive. 
 
 234. The infinitive mood expresses an action or state 
 in an indefinite manner, without reference to number or 
 person; as, 
 
 Aimer, to love. Marcher, to vmlk. 
 
 235. The indicative mood represents the affirmation in 
 a positive, absolute manner; as, 
 
 Vous donnez, you give. II aimera, he wiU love. 
 
 236. The conditional mood denotes an affirmation de- 
 pending on a condition y as, 
 
 Je donnerais, Ticould give. 
 Mangerait-il ? would he eat f 
 
 237. The imperative mood expresses an order, com- 
 mand, or invitation, entreaty y as, 
 
 Parle, speak (thou). Donnez, give (ye). 
 
 238. The subjunctive mood expresses an affirmation de- 
 pendent on another verb or on a conjunction y as, 
 
 II faut que je parle, it is necessary that I speak. 
 Quoiqu'il soit mon ami, il m'a trahi, although he be my 
 friend, he has betrayed me. 
 
 OF TENSES. 
 
 Tense denotes time, and serves to indicate whether an 
 action is now going on, has been accomplished,, or icill be 
 done. There are, then, but three tenses properly, the 
 preserit, the past, and the future. 
 
84 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 239, 240. 
 
 239. These grand divisions of time are subdivided into 
 twenty tenses. 
 
 a. Eight for the indicative ; viz., 
 The present ; as, je donne, I give. 
 
 The imperfect ; as, je donnais, I was giving. 
 
 The past definite ; as, je donnai, I did give. 
 
 The past indefinite ; as, j'ai donne, I have given. 
 
 The pluperfect; as,j'avais donne, I had given. 
 
 The past anterior; as, j'eus donne, I had given. 
 
 The future ; as, je donnerai, I shall or will give. 
 
 The future perfect ; as, j'aurai donne, I shall have given. 
 
 b. Two for the conditional / viz., 
 
 The present ; as, je donnerais, Iicould or shoidd give. 
 The past ; as, j'aurais donne, I shoidd have given. 
 
 c. 0?iefor the imperative ; viz., donne, give. 
 
 d. Four for the subjunctive ; viz., 
 
 The present ; as, que je donne, that I may give. 
 
 The imperfect ; as, que je donnasse, that I might give. 
 
 The past indefinite; as, que j'aie donne, that I may have 
 
 given. 
 The pluperfect; as, que j'eusse donne, that I might have 
 
 given. 
 
 e. Two for the infinitive / viz., 
 The present ; as, donner, to give. 
 
 The past ; as, avoir donne, to have given. 
 
 f Three for the participle ; viz., 
 The present; as, (iormsmt, giving. 
 The past; as, donne, given. 
 The compound ; as, ay ant donne, having given. 
 
 240. Tenses are further divided into simple and com- 
 pound iox convenience of inflection. 
 
 a. The simple tenses are those which are expressed in 
 a single word ; as, 
 
 Je donne, I give. Je donnerai, I shall give. 
 
 b. The compound tenses are inflected with the aid of 
 avoir, to have, and etre, to be ; as, 
 
§ 241-243.] verb. 85 
 
 J'ai donne, I have given. 
 J'aurai donne, I shall have given. 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 241. Verbs have two numbers in every tense ; the sin- 
 gular, which is employed when only one thing or one 
 person is mentioned ; as, 
 
 Le garcon marche, the boy walks ; 
 L'arbre croit, the tree grows ; 
 and the plural, which is employed when more than one 
 thing or more than one person are mentioned ; as, 
 Les garcons marchent, the boys walk ; 
 Les arbres croissent, the trees grow. 
 
 PERSON. 
 
 242. Each number has three persons, expressed by the 
 corresponding pronouns ; as, 
 
 Je chante, I sing. Nous chantons, we sing. 
 
 Tu chantes, thou singest. Vous chantez, you sing. 
 II chante, he sings. lis chantent, they sing. 
 
 Elle chante, she sings. Elles chantent, they sing (fem.). 
 a. The personal pronouns je, tu, etc., are always ex- 
 pressed in French with the verb to which they are sub- 
 ject. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 243. In French verbs have two participles, the present 
 and the past. The present participle is formed by chang- 
 ing the infinitive-endings er, oir, and re into ant, and for 
 those ending in ir into issant ; as, 
 
 Chant-er, to sing / chant-ant, singing. 
 Fin-ir, to finish ; Hn-issarit, finishing. 
 Recev-oir, to receive ; recev-ant, receiving. 
 Vend-re, to sell ; vend-ant, selling, 
 a. The past participle is formed by changing the in- 
 
86 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 244-246. 
 
 finitive-ending er into e, that of ir into i, and those of 
 evoir and re into u ; as, 
 
 Chant-er, to sing y cbant-e, sung. 
 
 Fin-ir, to finish y fin-i, finished. 
 
 Rec-evoir, to receive y rec-u (35), received. 
 
 Vend-re, to sell y vend-u, sold. 
 Remark. The above rules apply to all regular verbs. 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 244. There are four conjugations in French, distin- 
 guished by the ending of the infinitive. All verbs be- 
 long to one of these four conjugations. The first conju- 
 gation comprehends all verbs ending in er y the second, 
 those ending in ir y the third, those ending in oir y and 
 the fourth, those ending in re. 
 
 245. The auxiliary verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to be, 
 serve to form the compound tenses of all verbs. They 
 will be conjugated before the regular verbs, since, with 
 a knowledge of their inflection, the student will be able 
 to form the compound tenses of all other verbs. 
 
 246. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb avoir. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Avoir, to have. 
 
 Avoir eu, to have had. 
 
 Pakticiple. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Ay ant, haying. 
 
 Ayant eu, having had. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Eu, had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 J'ai, 
 
 / have. 
 
 J'ai eu, I have had. 
 
 Tuas, 
 
 thou hast. 
 
 Tu as eu, thou hast had. \ 
 
 11 a, 
 
 he has. 
 
 11 a eu, he has had. 
 
 Nous avons, 
 
 we have. 
 
 Nous avons eu, we have had. 
 
 Vous avez, 
 
 you have. • 
 
 Vous avez eu, you have had. 
 
 lis ont, 
 
 they have. 
 
 lis ont eu, they have had. 
 
§ 246.] 
 
 VEEB. 
 
 87 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— continued. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'avais, I was having. 
 
 J'avais eu, I had had. 
 
 Tu avais, thou ivast having. 
 
 Tu avais eu, thou hadst had. 
 
 11 avait, he was having. 
 
 11 avait eu, he had had. 
 
 Nous avions, ice ivere having. 
 
 Nous avions eu, we had had. 
 
 Vous aviez, you were having. 
 
 Vous aviez eu, you had had. 
 
 lis avaient, they were having. 
 
 Us avaient eu, they had had. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 J'eus, I had. 
 
 J'eus eu, / had had. 
 
 Tu eus, thou hadst. 
 
 Tu eus eu, thou hadst had. 
 
 11 eut, he had. 
 
 11 eut eu, he had had. 
 
 Nous eumes, ice had. 
 
 Nous eumes eu, we had had. 
 
 Vous eutes, you had. 
 
 Vous eutes eu, you had had. 
 
 lis eurent, they had. 
 
 Us eurent eu, they had had. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Peefect. 
 
 J'aurai, I shall have. 
 
 J'aurai eu, I shall \ 
 
 Tu auras, thou wilt have. 
 
 Tu auras eu, thou wilt 1 *£ 
 
 11 aura, he will have. 
 
 11 aura eu, he will \ 4: 
 
 Nous aurons, we shall have. 
 
 Nous aurons eu, we shall f § 
 
 Vous aurez, you will have. 
 
 Vous aurez eu, you will. i 㤠
 
 j Us auront, they will have. 
 
 Us auront eu, they will) 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 J'aurais, I should have. 
 
 J'aurais eu, / should 
 
 
 Tu aurais, thou wouldst have. 
 
 Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst , 
 
 ^ 
 
 11 aurait, he would have. 
 
 11 aurait eu, he would \ 
 
 e 
 
 N. aurions,* we should have. 
 
 N. aurions eu, we should ! 
 
 ^ <u 
 
 V. auriez, you would have. 
 
 V. auriez eu, you would 
 
 « 
 
 lis auraient, they would have. 
 
 I. auraient eu, they icould , 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1-t 
 
 
 2. Aie, 
 
 have thou. 
 
 3. Qu'il ait, 
 
 let him have. 
 
 1. Ayons, 
 
 let us have. 
 
 2. Ayez, 
 
 have ye or you. 
 
 3. Qu'ils aient, 
 
 let them have. 
 
 * Throughout the succeeding paradigms of the verb the pronouns 
 plural will be often expressed by the simple initial. 
 f The first person singular of the imperative mood is wanting. 
 
83 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 247. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que j'aie, that I may have. 
 Que tu aies, that thou mayst have. 
 Qu'il ait, that he may have. 
 Que n. ayons, that we may have. 
 Que v. a) r ez, that you may have. 
 Qu'ils aient, that they may have. 
 
 Que j'aie eu, that I v \ ^ 
 -Que tu aies eu, that thou 1 ^1 
 Qu'il ait eu, that he [ § 
 Que n. ayons eu, that we ( 㤠
 Que v. ayez eu, that you \ &> 
 Qu'ils aient eu, that they J | 
 
 J M PERFECT. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que j'eusse, that I might have. 
 Que tu eusses, that thou mightst have. 
 Qu'il eiit, that he might have. 
 Que n.eussions, that we might have. 
 Que v. eussiez, that you might have. 
 Qu'ils eussent, that they might have. 
 
 Que j'eusse eu, that I \ *£ 
 Que tu eusses eu, that thou 1 ►! 
 Qu'il eiit eu, that he I § 
 Que n. eussions eu, that we [„•< 
 Que v. eussiez eu, that you \ ^ 
 Qu'ils eussent eu, that they J *|" 
 
 247. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb etre. 
 
 Simple Tenses. INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Etre, to he. 
 
 Avoir ete, to have been. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Etant, being. 
 
 Ayant ete, having been. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Ete, been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je suis, I am. 
 Tu es, thou art. 
 11 est, he is. 
 Nous sommes, we are. 
 Vous etes, you are. 
 lis sont, they are. 
 
 J'ai ete, I have been. 
 Tu as ete, thou hast been. 
 11 a etc, he has been. 
 Nous avons etc, we have been. 
 Vous avez ete, you have been. 
 lis ont ete', they have been. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'etais, I was. 
 
 Tu etais, thou wast. 
 
 11 etait, he icas. 
 J Nous etions, we were. 
 
 Vous etiez, you were. 
 1 lis etaient, they were. 
 
 J'avais ete', i" had been. 
 Tu avais e'te', thou hadst been. 
 11 avait ete, he had been. 
 N. avions e'te', we had been. 
 V. aviez etc', you had been. 
 lis avaient ete', they had been. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je fus, I was. 
 Tu fus, thou icast. 
 11 fut, he was. 
 Nous fumes, toe were. 
 "Vous fiites, you were. 
 lis furent, they were. 
 
 J'eus ete, I had been. 
 Tu eus e'te, thou hadst been. \ 
 11 eut ete, he had been. 
 Nous euraes ete, ice had been. 
 Vous eutes e'te, you had been. 
 lis eurent e'te, they had been. 
 
§ 248.] 
 
 VEKB. 
 
 89 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je serai, / shall be. 
 
 J'aurai ete, / shall } 
 
 
 Tu seras, thou wilt be. 
 
 Tu auras e'te', thou loilt J 
 
 8 
 
 11 sera, he will be. 
 
 11 aura e'te', he will \ 
 
 
 Nous serons, we shall be. 
 
 N. aurons e'te', we shall t 
 
 § 
 
 Vous serez, you will be. 
 
 V. aurez e'te, you ivill ' 
 
 e 
 
 lis seront, they will be. 
 
 lis auront ete, they will t 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je serais, / should be. 
 
 J'aurais e'te', / shoidd ^ 
 
 
 Tu serais, thou shouldst be. 
 
 Tu aui'ais e'te, thou shouldst i 
 
 e 
 
 11 serait, he should be. 
 
 11 aurait ete, he shoidd ' 
 
 <a 
 
 Nous serions, we should be. 
 
 N. aurions e'te, we should I 
 
 <» 
 
 Vous seriez, you should be. 
 
 V. auriez e'te', you shoidd 
 
 e 
 
 lis seraient, they should be. 
 
 Us auraient ete', they shoidd J 
 
 
 IMPEKATIV1 
 
 : MOOD. 
 
 2. Sois, 
 
 be thou. 
 
 3. Qu'il soit, 
 
 let him be. 
 
 1. Soyons, 
 
 let us be. 
 
 2. Soyez, 
 
 Jtc. ye or you. 
 
 3. Qu'ils soienl, 
 
 let them be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je sois, that I may be. 
 Que tu sois, that thou mayst be. 
 Qu'il soit, that he may be. 
 Que n. soyons, that we may be. 
 Que v. soyez, that you may be. 
 Qu'ils soient, that they may be. 
 
 Que j'aie e'te', that / j s 
 Que tu aies e'te, that thou I Jj 
 Qu'il ait ete, that he \ s> 
 Que n. ayons e'te, that we f ** 
 Que v. ayez ete, that you I ^ 
 Qu'ils aient e'te, that they ) | 
 
 Imperfect: 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je fusse, that I \ 
 Que tu fusses, that thou / ^ 
 Qu'il fut, that he i^ 
 Que n. fussions, that we ? ^§> 
 Que v. fussiez, that you \ §j . 
 Qu'ils fussent, that they J 
 
 Que j'eusse ete', that I \ % 
 Que tu eusses etc', that thou 1 £ 
 Qu'il exit e'te', that he { § 
 Que n. eussions ete, that we f J~ 
 Que v. eussiez ete', that you \ ^ 
 Qu'ils eussent e'te, that they J -f 5 
 
 248. The student should remember that the ending 
 ent of the 3d person plural of verbs is silent; also that 
 the diphthong eu in the verb avoir is pronounced like 
 
90 
 
 FRENCH GEAHMAE. 
 
 [§ 249-251. 
 
 the simple vowel u; and, finally, that oy and ay are 
 equivalent respectively to oi-i, cd-i. See 31,18 JEtcc., 22. 
 
 i^T The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Fourteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 AUXILIARY VEEBS CONJUGATED INTEEEOGATIVELT. 
 
 249. The auxiliary verbs are conjugated interrogative- 
 ly in French by putting the pronoun-subject immediately 
 after the verb, and introducing a hyphen between them. 
 In the compound tenses the pronoun stands between the 
 verb and the participle. 
 
 250. A -Z-, called euphonic, is placed between the pro- 
 noun and the verb in the third person of the singular 
 number as often as the verb ends in a vowel (e or a). 
 
 a. This so called t euphonic is the vestige of a verbal termina- 
 tion now limited to the interrogative conjugation. In Old French 
 the third person singular of all verbs ended in t, as in Latin ; thus, 
 ai, as, at, / have, thou hast, he has ; and in the future third singular, 
 averat—auva.. 
 
 Remark. Verbs are not conjugated interrogatively in the imper- 
 ative mood, and rarely in the subjunctive mood. 
 
 Example I. 
 
 Ai-je? 
 
 have I? 
 
 Suis-je ? 
 
 am I? 
 
 As-tu ? 
 
 hast thou? 
 
 Es-tu ? 
 
 art thou ? 
 
 A-t-il ? 
 
 has he ? 
 
 Est-il ? 
 
 is he ? 
 
 A-t-elle ? 
 
 has she? 
 
 Est-elle ? 
 
 is she? 
 
 Avons-nous r 
 
 have we ? 
 
 Sommes-nous ? 
 
 are we ? 
 
 Avez-vous ? 
 
 have you ? 
 
 Etes-vous ? 
 
 are you ? 
 
 Ont-ils ? 
 
 have they ? 
 
 Sont-ils ? 
 
 are they ? 
 
 Example II. 
 
 Ai-je eu ? 
 
 have I had? 
 
 Ai-je ete? 
 
 have I been ? 
 
 As-tu eu? 
 
 hast thou had ? 
 
 ^As-tu ete? 
 
 hast thou been? 
 
 A-t-il eu? 
 
 has he had ? 
 
 A-t-il ete'? 
 
 has he been ? 
 
 Avons-nous eu \ 
 
 have ice had? 
 
 Avons-nous ete? 
 
 have we been ? 
 
 Avez-vous eu? 
 
 have you had? j 
 
 Avez-vous ete'? 
 
 have you been ? 
 
 Ont-ils eu? 
 
 have they had? 
 
 Ont-ils e'te' ? 
 
 have they been ? 
 
 Ont-elles eu ? 
 
 do. (/em.) 
 
 Ont-elles e'te'? 
 
 do. (fern.) 
 
 251. According to the models presented in Table I. 
 
§ 252-254.] Verb. 91 
 
 are conjugated all the simple tenses of avoir and etre ; 
 the compound tenses are inflected interrogatively after 
 Table II. 
 
 SE^ The student should inflect the auxiliaries interrogatively 
 and negatively (see 254), as well as affirmatively, in all the 
 moods and tenses (except 250, Remark), until he can do so 
 with facility. 
 
 252. Whenever the pronoun je is placed after a verb 
 (as in the interrogative form), it unites with the verb in 
 pronunciation, forming a single syllable with it. The c 
 of the pronoun is then, of course, silent (Rule 5). 
 
 Ai-je, pronounced as if written aije. 
 Suis-je, " " " suije. 
 
 If the verb contains more than one syllable, the pro- 
 noun unites in sound with the last. 
 
 Av&is-je,pronoimced as if written aveje. 
 Etais-je, " " " eteje. 
 
 253. We have another mode of expressing interroga- 
 tion in French, and which seems to be preferred in con- 
 versation and in the familiar style of writing. This 
 mode is effected by placing the term est-ce que before 
 the pronoun-subject and its verb; as, 
 
 Est-ce que j'ai ? have IP (Is it that I have f) 
 Est-ce que tu as ? hast thou P (Is it that thou hast P) 
 Est-ce qu'il a ? has he P (Is it that he has P) 
 Est-ce que je suis ? am I? (Is it that I am P) 
 Est-ce que tu es? art thou? (Is it that thou art?) 
 Est-ce qu'il est ? is he P (Is it that he is P) 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
 THE AUXILIARY VERBS CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 
 
 254. To render a verb negative in French, the adverb 
 ne (before a vowel or h mute, ?i') is put immediately be- 
 fore the verb, and pas after it ; in the compound tenses 
 the complement pas stands between the auxiliary and 
 the participle. 
 
92 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 255, 256. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 
 Je n'ai pas, I have not. 
 
 Je ne suis pas, 
 
 / am not. 
 
 Tu n'as pas, ihou hast not. 
 
 Tu n'es pas, 
 
 thou art not. 
 
 11 n'a pas, he has not. 
 
 11 n'est pas, 
 
 he is not. 
 
 N. n'avons pas, ice have not. 
 
 N. ne sommes pas 
 
 ice are not. 
 
 V. n'avez pas, you have not. 
 
 V. n'etes pas, 
 
 you are not. 
 
 Us n'ont pas, they have not. 
 
 Us ne sont pas, 
 
 they are not. 
 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 
 
 Je n'ai pas eu, 
 
 I have \ 
 
 Je n'ai pas ete, 
 
 I have \ 
 
 
 Tu n'as pas eu, 
 
 thou hast 1 r^j 
 
 Tu n'as pas ete, 
 
 thou hast 1 
 
 
 11 n'a pas eu, 
 
 he has ( e 
 
 11 n'a pas ete, 
 
 he has \ 
 
 
 N. n'avons pas eu 
 
 , we have ? *o 
 
 N. n'avons pas ete 
 
 ice have ( 
 
 
 V. n'avez pas eu, 
 
 you have V k 
 
 V. n'avez pas ete, 
 
 you have \ 
 
 
 Us n'ont pas eu, 
 
 they have ) 
 
 lis n'ont pas ete', 
 
 they have ) 
 
 
 Simple Tenses — Interrogative. 
 
 N'ai-je pas ? have I not ? 
 
 N'as-tu pas ? hast thou not ? 
 
 N'a-t-il pas? has he not? 
 
 N'avons-nous pas ? have. we not? 
 N'avez-vous pas ? have you not ? 
 N'ont-ils pas ? have they not ? 
 
 Ne suis-je pas ? a?n I not ? 
 
 N'es-tu pas ? art thou not? 
 
 N'est-il pas ? is he not ? 
 
 Ne sommes-nouspas? are ice not ? 
 jN'ctes-vous pas ? are you not ? 
 
 JNe sont-ils pas? are they not? 
 
 Compound Tense s — Interrogative. 
 
 have I "j 
 hast thou 
 has she \ 
 
 N'ai-je pas eu? 
 N'as-tu pas eu ? 
 N'a-t-il pas eu? 
 N'avons-nouspaseu?/iare ice i*^ 
 N'avez-vous pas eu ? have you | § 
 N'ont-ils pas eu ? have they 
 
 N'ai-je pas ete ? have I ~\ 
 
 N'as-tu pas eie? hast thou "*• 
 N'a-t-il pas ete ? has he > %, 
 N'avons-nous pas ete'? have we |^ 
 N'avez-vous pas ete ? have you § 
 N'ont-ils pas e'te? havetheui 
 
 255. The complement of the negative may be express- 
 ed by point instead of pas ; point is more emphatic than 
 pas, and is sometimes rendered not at all, by no means. 
 Je n'ai pas, I have not. Je ne suis pas, I am not. 
 Je n'ai point, I have not at Je ne suis point, I am not 
 all. at all. 
 
 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Fifteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERES. 
 
 256. In French there are four conjugations, distin- 
 guished by the ending of the present infinitive. All 
 
§ 257-259.] veeb. 93 
 
 verbs belong to one of these four conjugations. Those 
 verbs of which the infinitive ends in er belong to the first 
 conjugation; those ending in ir, to the second; those 
 ending in oir, to the third ; and those ending in re be- 
 long to the fourth conjugation. 
 
 1st Conj., characteristic er; as, chant-er. 
 
 2d Conj., characteristic ir; &s,fin-ir. 
 
 3d Conj., characteristic oir ; as, recev-oir. 
 
 4th Conj., characteristic re; as, vend-re. 
 
 257. That part of a verb which remains after separa- 
 ting the characteristic infinitive-ending is called the root 
 or radical ; thus chant is the root of chanter, fin of finir, 
 recev of recevoir, and vend of vendre. Those letters 
 w T hich are joined to the verb-root, to express the various 
 modifications of mood, tense, person, and number, are 
 called the endings or terminations ; thus, in the exam- 
 ple je donnerai, donn is the root, and erai the ending of 
 the first person singular of the indicative future. 
 
 258. Verbs are divided into regular, irregular, and de- 
 fective. 
 
 a. A regular verb is one which is inflected through all 
 its moods and tenses like the model verb of the conjuga- 
 tion to which it belongs. 
 
 b. An irregidar verb is one which is not conjugated 
 like the model verb. 
 
 c. A defective verb is one which is wanting in certain 
 tenses and persons. 
 
 259. The following Table presents the terminations of 
 the four conjugations : 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 First 
 
 -er. 
 
 -ant. 
 
 -e. 
 
 Second 
 
 -ir. 
 
 -issant. 
 
 -]. 
 
 Third 
 
 -oir.* 
 
 -evant. 
 
 -u. 
 
 Fourth 
 
 -re. 
 
 -ant. 
 
 -u. 
 
 * Verbs of the Third Conjugation are inflected on the theme ob- 
 tained by rejecting the ending evoir of the infinitive ; thus the root 
 of recevoir is recev, but the theme is reg: that of devoir, d. 
 
94 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 259. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. | 
 
 Present. | 
 
 CONJUGA- 
 i TION. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st 
 Person. 
 
 2d 
 Person. 
 
 3d. 
 Person. 
 
 1st 
 Person. 
 
 2d 
 
 Person. 
 
 3d 
 Person. 
 
 First. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -es. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -ons. 
 
 -ez. 
 
 -ent. 
 
 ! Second. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -IS. 
 
 -it. 
 
 -issons. 
 
 -issez. 
 
 -issent. 
 
 i Third. 
 
 -ois. 
 
 -01S. 
 
 -Olt. 
 
 -evons. 
 
 -evez. 
 
 -oivent. 
 
 ; Fourth. 
 
 -s. 
 
 -S. 
 
 vanes. 
 
 -ons. 
 
 -ez. 
 
 -ent. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 First. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -ait. 
 
 -ions. 
 
 -iez. 
 
 -aient. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -issais. 
 
 -issais. 
 
 -issait. 
 
 -issions. 
 
 -issiez. 
 
 -issaient. 
 
 Third. 
 
 -evais. 
 
 -evais. 
 
 -evait. 
 
 -evions. 
 
 -eviez. 
 
 -evaient. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -ait. 
 
 -ions. 
 
 -iez. 
 
 -aient. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 First. 
 
 -ai. 
 
 -as. 
 
 -a. 
 
 -ames. 
 
 -atcs. 
 
 -erent. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -it. 
 
 -lmes. 
 
 -ites. 
 
 -irent. 
 
 Third. 
 
 -us. 
 
 -us. 
 
 -ut. 
 
 -umes. 
 
 -Cites. 
 
 -urent. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -it. 
 
 -lmes. 
 
 -ites. 
 
 -irent. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 
 First. 
 
 -erai. 
 
 -eras. 
 
 -era. 
 
 -erons. 
 
 -erez. 
 
 -eront. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -irai. 
 
 -iras. 
 
 -ira. 
 
 -irons. 
 
 -irez. 
 
 -iront. 
 
 Third. 
 
 -evrai. 
 
 -evras. 
 
 -evra. 
 
 -evrons. 
 
 -evrez. 
 
 -evront. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -rai. 
 
 -ras. 
 
 -ra. 
 
 -rons. 
 
 -rez. 
 
 -ront. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Peesent. 
 
 First. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -erait. i -erions. 
 
 -eriez. 
 
 -eraient. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -irais. 
 
 -irais. 
 
 -irait. -irions. 
 
 -Inez. 
 
 -iraient. 
 
 Third. 
 
 -evrais. 
 
 -evrais . 
 
 -evrai t. -evrions. 
 
 -evriez. 
 
 -evraient. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -rais. 
 
 -rais. 
 
 -rait. | -rions. 
 
 -nez. 
 
 -raient. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 First. 
 Second. 
 
 f 
 
 -e. 
 
 -is. 
 
 -e. 
 -isse. 
 
 -ons. 
 -issons. 
 
 -ez. 
 
 -issez. 
 
 -ent. 
 -issent. 
 
 Third. 
 
 1 
 
 -ois. 
 
 -oive. 
 
 -evons. 
 
 -evez. 
 
 -oivent. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -s. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -ons. 
 
 -ez. 
 
 -ent. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 First. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -es. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -ions. 
 
 -iez. 
 
 -ent. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -isse. 
 
 -isses. 
 
 -isse. 
 
 -issions. 
 
 -issiez. 
 
 -issent. 
 
 Third. 
 Fourth. 
 
 -oive. 
 -e. 
 
 -oives. 
 -es. 
 
 -oive. 
 -e. 
 
 -evions. 
 -ions. 
 
 -eviez. 
 -iez. 
 
 -oivent. 
 -ent. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 First. 
 
 -asse. 
 
 -asses. 
 
 -at. 
 
 -assions. 
 
 -assiez. 
 
 -assent. 
 
 Second. 
 
 -isse. 
 
 -isses. 
 
 -it. 
 
 -issions. 
 
 -issiez. 
 
 -issent. 
 
 Third. 
 
 -usse. 
 
 -usses. 
 
 -ut. 
 
 -ussions. 
 
 -ussiez. 
 
 -ussent. 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 -isse. 
 
 -isses. 
 
 -it. 
 
 -issions. 
 
 -issiez. 
 
 -issent. 
 
 _! 
 
259.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 95 
 
 [The above table of verb-endings is drawn up in con- 
 formity to the so-called " Old System." For the use of 
 those who desire a simpler method, and one resting on 
 modern scientific results, we present the subjoined table, 
 specially adapted to those who are accustomed to the 
 analytic treatment of the Greek verb as illustrated by 
 Thiersch and Curtius. By applying these terminations 
 to the stem,' in accordance with the key which follows 
 the table, the learner can inflect any French regular verb ; 
 he has, therefore, only to learn these endings and the 
 Rules in the key to make himself master of the French 
 Conjugation. 
 
 The Figures indicate the Conjugation. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Future {.from 
 Infin.). 
 
 
 1. 2. 3.4. 
 
 1.2.3.4. 
 
 1. 2. 4. 3. 
 
 1.2.3.4. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 -e -is -s 
 
 -ais 
 
 -ai -is -us 
 
 -ai 
 
 2d Pers. 
 
 -es -is -s 
 
 -ais 
 
 -as -is -us 
 
 -as 
 
 3d Pers. 
 
 -e -it -t 
 
 -ait 
 
 -a -it -ut 
 
 -a 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 -ons -ons -ons 
 
 -ions 
 
 -ames -imes -limes 
 
 -ons 
 
 2d Pers. 
 
 -ez -ez -ez 
 
 -lez 
 
 -ates -ites -utes 
 
 -ez 
 
 3d Pers. 
 
 -ent -ent -ent 
 
 -aient 
 
 -erent -irent -urent 
 
 -ont 
 
 
 Conditional 
 (fromlnjln.). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 4. 3. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -asse 
 
 -isse -usse. 
 
 2d Pers. 
 
 -ais. 
 
 -es. 
 
 -asses 
 
 -isses -usses. 
 
 Sd Pers. 
 
 -ait. 
 
 -e. 
 
 -at 
 
 -it -lit. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 -ions. 
 
 -ions. 
 
 -assions 
 
 -issions -ussions. 
 
 2d Pers. 
 
 -lez. 
 
 -lez. 
 
 -assiez 
 
 -issiez -ussiez. 
 
 3d Pers. 
 
 -aient. 
 
 -ent. 
 
 -assent 
 
 -issent -usscnt. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. • 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 3. 4. 
 
 
 -ant. 
 
 
 -e. 
 
 -i. *-u. 
 
90 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 259. 
 
 RULES FOR THE USE OF THE TABLE OF VERBAL ENDINGS. 
 
 Stem. 
 The Present Infinitive of all French verbs ends in er, 
 ir, oir or re. The stem of a verb is that part which re- 
 mains after cutting off one of these endings. 
 
 1st Conjugation — characteristic er. 
 The endings belonging to this conjugation are attach- 
 ed directly to the stem, except those of the Future and 
 Conditional, which are applied to the Present Infinitive. 
 
 2d Conjugation — characteristic ir. 
 
 The peculiarity of this conjugation consists in the in- 
 tercalation of the syllable -iss- between the stem and the 
 verbal endings in the following cases: in the Present 
 Participle ; in the Plural of the Indicative Present ; in 
 the Imperfect Indicative; in the Present Subjunctive; 
 and in the Plural of the Imperative. 
 
 In the remaining forms of verbs of this conjugation, 
 the endings are applied directly to the stem. The Fu- 
 ture and Conditional, as before, are derived from the In- 
 finitive. 
 
 3d Conjugation — characteristic oir. 
 
 Verbs of this conjugation are inflected on three differ- 
 ent stems : the 1st stem is found by rejecting -oir of the 
 Infinitive (recev) ; the 2d by rejecting -evoir (rec) ; and 
 the 3d by rejecting oi (recevr). 
 
 Frcm the first stem (recev) are formed the Present 
 Indicative, Imperfect do., Present Subjunctive, and Pres- 
 ent Participle, by applying the tabular endings. 
 
 From the second stem (rec) are formed the Past Def- 
 inite, Imperfect Subjunctive, and Past Participle. This 
 stem uniformly assumes the cedilla (9). 
 
 From the third stem (recevr) are formed the Future 
 and Conditional. 
 
§ 259.] 
 
 VEKB. 
 
 97 
 
 Euphonic Changes. 
 The First Stem requires the following changes: 1st, 
 v before an s or t is dropped, and the foregoing e length- 
 ened into oi; 2d, e, followed by v with e mute (ve, ves, 
 vent), becomes oi. 
 
 4th Conjugation— characteristic re. 
 
 The endings in the table are attached directly to the 
 stem. When this (the stem) ends in d, c, or t, in the In- 
 dicative Present 3d Singular, the termination t of the ta- 
 ble is dropped. The Future and Conditional are formed 
 by eliding the final e of the Infinitive before applying 
 the characteristic endings. 
 
 The Imperative, in the three last conjugations, is the 
 same in form with the corresponding persons of the Pres- 
 ent Indicative. 
 
 In the First Conjugation, the s of the second person 
 Singular Present is rejected for the Imperative.] 
 
 PARADIGM OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Chanter, to sing. 
 
 Stmtoe Tenses. INFINITIVE MOOD. . Compound Tenses. jl 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Chanter, to sing. 
 
 Avoir chante, to have sung. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Chantant, singing. 
 
 Ayant chante, having sung. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Chante, sung. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je chante, I sing. 
 Tu chantes, thou singest. 
 11 chante, he sings. 
 Nous chantons, ice sing. 
 Vous chantez, you sing. 
 lis chantent, they sing. 
 
 J'ai chante, I have sung. 
 Tu as chante, thou hast sung. 
 11 a chante, he has sung. 
 N. avons chante, ice have sung. 
 V. avez chante, you have sung. 
 lis ont chante, they have sung. 
 
98 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 259. 
 
 i INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Je chantais, / ivas singing. 
 
 Tu chantais, thou icast singing. 
 
 11 chantait, he was singing. 
 
 N. chantions, we were singing. 
 | V. chantiez, you were singing. 
 ! lis chantaient. they were singing. 
 
 J'avais chante', I had \ ^ 
 Tu avais chante', thou hadst I .g" 
 11 avait chante, he had I »■ 
 N. avions chante, we had f'% 
 V. aviez chante', you had \ § 
 lis avaient chante, they had J ** 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je chantai, I sang. 
 Tu chantas, thou sangest. 
 11 chanta, he sang. 
 N. chantames, ice sang. 
 V. chantates, you sang. 
 lis chanterent, they sang. 
 
 J'eus chante, I had sung. 
 Tu eus chante, thou hadst sung. 
 11 eut chante, he had sung. 
 N. eumes chante, ice had sung. 
 V. eutes chante, you had sung. 
 lis eurent chante', they had sung. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je chanterai, I shall sing. 
 
 Tu chanteras, thou wilt sing. 
 
 11 chanteva, he will sing. 
 
 N. chanterons, we shall sing. 
 j V. chanterez, you will sing. 
 J lis chanteront, they ivill sing. 
 
 J'aurai chante, I shall \ 
 Tu auras chante', thou wilt J fc> 
 11 aura chante', he will ( | 
 N. aurons chante', ice shall ( « 
 V. aurez chante, you will \ § 
 Us auront chante, they will J ■ 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je chanterai?, 
 Tu chanterai.-?, 
 II clianterait, 
 N. chanterions, 
 V. chanteriez, 
 
 1 should sing, 
 thou icouldst sinj. 
 he would sing, 
 we should sing, 
 you would sinq. 
 
 lis chanteraient, they loould sing. 
 
 Past. 
 
 J'aurais chante, 
 Tu aurais chante. 
 II aiirait chante, 
 N. aurions chante 
 V. aurieE chante, 
 
 / should 
 thou ivouldst i 
 tie icould ' 
 we should i 
 you would 
 
 lis auraient cliante, they would 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. Chante, 
 
 3. Qu'il chante, 
 
 1. Cliantons, 
 
 2. Chantez, 
 
 3. Qu'ils chantent, 
 
 sing thou, 
 let him sing, 
 let us sing, 
 sing ye or you. 
 let them sing. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je chante, that I may sing. 
 Cue tu chautes, that thou mayst sing. 
 Qu'il chante, tJiat he may sing. 
 Que n. chantion3, that we may sing. 
 Que v. chantiez, that you may sing. 
 Qu'ils chantent, that they mail sina. 
 
 Que j'aie chante, that I may ~\ . 
 Que tu aiss chante, that thou may f | 
 Qu'il ait chante, that he mail { g 
 Que n. ayons chante, that ice may / c 
 Que v. ayez chante, that you may \ t 
 Qu'ils aient chante, that they may) ^ 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je chantasse, tliat I \ . 
 Que tu chantasse?, that thou f Jj 
 Qu'il chantat, that he f "« 
 Que n. chantassions, that we f ^ 
 Que v. chantassiez, that you \ § 
 Qu'ils chantassent, that they J S 
 
 Que j'eusse chante, that I ^g 
 Que tu eusses chante, that thou J § 
 Qu'il eut chante, that he I ^ |> 
 Que n. eussions chante, that ice /" -3 g 
 Que v. ensslez eltlvnte, that you \'S °° 
 Qu'ils cu-:-f nt chante, that they ) ^ 
 
§ 260-263.] VERB. • 99 
 
 EUPHONIC CHANGES IN VERBS OP THE FIRST CONJU- 
 GATION. 
 
 260. The following modifications in certain letters of 
 the verbal-root are necessary to insure a uniform pro- 
 nunciation. 
 
 261. In verbs of which the infinitive ends in cer, the c 
 
 assumes the cedilla (9) as often as by inflection it would 
 
 be followed by a or o. This change is made to preserve 
 
 the soft sound of c in all positions. See 35. 
 
 Nous platoons, ive place, ] 
 
 Placant, .placing, V from placer, to place. 
 
 Je placai, /placed, ) 
 
 Nous commencames, we began, from commencer, to begin. 
 
 262. Verbs of which the infinitive ends in ger, retain 
 
 e before a or 0. This e is silent, its sole oifice being to 
 
 maintain in every position the sound which g has in the 
 
 infinitive. See 37, 38, a. 
 
 Mangeant, eating, j | f 
 
 Mangeons, let us eat, j & ' 
 
 Je jugeai, I judged, \ 
 
 Iljugea, he judged, > from juger, to judge. 
 
 lis jugeaient, they judged, J 
 
 263. Verbs of which the infinitive ends in ayer, oyer, 
 or uyer, change the y into i as often as it is followed by 
 an e silent. 
 
 from payer, to pay. 
 
 lis emploient, they employ, J from employer, to employ. 
 
 J'appuie, I lean ) appuyer, to lean. ■ 
 
 J'appuierai, / shall lean, j l e J ' 
 
 Remark. When e is pronounced, the y is of course 
 retained ; as, 
 
 Vous payez ($6), you pay. 
 Vous employez, ?/<??« employ. 
 Vous appuyez, ?/om Zea?z. 
 
 Je paie, 
 
 I pay, 
 
 Tu paies, 
 
 thou payest, 
 
 lis paient, 
 
 they pay, 
 
 Je paierai, 
 
 I shall pay, 
 
 J'emploie, 
 
 I employ, 
 
100 FREXCH GRAMMAR. [§ 264, 265. 
 
 264. Verbs of which the infinitive ends in elei\ or eter, 
 
 double the I and t as often as they are followed by an e 
 
 silent. 
 
 J'appelle, I call ) ~ , . 77 
 
 lis appellent, they call, ) from a PP eler ' t0 calL 
 
 Je jette, / throw, ) 
 
 Tu jettes, Mow throwest, V from jeter, to ihroic. 
 
 Je jetterai, / s^a// throw. ) 
 
 Exception's. Acheter, to buy; geler, to freeze; and peler, to peel, 
 are prominent exceptions to the rule. See 265. If the stu- 
 dent is in doubt as to when e is silent, he should turn to the 
 pronunciation, and read over rules 5 and 31. 
 
 265. Verbs of which the infinitive ends in ei\ having 
 an e unaccented or an e acute in the syllable preceding, 
 change those vowels into e grave as often as the next 
 syllable contains an e mute. 
 
 Je mene, I lead, ~} 
 
 lis menenr, they lead, > from mener, to lead. 
 
 Je menerai, I shall lead, ) 
 
 Je cede, I yield, from ceder, to yield. 
 
 J'achete, / buy, from acheter, to buy. 
 
 a. Verbs in eger, however, retain their original accent 
 in all their inflections. 
 
 %W The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Sixteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 PARADIGM OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 FixiR, to finish. 
 
 Simple Tenses. INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Pkesent. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Finir, to finish. 
 
 Avoir fini, to have finished. 
 
 Paeticiple. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Finissant, finishing. 
 
 Ayant fini, having finished. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fini, finished. 
 
§ 265.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 101 
 
 INDICA i IVE MOOD. 
 
 ■ Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je tinis, I finish. 
 Ta finis, thoufinishest. 
 11 finit, he finishes. 
 Nous finissons, we finish. 
 Vous finissez, you finish. 
 lis finissent, they finish. 
 
 J'ai fini, 1 have finished. 
 Tu as fini, f/zew hast finished. 
 11 a fini, Ae has finished. 
 N. aA r ons fini, zt-e have finished. 
 V. avez fini, ?/ozt have finished. 
 lis ont fini, Z/ie^ have finished. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Je finissais, I was finishing. . 
 Tu finissais, thou wast finishing. 
 11 finissait, he teas finishing. 
 N. finissions, we were finishing . 
 V. finissiez, you w ere finishing . 
 lis finissaient, they were finishing. 
 
 J'avais fini, I had finished. 
 Tu avais fini, ?/;02< hadst finished. 
 !1 avait fini, Zte had finished. 
 N. avions fini, we had finished. 
 V. aviez fini, yow had finished. 
 [Is avaient fini, i'/zej/ had finished. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je finis, 1 finished. 
 Tu finis, thou didst finish. 
 11 finit, he did finish. 
 N. finimes, ice finished. 
 V. finites, you finished. 
 lis finirent, they finished. 
 
 J'eus fini, I had finished. 
 Tu cus fini, Mozt hadst finished. 
 11 eut fini, /ze had finished. 
 N. eumes fini, 2#e had finished. 
 V. eutes fini, yem had finished. 
 lis eurent fini, £/je?y had finished. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je finirai, / shall finish. 
 Tu finiras, ?/i02< a-ilt finish. 
 11 finira, /ze will finish. 
 Nous finirons, zt'e shall finish. 
 ' Vous finirez, ?/o?« will finish. 
 lis finiront, Me^ will-finish. 
 
 J'aurai fini, I shall have ~\ 
 Tu auras fini, thou wilt have 1 -^ 
 11 aura fini, he w ill have I ^ 
 N. aurons fini, ice shall have C *g 
 V. aurez fini, t yo?« will have \ ^j 
 Us auront fini, they icill hare ) 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je finirais, 
 Tu finirais, 
 II finirair, 
 N. finirions, 
 V. finiriez, 
 
 I should finish, 
 thou icoiddst finish, 
 he would finish. 
 we should finish, 
 you would finish. 
 
 lis finiraient, they icould finish. 
 
 J'aurais fini, 
 Tu aurais fini, 
 II aurait fini, 
 N. auvions fini, 
 V. auriez fini, 
 
 / should 
 thou wouldst 
 he would 
 we should 
 you would 
 
 lis auraient fini, they icould 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. Finis, 
 
 3. Qu'il finisse, 
 
 1. Finissons, 
 
 2. Finissez, 
 
 3. Qu'ils finissent 
 
 finish thou, 
 let him finish, 
 let us finish, 
 finish ye or you. 
 let them finish. 
 
 i 
 
102 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 265. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Quejefinisse, iliac 1 may ^ 
 Que tu finisses, that thou mayst 1 ^ 
 Qu'il finisse, that he may ["% 
 Que n. finissions, that ice may [ g 
 Que v. finissiez, that you may 1 "^ 
 Qu'ils finissent, that they may J 
 
 Que j'aie fini, that I may *) ■« 
 Que tu aies fini, that thou may < 
 Qu'il ait fini, that he may 1 •§ 
 Que n. ayons fini, that ice may f ^ 
 Que v. ayez fini, that you may 1 g 
 Qu'ils aient fini, that they may] & 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je finisse, that I might finish. 
 Que tu finisses, that thou might finish. 
 Qu'il finit, that he might finish. 
 Que n.finissions, that ice might' finish. 
 Que v. finissiez, that you might finish. 
 •u'ils finissent, t liat they might finish. 
 
 Que j'eusse fini, that I might ~\ ^j 
 Que tu cusses fini, that thou might ^ 
 Qu'il eat fini, that he might I -~ 
 Que n. eussions fini, that ice might (<^ 
 Que v. eussiez" fini, that you might | SH 
 Qu'il eussent fini, that they might J J 
 
 PARADIGM OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Recevoir, to receive. 
 
 Simple Tenses. INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Prsent. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Recevoir, to receive. 
 
 Avoir recti, to have received. 
 
 Paetktple. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Recevant, receiving. 
 
 Ayant recu, having received. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Recti, received. 
 
266.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 103 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je rectus, / received. 
 Tu re^ue, thou didst receive. 
 11 re9ut, he did receive. 
 Nous refines, we received. 
 1 Vous refutes, you received. 
 lis re^urent, they received. 
 
 J'eus re9u, 1 had received. 
 Tu eus recu, thouhadst received. 
 11 eut recu, fe had received. 
 N. eutmes reQu, we had received. 
 V. eutes re9U, you had received. 
 lis eurent regu, Me,?/ /*ac? received. 
 
 FUTUKB. 
 
 I'Uture Perfect. 
 
 Je recevrai, I shall receive. 
 Tu recevras, thou wilt receive. 
 11 recevra, he will receive. 
 Nous recevrons, we shall receive. 
 Vous recevrez, you zvill receive. 
 J lis recevront, they will receive. 
 
 J'aurai re^u, / shall have < 
 Tu auras re9u, Mew w?'//; Aare 
 11 aura re9u, ^e a>*7/ /wye 
 N. aurons re9u, we shall have 
 V. aurez re9U, you will have 
 lis auront re9u, they will havej 
 
 "55 
 
 1 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je recevrais, I should ~\ 
 
 
 J'aurais re9u, / should "] 
 
 "a 
 
 Tu recevrais, thou wouldst 
 
 
 Tu aurais re9u, thouwouldst 
 
 
 11 recevrait, he would 
 
 .§ 
 
 11 aurait re9U, Ae would 
 
 § 
 
 N. recevrions, we should 
 
 f s 
 
 N. aurions re9U, we should 
 
 ( t 
 
 V. recevriez, you woidd 
 
 K 
 
 V. auriez 1-0911, yow would 
 
 
 j lis rccevraient, they would ., 
 
 
 lis auraient re9U, ^e^ «,w/7d „ 
 
 **\ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. Echols, 
 
 receive thou. 
 
 3. Qu'il re9oive, 
 
 let him receive. 
 
 1. Recevous, 
 
 let us receive. 
 
 2. Recevez, 
 
 receive ye or you. 
 
 3. Qu'ils re9oivent, 
 
 let them receive. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je regoive, that I may ^ 
 Que tu repoives, that thou may I ^ 
 Qu'il regoive, that he may I •§ 
 Que nous recevions, that ice may f § 
 Que vou3 receviez, that you may S 
 Qu'ils recoivent, that they may J 
 
 Que j'aie repu, that I may ~\ 'g 
 Que tu aies repu, £/ia£ Moi« may .g 
 Qu'il ait repu, that he may ' 
 Que n. ayons repu, that we may [ si 
 Que v. ayez repu, that you may § 
 Qu'ils aient repu, that they may J « 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je repusse, that I might ~\ 
 Que tu reg usses, that thou might ^ 
 Qu'il recut, that he might I •§ 
 Que n. repussions, that we might j | 
 Que v. repussiez, that you might *> 
 Qu'ils rep ussent, £fta£ </iey mi'fl/^ J 
 
 Que j'eusse repu, that I ~\ ^ 
 Que tu eusses repu, that thou § -« 
 Qu'il eut repu, that he {^ .g 
 Que n, eussions repu, that ice ( S § 
 Que v. eussiez repu, that you | ■§* £ 
 Qu'ils eussent recu, that thei/ j s 
 
 266. Verbs of this conjugation, ending in cevoir, as- 
 
104 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 2 67. 
 
 sume the cedilla (9) as often as the c comes before «, o, 
 or u. 
 
 267. The verb devoir is conjugated on the theme d if 
 the scheme on page 93 is adopted ; but if that on page 
 95 is chosen, this verb is inflected on the three stems 
 (dev, d, devr) ; as, je dois, je devais, je dus, je devrai, je 
 devrais, que je doive, que je dusse. 
 
 a. The u of the past participle of devoir takes a cir- 
 cumflex accent in the masculine singular, as dti ; but 
 fern, due, and plur. dus ; fern, dues, regular. 
 
 ESP The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Seventeenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 PARADIGM OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION". 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Vendue, to sell. 
 
 Simple Tenses. INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenser 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Vendre, to sell. 
 
 Avoir vendu, to have sold. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Vend ant,, selling. 
 
 Ay ant vendn, having sold. 
 
 * 
 
 Past. 
 
 Vendu, sold. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je vends, I sell. 
 Tu vends, thou sellest. 
 11 vend, he sells. 
 Nous vendons, we sell. 
 Vous vendez, you sell. 
 lis vendent, they sell. 
 
 J'ai vendu, I have sold. 
 Tu as vendu, thou hast sold. 
 11 a vendu, he has sold. 
 N. avons vendu, we have sold. 
 V. avez vendu, you have sold. 
 lis ont vendu, they have sold, j 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Je vendais, I was selling. 
 Tu vendais, thou ivast selling. 
 11 vendait, he was selling. 
 Nous vendions, ice were selling. 
 Vous vendiez, you were selling. 
 lis vendaient, they were selling. 
 
 J'avais vendu, / had sold. 
 Tu avais vendu, thou hadst sold. ; 
 11 avait vendu, he had sold. 
 N. avions A r endu, ice had sold. 
 V. aviez vendu, you had sold. 
 lis avaient vendu, they had sold. 
 
§ 267.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 105 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je vendis, I sold. 
 
 J'eus vendu, I had sold. 
 
 Tu vendis, thou didst sell. 
 
 Tu eus vendu, thou hadst sold. 
 
 11 vendit, he sold. 
 
 11 eut vendu, he had sold. 
 
 Nous vendimes, ice sold. 
 
 N. eunfes vendu, we had sold. 
 
 Vous vendues, you sold. 
 
 V. eutes vendu, you had sold. 
 
 Us vendirent, they sold. 
 
 Us euvent vendu, they had sold. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je vendrai, I shall sell. 
 
 J'aurai vendu, / shall ~"| 
 
 
 Tu vendras, thou icilt sell. 
 
 Tu auras vendu, thou icilt 
 
 Jjs 
 
 11 vendra, he will sell. 
 
 11 aura vendu, he will 
 
 o 
 
 Nous vendrons, we sjiall sell. 
 
 N. aurons vendu, we shall 
 
 f> 
 
 Vous vendrez, you will sell. 
 
 V. aurez vendu, you will 
 
 a 
 
 Us vendront, they will sell. 
 
 Us auront vendu, they will j 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je vendrais, I should sell. 
 Tu vendrais, thou wouldst sell. 
 11 vendrait, he would sell. 
 N. vendrions, we should sell. 
 V. vendriez, you icould sell. 
 Us vendraient, they icould sell. 
 
 J'aurais vendu, I should 
 Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldst 
 11 aurait vendu, he would 
 N.aurions vendu, we should 
 V. auriez vendu, you would 
 Us auraient vendu, they would J 
 
 3j 
 
 o 
 
 >l 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 f<5 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. Vends, 
 
 3. Qu'il vende, 
 
 1. Vendons, 
 
 2. Vendez, 
 
 3. Qu'ils vendent, 
 
 sell thou, 
 let him sell. 
 
 let us sell, 
 sell ye or you. 
 let them sell. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je vende, that I may sell. 
 Que tu vendes, that thou mayst sell. 
 Qu'il vende, that he may sell. 
 Que n. vendions, that ice may sell. 
 Que v. vendiez, that you may sell. 
 Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell. 
 
 Que j'aie vendu, that I may ~\ 
 Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst | S 
 Qu'il ait vendu, that he may I § 
 Que n. ayons vendu, that we may ( g 
 Que v. ayez vendu, that you may \ § 
 Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may J *"~ 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je vendisse, that I might sell. 
 Que tu vendisses, that thou might sell. 
 Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. 
 Que n. vendissions, that we might sell. 
 )uc v. vendissiez, tltat you might sell. 
 Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell. 
 
 Que j'eusse vendu, that I "\ g 
 Que tu eusses vendu, that thou e 
 Qu'il eut vendu, that he I* 3?" 
 Que n. eussions vendu, that we f S "g 
 Que v. eussiez vendu, tlvit you "s 5 
 Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they J s 
 
 E 2 
 
106 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 268-272. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS INTERROGA- 
 TIVELY. 
 
 268. Verbs are inflected interrogatively by placing the 
 pronoun-subject after them with a hyphen; as, 
 Finis-je? do I finish? Vendrez-vous ? shall you sell? 
 Recoit-il ? does he receive ? Chantes-tu ? dost thou sing ? 
 
 269. A -t-, called euphonic, is placed between the pro- 
 noun and the verb used interrogatively, when the latter 
 stands in the third person, singular number, and ends 
 with a vowel (e or a) ; as, 
 
 Donne-t-il? does he give ? Finira-t-elle ? will she finish? 
 Chanta-t-il? did he sing? Recevra-t-il ? will he receive? 
 
 a. This so-called euphonic t is a vestige of the regular termination. 
 These verbs in old French (langue d'oil) would be written donet 
 (donne), chantat (chanta), finirat (finira), and recevrat (recevra). In 
 modern French the t has been rejected, except in the interrogative 
 form of the verb. The first hyphen, then, is, strictly speaking, super- 
 fluous. 
 
 270. Verbs are conjugated interrogatively in the tenses 
 of the indicative and conditional only. 
 
 271. If the verb employed interrogatively ends with a 
 silent e in the first person singular, the e becomes vocal, 
 and takes the acute accent ; as, 
 
 Chante-je? do I sing ? Donne-je? do I give? 
 
 272. The interrogative formula est-ce que is employed 
 as with auxiliaries (253), in which case the pronoun-sub- 
 ject precedes the verb ; as, 
 
 Est-ce queje vends? do I Est-ce que je recois ? do I 
 sell ? receive ? 
 
§ 272.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 107 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Chante-je? 
 
 Finis-je ? 
 
 Chantes-tu ? 
 
 Finis-tu ? 
 
 Chante-t-il ? 
 
 Finit-il ? • 
 
 Chantons-nous? 
 
 Finissons-nous ? 
 
 Chantez-vous ? 
 
 Finissez-vous ? 
 
 Chantent-ils ? 
 
 Finissent-ils ? 
 
 Re9ois-je ? 
 
 Est-ce que je vends ? 
 
 Ke9ois-tu ? 
 
 Vends-tu ? 
 
 Re90it.il ? 
 
 Vend-il(d=*; 59)? 
 
 Recevons-nous ? 
 
 Vendons-nous ? 
 
 Recevez-vous ? 
 
 Vendez-vous ? 
 
 Re9oivent-ils ? 
 
 Vendent-ils ? 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Chantais-je ? 
 
 Finissais-je ? 
 
 Chantais-tu ? 
 
 Finissais-tu ? 
 
 Chantait-il? 
 
 Finissait-il ? 
 
 Chantions-nous ? 
 
 Finissions-nous ? 
 
 Chantiez-vous ? 
 
 Finissiez-vous ? 
 
 Chantaient-ils? 
 
 Finissaient-ils? 
 
 Recevais-je? 
 
 Vendais-je ? 
 
 Recevais-tu ? 
 
 Vendais-tu ? 
 
 Recevait-il ? 
 
 Vendait-il ? 
 
 Recevions-nous ? 
 
 Vendions-nous ? 
 
 Receviez-vous ? 
 
 Vendiez-vous ? 
 
 Recevaient-ils ? 
 
 Vendaient-ils ? 
 
 Past D 
 
 EFINITE. 
 
 Chantai-je ? . 
 
 Finis-je ? 
 
 Chantas-tu ? 
 
 Finis-tu? 
 
 Chanta-t-il ? 
 
 Finit-il? 
 
 Chantames-nous ? 
 
 Finimes-nous? 
 
 Chantates-vous? 
 
 Finites-vous ? 
 
 Chanterent-ils? 
 
 Finirent-ils ? 
 
 Re9iis-je ? 
 
 Vendis-je ? 
 
 Re9us-tu ? 
 
 Vendis-tu ? 
 
 Re9ut-il? 
 
 Vendit-il ? 
 
 Re9umes-nous ? 
 
 Vendimes-nous ? 
 
 Re9utes-vous ? 
 
 Vendites-vous ? 
 
 Re9urent-ils ? 
 
 Vendirent-ils ? 
 
 Past In 
 
 DEFINITE. 
 
 Ai-jc chante? 
 
 Ai-je fini ? 
 
 As-tu chante ? 
 
 As-tvi fini? 
 
 A-t-il chante ? 
 
 A-t-il fini ? 
 
 Avons-nous chante ? 
 
 Avons-nous fini? 
 
 Avez-vous chante? 
 
 Avez-vous fini? 
 
 Ont-ils chante? 
 
 Ont-ils fini ? 
 
108 
 
 FEEXCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 272. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 1 
 
 Past Indefinite — Continued. 
 
 Ai-je re9u ? 
 
 Ai-je vendu ? 
 
 As-tu re9u ? 
 
 As-tu vendu ? 
 
 A-t-il re9-u ? 
 
 A-t-il vendu ? 
 
 Avons-nous re9u ? 
 
 Avons-nous vendu ? 
 
 I Avez-vous re9u ? • 
 
 Avez-vous vendu ? 
 
 1 Ont-ils re9u ? 
 
 Ont-ils vendu? 
 
 Plu perfect. 
 
 Avais-je chante ? 
 
 Avais-je fini ? 
 
 Avais-tu chante ? 
 
 Avais-tu fini ? 
 
 Avait-il chante? 
 
 Avait-il fini ? 
 
 Avions-nous chante? 
 
 Avions-nous fini ? 
 
 Aviez-vous chante ? 
 
 Aviez-vous fini ? 
 
 Avaient-ils chante ? 
 
 Avaient-ils fini ? 
 
 Avais-je re9u ? 
 
 Avais-je vendu? 
 
 i Avais-tu re9U ? 
 
 Avais-tu vendu ? 
 
 I Avait-il re9u ? 
 
 Avait-il vendu ? 
 
 | Avions-nous re9ii ? 
 
 Avions-nous vendu ? 
 
 i Aviez-vous re^u ? 
 
 Aviez-vous vendu ? 
 
 Avaient-ils re9u ? 
 
 Avaient-ils vendu? 
 
 Future. 
 
 Chanterai-je ? 
 
 Finirai-je ? 
 
 Chanteras-tu ? 
 
 Finiras-tu ? 
 
 Chantera-t-il ? 
 
 Finira-t-il? 
 
 Chanterons-nous ? 
 
 Finirons-nous ? 
 
 Chanterez-vous ? 
 
 Finirez-vous ? 
 
 Chanteront-ils ? 
 
 Finiront-ils ? 
 
 Recevrai-je ? 
 
 Vendrai-je ? 
 
 Recevras-tu ? 
 
 Vendras-tu ? 
 
 Recevra-t-il ? 
 
 Vendra-t-il ? 
 
 Recevrons-nons ? 
 
 Vendrons-nous ? 
 
 Rccevrez-vous ? 
 
 Vendrez-vous? 
 
 Recevront-ils ? 
 
 Vendront-ils? 
 
 Future 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Aurai-je chante? 
 
 Aurai-je fini ? 
 
 Auras-tu chante? 
 
 Auras-tu fini ? 
 
 Aura-t-il chante? 
 
 Aura-t-il fini ? 
 
 Aurons-nous chante ? 
 
 Aurons-nous fini ? 
 
 Aurez-vous chante ? 
 
 Aurez-vous fini? 
 
 Auront-ils chante ? 
 
 Auront-ils fini ? 
 
 Aurai-je re9u? 
 
 Aurai-je vendu ? 
 
 Auras-tu re 911? 
 
 Auras-tu vendu ? 
 
 Aura-t-il 1T9U? 
 
 Aura-t-il vendu ? 
 
 Aurons-nous re9U ? 
 
 Aurons-nous vendu ? 
 
 Aurez-vous re9U ? 
 
 Aurez-vous vendu ? 
 
 | Auront-ils recu ? 
 
 Auront-ils vendu ? 
 
§ 273, 274.] 
 
 109 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Chanterais-je ? 
 
 Finirais-je ? 
 
 Chanterais-tu ? 
 
 Finirais-tu ? 
 
 Chanterait-il ? 
 
 Finirait-il? 
 
 Chanterions-nous ? 
 
 Finirions-nous? 
 
 Chanteriez-vous? 
 
 Finiriez-vous? 
 
 Chanteraient-ils ? 
 
 Finiraient-ils ? 
 
 Recevrais-je ? 
 
 Vendrais-je ? 
 
 Recevrais-tu ? 
 
 Vendrais-tu ? 
 
 Recevrait-il ? 
 
 Vendrait-il ? 
 
 Recevrions-nous ? 
 
 Vendrions-nous ? 
 
 Recevriez-vous ? 
 
 Vendriez-vous? 
 
 Recevraient-ils ? 
 
 "Vendraient-ils ? 
 
 Past. 
 
 Aurais-je chante? 
 
 Aurais-je fini ? 
 
 Aurais-tu chante ? ' 
 
 Aurais-tu fini? 
 
 Aurait-il chante? 
 
 Aurait-il fini ? 
 
 Aurions-nous chante? 
 
 Aurions-nous fini ? 
 
 Auriez-vous chante ? 
 
 Auriez-vous fini ? 
 
 Auraient-ils chante ? 
 
 Auraient-ils fini ? 
 
 Aurais-je recu ? 
 
 Aurais-je vendu ? 
 
 Aurais-tu recu ? 
 
 Aurais-tu vendu ? 
 
 Aurait-il recu ? 
 
 Aurait-il vendu ? 
 
 Aurions-nous recu ? 
 
 Aurions-nous vendu ? 
 
 Auriez-vous recu? 
 
 Auriez-vous vendu ? 
 
 Auraient-ils recu ? 
 
 Auraient-ils vendu ? 
 
 f vends-je ? 
 instead J rends-je ? 
 mange-je? 
 ^ songe-je ? 
 
 of 
 
 273. With verbs ending in ds or ge in the first person 
 singular, indicative, the interrogative formula est-ce que 
 is almost always employed on account of euphony ; as, 
 Est-ce que je vends? do I sell? 
 Est-ce que je rends ? do I restore ? 
 Est-ce que je mange? do I eat? 
 Est-ce que je songe ? do I dream ? _ 
 
 a. The interrogative auxiliaries do, does, and did, which are em- 
 ployed in English, are not translated in French. "We have given 
 above the only modes by which verbs are rendered interrogative. 
 
 274. When the subject of an interrogative phrase is a 
 noun, in French it stands before the verb, and the ques- 
 tion is indicated by a pronoun put after the verb, agree- 
 ing with the subject-noun in gender, number, and per- 
 son ; as, A 
 
110 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 275. 
 
 Mon pere a-t-il de l'argent? has my father any mon- 
 ey? 
 
 Ma sceur a-t-elle une belle robe ? has my sister a hand- 
 some dress? 
 
 Mes livres sont-ils relies? are my books bound? 
 
 Mes plumes ecrivent-elLes bien ? do my pens lorite 
 well? 
 
 Remark. Literally these sentences are: " My father, has he any 
 money?" "My sister, has she a handsome dress?'' li My books, 
 are they bound?" "My pens, write they well?" 
 
 1EF 3 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Eighteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS NEGATIVELY. 
 
 275. Verbs are inflected negatively, as explained in 
 Section 254, by means of the adverb and complement 
 ne — -pas. In the following model only the principal sim- 
 ple and compound tenses will be conjugated negatively. 
 All the remaining tenses follow the same models. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Peesent. 
 
 Je ne chante pas. 
 Tu ne chantes pas. 
 11 ne chante pas. 
 Nous ne chantons pas. 
 Vous ne chantez pas. 
 lis ne chantent pas. 
 
 Je ne finis pas. 
 Tu ne finis pas. 
 11 ne finit pas. 
 Nous ne finissons pas. 
 Vous ne finissez pas. 
 lis ne finissent pas. 
 
 Je ne re^ois pas. 
 Tu ne re9ois pas. 
 11 ne rec^it pas. 
 Nous ne recevons pas. 
 
 Je ne vends pas. 
 Tu ne vends pas. 
 11 ne vend pas. 
 Nous'ne vendons pas. 
 
 Vous ne recevez pas. 
 lis ne recoivent pas. 
 
 Vous ne vendez pas. 
 lis ne vendent pas. 
 
 Pact 1st 
 
 DEFINITE. 
 
 Je n'ai pas chante. 
 Tu n'as pas chante. 
 11 n'a pas chante. 
 Nous n'avons pas chante. 
 Vous n'avez pas chante. 
 lis n'ont pas chante. 
 
 Je n'ai pas fini. 
 Tu n'as pas fini. 
 11 n'a pas fini. 
 Nous n'avons pas fini. 
 Vous n'avez pas fini. 
 Us n'ont pas fini. 
 
275.] 
 
 VEEB. 
 
 Ill 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 Past Indefinite — Continued. 
 
 Je n'ai pas recu. 
 Tu n'as pas recu. 
 
 Je n'ai pas vendu. 
 Tu n'as pas vendu. 
 
 11 n'a pas 1-6911. 
 Nous n'avons pas 1*0911. 
 Vous n'avez pas re9u. 
 lis n'ont pas re9u. 
 
 11 n'a pas vendu. 
 Nous n'avons pas vendu. 
 Vous n'avez pas vendu. 
 Us n'ont pas vendu. 
 
 FUTDEE. 
 
 Je ne chanterai pas. 
 Te ne chanteras pas. 
 11 ne chantera pas. 
 Nous ne chanterons pas. 
 Vous ne chanterez pas. 
 lis ne chanteront pas. 
 
 Je ne finirai pas. 
 Tu ne finiras pas. 
 II ne finira pas. 
 Nous ne finirons pas. 
 Vous ne finirez pas. 
 lis ne finiront pas. 
 
 Je ne recevrai pas. 
 Tu ne recevras pas. 
 11 ne recevra pas. 
 Nous ne recevrons pas. 
 Vous ne recevrez pas. 
 Us ne recevront pas. 
 
 Je ne vendrai pas. 
 Tu ne vendras pas. 
 11 ne vendra pas. 
 Nous ne vendrons pas. 
 Vous ne vendrez pas. 
 Us ne vendront pas. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas chante. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas fini. 
 
 Tu n'aurais pas chante. 
 
 Tu n'aurais pas fini. 
 
 U n'aurait pas chante. 
 
 11 n'aurait pas fini. 
 
 Nous n'aurions pas chante. 
 
 Nous n'aurions pas fini. 
 
 Vous n'auriez pas chante. 
 
 Vous n'auriez pas fini. 
 
 Us n'auraient pas chante. 
 
 Us n'auraient pas fini. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas re9u. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas vendu. 
 
 Tu n'aurais pas 1^911. 
 
 Tu n'aurais pas vendu. 
 
 11 n'aurait pas re 911. 
 
 U n'aurait pas vendu. 
 
 Nous n'aurions pas 1x9,1. 
 
 Nous n'aurions pas vendu. 
 
 Vous n'auriez pas 1x911. 
 
 Vous n'auriez pas vendu. 
 
 Us n'auraient pas 1x911. 
 
 Us n'auraient pas vendu. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Que je ne chante pas. 
 Que tu ne chante pas. 
 j Qu'il ne chante pas. 
 Que nous ne chantions pas. 
 Que vous ne chantiez pas. 
 Qn'ils ne chantent pas. 
 
 Que je ne finisse pas. 
 Que tu ne finisse pas. 
 Qu'il ne finisse pas. 
 Que nous ne finissions pas. 
 Que vous ne finissiez pas. 
 Qu'ils ne finissent pas. 
 
112 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 275. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued. ' 
 
 Present Tense— Continued. 
 
 Que je ne revive pas. 
 Que tu ne recoives pas. 
 Qu'il ne re9oive pas. 
 Que nous ne recevions pas. 
 Que vous ne receviez pas. 
 Qu'ils ne re9oivent pas. 
 
 Que je ne vende pas. 
 Que tu ne vendes pas. 
 Qu'il ne vende pas. 
 Que nous ne vendions pas, 
 Que vous ne vendiez pas. 
 Qu'ils. ne vendent pas. 
 
 Conjugation of the regular Verbs Negatively and In- 
 terrogatively. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ne chante-je pas ? 
 Ne chantes-tu pas? 
 Ne chante-t-il pas? 
 , Ne chantons-nous pas ? 
 Ne chantez-vous pas ? 
 Ne chantent-ils pas ? 
 
 Ne finis-je pas ? 
 
 Ne finis-tu pas ? 
 
 Ne finit-il pas? 
 
 Ne finissons-nous pas? 
 
 Ne finissez-vous pas? 
 
 Ne finissent-ils pas ? 
 
 Ne re9ois-je pas ? 
 Ne re9ois-tu pas? 
 Ne re9oit-il pas ? 
 
 
 Est-ce que je ne vends pas? 
 Ne vends-tu pas? 
 Ne vend-il pas? 
 
 Ne recevons-nous pas? 
 Ne recevez-vous pas ? 
 Ne reooivent-ils pas ? 
 
 
 Ne vendons-nous pas ? 
 Ne vendez-vous pas ? 
 Ne vendent-ils pas? 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Ne chantais-je pas? 
 Ne chantais-tu pas ? 
 Ne chantait-il pas? 
 Ne chantions-nous pa> ? 
 Ne chantiez-vous pas ? 
 Ne chantaient-ils pas? 
 
 Ne hnissais-je pas ? 
 Ne finissais-tu pas ? 
 Ne finissait-il pas ? 
 Ne finissions-nous pas ? 
 Ne finissiez-vous pas? 
 Ne finissaient-ils pas? 
 
 Ne recevais-je pas? 
 Ne recevais-tu pas ? 
 Ne recevait-il pas ? 
 Ne recevions-nous pas ? 
 Ne receviez-vous pas? 
 Ne recevaient-ils pas ? 
 
 Ne vendais-je pas ? 
 Ne vendais-tu pas? 
 Ne vendait-il pas? 
 Ne vendions-nous pas? 
 Ne vendiez-vous pas ? 
 Ne vendaient-ils pas? 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 N'ai-je pas chante? 
 N'as-tu pas chante ? 
 N'a-t-il pas chante? 
 N'avons-nous pas chante? 
 N'avez-vous pas chante'? 
 N'ont-ils pas chante? 
 
 N'ai-je pas fini ? 
 N'as-tu pas fini? 
 N'a-t-il pas fini ? 
 N'avons-nous pas fini ? 
 N'avez-vous pas fini ? 
 N'ont-ils pas fini? 
 
 
 
 1 
 
§ 276, 277.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 113 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 Past Indefinite— Continued. 
 
 N'ai-je pas rec^u? 
 N'as-tu pas recu ? 
 N'a-t-il pas recu ? 
 N'avons-nous pas recu 
 N'avez-vous pas recu ? 
 N'ont-ils pas recu ? 
 
 N'ai-je pas vendu ? 
 N'as-tu pas vendu ? 
 N'a-t-il pas vendu? 
 N'avons-nous pas vendu? 
 N'avez-vous pas vendu ? 
 N'ont-ils pas vendu ? 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ne chanterais-je pas ? 
 Ne chanteraisvtu pas? 
 Ne chanterait-il pas? 
 Ne chanterions-nous pas ? 
 Ne chanteriez-vous pas ? 
 Ne chanteraient-ils pas ? 
 
 Ne finirais-je pas ? 
 Ne finirais-tu pas ? 
 Ne finirait-il pas ? 
 Ne finirions-nous pas? 
 Ne finiriez-vous pas ? 
 Ne finiraient-ils pas ? 
 
 Ne recevrais-je pas ? 
 Ne recevrais-tu pas ? 
 Ne recevrait-il pas ? 
 Ne recevrions-nous pas ? 
 Ne recevriez-vous pas ? 
 Ne recevraient-ils pas? 
 
 Ne vendrais-je pas ? 
 Ne vendrais-tu pas ? 
 Ne vendrait-il pas ? 
 Ne vendrions-nous pas ? 
 Ne vendriez-vous pas ? 
 Ne vendraient-ils pas ? 
 
 Pa 
 
 ST. 
 
 N'aurais-je pas chante — fini? 
 N'aurais-tu pas chante — fini? 
 N'aurait-il pas chante' — fini? 
 N'aurions-nous pas chante — fini ? 
 N'auriez-vous pas chante — fini ? 
 N'auraient-ils pas chante — fini ? 
 
 N'aurais-je pas recu — vendu? 
 N'aurais-tu pas recu — vendu? 
 N'aurait-il pas recu — vendu? 
 N'aurions-nous pas recu — vendu? 
 N'auriez-vous pas recu — vendu ?j 
 N'auraient-ils pas recu — vendu?! 
 
 276. Est-ce que is employed in the first person singu- 
 lar of some verbs (mostly those ending in ds or ge) when 
 they are interrogative and negative ; as, 
 
 Est-ce que je ne vends pas ? ) j JVe vends je pas f 
 
 Est-ce que je ne mange pas ? V ms ~ a < JVe mangeje pas? 
 Est-ce que je ne rends pas ? J [JVe rends-je pas f 
 
 277. JVe is always put immediately before the verb, ex- 
 cept when the latter is preceded by one or more pro- 
 nouns in the objective case ; ne is then put before the 
 objective pronoun or pronouns ; as, 
 
 Je ne donne pas, I do not give. 
 Ne donne-je pas? do I not give? 
 
114 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 278-281. 
 
 Je ne lui donne pas, I do not give to him. 
 
 Ne lui donne-je pas ? do I not give to him f 
 
 Je ne le lui donne -pas, J do not give it to him. 
 
 Ne le lui donne-je pas ? do I not give it to him f 
 
 27S. Before the present infinitive of a verb nepas are 
 
 generally placed together, though often found separated : 
 
 Ne chanter pas, or ) ,_ 
 
 xt- y \ Y JSot to sina. 
 
 Ne pas chanter, ) J 
 
 GF 3 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Nineteenth, Part Fourth. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 279. The tenses of verbs are either simple or com- 
 pound: simple tenses are those which are formed inde- 
 pendently of the auxiliaries avoir and etre ; compound 
 tenses are those which are necessarily formed by the 
 help of one of the verbs avoir or etre, and the past par- 
 ticiple of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 280. Among the simple tenses five are primitive, so 
 called because they serve to form all the other tenses. 
 They are, 
 
 The present infinitive. The present indicative. 
 
 The present participle. The past definite. 
 
 The past participle. 
 The other tenses, called derived tenses, are formed from 
 the primitive. 
 
 281. From the present infinitive are formed two tenses, 
 viz. : 
 
 a. The future, by adding ai in verbs of the first and 
 second conjugations; as, donner, to give, je donner-ai ; 
 finir, to finish, je Unir-ai ; and in verbs of the third and 
 fourth conjugations by changing oir and re into red; as, 
 recevoir, to receive, recev-rai ; vendre, to sell, \end-rai. 
 
 b. The conditional present, by the change of r, oir, and 
 re into rais / as, chanter, to sing, je chante-rais ; finir, 
 
§282-287.] verb. 115 
 
 to finish, je fini-razsy devoir, to oice, dev-rais; rendre, to 
 restore, rend-rais. 
 
 282. From the present participle are formed two 
 tenses ; viz., 
 
 a. The imperfect indicative, by changing ant into ais ; 
 as, chantant, je chant-azsy finissant, je finiss-<:«sy recev- 
 ant, je recev-ais; vendant, je veud.-ais. 
 
 b. The present subjunctive, by changing ant into e; as, 
 donnant, que je donn-ey finissant, que je finiss-ey vend- 
 ant, que je vend-e. Except all verbs of the third conju- 
 gation, which regularly change -evant into -oive; as,- 
 devant, oioing, que je d-oive. 
 
 283. The past participle forms all the compound tenses 
 by means of the auxiliaries avoir and etre ; as, j'aa chante, 
 tfavais recu, y aureus fini, jefus vendu, etc. 
 
 284. From the indicative present is formed the second 
 person singular and first and second persons plural of the 
 imperative by suppressing the pronouns tu, nous, vous ; 
 and for verbs of the first conjugation by suppressing the 
 s of the second person singular ; as, tu chantes, thou 
 singest, imperative chante, sing; nous chantons, impera- 
 tive chantons; vous chantez, chantez; tu ^ms, finis; 
 nous recevons, recevons ; vous rendez, rendez. 
 
 285. From the past definite is formed the imperfect of 
 the subjunctive by changing ai into asse for the first con- 
 jugation, and by adding se for the three others; as,je 
 chantai, que je cbant-«ssey je finis, que je finis-sey je re- 
 cus, que je recus-sey je vendis, que je vendis-se. 
 
 THE PASSIVE VERB. 
 
 286. In French active verbs alone admit of a passive 
 form. See 229, a, 230, a. 
 
 287. Passive verbs have only one conjugation ; it is 
 formed by associating the different moods, tenses, etc., 
 of the verb etre with the past participle of the verb to be 
 conjugated passively. 
 
116 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 288. 
 
 288. The past participle accords in gender and number 
 with the noun or pronoun subject of the auxiliary etre. 
 The participle is consequently inflected like an adjective, 
 that is, it assumes an additional e for the feminine singu- 
 lar, an s for the masculine plural, and es for the feminine 
 plural; as, 
 
 Le cheval est vendu, the horse is sold. 
 
 La fille est aimee, the daughter is loved. 
 
 Les chevaux sont vendus, the horses are sold. 
 
 Les filles sont aimees, the daughters are loved. 
 
 II est puni, he is punished. 
 
 Elle est punie, she is punished. 
 
 lis sont punis (masc. plur.), they are punished. 
 
 chante. 
 
 .< fini ' F.S. 
 
 rendu. 
 
 chante'e. 
 
 finie. 
 
 recue. 
 
 vendue. 
 
 ch ante's, 
 finis. 
 recus. 
 vendus 
 
 ( chantees. 
 j finies. 
 j regies. 
 ' vendues. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Etre aime, to be loved. 
 
 Present. INFINITIVE. Past. 
 
 Etre aime or aime'e, to be loved. 
 
 Avoir e'te aime' or aime'e, to have 
 been loved. 
 
 Present. PARIIOIPLES. Compound. 
 
 Etant aime' or aimee, being loved. 
 
 Ayant e'te' aime' or aime'e, having 
 been loved. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pef.sent. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je suis aime', J am loved. 
 Tu es aime, thou art loved. 
 11 est aime', he is loved. 
 Elle est aimee, she is loved. 
 Nous sommes aime's, we are loved. 
 Vous etes aimes, you are loved. 
 lis sont aimes, they are loved. 
 Elles sont aime'es, " " 
 
 J'ai ere' aime, I have " 
 Tu as ete aime, thou hast 
 11 a e':e' nime', he has 
 Elle a ere' nimee, she has 
 N. avons e'te' aime's, we have 
 V. avez e'te aimes, you have 
 lis ont ere' aimes, they have 
 Elles ont e'te aime'es, " 
 
 "1 
 
 i 
 
 
 
288.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 117 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'etais aime, I was 
 
 Tu etais aime, thou ivast 
 III etait aime, he was 
 Elle etait aimee, she teas 
 Nous e'tions aimes, ice were 
 jVous e'tiez aimes, you were 
 ills e'taient aimes, they were 
 lilies e'taient aime'es, " _, 
 
 >1 
 
 4 
 
 J'avais e'te' aime, / had > 
 Tu avais e'ie' aime', thouhadst 
 11 avait e'te aime, he had 
 Elle avait e'te aimee, she had 
 N. avions e're' aimes, ice had 
 V. aviez ere' aimes, you had 
 lis avaient e'teaimes, they had 
 Ellesavaiente'teaimees. " > 
 
 Sr 
 
 i 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 1 AST ANTERIOR. 
 
 Je fus aime, / was 
 jTu fus aime', thou wast 
 ill fut aime, he icas 
 Elle fut aimee, she icas 
 Nous fumes aimes, we were 
 JVows futes aime's, you were 
 lis furent aime's they were 
 ;Ellesfurent aime'es, " 
 
 -i 
 
 J'eus e'te' aime', Iliad ~* 
 Tu eus ete aime, thou hadst 
 11 eut ete' aime, he had 
 Elle eut ere' aime?, she had 
 N. eumese'te aimes, we had 
 V. eutes e'te i.imes, you had 
 lis eurent ete' aimes, they had 
 Elleseurent e'e' aime'es, " 
 
 i 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je serai aime', / shall 
 Tu seras aime, thou wilt 
 11 sera aime, he will 
 Elle sera aime'e, she will 
 Nous serons aime's, we shall 
 Vous serez aime's, you will 
 Ills seront aime's, they will 
 jElles seront aime'es, " 
 
 - 1 
 
 * 
 
 J'aurai e'e aime', I shall ^ 
 Tu auras e'te aime', thou wilt 
 11 aura e'te aime, he will 
 Elle aura e e aime'e, she will 
 N. aurons e* e aimes, we shall 
 V. aurez ete aime's, you will 
 lis auront e.e aime's, they will 
 Ellesaurout e'te' aime'es, " ^ 
 
 t5 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je serai? aime, 
 Tu serais aime, 
 II serait aime, 
 Elle serait aime, 
 Nous serions aime, 
 Vous seriez aimes, 
 lis seraient aimes, 
 EUes seraient airuees, 
 
 I should ~) 
 thou wouldst 
 he would 
 she would, 
 we should 
 you would 
 they icould 
 
 >5 
 
 Past. 
 
 J'aurais eti aime, 
 Tu aurais et • aime, 
 II aurait ete aime, 
 Elle aurait • te aimee, 
 N. aurions etc aimes, 
 V. auriez ete aimes, 
 lis auraient ete aimes, 
 
 Files auraient ete aimees, 
 
 / should 
 thou wouldst 
 he would 
 she would 
 we should 
 you icould 
 they icould | § 
 
 J^ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. Sois aime, 
 
 be thou loved. 
 
 3. Qu'il soit aime'. 
 
 let him be loved. 
 
 3. Qu'elle soit aime'e, 
 
 let her be loved. 
 
 1. Sovons aimes, 
 
 let us be loved. 
 
 2. Sovez aime's, 
 
 be ye loved. 
 
 3. Qu'ils soient aime's, 
 
 let them be loved (masc). 
 
 3. Qu'elles soient aime'es 
 
 let them be loved {fern.). 
 
 
118 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 289. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Que je sois aime', that I may be loccd. 
 
 Que tu sois aime', that thou mayesi be loved. 
 
 Qu'il soit aime, that he may be loved. 
 
 Qu'elle soit aime'e, that she may be loved. 
 
 Que nous soyons aimes, that we may be loved. 
 
 Que vous soyez aimes, that you may be loved. 
 
 Qu'ils soient aime's, that they may be loved. 
 Qu'elles soient aimees, " " " 
 
 Que je fusse aime, that I might be loved. 
 
 Que tu fusses aime, that thou mlghtest be loved. 
 
 Qu'il fut aime, that he might be loved. 
 
 Qu'elle fut aimee, that she might be loved. 
 
 Que nous fussions aimes, that we might be loved. 
 
 Que vous fussiez aimes, that you might be loved. 
 
 Qu'ils fussent aimes, that they might be loved. 
 Qu'elles fussent aimees, " " " 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que j'aie e'te aime, that 1 may have been loved. 
 
 Que tu aies e'te' aime, theit thou mayest have been loved. 
 
 Qu'il ait ete' aime, that he may have been loved. 
 
 Qu'elle ait e'te' aimee, that she may have been loved. 
 
 Que nous ayons ete aimes, that we may have been loved. 
 
 Que vous ayez ete aimes, theit you may have been loved. 
 
 Qu'ils aient ete aimes, that they may have been loved. 
 Qu'elles aient e'te aimees, " " " 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que j'eusse ete' aime, that I might have been loved. 
 
 Que tu eusses e'te aime, that thou mightest have been loved. 
 
 Qu'il eiit e'te' aime, that he might have been loved. 
 
 Qu'elle eiit e'te' aimee, that she might have been loved. 
 Que nous eussions e'te aime's, that we might have been loved. 
 
 Que vous eussiez ete aimes, that you might have been loved. 
 
 Qu'ils eussent e'te aimes, that they might have been loved. 
 
 Qu'elles eussent ete aime'es, " " " 
 
 289. In French the passive form of the verb is seldom 
 used; the genius of the language seems to prefer the re- 
 flective verb, or the indefinite pronoun on with the act- 
 ive voice. If the reflective verb be employed, it must 
 agree in person and number with its subject, and the pro- 
 noun se {himself, herself, itself themselves) must stand be- 
 fore the verb. If on be used (207), the verb must agree 
 with it in the third person singular number. A few ex- 
 
§290,291.] verb. 119 
 
 amples will best illustrate this important rule of French 
 grammar : 
 
 La soie se vend cher, silk is sold at a dear rate. 
 
 Cela se comprend, that is understood. 
 
 II se trompe, he is deceived. 
 
 On parle de la guerre, the war is spoken of. 
 
 On le loue, he is praised. 
 
 On dit que vous avez ecrit mon histoire, it is said that 
 you have written my history. 
 
 On m'assure, I am assured. 
 
 Ici l'on parle francais, Fi*ench is spoken here. 
 
 a. These sentences, rendered literally, would be: "silk sells itself 
 dear;" "that understands itself;" "he deceives himself;" "they speak 
 of the war;" "one praises him ;" "one says that you have written my 
 history;" "one assures me;" "here one speaks French." Some of 
 these sentences correspond to the English usage ; hut while the same 
 may be said of only a few expressions in English, in French the appli- 
 cation is quite general. 
 
 290. When the preposition a stands before an infinitive 
 dependent on some form of the verb etre, the infinitive is 
 translated into English by the passive. 
 
 C'est a desirer, that is to be wished. 
 
 Elle est a plaindre, she is to be pitied. 
 
 Cette chambre est a louer, this room is to be let. 
 
 La maison est a vendre, the house is to be sold. 
 
 291. The word fy/, employed with a passive verb, is 
 rendered in French either by de or par ; de is used when 
 the agent performing the action is mentioned in an in- 
 definite or general manner ; par points out definitely and 
 specifically the person who performs the action. 
 
 II est aime de tout le monde, he is loved by every body. 
 Le monde a ete cree par Dieu, the world was made by 
 God. 
 
 u. "Dieu" points out specifically the agent performing the work of 
 
120 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 292. 
 
 creation — God, and consequently par is employed; "tout ie monde" 
 is vague and indefinite, for which reason we use de before it. 
 
 $W The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twentieth, Part Fourth. 
 
 INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 292. Intransitive verbs (called in French neuter) are 
 conjugated in their simple tenses precisely like the trans- 
 itive or active verbs. 
 
 a. The compound tenses of most intransitive verbs are 
 formed with avoir, especially when they express action ; 
 as, 
 
 II a couru, he has run. J'avais dormi, 1 had slept. 
 
 b. The following intransitive verbs always form their 
 compound tenses by means of etre : 
 
 Aller, to go. Partir pour, to set out for. 
 
 Arriver, to arrive. Parvenir, to succeed. 
 
 Deceder, to expire. Retourner, to return. 
 
 Devenir, to become. Revenir, to come back. 
 
 Eclore, to hatch, bloom. Sortir, to go out. 
 Entrer, to enter. Survenir, to arrive unexpect- 
 
 Intervenir, to interfere. edly. 
 
 Mourir, to die. Tornber, to fall. 
 
 Naitre, to be born. Venir, to come ; as, 
 
 Je suis alle, I have gone. 
 
 Je suis venu, I have come. 
 
 II est parti pour Paris, he has set out for Paris. 
 
 Remark. When any of these intransitive verbs assume a transitive 
 signification, the auxiliary avoir is of course employed: ' 
 II a sorti le cheval de l'ecurie, he has led the horse from the stable. 
 On a retourne l'habit, the coat has been returned. 
 
 c. Some intransitive verbs form their compound tenses 
 with avoir when they express action, and with etre when 
 they imply the residt of an action, i. e., state. The follow- 
 ing are the most common : 
 
§293,294.] verb. 121 
 
 Aborder, to land. Echapper, to escape. 
 
 Accourir, to hasten. Echouer, to strand. 
 
 Accroitre, fo increase. Erabellir, to grow beautiful. 
 
 Apparaitre, to appear. Expirer, to expire. 
 
 Cesser, to cease. Grandir, to grow tall. 
 
 Changer, to change. Monter, to ascend, go up. 
 
 Croitre, to grow. Partir, to set out. 
 
 Deborder, to overflow. Passer, to pass. 
 
 Decamper, to decamp. Perir, to perish. 
 
 Dechoir, to decay. Rajeunir, to grow young. 
 
 Decroitre, to decrease. Rester, to remain, stay. 
 
 Demeurer, to remain. Vieillir, to grow old. 
 
 Degenerer, to degenerate. Sortir (occasionally thus 
 Descendre, to go down. used). 
 
 Disparaitre, to disappear. 
 
 Examples. 
 Vous avez grandi en peu de temps, you have grown 
 
 tall in a short time. 
 Vous etes bien grandi, you have grovm very much. 
 La loi a passe, the laid has passed. 
 Cette mode est passee, this fashion has gone by. 
 La riviere a deborde a minuit, the river overflowed at 
 
 midnight. 
 Maintenant la riviere est debordee, the river is now 
 
 over its banks. 
 
 Remark. These verbs may have a transitive signification, in which 
 case they are conjugated with avoir ; as, 
 On a descendu des voyageurs, passengers have been landed. 
 J'ai remonte ma montre, / have icound up my watch. 
 
 293. The past participle of those intransitive verbs 
 which are conjugated in their compound tenses with 
 etre varies like the adjective, to agree in gender and 
 number with the subject (see 288). 
 
 294. We will give an example of an intransitive verb 
 conjugated with etre in the compound tenses. The sirn- 
 
 F 
 
122 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 294. 
 
 pie tenses are omitted, because they are always inflected 
 (if regular) like the model of the conjugation to which 
 they belong. Of the compound tenses only the first per- 
 son of each number is given. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Tomber, to fall. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je suis tombe or tombe'e, I have fallen. 
 
 Nous sorames tombe's or tombe'es, ive have fallen. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'e'tais tombe or tombe'e, I had fallen. 
 
 Nous etions tombes or tombees, we had fallen. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je fus tombe' or tombee, I had /alien. 
 
 Nous fumes tombes or tombees, ice had fallen. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Je serai tombe or tombee, I shall have fallen. 
 
 Nous serous tombe's or tombe'es, we shall have fallen. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je serais tombe or tombe'e, I should have fallen. 
 
 Nous serions tombe's or tombees, we should have fallen. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je sois tombe or tombee, that I may have fallen. 
 
 Que nous soyons tombes or tombees, that we may have fallen. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je fusse tombe or tombee, that I might have fallen. 
 
 Que nous fussions tombe's or tombees, that we might have fallen, 
 
 Infinitive Past. 
 Etre tombe' or tombee, to have fallen. 
 
 Participle Compound. 
 Etant tombe or tombe'a, having fallen. 
 
 &f The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twenty-first, Part Fourth. 
 
295-297." 
 
 VERB. 
 
 w 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 295. Reflective verbs are conjugated with two pro- 
 nouns of the same person, the first of which is nomina- 
 tive to the verb, and the second is the direct or indirect 
 object of the same; as, 
 
 Je me flatte, I flatter myself. 
 
 Je me propose, I propose (to) myself. 
 
 296. Reflective verbs always form their compound 
 tenses by the aid of etre, which, with such verbs, is to be 
 rendered into English by to have ; as, 
 
 lis se sont couches, they have gone to bed. 
 Je me fus trompe, I had been mistaken. 
 
 297. In the compound tenses the past participle must 
 agree in gender and number with the subject of the verb ; as, 
 
 Elle s'est promenee, she has taken a walk. 
 lis se sont promenes, they have taken a walk. 
 
 a. Some verbs are reflective in French which are not 
 in English ; as, 
 
 Se promener, to take a walk. 
 
 Se lever, to rise (raise one's self). 
 
 b. The second or objective pronoun loses its voioel as 
 often as it comes before a vowel ; as, 
 
 II s'est flatte (145, «), he has flattered himself. 
 
 MODEL VERB. 
 Se Flatter, to flatter ones self. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. ! 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefij 
 
 ITE. 
 
 Je me flatte, / flatter myself. 
 
 Je me suis flatte, 
 
 I have fl., etc. 
 
 Tute flattes, thou fl. thyself . 
 
 Tu t'es flatte, 
 
 thou hast, etc. 
 
 11 se flatte, he Jl. himself. 
 
 11 s'est flatte, 
 
 he has, etc. 
 
 Elle se flatte, she fl. herself . 
 
 Elle s'est flattee, 
 
 she has, etc. 
 
 *On se flatte, they fl. themselves. 
 
 On s'est flatte, 
 
 they have, etc. 
 
 Xous nous flattons, we fl. ourselves. 
 
 Nous nous sommes flattes 
 
 we have, etc. 
 
 Vous vous flattez, i/oufl. yourselves. 
 
 Vous vous 6tes flattes, 
 
 1/ou have, etc. 
 
 lis se flatten t, they fl. themselves. 
 
 lis se sont flattes, 
 
 they have, etc. 
 
 Elles se flatten*, 
 
 Elles se sont flattee?, 
 
 
 * On se flatte may also be rendered u oue flatters himself," " we flatter ourselves, 1 ' 
 • you flatter yourself— selves." See 207. 
 
124 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 297. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 iMl'liEFECT. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Je me flattais, I nattered myself. 
 Tu te flattais, thoujl. thyself. 
 11 se flattait, hejt. himself. 
 Nous nous flattions, we fl. ourselves. 
 Vous vous flattiez, you Jl. yourselves. 
 lis se liattaient, they jl. themselves. 
 
 Je m'etais flatte, / had, etc. 
 Tu t'otais flatte, thou hadst,etc. 
 Ii s'otait flatte, hs. had, etc 
 .s'ous nous etions flattes, ice had, etc. 
 .'ous vous etiez flattes, you hid, etc. 
 lis s'etaient flattes, they had, etc. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je me flaitai, I flattered myself. 
 
 Tu te flattas, etc. 
 
 11 se flatta. 
 
 Xous nous flattames. 
 
 Vous vous flattates. 
 
 lis se flatterent. 
 
 Je me fus flatte, 1 hadjiat. myself. 
 
 Tu te fus flatte, etc. 
 
 11 se fut flatte. 
 
 Nous nous fumes flattes. 
 
 Vous vous futes flattes. 
 
 lis se furent flattes. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1 uture Perfect. 
 
 Je me llatterai, I shali jl. myself. 
 
 Tu te flatteras, etc. 
 
 11 se flattera. 
 
 Nous nous flatterons. 
 
 Vous vous ilatterez. 
 
 lis se tlatteront. 
 
 Je me serai flatte, I shall have jl. mys. 
 
 Tu te seras flatte, etc. 
 
 11 se sera flatte. 
 
 Nous nous serons flattes. 
 
 Vous vous serez flatt js. 
 
 lis se seront flattes. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Je me flatterais, I should fl. myself. 
 
 Je me serais flatte, I should havefl. mys. 
 
 Tu te flatterais, etc. 
 
 Tu te serais flatte, etc. 
 
 11 se flatterait. 
 
 11 se serait flatte. 
 
 Nous nous flatterions. 
 
 Nous nous serions flattes. 
 
 Vous vous flatteriez. 
 
 Vous vous seriez flattes. 
 
 lis se flatteraient. 
 
 lis se seraitnt flattes. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Flatte-toi, 
 Qu'il se flatte, 
 Flattons-nous, 
 Flattez-vous, 
 Qu'il s se flattent, 
 
 flatter thyself. 
 
 let hini flatter himself. 
 
 let us flatter ourselves. 
 
 flatter yourselves. 
 
 let them flatter themselves. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Que je me flatte, that I mayfl. myself. 
 
 Que tu te flattes, etc. 
 
 Qu'il se flatte. 
 
 Que nous nous flattions. 
 
 Que vous vous flattiez. 
 
 Qu'ils se flattent. 
 
 Que je me sois flatte, that I may, etc. 
 
 Que tu te sois flatte, etc. 
 
 Qu'il se soit flatte. 
 
 Que nous nous soyons flattes. 
 
 Que vous vous soyez flattes. 
 
 Qu'ils sej?oient flattes. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je me flattasse, that I might, etc. 
 
 Que tu te flattasses, etc. 
 
 Qu'il se flattat. 
 
 Que nous nous flattassions. 
 
 Que vous vous flattassiez. 
 
 Qu'ils se flattassent. 
 
 Que je me fusse flatte, that I might, etc. 
 
 Que tu te fusses flatte, etc. 
 
 Qu'il se fat flatte. 
 
 Que nous nous fussions flatt 's. 
 
 Que vous vous fussiez flattes. 
 
 Qu'ils se fussent flattes. 
 
§ 298, 299.] veeb. 125 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Se flatter, to flatter one's self. 
 
 S'etre flatte, to liavefl. one's self. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Se tiattant, flattering one's self. 
 
 S'etant flatte, having fl. one's self. 
 
 298. Reflective verbs are conjugated interrogatively 
 according to the rules already given, i. e., by putting the 
 pronoun-subject after the verb, the objective pronoun still 
 retaining its place before the verb ; thus, 
 
 Meflatte-je? do I flatter myself ? 
 Te flattes-tu? dost thou flatter thyself? 
 Se flatte-t-il ? does he flatter himself? 
 Me suis-je flatte ? have I flattered myself? 
 T'es-tu flatte ? hast thou flattered thyself? 
 S'est-il flatte ? has he flattered himself? 
 Nous sommes-nous flattes ? have we flattered our- 
 selves ? 
 Vous etes-vous flattes? have you flattered yourselves? 
 Se sont-ils flattes? have they flattered themselves? 
 
 299. Reflective verbs are conjugated negatively by 
 putting ne before the objective pronoun, and pas after 
 the verb or auxiliary ; thus, 
 
 Je ne me flatte pas, I do not flatter myself. 
 Tu ne te flattes pas, thou dost not flatter thyself 
 II ne se flatte pas, he does not flatter himself 
 Je ne me suis pas flatte, I have not flattered myself 
 Tu ne t'es pas flatte, thou hast not flattered thyself 
 II ne s'est pas flatte, he has not flattered himself 
 Ne me flatte je pas? (271), do I not flatter myself? 
 Ne te flattes-tu pas ? dost thou not flatter thyself? 
 Ne se flatte-t-il pas ? does he not flatter himself? 
 Ne me suis-je pas flatte ? have not I flattered myself? 
 Ne t'es-tu pas flatte ? hast thou not flattered thyself? 
 Ne s'est-il pas flatte ? has he not flattened himself? 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
120 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§300,301. 
 
 RECIPROCAL VERBS. 
 
 300. These verbs are employed in the plural number 
 only. They are conjugated the same as reflective verbs. 
 
 Charles et Guillaume se battent, Charles and William 
 
 heat each other. 
 Marie et Josephine s'aiment, llary and Josephine love 
 
 each other, 
 a. In addition to the reflective pronouns nous, vous, se, 
 the reciprocal verb may be followed by Vun V autre in 
 speaking of two, and by les uns les autres in speaking of 
 several. 
 
 Jean et Pierre se battent 1'un 1' autre, John and Peter 
 
 heat each other. 
 Jeanne et Marie s'aiment l'une 1' autre, Jane and Mary 
 
 love one another. 
 Vous vous aidez les uns les autres, you assist each other, 
 h. Again, instead of Tun Pautre, les uns les autres, the 
 preposition entre (or before a vowel entr"*) is often pre- 
 fixed to the reciprocal verb ; as, 
 
 Ils.s'entr'aiment, they love each other. 
 Elles s'entrelouent, they praise each other. 
 
 I^ 3 The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twenty-second, Part Fourth. 
 
 UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 301. A unipersonal verb is one which is conjugated in 
 the third person singular only. 
 
 a. The pronoun il, which stands as the grammatical 
 subject of a unipersonal verb, must be rendered by it/ as, 
 II faut, it is necessary. 
 II neige, it snows. 
 II pleut, it rains, 
 h. Many personal verbs are occasionally used uniper- 
 sonally; as, 
 
§ 302.] 
 
 VEKB. 
 
 127 
 
 II parait, it appears, it seems. 
 II a paru, it has appeared. 
 
 c. Verbs which can only be used in the third person 
 singular take avoir to form their compound tenses. 
 
 d. The past participle of a unipersonal verb is always 
 invariable. 
 
 e. A unipersonal verb is conjugated the same as other 
 verbs, unless it be irregular, in which case it will be 
 found among the list (see 311). 
 
 302. We give below the full conjugation of a regular 
 unipersonal verb. Since the infinitive present ends in er, 
 it belongs to the Jirst conjugation. 
 
 Neiger, to snow. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 11 neige, it snows. 
 
 11 a neige, it has snoiced. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 11 neigeait (262), it was snowing. 
 
 11 avait neige, it had snowed. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 11 neigea (262), it snowed. 
 
 11 eut neige, it had snowed. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Iuture Perfect. 
 
 11 neigera, it will snow. 
 
 11 aura neige', it will have snowed. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 11 neigerait, it would snow. 
 
 11 aurait neige', it would have 
 snowed. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Qu'il neige, let it snoo. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Qu'il neige, that it may snow. 
 
 Qu'il ait neige', that it may have 
 snowed. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Qu'il neigeat (262), that it might 
 snoio. 
 
 Qu'il cut neige', that it might have 
 snowed. 
 
128 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 303-306. 
 
 303. Irregular ttnipersonal Verb, 
 
 Y Avoir. 
 
 indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 11 y a, 
 
 there is, there are. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 11 y avait, 
 
 there was, there were. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 11 y eut, 
 
 there was, there were. 
 
 Future. 
 
 11 y aura, 
 
 there will be. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 11 y a eu, 
 
 there has been — have been. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 11 y avait eu, 
 
 there had been. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 11 y eut eu, 
 
 there had been. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 11 y aura eu, 
 
 there will have been. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Present. 
 
 11 y aurait, 
 
 there would be. 
 
 Past. 
 
 11 y aurait eu, 
 
 there would have been. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 Qu'il y ait, 
 
 let there be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Qu'il y ait, 
 
 that there may be. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Qu'il y eut, 
 
 that there might be. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Qu'il y ait eu, 
 
 that there may have been. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Qu'il y eut eu 
 
 that there might hare been. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Y ay ant, 
 
 there being. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Y ayant eu, 
 
 there having been. 
 
 304. The irregular verb faire, to make, to d%, when 
 used unipersonally, signifies it is/ as, 
 
 II fait chaud, it is warm. Fit-il grand jour ? was it 
 II faisait froicl, it teas cold. broad day f 
 
 305. The irregular verb valoir, to be worth, signifies 
 also it is, when employed unipersonally ; as, 
 
 II vaut mieux faire ceci que faire cela, it is better to do 
 
 this than to do that. 
 II vaut mieux tard que jamais, it is better late than 
 
 never. 
 
 306. II est is employed unipersonally, in the sense of 
 it is, and sometimes there is, there are / as, 
 
 II est douze heures, it is ticelve o'clock. 
 II n'est pas encore tard, it is not yet late. 
 II est necessaire, it is necessary. 
 
§ 307-309.] vekb. 129 
 
 307. When il est, used unipersonally, is followed by an 
 adjective, and this in turn by an infinitive, the preposi- 
 tion de is employed before the infinitive : 
 
 II est beau de mourir pour sa patrie, it is sweet to die 
 
 for onds ot07i country. 
 II est noble de pardonner a nos ennemis, it is noble to 
 
 forgive our enemies. 
 
 308. II faut, it is necessary, may be followed by the in- 
 finitive mood; but in this case the subject of the sen- 
 tence is equivocal, since any one of the three persons 
 may be addressed ; thus, il faut finir cette affaire, it is 
 necessary to conclude this matter, may apply to the per- 
 son speaking (first person), to a person addressed or 
 spoken to (second person), or, finally, to a person spoken 
 of (third person). To express the sentence definitely, 
 then, we employ the subjunctive mood after il faut ; 
 thus, 
 
 II faut que je finisse cette affaire, it is necessary that 
 
 I finish this matter. 
 II faut que tu finisses cette affaire, it is necessary that 
 
 thou finish this matter. 
 II faut qu'il finisse cette affaire, it is necessary that he 
 finish this matter. 
 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
 a. Again, instead of the subjunctive mood placed after 
 il faut, we can employ a pronoun personal, in the indi- 
 rect regimen, put before the verb ; thus, 
 
 II me faut finir, etc., it is necessary for me to finish, etc. 
 II te faut finir, etc., it is necessary for thee to finish, etc. 
 II lui faut finir, etc., it is necessary for him or her to 
 finish, etc. 
 
 309. II faut, followed by the subjunctive or preceded 
 by an objective pronoun, is to be translated into English 
 by must; thus, 
 
 F 2 
 
130 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 310,311. 
 
 Oi 
 
 II faut que je- 
 ll faut que tu- 
 II faut qu'il- 
 II faut que nous- 
 II faut que vous- 
 II faut qu'ils- 
 
 followed by a verb 
 in the subjunctive, 
 
 I must. 
 Thou must. 
 He must. 
 We mast. 
 ITou must. 
 They must. 
 
 II me faut- 
 II te faut- 
 II lui faut- 
 II nous faut- 
 II vous faut- 
 II leur faut- 
 
 followed by an in- ' 
 finitive, 
 
 I must. 
 Thou must. 
 He or she 'must. 
 We must. 
 You must. 
 They must. 
 
 310. When il faut is followed by a noun it signifies 
 need, want, must have, and that which in English would 
 be the subject, in French stands as indirect object; if a 
 pronoun, it must be put before faut, but if a noun it is 
 placed after it, with the preposition d : 
 II me faut du pain, I want some bread. 
 II nous faut de l'argent, we need some money. 
 II faut une robe a votre soeur, your sister must have a 
 dress. 
 tW The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twenty-third, Part Fourth. 
 
 IEEEGTJLAE YEEBS. 
 
 311. Irregular verbs are those which do not conform 
 in the inflection of their simple tenses to the model 
 verbs chanter, finir, recevoir, vendre. 
 
 a. Those verbs which require the euphonic changes in- 
 dicated in Section 260 and following are not regarded 
 as irregular, and therefore will not be represented in the 
 subjoined paradigms. 
 
 fll^f" "While the student is committing the irregular verhs to 
 memory, he will find it profitable for him to give the first 
 
§312-314.] veeb. 131 
 
 twenty-three sections of Exercises in Part Fourth a thorough 
 review, making constant reference to the rules indicated by the 
 figures until they are perfectly familiar. 
 
 Remark. In the following paradigms of the irregular verbs only 
 those tenses of the verb have been given which deviate from 
 the regular conjugation. Those moods or tenses, therefore, 
 which may not appear in a verb are to be supplied by adding 
 the terminations proper to a verb of that conjugation. The 
 present and past participles, however, are always given, be- 
 cause from them are derived some of the simple and all of the 
 compound tenses. 
 
 312. First Conjugation. 
 
 Conjugation of Aller, to go. Auxiliary, Eire. 
 
 
 Past Participle. Alle. | Present Participle 
 
 Allan! 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE— Present. 
 
 
 Je vais 
 
 |Tu vas. 
 
 |Ilva. |Nous allons. |Vous allez. 
 Future. 
 
 |Ils vont. 
 
 J'irai. 
 
 |Tu iras. 
 
 |Il ira. | Nous irons. |Vousirez. 
 CO N DITI ON AL. —Present. 
 
 |Ils iront. 
 
 J'irais. 
 
 |Tu irais. 
 
 |I1 irait. |Nous irions. IVousiriez. 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 |Ils iraient. 
 
 
 |Va. 
 
 |Qu'ilaille.| Allons. | Allez. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE.— Present. 
 
 IQ.ilsaillent. 
 
 Que j'aille. |Que tu ailles 
 
 IQu'il aille. |Que nous allions. |Q. vous alliez 
 
 . | Q. ils aillent. 
 
 313. The imperative va is written vas when followed 
 by y or en / as, vas-y, go there / vas en chercher, go and 
 look for some. When the y is followed by a verb the s 
 is omitted ; as, va y donner tes ordres, go thither and 
 give your orders. 
 
 314. The reflective verb s'en aller, to go away, is con- 
 jugated like aller, with the additional peculiarity of the 
 reflective; thus, 
 
 Je m'en vais. Je m'en suis alio. 
 
 Tu t'en vas. Tu t'en es alio. 
 
 II s'en va. II s'en est alle. 
 
 Nous nous en allons. Nous nous en sommes alles. 
 
 Vous vous en allez. Vous vous en etes alles. 
 
 Ils s'en vont. lis s'en sont alles. 
 
 The imperative^, 
 
 Va-t'en, Qu'il ™n aille, Allons-nous-en, Allez-vous-en, 
 Qu'ils s'en aillent. 
 
132 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 315,316. 
 
 ^5 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 a 
 
 
 o 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 S 
 
 S3 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 t - < 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 i-l 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 c 
 
 S3 
 
 Ph 
 
 m 
 
 03 
 
 << 
 
 !>' 
 
 i> 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 Ph 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 . O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & g 
 
 co O 
 
 
 (a > 
 
 
 D (3 
 
 fig 
 
 
 f3 
 
 ja 
 
 
 t>~ 
 
 
 — 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 
 <) 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 s g 
 n 
 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 c 
 
 i3 
 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 "cu 
 
 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 t— 1 
 
 o 
 > 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 . 
 
 co- 
 
 H 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 H 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 e3 
 
 e3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 o> 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 (3 
 
 S3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H-S 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 P2 
 o 
 
 -.2 
 fcp 
 
 •I 
 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 hJ C 
 
 Ph R O* 
 
 £ E 03 
 
 t> !> *> t> !> 
 
 > *> 
 
 Ph ™ 
 
 a — 
 
 EH 
 
 s ^ 
 
 ^ 03 SH o3 03 Pj< 03 
 
 CJ ^J HlJ . ■ 
 
 g£ S £ gjz; ,j{z; 
 
 B Q P % 
 
 c s 
 
 5^ 
 
 a 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 33 
 
 cc 3 
 
 
 cr 1 ^ 
 
 
 4 
 
 Eh -<l 
 
 ,03 
 
 '3 
 
§ 317-319.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 133 
 
 M hH Qr M 
 
 > > <1 t> 
 
 eh° 
 
 &ra 
 
 3 a 
 
 fl K EH' 
 
 Je5_5 
 
 3 
 
 -1— 3~ 
 
 03 TO 
 
 aS S aa3 
 a o in 3 
 to . ra £ to 
 
 C <n I 
 
 § .g 
 
 c?, d <d 
 
 TO l-j f— I 
 
 I— I TO 
 
 Trt TO 
 
 03 ' 
 
 a 
 
 a a tn s 
 H H <1 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -w a 
 
 
 
 a ^ 
 
 
 
 i> a* -a 
 
 
 a 
 
 •ph .— a 
 
 
 03 
 
 ja a ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •a rQ *a 
 
 
 p3 
 
 3 „ ^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 o J£ o 
 
 
 ,c 
 
 •° ? ^ . 
 
 
 
 to a co 
 
 a 
 
 b3 
 
 R 
 
 Ph O* m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 PQ 
 
 
 N N 
 
 H 
 
 CD 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 "3 
 
 o 
 
 '3 ,2 '3 
 
 O r-J O 
 rQ 3 -° 
 
 H 
 
 rQ 
 
 W 
 
 > 
 
 t 5. t 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 TO TO 
 
 
 . a 
 
 a . a 
 
 
 o . ^ o 
 
 
 f* -2 
 
 •a tc £"- 
 
 
 art 
 
 a* a Hja 
 
 
 B/3 
 
 '3 r2 «'3 
 
 
 
 Oh3« o 
 
 
 I'fc 
 
 _ 
 
 a — 
 
 
 H 
 
 5 p-i 5 
 
 
 < 
 
 S .§ 
 
 
 8 
 
 .a Sw . 
 « a o cd 
 
 
 hH . 
 
 a3 o cea - , 
 
 
 +3 
 
 •rM O .rH 
 
 
 a 
 
 a II • a 
 
 
 o 
 
 O a* O 
 
 • HH 
 
 pO 
 
 -a ' g -Q 
 
 '3 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 PI C H 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 TO 
 
 ►h 
 
 Pui 
 
 
 •rH TO 
 OS CD 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a a 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 o . o 
 
 « 
 
 .0 
 
 ,£2 TO ,fi 
 
 Ph 
 
 a 
 
 a § a 
 H Ph H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 "oa JD 
 
 
 a 
 
 '3 '3 
 
 
 O 
 
 O O 
 
 
 rO 
 
 rQ ^2 
 
 
 © 
 
 O CD 
 
 
 hs 
 
 Hs Hs 
 
 o a a r" 
 
 HO 'rH I— I HH 
 
 as 
 o 
 Q 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 **\ 
 
 n-! 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 iO 
 
 p* 
 
 
 KS 
 
 £ 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 •<s> 
 
 <» 
 
 • 1— 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V) 
 
 |<S 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 -M 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 r^ 
 
 Ci 
 
 
 +^> 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 <a 
 
 <x> 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 wT 
 
 rO 
 
 cd 
 
 ca 
 
 Q) 
 
 
 .« 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 01 
 
 rO 
 
 a 
 
 H-> 
 
 OQ 
 
 o 
 
 
 rrl 
 
 CO 
 
 <45 
 
 «HH 
 
 « 
 
 9 
 
 
 55 
 
 HO 
 
 fc. 
 
 to 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 HO 
 
 S 
 
 « 
 
 
 53 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 1> 
 
 to 
 
 8 
 
 hJ 
 
 •^ 
 
 w. 
 
 '^ 
 
 ^o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 • 1—1 
 
 r& 
 
 hC 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 s 
 
 >i 
 
 1-1 
 
 rj 
 
 
 O 
 
 GPt 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 ^<D 
 
 ■n 
 
 
 :-< 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 fHO 
 
 d 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 rQ 
 
 'd 
 
 Til 
 
 ss 
 
 «+H 
 
 ;_, 
 
 ?. 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 to 
 
 t-s 
 
 S 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 r^I 
 
 ^ 
 
 K£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 a; 
 
 • i-T 
 
 §> 
 
 f> 
 
 
 
 r^n 
 
 ^hS 
 
 0) 
 
 rs 
 
 
 ^d 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 OS 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 rt 
 
 «+H 
 
 
 cp 
 
 a^ 
 
 
 
 rO 
 
134 
 
 FRENCH GRAlQIAPw. 
 
 [§ 320, 321. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "S « 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 *c3 3 
 
 S 2 ~ -" 
 
 
 
 
 g § o | 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 S 3 " S 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 ° 9 
 
 o © ~ o 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 t« en 
 
 co 7/i 3 co 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 R 
 
 R R 
 
 H R O 1 R 
 
 R 
 
 cS 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — — — — 
 
 — 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 \i 
 
 p 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 .2 5 
 
 3 3^3 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 J* 
 
 3 
 
 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 q o £! o 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 ■A 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 <-> o s CJ 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 >■ l> 
 
 > > 6 > 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 rA CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 . to 
 
 eh a 
 
 to o 
 
 .2 | 
 
 o z o . z § 
 
 
 
 § P 
 
 3 
 
 
 — — 
 fe 9 
 
 ti u s ° 
 
 1 Q 
 
 a f" 
 
 g « g H g £ I 
 
 « 7 CJ > 3"? O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 D ^ < k 
 
 £ S « £ 
 
 e 2 a g 
 
 &- S x 
 
 
 8 
 
 ST; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 3 
 
 •~ O G O 02 o 
 
 ^ i 
 
 
 
 
 ^ S-i O 5- 
 
 '" 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O o 
 
 O o ~ O 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 r a 6» r 
 
 ® 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■H 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 • CO 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 .2 tA 
 
 CO "-< . 
 
 cS c3 in 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 
 cS 3 
 
 £ s- p 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 3 3.3 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 O O co O 
 
 o 
 
 «! 
 
 o 
 
 « o 
 
 CJ O ~ CJ 
 
 3 3 O 3 
 
 O 
 
 R 
 
 3 
 
 S 3 
 
 tf 
 
 rX 
 
 H 
 
 H H 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 .2 CO 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 co 
 
 c3 3 
 
 S-, i-, o 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;- 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 S3 3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O O 
 
 O o o 
 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 
 p o 
 
 w « o 
 
 o 
 
 
 s> 
 
 o o 
 
 O O o 
 
 <D 
 
 
 l~» 
 
 f» >-3 
 
 i-r. »-3 l-a 
 
 >-3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 < 
 
 5S 
 
 O 
 to 
 
 pf 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 .2 
 to 
 
 3 .^ 
 
 S = 3 
 
 > > > 
 
 £ % % § 
 
 & 1 | 
 
 Eh a w 
 o 
 
 2,4 i 
 
 3 3 
 
§ 322-324.] 
 
 VEIIB. 
 
 135 
 
 3 J2 2 
 
 a 
 
 en 
 
 .1 :i 
 
 & t-t .HO 
 
 55 _CJ co B"2 
 W=3 C ^^ 
 
 C< r-T S -1 
 
 r^ u *— ' 
 E -1 ^ £ 
 
 8| 
 
 '3 
 
 Is . 
 
 « 'S 
 
 s o* n 
 
 <^ 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 «4H 
 
 o 
 
 *H-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hJ "$3 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 0) 
 
 
 
 
 fi 
 
 .2 a -£ 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 rt 55 CD 
 
 a .-§ • a 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 J£ O 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 H3 £=J r;H. 
 
 
 
 jj 
 
 co 
 
 CO ~3 CO 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 M 
 
 p; c s 
 
 
 
 
 
 — — — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 < 
 
 N 
 
 a 
 
 miez. 
 
 !Z. 
 
 miez. 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 V. dor 
 Dorme 
 V. dor 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — — — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 . S3 
 
 S a 
 
 co co 
 
 2 rA K ° 
 
 "a S g a 
 
 £ w r 
 
 3 — 3 — > — 
 
 
 
 
 W — 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 a M HH 
 
 
 
 
 £| W H 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 . Ph 
 
 
 
 
 <j 
 
 " S » 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 1-1 . LJ 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 mait. 
 
 dorme 
 SUBJ 
 me. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;■« ^ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 0-30 
 
 
 
 
 "T3 
 
 n3 ^ T3 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph O* Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 a" 
 
 
 .3 tC- 
 
 
 
 PH 
 
 
 cS O 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 
 5h 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 P5 
 
 nd 
 
 ■O 01 'S 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 ES 
 
 r-H 
 
 303 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 H fi H 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 •a) 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 Ph 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 1-3 
 
 Je dormais. 
 Je dorme. 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 . 
 
 a 
 
 
 ,g 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 ^S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 *■*■ 
 
 
 < 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 <M 
 
 
 £3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 en 
 
 ■JS 
 
 
 ^n 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 co 
 
 ^ 
 
 is ^ 
 
 On 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 <A1 
 
 
 M-T 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 s 
 
 
 Uj 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 H-> 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 r> 
 
 
 H- 1 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ■+J 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 oS 
 
 CO 
 
 
 S 
 
 Ss 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 »■* 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >o 
 
 <j^ 
 
 00 
 
 
 ^!^ 
 ^ 
 
 No 
 
 
 O 
 
 NO 
 
 S> 
 
 ■to 
 
 O 
 
 NO 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 '8 
 
 oS 
 
 =0 
 
 Mh 
 
 C+H 
 O 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 r; 
 
 O 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 H-J 
 
 Ph 
 
 4-> 
 
 
 U 
 
 rn 
 
 
 w 
 
 • r-H 
 
 Ph 
 
 M 
 
 ■Ki 
 
 O 
 
 fe 
 
 
 (J 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 rh 
 
 CM 
 
 5° 
 
 (M 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 ^-» 
 
 
 
 ti-4 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 hH 
 
 1— ( 
 
 at 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 Pm 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z 
 W 
 cc 
 
 w 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 C 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 S*1 
 
 >-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Phm- 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 fe 
 
 e^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 <1 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 .*3 
 
 e3 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 tH 
 
 «H 
 
 
 
 hH 
 
 HH 
 
 P^ 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 i-l 
 
 
 
 
 (H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 {-. 
 
 -J! 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 Ci 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 eS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 •"a 
 
136 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 325, 326. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^! 
 
 
 
 ■^ 8 *5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 3 1 
 
 CO "£ 
 
 •d "d 
 
 3 co 
 
 
 
 
 number of 
 
 »n is like M 
 
 Aux. Mtr 
 
 
 C 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 CO 
 
 "£ 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 3 
 
 o 
 £ 
 
 CO 
 
 +5 "3 
 
 3 .2 
 
 2 g 
 
 3 3 
 2 ° 
 
 £ £ 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 C? R 
 
 
 3 
 03 
 
 
 h .2 
 
 l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 c> -*^> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 |J-I 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ m 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 co 
 
 N N 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 g ^ 
 
 p 1 
 
 H* 
 
 N 
 
 CD 
 
 
 <^ .i; 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 P4 
 
 
 < 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 <3 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 1' B 
 
 
 §2. £ 
 
 
 H 
 
 z 
 
 H 
 a: 
 
 
 1 H 
 1 <s 
 
 W 
 
 I a 
 
 
 £ 
 
 £ 
 > 
 
 S £ 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^5 r * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■3 1-2 
 
 r,-? S3 g >> 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 H 
 
 GQ 
 
 W ri 
 
 absence of the 
 ngidar of tbe i 
 
 
 CO 
 
 IP 
 
 a o 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 _o 
 
 C 
 
 £ 
 
 <3 
 
 H 2 
 
 & £ 
 
 w 
 
 n 
 
 P 1-2 
 
 r e ^ 
 
 3*3 
 
 c § o 
 
 
 H O n 3 
 
 ^ s 1. • 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 ££ 
 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 
 S 55 
 
 M p 
 
 •M 
 
 's M . 
 
 
 
 3 B 
 
 © "S 
 
 
 
 
 <; 
 h 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 5 d 
 
 r- O 
 
 .5 ?° 
 
 
 3 
 
 '5 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 *+* o 
 
 
 
 
 IB S • . 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t) 
 
 <y m 
 
 <4i 
 
 HO 
 
 - ea" 
 
 'c3 
 
 b consist 
 second p 
 ir, £o cfo'e, 
 
 ,,j 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 P3 
 
 o 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 2 ° 
 
 1— 1 HH 
 
 5S 
 
 .8 
 
 
 © 
 
 ffl 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 : ^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 53 2 £ 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 co* .22 
 
 3 ri 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 t-H 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 a -2 s 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 O 
 P 
 
 .2 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 "3 
 
 r3 CO 
 
 
 H 
 < 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 O O 
 
 £ £ 
 
 o 
 
 
 '-+3 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 i3 ^ CS 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 fee 
 
 
 
 1 § ^ 
 
 MH 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 Q 
 
 
 
 r <o o 
 .S •§ Q 
 
 
 s2 
 
 "5 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 . . CO 
 
 "5 'ri 
 
 ,r ~s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E3 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 O 
 
 CM 
 
 
 "3 
 
 _£ 1 » 
 
 P^ 5 '5S CM 
 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 g 
 
 C 
 
 £ 
 
 o o 
 
 £ £ 
 
 O 
 
 .« 
 
 CC 
 
 
 o 
 
 H ^ CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 a o 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 
 
 Hs 
 
 *<s> 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 1-5 
 
 1-3 
 
 H-5 ^ 
 
327, 328.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 137 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 +3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 ca 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 '5 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 "s 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 N 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 f> 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 G 
 
 .2 
 
 
 G 
 
 .2 
 
 'cO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 -< 
 
 PS 
 
 G 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 H 
 
 - 
 PH 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 - 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 P< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 1-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eu 
 
 S3 
 
 .73 
 
 CD 
 
 
 <"-" 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 c 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 <§ 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 PP 
 
 
 "»o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 t3 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■+-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Cfl 
 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •I— s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 i§ 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *» G 
 
 
 
 
 G 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 •2 £ G 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 cS G S 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > © £ 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 £ CO £ 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o rG o 
 
 
 _,j 
 
 rS 
 
 co G co 
 
 
 G 
 
 8j 
 
 Ph 
 
 EL a 5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 N N 
 
 
 PS 
 
 N 
 
 CD CD 
 
 
 •< 
 
 Ph 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 b s > 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 § g § 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 
 W 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 !>' O >■" 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 — — ■ — 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 2h 
 
 
 
 
 
 co' 
 
 CO , CO 
 
 G t G 
 
 
 
 B"§ 
 
 .2 • w ° 
 
 
 
 H Sh 
 
 
 
 
 CO £. 
 
 > G w > 
 
 
 
 3 5 
 
 eS °> > | ° 
 
 
 — 
 
 in 
 
 > 
 
 B-g-fc- 
 
 
 
 
 fc W H 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 M S * 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 HH p 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 o33 
 
 
 
 Jz; 
 
 d >£ . 
 
 
 
 1-4 9 
 
 cS G M cd 
 
 
 
 r* 
 
 g • ° > 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 *J 
 
 O 
 
 o v ° 
 
 
 S 
 
 Ph 
 
 s 6* s 
 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 — — — 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 CO 
 
 .3 co 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 c3 CD 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 &H Si 
 
 
 
 
 > . > 
 
 
 g 
 
 G 
 
 G cu 3 
 
 
 O 
 
 ° > o 
 
 
 -sj 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 G 
 
 G G 3 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 H O H 
 
 
 
 
 
 «! 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 to* 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 '3 ?5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 G G 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ►"5 
 
 h> h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .•^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^J 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 aient 
 snten 
 ent. 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 G 
 
 "S s « 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 CD r^S CD 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 CO •„-< «5 
 
 co G co 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph C? Ph 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 PS 
 
 N 
 
 S N 
 
 
 
 -J! 
 
 CD 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 G 
 
 G S G 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 CO "g to 
 
 
 
 0Q 
 
 > 
 
 ^ i ^ 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 PS 
 
 
 
 
 
 PM 
 1 
 
 « 9 
 
 H 2 
 S G 
 
 si a 
 
 T. 
 
 sentions. 
 
 VE. 
 
 ntons. 
 
 -Present. 
 sentions. 
 
 
 
 
 C-i M 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 5Z5 
 
 g~ps— > — 
 
 a & B 
 
 
 
 
 > _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 >-< p 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 5« 
 
 c3 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 i"s 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 G ^, c 
 
 <» ^ S3 
 
 to G « 
 
 
 c 
 
 S 
 
 S 0» P5 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 — — — 
 
 
 •^> 
 
 X' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 cc 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 '£ V 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 G 
 
 G 
 CD 
 
 G "£ 
 
 CD . S3 
 
 
 << 
 
 co 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
 
 a 
 .2 
 
 Ph 
 H 
 
 G 
 
 H 
 
 G g G 
 
 H 03 Eh 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 "-J3 
 
 -< 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •fz^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 CO 
 
 "S o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 G 
 CD 
 
 G G 
 
 CD CD 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO co 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 is 
 
 CD CD 
 1-5 1-5 
 
 
138 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 329, 330. 
 
 W. 
 O 
 
 c 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 -M 
 
 
 
 
 -^ c 
 
 
 
 
 C 03 
 
 
 
 
 S 5> -^ 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 •« f- c 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 C3 03 o 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > <» > 
 
 
 
 
 *-" rn *i 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 03 r^S 03 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 te y-< tn 
 
 
 S3 
 
 P 
 
 w 3 tn 
 
 R O* P 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 
 
 j» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 «2 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P-H 
 
 > 
 
 £ N *> 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 O P ^ 
 
 cn > 55 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 k £ > 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 go 
 
 a eh* g 
 
 
 
 .-i tn oo^r 
 
 
 
 5 > 
 
 > p h > 
 
 
 
 a i« 
 
 3^ g£ S 
 
 
 
 ej O 
 
 
 
 PL, tn 
 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 ERFEC 
 
 IN. 
 RATI 
 
 |Se 
 
 I VE- 
 IN. 
 
 
 
 
 a w e- 1 
 
 
 
 
 2 ^ 5 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 ~o 
 
 i-i p 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 V^ 
 
 13 - >D 
 3 S^ o 
 
 
 
 
 > m > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 3 •? 3 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 tn 3 tn 
 
 
 "> 
 
 R 
 
 p a p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • r- tn 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 tf o 
 
 
 H 
 PS 
 
 3 
 
 > > 
 
 03 03 
 
 
 «4 
 
 Cfl 
 
 tn „5 tn 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 a 
 
 a 3 - 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H $ H 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 to 
 
 '5 3 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 C3 03 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 tn tn 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 h5 H» 
 
 
 
 
 
 5- r 
 
 +2 fei 
 
 
 N S 
 
 £ o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 C3 t5 
 1=5 * 
 o EH 
 
 O 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 ■"§ 
 
 S3 
 
 "F 
 O 
 
 Q 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 •n 03 .3 
 
 > t> > > > 
 
 H en 
 
 s s 
 
 H O 
 
 g ® 
 
 1 
 
 I g<5 
 
 £ |£e£ 
 
 CBp 
 
 o 
 
 n . 
 . 52; .-s 
 
 c e 22 55 C 
 
 _03 g ^g ^03 o 
 
 H H H H H 
 
 *. 03 
 
 c c 
 ° 
 
331.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 139 
 
 si 
 
 •iS> 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 .2 
 
 c3 
 
 o» a r 
 
 h t> t> 
 
 to co O co 
 
 a g|i .s 
 
 hh CD I • cj • 
 
 Sj P 2 
 
 ^ 55 M 
 .£> 
 
 CD ^ 
 S CO ^ 
 
 •J3 £ 
 
 -pj '-2 V» 
 
 PI 
 
 .2 
 
 S3 
 
 bp 
 
 'I 
 
 o 
 
 .2 c 
 
 S I 
 
 C 
 
 £>!>►>}>!>;>!>>> 
 
 
 £«£ E£ 
 
 2 «'5 
 
 c w a 
 .£(£.2 
 
 g g 
 
 h 2 
 
 H 
 
 go g 
 
 B CO 
 
 rA W O 
 
 CO CD .i-i 
 
 M C « © 
 
 ^cj I . 
 
 JB-s 
 
 -2 ^ 
 
 £* 
 
 HH HH H H M O* 
 
 H >■ 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 r-J 
 
 T-i 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 fl 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 r* 
 
 r- 
 
 ^> 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 PS 
 
 
 G 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 r> 
 
 <B 
 
 03 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 s 
 
 -8 
 
 
 
 
 j^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 pa 
 
 
 (S 
 
 «4-i 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 T1 
 
 
 c 
 
 B 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 oS 
 
 Oh 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 ■fi 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 »5 
 
 ■+J 
 
 
 o 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 «*; 
 
 
 
 Tj 
 
 5» 
 
 
 fl 
 
 S 
 
 
 c3 
 
 ■w 
 
 s. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 pO 
 
 co 
 
 
 rj-i 
 
 CD 
 
 
 CD 
 
 J-5 
 
 
 13 
 
 &. 
 
 
 CD 
 
 a. 
 
 
 CD 
 
 eS 
 
 
 P, 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C 
 
 si 
 
 3 
 
 
 pC 
 
 o 
 
 
 £ 
 
 fl) 
 
 
 -O 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 oS 
 
 
 lO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Ol 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 ft 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 CJ 
 
 rQ 
 
 s 
 
 CJ 
 
 rri 
 
 u 
 
 OS 
 
 CO 
 
 '3 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 "T3 
 
 "q 
 
 o \3 
 
140 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 332, 333. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ • 
 
 e 2 *: 
 
 
 
 
 e: 
 
 O <cy r 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ci > O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <3 
 
 <S ,i£ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 >■ V" 1 ^" 
 
 
 
 
 oj 
 
 03 = OT 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 P 
 
 PCS 
 
 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 
 
 <~5 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 -, 
 
 
 g s 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 V. vet 
 Vetez 
 V.vet 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — — — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 ?< 2. 
 
 .2 -^ jo 
 
 « — 15 — > — 
 
 
 
 
 ]i 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 H — l-H 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe K H 
 
 
 
 
 £-i 
 
 2 Ch 5 
 
 
 
 
 "1 
 
 M 3* P 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ait. 
 
 vete. 
 
 SUBJ 
 e. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <a> 
 
 <o rs <© 
 
 
 
 
 ;> 
 
 > %- > 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 KH 
 
 a 6* c 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 a* 
 
 
 
 
 
 ij 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 TO 
 ••M TO 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 TO 
 
 03 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 «1> 
 
 <o> . <sj 
 
 
 
 •■< 
 
 > 
 
 > m ;> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 3 
 
 3 <© 3 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 EH 
 
 H !> EH 
 
 
 
 DO 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 P4 
 
 TO 
 
 > 
 o 
 
 1-5 
 
 Je vetais. 
 Je vete. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H S 
 
 
 
 "£ 
 
 C 
 
 2 
 "3 
 
 c 
 
 ^ S -2 «• 
 § « ^ g 
 
 i- — TO i 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 TO 
 
 
 '3 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^2 -2 * 3 
 
 TO 
 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 X 
 
 '35 TO "to 03 
 
 TO 
 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO TO 03 
 
 TO 
 
 
 cj 
 
 rt 
 
 
 ^CS ^ ^ ^ 
 
 cc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 "TO TO ^ TO 
 
 TO 
 
 *2 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO TO — TO 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 )— ( 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a: 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 TO 
 
 O 
 
 :2 :2 i "& 
 
 .2 
 
 "to 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 
 S ol P TO 
 
 TO 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 X. 
 
 TO 
 
 c3 
 
 c3 
 
 Bj 
 
 c3 e3 >7 eS 
 
 03 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 TO TO N to 
 
 TO 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 c s ° s 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 I s * f* TO >■» 
 
 > ^ ^ ^ 
 
 c 
 
 H 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 Z 
 
 p>* 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 5> 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ti 
 
 TO 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 TO 
 
 P 
 
 .2 
 
 TO 
 
 £ 
 
 § .2 K - .c 
 
 TO 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 
 >> 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 :§ x 5 g s? 
 
 'to 
 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 TO 
 
 X 
 
 « ^"'to ff Sr % 
 
 "to 
 
 TO 
 
 
 I s3 
 a to 
 
 TO 
 
 r: 
 
 cs | « i | "1 
 § g 2 c g § 
 
 03 
 
 
 3D = 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 lg 
 
 J| 
 
 = 
 
 o « c a ht£ c 
 
 C 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 g*E 
 
 to 
 
 Bs5jjdi=^fJ» 
 
 !^ 
 
 
 
 C5 -S 
 
 
 ^ § H P 
 
 2 c- o 
 
 (3 
 
 
 > 
 
 e Q 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 H 
 
 S3 g 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 < 
 
 ~ l < 
 
 
 P g jz; 
 
 M 
 
 
 Q 
 2^3 
 
 . o- 1 
 "3 
 
 
 2oJ S5o 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 *= 
 
 ^cj ^ .« _ei co 'g 
 
 <"S 
 
 
 "to 
 
 TO 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 J* 
 
 TO 
 _0S 
 
 s 
 
 1 '3 « J 
 
 _oa 
 
 
 'to 
 
 TO 
 
 "co 
 
 "to TO '^ TO 
 
 "to 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 Ph s c r 
 
 
 "to 
 
 *— ' 
 
 t— ( 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1-1 
 
 -S! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 03 .2 
 
 
 a 
 
 TO 
 
 "3 
 
 
 cj "3 .TO 
 
 TO 
 O 
 
 
 .2 
 
 £> 
 
 TO 
 
 >cp V C0 O •;-< 
 
 TO 
 
 O 
 
 
 o> 
 
 
 .r5 -S -<J CD 
 
 
 
 "to 
 
 TO 
 
 X 
 
 TO TO 1 TO 
 
 "to 
 
 H 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 X 
 
 TO TO J2 «« 
 
 TO 
 
 K 
 
 ci 
 
 _e3 
 
 ^CS 
 
 (S 08 'g . •• « 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 "^ "^ .2 ^ 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?_| 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 - 
 
 3 S TO tf 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 E^ 
 
 E-i H <5 EH 
 
 rH 
 
 cc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 .-5 °5 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 '3 
 
 03 
 
 oS '3 
 
 3 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 CO 
 
 JS TO TO 
 
 TO 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 03 
 
 "J TO 03 
 
 TO 
 
 
 c3 
 
 rt 
 
 
 « ci c3 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 s g e 
 
 s 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o © o 
 
 o 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 Ha 
 
 i-a 
 
 b h H5 
 
 h3 
 
 
334-336.] 
 
 VEEB. 
 
 141 
 
 X <3 
 
 03 
 
 
 ,«2 
 
 
 hC 
 
 « a 
 
 CO CO 
 
 HPhPh 
 
 « 2 b 
 § O P 
 
 a P r-i 
 
 co g m 
 
 «! O & 
 
 PhOc*2 
 
 Ph 
 
 .2 
 
 £P 
 
 "I 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 lO 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 H^> 
 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 > -£3. 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 ■S 3 8 
 
 p: 
 
 
 CD 
 
 3. <D fD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 p3 
 
 8 2 * 
 
 'CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CD 
 
 3 c« « 
 
 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 a ? e 
 
 a 
 
 _^ 
 
 CO 
 
 co 3 en 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 53 
 
 Ph 
 
 HH O* M 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 5 
 
 CD 
 CD ..J P* 
 
 -*5 N 3 
 
 f CD 
 
 "35 
 
 CO 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 V.mu 
 Mouve 
 V. mo 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 W 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 w o 
 
 Oh > - ' H 
 
 1 
 Definite. 
 
 | N. mumes. 
 
 IRATIVE. 
 
 j Mouvons. 
 IVE — Present. 
 | N. mouvions. 
 
 co 
 B 
 
 o 
 
 "53 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 1 !z5 S 
 
 & — 
 
 
 I-H Ph 
 
 W H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 Regular. 
 P 
 ut. 
 
 1 meuve. 
 SUBJU 
 
 euve. 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 <3 
 
 
 a 
 
 s -3 a 
 
 a 
 
 c5 
 
 M 
 
 s o* a 
 
 a 
 
 § 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 CD <D 
 
 CD 
 
 
 to 
 
 +^> . > 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 " 3 . CD 
 
 co 
 
 03 
 
 CD 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 S 
 
 a 3 a 
 
 a 
 
 =3 
 
 H S H 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 EH 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 "3 CD 
 
 > . > 
 
 CD 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 co fl 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 3 CD 
 
 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 a a a 
 
 a 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD CD 
 
 <D 
 
 
 J-=) 
 
 >-* t-5 >"8 
 
 1-5 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 
 <D 
 
 M 
 
 
 +i • > . 
 
 a 
 
 
 •h OS 3« 
 «3 ^ CD <!S 
 
 <1 
 
 ^j 
 
 d s p £h'H- 
 
 
 c 
 
 <D CD r-H .— 
 
 
 o3 
 
 r B, F fc% «g 
 
 
 3 
 
 ShhO'O' 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 . cc 
 
 
 H 
 
 H § Eh 
 O CO 
 
 
 f4 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 PERFE 
 TURE. 
 PERAT 
 PERFE 
 
 
 
 SPSS 
 
 1— I R M M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 •S ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 CC 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 eat 
 nt. 
 
 GUV 
 
 Ipl 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 E3 
 
 &&&-'3 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 mmhO* 
 
 p> 
 
 
 
 fca 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 O 
 
 H Eh 
 
 1 SB 
 
 ,.o 
 
 H 
 
 H '^« W 
 
 
 P3 
 
 S a PhPh 
 
 > 
 
 "cl 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 GO 
 
 OJ 
 
 Ph 
 Eh 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 Ph 
 
 Indicative P 
 Past Definit 
 Conditional 
 Subjunctive 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 t3 
 
 
 
 ?o 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
142 
 
 FRENCH GRAAIIIAE. 
 
 [§ 337,333. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 4s 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 I I 
 
 § -a g | 
 
 *-" *-■ c ^ 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 "o 
 
 c? 3 
 
 '3 "3 3 '3 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 > > o > 
 
 S-< SH ft J-i 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 S 3 ^ nT 3 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 < 
 
 +5 
 
 o 
 ft 
 
 o o 
 ft ft 
 
 O o ,2 O 
 
 ft ft •? ft 
 
 5 
 
 ft 
 
 V 
 
 
 — 
 
 to 
 
 CO CO 
 
 CO CO 3 CO 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 cS 
 
 
 
 R R o? n 
 
 
 ■*o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 !IL 
 
 h- 1 H- ( 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • <w 
 
 
 s-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H <» 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ^ ;; 
 
 £ « 
 
 
 ft 
 
 i 
 
 < 
 
 ID 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 .2 § 
 
 C? 5 
 
 > > 
 
 3 3 
 
 -ourvoirez. 
 ourvoiriez 
 rvoycz. 
 ourvoyiez. 
 
 .2 
 
 > 
 
 
 ECT SUBJDNCT 
 
 sse, I might f oi 
 
 isses, etc. 
 
 t. 
 
 ssions. 
 
 ssiez. 
 
 ssent. 
 
 
 2_ 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 5 
 
 O m 
 
 
 *3 
 
 ft 
 
 > 
 
 ft ft 
 
 ft ft 3 ft 
 > > ft >>' 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 
 
 
 
 a o 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 • £? 
 
 CO 
 
 C co 
 1 | 
 
 M r co 
 
 § .2 • § 
 ■S ^-3 3 ^ >-» 
 
 O Z O o z o 
 
 CO 
 
 C 
 
 .2 
 
 Cf. 
 
 
 Ph ft^3,p, & ft 
 
 
 
 H O 
 
 o <3 
 
 
 o S 
 
 
 
 
 Z > 
 
 > > 
 
 > g > S a > 
 
 s|5 .IT* 
 
 ft-7 ftd s ^r ft 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 f- Si 
 
 3 . 3 
 
 ,.8.1 R 
 
 5 
 
 1 § 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 f 
 
 iTMiT 
 
 1^ 
 
 - 
 s 
 
 S M 
 
 s m 
 
 c? a 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 <3 ' 
 
 . ^ 
 
 H ^ S o Z M 
 
 2 © 
 
 ^R o 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 go 
 
 '3 
 
 g "3 
 
 o £ o ?D o 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 r* 
 
 fe r" 
 
 > O > o cc > 
 
 > 
 
 
 fc. 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 — S-i 
 
 3 3 
 o o 
 
 5-" f- ft S-" 
 
 o o r^ o 
 
 f-1 
 
 c 
 
 c3 
 
 
 o 
 
 = 
 
 ft 
 
 ft ft 
 
 ft ft -£ ft 
 
 ft 
 
 ifi <o 
 
 
 >«o 
 
 > 
 
 (— 1 
 
 Eh Eh 
 
 R h C? S 
 
 RR 
 
 S3 5i 
 
 
 pf 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 o "§ 
 
 
 ►H 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 u S 
 
 s 
 
 >■ 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 cr 
 
 OD *^. 
 
 PAST DEFINITE. 
 
 Jc previs, Iforesa 
 Tu previs, etc. 
 11 previt. 
 N. previmes. 
 V. pre'vites. 
 Us pre'virent. 
 
 o 
 
 Pk 
 
 O 
 
 fi 
 
 .2 
 
 - 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 — 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 ft 
 
 _co 
 
 "3 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 ft 
 
 »H 
 
 '3 
 
 >-> CO 
 
 o a 
 > > 
 
 3 3 
 o o 
 
 ft ft 
 
 3 3 
 Eh H 
 
 | Tu pourvoira 
 ITu pourvoirai 
 | Pourvois. 
 | Tu pourvoics 
 
 d 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 n 
 t> 
 
 c 
 
 ft 
 
 oie, to foresee, i 
 le imperfect sul 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 CO 
 
 | 
 
 "3 
 
 CO 
 
 '3 '3 
 
 "o '3 "3 
 > > > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 S3 3 
 
 
 00* g 
 CO ^ 
 
 
 j^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 c o 
 
 O O O 
 
 c 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ft ft 
 
 ft ft ft 
 
 ft 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 o o o 
 
 cu 
 
 co ^ 
 
 
 
 
 hs 
 
 l-S t-3 
 
 •-5 »-5 l~5 
 
 ►a 
 
 ,5> 
 
 to 
 
 
§ 339, 340.] 
 
 143 
 
 -m" S 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 > > 
 
 fA ^ fa 
 
 O H 
 
 S H " S rs li 3 
 
 P. 1 c-? I ~ 
 
 ? I S I E 
 
 
 b h 
 
 P-l *3 
 
 n 
 
 •-3 
 
 
 1 § 
 
 to p 3 
 
 3 O O 
 
 Ph & & 
 
 1*8 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 oj 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 ft 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 83 
 
 M 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 au 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 PJ 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 -4 
 
 N 
 
 5 
 
 to 
 
 CD 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 to 
 
 03 
 
 <3 
 
 to 
 
 et? 
 
 
 M 
 oq 
 
 f> 
 
 !> 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E- to 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 to 
 O 
 
 -1 
 
 p 
 3 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 1* 
 
 & 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 M 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ■H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 -t3 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 *5 
 
 c3 
 
 ^J 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 C3 
 
 3 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 ►H 
 
 >— * 
 
 1— 1 
 
 l"H 
 
 
 C£ 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~~ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 •s 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 PS 
 
 
 tj. 
 
 to 
 
 f3 
 
 
 <: 
 
 a 
 
 ci 
 
 3 
 
 03 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 =3 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 <n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 S3 
 
 > 
 
 
 rs 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 05 
 
 S 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 SO 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 0J 
 
 CD 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 hs 
 
 t-5 
 
 1-3 
 
 •-5 
 
144 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 341. 
 
 ^s 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 c3 
 fcfl 
 
 o 
 
 Ph O* 
 
 !> oo t> > 
 
 63 S3 . O m O co 
 
 Ph o3 H .a <£ «5 3 
 
 | «>. o^ » h ^ 
 
 '. i_* I— I TO I . * O . * 
 
 !>— s — 
 
 M 
 
 & P 
 
 OS o3<« 
 
 Ph G* m Ph 
 
 <D o S> 
 
 '5 g 
 
 
 1 § 
 
 o a *§ 
 
 O rH <» 
 
 « b 8 
 
 <X> £ H 
 
 _h O O 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 cu 
 
 +-> 
 
 4-> 
 
 cs 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 «4J 
 
 O 
 
 s, 
 
 U 
 
 CD i— l 
 ■^ CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C S3 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 
 
 cu 
 S3 
 
 "g <D CD 
 
 Si S 3 
 
 C 
 CD 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 Is 
 
 r o3 
 
 "a 
 
 03 03 ,2 03 
 
 'o3 
 
 
 > 
 
 p> 
 
 > 
 
 > > ? ► 
 
 > 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 -^2 
 
 CO CO S to 
 
 
 o3 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph Ph O* ■ Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eh 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 CD .^! 
 
 N 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 N 
 
 <L> 
 
 ^ t* N 
 
 
 CD 
 
 .2 
 
 <S3 
 
 >T3 "^3 cd 
 3 3 . ^3 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 
 'oS 
 
 'cS 
 
 'ol 
 
 o3 o3 N oj 
 
 "ci 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 »»■ 
 
 > > > > 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 03. 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 >* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eh ^ 
 
 |1 
 
 to 
 
 .2 
 
 'eel 
 
 CD 
 
 B 
 
 si 
 
 w 
 
 Q 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 Ph 
 "S3 
 
 p g.g g' ca 
 
 'O i'S -Bo 
 S3 H S3 ^2 k^3 
 
 & S ^ 
 
 go c3 S- p 
 
 S3 S3 ^ ^3 
 
 # o 
 
 'w 
 
 CO 
 
 e5 > 
 
 
 1&5 
 
 a — 
 ;> 
 
 5 
 
 "ss 
 
 8* 
 
 *c3 
 
 w tz 
 
 ft- 
 
 w 
 
 P4 
 
 <3 
 
 
 03 
 
 IS 
 
 "rt 
 
 o3 03 ^3 o3 
 
 'oH 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 P Ph C Ph 
 
 >> 
 
 S3 
 
 ""Si 
 !> 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 to .S 
 
 o3 oS ^ 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 
 5 
 
 S3 
 
 CO 
 
 "c3 
 
 CO 
 
 5 ^ . « 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 « 
 
 03 
 
 Is 
 
 'ol 
 
 > ^ g ^ 
 
 'oS 
 
 < 
 
 > 
 
 !> 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 Ph 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 S3 03 S3 
 
 r~ 
 
 Eh 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H ' EH > El 
 
 Eh 
 
 0Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■«) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 'ol *3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 M 
 
 "3 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 ^3 ^3 cd 
 S3 S3 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 
 s 
 
 'ol 
 
 'S 
 
 03 03 c3 
 
 "w 
 
 
 t> 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > > > 
 
 > 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 hs 
 
 i-s 
 
 hs 
 
 1-5 >-S l-Z 
 
 i-s 
 
 
§ 342, 343.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 145 
 
 fHMHHHHfH ( 3f > hHEH 
 
 ;>;>>:>:>-£>!>:> 
 
 O O 
 
 S o 
 
 o^<@ 
 
 > a > 
 
 Sho£o * 
 
 3 &». H O a < kJ m 
 
 O *^ 
 
 o 
 
 1-3 
 
 .2 £> 
 
 "3 «2 
 
 r2 o 
 
 c3 
 O 
 
 fcj 
 
 r3 r^ T3 
 
 3 2 S3 
 
 poo 
 
 !> >> !> > 
 
 *% § S S 
 
 Br- £ . f3 J3 
 
 Q 
 
 iz; ,j 
 
 S* > i> > 
 
 H H 
 
 2 S 
 ,3 T3 
 
 G 
 
146 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 344. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 <hh 
 O 
 
 fl 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3" 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _CD 
 
 '2 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 CO 
 
 T3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ,Jh 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 p 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 i> 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 !> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 . a 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 ^o 
 
 H O 
 
 Z T 1 
 
 B£ 
 
 
 4 
 
 z 
 co 
 
 .2 
 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 S 
 
 9 s 
 
 1° 
 
 > 
 
 
 '- 
 
 Ph 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 EH 
 
 o 
 
 is 
 
 : 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 1 
 
 fc 
 
 
 £ 
 
 -3 — 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 H 
 
 '■ 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 Q . 
 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 
 z.t^ 
 
 
 es 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 O c3 
 
 
 q 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 Js 
 
 pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "p 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (-H 
 
 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 '3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 C) 
 
 
 
 
 
 p! 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 S> 
 
 
 > 
 
 PS 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 s 
 
 EH 
 
 
 
 
 EH 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 _^ 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 H3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 r^3 
 
 
 'fS 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 i> 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 CD 
 
 Ha 
 
 
 
 
 hs 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 © 
 CO 
 
 c3 
 
 eg 
 "S 
 
 &0 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 rfg 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 a 
 o 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 s> pn 
 
 ^ 
 x 
 
 * 
 
 H 
 Ph 
 
 fi 
 
 |3 
 
 o 
 
 t/2 
 
 pq 
 
 <1 
 
 > 
 
 *H-3 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 fcC 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 !3 
 
 a 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 H 
 
 C3 
 
 -* 
 -* 
 
 e 
 
 **\ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 +s 
 
 
 
 -^ Pi 
 
 
 
 S3 <D 
 
 
 
 CD >■ -^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 •rt H P 
 
 
 a> 
 
 & 9, S 
 
 
 
 r^I ^ £ 
 
 
 "o 
 
 O cj o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 -2 ^ -c 
 
 
 cd 
 
 c3 -3 cj 
 
 
 
 co tf co 
 
 03 
 
 Ph 
 
 HH O* HH 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 rO 
 
 
 
 <J 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 <$ 
 
 O 
 
 o S^ o 
 
 Ph 
 
 co 
 
 co ^ co 
 C3 co " 
 
 
 53 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 . r^ 
 
 P3 
 
 ^ 
 
 > < > 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 H O 
 
 !•§ 
 
 i .i 
 
 o ^ e5 © 
 
 
 H — 
 
 
 > 
 
 w — _ 
 
 
 
 & W EH 
 
 
 H 
 
 a Ph 5 
 
 
 O 
 
 M S .» 
 
 
 H 0)P 
 
 cd' 
 
 P 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 1— 1 -w 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 O 03 O 
 
 X! 
 
 
 CO ,co 
 
 <J 
 
 1 
 
 •S F 5 -s 
 
 es -jj e3 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 S O* M 
 
 
 
 «; 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 
 s 5 P 
 
 ^ 
 
 § 
 
 > > 
 
 
 o 
 
 "o • "o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
 
 ,o 
 
 ^2 3 ^3 
 
 h 
 j 
 
 c3 
 
 c3 O 03 
 
 a J pi 
 
 PH 
 
 H 
 
 H < EH 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 <; 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 
 co 
 
 <! 
 
 
 *o3 CD 
 
 Ph 
 
 p 
 
 > > 
 
 
 o 
 
 'o o 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -° -9 
 
 
 c3 
 
 C3 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 h> 
 
 h> ^ 
 
 
§ 345, 346.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 147 
 
 
 
 
 J2 
 
 
 cS 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 W 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 K2 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 fH 
 
 
 p! 
 
 55 <» 
 
 H 
 
 •S ^ 
 
 SB 
 
 s. §3 
 
 H 
 
 ^ ft 
 
 
 3 « 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 ,■2 ^ 
 
 3h 
 
 ^ *. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J&i 
 
 
 
 
 tf fti 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 « £ 
 
 
 Ph > 
 
 
 
 
 I H 
 
 
 
 U—< 
 
 
 !> M 
 
 
 }H H 
 
 
 U Pi 
 
 
 s a 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 3 
 
 ,__, 
 
 
 1—1 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 « 
 
 c3 
 
 «! 
 
 rQ TO 
 
 Ph 
 
 3 OS 
 
 H 
 
 H « 
 
 -4 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 rO 
 
 
 
 
 HS 
 
 p 
 .2 
 
 c3 
 P 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 1 1 
 
 ,3 o 
 
 3 to 
 
 C? pq 
 
 I* 
 J? 
 
 [OH „ 
 
 IN 
 
 !> > > 
 
 
 E<3 
 S^2 
 
 
 .22 g S3 
 
 •S . C I s > 
 
 o h o « a 
 
 P-l Q 
 
 • 1-3 
 
 l-o3 
 
 a **= 
 
 «£ 
 
 G> 
 
 H 3 
 
 fcj 
 
148 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 347, 348. 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 .2 
 
 3 
 
 c .2 
 
 O 3 
 
 
 1 « 
 
 3 
 CJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 J3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 s § 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O — c 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 13 
 
 CJ 
 
 13 
 
 13 13 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 O 
 
 
 3 
 
 S3 
 
 
 S3 3 
 
 nn S3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 ^S 
 
 c 
 
 < 
 
 <- 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 co co 
 
 IT 1 O 
 
 5» m 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 M 
 
 K 
 
 pH Ph 
 
 c p 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 to 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 <u 
 
 o .3 
 
 CJ 
 
 'to 
 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 N 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 CJ 
 
 cj 
 
 cj 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 J 1 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 S3 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 cj 
 
 CJ CJ 
 > > 
 
 3 cj 
 O 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 tc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 i=! 
 
 ^ ° 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 .2 
 
 co 
 CJ 
 
 s 
 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 to eJ.S 
 
 3 
 
 .2 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 BJ3 
 
 '3 
 
 <3 
 
 £ §,3 
 
 cluon 
 onclu 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 a cj 
 
 
 ""3 
 
 CJ to CJ 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 <? 3 
 
 £2 
 
 S3 
 O 
 
 £§ 
 
 con 
 -Pee 
 con 
 
 VE. 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 
 
 e3 ° 
 
 3 w 
 
 £*T u 
 
 E4 « 
 
 ££ 
 
 
 
 Ifc 
 
 
 gfc 
 
 |N. 
 
 TIONAL.- 
 
 |N. 
 
 M PER ATI 
 
 L_! 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 a — 
 > 
 
 8 
 
 13 
 
 B 
 
 K 
 
 — >; — 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 . 55 
 
 « — 
 g 
 
 ^S 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 5n 
 
 50 3 
 
 2^ 
 
 
 •1 
 
 
 8 
 
 *s 
 
 _a 
 
 ^3 ^ 
 2 ^ « 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t: 3^ 
 
 0^1—1 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 13 
 
 O CJ 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 13 
 
 
 s 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 £3 S3 
 
 Z, « 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 cj 
 
 cj 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 "3 ° 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph s 
 
 o» a 
 
 H 
 
 m 
 
 s 
 o 
 O 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — — 
 
 — 
 
 m 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 co 
 
 to 
 
 '3 
 
 CO 
 
 3 ei 
 Sh t« 
 
 to 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 Pn 
 
 J3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 r3 S 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 Q 
 
 3 
 
 *o 
 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 13 13 
 
 to 13 
 
 13 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 fl 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 «-!— 1 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 T? CD 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 cj 
 
 cj 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 3 U 
 O 3 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 3 
 EH 
 
 H 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 H EH 
 
 H 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-+3 
 
 a: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bn 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •I - s 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^co 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 # to 
 
 
 "5 °3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 to 
 
 "3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 6 
 
 CO 
 
 Q 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 PS 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 cj 
 
 cj 
 
 O 
 
 CJ 
 
 13 
 
 .t^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 P 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 cj 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 <d 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 CO <D 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 1-3 
 
 t-3 
 
 hs 1-3 
 
 1-3 
 
 »-3 
 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 .2 
 "3 
 
 I I ^ 
 
 3 
 CJ 
 to 
 to 
 
 
 
 3 
 .3° 
 
 3 
 .3° 
 
 .§) 1 & 
 
 'S 
 
 
 3 
 
 "3 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 si pS ^1 
 
 
 -ff 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 ir> cj 
 
 
 
 *\ 
 
 ♦jj 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 co 3 a) 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 S C H 
 
 
 
 ofi 
 
 1— i 
 
 H- 1 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 ^5 
 
 S m 
 
 "to 
 
 
 
 .** 
 
 -u CD 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 N - 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3° 
 
 .3° 
 
 bC 
 
 
 <! 
 
 '3 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 £, '3 
 
 c: 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 ^ Ul h 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CJ 
 
 5 
 
 CJ -g CJ 
 
 Cj 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 l> 
 
 k 6 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 H" 3 
 
 co 
 3 
 
 .2 
 
 3 . £ O 
 
 <--^ co E .i-i 
 
 S3 
 "to 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 3 C^C 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 bfl 
 
 fcJO O g bO 
 
 .3° 
 
 
 
 §•3 
 
 > 
 
 '3 
 
 3 
 
 =1 « £ 
 
 c: 
 
 
 
 
 fa 
 
 S 3| Q 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 <1 
 
 
 ^ HH CDP 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 S5 . 
 
 
 P ^ 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 .13 .3TT 
 3 3-^3 
 
 *> 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 C 
 
 fcC 
 
 M S3 
 
 u 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 'eS 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 _ '3 
 
 "5 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 CJ 
 
 3 
 
 ® "3 « 
 
 5 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph O* M 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 m 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 
 co 
 
 '3 
 3 
 
 .a (5 
 
 3 3 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 _3 
 
 fcXJ 
 
 .3° .SP 
 
 ,bx 1 
 
 c_, 
 
 H 
 
 "3 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 to '3 
 
 '— 3 f - 1 
 
 '3 
 
 b 
 
 3 
 
 CJ 
 
 3 
 
 cj .3 cj 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 EH 
 
 3 
 H 
 
 3 S 3 
 
 H O EH 
 
 EH 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 -*j 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 cS 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 bp 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 S3' 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 . 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 .2 3 
 
 .52 
 
 O 
 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 .3° 
 
 3 3 
 
 fcfl bo 
 
 3 
 b£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 a 
 
 "3 
 
 C3 cj 
 
 cj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 Ha 
 
 h3 
 
 h3 t-=> 
 
 Hj 
 
§ 349, 350.] 
 
 149 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _^J 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 P 
 <V 
 co 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 p 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO +i 
 
 "2 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 CO 
 
 'co 
 
 •3 s 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § -3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 -■p 
 
 r^J 
 
 Tj 
 
 cj 'd 
 
 n3 
 
 X 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 PS 
 
 CO £ 
 
 PS 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 r^2 O 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 +J 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 CJ 
 
 v u 
 
 CJ 
 
 <H 
 
 p 
 
 co 
 
 to 
 
 co 
 
 P, co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 to 
 
 M 
 
 HH 
 
 M 
 
 a s 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 . i4 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 It 
 
 N 
 
 *co 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 as 
 
 "co 
 
 'id . 
 
 N IS 
 
 *co 
 
 
 B 
 
 '3 
 
 "3 
 
 If 
 
 % p 
 
 "3 
 
 
 w 
 
 T3 
 
 nd 
 
 .2 T3 
 
 H3 
 
 
 -5! 
 
 PI 
 
 P 
 
 pi p) 
 
 P) 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 "A 
 
 rci O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ■ • 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 O > 
 
 > 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 Pw 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 . CO 
 
 CO 
 
 PS 
 
 _o 
 
 "co 
 
 1 -a 
 
 B <« 
 « PS 
 
 to 
 P) 
 
 CO* ..2 
 pj H co 
 
 co § s 
 
 PS 
 
 CO 
 
 |53 
 
 
 |.*3 
 
 '3 
 
 !S rS 
 
 
 
 w^ 
 
 ■"d 
 
 n3 'd 
 
 •59 50 h3 
 
 Tj 
 
 
 
 CO r-i 
 
 Is 
 
 P 
 O 
 
 • a p 
 go 
 
 2 CJ cj 
 
 ■ B a « 
 
 £p^s 
 
 ;o 1 ■ 
 
 P 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 W H 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 u 
 
 P-i O 
 
 
 •si 
 
 
 O 
 
 s . 
 
 "3 
 
 < 
 
 3|g 
 
 ^ 
 
 8 
 
 
 S<."p3 
 
 M rj 
 
 H3 
 
 co 
 
 "3 
 
 'OS ai 
 
 'co 
 
 o 
 
 
 P 
 
 PS 
 
 
 p 
 
 _I Pi 
 
 c 
 
 <o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 S"P. O 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 +3 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 ~u «-> 
 
 
 
 "3 
 ■■p 
 
 1— 1 
 
 1— 1 
 
 Ph 
 
 a s 
 
 Ph 
 
 pC 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — — 
 
 — 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 o 
 
 
 '3 
 
 '3 
 co 
 
 *3 
 
 .59 h 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 . '3 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 |co 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 H3 
 
 PS 
 
 3 § 
 
 ~ CJ 
 
 <T3 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 <| 
 
 Si 
 
 Pi 
 
 P 
 
 rf 
 
 jj 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 O H 
 
 H 
 
 '■+3 
 
 C5 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fcp 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 a5 
 
 •^75 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 ^ -*3 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 . M 
 
 
 . a3 
 
 *CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 p 
 
 *3 
 
 PS p 
 
 j3 
 
 p 
 
 
 -■p 
 
 T3 
 
 TJ 'd 
 
 T5 
 
 H3 
 
 
 
 PI 
 
 p 
 
 Pi PS 
 
 PS 
 
 p 
 
 OS 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 
 
 -* 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 CJ 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 hs 
 
 HS r-3 
 
 »-5 
 
 1-2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -J 
 
 P 
 CD 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 — 1 
 
 a 
 
 CJ .S «f-J 
 
 > ^ > O t> J> 
 
 « £ «j t> 
 
 rffil 
 
 o g P 
 
 
 o 
 
 I M [J 
 
 ."p; o m cj 
 
 co cj co 
 
 o ~ o 
 
 CJ "rj CJ 
 
 H H 
 
 O H H 
 
150 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 351,352. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 -m .2 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 p: 
 
 
 P3 
 
 '3 
 
 P "o ej 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 P Ho 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 >> 
 
 5-< o .s 
 
 02 
 
 
 "o 
 
 o 
 
 B .a '2 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O jj-, t> 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
 cc 
 
 CO 
 
 CO P„ «j 
 
 03 
 
 1 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph O" Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 ■4 
 
 
 H 
 
 S 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 o . 
 
 .H y N 
 BfH> O 
 
 .2 
 
 Ph 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 <P« go 
 Go ^3 
 
 p 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 p 
 
 .2 
 
 » .2 g'g* 
 
 p 2 » 1-2 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 "co 
 
 
 
 ">-> 
 
 co 
 
 
 63 O 
 
 P y 
 
 <P 2 „• o g o 
 
 3 « £ ^ o 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 f> 
 
 a fi 
 
 PS £ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 W H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 H 
 
 a 1 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph O 
 
 S 
 
 
 -3 
 
 a § 
 
 
 
 1— ( 
 
 
 O P3 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 - § g .S 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 o 
 
 P _« o 
 
 <P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Zi " d ^ 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 pH 
 
 1— 1 
 
 Ph O* Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 P3 . 
 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 ■ 5r, o 
 tc Pld .P 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 5h 
 
 3 .So 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 p 
 
 =5 2d 
 
 P 
 
 H 
 
 CC 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H OH 
 
 H 
 
 
 — 
 
 — — — — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 *S 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 OB .'P .2 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 t*~» 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 3 "o *o 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 f-1 S-l U 
 
 5h 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 o o o 
 
 O 
 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 o o o 
 
 o 
 
 
 Hj 
 
 Ha 
 
 1-3 ^3 IT) 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 
 <0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 .2 H 
 
 P 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 "<S 
 
 c 
 
 o <u 
 
 o 
 
 
 -n 
 
 to 
 
 03 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 o .22 
 
 5. 
 
 •■Si 
 
 
 "o 
 
 P 
 
 <p 
 
 ^2 2 
 
 'S 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 y & 
 
 o 
 
 53 
 
 +j 
 
 OD 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 PS co 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 O? Ph 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 ts; 
 
 o 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 w 
 
 "co 
 
 
 ^; "^ 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 VI 
 
 • oa 
 
 o 
 
 S -22 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 *o 
 
 'o 
 
 <P 
 
 co O 
 
 <p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 S-c 
 
 U 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o ° 
 
 O 
 
 
 02 
 
 £ 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 O ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 pa 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 s 
 
 gig 
 
 « g.i 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 .2 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 H P 
 
 1 
 
 c S M 
 
 o §.22 
 
 8 § 2 
 'SPf « 
 
 CO 
 
 <P 
 I 525 
 
 
 ' 
 
 g- 
 
 Ph 
 
 fi PS 
 
 — b — 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 W 
 
 Eh 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 CH 
 
 
 < % 
 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 'cl 
 
 Pw f 
 
 a) Ph . 
 
 
 c" 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ^ m m 
 
 
 <>- 
 
 
 
 
 
 o .22 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 p 
 
 "o 
 
 <P 
 
 ^ o 
 
 <P 
 
 
 
 
 S-i 
 
 
 •<-. i~. 
 
 s- 
 
 « 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 p ° 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 d 
 >« 
 
 S 
 
 H 
 
 Ph 
 
 O* Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 „ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JH 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 < o 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 z 
 
 5 
 
 
 *S 
 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 TO 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 *© 
 
 'o 
 
 <p 
 
 . "o 
 
 <P 
 
 ^M 
 
 A 
 
 
 ;-r 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 <rH O 
 
 2 p 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 0Q 
 
 EH 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 O H 
 
 H 
 
 
 < 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H-2 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S" 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 Q 
 
 
 o5 
 
 *3 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o' 
 
 CO 
 0Q 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 ■p 
 
 <p 
 
 P 
 
 <s 
 
 CM 
 
 
 •<-i 
 
 
 
 
 5-1 
 
 lO 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 cc 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 1-3 
 
 »-3 
 
 1-3 
 
 H3 
 
353, 354.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 151 
 
 
 
 
 5i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •<s> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■** 
 
 
 
 ho 
 5S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 +3 a 
 S *-* 8 -e 
 
 .^ .Ph CO .22 
 
 ?3 ^ ? 'O 
 ^S ^S £ ^3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 o o 
 
 q q 
 
 15° 
 
 
 
 a 
 to 
 
 ^3 
 
 CO 
 
 K3 
 
 
 <1 
 
 1 
 
 co 
 
 
 S-H 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 CD 
 
 — — 
 
 f^» 
 
 
 .22 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 ES 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 N 
 
 Is 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 .22 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 P3 
 
 -4 
 
 
 N " r« N ! 
 
 CD 
 
 
 Eh" 
 
 ^a <u 
 
 CD M 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 H 
 
 cd 
 
 ^3 
 
 .2 S .2 
 
 -3 ^ © ^ 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 W P! 
 
 02 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 w 
 
 CO 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 Ph 
 
 > 
 
 ^ >5_ n > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 > 6 
 
 ^3 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Eh CO 
 
 « S3 
 1 © 
 
 w.SS 
 
 H13 
 
 CO z CO 
 O 2 • CO O 
 
 M a ,2 r-; c £3.52 
 
 S 
 
 .2 
 
 *co 
 
 EH 
 
 
 
 CQ 
 
 £1 
 
 Ph > 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 g « P^ i-H 
 
 
 •o 
 
 
 > <& 
 
 s° 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 _! m Ph O 
 
 Ph 
 
 5*. 
 
 
 B g 
 
 •cO 
 
 
 
 
 5 s s 
 
 Ph m p 
 
 
 
 § a 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 2; 
 
 .a 
 
 s 
 
 "3 . ^ CD 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 >7 O Ci 
 
 Sq q 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 to -ta ,_i to 
 
 +a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •to 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 'd T3 " H 'd 
 H H O" H 
 
 ■3 
 
 Pi 
 
 8 
 
 ^3 
 
 CD 
 
 S-c 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 *H-3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 q^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 
 rg 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 • rH 
 
 
 Ph 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 hi 
 
 .1 
 
 o q 
 
 q « 
 
 q 
 
 Xfl 
 H-3 
 
 
 1 
 <* 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 to 
 
 •rH CO 
 
 e3 . cd 
 
 .CO xn CO 
 
 ■T3 T3 . n3 
 
 CD 
 
 .83 
 
 Q 
 <hh 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 JH 
 XJ1 
 
 •<s> 
 
 HO 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 a a .22 ~a 
 H H ft H 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 <: 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 "C* 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 '■+3 
 c3 
 
 DQ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 &G 
 
 «! 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 «» 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 p4 
 
 CO 
 
 ^3 ^ 'S 
 
 CD 
 
 co 
 
 '5* 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 q 
 
 8 
 
 HO 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 HO 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 CD CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 eg 
 
 <» 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 h h ^ 
 
 t-s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
152 
 
 FRENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 355, 356. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 p 
 2 
 
 « P 
 
 P £ *S 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 P •? a 
 
 CO 
 
 
 a 
 
 '3 
 
 f . M > 
 
 CO 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 '8 J -a s 
 
 "g 
 
 
 v cy 
 
 Nj) 
 
 ^ *3 a- ^ 
 
 *<u 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ;q 
 
 CO 
 
 R 
 
 R 1 & R 
 
 R 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ►4^ 
 «? r 
 
 N 
 
 H 
 
 p 
 
 
 lg^ 8 
 
 .2 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 K\ 
 
 
 .& 
 
 £s gj > 
 
 > 
 
 i—< 
 
 
 
 5-i £r O !_i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 ^o 
 
 v o 
 
 vu O t 1 "« 
 
 r cy 
 
 OQ 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 CO 
 
 8 a 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 
 g! 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 r- fi a 
 
 <§ .a co ^-2 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 *> "3 c I b 
 
 . '£ .a • o w *c 
 
 gz ^^^ 
 
 
 — 
 
 J.SZ5 
 
 > 
 
 1* 
 
 115 
 
 
 
 P< 
 
 p3 S .1 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 
 <3j 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 2; 
 
 _jj 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 -J tD . 
 
 
 
 
 ■rt o a^ o 
 
 
 
 ."S 
 
 _> 
 
 £ » v « .fc 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o ^ k- 1 =-> 
 
 o 
 
 
 x o 
 
 r o 
 
 VU £ _< ^O 
 
 v o 
 
 ."S 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R £ ©• R 
 
 R 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 H-S 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 '3 
 
 jig 6 ' i 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 > 
 
 > S > 
 
 *> 
 
 H 
 
 "S 
 
 "fH 
 
 •2fe "2 
 
 "S 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 ^ .3 3 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 'O 
 
 y o 
 
 V CU 
 
 R 
 
 3 
 
 P 
 
 a o a 
 
 S 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 EH 
 
 H S3 H 
 
 H 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 .a "3 © 
 
 _co 
 
 
 
 
 > £ !> 
 
 '> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o o o 
 
 O 
 
 
 v o 
 
 M> 
 
 ^o ^o v cd 
 
 >cp 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 t-5 
 
 »-3 l-D l-S 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o a 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 co 
 
 
 a 
 
 co c3 
 
 'Mi 
 
 P 
 O 
 
 ca 
 
 +5 a 
 
 a .2 
 
 O cj 
 u -- 
 ,o ,CU 
 
 r° 
 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 PR 
 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R R 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 '3 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 I J 
 
 
 
 
 
 BO 
 
 
 
 ^•; n 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 •PH CO 
 
 
 N o 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 o 
 
 CU .S 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 v-s^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 «2 ^2 
 
 R 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 l> 
 
 > l> 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >5 
 
 
 -A 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 
 c 
 
 CO 
 
 =2 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 s. 
 
 C "» 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o P 
 
 
 Eh . 
 
 
 9- 
 
 
 .5 O 
 
 
 . Z CO 
 
 
 z; 
 
 :: 
 
 cc 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 a s p 
 
 §1.2 
 
 s « i- 
 
 
 _- 
 
 !3 
 
 g 
 
 §z : 
 
 
 
 EH 
 
 «Pf*S 
 
 
 I 
 
 z 
 
 
 i^i^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 co 
 
 H 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 o 
 
 if 
 
 (h 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ^J 
 
 c3 c5 
 
 
 c3 *c3 
 
 
 
 
 ^4—1 «+-! 
 
 «P 
 
 ,3 ,3 
 
 ^1 it-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 R 
 
 
 HH 
 
 1— 1 
 
 t— i 
 
 hH t— I 
 
 
 "~ 
 
 
 
 _ _ 
 
 a" 
 
 
 
 s- 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 CO rt 
 
 
 m .a 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 
 CO 
 
 '•B =s 
 
 co 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 < 
 R 
 
 
 S 
 
 — . — ■ 
 
 «P 
 
 .2 £ 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a a 
 
 H 
 
 05 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H H 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — ■ 
 
 — — ■ 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 .^-c CO 
 
 cs -a 
 
 CO Cj 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 "rt m 
 
 
 "3 '3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 «^-< 
 
 V- «+H 
 
 03 
 
 CP 
 
 «2 =2 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1-3 
 
 HS 
 
 1-5 Ha 
 
 § '3 
 
§ 357.] 
 
 VEEE. 
 
 15{ 
 
 03 
 
 p 
 
 "s? 
 o 
 O 
 
 & > > 
 
 , ri CO 
 
 O * S 
 
 ° H O 
 
 co co .i-i 
 
 C W to 
 
 ,,- S a as 
 
 c, 
 
 >— S — 
 
 O 
 
 •-- 1 eg 
 
 6* s 
 
 5-1— ■ 
 
 © p£h £ 
 O 
 
 c ^ a 
 
 o °° S3 
 
 ■rt •«> « 
 
 '3 ,d £ 
 
 *» G P 
 
 1 ..a 
 
 « o § 
 
 *? 
 
 03 of o 
 
 © M S3 
 
 O [~ S3 
 
 t* 'a ,rH 
 
 "© 
 
 € ° 
 
 : 
 
 © <5i 
 
 ° s 4 ^ 
 
 <2 ^ -^ 
 
 5-1 S3 
 
 © <£ © 
 
 w - cc 
 
 Sh S3 S> 
 
 •—I S ^4—1 
 
 S=3 «P © 
 
 M o o 
 
 © .S3 r^ 
 
 -S3 02 
 
 L-i ~ GO 
 
 r-l C3 
 
 
 
 
 sz 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •<s> 
 
 
 
 -j "S 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 S *5 « 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 d 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 isaie 
 uren 
 
 Is lis 
 
 iscnt 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO CO ^ CO 
 
 co 
 
 
 S3 
 
 +£ 
 
 r— 1 
 
 M HH Q» K 
 
 
 
 <1 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 H3 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 O . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1—1 u 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 PH 
 
 N 
 
 .Eh« 
 Q cj 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 co 
 
 '2 S ^ n is 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 a ^3 O O ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 !> r> r3 r> 
 
 >' 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PH 
 
 
 f< . 
 
 Xf. 
 
 
 
 
 EH . 
 
 fc co 
 
 l.s 
 
 EKFEOT. 
 
 | N. lisions. 
 Definite. 
 | N. lumes. 
 
 || Je lirais. 
 RATIVE. 
 
 1 Lisons. 
 [VE Presen 
 
 | N. lisions, 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 Ph — 
 
 h"~ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 0^ S Jz; 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 1—1 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 Ph ti g 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 i-a 
 
 CD S3 
 
 -w .2 M 
 
 
 
 so 
 ^3 50 
 
 
 .■d 
 
 "m *» ^ ^ 
 
 <3 
 
 
 5 
 
 HH 
 
 5 3 a 5 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sh *» 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ H 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 S3 « 
 
 
 lisais. 
 
 lus. 
 Futur 
 Etc. 
 
 lises. 
 
 
 
 CO " 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 •4 
 
 _o3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ■1-3 
 
 2-i 
 
 3 
 
 as .2 a 
 
 S 
 
 
 few wr 
 ngatioi 
 
 H 
 
 "4 
 
 PH 
 
 H 
 
 H H h5 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t»*s? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rO O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r*^ 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 0' 
 
 CO 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 "3 co* *3 c3 
 
 
 
 
 # tn 
 
 a £ -^ a 
 
 S 
 
 
 O CO 
 
 
 O 
 
 moo 
 
 O 
 
 
 H3 
 
 
 Ha 
 
 »-3 r-5 r-3 ►, 
 
 Hj 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G2 
 
154 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 858, 359. 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 i— i 
 p 
 
 Hi 
 
 .2 
 
 o3 
 
 "S» 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 00 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4_J 
 
 •2 C 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 c3 o 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 CO to 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 to to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 1— 1 
 
 1— 1 1— 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 2h 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 "5a .«} 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 p3 rS 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 II 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 
 
 J s.s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 3 
 
 3 £ 3 
 
 
 
 
 a,' - ' 
 
 £"1 I'l 
 
 
 
 
 Lfc 
 
 R&ri* 
 
 
 
 
 
 a — 
 
 i-tr- 
 
 
 
 
 & H 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 u 
 25 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 .13 02 . 
 
 o3 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 to CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 h5 
 
 
 1— 1 >-\ 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 o3 <v> 
 
 to CO 
 
 
 
 r; 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H H 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-9 
 
 l"9 I-, 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 5=1 
 
 .2 
 
 c3 
 bD 
 
 :s* 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■+J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3, 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 J° 
 
 -t-i 
 
 co -w 
 co p; 
 
 3 
 
 
 CD 
 
 '3 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 og 
 
 -r 2 S 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 to 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^3 
 
 S •- 
 
 « T3 
 
 to 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 S 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 e8 
 
 c3 
 
 cS 
 
 ? I 
 
 o3 
 
 ^J 
 
 g 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 c3 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 3 co 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 p 
 
 H 
 
 o» s 
 
 PI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o3 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 
 CD 
 
 co 25 
 
 .2 
 
 .2 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *co 
 
 CO 
 
 S2u 
 
 . "co 
 
 05 ^3 
 
 CO ^2 
 
 co 3 
 
 3 6 
 
 *co 
 
 < 
 
 ^3 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 ^3 
 
 3 
 c3 
 S 
 
 p 
 
 3 O 
 
 c3 
 
 a 
 
 ft 
 
 Cfi 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 >*_ 
 
 e3 
 
 5. t 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 3 
 
 .2 
 
 *co 
 
 to to 
 
 I I 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 
 ■ . o 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 H .i-l 
 
 ^3 
 
 H3 ^ 
 
 3 S 
 
 to e'Q 
 co co a 
 
 ^3 
 
 3 
 
 
 S o3 
 
 |2 
 
 o3 
 
 II I 
 
 .^3 I « 
 
 > 03 1 
 
 03 
 
 .a 
 
 
 Lfe 
 
 |^ 
 
 g^K^ 
 
 ££ 
 
 — 
 
 H — 
 
 1- 
 
 B 
 
 Q — 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 H 
 
 Pi 
 
 £ 
 
 p- .5 
 
 
 <5 
 
 
 o 
 
 §lg 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 .■aft 
 
 
 
 S 
 25 « 
 
 03 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 ^. 
 
 Is a 
 
 S^.22 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 ?3 
 
 ^3 
 
 T3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 oS 
 
 c3 
 
 c3 
 
 ^ o3 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 ? a 
 
 G? PI 
 
 a 
 
 -r 3 
 
 M 
 
 Ph 
 
 PI 
 
 Ph 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 to 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 K 
 
 
 "3 
 co 
 
 . m 
 
 CD 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 h-1 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 co 
 
 to 
 
 & 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^3 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 « g 
 
 3 
 
 
 e3 
 
 o3 
 
 eS(^ 
 
 03 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 'S a 
 
 a 
 
 < 
 
 P 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «>J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 "3 
 
 •f4 
 
 o5 
 
 CD* 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 03 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 to 
 
 # CO 
 
 . m • t< 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^3 ^3 
 
 r a 
 
 '■C 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 c3 
 
 c3 53 
 
 c3 
 
 03 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 S 2 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 CD 
 
 (D 
 
 <B <U 
 
 CD 
 
 © 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 1-5 
 
 l-S ^"9 
 
 1-3 
 
 ^1 
 
 
360,361.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 155 
 
 
 
 
 
 -u> 
 
 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 (D 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 ^J 
 
 TO 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 1— I 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 • 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 PI 
 ■< 
 Ph 
 
 § s 
 
 .2 
 
 "to 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 1 W 
 
 CO 
 
 *> 
 
 > 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 Is Q <o 
 
 11 
 
 
 — Prese 
 N. mett 
 
 FINITE. 
 
 N. mim 
 TIVE. 
 
 C3 TO 
 
 |a 
 
 
 Ifc 
 
 
 a — h < 
 
 — a_ 
 
 
 S fi g 
 
 > 
 
 
 i) Ph w 
 
 5 
 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 
 
 Q 
 
 CO . 
 
 
 
 +3 
 
 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 HH M 
 
 t— i 
 
 3 
 
 _ _ 
 
 — ~~ 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 i-l 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 TO 
 
 to 
 O 
 
 < 
 Ph 
 
 S S 
 
 » a 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 H 
 
 H H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 a 
 
 
 <D © 
 
 o 
 
 
 Ha Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 
 O 
 
 Ph 
 ft 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *i 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 © 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 
 © T3 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 TO 
 
 
 o 
 
 o3 
 
 3 O 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o M 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a ? 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 TO 
 
 1/3 
 
 to 3 
 
 TO 
 
 TO 
 
 s 
 
 M 
 
 K 
 
 HH 0» 
 
 HH 
 
 HH 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 N 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 a 
 
 N 
 
 "to 
 
 
 © 
 
 .2 
 
 <3 
 
 .2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 13 
 
 
 *3 N 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 fh 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o © 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 B 1 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 J5 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 !> S 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 GO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 © 
 
 TO 
 
 .2 
 
 
 to 
 
 £9 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 <3 TO 
 
 9 s 
 
 1! 9 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 *TO 
 
 3 
 "3 
 
 
 H O 
 
 o 
 
 « 2 a ° 
 S . K o 
 
 Q Ph"~ 
 
 « 2 
 
 O 
 
 
 £S 
 
 H S 
 
 °T S 
 
 ^ 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 > — 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 P< 
 
 w 
 
 P 
 
 PH 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 £ 2 
 Pi § . 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 .■s 
 
 © 
 
 p • 
 
 02,2 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 M ^ 
 
 Js 
 
 3 o 
 
 9 a 
 
 <3 
 
 
 3 
 
 13 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O _i 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a % 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 pt a? 
 
 
 
 
 i— i 
 
 HH 
 
 hH 
 
 i— i 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 O 
 
 i_! 
 
 
 ra 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 M 
 
 'O 
 
 'cl 
 
 3 
 
 o5 
 
 r2 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 "9 
 
 'B 
 
 "3 
 
 9 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O TO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 'B 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 cJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 e3 
 
 3 
 
 a5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 *3 
 
 3 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 © 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a) 
 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 Ha 
 
 
156 
 
 FRENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 362,363. 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 
 
 
 r 
 
 (0 
 
 S3 
 '3 
 
 R 
 
 CJ 
 
 C 
 CO 
 
 CO +j 
 
 .2 S3 
 
 03 O 
 
 R 
 o 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 CO 
 
 P CO 
 CO EC "^ 
 .?h CO £ 
 
 ej '2 a) 
 
 CO g CO 
 
 » ft l» 
 cS co *c3 
 
 
 n 
 < 
 
 
 co 
 w 
 
 '3 
 
 CO 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 
 
 03 
 
 S^ to 
 
 43 '3 
 
 '5 
 
 cr 
 
 03 
 
 >< 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 F- S3 
 
 R 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 S^H 
 
 Ph ^5 P 
 
 
 
 _!_; 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 A ro 
 
 co 
 
 ^J 
 
 co 
 
 co E3 co 
 
 
 
 S 
 03 
 
 
 HH 
 
 H 
 
 C R 
 
 K 
 
 
 S3 
 S3 
 
 HH 
 
 K 0» R 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 83" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B5 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 N 
 
 o 
 
 N 
 
 "co 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 N N 
 
 rj 
 
 
 CO 
 
 _0J 
 
 
 , <0 
 
 CO 
 
 
 R 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO # co 
 
 o> 
 
 
 < 
 
 CO 
 DO 
 
 °co 
 
 CO 
 
 '3 
 
 c- 1 
 
 C3 
 
 N CO 
 d> -f-h 
 co C3 
 
 *3 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 "3 
 
 'So • "co 
 
 CO N «! 
 
 ••3 co 2 
 
 c3 co 5 
 
 -*-= 
 T3 
 
 
 H 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 .3 R 
 
 R 
 
 
 H 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph J P, 
 
 C 
 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 S£ 
 
 
 c3 . • 
 
 pi 
 
 
 8 
 03 
 
 l> 
 
 ^ 
 
 l> 
 
 £ > 
 
 > 
 
 
 GO 
 
 ^ 
 
 !> Ph > 
 
 O 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — - — 
 
 — 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 Pm 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Pn 
 
 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 H R 
 
 Ei 
 
 CO .£ 
 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 O 
 
 CJ 
 
 CO 
 
 • is 
 
 S3 
 
 .2 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 1 s 
 
 rn 
 
 co to 
 
 R Eh R 
 
 .2 • ^ 2 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 "co 
 co 
 
 Kid 
 
 e I'm 
 
 "3 
 cr 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 .2 o K -^ 
 
 03 H CO W Ci 
 
 
 
 
 H — 
 
 Eh"* 
 
 s — 
 
 S R> 
 
 .3* R 
 
 
 
 
 
 g— «— b~ 
 
 Ph W CJ 
 
 3 t o 
 •- .sS • 
 
 03 ci zn & 
 
 CO o to 
 
 CC l-H CO 
 
 
 
 
 C-H 
 < 
 
 3 
 z; 
 
 M 
 
 "3 
 
 cc t 
 
 a a 
 
 '3 
 
 Eh 
 O 
 
 R # co 
 
 Ph 
 C7 1 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 C+H 
 
 l<b 
 
 
 *3 
 
 '3 
 
 Co 
 
 >-H '3 
 
 03 
 
 8 
 
 
 "3 
 
 "3 n2 '3 
 
 CL, 
 
 <» 
 
 
 r 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 -3 a 
 
 R 
 
 
 p. 
 
 Ph - rf P, 
 
 a 
 
 Kb 
 
 SZ3 
 
 M 
 
 FH 
 
 Ph 
 
 o» s 
 
 1— l 
 
 8s 
 
 <s 
 
 M 
 
 R o» s 
 
 H-t 
 
 o 
 
 •to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 •K5 
 
 Ph 
 
 _ 
 
 
 +3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 pa 
 3 
 
 
 
 £3 
 
 Ph 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 o 
 Ph 
 3 
 
 
 '3 
 
 op 
 
 CO 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 •3 S 
 
 ft 
 
 fc 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 Ph 
 
 Dp 
 
 CO 
 
 Er 1 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 cr 
 
 Pn 
 
 H 
 
 R 
 
 # co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 co # co 
 
 -1-3 
 
 CO 
 
 «H-H 
 
 '3 
 
 '3 
 
 03 
 
 '3 
 
 
 «(H 
 
 <1 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 "3 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 2 R 
 
 R 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 Pn 
 
 Ph CO P- 
 
 Ph 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 R 
 
 rs 
 
 R 
 
 '3 3 
 
 rj 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Ej 
 
 3 '3 R 
 
 
 H 
 
 GO 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H- 
 
 JZ5 H 
 
 H 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 Eh 
 
 H ^ EH 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 ci5 
 
 '•+3 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "-^3 
 
 rt 
 
 •< 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 bO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fcp 
 
 
 
 
 *r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oi 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 
 rO 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 
 CO 
 
 "c3 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 '3 
 cr 1 
 
 o5 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^CO 
 
 e -oa 
 
 '3 c5 
 
 CO CO 
 
 co co 
 
 > 
 05 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 *3 
 
 cS 
 
 '3 
 
 C3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 '3 
 
 *3 '3 
 
 In 
 H 
 
 
 PI 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 co 
 
 
 P-i 
 
 Ph P 
 
 CO 
 
 
 (3 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 (-3 
 
 hs 
 
 1-3 
 
 >T> 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 1-3 *-2 
 
 
§ 364, 365.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 151 
 
 
 P 
 
 0) 
 co 
 co 
 
 P 
 
 cv 
 
 '8 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 p 
 
 03 
 
 +2 
 
 p 
 
 CO -i-i 
 
 *8 «-> 
 
 £J CO 
 
 03 .2 
 
 P 
 
 CO 
 
 •<s> 
 
 o 
 
 
 p 
 
 03 
 
 P 
 
 aient. 
 snt. 
 
 rennent. 
 nent. 
 
 P 
 03 
 
 
 
 '8 
 
 '8 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 03 
 
 3 
 
 p 
 
 
 P 
 
 P S Ph P 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 03 
 
 j» 8 
 
 8 
 
 
 03 
 
 S 'u J« S 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 "P< P, 
 
 Ph 
 
 «4 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph Ph |P Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 *3 co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 co 
 
 co co a CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 pH 
 
 HH 
 
 
 <y p. 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 p 
 
 Ci 
 
 
 H H U H 
 
 M 
 
 
 _co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 Ph 
 
 N 
 03 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 '8 
 H 
 
 .2 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 '8 
 
 to 
 
 <3 
 
 N 
 
 co 03 
 
 co ;-i 
 
 N 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 N 
 
 03 
 P 
 03 
 
 03 co 03 
 
 1 <| | 1 
 
 .2 
 
 
 c3 
 
 o3 
 
 8 
 
 •2 8 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 Ph 
 > 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph P> 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 > 
 
 Ph ^ g Ph 
 ^ >" fi P^ 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 P 
 . O 
 
 CO 
 
 P 
 'co 
 
 '8 
 
 CO 
 03 
 
 s 
 
 <3 
 
 p 
 . . o 
 
 SSI 
 
 co to c3 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 . & 
 EH P 
 
 Z O 
 H p 
 
 a- a 
 
 p & £ 
 
 .2 S „■• § § 
 
 .1 
 
 P 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 Ph & h 
 
 3 K 
 
 P.£ 
 
 8 M 
 
 Ph£ 
 
 tO W f-l 
 
 1*1 ^ 
 
 In 
 
 
 
 "Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 — 
 
 g_B 
 
 » E 
 
 w 
 
 P 
 
 Ph 
 
 eS 1 • o 
 
 Ph W -^ g 
 
 ftl 
 
 
 
 
 W — 
 
 1 s 1 g I 
 
 M A <1 S jz; M 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 3 1 
 
 t 
 
 e 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 <j M 
 
 < 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 _^Ph 
 
 h- ( 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 C3 tr 
 gw . 
 
 .*3 g P 03 
 
 o3 £ ce p 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 '8 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 S 03 
 
 '8 03 
 
 
 <© 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 
 oi 
 
 *8 
 
 3 
 
 c3 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 C J ft C 
 
 03 .rH i _ | CD 
 
 <^' 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 a ^ 
 
 Ph Eh 
 
 Ph 
 
 •K) 
 
 
 
 Ph Ph ^ Ph 
 
 H Ph C Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 a 
 
 pH 
 
 Ph 
 
 ?H 
 
 w 
 
 HO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Pq 
 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 M 
 
 p^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 # co 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 Et 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 "8 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 CO* 
 
 Ph 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 P-i 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 '8 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 .CO 
 
 "3 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 M 
 
 '8 
 .53 03 
 
 s 
 
 03 
 
 C3 
 H 
 Ph 
 
 -«! 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 .2 8 
 S p 
 
 co 
 
 03 
 CO 
 
 .2 
 
 
 «! 
 
 p. 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 C3 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 
 Ph Ph Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 p 
 
 8 p 
 
 a 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 
 a a a 
 
 3 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 Ph H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 co 
 -< 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 H H H 
 
 H 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "•H^> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 "Z? 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 co" 
 
 "8 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 CO 
 
 S3 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 .a q5 
 
 03 P 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 *s 
 
 "8 
 
 B 
 
 "8 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 P ^ P 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 5-c 
 
 03 
 
 8 
 
 c3 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 lO 
 
 
 Rh 
 
 03 .S 03 
 
 ■S 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 Ph Ph Ph 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 © 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 03 03 03 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 ha 
 
 h> 
 
 Hi 
 
 1-5 
 
 
 
 
 •-S H-5 t-3 
 
 1-5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
158 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 366, 367. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m. CO 
 
 
 
 
 ps a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 v « v O> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 H R 
 
 
 
 7? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'OJ 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 CO CD 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 _g '53 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 <3 § 
 
 
 
 <; 
 P4 
 
 esol 
 e'sol 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 FINITE. 
 
 N. resolumes. 
 — Imperfect. 
 N". resolussions. 
 
 
 
 
 Past De 
 ut. j 
 UBJUNCTIVE 
 It. | 
 
 
 
 J3 
 
 o 
 
 11 re'sol 
 
 s 
 
 11 resol 
 
 
 
 »<D 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 t» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 to co 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 "o "o 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 vcy >o> 
 
 
 
 •4 
 Ph" 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 «! 
 
 
 
 
 Pn 
 
 03 
 
 • CO 
 CO CO 
 
 3 B 
 
 "o r o 
 
 CO CO 
 
 s-l f- 
 
 0) CD 
 1-5 Ha 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 1 i 
 
 s ^ 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 
 ~ HO 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 r i 
 
 r-* CO 
 
 o S 
 
 <D 
 Jq £ O 
 
 H ^ ^ 
 
 . CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 ient. 
 ent. 
 
 rien 
 nt. 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 03 £* CO O 
 
 
 
 
 •S 
 
 'u '*-< -~ *S 
 
 *C 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 co co B co 
 
 co 
 
 
 3 
 
 c3 
 
 R 
 
 MM O" B 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 o . 
 
 N 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 s ||^ J 
 
 .2 
 
 *CO 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 'S 
 
 V.ri 
 
 V.ri 
 CO 
 
 Riez 
 
 V.ri 
 
 'S 
 
 
 k 
 
 > 
 
 
 P4 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 3 
 Ph * 
 
 r. 
 riions. 
 
 IITB. 
 
 rimes, 
 rirais. 
 
 VE. 
 
 ons. 
 
 -Present. 
 riions. 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P< W H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 a | SS 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Ph m. D 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 »-3 
 
 pa 
 
 .2W 
 
 
 
 
 ."£ 
 
 ^Oj^J r-* QJ 
 
 <"S 
 
 
 
 
 *H *S %^ "S 
 
 M< 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 R S O* R 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 iii 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 P^ 
 
 CO 
 
 •1 -1^ 8 
 
 03 CO " CD 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 S3 .2 3 
 
 1-4 
 
 
 H 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 H H K H 
 
 H 
 
 
 <i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■3 • '$ 
 
 05 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 *S 
 
 x s- n , *g 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 cu> 
 
 CD CD CD „, 
 
 h» H5 ^ « 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 i-s 
 
 1-5 1 
 
 
§ 368-370.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 159 
 
 W — 
 
 > 
 
 ft3 
 
 m 
 
 55 m 
 
 G> P K 
 
 56 56 
 
 
 m O 
 
 t> > 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
 •i S 
 56 .(3 56 
 
 
 ,525 gSZi gS25 
 
 £ 56 5fi 
 ass 
 
 OH3 | . g 
 
 1-3 H co w - £ « \ 
 
 =<< iz B- 
 
 « & • H 
 
 Ph 5 i3 
 
 56 £> „; 
 
 56^ 
 
 56 56 
 
 56 ™ 
 
 56 56 
 
 55 56 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 tf 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 H 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 w 
 'A 
 
 
 
 Pn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 llg 
 
 
 525 H 
 
 
 W— < — 
 
 
 > « 
 
 
 >n H 
 
 
 H P4 
 
 
 ^ -,' 
 
 
 
 
 Q ►§ 
 » ^ 
 
 
 1-" Cn 
 
 
 
 
 .■s ^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 •m 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 i-J 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 H 
 
 ra 
 
 « 
 
 3 
 
 «! 
 
 * »5 
 
 P^ 
 
 r S '3 
 
 H 
 
 H co 
 
 cc 
 
 
 «* 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 <U 
 
 
 H3 
 
160 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 371, 372. 
 
 <y r r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 «3 
 
 
 CD 
 
 •53 
 
 
 uu 
 
 
 
 O ,■ 
 
 co 
 C3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 Rj 
 
 
 
 
 CSS 
 
 *" 
 
 
 
 
 
 £&} 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 [-! 
 
 Q 
 
 N 
 
 !3 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 Z 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 
 >*■ 
 
 
 !> 
 
 O 
 
 
 »*" 
 
 > 
 
 
 t> 
 
 
 £> 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 >■ 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 H 
 
 cS 
 
 S 
 
 CO 
 
 h2 
 
 8 -„ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 <g 
 
 "o3 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 CO w 
 
 c3 
 
 CO 2 
 
 
 J3 
 
 
 a 
 
 CD . 
 
 eg 
 
 CD i— ( 
 P3 
 
 c S 
 
 3 
 
 PL, H 
 « 
 
 
 O 
 
 s 
 
 EH 
 
 s 
 
 A 
 
 o 
 £5 
 
 O M 
 co Pd 
 
 c3 | 
 
 Ha 
 — > 
 
 O 
 
 K 
 
 H 
 «1 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 ■4 
 
 
 3 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 CD £3 
 
 
 Q 
 
 z . 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 lg 
 
 CD 
 
 O* R R 
 
 03 
 
 O +* 
 
 c3 S S 
 
 H H H 
 
 • CD .S +J 
 
 § 1 1 .1 
 
 R R O* H 
 
 cS 03 m 53 
 
 > > H > 
 
 K 5 o 
 
 a O -r-l 
 
 co >> >, 
 
 H c3 03 
 
 co B. 
 
 S- Ph o 
 
 M S g 
 
 «* P .w 
 
 
 R R 0» 
 
 8 
 so 
 
 c5 
 <*> 
 
 "<S> 
 
 S bo 
 
 o 
 
 CD Ph 
 
 £^ 
 
§ 373, 374.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 161 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 Q 
 
 CO 
 
 -t- 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 rent 
 quei 
 nt. 
 
 S3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 a 
 
 "3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 2 
 
 tf .5 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C7 1 
 
 cr 1 
 
 CT 3 cr 
 
 cr 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 2 c 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 c3 
 
 '3 » '3 
 
 '3 
 
 
 t> 
 
 >■ 
 
 !>•?!> 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 cr 
 
 CO 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 to 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 N 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 CD N 
 
 
 
 CS5 
 
 CO 
 
 -£ cu 
 
 co 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 • H 
 
 
 3 
 
 S N S3 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 cr 1 
 
 cr 
 
 CT CD cr 
 
 cr 
 
 -sj 
 
 
 •S 
 
 CI 33 C 
 
 .2 
 
 ?H 
 
 'a 
 
 "3 
 
 t .s £ 
 
 '3 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 !<5 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 i> fc> !> 
 
 > 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO* 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 
 co 
 
 S3 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 . o 
 
 <§ » H .2 
 
 "co 
 
 
 % =3 
 
 
 S3 3 K 3 
 
 
 
 fa ^ 
 
 cr 1 
 
 cr" o w cr 1 
 
 cr 
 
 
 02 s 
 
 w '3 
 
 _a 
 *3 
 
 Definite. 
 
 | N. vain 
 EATIVE. 
 
 | Vainqn 
 IVE.— Pees 
 
 | N. vain 
 
 _3 
 
 "3 
 
 
 SH ** 
 
 g* 
 
 eh^ 
 
 
 J* 
 
 1& 
 
 8* 
 £ — 
 
 
 a — 
 
 s — 
 
 
 > 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 W H 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 g Cm 5 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 «j 
 
 M 
 
 <! § • S3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 "3 
 
 P 
 
 uit. 
 i: 
 
 inque 
 UBJU 
 ue. 
 
 <- 
 
 
 d 
 
 cr 
 
 qh c3 <W CT 
 
 cr 
 
 
 B 
 
 3 
 
 s* > s 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 c3 
 
 "3 ra. '3 
 
 '3 
 
 S3 
 O 
 
 !> 
 
 > 
 
 > - a > 
 
 > 
 
 Ph 
 
 pH 
 
 s c s 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 CD 
 
 
 en 
 
 *3 
 
 quis. 
 ques. 
 
 CO 
 
 cr 
 
 
 "3 
 
 a 
 '3 
 
 •S CO* .S 
 
 =3 2 3 
 
 _3 
 '3 
 
 P5 
 
 > 
 
 ►* 
 
 > S3 £ 
 
 > 
 
 <J 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 33 "3 
 
 H 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H t> H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 
 _co 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 .2 CD 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 S3 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 cr 1 
 
 cr" cr 1 
 
 cr 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 .S .2 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 '3 '3 
 
 *3 
 
 
 !> 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 > 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 1-2 
 
 >~S t-3 
 
 i-s 
 
 .2 
 
 bfi 
 ss 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 TjH 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 e3 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "S S3 S3 
 S< CD CD 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 CD j^ co 
 
 ,o 
 
 
 S3 
 CD 
 
 b .Sh co 
 
 C^-H 
 
 
 S3 t> C 
 
 o o 
 
 >> 
 
 
 'P 
 
 ^CD ^2 ^S 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 
 co 
 
 co !j co 
 
 ^ 
 
 S3 
 
 HH 
 
 R O 1 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 "8 
 
 CD 
 
 H 
 P3 
 
 
 S3 
 co .2 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 H 
 
 W 
 CO 
 
 M 
 
 CD 
 > 
 
 , vecute 
 
 vez. 
 
 vecuss 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > > > 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 fcO 
 
 CD. 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co Eh' 5 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 CD O O 
 
 S3h 
 
 
 i i 
 
 «° 2 
 
 2 g-"3 
 
 S- f% ro 
 
 
 
 ITE. 
 
 vecu 
 VE. 
 
 vons. 
 
 iMrEK 
 
 vecu; 
 
 .2 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 Lszi 
 
 S^'h>'^ 
 
 CD 
 
 
 a — 
 
 a — < K — 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 M ^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 H 
 
 & Oh E" 1 
 
 5 H o 
 
 p3 9 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 "o 
 
 
 a 
 
 cd C3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 
 
 .-w 
 
 v cd rd 'cu 
 
 CD 
 
 
 V 
 
 > ~r3 > 
 
 +-i 
 
 S3 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph C m 
 
 o 
 
 V CD 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 S-i 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 S^ 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 .CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 cd 
 
 
 co co 
 
 € 
 
 co* 
 
 S o 
 
 S 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 ^CD 'CD 
 
 *3 
 
 <l 
 
 > 
 
 
 O 
 
 Ph 
 
 S3 
 
 3 i S 
 
 
 EH 
 
 H 
 
 H > H 
 
 '« 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 ra 
 
 
 
 • CO 
 
 to CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 n 
 
 
 M 
 
 CD O 
 
 ^ N CD 
 
 h 
 
 
 >■ 
 
 K- t> 
 
 IM 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 
 
 ^5 
 
 hs ^ 
 
 
 
 
162 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 315-311, 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 .g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *Sb 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 £^ 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 «o 
 
 s-l 
 
 c3 
 
 
 s 
 p 
 
 00 
 
 -4-3 
 
 
 g 
 
 l 
 
 CO 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 "5 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ■*-» 
 
 ein 
 
 
 g 
 
 CD 
 O 
 
 
 
 El 
 
 >*o 
 
 PJ 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 £ 
 
 ce 
 
 • 1— 1 
 
 H 
 
 8 
 
 «T 
 
 ^ 
 
 ft 
 
 55 
 
 ,£J 
 
 __o 
 
 
 .2 
 
 53 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 
 \B 
 
 .ii 
 
 «D 
 
 
 * 
 o 
 
 ti— 1 
 
 a 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 «W 
 
 c* 
 
 
 ra 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 -*J 
 
 .2 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 cS 
 
 'c3 
 
 rC 
 
 
 CO 
 
 <y 
 
 s£ 
 
 
 rp 
 
 © 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 c3 
 
 K5 
 
 
 t> 
 
 IHh 
 
 O 
 
 
 a> 
 
 'S 
 
 •to 
 
 
 > 
 
 &0 
 
 fc 
 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 « 
 
 
 <£ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 c$ 
 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 pq 
 
 
 . 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 £ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 JO 
 
 S3 
 
 .*> 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 0) £ 
 
 h3 
 
 — <— 
 
 O 
 Q 
 
 53 8 '§ 
 
 a? CO 
 
 .15 P^.SI 
 
 3 S -3 
 
 S-c f- S- 
 
378, 379.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 163 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «• a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 .2 S p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 2 ^ S 
 
 
 
 
 
 O O a, ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S H G» R 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • N N 
 
 
 
 
 
 S <o & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o o u 
 
 
 
 
 
 !> t> i> 
 
 
 
 
 
 §1.2 |l 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 GO 
 g 
 
 
 W — 
 
 M 
 
 £ § p H 
 
 g g g 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 M •- 
 
 5 CD PI 
 
 
 
 
 
 e8°*3 -§<*«• 
 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t> o %h o 
 
 
 jo 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 HH 
 
 PI HH C R 
 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 rC3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 +3 
 
 -! 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 c3 
 
 C4 
 
 
 2 •§ « 
 
 Si rH CO 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 H 
 
 o5 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 O O O 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O t> co O 
 
 
 ■8 
 
 hh 
 
 3 
 
 P P ,2 3 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H H O H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 «i 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 cS cS CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H rl CO 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 o 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 Jt> 
 
 
 
 o o cj 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 03 
 1-3 
 
 CD CD CD 
 ^> Hi 1-3 
 
 
 o 
 
 W 
 
 a 
 
 P 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ i P 
 
 _,J 
 
 
 
 
 
 P .2 +2 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 O ci P 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 *H Sh <U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 CD CD O 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 ,P 
 
 ,P .P rP 
 
 rP 
 
 
 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 
 
 V CD 
 
 X CD 
 
 ^ ^CD N CD 
 
 
 
 
 H3 
 
 rp 
 
 H3 rj3 >T3 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 CQ CO CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 N S N 
 
 CD .S <U 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 >* 
 
 
 ^ ^ *^» 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 <p 
 
 <D <D O 
 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 
 rP rP ^ 
 
 ,G 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v cd 
 
 ^<u 
 
 ^CU V CD r CD 
 
 ^CD 
 
 
 
 TJ 
 
 T3 
 
 -w H3 rCS 
 
 ■73 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 t> 
 
 t> > > 
 
 >_ 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 sis 
 
 o ..2 • o 
 
 PI 
 O 
 
 
 
 . o 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 BJi 
 
 <p 
 
 CD H C W O 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 .(-] 00 r-i CO ,£5 
 
 rP 
 
 
 
 
 
 " S o S o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 as 
 
 
 V CD 
 
 H^ 3 
 
 
 
 i« 
 
 h— <— > — 
 P & G 
 * 2 o 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 y — 
 
 i-H 
 
 H 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 H Z 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 Mh 
 
 c3 ^ ei pq . 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 O U CD 02 O 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 ,P 
 
 rP 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N o> 
 
 
 ^CD X CD V CD 
 
 
 
 3 
 ,P 
 
 H3 
 
 ^3 
 
 T3 n3 >-a 
 
 -X3 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 M 
 
 l-H fn Ph 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 vgj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 w .2 
 
 to 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 03 cd r<? 
 
 CD 
 
 
 "o 
 rP 
 
 rP 
 
 o 
 
 herr 
 herr 
 hoie 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 
 rP 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 v u <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N CD N CD ^CD 
 
 ^CD 
 
 
 '■p 
 
 
 •ri r3 "T3 
 
 T3 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 3 P P 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H H H 
 
 H 
 
 
 «3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 p 
 
 CD CD O 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,p 
 
 rP rP rP 
 
 ^S 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 <o & zj 
 
 
 
 
 
 x o> 
 
 "•CD V CD V CD 
 
 
 
 
 H3 
 
 T3 
 
 T3 T3 ^ 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 a) 
 
 0) 
 
 CD CD CD 
 
 
 
 
 Hj 
 
 Hs 
 
 hj Ha r-3 
 
 Hs 
 
 
164 
 
 FKENCH GKAMMAK. 
 
 [§ 380-382. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 -« 
 
 
 
 
 c i± 
 
 . 
 
 ■» 
 
 
 -g 
 
 
 
 <2§ 
 o N a> 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 "c3 
 
 3 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 ,£3 
 
 
 _n 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 
 V GJ V CU 
 
 CJ 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 — * — ■ 
 
 'O 
 
 v o 
 
 v o 
 
 N <y 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 w 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 En 
 
 
 CO 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 N 
 O 
 
 .2 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 O 
 
 Sh 
 
 *G 
 
 "to 
 
 
 < 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 <3 
 
 ^3 
 
 fH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 ^O 
 
 v o 
 
 ><u 
 
 v O 
 
 
 
 !>' 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 !>' 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 EH 
 
 en 
 
 s 
 
 p 
 
 a 
 
 H 2 
 
 K CO 
 6- oj 
 
 
 
 
 <i5 
 
 s 
 
 co O 
 
 g S 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 B r- 
 
 — - 
 
 
 
 1 
 Ph 
 
 go 
 
 IS 
 
 o 
 
 £.1 
 
 5 o 
 
 <** 
 
 w 
 
 
 1 
 
 i* 
 
 Ja 
 
 1^ 
 
 P 
 
 '" 
 
 a 
 
 K 
 
 EH 
 
 Hfl 
 
 s 
 
 & 
 &H 
 
 o 
 
 y — 
 
 tj) 
 
 
 3 ° 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 O « 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 &.S « 
 
 
 d 
 
 C f 3 
 
 1-3 
 
 o 
 
 
 "CO 
 ,G ,£3 
 
 "§ 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 '0) M> 
 
 o 
 
 ,£3 
 
 ^3 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 ■HI) 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 , — 
 
 — 
 
 III 
 
 !zi 
 
 ^+3 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,P 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ►H 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 to 
 
 ■1 
 
 Ph 
 
 EI 
 
 
 m 
 
 P3 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 CD 
 
 E 
 
 
 ,=! 
 
 r=3 
 
 rS 
 
 rC 
 
 ^i. 
 
 P5 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 «2. 
 
 <! 
 
 
 •o 
 
 v o 
 
 V» 
 
 ^a> 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 =1 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 o 
 
 OCl 
 
 ' 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 pf 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 "S 
 
 ?H 
 
 o5 
 
 
 
 
 H« 
 
 
 5h 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 JA 
 
 J3 
 
 J3 
 
 rQ 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 va 
 
 v o 
 
 ^co 
 
 
 
 
 ?t> 
 
 h> 
 
 h> 
 
 p^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 od 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 <o 
 
 <n 
 
 ^0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 'O 
 
 
 'O 
 
 V." 
 
 
 
 
 1/1 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 P 
 
 M 
 
 HH 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Xtl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 "C 
 
 
 CS 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =3 to 
 
 0D ,2 
 
 <o 
 
 u 
 
 <o 
 
 -O 
 
 E3 
 
 
 _>- 
 
 a v 
 
 p w 
 
 a; 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 O 1 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 a: 
 
 bO 
 
 Ph « 
 
 ^ H 2 | 
 K* 2 g 
 
 
 Ph P 
 
 Ph O 
 
 ^ P^ * 
 
 is % 
 
 O p 
 002 
 
 C/3 
 
 rP 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & .2 
 
 
 
 p ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eP tfc 
 
 
 
 to to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PC| 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 P T 1 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 *£ "2 
 
 S 
 
 
 «P V- 
 
 | 
 
 
 ^ > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 g.2 
 
 
 1 
 
 .J- B3.H 
 
 
 Ph 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1=3 — 
 
 g— <— 
 
 
 > 
 
 D ?5 
 
 
 t-, 
 
 Ph O 
 
 
 d 
 
 t- 
 
 
 5 
 
 Q 
 
 
 y, 
 
 O . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iS 
 
 «P «P 
 
 
 
 
 •r 1 
 
 t— ( 
 
 l-H (— ( 
 
 Ph 
 
 i 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 to • t0 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 ci *S 
 
 H< 
 
 PH 
 
 _to 
 
 
 «5 
 
 S 
 
 C3 eS 
 3 PS 
 
 
 H 
 
 H EH 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 to 
 "«3 *S 
 
 
 # to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «p 
 
 «P ?s 
 
 
 o 
 
 O O 
 
 
 >-3 
 
 ^5 Hj 
 
 
383-385.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 165 
 
 
 
 
 c3 F 
 
 
 
 
 5 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 m &o 
 
 
 CD 
 
 oo 
 
 "3b 
 
 co 
 
 "3d 
 
 the o 
 llowin 
 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 P ,o 
 
 
 H 
 
 Ph 
 
 • P <HH 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 r$ O 
 
 oo 
 
 
 
 o> Jp 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ploy 
 r; t 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 P o 
 
 «4 
 
 
 N 
 
 CP S> 
 
 Cu 
 
 CD 
 
 •2 
 
 
 H 
 125 
 
 *3) 
 
 'Ex 
 
 5R ^ ,P 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 •air* 
 
 
 
 _ m 
 
 PM 
 
 
 
 rb is 
 sent 
 ense 
 
 
 h' „; 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 09 O 
 
 S3 
 
 .2 
 
 co o a 
 
 
 S — 
 
 !> 
 
 00 
 
 h'3c 
 
 1- 
 
 nt of tl 
 re lies/ 
 compo 
 
 
 1— I 
 
 
 <D » © 
 5-1 "<-^ _, 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 ^U-S 
 
 
 M 
 
 '5 
 
 
 
 '5c 
 
 "Ec 
 
 ,_! rP O 
 
 
 fl 
 
 p; 
 
 
 
 
 ar an 
 epita 
 oyed 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *& «H Ph 
 
 
 
 
 bD ° g 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 .2 &o ° 
 
 
 
 .00 
 
 co J3 xn 
 
 
 
 '3c 
 
 P P "1 
 O P %. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 |-sbl 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 o 
 
 rp O to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "5 ^ £ 
 
 
 
 
 het 
 a at 
 Ou: 
 use: 
 
 
 
 .co 
 
 '3 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 ^ 'p -*" p 
 
 
 
 "3c 
 
 . d oo ti 
 
 SS g co © 
 
 
 
 CD 
 1-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 cd 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 .00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 : 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 oo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 .2 
 
 "oo 
 
 
 
 
 .oo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 !> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ga 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 £.2 
 
 
 
 £ c 
 
 P< r- 
 
 5 o 
 
 
 
 Ba 
 
 Ifc 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 8 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 .00 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 o 
 
 '3 
 O 
 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 co • 
 
 
 
 .oo 
 
 .CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 "p3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t-s 
 
 
 
 I 5 
 
 tp 
 
 rP 
 
 CD 
 
 to 
 
 GO 
 •CO 
 
166 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 386, 38' 
 
 a= 
 
 
 <» h 
 
 Eh 
 
 ==5 — B- 
 
 '- 
 I 
 
 O 
 Q 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^5 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a -2 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 CO 
 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 B 
 
 c 
 
 2 S "3 b 
 .3 .a co § 
 o o ~ .2 
 
 
 "o 
 
 o 
 
 
 ® *s • £ ° 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 aa co co co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 f-c 
 
 U 
 
 a S ™ a 
 
 (h 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 co co j,-! CO 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 -X 
 
 co co B, co 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 H B C K 
 
 
 ce 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 HH 
 
 
 s>> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j* 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J/2 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 3 2 n 
 
 N 
 
 
 N 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 O O o ° 
 
 .2 
 
 "co 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 to 
 
 co 
 
 'co 
 
 "i to tL E^ 
 
 "co 
 
 n ■ 
 
 
 
 
 H *■■ £» fe! 
 
 S-i 
 
 HH 
 
 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 s a S a 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 CO CO g CO 
 
 > > m > 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 oe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 i i co 
 
 o ..2 . S 
 
 £j B H <n H.2 
 
 *Sg*S ag^ 
 
 111. II 
 
 co 'T to f> S r* w 
 
 CO 
 
 
 a 
 
 £ 5° 
 
 « a 
 
 PL, CO 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 "& 
 eJ m 1 
 
 co 
 
 O 
 
 5 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 B 
 
 .2 
 
 "to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 j> 
 
 H 
 <1 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 o ■ g 
 
 "3 
 >-> 
 o 
 
 fc 
 
 *— %— £— t— 
 & § 1 g 
 
 . q .a ^ ^ S 
 F« z p* '5 3 
 
 181 pi 
 
 1- 
 
 
 12 
 
 5-i 
 
 g 
 
 £ 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO %J CO 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 S p C pi 
 
 
 "g 
 
 t--< 
 
 l-H 
 
 M 
 
 >~ ' 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cTQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 
 CO 
 
 .2 
 
 J- Jh CO 
 
 o o .2 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 "o 
 
 O 
 
 O CD O 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 "jO 
 
 £ S "» S 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 a S *S .a 
 
 3 
 
 ■<< 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 co co co co 
 
 to 
 
 P-l 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 3 3^3 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 H H cc H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •41 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 to 
 
 "t3 'S 
 
 
 
 jn 
 
 '3 
 >> 
 
 
 5- S-i • 
 
 •3 o .2 
 
 a5 
 
 to 
 
 
 'o 
 
 O 
 
 
 a o o 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 « 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 to to to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O O O 
 
 O 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 »-3 
 
 ^> 
 
 1-3 1-5 Hn 
 
 ha 
 
388, 389.] 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 LIST OF ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE FRENCH 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 388. In the subjoined table, each verb is conjugated 
 like the one to which reference is made by the figures, 
 and of course contains the same number of irregular 
 tenses and persons which the verb indicated contains. 
 The verbs not found in this list are to be accounted reg- 
 ular, and follow in their inflection one of the models 
 chanter, finir, recevoir, or vendre, accordiDg to the end- 
 ing of the present infinitive. 
 
 389. Those verbs which are subject to the euphonic 
 changes, explained in section 260 and following, are not 
 regarded as irregular, and are consequently omitted in 
 the table. 
 
 Abattre, like battre, 345. 
 
 Absoudre, 344. 
 
 s'Abstenir, like tenir, 330. 
 
 Abstraire, like traire, 372. 
 
 Accourir, like courir, 320. 
 
 Accroitre, like croitre, 352. 
 
 Accueillir, like cueillir, 321. 
 
 Acquerir, 316. 
 
 Adjoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Admettre, like mettre, 360. 
 
 Aller, 312. 
 
 s'en Aller, 314. 
 
 Apparaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 
 Appartenir, like tenir, 330. 
 
 Apprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 
 Assaillir, 317. 
 
 s'Asseoir, 333. 
 
 Asseoir, like s'asseoir, 333. 
 
 Astreindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Atteindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Attraire, like traire, 372. 
 
 A venir,* like venir, 331. 
 
 Avoir, 246. 
 
 Battre, 345. 
 
 Boire, 346. 
 
 Bouillir, 318. 
 
 Brake, 376. 
 
 Bruire, 377. 
 
 Ceindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Circonscrire, like e'crire, 355. 
 Circonvenir, like venir, 331. 
 Clore, 378. 
 
 Combattre, like battre, 345. 
 Commettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Comparaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 Complaire, like se taire, 371. 
 Comprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 Compromettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Conclure, 347. 
 Concourir, like courir, 320. 
 Conduire, 349. 
 Con fire, f like suffire, 369. 
 Conjoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Connaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 Conquerir, like acquerir, 3 16. 
 Consentir, like sentir, 328. 
 Construire, like conduire,, 349. 
 Contenir, like tenir, 330. 
 Contraindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Contredire, 354. 
 Contrefaire, likefaire, 356. 
 Contrevenir, like venir, 331 . 
 Convaincre, like vaincre, 373. 
 Convenir, like venir, 331. 
 
 * Employed always unipersonalhj. 
 
 f Past Part, confit. 
 
168 
 
 FREXCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 389.- 
 
 Corrompre, like rompre, 368. 
 Courir, 320. 
 Coudre, 350. 
 Couvrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 Craindre, 348. 
 Croire, 351. 
 Croitre, 352. 
 Cueillir, 321. 
 Cuire, like conduire, 349. 
 Debattre, like battre, 345. 
 Dechoir, 379. 
 Declore, like clore, 378. 
 Deconfire, like suffire, 369. 
 Decouvrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 Decoudre, like coudre, 350. 
 Decrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 Decroitre, like croitre, 352. 
 Dedire, like contredire, 354. 
 Deduire, like conduire, 349. 
 Defaire, like faire, 356. 
 Dejoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Dementir, like sentir, 328. 
 se Deinettre, like mettre, 360. 
 se De'partir, like sentir, 328. 
 De'peindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Deplaire, like se taire, 371. 
 Desapprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 Desservir, like servir, 329. 
 Deteindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Detenir, like tenir, 330. 
 Detruire, like conduire, 349. 
 Devenir, like venir, 331. 
 se Devetir, like vetir, 332. 
 Dire, 353. 
 
 Disconvenir, like venir, 331. 
 Discourir, like counr, 320. 
 Disjoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Disparaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 Dissoudre, like absoudre, 344. 
 Distraire, like traire, 372. 
 Dormir, 322. 
 Echoir, 380. 
 Eclore, 381. 
 Ecrire, 355. 
 Elire, like lire, 357. 
 ^mettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Ipmoudre, like moudre, 361. 
 Emouvoir, like mouvoir,3S~). 
 Empreindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Enceindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Enclore, like clore, 378. 
 Encourir, like courir, 320. 
 
 Endormir, like dormir, 322. 
 
 Enduire, like conduire, 349. 
 
 Enfreindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 s'Enfuir, like/wzV, 324. 
 
 Enjoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 s'Enquerir, like acquerir, 316. 
 
 s'Entremettre, like mettre, 360. 
 
 Entr'onvrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 
 Entrepreiidre, like prendre, 365. 
 
 Entretenir, like iewir, 330. 
 
 Entrevoir, like voir, 342. 
 
 Envoyer, 315. 
 
 s^Eprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 
 Equivaloir, like valoir, 341. 
 
 Eteindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Etreindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Etre, 247. 
 
 Exclure, like condure, 347. 
 
 Extraire, like traire, 372. 
 
 Faire, 356. 
 
 Falloir, 334. 
 
 Feindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Fleurir, 323. 
 
 Frire, 382. 
 
 Fuir, 324. 
 
 Gesir, 383. 
 
 Hair, 325. 
 
 Induire, like conduire, 349. 
 
 Inscrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 
 Instnaire, like conduire, 349. 
 
 Interdire, like contredire, 354. 
 
 Interrompre, like rompre, 368. 
 
 Intervenir, like venir, 331. 
 
 Introduire, like conduire, 349. 
 
 Joindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Lire, 357. 
 
 Luire, 358. 
 
 Maintenir, like tenir, 330. 
 
 Maudire, 359. 
 
 Meconnaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 
 Me'dire, like contredire, 354. 
 
 Mefaire, like faire, 356. 
 
 Mentir, like sentir, 328. 
 
 se Meprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 
 Mettre, 360. 
 
 Moudre, 361. 
 
 Mourir, 326. 
 
 Mouvoir, 335. 
 
 Naitre, 362. 
 
 Nuire, like luire, 358. 
 
 Obtenir, like tenir, 330. 
 
 Offrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 
§ 389.] 
 
 VEKBS. 
 
 169 
 
 Oindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Omettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Ouir, 384. 
 Ouvrir, 327. 
 Paitre, 363. 
 
 Parcourir, like courir, 320. 
 Paraitre, 364. 
 Partir, like sentir, 328. 
 Parfenir, like venir, 331. 
 Peindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Permettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Plaindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Plaire, like se taire, 371. 
 Pleuvoir, 336. 
 
 Poursuivre, like suivre, 370. 
 Pourvoir, 337. 
 Pouvoir, 339. 
 
 Predire, like contredire, 354. 
 Prendre, 365. 
 Prescrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 Pressentir, like sentir, 328. 
 Prevaloir, * like valoir, 34 1 . 
 Pre venir, like venir, 331. 
 Pre'voir, 338. 
 
 Produire, like conduire, 349. 
 Promettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Promouvoir, like mouvoir, 335. 
 Proscrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 Provenir, like venir, 331. 
 Querir, 385. 
 
 Rabattre, like hattre, 345. 
 Rapprendre, like prendre, 865. 
 se Rasseoir, like s'asseoir, 333. 
 Ratteindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Kebattre, like hattre, 345. 
 Rcbouillir, like houillir, 318. 
 Reconduire, like conduire, 349. 
 Reconnaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 Reconquerir, like acquerir, 316. 
 Reconstruire, like conduire, 349. 
 Rccoudre, like coudre, 350. 
 Recourir, like courir, 320. 
 Recouvrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 Recrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 Recueillir, like cueillir, 321. 
 Redevenir, like venir, 331. 
 Redire, like dire, 353. 
 Re'dnire, like conduire, 349. 
 Reelirc, like //re, 357. 
 Refaire, Wkefaire, 356. 
 
 Rejoindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Relire, like #re, 357. 
 Reluire, like luire, 358. 
 Remettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Remoudre, like moudre, 361. 
 Renaitre, like naitre, 362. 
 se Rendormir, like dormir, 322. 
 Rentraire, like traire, 372. 
 Renvoyer, like envoyer, 315. 
 Repaitre, f like paitre, 363. 
 Reparaitre, like paraitre, 364. 
 Repartir, like senfir, 328. 
 Repeindre, like craindre, 348. 
 se Repentir, like sentir, 328. 
 Reprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 Reproduire, like conduire, 349. 
 Requerir, like acquerir, 316. 
 Resoudre, 366. 
 Ressentir, like sentir, 328. 
 Ressortir, like sentir, 328. 
 se Ressouvenir, like weniV, 331. 
 Restreindre, like craindre, 348. 
 Retenir, like tenir, 330. 
 Rctraire, like traire, 372. 
 Revaloir, like valoir, 341. 
 Revenir, like uenir, 331. 
 Revetir, like vetir, 332. 
 Revivre, like vivre, 374. 
 Revoir, like iw, 342. 
 Rire, 367. 
 Rompre, 368. 
 Rouvrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 Satisfaire, Wkefaire, 356. 
 Savoir, 340. 
 
 Secourir, like courir, 320. 
 Seduire, like conduire, 349, 
 Sentir, 328. 
 Seoir, 386. 
 Servir, 329. 
 Sortir, like sentir, 328. 
 Souffrir, like ouvrir, 327. 
 Soumettre, like mettre, 360. 
 Sourire, like rire, 367. 
 Souscrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 Soustraire, like traire, 372. 
 Soutenir, like tenir, 330. 
 se Souvenir, like venir, 331. 
 Subvenir, like venir, 331. 
 Suffire, 369. 
 Suivre, 370. 
 
 Pres. Subj.^reuflZe, etc. 
 
 f Past Def. repus, etc. 
 
 II 
 
170 
 
 FRENCH GEAHMAE. 
 
 [§ 390-393. 
 
 Surfaire, like /aire, 356. 
 
 Surprendre, like prendre, 365. 
 
 Surseoir, 387. 
 
 Survenir, like venir, 331. 
 
 Survivre, like vivre, 374. 
 
 Taire, like se taire, 371. 
 
 se Taire, 371. 
 
 Teindre, like craindre, 348. 
 
 Tenir, 330. 
 
 Traduire, like conduire, 349. 
 
 Traire, 372. 
 
 Transcrire, like ecrire, 355. 
 
 Transmettre, like mettre, 360. 
 
 Tressaillir, like assaillir, 317. 
 
 Vaincre, 373. 
 
 Valoir, 341. 
 
 Venir, 331. 
 
 Vetir, 332. 
 
 Vivre, 374. 
 
 Voir, 342. 
 
 Vouloir, 343. 
 
 EEMAEKS. 
 390. Previous to the present century, the diphthong oi 
 was employed instead of ai in the following cases : 
 
 a. In the imperfect and conditional of verbs; as, je 
 chanto^s instead of je chantosy je finiroas for je finir- 
 ais, etc. 
 
 b. In certain infinitive endings ; as, connote instead 
 of connaftre ; -p&voitre for parage. 
 
 c. With many adjectives and nouns; as, francos for 
 franco's/ mormoie for monuaie ; foible for faible. 
 
 The pronunciation of oi in these cases does not differ 
 from that of ai. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 391. The adverb is a word used to modify the meaning 
 of a verb, an adjective, or another adverb; as, 
 
 Charles parle bien, Charles speaks icell. 
 
 II est tres jeune, he is very young. 
 
 Vous ecrivez tres facilement, you tcrite very easily. 
 
 392. Adverbs are divided into three classes, namely, 
 primitive; as, oui, yes; non, no; bien, well; derivative, 
 formed from adjectives ; as, facilement, easily ; sure- 
 ment, surely; and compound adverbs: as, d'abord, at 
 first ; tout a fait, quite. 
 
 393. Derivative adverbs are usually formed by adding 
 to the adjective the syllable me?it, according to the fol- 
 lowing rules : 
 
§394,395.] ADVERB. 171 
 
 a. When the adjective is in the masculine gender, and 
 ends in a voicel, the adverb is formed from it by the sim- 
 ple addition of merit ; as, 
 
 vrai, true ; vraiment, truly. 
 
 ipo\i,polite ; poliment, politely. 
 
 b. Some adjectives terminated in e unaccented, change that vowel 
 into e with the acute accent before adding the adverbial sign ; as, 
 
 aveugle, blind; aveuglement, blindly. 
 
 conforme, conformable ; conformement, conformably. 
 
 c. If an adjective in the masculine gender ends in a 
 consonant, the adverbial sign is added to its feminine 
 form; as, 
 
 vif, lively ; vivement, lively. 
 
 fort, strong ; fortement, strongly. 
 
 heureux, happy ; heureusement, happily. 
 
 Remark. The adverbial sign ment is derived from the ablative 
 singular of the Latin noun mens, mind. In time this noun as- 
 sumed the signification of manner, and ultimately formed one 
 word with the adjective, which it converted into an adverb. 
 Since mens is of the feminine gender, the propriety of the rule 
 is evident. 
 
 d. Those adjectives, however, which end in ant or ent, 
 change those terminations respectively into am and em 
 before adding the adverbial sign ; as, 
 
 constant, constant; constamment, constantly. 
 
 elegant, elegant; elegamment, elegantly. 
 
 394. A few adjectives are used adverbially with cer- 
 tain verbs ; as, 
 
 Sentir bon, to smell sweet. 
 Chanter juste, to sing in tune. 
 Chanter faux, to sing out of tune. 
 Vendre cher, to sell clear. 
 Parler haut, to speak loud. 
 
 395. The following adverbs require the preposition de 
 (before a vowel or h mute, cV) when followed by a noun, 
 or an adjective with a noun : 
 
172 FEEXCH GRAMMAK. [§ 396. 
 
 Autaut, as much, as many. Moins, less, fewer. 
 Assez,* en ough. Peu, little, few. 
 
 Beaucoup, much, many. Plus, more. 
 Combien ? how much f how Que ? how much f how 
 
 many f many f 
 
 Guere,f hut little, but few Taut, so much, so many. 
 
 (with ne). Trop, too much, too many. 
 
 As, 
 
 Assez d'argent, money enough. 
 
 Trop de pain, too much bread. 
 
 Peu de gens, few people. 
 
 Beaucoup de papier, much paper. 
 
 Combien de poires avez-vous? how many pears have 
 you f 
 
 Moins de chapeaux,/e^er hats. 
 
 Plus de viande, more meat. 
 
 Je n'ai guere de nouvelles, I have but little news. 
 
 Tant de cafe, so much coffee. 
 
 Autant de joie, as much delight. 
 
 Que deplaisir! what pleasure ! how much pleasure ! 
 
 396. Adverbs form their comparative and superlative 
 degrees precisely like adjectives ; the following, however, 
 are irregular: 
 
 Bien, well. Mieux, better. Le mieux, the best. 
 
 Mai, badly. Pis, worse. Le pis, the worst. 
 
 Peu, little. Moins, less. Le moins, the least. 
 
 Beaucoup, much. V\us,more. Le plus, the most. 
 
 USP 3 A list of the principal adverbs and adverbial phrases will be 
 found in the Syntax. 
 
 * Assez can never follow the word it qualifies, as may be done in 
 English. 
 
 f Guere comes from the old High German wdri, preserved in the 
 English very (as guerre from war, guepe or guespe from wasp), and 
 means very, very much; hence the propriety of the required negative 
 to give it the signification but little, but few (literally not very much — 
 many). 
 
397-401.] preposition. 173 
 
 THE ADVERB " NE. 
 
 In addition to the rules on the negative particles ?ie- 
 pas, ne-point, given above (see 254, 255, 277), the student 
 should note carefully the following : 
 
 397. When the negative-complement pas or point is 
 followed by an adjective or a noun taken in a partitive 
 sense, the negative must be accompanied by the preposi- 
 tion de ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai pas de viande, I have no meat. 
 N'avez-vous point de cafe? have you no coffee at all? 
 Je ne mange pas de mauvaises pommes, I do not eat 
 any had apples. 
 
 398. The words jamais, never; plus, more; nullement, 
 not at all; guere, hut little, but few ; rien, nothing ; per- 
 sonne, no one; aucun and mil, require the negative ne 
 (without pas) to complete their signification ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai jamais vu de telles poires, I have never seen 
 
 such pears. 
 Je n'ai rien, I have nothing. 
 Je n'en ai plus, I have no more of it (of them). 
 Je ne vois personne, I see no one. 
 
 399. Quelque ohose, something, and rien, nothing, take 
 de before an adjective ; as, 
 
 Avez-vous quelque chose de bon ? have you any thing 
 
 good? 
 Je n'ai rien de mauvais, I have nothing bad. 
 
 GP The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twenty-fifth, Part Fourth. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 400. The preposition is a word employed to express 
 the relation of things. 
 
 401. In French some prepositions govern their nouns 
 without the aid of another preposition ; as, apres mon 
 
174 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 402, 403. 
 
 retour, after my return ; others require the preposition 
 de after them ; as, autour de la maison, around t/ie house; 
 while a few take d after them ; as, jusqu'a la ville, as far 
 as the city. 
 
 402. The following list embraces those prepositions 
 which govern a noun directly; that is, do not admit of 
 another preposition : 
 
 A, at, to, in. 
 
 Apres, after. 
 
 Attendu, on account of. 
 
 A travers, through. 
 
 Avant, before (time). 
 
 Avec, with. 
 
 Chez, at the house of 
 
 Concernant, touching. 
 
 Contre, against. 
 
 Dans, in, into. 
 
 De, of from, with. 
 
 Depuis, since. 
 
 Derriere, behind. 
 
 ~Des,from. 
 
 Dessus, on, over. 
 
 Dessous, under. 
 
 Devant, before (place). 
 
 Durant, during. 
 
 En, in, at, to. 
 
 Entre, betwee?i, among. 
 
 Envers, toward. 
 
 Excepte, except. 
 
 Hormis, except, but. 
 Malgre, in spite of. 
 Mo}ennant, by means of. 
 Joignant, adjoining. 
 Nonobstant, notwithstand- 
 ing. 
 Outre, besides. 
 Par, by, through. 
 Parmi, among. 
 Pendant, during. 
 Pour, for. 
 Sans, without. 
 Sauf, saving, except. 
 Selon, according to. 
 Sous, under. 
 Suivant, according to. 
 Sur, on, xipon. 
 Touchant, touching. 
 Vers, toicard, to. 
 Yoici, see here. 
 Voila, see there. 
 Vu, on account of. 
 
 Hors, save. 
 
 403. The following prepositions require de after them : 
 A cause de, on account of. A l'abri de, sheltered from. 
 
 A cote de, beside, by. 
 A couvert de, secure from. 
 A fleur de, level icith. 
 A force de, by dint of. 
 
 A l'egard de, with regard to. 
 A la reserve de, excepting 
 
 that. 
 A l'exclusion de, excepting. 
 
§404,405.] peeposition. 175 
 
 A l'insu de, unknown to, Au risque cle, at the risk 
 
 A moins de, unless. of. 
 
 A raison de, at the rate of. Autour de, around. 
 
 A rez de, even with. Au travers de, through. 
 
 Au deca de, on this side. Aux depens de, at the ex- 
 
 Au dedans de, within. pense of. 
 
 Au dehors de, without. Aux environs de, round 
 
 Au dela de, on that side. about. 
 
 Au dessous de,u?ider,beloio. En deca de, on this side. 
 
 Au dessus de, upon, above. En depit de, in spite of. 
 
 Au devant de, before. Ensuite de, after. 
 
 Au lieu de, instead of. Faute de,for want of. 
 
 Au milieu de, in the midst Hors de, out of. 
 
 of. Le long de, along. 
 
 Au moyen de, by means of. Loin de, far from. 
 Au niveau de, even with. Pres de, near. 
 Au peril de, at the risk of . Proche de, nigh, near by. 
 Aupres de, near, by. Vis a vis de, opposite to. 
 
 Au prix de, at the price of. 
 
 404. The prepositions which require d after them are 
 jusqu'a, quant a, conformement a, par rapport a; as, 
 
 Jusqu'a Londres, as far as Londo7i. 
 Quant a moi, as for me. 
 
 Remark. The word jusque loses its final vowel before a, or it may- 
 add a euphonic s ; thus we may say jusqw'a or jusques d. 
 
 Use of some Prepositions. 
 
 405. The preposition d has a variety of uses, and cor- 
 responds to the English to, at, on, for, with, in. To, at, 
 and in, however, are its most usual significations ; as, 
 
 II est alle a la campagne, he has gone to the country. 
 II est au jardin, he is in the garden. 
 Elle est d l'ecole, she is at school. 
 Demeurez-vous d Paris ? do you live at Paris f 
 II monte d cheval, he rides on horseback. 
 
176 FEEKCH GRAMMAR. [§ 406-409. 
 
 Ce couteau ne sert d rien, this knife is good for noth- 
 ing. 
 
 a. Before names of countries "to" is translated by en, 
 but before names of cities by d; as, 
 
 Je vais en Europe, en France, I am going to Europe, 
 to France. 
 
 Je vais a Paris, a Florence, I am going to Paris, to 
 Florence. 
 
 406. De is rendered by of from, and with ; sometimes 
 it is translated otherwise, which the ear will readily de- 
 termine ; as, 
 
 Je parle de la guerre, J speak of the war. 
 
 Mon ami vient de la campagne, my friend comes from 
 
 the country. 
 II est content de son sort, he is contented with his lot. 
 Nous tremblames de peur, toe shook with fear. 
 
 407. Dans and en both signify in; but the sense of 
 en is more vague, more extensive than that of dans. En 
 is used before the name of a division of the earth, a king- 
 dom, etc., and dans before a word limited by an article 
 or pronoun ; as, 
 
 Mon ami demeure dans la ville, my friend resides in 
 
 the city. 
 Je voyagerai en France, I shall travel in France. 
 Je vais dans ma chambre, I am going into my room. 
 II va diner en ville, he is going to dine out. 
 
 408. Sur answers to on, upon ; as, 
 
 Le livre est sur la table, the book is on the table. 
 II met l'encrier sur la table, he puts the inkstand on 
 the table. 
 
 409. Avec denotes companionship and manner, corre- 
 sponding to the English with; as, 
 
 II est sorti avec mon pere, he has gone out with my 
 
 father. 
 II ecrit avec elegance, he icrites with elegance. 
 
§ 410-413.] preposition. 17V 
 
 Venez avec moi, come with me. 
 
 II se conduit avec prudence, he behaves with prudence. 
 
 410. Avant and devant both mean before, with this 
 difference, that the former (avant) denotes a reference to 
 time and order, while the latter (devant) marks place 
 and presence ; as, 
 
 Je viendrai avant midi, I shall come before noon (time). 
 Mettez-vous devant le feu, stand before the fire (place). 
 Rangez ceci avant cela, put this before that (order). 
 II n'ose parler devant moi, he dares not speak before 
 me (presence). 
 
 411. Chez means with, in the sense of at the house of 
 (Latin apud and German bei) ; as, 
 
 Chez vous, nous, lui, at your, our, his house. 
 
 Je loge chez le metecm, I live at the physicians. 
 
 Chez qui allez-vous? to ichose house are you going? 
 
 Je vais chez le tailleur, Tarn going to the tailor's. 
 
 Je viens de chez mon ami, I come from my friend's. 
 
 a. Chez comes from the Low Latin casa, house (old 
 French cas, ches, chez), and is an abridgment of en chez 
 de, to or at the house of; thus chez mon ami would be in 
 full en chez de mon ami, at the house of my friend. The 
 Spanish and Italian preserve the original formula, in casa 
 di, en casa de. This derivation of chez explains the fifth 
 example above, " I come," de chez, " from the house of," 
 etc. 
 
 412. Aupres de marks place and comparison, and is 
 rendered by near, with ; as, 
 
 Mon jardin est aupres du sien, my garden is near his. 
 Votre mal n'est rien aupres du mien, your sickness is 
 nothing in comparison ivith mine. 
 
 413. Apres, after, refers to time, order, and place ; as, 
 II viendra apres moi, he will come after me. 
 
 Tibere fut empereur apres Auguste, Tiberius was em- 
 peror after Augustus. 
 H 2 
 
178 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 414-418. 
 
 L'enfant court apres sa mere, the child runs after its 
 mother. 
 
 414. Parmi, among, is used in speaking of several ob- 
 jects ; entre, between, when reference is made to two ob- 
 jects only; as, 
 
 Parmi mes livres j'ai trouve un papier, among my- 
 
 books I have found a paper. 
 Entre vous et moi, between you and me. 
 Entre l'hiver et l'ete, between winter and summer. 
 
 415. Depuis and des both signify from, since ; des 
 marks the beginning, and depuis the progression of a 
 period of time or of a portion of space ; as, 
 
 Cette riviere est navigable des sa source, this river is 
 navigable from its source. 
 
 Des la pointe du jour, from the break of day. 
 
 Depuis six heures jusqu'a dix, from six 6 ^ clock till ten. 
 
 Depuis Paris jusqu'a Marseille, from Paris to Mar- 
 seilles. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 416. The conjunction is a term which serves to con- 
 nect words, prepositions, or sentences. 
 
 417. Conjunctions are simple or compound. The sim- 
 ple conjunctions are: 
 
 Car, for. Ou — ou, either — or. 
 
 Cependant, however, yet. Pourquoi, why? 
 
 Comme, as. Pourtant, still, yet. 
 
 Done, then, consequently. Puisque, since. 
 
 Et, and. Quand, if, though. . 
 
 Et — et, both — and. Que, that. 
 
 Mais, but. Quoique, although. 
 
 Ni — ni, neither — nor. Si, if, whether. 
 
 Or, now. Soit, so be it, either. 
 
 Ou, or. Toutefois, notwithstanding. 
 
 418. Compound conjunctions are joined to que or to 
 
§ 418.] CONJUNCTION. 179 
 
 de ; if to the former, they require the verb which fol- 
 lows them to be in the indicative or subjunctive mood, 
 but if joined to de the verb must be in the infinitive. 
 
 a. The following compound conjunctions require the 
 indicative mood after them : 
 
 A condition que, on condi- Depuis que, ever since. 
 
 tion that. Des que, as soon as. 
 
 Ainsi que, as. De maniere que, so that, so. 
 
 A mesure que, inproportion De sorte que, so that. 
 
 as. Outre que, besides that. 
 
 Apres que, after. Parce que, because. 
 
 Attendu que, seeing that. Pendant que, while. 
 Au lieu que, whereas. Peut-etre que, per haps. 
 
 Aussi loin que, as far as. Selon que, according as. 
 Aussitot que, as soon as. Sitot que, as soon as.. 
 Autant que, as much as. Tant que, as long as. 
 De meme que, even as, as. Tandis que, while. 
 
 b. The following are followed by a verb in the sub- 
 junctive mood : 
 
 Afin que, in order that. Loin que, far from. 
 Avant que, before. Malgre que, for all that. 
 
 Au cas que, in case that. Non pas que, not that. 
 A moins que, unless (with Nonobstant que, notwith- 
 
 ne). standing that. 
 
 Bien que, though. Pourvu que, provided that. 
 
 De crainte que, for fear that Pour que, in order that. 
 
 (with ne). Quoique, although. 
 
 De peur que, lest (with ne). Sans que, without. 
 En cas que, if, in case that. Soit que, whether. 
 Encore que, though. Suppose que, suppose that. 
 
 Jusqu'a ce que, until, till. 
 
 c. The following conjunctions with de require the in* 
 finitive mood after them : 
 
 Aim de, in order to. Avant de, before. 
 
 A moins de, unless. Au lieu de, instead of. 
 
180 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 419-423. 
 
 De crainte de, for fear of. Loin de, far from. 
 
 De peur de, for fear of. Plutot que de, rather than. 
 
 Jusqu'a, even to, as far as to. 
 
 » 
 
 USES OF " QUE." 
 
 The following uses of que apply not only to the con- 
 junction, but also to the same word used for other parts 
 of speech. 
 
 419. Its usual signification is that; as, 
 
 Je pense que nous partirons, I think that we shall set 
 out. 
 
 In this sense that is frequently omitted in English, but in French 
 its equivalent que is always expressed ; as, 
 
 Je pense qu'il va pleuvoir, / think (that) it is going to rain. 
 
 420. Que is employed to avoid the repetition of the 
 words lorsque, si, quand, comme, and any of the conjunc- 
 tions enumerated in Rule 418, b ; as, 
 
 Si vous etes malade, et que vous ne puissiez sortir, if 
 you are sick, and {if you) can not go out. 
 
 Comme il est raon ami, et que je l'aime, since he is my 
 friend, and since Hove him. 
 
 421. Que is used in reported narration, in which it 
 would be superfluous in English ; as, 
 
 Je lui repondis que oui, I answered him (that) yes. 
 II me dit que non, he told me (that) no. 
 
 422. It is employed in sentences expressive of surprise, 
 wonder, and may be rendered by how, what, how many ; 
 as, 
 
 Que je vous plains ! how I pity you! 
 Que de soldats et de chevaux ! what an array of sol- 
 diers and horses ! 
 
 423. It sometimes takes the place of pourquoi, why f 
 as, 
 
 Que n'etes-vous arrive plutot ? why did you not come 
 sooner f 
 
§ 424-430.] INTEKJECTION. 181 
 
 424. For afin que, in order that ; as, 
 
 Approchez quo je vous parle, come hither that I may 
 speak to you. 
 
 425. It often replaces clepuis que, since, or puisque, 
 since; as, 
 
 II y a uu ruois qu'il est parti, it is a month since he 
 
 left. 
 Qu'avez-vous que vous ne mangez point? what ails 
 
 you, since you do not eat f 
 
 426. Que, with a verb in the subjunctive mood, is oft- 
 en rendered by let, may ; as, 
 
 Qu'il entre, let him come in. 
 
 Qu'on m'apporte un habit, let a coat he brought me. 
 
 427. Que is used idiomatically in the following and 
 similar examples : 
 
 Ce nous est une douce rente que ce monsieur, this gen- 
 tleman is the source of a handsome revenue to us. 
 C'est un beau garcon que celui-la, that is a fine boy. 
 
 Remark. This idiom, which occurs very frequently in Trench 
 writers, may be always understood clearly by translating que, 
 namely ; as, this is a handsome revenue to us, namely, this gen- 
 tleman ; it is a fine boy, namely, that one. 
 
 428. The negative ne is employed with que in the sig- 
 nification of only, but ; as, 
 
 II n'a qu'un livre, he has but one book. 
 II n'y a qu'un Dieu, there is but one God. 
 
 I2P The student should now turn to the Exercises in Section 
 Twenty-sixth, Part Eourth. 
 
 OE THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 429. Interjections are employed in French, as in En- 
 glish, to express some sudden emotion or passion of the 
 mind. 
 
 430. The subjoined table exhibits a list of the most 
 usual interjections : 
 
 Ah ! ah ! Aie ! ay ! eigh ! 
 
182 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 430. 
 
 Allez! begone! 
 
 Allons! come! 
 
 Bah! bah! 
 
 Bon! well! 
 
 Chut! hist! 
 
 Courage ! cheer up ! 
 
 Ecoutez! hark! 
 
 Eh! eh! 
 
 Eh bien ! well now ! 
 
 YUfie! 
 
 Fi done ! fie then ! 
 
 Gare ! taJce care ! 
 
 Ha! ha! 
 
 He! eh! oh! 
 
 He! oh! 
 
 Helas ! (s vocal) alas ! 
 
 He bien ! icell ! 
 
 Hem! hem! 
 
 Ho! ho! 
 
 Hola! hold! 
 
 Mon Dieu ! dear me ! 
 
 Oh! oh! 
 
 O ciel! good heavens ! 
 
 Ouf ! pooh! 
 
 Oui-da ! in sooth ! 
 
 Or 9a ! hurry ! 
 
 Ouais ! ah! indeed! 
 
 Pst! hush! 
 
 Tenez! here! behold! 
 
 Tout beau ! softly ! 
 
PAKT THIRD. 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 OF THE AETICLE. 
 USE OF THE DEFINITE AETICLE. 
 
 431. The definite article must be employed in French 
 before all common nouns which designate an entire spe- 
 cies, an entire class ; as, 
 
 L'homme est mortel, man is mortal. 
 
 Le fer est pesant. iron is heavy. 
 
 La vertu est louable, virtue is praiseworthy. 
 In these examples the nouns hornme, fer, and vertu 
 are taken in a general, comprehensive sense, and mean 
 all men, all iron, all virtue, wherever found or manifest- 
 ed. This rule demands special attention, since it differs 
 widely from the English use. 
 
 432. The definite article is likewise used before com- 
 mon nouns, which designate a particular individual or a 
 specific object, as in English ; as, 
 
 La femme dont je parle est pauvre, the woman of whom 
 
 I speak is poor. 
 
 Le garcon est beau, the boy is beautiful. 
 
 Les rois d'Angleterre, the kings of England. 
 
 Here the nouns femme, garcon, and rois admit the article as in 
 English, because a particular woman and boy and the kings of a 
 specific country are meant. 
 
 433. The definite article is to be used before names 
 of countries, provinces, rivers, winds, and mountains; as, 
 
 L'Amerique et l'Europe, America and Europe. 
 
184 FEEXCHGBAMMAE. [§ 434-437. 
 
 La France est un beau pays, France is a beautiful 
 
 country. 
 Le Xord et le Sud, the North and the South. 
 La Seine passe par la ville de Paris, the Seine passes 
 
 through the city of Paris. 
 
 434. Also before titles prefixed to proper names to in- 
 dicate rank or profession ; as, 
 
 Le general Scott, General Scott. 
 
 Le professeur Visard, Professor Nisard. 
 
 Le marechal Cavaignac, Marshal Cavaignac. 
 
 435. In speaking of the parts of the body or of the 
 qualities of the mind the definite article is employed in 
 French, but is translated into English by a or an; as, 
 
 Elle a la bouche grande, she has a large mouth. 
 
 II a les yeux petits, he has small eyes. 
 
 Mon frere a la memoire excellente, my brother has an 
 excellent memory. 
 
 J'ai les cheveux noirs, I have black hair. 
 
 L'orateur a la voix cultivee, the orator has a culti- 
 vated voice. 
 
 436. The definite article is employed before the names 
 of seasons, and before expressions of time ; as, 
 
 L'ete, l'hiver, l'automne, summer, winter, autumn. 
 L'annee prochaine, next year. 
 La semaine derniere, last week. 
 
 437. Also before collective names of corporations, sys- 
 tems of belief, and in certain phrases ; as, 
 
 Le protestantisme, Protestantism. 
 
 Le parlement, Parliament. 
 
 Le gouYernement, Government. 
 
 Le christianisme, Christianity. 
 
 A l'ecole, a l'eglise, at school, at church. 
 
 La nature, la vie, nature, life. 
 
 La mort, la loi, death, law. 
 
 Le ciel, l'enfer, heaven, hell. 
 
§ 438-442.] syntax of the article. 185 
 
 438. Finally, the definite article is used in French be- 
 fore nouns of measure, weight, or number, where the 
 English would employ a ov per ; as, 
 
 La farine se vend huit piastres le h^xW, flour is sold at 
 eight dollars a or per barrel. 
 
 OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 439. The definite article is omitted with names of 
 countries which are preceded by the preposition en, de, or 
 expressions signifying t o return from, to come from; as, 
 
 Je vais en France, I am going to France. 
 
 J'arrive d'Angleterre, I am come from England. 
 
 La guerre d'ltalie, the war in Italy. 
 
 a. The definite article is used before the names of cer- 
 tain cities and countries, whatever be the foregoing ex- 
 pression; as, 
 
 Le Havre, le Perou, Havre, Peru. 
 
 La Rochelle, la Havane, Rochelle, Havana. 
 
 Je vais au Havre, I am going to Havre. 
 
 J'arrive du Perou, I am come from Peru. 
 
 440. This article is also omitted before nouns in appo- 
 sition; as, 
 
 Boileau, auteur de Part poetique, Boileau, the author 
 
 of the "Art of Poetry -." 
 Henri huit, roi d'Angleterre, Henry the Eighth, king 
 
 of England. 
 
 441. In certain phrases after the preposition en; as, 
 Est-il encore en vie ? is he still living {in life) ? 
 
 II vit en paix avec tout le monde, he lives at peace 
 with every body. 
 
 442. In certain proverbial expressions, and when it is 
 intended to give rapidity to the locution ; as, 
 
 Pauvrete n'est pas vice, poverty is no crime. 
 Contentement passe richesse, contentment is better 
 than wealth. 
 
186 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 443-446. 
 
 Tu repetes toujours memes discours, thou art always 
 repeating the same language. 
 
 • REPETITION" OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 443. The definite article is repeated before each noun 
 of a series ; as, 
 
 Les fleurs, les diamants, les parfumes, la verdure, the 
 flowers, diamonds, perfumes, and verdure. 
 
 a. If the article is omitted before one noun, it should 
 be omitted also before each noun of the series ; as, 
 
 Bois, pres, champs, animaux, tout est pour son usage, 
 woods, meadows, fields, animals — every thing 
 serves his wants. 
 
 444. The article ought not to be repeated before two 
 adjectives connected by et when they both express the 
 qualities of the same noun ; as, 
 
 Les beaux et braves garcons, the fine, worthy boys. 
 (ft^T Les beaux et les braves garcons would refer to a distinct 
 class of boys, the one Jine, the other worthy. 
 
 445. The article is repeated, however, if the adjectives 
 refer to a noun representing different objects ; as, 
 
 Les grands et les petits garcons, the large boys and the 
 
 small ones. 
 Les femmes brunes et les blondes, the women of dark 
 
 and those of light complexion. 
 Le bon vin et le mauvais, the good wine and the bad. 
 
 OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 446. The indefinite article is omitted before a noun 
 which is explanatory to another noun or in apposition 
 with it ; as, 
 
 Nisard, membre de l'Academie, JVisard, a member of 
 the Academy. 
 
 Boileau, satirique fort piquant, JBoileau, a very pun- 
 gent satirist. 
 
§ 447-449.] syntax of the article. 187 
 
 447. The indefinite article is omitted before nouns de- 
 noting nationality, office, trade, profession, or occupation, 
 when they are joined to the subject by some form of the 
 verb etre; as, 
 
 Je suis Americain, lam an American. 
 
 Etes-vous Francais, monsieur? are you a French 
 man, sir f 
 
 Madame est-elle Russe ? is the lady a Hussian f 
 
 Charles est charpentier, Charles is a carpenter. 
 
 M. Mozin est professeur, Mr. Mozin is a professor. 
 
 Jean est devenu soldat, John has become a soldier. 
 
 a. If, however, the noun is accompanied by an adjec- 
 tive, or followed by a relative clause, or if the expres- 
 sions c'est, ce sont, form the subject, the indefinite article 
 is retained ; as, 
 
 II est un bon charpentier, he is a good carpenter. 
 
 Voila un medecin que j'estime, there is a physician 
 whom I esteem. 
 
 Ce sont des Francais, those are Frenchmen. 
 
 C'est un marchand de vin, he is a wine-merchant. 
 
 448. In expressions of admiration or wonder the in- 
 definite article is omitted ; as, 
 
 Quelle beaute ! what a beauty ! 
 Quel joli garcon ! what a pretty boy ! 
 a. With nouns denoting time, the English a or an is 
 rendered by par; thus, 
 
 Dix chelins par semaine, ten shillings a week ; 
 Deux fois par an, twice a year; 
 also, Tant par tete, so much a head. 
 
 OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE IN THE PARTITIVE RELATION. 
 
 449. General Hide. Whenever a noun employed in a 
 partitive sense (85) is preceded by the preposition de, 
 having its proper meaning {of, from, with), the article is 
 never associated with it ; as, 
 
188 FREXCH GRAMMAR. [§ 450. 
 
 Un morceau de pain, a piece of bread. 
 Beaucoup de beurre, much (of) butter. 
 Je parle d'enfants, I speak of children, 
 
 In these sentences the article can not be employed with de in the 
 partitive sense, because the preposition here signifies of and not 
 some ; du pain, du beurre, des enfants would mean of the bread, 
 of the butter, of the children. 
 
 Remark. There is but one case in which de without the article 
 is rendered by some or any, and that is when an adjective pre- 
 cedes a noun taken in the partitive sense (see 87). In all 
 other cases the preposition used alone has its proper meaning. 
 
 450. Particular Hides. The article is omitted with de: 
 
 a. After a verb which requires de; as, 
 
 Je me sers de viande, J use (avail myself of ) meat. 
 Vous parlez de vin, you speak of wine. 
 On vous a conible de richesses, you have been laden 
 with wealth. 
 
 b. After a substantive denoting weight, measure, or 
 number ; as, 
 
 Un boisseau de ble, a bushel of corn. 
 Tine bouteille de biere, a bottle of beer. 
 Une livre de viande, a pound of meat. 
 Une foule de gens, a throng of people. 
 
 c. After adverbs of quantity (395) ; as, 
 Assez de papier, paper enough. 
 
 Taut de fromage, so much cheese. 
 Combien d'encre avez-vous ? how much ink have you ? 
 J'ai peu de courage, I have little courage. 
 II n'a pas de nouvelles, he has no news. 
 Exception. The adverb bien, much, many, sometimes 
 employed instead of beaucoup, always takes the article 
 after it ; as, 
 
 Bien de la peine, much trouble. 
 
 Bien du merite, much merit. 
 
 Bien des choses, many things. 
 
 d. After prepositions the entire partitive expression is 
 usually omitted ; as, 
 
§ 450.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 189 
 
 Avec joie, vrithjoy. Sans Mens, without property. 
 
 Par ordre, by command. 
 
 e. After certain verbs with their object; as, 
 Avoir besoin, to need. Faire tort, to injure. 
 
 Avoir chaud, to be warm. Perdre courage, to lose cour- 
 Avoir envie, to have a mind. age. 
 
 Avoir faim, to be hungry. Rendre service, to render a 
 Avoir pitie, to have pity. service. 
 
 Avoir mal, to have pain. Tenir parole, to keep word. 
 Donner avis, to advise. Prendre garde, to take care. 
 
 Faire place, to make room. Tenir lieu, to replace. 
 Faire plaisir, to give pleas- Trouver moyen, to find 
 
 ure. means. 
 
 Remarks on the Partitive. 
 In employing the partitive article in French the stu- 
 dent must observe carefully the meaning and position 
 of the substantive. In English the use of the definite 
 article is limited to some particular, definite object ; an 
 object referred to vaguely or in general terms stands 
 without the article. But in French almost every degree 
 of limitation of which a substantive is capable is express- 
 ed by the article — definite, indefinite, or partitive. Thus 
 in English we say, " bread is useful," " give me bread," 
 " the bread which I have." Now the word bread is here 
 employed in three different degrees of limitation, and 
 only one of these degrees is determined by a proper 
 sign; the sense of the two remaining must be ascertain- 
 ed by reflection. The French language, however, em- 
 ploys the definite article in the first, because all bread is 
 meant, "le pain est utile;" the partitive article in the 
 second, because a part of the bread is designated, " don- 
 nez-moi du pain ;" and the article definite in the third, 
 as in English, u le pain que j'ai." It should not be for- 
 gotten, however, that the article is omitted from the par- 
 
• 
 
 190 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 451-456. 
 
 titive when an adjective precedes the noun, and when 
 the word de has its original signification (of or from). 
 
 FINAL RULES. 
 
 451. The word plupart de always takes the plural ar- 
 ticle after it ; as, 
 
 La plupart des hommes, the greater part of men. 
 
 452. The article is omitted in French before numerals 
 indicating the order of succession with kings, emperors, 
 etc. ; as, 
 
 Henri quatre, Henry the Fourth. 
 Louis quatorze, Louis the Fourteenth. 
 Charles douze, Charles the Twelfth. 
 
 453. The definite article is employed before the names 
 of some well-known Italian poets and artists ; as, 
 
 Le Tasse, le Dante, Tasso, Dante. 
 
 454. "No article is used in French before nouns which 
 come after ni — ni, meaning neither — nor, except when 
 one would be employed in English ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai ni or ni argent, I have neither gold nor silver. 
 Je n'ai ni For ni l'argent, J have neither the gold nor 
 the silver. 
 
 455. In the correlative the more — the more, the defi- 
 nite article is not used in French ; as, 
 
 Plus j'etudie plus j'apprends, the more I study the 
 more I learn. 
 
 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE FEMININE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 456. According to the following rules, substantives 
 denoting male beings are changed into substantives de- 
 noting female beings. 
 
 a. By adding a mute e to the masculine : as, 
 Un voisin, a neighbor. Une voisine, a {female) 
 
 neighbor. 
 
§ 456.] SYNTAX OF TKE NOUN. 191 
 
 Un ami, a friend. Une araie, a {lady) friend. 
 
 Un berger, a shepherd. Une bergere, a shepherdess. 
 
 Un aieul, a grandfather. Une aieule, a grandmother. 
 
 Un ours, a he-bear. Une ourse, a she-bear. 
 
 Remark. The word enfant, child, does not add e to denote a "fe- 
 male" child, but simply takes the feminine article ; thus, un 
 enfant, a male child; une enfant, a, female child. 
 
 b. By changing a final mute e into esse y as, 
 
 Le comte, the count. La comtesse, the countess. 
 
 Le tigre, the tiger. La tigresse, the tigress. 
 
 Le prince, the prince. La princesse, the princess. 
 Le maitre, the master. La maitresse, the mistress. 
 
 c. By changing the endings an, on, ten into anne, 
 onne,ienne ; as, 
 
 Le paysan, the peasant. La paysanne, the {female) 
 
 peasant. 
 Le lion, the lion. La lionne ; the lioness. 
 
 Le chien, the dog. La chienne, the {female) dog. 
 
 d. By changing the ending eur into euse ; as, 
 
 Le menteur, the liar. La menteuse, the liar (fern.). 
 
 Le danseur, the dancer. La danseuse, me {female) 
 
 dancer. 
 Le trompeur, me deceiver. La trompeuse, me deceiver 
 
 (fern.). 
 Le chanteur, me singer. La chanteuse, me {female) 
 
 singer. 
 
 e. By changing the ending teur into trice ; as, 
 L'acteur, Me ffcfor. Une actrice, cm actress. 
 L'instituteur, the preceptor. Une institutrice, a p>recep- 
 
 tress. 
 L'inventeur, the inventor. Une inventrice, an invent- 
 
 ress. 
 f The following form their feminine irregularly : 
 Loup, he-icolf Louve, she-icolf. 
 
 Dieu, God. Deesse, goddess. 
 
192 FJREXCH GRAMMAR. [§ 457-459. 
 
 Due, duke. Duchesse, duchess. 
 
 Serviteur, servant. Servante, (female) servant. 
 
 Roi, king. Reine, queen. 
 
 Empereur, emperor. Imperatrice, empress. 
 
 Compagnon, companion. Compagne, (female) com- 
 
 panion. 
 
 Epoux, husband. Epouse, consort, icife. 
 
 Juif, Jew. Juive, Jewess. 
 
 Heros, hero. Heroine, heroine. 
 
 CASE. 
 
 457. In French there is no possessive case, and nouns 
 which take an s with the apostrophe ('s) in English are 
 in French placed after the word on which they depend, 
 accompanied by the preposition de, of; as, 
 
 Le chapeau de l'homme, the mail's hat. 
 Le papier de rnon ami, my friend 's paper. 
 Le desir de mon cceur, my hearts desire. 
 Les draps des marchands, the merchants' cloths. 
 La bonte de Dieu, God's goodness. 
 
 458. The material of which a thing is made always 
 follows the object in French with de; as, 
 
 La table de bois, the wooden table. 
 
 Une image d'airain, a brazen image. 
 
 Le cheval de bois, the wooden horse. 
 
 Le chaudron de fer, the iron kettle. 
 
 Le mouchoir de coton, the cotton handkerchief 
 
 COMPOUND XOUXS. 
 
 459. When two words are joined together, constitu- 
 ting a compound noun in English, the first of which ex- 
 presses the use or destination of the second, the order 
 must be transposed in French, and the preposition d 
 placed between them ; as, 
 
 Le moulin a vent, the icind-mill. 
 
§ 460-464.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 193 
 
 Un verre a eau, a tumbler {glass for water). 
 
 Une salle a manger, a dining-room {hall for dining'). 
 
 Du bois a bvAler, fire-wood {wood for burning). 
 
 Une brosse a dents, a tooth-brush. 
 
 Un bateau a vapeur, a steam-boat. 
 
 460. Sometimes the article definite is employed with 
 the preposition d between compound words ; as, 
 
 La boite aux lettres, the letter-box. 
 La bouteille a Phuile, the oil-bottle. 
 
 PLURAL OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 461. When a noun is composed of two substantives 
 united by a preposition, the first noun alone takes the 
 sign of the plural ; as, 
 
 Un ver a soie, a silk-worm. Des vers a soie, silk-worms. 
 Un chef d'ceuvre, a master- Des chefs d'ceuvre, master- 
 piece, pieces. 
 
 462. When a noun is compounded with a substantive 
 and an adjective, both assume the plural sign ; as, 
 
 Une belle -mere, a mother- Des belles-meres, mothers- 
 in-law. in-law. 
 
 Un gentilhomme, a noble- Des gentilshommes, noble- 
 man, men. 
 
 463. The adjective grand, used in compound words 
 with an apostrophe, is invariable ; as, 
 
 Une grand'mere, a grand- Des grand'meres, grand- 
 mother, mothers. 
 Grand'messe, high mass. Grand'messes, high masses. 
 
 464. The following nouns, compounded of a substan- 
 tive and a possessive pronoun, are inflected in the plural 
 according to their respective use ; thus, 
 
 Monsieur, Sir, Mr., comp. of mon and sieur, messieurs. 
 Madame, Mrs., " ma and dame, mesdames. 
 
 Mademoiselle, Miss, " ma and demoiselle, mesde- 
 
 moiselles. 
 I . 
 
194 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 465-467* 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 465. The adjective must agree in gender and number 
 with the noun which it modifies ; as, 
 
 Le bon encrier, the good inkstand. 
 
 La petite fille, the little girl. 
 
 Les arbres sont hauts, the trees are high. 
 
 Les pommes sont douces, the apples are sweet. 
 
 a. It will be seen that the agreement of the adjective with its noun 
 takes place without regard to the place or location of the former ; 
 thus, 
 
 La petite fille or la fille est petite. 
 
 Ces garcons ne sont bons a rien, these boys are good for nothing. 
 
 J'aime les poires qui sont bonnes, I like pears that are good. 
 
 466. If the adjective qualifies two or more nouns of 
 the same gender it is put in the plural, and the gender 
 of the adjective is determined by that of the nouns; as, 
 
 L'homme et son fils sont prudents, the man and his 
 son are prudent. 
 
 Le marchand et le tailleur sont riches, the merchant 
 and the tailor are rich. 
 
 La dame et la fille sont belles, the lady and the daugh- 
 ter are beautiful. 
 
 La prune et la poire sont douces, the plum and the 
 pear are siceet. 
 
 467. If the gender of the nouns differs — that is, if one 
 noun be masculine and another feminine, the adjective is 
 put in the masculine plural ; as, 
 
 Mon frere et ma mere sont contents, my mother and 
 brother are satisfied. 
 
 La tante et l'oncle sont heureux, the aunt and the un- 
 cle are happy. 
 
 a. When the nouns to which the adjective relates are nearly syn- 
 onymous, or if they are connected by the conjunction ou, the adjec- 
 tive agrees with the last noun in gender and number ; as, 
 
§ 468-472.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 195 
 
 II parle avec un gout, une noblesse charmante, he speaks with 
 charming taste aud elegance.. 
 Here the words gout and noblesse are used to form one idea with the 
 adjective charmante, which is consequently made to accord with the 
 nearest noun (noblesse) in the feminine singular. 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF SOME ADJECTIVES. 
 
 468. The adjectives demi, half, and nu, bare, are in- 
 variable when placed before a noun ; as, 
 
 Une demi-heure, half an hour. 
 
 Une demi-livre, half a pound. 
 
 II va nu-pieds, he goes barefooted. 
 
 II vient nu-tete, he is coming bareheaded. 
 
 469. But if demi and nu are placed after a noun, they 
 accord with it regularly in gender and number ; as, 
 
 Une heure et demie, an hour and a half. 
 Une livre et demie, a pound and a half. 
 II a les pieds nus, he has bare feet. 
 Elle a la tete nue, she is bareheaded. 
 
 470. The adjective feu, late, deceased, may follow or 
 precede a determinative word (article and possessive 
 pronoun) ; if it precede the determinative word it re- 
 mains invariable, but if it follow the same, it must agree 
 in gender and number with the accompanying noun ; as, 
 
 Feu la reine de Naples, 
 
 X eu la reine cle JN aples, ) , _ M _ •__. _ 
 
 T „ ■ s -xt . i ■ r " ie late Queen of Naples. 
 
 La leue reine de Naples, ) * u * 
 
 ere, ) 
 
 y my late mother. 
 iere, j * 
 
 . ' >• my late uncle. 
 cle, j 
 
 Feu ma mere, 
 Ma feue men 
 Feu mon oncle, 
 Mon feu oncle, 
 
 471. Adjectives employed adverbially after certain 
 verbs are invariable (see 394) ; as, 
 
 II parle bas, he speaks softly. 
 Elle parle haut, she speaks aloud. 
 
 472. The adjectives excepte, except ; passe, past ; y-compris, includ- 
 
196 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 473, 474. 
 
 ing ; ci-joint, annexed; ci-inclus, inclosed, are subject to the same pe- 
 culiarity as those adjectives embraced under Rules 468, 469. 
 
 .POSITION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 473. No invariable rule can be given for the position 
 of adjectives in French, since some always precede the 
 noun, others always follow it, while many vary in signi- 
 fication according as they are placed after a noun or be- 
 fore it. The subjoined general rules will aid the learner 
 in this respect. 
 
 a. The past participles of verbs, employed adjectively, 
 are always placed after the noun ; as, 
 
 Un ouvrage acheve, a finished tcork. 
 Une maison vendue, a house sold. 
 Des enfants cheris, beloved children. 
 
 b. The present participles of verbs, used adjectively, 
 are generally placed after the noun ; as, 
 
 Des hommes prevoyants, provident men. 
 Une province abondante, a rich province. 
 
 c. Adjectives which express shape, form, color, smell, 
 or taste are placed after the substantive ; as, 
 
 Un chapeau rond, a round hat. 
 De l'eau douce, siceet water. 
 La redingote grise, the gray surtout. 
 La foret noire, the black forest. 
 
 d. Adjectives which relate to nations, peoples, creeds, 
 religions, follow the substantive ; as, 
 
 La langue francaise, the French language. 
 Les langues etrangeres, /bm^Tz languages. 
 L'eglise catholique, the Catholic Church. 
 
 474. The following adjectives stand before the noun 
 they qualify : 
 
 Ancien, former, old. Cher, dear, beloved. 
 
 Beau, handsome, fine. Chetif, mean. 
 Bon, good. Digne, worthy. 
 
§ 475, 476.] syntax of the adjective. 197 
 
 Grand, great, large. Mediant, wicked. 
 
 Gros, big. Moindre, least. 
 
 Honnete, honest. Nouveau, new. 
 
 Jeune, young. Petit, small. 
 
 Joli, pretty. Saint, holy. 
 
 Mauvais, bad. Yieux, old. 
 
 Meilleur, better. Vrai, true. 
 
 475. Some adjectives differ in signification according 
 as they stand before or after a noun ; as, 
 Un brave homme, an hon- Homme brave, brave man. 
 
 est man. 
 Un furieux coup, a tremen- Animal furieux, furious an- 
 
 doics&loio. imal. 
 
 Un galant homme, a gentle- Homme galant, a gallant. 
 
 man. 
 Un certain garcon, a cer- Nouvelle certaine, sure news. 
 
 tain boy. 
 Un grand homme, a great Homme grand, tall man. 
 
 man. 
 Mon propre habit, my own Habit propre, clean coat. 
 
 coat. 
 Nouvel habit, new (differ- Habit nouveau, neio coat. 
 
 ent) coat. 
 Pauvre auteur, worthless Auteur pauvre,^oor author. 
 
 author. 
 Yilain homme, ugly man. Homme vilain, mean, sordid 
 
 man. 
 Cher pere, dear father. Du drap cher, expensive 
 
 cloth. 
 476. The adjective tout, in the sense of " the whole," 
 " all," is followed by the article ; as, 
 
 Tout le monde, the whole world, every body. 
 
 Toute la journee, the whole day. 
 
 Tous les homrnes, all the men. 
 
 Tous les jours (all the days), every day. 
 
198 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§477,478. 
 
 FINAL REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES. 
 
 477. la speaking of the products or state officers of a 
 country, the French do not make use of an adjective as 
 in English, but rather of a proper noun preceded by the 
 preposition de ((#') ; as, 
 
 Du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese. 
 De la laine d'Espagne, Spanish wool. 
 Dentelle d'Angleterre, English lace. 
 Du vin de France, French wine. 
 L'empereur de France, the French emperor. 
 Ambassadeur de Russie, Russian embassador. 
 
 478. Adjectives signifying dimension, measurement, 
 as, high, long, thick, deep, broad, etc., in French precede 
 the expression denoting measure, with the preposition 
 de; thus, 
 
 Une fenetre large de trois pieds, a window three feet 
 
 broad. 
 Une maison haute de cent pieds, a house one hundred 
 
 feet high. 
 
 a. Another mode of expressing similar sentences is in 
 use; as, 
 
 Une fenetre de trois pieds de largemya window three 
 
 feet in width. 
 Une maison de cent pieds de hauteur, a house one 
 
 hundred feet in height. 
 
 b. The verb is (are), which in English must be em- 
 ployed in like sentences, is rendered into French by 
 avoir ; thus, 
 
 Ce linon a une verge de largeur, this lawn is a yard 
 
 wide. 
 Notre jardin a cent pieds de longueur, our garden is 
 
 100 feet long. 
 
 Literally these sentences would read, this lawn has a yard 
 of width ; our garden has 100 feet of length. 
 
§479.] SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 199 
 
 GOVEENMENT OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 479. An adjective accompanied by a preposition may- 
 be followed by a noun or a verb ; the preposition, how- 
 ever, does not always correspond in both languages ; 
 since, if we write, for example, " this man is contented 
 with his lot," the word with is not expressed in French 
 by avec, but by de, because the use of the language re- 
 quires this preposition after the adjective content. A 
 list of those adjectives which require the preposition de 
 after them- is here given : 
 
 Absent de, absent from. Fache de, sorry for. 
 Affame de, starving for, to. Fatigue de, tired of vrith. 
 Afflige de, sorrowful at. Fier de, proud of. 
 Am\At\evixde,ambitioiis of. Fou de, very fond of. 
 Amoureux de, in love with. Furieux die, furious icith. 
 Avide de, greedy of. Glorieux de, boastful of. 
 
 Capable de, capable of. Honteux de, ashamed of 
 Cheri de, beloved by. Impatient de, impatient of 
 
 Complice de, accomplice in. to. 
 Comble de, laden with. Indigne de, unworthy of 
 
 Content de, satisfied with. Independant de, independ- 
 Curieux de, curious to. ent of. 
 
 Dedaigneux de, disdainful Incapable de, incapable of 
 
 of. Inconsolable de, inconsolable 
 
 Desireux de, desirous of to. at. 
 Desole de, grieved with, at. Inquiet de, restless about. 
 Different de, different from. Ivre de, intoxicated with. 
 Digne de, worthy of, to. Joyeux de, joyful over, at. 
 Eloigne de, remote from. Jaloux de, jealous of. 
 Enchante de, delighted with. Las de, weary of. 
 Enrage de, enraged at. Libre de, free from. 
 
 Envieux de, envious of. Mecontent de, displeased 
 Esclave de, a slave to. with. 
 
 Exempt de, free from. Orgueilleux de, proud of. 
 
200 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 480. 
 
 Plein de,full of. Surpris de, surpyrised at. 
 
 Passasie de, satiated with. Tributaire de, tributary to. 
 
 Ravi de, delighted to, with. Triste de, sad about, at, to. 
 
 Pempli de, filled with. Victime de, victim to, of. 
 
 Satisfait de, satisfied with. Vide de, void of. 
 
 Soigneux de, careful of, to. Voisin de, near (to). 
 Sur de, sure of, to. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 II est capable de tout, he is capable of every thing. 
 
 L'inventeur est digne de louange, the inventor is wor- 
 thy of praise. 
 
 Je suis content de lui, I am satisfied with him. 
 
 II est las d'etre outrage, he is weary of being insulted. 
 
 Cette bouteille est remplie de Yin, this bottle is filled 
 with wine. 
 
 Vous etes esclave de vos desirs, you are a slave to your 
 desires. 
 
 lis sont fiers de leur renommee, they are proud of their 
 fame. 
 
 480. The following adjectives require the preposition 
 d after them : 
 
 Accessible a, accessible to. Funeste a, fatal to. 
 Accoutunie a, accustomed to. Favorable a, favorable to. 
 Ardent a, eager to, for. Impenetrable a, impenetrable 
 Attentif a, attentive to. to. 
 
 Bon a, good for, to. Importun a, importunate to. 
 
 Cher a, dear to. Incommode a, troublesometo. 
 
 Conforme a, similar to. Invincible a, invincible in. 
 Contraire a, contrary to. Invisible a, invisible to. 
 Cruel a, cruel toward. Necessaire a, riecessary to. 
 
 Exact a, exact in. Nuisible a, hurtful to. 
 
 Facile a, easy to. Odieux a, hateful to. 
 
 Formidable a, formidable Preferable a, preferable to. 
 
 to. Prompt a, quick to. 
 
§481-483.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 201 
 
 Propice a, propitious to. Semblable a, similar to. 
 Propre a, fit for. Sujet a, subject to. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 II est accoutume a tout, he is accustomed to every thing. 
 
 Etes-vous pret a mes ordres? are you ready for my 
 orders ? 
 
 Votre maison est semblable a la mienne, your house is 
 similar to mine. 
 
 II est propre a tout, he is fit for any thing. 
 
 Cela est bon a quelque chose, that is good for some- 
 thing. 
 
 C'est un fruit nuisible a la sante, it is a fruit hurtful 
 to the health. 
 
 481. Adjectives may be followed by other prepositions 
 than de or d; as, 
 
 Cruel envers, cruel toward. Compatible avec, compati- 
 Fertile en, fertile in. ble with. 
 
 Bienveillant pour, kind to. 
 
 482. When an adjective is in the predicate after the 
 verb to be, used unipersonally, the preposition de is 
 placed between the adjective and an infinitive follow- 
 ing; as, 
 
 II est bon de faire du bien aux pauvres, it is sweet to 
 
 do good to the poor. 
 II est bon de le meriter, it is good to deserve it. 
 II est doux de mourir pour la patrie, it is sweet to die 
 
 for one's country. 
 
 Remarks on the Degrees of Comparison. 
 
 483. The comparative of quantity is expressed by au- 
 tant de, as much, as many, and que, as; by plus de, 
 more, moins de, less, fewer, and que, than; thus, 
 
 J'ai autant de pain que vous, I have as much bread as 
 you. 
 
 12 
 
202 FRENCH GEAMMAK. [§ 484, 485. 
 
 II a moins de ceci qui de cela, he has less of this than 
 
 of that. 
 II n'en a davantage, he has no more (of it, of them).- 
 a. Davantage, more, may be used instead of plus only at the close 
 of a sentence. 
 
 484. The superlative relative may precede or follow 
 the noun with which it agrees, but if it follow the article 
 must be repeated ; as, 
 
 Les Francais sont les plus fideles amis des Americains ; 
 or, Les Francais sont les amis les plus fideles de Ameri- 
 cains, the French are the most faithful friends of the 
 Americans. 
 
 C'est la chose la plus etonnante, it is the most striking 
 
 thing, 
 a. The preposition in after a superlative is to be trans- 
 lated into French by de (c?') ; as, 
 
 Londres est la plus grande ville d'Angleterre, London 
 
 is the largest city in England. 
 C'est le meilleur homme du monde, that is the best 
 
 man in the world. 
 Le francais est la langue la plus douce de l'Europe, the 
 French is the smoothest language in Europe. 
 
 OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 485. Besides the cardinals and ordinals, there are in 
 French other classes of numerals, to wit ; 
 
 a. Collective Numbers. 
 Couple, couple. Huitaine, eight days. 
 
 ~P&\vQ,pair. Vingtaine, score. 
 
 Douzaine, dozen. 
 
 b. Fractional Numbers. 
 La moitie, the half. Un cinquieme, a fifth. 
 
 Un quart, a quarter. Demi, half. 
 
 Un tiers, a third. 
 
§ 486, 487.] SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 203 
 
 c. Proportional Numbers. 
 Le double, double. Le decuple, tenfold. 
 
 Le triple, threefold. Le centuple, hundredfold. 
 
 Le quadruple, fourfold. 
 
 d. Midtiplicative Numbers. 
 Une fois, once. Beaucoup de fois, many 
 
 Deux fois, twice. times. 
 
 Trois fois, three times. Combien de fois, hoio many 
 
 times. 
 
 486. The hour of the day is expressed in French by 
 means of the cardinal numbers joined to the feminine 
 noun heure (hour), in the signification of o'clock, time; 
 as, 
 
 Une heure, one o'clock (literally, one hour). 
 Trois heures, three o'clock (literally, three hours). 
 Une heure et demie, half past one (literally, one hour 
 
 and a half). 
 Quatre heures moins un quart, quarter to four (literal- 
 
 ly, four hours less a quarter). 
 Midi, twelve o'clock (noon). 
 Minuit, twelve o'clock (night). 
 Quelle heure est-il? what o'clock (time) is it? 
 II est dix heures, it is ten. 
 Dix heures et vingt minutes, twenty minutes past ten. 
 
 487. In speaking of the age of individuals, the verb 
 avoir is employed in French, or an idiomatic expression 
 may be used ; thus, 
 
 Quel age avez-vous? how old are you? (what age 
 
 have you f) 
 
 J'ai vinsrt ans ; or, ) _ 
 
 T . ° / -, > I am twenty years old. 
 
 Je suis age de vmgt ans, j * * 
 
 Cet enfant est age d'un an et demi ; ) this child is a year 
 
 or, Cet enfant a un an et demi, ) and a half old. 
 
204 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 488-490. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 488. The pronoun " vous" is employed in French to 
 address one or more persons ; as, 
 
 Que voyez-vous ? ivhat do you see f 
 Je vous donne un livre, I give you a booh, 
 a. Although "vous" is strictly a pronoun of the plural 
 number, it is nevertheless employed when only one per- 
 son is addressed; hence the attribute of this pronoun is 
 put in the singular number when reference is made to 
 but one person ; as, 
 
 Vous m'etes cher, you are dear to me (masc.). 
 Madame, vous m'etes chere, Madam, you are dear to 
 me. 
 
 489. The pronoun "tu" is used in poetry and in ad- 
 dressing the Deity; it is also frequently employed be- 
 tween relatives — parents to children, husbands and 
 wives ; children in addressing their parents, however, 
 make use of " vous ;" as, 
 
 Que je suis aise, mon cher papa, de vous rencontrer ! 
 
 how glad Jam to meet you, dear father ! 
 Que Yeux-tu faire de ta corbeille, mon fils ? what do 
 
 you mean to do with your basket, my son f 
 Dors, mon enfant, sleep, my child. 
 Notre pere qui es dans les cieux, our Father who art 
 
 in heaven. 
 
 490. The English self, selves, added to a pronoun to 
 give emphasis, are expressed in French by meme, memes, 
 attached to the disjunctive pronoun by means of a hy- 
 phen; as, 
 
 Moi-meme, nous-mercies, myself, ourselves. 
 Toi-meme, vous-meme-s, thyself, yourself— ves. 
 Lui-meme, elle-meme, himself, herself. 
 Eux-memes, elles-memes, themselves (masc. fern.). 
 
§ 491,492.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 205 
 
 491. The pronoun le is often employed to avoid the 
 repetition of a word or phrase, and is either rendered by 
 so, or may be omitted in translation. Le, thus used, is 
 either invariable or inflected. 
 
 a. Le is invariable when it refers to an adjective, verb, 
 or to an entire phrase ; as, 
 
 Etes-vous malade ? are you sick ? 
 
 Je le suis, I am. 
 
 Etes-vous mariee, madame ? are you married, mad- 
 am ? , 
 
 Je le suis, I am. 
 
 Croyez-vous qu'ils reviennent ? do you think they will 
 return? 
 
 Oui, je le crois, yes, I think so; J do. 
 
 b. But if le refers to a noun, or to an adjective used as 
 a noun, it is modified to suit the gender and number of 
 the substantive ; as, 
 
 £tes-vous la malade ? are you the patient ? 
 
 Je la suis, I am (she). 
 
 Etes-vous Madame de Sevigne ? are you Mme. de Se- 
 vigne ? 
 
 Je la suis, I am. 
 
 Etes-vous les maitresses de ces maisons ? are you the 
 mistresses of these houses? 
 
 Nous les sommes, we are. 
 
 492. If two verbs in the imperative mood, used affirm- 
 atively and united by means of the conjunction et, and, 
 have each a pronominal object, the objective of the sec- 
 ond imperative may be placed either before or after the 
 verb; as, 
 
 Battez-moi plutot, et me laissez rire tout raon soul, 
 beat me if you will, but let me have my laugh. 
 
 Ote-toi de mes yeux et me laisse en repos, withdraw 
 from my sight, and leave me at rest. 
 
 Presentez-leur mes respects et donnez-leur deux baisers 
 
206 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 493-497. 
 
 pour moi^ present my respects to them, and salute 
 them twice for me. 
 
 493. The disjunctive personal pronouns are employed 
 with reflective verbs, and with such verbs as require the 
 preposition d after them if the pronoun refers to per- 
 sons; as, 
 
 II revient a soi, he is coming to his senses. 
 Je me cede a vous, I yield myself to you. 
 Nous pensons h, eux, we think of them. 
 
 494. The disjunctives are likewise used with verbs 
 which require any other preposition after them ; as, 
 
 II se separe de vous, he withdraws from you. 
 Elle parle souvent de moi, she often speaks of me. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PE0N0UNS. 
 
 495. The absolute possessive pronouns are often em- 
 ployed in the sense of family, people, friends, constitu- 
 ents, and property ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai pu sauver le mien, I urns not able to save my 
 
 property. 
 Les notres etaient dans la bataille, our troops were in 
 
 the battle. 
 
 496. Instead of the absolute possessive pronouns, le 
 mien, le tien, le sien, etc., we may employ in French the 
 preposition d with a disjunctive personal pronoun ; as, 
 
 Ce livre est a moi, this book is mine. 
 
 A qui est cette maison ? whose house is this f 
 
 Elle est a eux, it is theirs. 
 
 Ce jar din est a mon frere, this garden is my brother's. 
 
 II est |l lui, it is his. 
 
 497. The definite article is often used in French in 
 place of the possessive pronoun when reference is made 
 to parts of the body and qualities of the mind ; as, 
 
 Je me chauffe les mains, I am warming my {the) 
 
 hands. 
 II se coupe les ongles, he is paring his nails. 
 
§498-500.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 207 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 
 
 498. The verb agrees with its subject or nominative 
 in number and person ; as, 
 
 Je parle francais, I speak French. 
 
 Vous parlez vite, you speak fast. 
 
 Les oiseaux chantent, the birds sing. 
 
 Les Romains se battaient, the Romans fought. 
 
 499. When a verb has two or more subjects in the sin- 
 gular, connected by the conjunction e£, it is put in the 
 plural; as, 
 
 Mon pere et ma mere viendront, my father and 
 
 mother will come. 
 a. The same rule applies when the two subjects are 
 connected by the conjunctions ni — ni, neither — nor / as, 
 Ni le pere ni la mere ne sont ici, neither the father nor 
 
 the mother is here. 
 
 500. When the verb has two or more subjects of dif- 
 ferent persons it is put in the plural, and is made to 
 agree with the frst person in preference to the second 
 or third ; as, 
 
 Vous et moi sommes heureux, you and I are happy. 
 Mon frere et moi sommes occupes, my brother and J 
 are busy. 
 
 a. If the subjects are of the second and third persons, 
 the verb is put in the second person plural ; as, 
 
 Toi et lui etes alles, thou and he have gone. 
 Mon pere et toi chantez bien, my father and thou sing 
 well. 
 
 b. In French the personal pronoun subject, combining 
 both persons, is usually employed in such cases ; thus, 
 
 Vous et moi, nous sommes heureux, you and I (we) 
 
 are happy. 
 Toi et lui, vous etes alles, thou and he (you) have gone. 
 
208 FRENCH GEAMMAB. [§ 501-505. 
 
 501. If a verb has two subjects in the singular, con- 
 nected by the disjunctive conjunction ou, the verb is put 
 in the singular ; as, 
 
 L'un ou l'autre l'aura, one or the other will have it. 
 L'homme ou la femme le lui donna, the man or the 
 
 woman gave it to him. 
 a. If the subjects thus united are of different persons, the verb 
 agrees according to Rules 500, 500, a. 
 
 502. If the verb has two or more subjects not connect- 
 ed by a conjunction expressed, the verb is put in the plu- 
 ral; as, 
 
 Le Rhone, la Loire sont des rivieres, the Rhone (and) 
 the Loire are rivers. 
 
 503. If the two or more subjects form one and the 
 same idea, or are synonymous, the verb is put in the sin- 
 gular; as, 
 
 Son courage, son intrepidite nous etonne, his courage 
 
 (and) intrepidity astonish us. 
 Sa douceur, sa bonte a ete celebree, his moderation 
 
 (and) his goodness have been noted. 
 
 504. When the subject of the verb is a general collect- 
 ive noun, the verb must be put in the singular number 
 (see 89, b) ; as, 
 
 L'armee fut detruite, the army was destroyed. 
 
 Le nombre d'exemplaires est grand, the number of 
 
 copies is large. 
 Le peuple est heureux, the people are happy. 
 Le peuple s'eleve, the people rise. 
 
 505. When the subject of the verb is a partitive col- 
 lective noun (89, c), the verb agrees with the substantive 
 which follows the collective ; as, 
 
 Une foule de gens se trouvaient chez lui, a crowd of 
 
 people icere found at his house. 
 Un grand nombre d'ennemis parurent, a great number 
 
 of enemies appeared. 
 

 § 506-510.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 209 
 
 506. When the subject of a verb is an adverb of quan- 
 tity (as peu, beaucoup, assez, infiniment, etc.), the verb 
 agrees with the noun which follows the adverb ; as, 
 
 Beaucoup d'hommes me l'ont dit, many men have 
 told me so. 
 
 Peu de gens negligent leurs interets, few people neg- 
 lect their interests. 
 
 Peu de monde le sait, few people know it. 
 
 507. Impersonal verbs agree with their imaginary or 
 grammatical subject il, it, and not with the substantive 
 following, which is the logical subject ; as, 
 
 II lui reste la plus noble partie de lui-meme, there re- 
 mains to him the noblest part of himself. 
 II est des personnes qui, etc., there are persons who, etc. 
 
 508. If the relative pronoun qui is the subject of a 
 verb, the latter must agree in person and number with 
 the person and number of the word to which the pro- 
 noun refers ; as, 
 
 C'est moi qui vous parle, it is I who speak to you. 
 Lui qui est riche, he who is rich. 
 Eux qui mangent, they who eat. 
 
 Notre pere qui es aux cieux, our Father who art in 
 heaven. 
 
 "USE of the moods and tenses. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLES. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 509. The infinitive mood indicates affirmation in an in- 
 definite manner, without reference to number or person. 
 
 510. The infinitive mood is employed in French after 
 all prepositions except en, in ; as, 
 
 Je joue, au lieu de travailler, I play instead ofioork- 
 my (i. e., of to work). 
 
210 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 511-515. 
 
 Avant de parler, before speaking (of to speak) ; 
 but En disant, in saying. 
 En allant, in going. 
 
 511. The infinitive is often used substantively with 
 the masculine article; as, 
 
 Ce n'est pas la mort que je crains, c'est le mourir, it is 
 not death that I fear, it is the dying {the to die). 
 
 Le taire est mieux seant a la femme, et le repondre a 
 l'homuie, silence (the to be silent) is more becom- 
 ing to woman, and replying (the to reply) to man. 
 
 a. The infinitive may be likewise employed substan- 
 tively without the article ; as, 
 
 Medire de son prochain c'est une action infame, to 
 speak evil of one's felloic-men is a base action. 
 
 512. The infinitive is frequently translated by the pres- 
 ent participle, when in French it depends on a preceding 
 verb; as, 
 
 Je l'entends pleurer, I hear him iceeping. ■ 
 Je le vis courir, I saw him running. 
 
 513. The infinitive is used in French after the verbs 
 aller, venir, courir, envoyer, and others, when in English 
 the conjunction and is required between the verbs; as, 
 
 Allez lui dire, go and tell him. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 514. The present participle always ends in ant, and is 
 invariable ; as, 
 
 lis couraient ca et la, tordant leurs bras, et s'arrachant 
 les cheveux, they ran to and fro, icringing their 
 hands and tearing their hair. 
 
 515. The preposition en is often employed in French 
 before a present participle, and is either omitted in trans- 
 lating, or is expressed by " while," " by," " on ;" as, 
 
 En entrant dans le village j'appris que, etc., on Alter- 
 ing the village, I was informed that — . 
 

 § 516-520.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 211 
 
 Je lui parlai en tremblant, I spoke to him trembling. 
 
 Je vous rendrai plus heureux, en vous remettant en- 
 semble, I shall render you (two) happier by put- 
 ting you together. 
 
 516. The present participle may be employed as an 
 adjective, in which case it takes the usual inflections of 
 a qualifying word ; thus, 
 
 Une personne obligeante, an obliging person. 
 
 Elle avait le coeur compatissant, she had a tender heart. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 517. The past participle, used without an auxiliary, 
 agrees, like an adjective, in gender and number, with 
 the noun which it qualifies ; as, 
 
 Un fait accompli, a deed accomplished. 
 
 Des faits accomplis, deeds accomplished. 
 
 "One maison achevee, a finished house. 
 
 Des enfants cheris, beloved (cherished) children. 
 
 518. The past participle agrees in gender and number 
 with the subject of the verb when it is conjugated with 
 the auxiliary etre ; as, 
 
 Mes secrets vous sont reveles, my secrets are disclosed 
 
 to you. 
 Mes amis sont partis, my friends have set out. 
 Cette lettre est bien ecrite, this letter is icett written. 
 Les fenetres sont ouvertes, the windows are opened. 
 
 519. The past participle is invariable, that is, does not 
 agree with its subject, when it is conjugated with the 
 auxiliary avoir j as, 
 
 Mes amis ont parle, my friends have spoken. 
 Elle a dormi, 'shg has slept. 
 
 Avez-vous vu ma mere ? have you seen my mother? 
 On a donne une rose a ce monsieur, they have given a 
 rose to this gentleman. 
 
 520. But if the past participle, conjugated with avoir, 
 
212 FEENCH GEAMHAE. [§ 521. 
 
 is preceded by a direct object or by a relative pronoun in 
 the objective case, the participle agrees in gender and 
 number with the direct object or the antecedent of the 
 relative pronoun ; as, 
 
 Avez-vous vu ma mere ? have you seen my mother t 
 
 Je l'ai (la ai) vue, I have seen her. 
 
 II nous a loues, he has praised us. 
 
 Les filles que j'ai vues, the girls whom I have seen. 
 
 Quelles choses avez-vous faites ? what things have you 
 made f 
 
 La maison que nous avons vendue, the house which ice 
 have sold. 
 
 a. Observe that if the direct object is placed after the 
 past participle, the latter remains invariable (according 
 to Rule 519) ; as, 
 
 Yous avez vendu la maison, you have sold the house. 
 
 Elle a vu les filles, she has seen the girls. 
 
 J'ai loue ces garcons, I have praised these boys. 
 
 b. When the particle en, some, precedes the participle 
 as a direct object, the participle does not suffer any 
 change of termination ; as, 
 
 Avez-vous des plumes? have you any pens? 
 J'en ai eu, I have had some. 
 
 A-t-il mange de la viande ? has he eaten any meat? 
 II en a mange, he has eaten some. 
 
 c. The direct object, in French, stands before the verb 
 in three cases only ; 
 
 1st. As a personal pronoun : me, te, la, se, nous, vous, 
 les. 
 
 2d. As a relative pronoun : que, lequel, laquelle, les- 
 quels, lesquelles. 
 
 3d. As a substantive, only in connection with an 
 interrogative pronoun, or with an exclamation : quel, 
 quelle, lequel, etc., combien, que. 
 
 521. The past participle belonging to a reflective or 
 
§ 522.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 213 
 
 reciprocal verb agrees in gender and number with its 
 pronominal object, when that object is direct / as, 
 Elle s'est appliquee a la langue francaise, she has ap- 
 plied herself to the French language. 
 lis se sont noyes, they have drowned themselves. 
 La garnison s'est rendue a discretion, the garrison has 
 surrendered at discretion. 
 
 a. If, on the contrary, the pronominal object be in- 
 direct, the past participle remains invariable ; as, 
 
 lis se sont achete de belles choses, they have pun -chased 
 
 {for themselves) soma fine articles. 
 Elle s'est donne la mort, she has put herself to death. 
 Vous vous etes propose, you have proposed {to your- 
 
 self). 
 
 b. The past participle of a reflective verb varies, how- 
 ever, even though its pronominal object be indirect, 
 when the participle is preceded by a direct object to 
 which it refers ; as, 
 
 Les belles choses qu'ils se sont achetees, the fine arti- 
 cles which they have purchased. 
 Les desseins que vous vous etes proposes, the plans 
 
 ichich you have proposed. 
 522. If the past participle is followed by an infinitive 
 mood, the participle agrees in gender and number with 
 the preceding direct object, if that object depends on the 
 participle; as, 
 
 Je l'ai entendue chanter, I have heard her singing. 
 Les dames que j'ai vues passer, the ladies whom I saw 
 passing. 
 
 Remark. In snch case, viz., when the participle agrees in gender 
 and number with the direct object, translate the infinitive by 
 the present participle in English. 
 
 a. But if the preceding direct object depends on the 
 infinitive mood and not on the past participle, the latter 
 does not change its termination ; as, 
 
214 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 523-525. 
 
 Je l'ai vu peindre, I have seen her painted. 
 
 Avez-vous entendu chanter cette chanson ? have you 
 
 heard this song sung f 
 
 Remark. In this case, viz., when the past participle does not 
 -agree, translate the infinitive by the past participle in English. 
 
 b. The above rule also applies to the past participle 
 
 when the infinitive is not expressed, but understood. 
 
 This occurs chiefly with the participles voulu andjow/ as, 
 
 J'ai fait tous les efforts que j'ai pu (f aire), J have put 
 
 forth all the exertions which I have been able (to 
 
 put forth). 
 
 523. The past participles fait, in the sense of caused, 
 and laisse, permitted, when followed by the infinitive of 
 an active verb, are always invariable ; as, 
 
 Je les ai laisse renvoyer, J have permitted them to be 
 
 sent back. 
 La maison que j'ai fait batir, the house which I have 
 
 had built. 
 
 524. With impersonal verbs, and with those neuter 
 verbs which take the auxiliary avoir, the past participle 
 never varies ; as, 
 
 Les chaleurs qu'il a fait, the warm weather we have 
 
 had. 
 Le peu de jours qu'elle a vecu, the few days that she 
 
 lived. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 525. The present tense indicates that something exists 
 or is going on at the time we are speaking ; as, 
 
 Mon frere parle, my brother speaks. 
 
 Ces filles s'aiment, these girls love each other. 
 
 Remark. In English, the present tense has, besides the simple 
 form, an emphatic form ; as, I do speak ; and a progressive 
 form; as, I am speaking : the French language, however, has 
 but one mode of expressing present time. Je parle, then, must 
 
§ SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 215 
 
 • rendered I speak, I am speaking, or I do speak, according to 
 the requirements of the phrase. 
 
 The present tense is sometimes employed for the 
 speaking of something quite proximate or 
 near at hand ; as, 
 
 Je suis de retour dans un moment, I shall be back in 
 a moment. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 527. The imperfect tense marks a past action as pres- 
 ent with regard to something else past. •This tense 
 should be employed whenever the verb " to be," with a 
 present participle, may be used in English ; as, 
 
 Pendant que je lui parlais, un coup de tonnerre se fit 
 entendre, while I was speaking to him, a clap of 
 thunder was heard. 
 
 J'ecrivais, lorsqu'il arriva, I was writing when he came. 
 
 528. The imperfect tense is also made use of when 
 speaking of customary actions in the past, and corre- 
 sponds to the English expressions " used to," " was wont 
 to;" as, 
 
 Lorsque j'etais a Paris, j'allais au theatre trois fois par 
 semaine, when I was at Paris, I icent to the thea- 
 ter three times a iceek. 
 
 Quand j'etais jeune, je parlais francais, when I was 
 young, I spoke French. 
 
 tap The verbs in these examples may be rendered "used to be," 
 "used to go," "used to speak." 
 
 PAST DEFINITE. 
 
 529. The past definite tense points to something oc- 
 curring at a definite period in the past entirely com- 
 pleted ; as, 
 
 Je perdis mon neveu l'annee derniere, Host my neph- 
 ew last year. 
 
216 FRENCH GEAMMAK. [§ 530, 531. 
 
 II s'approcha de moi, he drew near to one. 
 
 George II avait soixante-dix-sept ans quandilmourut, 
 
 George the Second was seventy-seven years old 
 
 when he died. 
 
 Remark. The English language, it is seen, has but one tense to 
 express the French imperfect and past definite tenses. That the 
 student may clearly distinguish these two tenses, it will be 
 sufficient for him to reflect upon their comparative duration 
 of time : the imperfect is employed when a past action or state 
 expressed by the verb is . considered as present relatively to 
 some other past action; the past definite is to be used when 
 the action or state occurs at some period in the past specific- 
 ally pointed out, which took place at that time and no other ; 
 as, ilnne demandait du pain aussi souvent que je le rencon- 
 trais, he teas asking me for bread as often as I met him; il me 
 demanda du pain, he asked me for bread, i. e., on one occasion 
 in the past. 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE. 
 
 530. The past indefinite tense indicates that a thing 
 has been done at a past time, which is not designated, 
 corresponding to the English perfect ; as, 
 
 J'ai jure de garder ce secret, I have sworn to keep this 
 
 secret. 
 Mon ami est parti, my friend has gone. 
 
 531. The past indefinite also indicates that a thing has 
 been done at a specified time in the past, some part 
 of which has not yet elapsed ; as, 
 
 J'ai vu votre frere aujourd'hui, I saw your brother to- 
 day. 
 
 Mon oncle est arrive ce matin, my uncle arrived this 
 
 morning. 
 
 Remark. In this case, the idioms of the two languages differ, for 
 the sentences would be literally, I have seen, etc., my uncle has 
 arrived, etc. „ . 
 
 ISi 53 In such sentences as the following, the past indefinite is em- 
 ployed in French : 
 
 II y a eu une grande bataille depuis que je ne vous ai vu, there 
 
 has been a great battle since I saw you. 
 J'ai ete tres malade depuis que je suis arrive, I have been very sick 
 since I arrived. 
 
I 
 
 § 532-534.] syntax of the verb. • 217 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 532. The pluperfect tense indicates that an event is 
 not only past in itself, but as past with respect to an- 
 other event likewise past : as, 
 
 J'avais deja dine quand il arriva, I had already dined 
 
 when he arrived. 
 Lorsqu'il avait fini il sortit, when he had finished he 
 
 went out. 
 
 PAST ANTERIOR. 
 
 533. The past anterior marks a past event as having 
 taken place immediately prior to another event likewise 
 past; as, 
 
 Des que j'eus dejeune je partis, as soon as I had break- 
 fasted I set out. 
 A peine eus-je recu sa lettre que je me disposai a y 
 repondre, scarcely had I received his letter when 
 * I sat down to reply to it* 
 
 Remark.' To distinguish practically between the pluperfect and 
 the past anterior tenses, it will be sufficient to note that the 
 former may 'be accompanied or not by a conjunction or an 
 adverb of time, but the latter (the past anterior) is generally 
 accompanied by one or the other ; thus we may say lorsqu'il 
 avait or lorsqu'il eut, but we can not say il eutfini, but rather 
 il avait fini. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 534. The future tense marks what will be or will oc- 
 cur at some future time (mentioned or not) ; as, 
 
 Je partirai demain, I shall set out to-morrow. 
 II deviendra soldat, he will become a soldier. 
 a. After an adverb of time the French employ the fu- 
 ture tense, where in English the present would be used ; 
 as, 
 
 Quand vous partirez vous m'en avertirez, when you 
 set out you will let me know. 
 K 
 
218 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 535-537. 
 
 b. The future is sometimes employed in the sense of 
 an imperative ; as, 
 
 Tu aimeras Dieu de tout ton cceur, thou slialt love 
 
 God with all thy heart. 
 Vous ne mentirez point, do not speak an untruth. 
 Vous lui direz que je n'ai pu venir, tell him {you will 
 
 tell him) that I could not come. 
 
 c. If the principal sentence contains a future tense, the 
 subordinate sentence requires the future also, provided 
 the action expressed by it is not yet present ; as, 
 
 Nous partirons aussitot qu'il se levera un pen de vent, 
 we shall start as soon as a breeze arises. 
 
 Vous direz tout ce que vous voudrez, you shall say all 
 you please. 
 
 Nous viendrons quand vous le desirerez, we shall come 
 when you desire it. 
 
 d. After the conjunction si, if, when, the future is 
 never used in French ; as, 
 
 Servient, je lui dirai, if he comes % Iwill tell him. 
 
 FUTITEE PEEFECT. 
 
 535. The future perfect tense indicates that something 
 will occur when something else in the future shall have 
 been accomplished ; as, 
 
 Quand j'aurai fini, j'irai le voir, when I shall have fin- 
 ished, Iioill go and see him. 
 Rule 534, a, applies equally to this tense also. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 536. The conditional present indicates what would 
 take place under a certain condition ; as, 
 
 Sij'avais de l'argent je vous en donnerais, if I had 
 any money I would give you some. 
 
 537. The conditional past indicates what would have 
 taken place at some time in the past if the condition on 
 which it depended had been fulfilled ; as, 
 
§ 538-541.] SYNTAX OF THE VEKB. 219 
 
 II aurait fini son exercice si vous ne l'aviez pas gene, 
 he loould have finished his exercise if you had 
 not annoyed him. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 538. The imperative mood expresses command, invita- 
 tion, or entreaty ; as, 
 
 Donnez-le-moi, give it to me. 
 Venez chez moi, come to my house. 
 
 539. The conjunctive personal pronouns in the object- 
 ive case are placed after a verb in the imperative mood 
 when the latter is affirmative ; as, 
 
 Donnez-moi, give me. 
 
 Parlez-lui, speak to him. 
 
 Chante-le pour lui, sing it for him. 
 a. But if the verb be used with a negation, the ob- 
 jective pronouns must be placed before the verb ; as, 
 Ne me donnez pas cela, do not give me that. 
 Ne lui parlez pas, do not speak to him. 
 Ne le chante pas pour lui, do not sing it for him. 
 
 USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 540. The indicative mood expresses what is positive, 
 sure; the subjunctive, on the other hand, indicates doubt, 
 indecision. Hence the following rules : 
 
 541. The subjunctive mood is employed m the de- 
 pendent clause when the principal proposition contains 
 a verb expressing a wish, desire, doubt, fear, apprehen- 
 sion, wonder, regret, consent, or command ; as, 
 
 II veut \ que vous lui ( he wishes ) . 
 
 T1 . I , . \ , f you to give him 
 
 II exige > donniez son -l he requires > ° . 
 
 II desire ) argent, ( he desires ) ''.'"' 
 
 Je doute que cela soit vrai, I doubt whether that is so. 
 
 Je crains ) qu'il ne vi- ( I fear \that he will 
 
 J'apprehende \ enne, ( I apprehend \ come. 
 
220 FKEXCH GEAM3IAE. [§ 542, 543. 
 
 Je ni'etonne qu'il De soit pas arrive, I wonder that he 
 
 has not arrived. 
 
 Remark. After verbs expressing fear or apprehension, the par- 
 tial negative ne must be employed. See further 591. 
 
 542. The subjunctive is used after a verb employed 
 interrogatively or negatively; as, 
 
 Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne, I do not believe that he 
 will come. 
 
 Croyez-vons qu'il fasse son devoir? do you believe that 
 he will do his duty ? 
 
 a. When, however, the interrogation or the negation 
 does not imply uncertainty, the indicative must be used ; 
 as, 
 
 Savez-vous que mon frere est arrive? do you Jcnow 
 that my brother has arrived f 
 
 Madame, oubliez-vous que Thesee est mon pere, et qu'il 
 est votre epoux ? madam, do you forget that The- 
 seus is my father ', and that he is your husband? 
 
 543. The subjunctive is used after unipersonal verbs, 
 or verbs which are occasionally employed uniperson- 
 ally; as, 
 
 II semble qu'il vienne, it seems that he is coming. 
 II faut qu'il parte, he must set out. 
 II convient qu'il le fasse, it is p>roper for him to do it. 
 II est juste que je m'en aille, it is right that I go away. 
 
 a. When the unipersonal verb il semble, it seems, is 
 accompanied by an indirect object, it requires the indic- 
 ative mood ; as, 
 
 II me semble qu'il a raison, it seems to me that he is 
 right. 
 
 b. The unipersonal expressions il y a, there is, there are; 
 il parait, it appears ; il resulte, it follows ; il est certain, 
 stir, ou vrai, it is certain, sure, or true, and all similar uni- 
 personal phrases which indicate something positive, real, 
 are followed by the indicative mood ; as, 
 
§ 544-547.] syntax of the yeeb. 221 
 
 II parait qu'il dit la verite, it appears that he speaks 
 
 the truth. 
 II est vrai qu'il a raison, it is true that he is right. 
 
 544. The subjunctive mood is employed in the sub- 
 ordinate sentence when this is joined to the principal 
 proposition by one of the relative pronouns, qui, que, 
 dont, ou, lequel, etc., provided something is to be repre- 
 sented which is not real, but merely supposed ; as, 
 
 J'irai dans une retraite oil je sois tranquille, I will re- ' 
 tire to an asylum in tuhich J may be quiet. 
 ■ Nous cherchons un domestique sur la fidelite duquel 
 nous puissions compter, we are looking for a serv- 
 ant on lohose faithfulness we can rely. 
 
 Remark. If a real fact is to be represented in the dependent 
 sentence, the indicative is employed. 
 
 545. The subjunctive is also employed after a super- 
 lative, i. e., after le plus, le moins, le mieux, etc. ; as, 
 
 C'est le plus savant horame que je connaisse, that is 
 the most learned man ichom I know. 
 
 C'est le moins que vous puissiez faire, that is the least 
 you can do. 
 
 546. The subjunctive is used after adjectives, nouns, 
 or adverbs which have a negative sense, and after the 
 words seul, unique, plemier, dernier, personne, rien, au- 
 cun, and nul ; as, 
 
 II n'y a personne qui le sache mieux que vous, there 
 is no one who knows it better than you. 
 
 Vous etes le seul ami a qui je me puisse fier, you are 
 the only friend on whom I can rely. 
 
 547. After quelque — que, however ; quel — que, what- 
 ever ; quoi que, whatever, and quoique, although, the sub- 
 junctive must be employed; as, 
 
 Quelque riche que vous soyez, however rich you may 
 
 be. 
 Quels que soient vos talents, whatever be your talents. 
 
222 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 548-550. 
 
 Quoi que vous disiez, whatever you may say. 
 Quoique vous soyez mon ami, although you may he 
 my friend. 
 
 548. The subjunctive is employed after certain con- 
 junctions; as, 
 
 Au cas qu'il niourut, in case he should die. 
 Pourvu qu'il y consen te, ywovided he consents to it. 
 
 Remark. The subjoined list includes all those conjunctions which 
 require the subjunctive after them : 
 
 Afin que, in order that. Non que, not that. 
 
 A moins que, unless (with ne). Non obstant que, notwithstanding 
 Avant que, before, ere. that. 
 
 En cas que, in case that. Malgre que, although. 
 
 En attendant que, until. Pour peu que, however little. 
 
 Au cas que, in case that. Pour que, in order that, that. 
 
 Bien que, although. Pourvu que, provided that. 
 
 Quoique, although. Sans que, without (that). 
 
 De peur que "> for fear that Si peu que, however little. 
 
 De crainte que) (with ne). Soit que — ou que, whether — or. 
 
 Encore que, although. Suppose que, suppose that. 
 Jusqu'a ce que, until, till. 
 
 549. The conjunction que demands the subjunctive 
 when it stands to avoid the repetition of one of the 
 above conjunctions or of the conjunction si; as, 
 
 Si tu sors et que tu fasses ce que je te dis, etc., if you 
 go out and {if) you do ichat J told you, etc. 
 
 OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 550. The object of an active verb may be either direct 
 or indirect. An object or regimen is said to be direct 
 when it is governed directly by the verb, that is, with- 
 out the aid of a preposition ; and indirect when a prep- 
 osition expressed or implied stands between it and the 
 verb; as, 
 
 Je vois les hommes, I see the men. 
 
 Je parle a l'homme, I speak to the man. 
 
 Je vous vois, I see you. 
 
 Je vous donne, I give (to) you. 
 
§ 551, 552.] SYNTAX OF THE YEEB. 
 
 223 
 
 In the first and third examples, les homines and vous are in the di- 
 rect regimen ; in the second and fourth, a I'homme and vous are in 
 the indirect regimen. 
 
 551. An active verb may have both regimens, a direct 
 and an indirect, at the same time ; as, 
 
 Je donne un joujou a l'enfant, I give a toy to the 
 
 child {I give (to) the child a tog). 
 Je vous le donne, I give it to you. 
 
 552. In French many verbs require the preposition cle 
 after them when they are followed by another verb in 
 the infinitive. This is one of the chief difficulties of the 
 language, and a full list of such verbs is given below for 
 reference. For meanings, see Vocabulary. 
 
 s'Abstenir de. 
 Accuser de. 
 Affecter de. 
 Affliger de. 
 Applaudir de. 
 Apprehender de. 
 Avertir de. 
 s'Aviser de. 
 Blamer de. 
 Cesser de. 
 Chagriner de. 
 Charger de. 
 Choisir de. 
 Commander de. 
 Conjurer de. 
 Conseiller de. 
 Convaincre de. 
 Convenir de. 
 Craindre de. 
 Decourager de. 
 Dedaigner de. 
 Defendre de. 
 De'fier de. 
 se Depecher de. 
 Desesperer de. 
 se De'shabituer de. 
 Desoler de. 
 Detourner de. 
 Differer de. 
 Dire de. 
 
 Discontinuer de. 
 Disconvenir de. 
 
 Disculper de. 
 Dispenser de. 
 Dissuader de. 
 s'Efforcer de. 
 Efirayer de. 
 Empecher de. 
 s'Empresser de. 
 Enrager de. 
 Entreprendre de. 
 fipouvanter de. 
 Fjtonner de. 
 s'£tonner de. 
 Eviter de. 
 Excuser de. 
 Feindre de. 
 se Elatter de. 
 Fre'mir de. 
 se Garder de. 
 Gemir de. 
 se Hater de. 
 Imputer de. 
 s'Ingerer de. 
 Inspirer de. 
 Jurer de. 
 Med iter de. 
 se Meier de. 
 Menacer de. 
 Meriter de. 
 se Moquer de. 
 Negliger de. ' 
 Offrir de. 
 Omettre de. 
 
 Ordonner de. 
 Oublier de. 
 Pardonner de. 
 Parler de. 
 Permettre de. 
 Persuader de. 
 se Piquer de. 
 Plaindre de. 
 se Plaindre de. 
 Prescrire de. 
 Presser de. 
 Presumer de. 
 Prier de. 
 Promettre de. 
 Proposer de. 
 Punir de. 
 Recommander de. 
 Refuser de. 
 Regretter de. 
 se Rejouir de. 
 Remercier de. 
 se Repentir de. 
 Reprendre de. 
 Reprimander de. 
 ReprOcher de. 
 se Ressouvenir de. 
 Rire de. 
 Rougir de. 
 Scandaliser de. 
 Sommer de. 
 Soupconner de. 
 se Souvenir de. 
 
224 
 
 FEEXCH GKAMISIAK. 
 
 [§ 553,554. 
 
 Suffire de. Tacber de. se Vantev de. 
 
 Suggerer de. Tenter de. Venir de. 
 
 Supplier de. 
 
 553. Certain verbs require the preposition d after 
 them when followed by another verb in the infinitive 
 mood. Such verbs are (see Vocabulary for mean- 
 ings) : 
 
 s'Abaisser a. 
 Aboutir a. 
 s'Accorder a. 
 Accoutumer a. 
 sAccoutunier a. 
 sAcharner a. 
 Admettre a. 
 s'Adonner a. 
 sAguerrir a. 
 Aider a. 
 Aimer a. 
 Amener a. 
 s'Amuser a. 
 Anirner a. 
 s'Appauvrir a. 
 Appeler a. 
 sAppliquer a. 
 Apprendre a. 
 s'Arreter a. 
 Arriver a. 
 Aspirer a. 
 Assigner a. 
 Assujettir a. 
 sAttacher a^ 
 s'Attendre a. 
 Autoriser a. 
 Avoir a. 
 Border a. 
 Cbercher a. 
 Citer a. 
 Cornmencer a. 
 Conmiettre a. 
 
 Coraplaire a. 
 Condaraner a. 
 Condescendre a. 
 Conduire a. 
 Consentir a. 
 Consister a. 
 Contribner a. 
 Demander a. 
 De'penser a. 
 Desapprendre a. 
 Destiner a. 
 Determiner a. 
 se De'ter miner a. 
 Disposer a. 
 Divertir a. 
 Donner a. 
 Dresser a. 
 Encourager a. 
 Engager a. 
 s'Engager a. 
 s'Enbardir a. 
 s'Enrichir a. 
 Enseigner a. 
 s'Enteter a. 
 Entrainer a. 
 Etre a. 
 s'Etudier a. 
 Examiner a. 
 Exciter a. 
 Exercer a. 
 Exhorter a. 
 s'Habituer a. 
 
 Hesiter a. 
 Incliner a. 
 s'Obstiner a. 
 OccupSr a. 
 s'Opiniatrer a. 
 Parvenir a. 
 Perdre a. 
 Persister a 
 Porter a. 
 Pousser a. 
 Preparer a. 
 Ranimer a. 
 Reduire a. 
 Renoncer a. 
 Repenser a. 
 Resigner a. 
 se Resoudre a. 
 Rester a. 
 Restreindre a. 
 Reussir a. 
 se Ruiner a. 
 Sacrifier a. 
 Serrir a. 
 Songer a. 
 Soumettre a. 
 Tarder a. 
 Tendre a. 
 Travailler a. 
 Trouver a. 
 Veiller a. 
 Viser a. 
 
 554. The following verbs do not require any preposi- 
 tion after them when an infinitive follows: 
 
 Aimer mieux. 
 
 Confesser. 
 
 Devoir. 
 
 Affirmer. 
 
 Croire. 
 
 Ecouter. 
 
 Alter. 
 
 Daigner. 
 
 Entendre 
 
 Avouer. 
 
 De'clarer. 
 
 Envoy er. 
 
 Compter. 
 
 Desirer. 
 
 Esperer. 
 
§ 555-558.] syntax of the veeb. 
 
 225 
 
 Faire. 
 
 Paraitre. 
 
 Sembler. 
 
 Falloir. 
 
 Penser. 
 
 Souhaiter. 
 
 s'Imaginer. 
 
 Pouvoir. 
 
 Valoir mieux. 
 
 Laisser. 
 
 Pretendre. 
 
 Venir. 
 
 Nier. 
 
 Regarder. 
 
 Voir. 
 
 Oser. 
 
 Savoir. 
 
 Vouloir. 
 
 555. When the preposition "to" before an infinitive 
 means " in order to" it must be expressed in French by 
 pour ; as, 
 
 II l'a fait pour faire rire, he did it to produce a laugh. 
 J'y suis pour les arreter, I am (put) here to arrest 
 them. 
 
 556. The preposition " to" before an infinitive is ren- 
 dered in French by de when the infinitive depends on a 
 verb used unipersonally, or on il est followed by an ad- 
 jective ; as, 
 
 II me tarde de voir ma mere, I long to see my mother. 
 II est difficile de faire cela, it is difficult to do that. 
 
 557. After verbs which signify to begin, to end, the 
 preposition par is employed in French, followed by an 
 infinitive; as, 
 
 II eommenca par dire, he began by saying. 
 
 II finit par me louer, he finished by lauding me. 
 
 DEF 3 The student should not forget that the infinitive is always em- 
 ployed in French after a preposition, and not the present participle as 
 in English. " En" makes the sole exception (510) ; as, 
 
 Je l'ai cherche sans le trouver, I have sought him without finding him. 
 
 II faut reflechir avant de parler, we must reflect before speaking. 
 
 558. In the phrase " to know how" the word how is 
 not translated in French before a verb in the infinitive 
 mood; as, 
 
 Savez-vous parler frangais ? do you know how to speak 
 
 French? 
 Je sais travailler, I know how to work. 
 Tu sais lire, ecrire, et compter, thou knowest how to 
 
 read, write, and count. 
 E2 
 
226 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 559, 560. 
 
 559. One verb may sometimes govern another in the 
 infinitive mood in French, when in English both verbs 
 have the same subject connected by the conjunction 
 "thatf as, 
 
 II espere vous trouver, he hopes that he will find you. 
 
 Je crois vous voir demain, I think that I shall see you 
 on the morrow. 
 
 a. But if similar expressions have different subjects, 
 the conjunction que with the subjunctive is required in 
 French; as, 
 
 Voulez-vous que je vous dise? do you wish me to tell you? 
 Permettez qu'il soxte, permit him to withdraw. 
 
 OF THE INDIRECT REGIMEN. 
 
 560. Some verbs require the preposition de before the 
 object which they govern in French. They are chiefly 
 the following : 
 
 Abuser, to misuse. Profiter, to profit. 
 
 Jouir, to enjoy. Convenir, to agree. 
 
 Avoir besoin, to want. se Passer, to do loithout. 
 
 Faire present, to give. se Charger, to undertake. 
 
 s' Apercevoir, to perceive. se Moquer, to laugh at. 
 
 s'Affliger, to grieve at. se Repentir, to repent. 
 
 s'Approcher, to draw near, se Facher, to get angry. 
 
 se Douter, to doubt. se Rejouir, to rejoice at. 
 
 Examples. 
 II jouissait d'une parfaite sante, he enjoyed perfect 
 
 health. 
 II abuse de son temps, he misspends his time. 
 J'ai besoin de quelque chose, I want something. 
 Je me doute de son dessein, I doubt his object. 
 II se chargera de cette affaire, he will undertake this 
 
 affair. 
 Je ne saurais m'en passer, I can not do without it. 
 
§ 561-564.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 227 
 
 Remark. Since the above verbs govern their object 
 by means of the preposition de, the pronoun it must be 
 rendered by en (J.79), and placed before the verb ; as, 
 
 J'en doute, X doubt it {of it). 
 
 II s'en chargera, he will undertake it. 
 
 II en abuse, he misspends it. 
 
 II en jouit, he enjoys it. 
 
 561. A few verbs govern their object by means of the 
 preposition a (to) expressed or implied ; such are, 
 
 Demander, to ask. Survivre, to outlive. 
 
 Kepondre, to answer. s'Attendre, to expect. 
 
 II demanda a son pere, he asked his father. 
 Attendez-vous a cela, you continue to expect that. 
 J'ai deja repondu a sa lettre, I have already answered 
 
 his letter. 
 II a survecu a ses amis, he has outlived his friends. 
 
 562. Verbs which signify to remove, to take aicay, re- 
 quire the preposition d before the remote object ; as, 
 
 J'ai ote cette epee a mon frere, J have taken this sword 
 
 from my brother. 
 Otez-lui ce couteau, take this knife from him. 
 
 563. One verb can not have two direct objects in 
 French, one of the person and another of the thing; the 
 one designating the person must be put in the second 
 objective case, with d expressed or implied ; as, 
 
 Nous leur apprendrons a obeir, we will teach them to 
 
 obey. 
 Cela lui fit oublier son malheur, that made him forget 
 
 his misfortune. 
 J'ai entendu dire cela a mon frere, I have heard my 
 
 brother say that. 
 
 VERBS EMPLOYED IDIOMATICALLY. 
 
 564. The following idioms with verbs will be found 
 valuable to the student in explaining the peculiar man- 
 
228 FKENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 565-569. 
 
 ner in which certain phrases may be translated into En- 
 glish which can not be comprised under rules. 
 
 565. Se servir de, literally " to avail one's self of," is 
 generally translated " to use ;" as, 
 
 Je me sers d'une plume, I use a pen. 
 
 De quoi vous servez-vous ? what do you use f 
 
 566. Servir d, " to be good for ;" as, 
 
 Cela ne sert a rien, that is good for nothing. 
 A quoi bon sert-il? what is it good for f 
 
 567. Venir de, literally "to come from," is used to 
 signify " to have just." It is always followed by a verb 
 in the infinitive, which must be rendered in English by 
 the past participle ; as, 
 
 II vient d'arriver, he has just arrived. 
 Je viens de finir mon travail, I have just finished my 
 work. 
 
 568. Avoir a corresponds to the English "to have 
 to," " to must ;" as, 
 
 J'ai quelque chose a faire, I have something to do. 
 J'ai une lettre a ecrire, I have a letter to write. 
 
 569. The verb faire, " to make," " to do," is used in a 
 variety of idiomatic expressions. 
 
 a. II fait signifies "it is" when speaking of the 
 weather; as, 
 
 II fait chaud, froid, it is warm, cold. 
 
 Quel temps fait-il ? what hind of iveather is it f 
 
 II fait beau temps, it is fine iceather. 
 
 II fait jour, grand jour, it is day, broad day. 
 
 b. Before an infinitive faire signifies " to render," " to 
 cause," "to have." In the latter sense the infinitive 
 must be translated by the past participle in English ; as, 
 
 Cela l'a fait sage, that has rendered him wise. 
 
 II a fait batir une maison, he has caused a house to be 
 
 built. 
 Je fais faire un habit, I am having a coat made. 
 
§ 570-572.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 229 
 
 II fait raccommoder ses bottes, he is having his boots 
 mended. 
 
 c. Faire is used to signify " to feign," " to sham ;" as, 
 II fait le raalade, he is feigning sickness. 
 
 II fait l'homme d'importance, he is setting himself up 
 for a gentleman. 
 
 d. Faire voir, literally " to make to see," is used for 
 " to show ;" as, 
 
 Faites-me le voir, shoio it to me. 
 
 Je vous ferai voir mon chapeau, I will show you my 
 
 hat. 
 II fit voir sa blessure au chirurgien, he showed his 
 
 wound to the surgeon. 
 
 570. Vouloir dire, literally "to wish to say," is used 
 in the sense of to signify, to mean; as, 
 
 Que voulez-vous dire ? what do you mean ? 
 Que veut dire cela ? what does that mean ? 
 Cela veut dire que — , that means that — . 
 
 571. Fn voidoir d, "to have a grudge against," "to 
 have a design upon ;" as, 
 
 II nous en veut, he has a grudge against us. 
 
 A qui en voulez-vous? whom have you a grudge 
 against ? 
 
 II en veut a nos biens, he has a design upon our prop- 
 erty. 
 
 572. Je ne saurais, literally " I should not know how," 
 is often.employed in place of je ne puis, " I can not ;" as, 
 
 Je ne saurais faire ce que vous me dites, I can ?iot do 
 
 what you tell me. 
 Vous etes si plaisant que je ne saurais me tenir de 
 rire, you look so droll that I can not help laugh- 
 ing. 
 The same with the other persons of this verb. (See 
 340, a.) The complement of "ne" — (2x1s) — is never 
 found with this idiom. 
 
230 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 573-578. 
 
 573. Avoir beau, literally "to have fine," is employed 
 idiomatically to signify " to be in vain ;" as, 
 
 Vous avez beau le dire on ne vous croit pas, it is in 
 vain for you to say so, people will not believe you. 
 lis ont beau le faire, it is in vain for them to do it. 
 
 574. Avoir is to be rendered by " to be" in many ex- 
 pressions, such as, avoir chaud, froid, faim, soif, tort, rai- 
 son, peur, envie, dessein, etc., to be warm, cold, hungry, 
 thirsty, wrong, right, afraid, of a mind, etc. ; as, 
 
 II a chaud, froid, sommeil, he is warm, cold, sleepy. 
 Avez-vous raison ou tort ? are you right or wrong f 
 J'ai envie de le faire, I am of a mind to do it. 
 
 575. JOemporter sur, "to carry it over," signifies "to 
 overcome," "to get the advantage over;" as, 
 
 Virgile et Horace l'emportent sur tous les poetes la- 
 tins, Virgil and Horace surpass cdl the Roman 
 poets. 
 
 L'amour l'emporte quelquefois sur la raison, love some- 
 times gets the better of reason. 
 
 II l'emporta sur tous ses rivaux, he got the advantage 
 over all his rivals. 
 
 576. ^entendre a or en, "to be a judge of," "to be 
 skillful in ;" as, 
 
 II s'entend en musique, he is a judge of music. 
 II s'entend aux affaires, he is skillful in business. 
 
 577. Manquer, "to fail," "to want," takes the prep- 
 osition a, expressed or implied, before its object ; as, 
 
 L'argent lui manque, money fails (to) him. 
 II ne lui man qua rien, he toanted nothing (there failed 
 to him nothing). 
 
 578. Se p>asser de, "to do without," "to dispense 
 with;" as, 
 
 Je ne saurais me passer de ce livre, Jean not do with- 
 out this book. 
 II ne pent s'en passer, he can not dispense with it. 
 
§ 579-583.] syntax of the adverb. 231 
 
 Je m'en passe, I do without it. 
 
 579. JS' } e?i prendre d, "to blame," "to lay blame on;" 
 as, 
 
 Je m'en prendrai a vous de tout ce qui pourra arriver, 
 I shall lay the blame on you for all which may 
 happen. 
 
 C'est votre faute, prenez-vous-en a vous-meme, it is 
 . your fault, take the blame to yourself. 
 
 580. JPlaire, "to please," is used unipersonally in sen- 
 tences like the following : 
 
 S'il vous plait, if you please (is pleasing to you). 
 
 II lui plait, he pleases (it pleases him). 
 
 Plait-il a votre soeur ? is it pleasing to your sister ? 
 
 581. Ne tenir presqit a rien que, " to be very near to :" 
 this idiom requires the following verb in the subjunctive 
 with the negative " ne ;" as, 
 
 II ne tint presqu'a rien qu'ils ne se battissent, they 
 
 were very near coming to bloics. 
 Literally, "It held on almost nothing (on a mere trifle) that they 
 should not fight." 
 
 582. En venir a, "to come to," forms the basis of 
 several idioms ; as, 
 
 En venir aux mains, to come to bloios. 
 II faudra en venir a la force, it loill be necessary to use 
 force. 
 See 639 and 640, et seq., for a full collection of French idioms. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 583. Adverbs are classed according to their meaning 
 into: 
 
 a. Adverbs of Time. 
 Souvent, often, Aujourd'hui, to-day. 
 
 Autrefois, formerly. Alors, then. 
 
 Quelquefois, sometimes. Apres, after. 
 
232 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 583. 
 
 J adis, formerly. Dernain, to-morrow. 
 
 Tard, late. Tot, early. 
 
 Tantot, by-and-by. Depuis, since. 
 
 Hier, yesterday. Enfin, at last. 
 
 b. Adverbs of Place. 
 
 Oil, where. La, there. 
 
 Pres, near. Y, there {before the verb). 
 
 Ailleurs, elsewhere. Ici, Ziere. 
 
 Deca, on this side. Dessus, over. 
 
 Dela, on that side. Dessous, under. 
 
 Dedans, inside. Partout, every where. 
 
 Dehors, outside. Proche, near. 
 
 c. Adverbs of Manner. 
 Volontiers, willingly. Ensemble, together. 
 
 Debout, upright. Ainsi, thus. 
 
 Heureusement, happily. Facilement, easily. 
 Doucement, softly. Tristement, sadly. 
 
 d. Adverbs of Quantity. 
 
 Peu, little, few. Trop, too, too much or many. 
 
 Tant, so much or many. Assez, enough. 
 
 Combien, how much or Beaucoup, much or many. 
 
 many. Bien, very. 
 
 Autant, as much or many. Encore, still, yet. 
 
 Tres, very. Environ, about. 
 Fort, very. 
 
 e. Adverbs of Affirmation. 
 Oui, yes. Certes, certainly. 
 
 f. Adverbs of Negation, or Doubt. 
 Non, no. Point, not at all. 
 
 Nullement, by no means. Peut4tre, may be, perhaps. 
 
§ 584-587.] syntax of the adverb. 233 
 
 Observations on Adverbs. 
 
 584. The adverb si is used before adjectives and ad- 
 verbs in sentences which do not contain a comparison ; 
 as, 
 
 II est si savant' qu'il n'a pas son pareil, he is so wise 
 
 that he has no equal. 
 Je n'ai jamais connu im si savant homme, I never was 
 
 acquainted icith so icise a man. 
 
 585. Tant, adverb of quantity, qualifies nouns and 
 verbs : it differs from autant in that it may be used in a 
 sentence where there is no comparison ; as, 
 
 II a tant de richesses qu'il peut voyager partout, he 
 possesses so great riches that he can travel every 
 where. 
 
 586. The adverb bien qualifies verbs, adjectives, and 
 other adverbs. 
 
 a. With verbs it signifies well, indeed, or is in some 
 cases omitted in translation ; as, 
 
 Je parle bien le francais, I speak French well. 
 
 Vous avez bien fait, you have done well. 
 
 Savez-vous bien, comment il faut faire pour dire un Uf 
 
 do you Jcnoio how you must proceed to pronounce 
 
 Uf 
 
 b. With an adjective bien is translated very or quite/ 
 as, 
 
 Vous etes bien impertinent, you are very impertinent. 
 J'en suis bien fache, 1 am very sorry for it. 
 
 c. With another adverb bien signifies very or much y 
 as, 
 
 II parle bien doucement, he-speaks very softly. 
 II me frappa bien plus severement que je ne pensais, 
 he dealt me a much severer blow than I imagined. 
 
 587. The complement of the negative, viz., pas or 
 point, may be omitted with the verbs cesser, oser, pou- 
 voir, and savoir ; as, 
 
234 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 588-591. 
 
 II ne cesse de travailler, he does not cease working. 
 Je oe puis vous le dire, I can not tell it to you. 
 
 588. The complement of the negative ne is also omit- 
 ted after depuis que, since, or il y a — que, it is — since ; 
 as, 
 
 Vous avez ete malade depuis que je ne vous ai vu, 
 you have been sick since I saw you. 
 
 II y a bien longtemps que je ne lui ai parle, it is quite 
 long since I have spoken to him. 
 
 589. Ne — que (qu^) are often eixmloyed for seulement, 
 only, but / as, 
 
 II ne me reste qu'un ami, I have but one friend left. 
 II n'a que trois jours a vivre, he has only three days to 
 live. 
 
 590. Ne is employed after a comparative of superior- 
 ity or of inferiority ; also after autre, autrement, other- 
 wise, provided the sentence is neither interrogative nor 
 negative; as, 
 
 II est plus riche que vous ne croyez, he is richer than 
 
 you suppose. 
 II est moins sage qu'on ne croit, he is less loise than is 
 
 supposed. 
 II parle autrement qu'il ne pense, he speaks otherwise 
 
 than he thinks, 
 a. If the sentence contain a full negation, ne is omit- 
 ted ; as, 
 
 II ne parle pas autrement qu'il pense, he does not 
 
 speak otherwise than he thinks. 
 
 591. When the principal clause of a compound sen- 
 tence contains the idea of fear, apprehension, or one of 
 the expressions de peur que, de crainte que, at the same 
 time involving a wish that a certain thing may not oc- 
 cur, the dependent clause requires ne ; as, 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne, I fear that he may come. 
 J'ai peur qu'il ne le fasse, I am afraid he will do it. 
 
§ 592, 593.] syntax of the adverb. 235 
 
 a. If, however, the subordinate clause would require 
 a negative in English, the full negative expression must 
 be employed in French ; as, 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas, I fear that he may not 
 
 come. 
 J'ai peur qu'il ne le fasse pas, lam afraid that he will 
 
 not do it. 
 
 b. If, again, the principal clause contain a full nega- 
 tive, the ne is omitted in the subordinate clause ; as, 
 
 Je ne crains pas qu'il le fasse, I do not fear that he 
 will do it. 
 
 592. Ne is used, finally, in the subordinate clause, 
 when the principal clause contains one of the verbs 
 douter, nier, desesperer, disconvenir, employed interrog- 
 atively or negatively ; as, 
 
 Je ne doute pas qu'il n'arrive, I do doubt his arrival. 
 Je ne nie pas qu'il n'ait fait cela, I do not deny that he 
 
 has done that. 
 Pouvez-vous desesperer qu'il ne revienne quelque jour? 
 
 can you despair of his returning some day? 
 
 Remark. If the verbs mentioned are neither negative nor inter- 
 rogative, the ne is omitted. 
 
 PLACE OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 593. In French the adverb usually stands immediately 
 after the verb ; and in the compound tenses between the 
 auxiliary and the participle; especially the following: 
 beaucoup, fort, bien, mal ; as, 
 
 II parle bien, he speaks well. 
 
 II travaille beaucoup, he works much. 
 
 II a bien parle, he has spoken well. 
 
 II a beaucoup travaille, he has worked much, 
 a. For the sake of euphony, long adverbs generally 
 stand after the participle. The following adverbs of 
 time and place regularly stand after the participle or in- 
 finitive : 
 
236 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§594. 
 
 Aujourd'hui, to-day. Autrefois, formerly. Tavd, late. 
 Demain, to-morrow, ISTulle part, nowhere. Ici, here. 
 Hier, yesterday. Tot, soon. La, there. 
 
 II a parle aujourd'hui, he has spoken to-day. 
 Nous l'avons connu autrefois, we knew him formerly. 
 ~Ne l'avez-vous trouve nulle part ? have you found him 
 
 nowhere f 
 Je l'ai yu hier, I saw him yesterday. 
 
 b. The adverb assez, enough, always precedes the ad- 
 jective or noun which it qualifies; as, 
 
 Cette chambre est assez propre, this room is neat 
 enough. 
 
 II a assez d'argent, he has money enough. 
 
 ADVERBIAL PHRASES. 
 594. In French, as in other languages, there is a large number of 
 adverbial phrases, of which very few correspond to the English ex- 
 pression when translated word by word. It is necessary, then, to 
 employ a dictionary to ascertain the term or phrase which answers 
 to the one we wish to render. Thus, for example, " beaucoup" and 
 "au moins" may be rendered literally by good deal and at the least ; 
 but tout a fait, quite, and mal a propos, out of season, would hardly 
 bear a verbal interpretation, since the first would give us "all at 
 done," and the second "badly in speech." The subjoined table em- 
 braces the most familiar adverbial phrases and their corresponding 
 term. 
 
 A cheval, on horseback. A la fois, at once. 
 
 A coup sAr,for certain. A la hate, in Baste. 
 
 A couvert, in shelter. A l'avenir, for the future. 
 
 A dessein, on purpose. A l'ecart, aside. 
 
 A droite, on the right. A l'endroit, on the right 
 A fond, thoroughly. side. 
 
 A gauche, on the left. A l'envers, on the wrong 
 A jamais, forever and ever. side. 
 
 A la bonne heure, as you A l'envi, emulously. 
 
 please, A loisir, at leisure. 
 
1 594.] SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 237 
 
 A merveille, exceedingly De meme, in the same man- 
 
 well. ner. 
 
 A peine, scarcely. D'en haut, from above, up- 
 
 A peu pres, nearly. per. 
 
 A pied, on foot. D'en bas 5c /?*om fofoio, fower. 
 
 A plomb, perpendicularly. De mieux en mieiix, 5eWer 
 A present, wow. a?i<# better. 
 
 Apres - deraain, day after De nouveau, anew. 
 
 to-morrow. De nuit, by night. 
 
 •A propos, in due season. De pis en pis, worse and 
 A regret, with regret. 
 A tort, wrongly. 
 A travers, across. 
 Au dedans, within. 
 Au dehors, without. 
 Au depourvu, unawares. 
 Au hasard, o;£ random. 
 Au raoins, «£ feas£. 
 Au plus, a£ tfAe mostf. 
 Au reste, £m c? word. 
 
 worse. 
 De plus, moreover. 
 Depuis peu, lately. 
 Depuis quand, hoio long f 
 De suite, one after another. 
 De temps en temps, noio 
 
 and then. 
 De tous cotes, on cdl sides. 
 De travers, wrong, astray. 
 D'ordinaire, usually. 
 Avant-hier, day before yes- Du reste, besides. 
 
 terday. En arriere, backward. 
 
 Avant qu'il soit peu, before En avant,/br?o«rc?. 
 
 long. En bas, cfoiwi stairs, below. 
 
 Bon gre mal gre, loilling or En haut, w^? stairs. 
 
 not. Jusqu'a present, till now. 
 
 Qa et la, Aere and there. Jusqu'ou, how far f 
 D'abord, at first. Jusqu'ici, hitherto. 
 
 D'ailleurs, besides. 
 De bon cceur, heartily. 
 De bonne foi, sincerely. 
 De bon matin, early. 
 De bonne heure, early. 
 De jour, by day. 
 De la, thence. 
 
 La-haut, above. 
 La-bas, yonder. 
 La-dedans, therein. 
 La-dessus, thereupon. 
 Mal a propos, out of season. 
 Nulle part, nowhere. 
 Par ici, this way. 
 
238 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 595-597. 
 
 Par la, that way. Sans doute, of course. 
 
 Par terre, on the ground. Sur-le-champ, immediately. 
 Peu a peu, by degrees. Tant soit peu, ever so little. 
 
 Feut-etre, pei*hcqys. Tout a fait, quite. 
 
 Pas du tout, not at all. Tout a l'heure,7^*e5e;i%. 
 
 Presque jamais, hardly ever. Tout a coup, suddenly. 
 Presque toujours, almost Tout d'un coup, all at once. 
 
 alioays. Tout a la fois, all at once. 
 
 Quelque part, somewhere. Tout autant, quite as much. 
 Rien du tout, nothing at all. Tout de bon, in earnest. 
 Sans cesse, incessantly. Vis a vis, opposite. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 595. All prepositions in French which are followed by 
 a verb, require that verb in the infinitive. En, in, is the 
 only exception, it being accompanied by a present par- 
 ticiple as in English ; thus, 
 
 Je ne saurais y penser sans pleurer, I can not think 
 
 of it loithout shedding tears. 
 II ouvrit la porte avant de descendre, he opened the 
 
 door, before getting down. 
 II s'en alia en jurant, he went off swearing. 
 
 596. The disjunctive personal pronouns must always 
 be employed in French after prepositions, and not the 
 direct objective case of the conjunctive pronouns : as, 
 
 Je ne peux vivre sans toi, I can not live icithout thee. 
 II ne viendra pas avec moi, he will not come icith me. 
 II demeure chez eux, he lives at their house. 
 
 USE OF CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 597. Above is rendered by "par-dessus" or "au-des- 
 sus de ;" as, 
 
 II avait deux pieds d'eau par-dessus la tete, he had 
 
 two feet of loater above his head. 
 Par-dessus ce que je lui devais, over and above what 1 
 
 was owing him. 
 
§ 598-601.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 239 
 
 Au-dessus des nues, above the clouds. 
 C'est au-dessus de ses forces, it is above his strength. 
 II est au-dessus de sa place, he is above his position. 
 Au-dessus de dix-huit ans, above eighteen years old. 
 Le theraiometre est au-dessus de zero y the thermometer 
 is above zero. 
 
 598. About is rendered by "autour de" when it 
 means around; by "aupres de" when it means near/ 
 by "par" when it means through; and by "sur" or 
 " de" when it means of, concerning ; as, 
 
 II rode autour de la maison, he is prowling about the 
 
 house. 
 Elle est toujours aupres des malades, she is always 
 
 about the sicJt. 
 Elle se promene par la ville, she icalks about the city. 
 Disputer sur telle question, to dispute about such a 
 
 question. 
 
 599. Across is rendered by " a, travers ;" as, 
 
 Vous passates a travers les champs, you went across 
 the fields. 
 
 600. According to is rendered by " selon" or "sui- 
 vant;" as, 
 
 Suivant l'opinion des sages, according to the opinion 
 of the wise. 
 
 Suivant le cours de la nature, according to the course 
 of nature. 
 
 II sera recompense selon ses ceuvres, he will be re- 
 warded according to his works. 
 
 Selon sa bourse, according to his purse (means). 
 
 601. After is rendered by "apres" when it refers to 
 time or place, and by " d'apres" when it means in ac- 
 cordance loith ; as, 
 
 II vint apres moi, he came after me. 
 Apres le diner, after dinner. 
 D'apres nature, after nature. 
 
240 FREXCH GRAMMAR. [§ 602-605. 
 
 D'apres ce que vous dites, after what you say. 
 
 602. Against is rendered by " contre ;" as, 
 
 Us marcherent contre l'ennemi, they marched against 
 
 the enemy. 
 Donner de la tete contre une muraille, to strike the 
 
 head against a icall. 
 
 603. Among is rendered by " parmi" or "entre" when 
 it means of the number of and by " au milieu de" when 
 it means in the midst of; as, 
 
 Je l'ai trouve parmi mes livres, I found it among my 
 
 books. 
 II fut choisi entre tous les autres, he teas chosen among 
 
 all the others. 
 II vit au milieu des plaisirs, he lives among pleasures. 
 
 604. At is in general rendered by "a;" when it is 
 followed by a noun in the possessive case, it is rendered 
 by "chez." A few additional examples of its use are 
 given;- as, 
 
 Je demeure a Paris, I reside at Paris. 
 
 A une heure j'y serai, at one I shall be there. 
 
 Chez mon pere, at my fathers. 
 
 Je l'ai achete chez le marchand, I bought it at the 
 
 merchants. 
 En paix, en guerre, at peace, at war. 
 II est fache contre moi, he is angry at me. 
 A ces paroles on s'ecria, at these icords they shouted. 
 
 605. Before is rendered by " devant" when it refers 
 to place, and is equivalent to in the presence of; by 
 " avant" when it relates to time, order, or rank ; as, 
 
 Mettez cela devant tl\q>\, place that before me. 
 
 Devant le feu, before the fire. 
 
 Nous paraitrons tous devant le tribunal de Dien, toe 
 shall all appear before the judgment-seat of God. 
 
 Ceux qui ont ete avant nous, those who have been be- 
 fore us. 
 
§ 606-610.] SYNTAX OF THE PEEPOS1TION. 241 
 
 Payer avant le terme, to pay before the time agreed. 
 La justice doit aller avant tout, justice must go before 
 all {take the precedence). 
 
 606. Behind is rendered by " derriere ;" as, 
 Derriere la porte, behind the door. 
 
 II etait assis derriere vous, he icas seated behind you. 
 
 607. Below is rendered by "au-dessous de" to indi- 
 cate place, order, or rank ; as, 
 
 Ce village est au-dessous de Paris, this village is below 
 
 Paris. 
 II est assis au-dessous de moi, he is seated below me. 
 Cet ecolier est au-dessous de vous en merite, this pupil 
 
 is below you in merit. 
 
 608. Between is rendered by " entre ;" as, 
 Entre vous et moi, between you and me. 
 Entre Paris et Rome, between Paris and Rome. 
 Entre nous deux, between us both. 
 
 609. By is variously rendered by " aupres de," " d'a- 
 pres," " a," and some others ; as, 
 
 Sa maison est aupres de la mienne, his house is by 
 
 mine. 
 Le Rhin passe aupres de Mannheim, the Rhine floics 
 
 by Mannheim. 
 D'apres ce que vous dites, by what you say. 
 Cote a cote, side by side. 
 On peut juger a ces signes, we may judge by these 
 
 signs. 
 Je le connais a son habit, I know him by his coat. 
 II loge pres de l'eglise, he resides by the church. 
 Annee sur aimee, year by year. 
 Faites pour moi ce que j'ai fait pour vous, do by me 
 
 what I have done by you. 
 
 610. For is rendered by "pour" when it denotes 
 motive, final cause, and by "pendant" when it means 
 during ; as, 
 
 L 
 
242 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 611-614. 
 
 Dieu a cree le monde pour sa propre gloire, God 
 created the loorldfor his own glory. 
 
 Les animaux sont faits pour l'usage de l'homme, ani- 
 mals are made for the use of man. 
 
 II a ete conserve pendant des siecles, it has been pre- 
 served for ages. 
 
 Pendant l'kiver — Yete,for the winter — the summer. 
 
 611. From is rendered by " des," " depuis," "de," and 
 " a ;" des is used of time and place, involving date of 
 commencement ; depuis likewise, but with the idea of 
 succession; as, 
 
 Des l'enfance, /rom childhood. 
 
 Des le point du ]o\xv,from the break of day. 
 
 Des ce mornent^rom this moment. 
 
 Depuis le premier jusqu'au dernier, from the first to 
 
 the last. 
 De cette ville a YautYe,from this city to the other. 
 II arrive de Paris, he comes from Paris. 
 
 612. In, into, are rendered by "dans" or "en ;" en is 
 employed in a general sense, but dans is limited to some 
 specific place ; as, 
 
 En France {general), in France. 
 
 Dans Paris {specific), in Paris. 
 
 En ville {vague), in toion. 
 
 Dans la chambre {specific), in the room. 
 
 En tout pays {general), in every land. 
 
 Dans ce pays-ci {specific), in this country. 
 
 613. Instead of is rendered by "au lieu de;" as, 
 
 II m'ecrivit au lieu de venir en personne, he wrote to 
 me instead of coming in person. 
 
 614. On, \ipon, is rendered by " sur," " a," " en," 
 "de;" as, 
 
 Le livre est sur la table, the booJc lies on the table. 
 
 A la (main) droite, on the right {hand). 
 
 J'ai une bague au doigt, I have a ring on my finger. 
 

 § 615-618.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 243 
 
 En entrant, on going in. 
 
 Jouer d'un instrument, to play on an instrument. 
 
 615. Out of is rendered by "hors de;" by "par" 
 when it means the ground or motive of an action ; as, 
 
 Hors de la ville, out of the city. 
 
 II est hors de danger, he is out of danger. 
 
 Je fis cela par amitie, I did that out of friendship. 
 
 II Fa fait par crainte, he did it out of fear. 
 
 616. Over, in the sense of above, is rendered by "au- 
 dessus de ;" otherwise by " sur ;" as, 
 
 Au-dessus de notre tete, over our head. 
 
 lis logent au-dessus de lui, they live over him. 
 
 Une epee etait suspendue sur sa tete, a sword icas sits- 
 pended over his head. 
 
 II s'endormit sur sa lecture, he fell asleep over his read- 
 ing. 
 
 617. Through is rendered by "a, travers" or "au 
 travers de" when it means from one extreme to the other, 
 and by "par" when it expresses motive, ground ; as, 
 
 Un coup au travers du corps, a thrust through the 
 body. 
 
 II se promene a travers les champs, he walks through 
 the fi elds. 
 
 II le fait par amitie, he does it through friendship. 
 
 a. Also, when through signifies by way of, via, or 
 along, it is rendered by " par ;" as, 
 
 Je passerai par FAllemagne, I shall go through Ger- 
 many. 
 
 II court par les rues, he runs through the streets. 
 
 618. Till, until, is rendered by "jusque" or "jusqu'a;" 
 as, Jusqu'a demain, till to-morrow. 
 
 Jusqu'a lundi, till Monday. 
 
 Jusqu'alors, till then. 
 
 Remark. Jusque may be written jitsqn* and jusques when it comes 
 before a vowel ; thus, jusqu'ici, till noio, or jusques ici ; jusqu'a 
 ox jusques a. 
 
244 French geammae. [§ 619-622. 
 
 619. To is usually rendered by "a;" the correlative 
 from — to, is expressed by " de — en" when reference is 
 made to time or space, and by " depuis — jusqu'a" when 
 reference is made to order or rank ; as, 
 
 Je vais a Paris, I am going to Paris. 
 
 II boit a la sante de son ami, he drinks to the health 
 of his friend. 
 
 Portez cette lettre a la poste, carry this letter to the 
 Post-office. 
 
 De temps en temps, from time to time. 
 
 II alia de pays en pays, he went from country to coun- 
 try. 
 
 Depuis le simple soldat jusqu'au colonel, from the 
 common soldier to tlie colonel. 
 
 Depuis les pieds jusqu'a la tete, from head to foot. 
 
 Depuis le plus grand jusqu'au plus petit, from the 
 greatest to the least. 
 
 620. Toward is rendered by "vers;" in the sense of 
 with respect to, " envers" is used ; as, 
 
 II voyage vers l'Orient, he travels toward the East. 
 
 II dirigeait ses pas vers tel village, lie bent his step>s to- 
 ward such a village. 
 
 Soyez pieux envers Dieu, be pious toward God. 
 
 Elle est charitable envers les pauvres, she is benevolent 
 toward the poor. 
 
 621. Tinder is rendered by " sous ;" in the sense of in- 
 ferior to or less than, " au-dessous de" is employed ; as. 
 
 Sous l'eau, under the water. 
 Sous un arbre, under a tree. 
 Au-dessous de quarante livres, under forty pounds. 
 
 622. With, denoting accompaniment, is rendered by 
 "avec;" after certain adjectives and participles it is ex- 
 pressed by de; as, 
 
 Venez avec moi, come with me. 
 
 II partit avec sa sceur, he set out with his sister. 
 
§622% 623.] syntax of the peeposition. 245 
 
 Je suis content de votre cadeau, I am pleased with 
 
 your present. 
 La terre est couverte de neige, the ground is covered 
 
 with snow. 
 622*. The prepositions " voila," there is, there are, 
 " voici," here is, here are, are followed by their object if 
 it is a noun, and preceded by it if the object is a person- 
 al pronoun ; as, 
 
 Voila mon pere, there is my father. 
 Voila mes enfants, there are my children. 
 Voici le domestique, here is the servant. 
 Voici les livres, here -are the books; but, 
 Le voici, le voila, here he is, there he is. 
 Les voici, les voila, here they are, there they are. 
 Me voici, nous voici, here I am, here we are. 
 Vous voila, te voila, there you are, there thou art. 
 a. Prepositions have the same position in French as 
 in English. 
 
 623. The prepositions d, de, en, are .always repeated 
 before each word which they govern. The other prep- 
 ositions are repeated if the words before which they 
 stand or are implied do not have a synonymous or sim- 
 ilar meaning ; but if the series of words are nearly or 
 quite similar, the preposition need be employed only be- 
 fore the first ; as, 
 
 II aime a jouer, a danser, et a chanter, he loves to play, 
 
 dance, and sing. 
 II vient d'arriver d'ltalie, d'Allemagne, et de Pologne, 
 he has just arrived from Italy, Germany, and 
 Poland. 
 Je vais voyager en Russie, en Allemagne, et en Suede, 
 I am going to travel in Russia, Germany, and 
 Sweden. 
 C'est pour vous et pour votre frere, it is for you and 
 your brother. 
 
246 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 624-626. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 624. But, in its usual adversative sense, is rendered by 
 " mais ;" when it means only, by " ne — que ;" when it 
 signifies except, by " sinon ;" as, 
 
 Je m'en vais, mais je reviendrai avant qu'il soit peu, I 
 
 am going away, but I shall return before long. 
 Achetez-le, mais prenez garde qu'on ne vous trompe, 
 
 purchase it, but take care you are not deceived. 
 II n'a qu'une maison, he has but one house. 
 Vous n'avez qu'a parler, you have but to speak. 
 Je ne sais rien sinon ce qu'on dit, I know nothing but 
 
 what is reported. 
 Je n'ai rien qui dire de lui sinon qu'il est un peu avare, 
 
 I have heard nothing said of him bat that he is 
 
 a little miserly. 
 
 625. Unless or except may be rendered by "a moins 
 que," followed by " ne" and the subjunctive; as, 
 
 A moins que vous ne vous repentiez, vous perirez tous, 
 
 unless you repent you shall all perish. 
 A moins que nous ne soyons laborieux, nous ne devi- 
 
 endrons pas riches, unless we are industrious we 
 
 shall not become rich. 
 Vous ne reussirez pas a moins que vous ne preniez 
 
 bien votre temps, you will not succeed unless you 
 
 employ well your time. 
 
 626. Both, in the correlative both — and, is rendered 
 by " et— et ;" as, 
 
 Et vous et moi, both you and me. 
 
 II me tient lieu et de pere -et de mere, he supplies the 
 
 place both of a father and a mother to me. 
 a. Both is also expressed by "deux," two, or "tous 
 deux;" as, 
 
 Les deux mains, both hands. 
 
 Nous voici tous deux, here we are both. 
 
§ 627-630.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 247 
 
 627. Neither — nor, are rendered by "ni — ni," accom- 
 panied by ne; as, 
 
 II n'a ni faim ni soif, he is neither hungry nor thirsty. 
 Ni moi ni lui ne viendrons, neither I nor he vnll come. 
 a. Translate the expression either in the phrase " nor 
 I either" by non plus; as, 
 
 II n'y va pas, ni moi non plus, he will not go there, nor 
 I either. 
 
 628. Either — or, are rendered by " ou — ou ;" as, 
 
 Ou il dit un mensonge ou il se trompe, either he tells 
 a falsehood or he is deceived. 
 
 629. Whether is rendered by " si" in indirect ques- 
 tions, or with sentences expressing doubt, possibility; 
 in the correlatives whether — or, " soit — soit," or " soit — 
 ou," are employed ; after verbs of doubting, " que" is 
 used ; as, 
 
 Je ne sais si cela est vrai, I do not know whether that 
 
 is true. 
 Demandez-vous si je vous aime ? do you asJc whether 
 
 I love you f 
 Je ne sais si je l'aurais fait, I do not know whether I 
 
 shoxdd have done it. 
 Soit qu'il le fasse, soit qu'il ne le fasse pas, whether he 
 
 does it, or whether he does it not. 
 Soit qu'il vienne ou qu'il ne vienne pas, ivhether he 
 
 comes or whether he does not come. 
 Je doute qu'il y ait pense, I doubt whether he has 
 
 thought of it. 
 Bon gre mal gre, whether or no. 
 
 630. Lest is expressed in French by "de peur que," 
 "de crainte que," followed by ne and the subjunctive; as, 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne vienne nous surprendre, lest he 
 
 come and take us by surprise. 
 Cachez lui votre dessein, de peur qu'il ne le traverse, 
 
 conceal your scheme from him, lest he thwart it. 
 
248 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 631. 
 
 631. While is rendered by "pendant que" or "tandis 
 que ;" pendant que signifies at the time, and tandis que 
 conveys the idea of opposition or contrast / as, 
 
 Le crime veille pendant que l'innocence dort, crime 
 
 keeps icatch while innocence sleeps. 
 L'innocence dort en paix, tandis que le crime ne dort 
 que dans le tourment, innocence sleeps in peace, 
 while crime sleeps in torment alone. 
 
APPENDICES 
 
 TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 No. I.— FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 
 
 OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
 
 632. A verse is a combination of lines containing a 
 certain number of words, which may be divided into 
 syllables called feet, in accordance with fixed rules. 
 
 633. In French there are Jive distinct kinds of verse, 
 each known by the number of feet it contains : 
 
 a. Such as contain twelve feet ; as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
 
 C'est | en | vain | qu'au | Par- 1 nasse | un | te- |me-|raire| au-|teur 
 Pen- 1 se j de | l'art | des | vers | at- 1 tein- 1 dre | la | hau- 1 teur. 
 
 This kind of verse is called Alexandrine or heroic, and 
 is much employed in epic poetry, tragedy, and in satires, 
 epistles, etc. 
 
 b. Such as contain ten syllables or feet ; as, 
 
 1 23 456789 10 
 
 Sur | son | vi- | sage | ha- | bi- | te | la | pa- | leur, 
 Et | dans | son | sein | tri- | om- | phe | la | dou- | leur. 
 
 This kind is employed in serio-comic, erotic, and bur- 
 lesque poetry, as well as for the epigram and mock-epis- 
 tolary style. 
 
 c. Such as contain eight syllables ; as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 
 
 Dor- | mez, | a- | mours | in- | ex- | o- | rabies, 
 Lais- | sez | re- | spi- j rer j l'U- j ni- j vers. 
 
 d. Such, as contain seven feet ; as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 7 
 
 Le I pe- | ril | le | plus | a | craindre, 
 Est | ce- | lui | qu'on | ne j craint j pas. 
 L2 
 
250 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 634, 635. 
 
 Both of the above kinds are used in lyric poetry and in 
 the madrigal. 
 
 e. Such as contain six syllables or feet ; as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 
 
 Fiers | vain- | queurs | de | la | terre. 
 Ce- | dez | a | vo- | tre [ tour. 
 
 This kind of verse is usually found associated with lines 
 of miscellaneous measure, and especially in lyrical poe- 
 try, rhymed tales, and fables. 
 
 It is often met with in the ode, to give the conclusion 
 of a strophe a peculiar grace ; as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
 
 Le I ciel [ t'offre | un | pe- | ril | di- | gne | de | ton | cou- | rage ; 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 
 
 Mais | il | com- | bat | pour | toi. 
 
 634. Besides the above kinds there are verses of five, 
 four, three, and even of two syllables ; they are most al- 
 ways associated with the light and humorous style, or 
 employed in songs and ballads. 
 
 635. To ascertain the number of feet any line of poe- 
 try contains, it will be necessary for the student to re- 
 view the rules for the division of syllables at the begin- 
 ning of this work, Section 62, and following. In addi- 
 tion, the subjoined observations, which apply only to 
 poetry and singing, must be carefully noted. 
 
 a. In dividing the syllables of a line of poetry and in 
 singing, the e final without accent is pronounced like e 
 in the French word de or ce, provided it be followed by 
 a word commencing with a consonant or an h aspirate : 
 this e then adds a syllable more to the line than would 
 be admitted in prose or conversation ; as, 
 
 En-ten-dez-vous dans les cam-pagnes (8 feet.) 
 Mu-gir ces fe-ro-ces sol-dats ? (8 " ) 
 
 Here fgroces is pronounced in three syllables, whereas in prose it 
 would have only two. 
 
§ 635.] VERSIFICATION. 251 
 
 Again, 
 Et rap-pel-fe les temps e-chap-pes de sa main (12 feet). 
 Here rappelle has three feet. 
 
 b. But if, on the other hand, the e final, unaccented, is 
 followed by a word commencing with a voioel or an h 
 mute, the e has no sound, and forms no additional sylla- 
 ble; as, 
 
 Le jour de gloire est ar-ri-ve, (8 feet.) 
 
 Ce-lui qui sans ri-va^e a ren-fer-me les mers. (12 " ) 
 
 c. Diphthongs and triphthongs are not generally di- 
 vided in French verse ; thus, puis, Dieu, are considered 
 as forming one syllable ; and liaison, pitie, as forming 
 two — liaison, pi-tie. 
 
 With these instructions, the student is now ahle to scan (divide into 
 syllables) any verse of French poetry, and also to refer it to its class. 
 We present a series of poetical selections of diiferent measures for the 
 learner's practice. The figures at the close of each line indicate the 
 number of feet contained in it, the correctness of which the learner 
 should seek to verify by drawing a line between each syllable with a pencil. 
 
 Allez; et dans ses murs vides de citoyens, 12 
 Faites pleurer ma mort aux veuves des Troyens ; 12 
 
 Je meurs dans cet espoir satisfaite et tranquille : 12 
 
 Si je n'ai pas vecu la compagne d'Achille, 12 
 
 J'espere que du moins un heureux avenir 12 
 
 A vos faits immortels joindra mon souvenir. 12 
 
 Racine. 
 
 Ma foi, c'est fait de moi, car Isabeau 10 
 
 M'a conjure de lui faire un rondeau : 10 
 
 Cela me met en une peine extreme. 10 
 
 Quoi ! treize vers,.huit en EAU, cinq en EME ! 10 
 
 Je lui ferais aussitot un bateau. 10 
 
 En voila cinq pourtant en un monceau. 10 
 
 Faisons-en huit, en invoquant Brodeau ; 10 
 
 Et puis mettons par quelque stratageme, 10 
 
 Ma foi, c'est fait. 4 
 
252 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 636. 
 
 Si je pouvais encor de mon cerveau 10 
 
 Tirer cinq vers, l'ouvrage serait beau. 10 
 
 Mais cependant me voila dans l'onzieme ; 10 
 
 Et si, je crois que je fais le douzieme ; 10 
 
 En voila treize ajustes au niveau. 10 
 
 Ma foi, c'est fait. 4 
 
 Voituee. 
 
 Oui, j'ai dit dans mes vers qu'un celebre assassin, 12 
 
 Laissant de Galien la science infertile, 12 
 
 D'ignorant medecin devint ma9on habile. 12 
 
 Mais de parler de vous je n'eus jamais dessein ; 12 
 
 Lubin, ma muse est trop correcte. 8 
 
 Yous etes, je l'avoue, ignorant medecin, 12 
 
 Mais non pas habile architecte. 8 
 
 Boileau. 
 
 C2ESTJEA. 
 
 636. In verses containing twelve and in those of ten 
 syllables a pause occurs called the ccesura, which divides 
 the line into two parts or hemistiches. 
 
 Que | tou- | jours | dans | vos | vers ]| le | sens, | cou- | pant | les | mots, 
 Sus- 1 pen-| de | The- | mi- 1 stiche, |] en | mar- | que | le 1 re- [ pos. 
 
 Here the pause after vers and -stiche is the caesura, which 
 in Alexandrine verse usually occurs at the sixth foot. 
 The caesura in verses of ten syllables generally occurs at 
 the fourth foot, dividing the line into two unequal parts. 
 
 Tourne [ un ] mo-| ment || tes |veuxjvers| ces | cli-J mats; 
 Et, | si | ce | n'est || pour | par- | ta- | ger | ma | flamme, 
 Re- | viens | du | moins j| pour | ha- | ter ] mon | tre-| pas. 
 
 a. Sometimes the sense of the verse evidently will not 
 admit the caesura in strict accordance with the foregoing 
 rules, especially when the pause would regularly come 
 between words which can not be separated on account 
 of their mutual dependence. In such case the caesura 
 
§ 637.] VERSIFICATION. 253 
 
 may be admitted before or after the inseparable terms, 
 according to circumstances. 
 
 RHYME. 
 
 637. Rhyme is that uniformity of sound which char- 
 acterizes the final words or syllables of two or more lines 
 of poetry. In French versification the rhyme is indis- 
 pensable. 
 
 a. Rhyme may be either masculine or feminine. It is 
 feminine when the verse ends with an e mute (e, es, or 
 ent — third plural of verbs) ; and masculine when the 
 verse ends in any other way (e, &s, aient, or any con- 
 sonant). 
 
 Mcamples. 
 Moliere avec TartmTe y doit jouer son role/ (Fern, rh.) 
 Et Lambert, qui plus est, m'a donne sa parole. (do.) 
 
 Mon coeur, honteusement surpris par d'autres 
 
 charmes, (do.) 
 
 Croira ne lui devoir que d'impuissantes larmes. (do.) 
 
 A sa puissante voix, les bruits confus s'apaise^ ; (do.) 
 Dans les plaines de l'air les tempetes se taisentf. (do.) 
 
 The above are all examples of feminine rhyme, be- 
 cause they close each line with a silent e or its equiva- 
 lent. 
 
 Tel d'un coup incertain, par le pretre frappe, (Masc. rh.) 
 Mugit un fier taureau de l'autel echappe. (do.) 
 
 Va faire chez tes Grecs admirer ta fureury (do.) 
 
 Va, je la desavoue, et tu me fais horreur. (do.) 
 
 Aux accords d'Amphion les pierres se mouv aie?it; (do.) 
 Et sur les murs Thebains en ordre s , ele\aie?it. (do.) 
 
 These, on the other hand, are examples of masculine 
 rhyme, since no line ends in e mute or its equivalent. 
 
254 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 638. 
 
 POETIC LICENSE. 
 
 638. The poets reserve to themselves certain expres- 
 sions and irregular grammatical usages which are not 
 allowable in prose, except perhaps in the sublime style. 
 
 a. The following words are used only in poetry and 
 in the pulpit : 
 
 L'Eternel, the Infinite, \ 
 
 Le Tres-Haut, the Most High, > used for Dieu. 
 
 Le Tout-puissant, the Omnipotent, ) 
 
 Forfaits, for crimes, crimes. 
 
 Mortels, " homines, men. 
 
 Glaive, " epee, sword. 
 
 Ondes, " eaux, ivaters. 
 
 Antique, " ancien, ancient. 
 
 Hymen, ) 
 enee, f 
 
 manage, marriage. 
 
 Hymenee 
 
 Jadis, " autrefois, of yore, of old. 
 
 Soudain, " aussitot, suddenly. 
 
 b. Another license of frequent use among poets is the 
 suppression of the vowel e in the word encore (encor), 
 and of the final consonant in certain words, such as, 
 
 Naple, for Naples, Naples. 
 
 Athene, " Athenes, Athens. 
 
 Londre, " Londres, London. 
 
 J 6 voi, " je vois, I see. 
 
 Je revoi, " je revois, I see again. 
 
 Je doi, " je dois, I owe. 
 
 Je recoi, " je recois, I receive. 
 
 Je di, " je dis, I say, I said. 
 
 c. In fine, as in English, the French poets often invert 
 the order of sentences and clauses, to give beauty or 
 harmony to the verse. A few examples will explain 
 this license. 
 
§ 639.] VERBAL IDIOMS. 255 
 
 Et de nos ennemis songeons que la louange 
 Est le plus dangereux. 
 
 The prose or natural order of this verse would be, et 
 songeons que la louange est leplus dangereux de nos en- 
 nemis. 
 
 A des troubles honteux je sens que je m'abaisse. 
 
 Prose order — Je sens que je m'abaisse d des iroubles 
 honteux. 
 
 No. II.— IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN* VERBS, 
 WITH THEIR REGIMEN. 
 
 639. The following verbal idioms embrace only such 
 as are most usually met with in reading ; to give a full 
 list of phrases which do not admit of an exact transla- 
 tion into English would form a volume of itself. 
 Abonder en, to abound in, with. 
 Acceder a une demande, to comply ivith a request. 
 Aller a bride abattue, to go full speed. 
 Aller a cheval, to ride on horseback. 
 Aller pas a pas, to act with caution. 
 Aller a pied, to go on foot. 
 Aller en voiture, to ride in a carriage. 
 A quoi aboutit tout cela? what is the drift of all this? 
 Arracher un secret a, to wrest a secret from. 
 Avoir envie de dormir, to feel sleepy. 
 Avoir le coeur sur les levres, to be open-hearted. 
 Avoir des affaires par-dessus les yeux, to be up to the 
 
 eyes in business. 
 Avoir des obligations a, to be under obligations to. 
 Avoir soin de, to take care of. 
 Avoir mal au doigt, to have a sore finger. 
 Avoir la visiere courte, to be short-sighted. 
 Absent de chez soi, away from home. 
 
256 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 639. 
 
 Abuser des moments de quelqu'un, to encroach on one's 
 
 time. 
 Cela va sans dire, that is understood. 
 C'est-a-dire, that is to say, i. e. 
 Cette chambre donne sur la rue, this room overlooks the 
 
 street. 
 Cet habit me va bien, this coat Jits me well. 
 Changer d'habit, to change one's coat. 
 Connaitre de vue, to know by sight. 
 Couper la parole, to cut one short. 
 Couch er en joue, to aim at. 
 Demander quelque chose a quelqu'un, to ask something 
 
 of some one. 
 Demander a etre admis, to beg admittance. 
 De quoi s'agit-il ? what is the matter f 
 Donner a pleines mains, to give bountifully. 
 Donner par-dessus le marche, to throw in. 
 Ecouter quelqu'un, to listen to some one. 
 En vouloir a, to have a grudge against. 
 En donner d'une belle a, to impose on. 
 En donner a quelqu'un, to cheat some one. 
 En passer par, to put tip with. 
 En etre quitte pour, to escape with. 
 
 En user -j >■ avec quelqu'un, to treat some one \ 
 
 En venir a un accommodement avec quelqu'un, to come 
 
 to terms with. 
 Etre en age de, to be of age to. 
 Etre bien mis, to be well dressed. 
 Etre mal a son aise, to be uncomfortable. 
 Etre au fait de, to be thoroughly acquainted with. 
 Faire bon accueil, to receive kindly. 
 Faire bon voyager, to be good traveling. 
 Faire bonne mine a, to look pleased with. 
 Faire bon marcher, to be good walking. 
 
§ 639.] VEEBAL IDIOMS. 257 
 
 Faire bien ses affaires, to prosper. 
 Faire cas de, to think much of. 
 Faire de son mieux, to do one's best. 
 Faire de la peine a quelqu'un, to hurt some one's feelings. 
 Faire mine de, to show a disposition to. 
 Faire part de quelque chose a quelqu'un, to communi- 
 cate something to some one. 
 Faire place, to make room, to give way. 
 Faire grace a, to pardon. 
 Faire semblant de, to pretend. 
 Faire valoir, to make the most of. 
 Faire un marche, to strike a bargain. 
 Faire voir a quelqu'un, to show some one. 
 Gagner sa vie, to earn ontfs livelihood. 
 Ignorer quelque chose, to be ignorant of something. 
 il fait cher vivre a Paris, living is dear at Paris. 
 II joue a tout perdre, he risks losing every thing. 
 II s'accommode de tout, nothing comes amiss with him. 
 II s'agit de, the question is. 
 
 Je vous le donne en dix, I give you ten times to guess it. 
 Jouer de son reste, to throw one's last stake. 
 La donner belle a, to tell a fine story. 
 L'ernporter sur, to overcome, vanquish. 
 Mener une vie de Boheme, to lead a gipsy life. 
 Mettre a la mer, to p>ut to sea. 
 Mettre de la douceur, to use gentleness. 
 
 I Mettre de cote, to lay by. 
 Mettre pied a terre, to alight. 
 Mettre a l'heure, to set (a watch). 
 Mettre a la porte, to turn out of doors. 
 Mettre a la voile, to set sail. 
 Mettre au net, to copy in a fair hand. 
 Mettre a meme de, to enable to. 
 N'avoir rien a voir a, to have nothing to do with. 
 N'aboutir a rien, to come to nothing. 
 
258 * FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 639. 
 
 Ne jouer que l'honneur, to play for love. 
 Passer aupres d'un endroit, to pass by a place. 
 Perdre de vue, to lose sight of. 
 Perdre la tete, to lose one's icits. 
 Pleuvoir a verse, to pour down {of rain). 
 Prendre un parti, to take a resolution. 
 Prendre les devants, to go before. 
 Prendre le deuil, to go into mourning. 
 Prendre garde a, to beware of. 
 Quereller quelqu'un, to quarrel with some one. 
 Pester debout, to remain standing. 
 Pevenir a soi, to come to one's senses. 
 S'amuser a, to take pleasure in. 
 S'aviser, to take into one's head. 
 
 S'acquitter d'une commission, to execute a commission. 
 S'abonner a, to subscribe to. 
 
 S'attirer de mauvaises affaires, to get into a bad scrape. 
 Savoir, that is to say, i. e. 
 
 Se faire bien vouloir de quelqu'un, to gain onds affec- 
 tions. 
 Se mettre a, to begin, commence. 
 S'en donner, to indulge onds self 
 Se donner pour, to give one's self out for. 
 Se mettre a la mode, to be dressed in the fashion. 
 Soupirer apres, to pine for. 
 Se plaire a, to take pleasure in. 
 Se passer de, to do loithout. 
 S'en tenir a, to abide by. 
 
 S'en rapporter a quelqu'un, to leave it to some one. 
 Se faire valoir, to boast, brag. 
 
 Se mettre a son aise, to make one's self comfortable. 
 S'y prendre, to manage, set about. 
 
 Se mettre au fait de, to make one^s self acquainted with. 
 Se mettre au lit, to go to bed. 
 Se promener a cheval, to take a horseback-ride. 
 
8 640.1 VERBAL IDIOMS. 259 
 
 Se defaire de, to get rid of. 
 
 Se porter \ bien I , to be in \ 9 00 ? \ health. 
 ( mal ) ( bad ) 
 
 Se meler de, to meddle with. 
 
 S'informer" de, to inquire after. 
 
 Se tirer d' affaire, to get out of a scrape. 
 
 Se livrer avec abandon a, to luxuriate in. 
 
 Se mettre a l'abri, to shelter one's self 
 
 Saluer par des acclammations, to cheer. 
 
 Se connaitre en, to be a judge of. 
 
 Trouver a redire a, to find fault with. 
 
 Valoir la peine, to be worth the ichile. 
 
 Vendre a bon marche, to sell cheap. 
 
 Vivre de son travail, to live by one's industry. 
 
 Vivre bien avec, to be on good terms icith. 
 
 Vivre au jour le jour, to live from hand to mouth. 
 
 Vivre en, to live like a. 
 
 Voir quelque chose en beau, to look on the bright side 
 
 of something. 
 
 Voir par soi-meme, to see icith one's own eyes. 
 
 Voir sur un jardin, to overlook a garden. 
 
 Y etre pour quelque chose, to have something to do 
 
 with it. 
 
 Y regarder de pres, to be particular. 
 
 640. In addition to the above, there is a great variety 
 of promiscuous idioms in the French language, some of 
 which admit of a more or less literal translation, while 
 others would fail to convey any adequate or intelligent 
 meaning were they rendered word for word. To dis- 
 pose of such phrases, or Gallicisms, as they are called, 
 it will be necessary to ascertain the equivalent idea in 
 English, regardless of the mere words which compose 
 the idiom in French. Thus, manger de caresses, to eat 
 with kindness, simply demands the substitution of to kill 
 
260 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 641-644. 
 
 for to eat to accord with the idea in English; avoir 
 chaud, to have warm, is clearly understood by employ- 
 ing to be in place of to have/ but, again, other phrases 
 can not be rendered even approximately; as, etre sur 
 les dents (to be on the teeth), literally translated, gives 
 one no clew to its application, so that the idea, not the 
 words, must be rendered by the corresponding idea in 
 English, which in this phrase is to be worn out, tired out. 
 We devote a large space to these Gallicisms, because, 
 being peculiarly suited to a conversational language like 
 the French, they are met with at every step in all de- 
 partments of literature, and constitute the chief difficulty 
 in reading or speaking. 
 
 641. Above, in such phrases as "I am not above 
 asking it," may be rendered by rfetrepas trop fier pour / 
 je ne suis pas trop fier pour le demander. 
 
 a. " Above-mentioned ;" in this phrase above is trans- 
 lated by ci-dessus, as " the book above cited," le livre ci- 
 dessus mentionne. 
 
 b. " To be above ground" may be expressed in French* 
 by the verb vivre; as, "is he still above ground?" vit- 
 il encore f 
 
 642. Abeoad. In the sense of " to go abroad, to trav- 
 el," abroad is rendered by d Vetranger ; as, "my friend 
 has gone abroad," mon ami est alle d Vetranger. 
 
 a. In the sense of " current," speaking of a rumor, the 
 verb courir answers to " abroad ;" as, " there is a rumor 
 abroad that he is dead," le bruit court qxCil est mort. 
 
 643. Account. " According to his account," selon lui ; 
 " beyond all account," au deld de tout calcul ; " on no 
 account % " en aucune maniere ; "to keep accounts," tenir 
 cles livres ; "to turn to account," mettre d profit. 
 
 644. Ache. "My head aches," fai mat d la tete ; "to 
 have the tooth-ache," avoir mal aux dents; "I ache all 
 over,'V e souffre par tout le corps. 
 
 
§ 645-653.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 261 
 
 645. Act. "To act the part of" is rendered by agir 
 en; as, " he acted the part of an honest man," il agit en 
 honnete homme; "to act as," servir de; as, "he acts as 
 my guide," il me sert de guide. 
 
 646. Ado. " Without any ado," sansfapons; " to make 
 no more ado," n 1 en fair e ni une ni deux; "make no 
 more ado about it," rtenfaites ni une ni deux; "much 
 ado about nothing," beaucoup de bruit pour rien. 
 
 647. Again. The phrase "again and again" is ren- 
 dered dplusieurs reprises; "as much again," encore une 
 fois autant. 
 
 a. The adverb again, employed with verbs, is gener- 
 ally expressed in French by the syllable re (r if the verb 
 commences with a) prefixed to the verb ; thus, avoir, to 
 have, to gain; ravoir, to have again; prendre, to take; 
 reprendre, to take again; acheter, to buy ; racheter, to 
 buy again (back). 
 
 648. Age. "He is under age," il est mineur ; "I am 
 of age/'Je suis majeur ; "when he is of age, he will be 
 wealthy," quand il arrivera d sa majorite, il sera riche. 
 
 649. Ago. This word is rendered by il y a; "long 
 ago," il y a longtemps; "not long ago," il rty a pas 
 longtemps; " some time ago," il y a quelque temps. 
 
 650. Agree. When reference is made to health, phys- 
 ical constitution, etc., "to agree with" is rendered by 
 /aire du Men ; as, cette viande line fait du bien; when 
 " agree" means " suited to," employ convenir a. 
 
 651. Ahead. "To go ahead," avancer, continuer ; "he 
 is ahead of you," il est plus avance que vous; il vous 
 laisse derribre. 
 
 652. Ail. This verb must be rendered by avoir ; as, 
 " qu'avez-vous?" what ails you? "what ails her?" 
 qu'a-t-elleP "something ails him," il a quelque chose; 
 "does any thing ail them ?" ont-ils quelque chose? 
 
 653. Alert. " To be on the alert," etre sur le qui-vive. 
 
262 
 
 FRENCH GKAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 654-659. 
 
 654. Alight. Speaking of birds,, use s'abattre; as, 
 " the bird alights on the tree," Voiseau s'abat sur Varbre. 
 Speaking of getting out of a vehicle or off an object, em- 
 ploy descendre; as, "alight from the horse," descendez 
 du cheval; " he has just alighted from his carriage," il 
 vient de descendre de sa voiture. 
 
 655. Alone. "To let alone" is translated by laisser 
 tranquille or laisser f aire; as, "let me alone," laissez- 
 moifaire; "he will not let me alone," il ne me laissera 
 .pas tranquille. 
 
 656. Amiss. "To take it amiss," prendre en mal, or 
 prendre en mauvaise part ; "do not take it amiss if I 
 help myself to some," ne le prenez pas en mal, sije m?en 
 sers. 
 
 a. " Amiss," with verbs, such as to come amiss, to do 
 amiss, to speak amiss, etc., is translated by mal ; thus, 
 " he has behaved amiss," il a mal agi; " that does not 
 come amiss," cela ne va pas mal. 
 
 657. And. Between comparatives " and" is rendered 
 by de — en; as, "better and better," de mieux en mieux; 
 " worse and worse," de pis en pis ; " wiser and wiser," 
 de plus en plus sage. 
 
 a. Sometimes it is rendered by the preposition a (to) 
 united with the definite article ; thus, " toast and butter," 
 rotie an beurre ; "rotie au vin," toast and wine. 
 
 b. And is often omitted when it comes between cer- 
 tain verbs, especially after the verbs aller and envoyer; 
 as, "go and tell him," va lui dire; "send and make 
 search for him," envoyez-le chercher. 
 
 658. Angey. "To be angry with" is expressed in 
 French by to be angry against, etre fache contre ; as, " he 
 is angry with his little brother," il est f ache contre son 
 petit frere. 
 
 659. Answer. In the sense of "to answerback," "to 
 be insolent," employ faire le raisonneur; as, " do you 
 
§ 660-666.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 263 
 
 dare to answer me back?" osez-vous faire le raison- 
 neitr f 
 
 660. Any. The following locutions with this word are 
 peculiar : " give hirn but little if any," ne lui en donnez 
 que pen ou point ; "scarcely any," presque pas ; "any- 
 wise," de quelque maniere^ or de quelque fapon que ce soit. 
 
 661. Apply, meaning "to make application to a per- 
 son," is rendered by s'adresser d; as, "you must apply 
 to him," ilfaut vous adresser d lui. 
 
 662. Avail. "To be of no avail," ne servir d Hen; 
 as, " of what avail is it ?" d quoi sert-il f " It is of no 
 avail," cela ne sert d Hen. 
 
 663. Aware. This verb is generally expressed by 
 savoir {to know); as, "he did it without being aware of 
 it," il lefit sans le savoir; " were you not aware of it ?" 
 ne le saviez-vous pas f 
 
 664. Become. " To become," meaning " to look well," 
 is rendered by seoir d, aller d, or convenir d; as, "this 
 hat is very becoming to you," ce chapeau vous convient 
 — vous sied d merveille; "does this coat become me?" 
 cet habit me va-t-il Men f 
 
 a. Referring to trade or occupation, " become" is ren- 
 dered by devenir or se faire ; as, " what has he become ?" 
 qiCest-il devenuf "He has become a soldier," il s\st' 
 fait soldat. 
 
 b. " What has become of him ?" qu'est-il devenu f " I 
 do not know what has become of Mr. N.," je ne sais ce 
 que M.N. est devenu; "he has become crazy," il est 
 devenu foa. 
 
 665. Behave is rendered by se conduire; "to behave 
 like," agir en; as, " they behaved well," Us se sont Men 
 conduits; " he behaved like a hero," il a agi en heros — 
 en homme brav-e ; "the children behave very badly," les 
 enfants se conduisent tres mal — . 
 
 666. Bid. " To bid good-by — farewell," is rendered by 
 
264 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 667-673. 
 
 dire adieu or f aire ses adieux; as, "I bid you good-by," 
 je vous fais mes adieux ; " bid him good-by for me," 
 dites-lui adieu de ma part or faites-lui mes adieux. 
 
 a. " To bid good-day, good-morning," souhaiter le bon 
 jour ; " I bid you good-day, sir,"Je vous souhaite le bon 
 four, monsieur. 
 
 667. Blow. " To come to blows," en venir aux coups ; 
 " without striking a blow," sans coup ferir ; " to blow 
 a trumpet," sonner de la trompette ; " to blow one's nose," 
 se moucher. 
 
 668. Board. "To board," etre en pension; " where do 
 you board ?" oil etes-vous en pension f " I board at Mr. 
 Staal's," je suis en pension chez M. Staal. 
 
 a. " To take boarders," recevoir des pensionnaires. 
 
 669. Boil. When "to boil" is used actively, it is ex- 
 pressed by faire bouillir; as, "boil a little milk " faites 
 bouillir un peu de lait. 
 
 670. Business. "Mind your business," occupez-vous de 
 vos affaires ; " to set up business," getablir ; "his father 
 set him up in business," sonpere Vetablit. 
 
 671. Can. This verb is rendered by p>ouvoir ; as, " can 
 you go with me ?" pouvez-vous m? accompagner f When 
 employed with a negation it is often rendered by the 
 conditional of savoir ; "I can not endure it," Je ne 
 saurais le souffrir / "that can not be," cela ne saurait 
 etre. 
 
 a. When " can" means " to know how," it is expressed 
 by savoir ; as, "can you read Latin?" savez-vous lire le 
 latin f 
 
 672. Care. "What do I care for that?" qu'est-ce que 
 ca me fait ? " I don't care for him,"/e me moque de lui. 
 
 673. Comfortable. " Make yourself comfortable," 
 mettez-vous d voire aise / " they are in comfortable cir- 
 cumstances," Us sont dans Taisance, or Us ont de quoi 
 vivre. 
 
§ 674-683.] idiomatic phrases. 265 
 
 674. Concern. "This does not concern you," cela ne 
 vous regarde pas^ or ce n'est pas votre affaire ; " what 
 do you concern yourself about?" de quoi vous mettez- 
 vous en peine? 
 
 675. Dash. When this word means a " bit," " a trace," 
 it is rendered by un petit grain / as, "there is a dash of 
 madness in his make," ily a un petit grain defolie dans 
 sa constitution. 
 
 a. " To cut a dash" is expressed by /aire de Vetalage. 
 
 676. Day. "It is broad day," il fait grand jour ; 
 " every other day," tous les deux jours ; " this day week," 
 dans huit jours ; "this day fortnight," d^aujounVhui en 
 quinze. 
 
 677. Do. "How do you do?" comment vous portez- 
 vous f 
 
 678. Drop. "To drop a word," laisser echapper une 
 parole; "to drop an acquaintance," renoncer d la con- 
 naissance d' un ami y " let us drop the subject," ne par- 
 Ions plus de cela ; " when you arrive, drop me a line," 
 quand vous arriverez, ecrivez-moi un mot. 
 
 679. Early. This term is rendered by de bonne heure / 
 as, "you rise early," vous vous levez de bonne heure ; 
 " as early as possible," le plus tot possible. * 
 
 680. End. "To be at one's wits' end," ne savoir que 
 /aire; "he is at his wits' end," il ne sait que fair e ; 
 " his hair stood on end," ses chevaux se dressaient sur la 
 tete. 
 
 681. Eye. "The apple of the eye," la prunelle des 
 yeux; " the sun is in my eyes," le soleil me donne dans 
 les yeux. 
 
 682. Fain. Render this word by bien with vouloir or 
 by volontiers ; as, " he would fain do it," il voudrait bien 
 le faire ; " I would fain go, but — ," jHrais volontiers 
 mais — . 
 
 683. Far. The phrase " how far is it" may be ex- 
 
 M 
 
266 FRENCH GEAHMAE. [§ 684-690. 
 
 pressed by eombien y a-t-il; as, " how far is it from here 
 to Havana ?" eombien y a-t-il dHci d la Havane f "Far 
 be it from" is rendered by d Dieu ne plaise que; as, 
 " far be it from me to do that," d Dieu ne plaise que je 
 fasse cela. 
 
 684. Fault. "Whose fault is it?" d qui la fautef 
 " It is not my fault," ee n'est pas ma faute, or il ne 
 tient pas a moi ; " to find fault with," bldmer or trouver 
 d reclire d; "I find no fault in him,"^ ne le blame point, 
 je ne trouve point d redire a lui. 
 
 685. Fellow. When this word means "mates" it is 
 translated by pared/ as, " ces gants ne sont pas pareils," 
 these gloves are not fellows. When it means " com- 
 panion" it is rendered compagnon ; as, "he was my fel- 
 low-traveler," il etait mon compagnon de voyage ; " a 
 fellow-creature" is rendered by un semblable ; " a fel- 
 low-soldier," camarade. 
 
 686. Fight. This verb may be rendered by combattre 
 when a general engagement is meant, and by se battre in 
 speaking of an individual contest; as, " to fight a battle," 
 livrer une bataille or f aire la guerre; " a great battle has 
 been fought," on a livre une grande bataille. 
 
 687. Fine. "To fine,"me^re a V amende; "they have 
 been fined in the sum of one hundred francs," on les a 
 condamne d une amende de cent francs. 
 
 688. Fiee. Meaning " to set fire to," render by mettre 
 lefeu a; as, " he has fired this bridge in several places," 
 il a mis lefeu d ce pont en plusieurs endroits ; "to fire 
 a gun," tirer un fusil; "there is a great fire," il y a un 
 grand incendie. 
 
 689. Folks. This word maybe rendered by monde or 
 on ; as, " what will folks say?" que dira le monde or que 
 dira-t-onf "there were many folks at the church," il 
 y avait beaucoup de monde d Veglise. 
 
 690. Fond. "To be fond of" is expressed by aimer; 
 
§ 691-699.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 267 
 
 as, " are you fond of music ?" aimez-vous la musique ? 
 "are you fond of walking ?" aimez-vous la promenade? 
 a. " To be very fond of" is rendered by aimer pas- 
 sionnement or etre tres passionne pour y as, " I am very 
 fond of dancing," faime passionnement la danse, or je 
 suis tres passionne pour la danse. 
 
 691. Foot. " From head to foot," de la tete auxpieds. 
 
 692. Forbid. " God forbid that — ," a Dieu ne plaise 
 que — . 
 
 693. Force. "To force one's way through a crowd," 
 s^ouvrir un passage deforce; "to force a thing from 
 some one," arracher une chose d quelqiCun ; " he forced 
 it from me," it me Varracha. 
 
 694. Forgive. Pardonner or remettre ; as, "I will for- 
 give him this once,"Je lui pardonnerai cette fois; "he 
 forgave the debt," il remit la dette. 
 
 695. Forth. "From this time forth," dorenavant ; 
 " and so forth," et ainsi de suite. 
 
 696. Gab. "To have the gift of gab" is rendered by 
 avoir la langue Men pendue. 
 
 697. Get. "To get one's living" is expressed by gagner 
 sa vie; as, " how does he get his living?" comment gagne- 
 t-il sa vie ? 
 
 a. Get, meaning "to obtain," is rendered by chercher; 
 as, " do you wish me to get you one ?" voulez-vous que 
 je vous en cherche un? "to get cold," attraper un 
 rhume. 
 
 b. Sometimes "get" is employed inelegantly in Eng- 
 lish, and may be dispensed with; in such case it is 
 always omitted in French ; as, " have you got your 
 shawl ?" avez-vous voire chdle ? 
 
 698. Give. In such sentences as "these shoes will give," 
 meaning " will enlarge," the verb preter is to be used — 
 ces souliers preteront ; " the leather gives," le cuir prete. 
 
 699. Glad. "To be glad" is rendered by etre Men 
 
268 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 700-705. 
 
 aise; as, "I am glad to hear it" je suis Men aise de 
 Vapprendre; "I am glad to see him,"^ suis bien aise de 
 le voir. 
 
 700. Handsome. " To look handsome in," -when refer- 
 ence is made to some becoming article of dress, is ren- 
 dered by avoir bon air avec; as, "you look handsome 
 in that coat," vous avez bon air avec cet habit. 
 
 701. Harm. When this verb means u to injure," it 
 may be expressed by /aire du mal or de mal; as, "take 
 a cup of coffee ; it will not harm you," prenez une tasse de 
 cafe; cela ne vous J -era pas de mal; "there is no harm 
 done," il rCy a pas de mal. 
 
 702. Hat. The phrase " to touch the hat to some one" 
 is rendered by saluer quelqu'un; as, "this gentleman 
 always touches his hat to me," ce monsieur me salue 
 toujour s ; "hats off," d bas les chapeaux. 
 
 703. Here. "Here is" and "here are" may be ex- 
 pressed by void, as in the following phrases : 
 
 Sere he is coming, le void qui vient. 
 
 Sere are some, en void. 
 
 Sere is what you want, void ce que vous voulez. 
 
 Sere they are, les void. 
 
 704. Hit. " To hit the nail on the head" is expressed 
 by J rapper juste ; "to hit the mark," toucher le but. 
 
 a. " To hit a thing," meaning " to discover, to guess," 
 is rendered by deviner juste; "you've hit it," vous 
 Vavez devine juste. 
 
 705. How. The use of this word may be best illus- 
 trated by examples. 
 
 Sow dear these things are! comme ces choses-hl sont 
 
 cheres ! 
 Sow rich that man is ! que cet homme est riche ! 
 Sow is that ? comment cela se fait-il ? 
 Sow far will you take us ? jusquloil nous menerez' 
 
 vous? 
 
§ 706-711.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 269 
 
 How long have you been in France ? combien de temps 
 
 avez-vous ete en France ? 
 How soon will they come ? quand viendront-ils ? 
 How true that is I can not say, jusqiCd quel point cela 
 
 est vrai, je ne saurais le dire. 
 How short life is ! que or comme la vie est courte ! 
 How is it that — ? d r oil vient-il que — ? 
 
 706. Inquire. " To inquire into" is rendered by sHn- 
 former de; as, " they are inquiring into this affair," Us 
 sHnforment de cette affaire; "they have all inquired 
 about you," Us se sont tous informes de vous. 
 
 707. Kind. The phrase "to be so kind as to" is ex- 
 pressed by avoir la bonte de; as, " be so kind as to give 
 him this coat," ay ez la bonte de lui remettre cet habit. 
 
 708. Know. "To know," meaning "to be acquainted 
 with," is rendered by connaitre ; "to know," as the re- 
 sult of inquiry, savoir; "I know him," Je le connais ; 
 " I know it," Je le sais ; " do you know this man ?" con- 
 naissez-vous cet homme f " No, but I know where he 
 lives," non, maisje sais oil il demeure. 
 
 709. Laugh. " To laugh in one's face" is rendered by 
 rire au nez de quelquhm; "if you tell him that, he will 
 laugh in your face," si vous lui parlez ainsi, il vous rira 
 au nez; "to laugh in one's sleeve," rire sous cape. 
 
 710. Like. This verb is commonly expressed by trou- 
 ver or plaire; as, "how do you like him?" comment le 
 trouvez-vous or vous plait-UP "I like this meat very 
 much," Je trouve cette viande excellente; "do you like 
 this book?" ce livre vous plait-il? 
 
 711. Look. "To look," meaning "to appear," is ren- 
 dered by avoir Pair; as, "he looks happy," il a Vair 
 heureux; "they look very important," Us ont Vair tres 
 important. 
 
 a. " To look well," meaning " to become," is rendered 
 by aller Men d; as, "these jewels do not look well on 
 
2 TO FRENCH GEAMMAPw [§712-717. 
 
 you," ces bijoux ne vous vont pas Men; "she looked 
 well in that dress," cette parure lui allait Men. 
 
 b. " To look well or ill," referring to state of health, 
 is expressed by avoir bonne mine, avoir mauvaise mine. 
 
 712. Matter. "What is the matter?" qu'est-ce or 
 qiCy a-t-il? "no matter," rfimporte; "it matters lit- 
 tle," il importe peu; "what's the matter with him?" 
 qu'a-t-il? (See 652.) 
 
 713. Mean. "To mean" is generally expressed by 
 vouloir dire; as, "what does this mean?" qiCest-ce que 
 cela veut dire? "that is not what I meant," ce rfest 
 pas Id ce que je voulais dire. 
 
 a. " To mean," in the sense of " to do on purpose," is 
 /aire expres or a dessein ; as, " do you think it was 
 meant?" croyez-vous que cela ait etefait expres or d des- 
 sein f " he means well," ses intentions sont bonnes. 
 
 714. Miss. "To miss the mark," manquer le but; "to 
 miss," manquer; "do you miss any thing?" vous man- 
 que-t-il quelque chose 9 "we never miss any thing," il 
 ne nous manque jamais rien; "I missed catching him," 
 fai manque de Tattraper. 
 
 715. Month. "What day of the month is it?" quel 
 jour du mois est-ce or avons-nous ? " It is the twelfth," 
 tfest le douze, or nous avons le douze. 
 
 716. Must. This verb is expressed hjfalloir used uni- 
 personally when it indicates obligation, by devoir when 
 it means intention, destination; as, "must I tell it?" 
 faut-il queje le disef "he must pay at last," il faudra 
 quHl paie d la fin ; "he must be at my house by nine 
 o'clock" {lie is to be, etc.), il doit etre chez moi d neuf 
 heures. 
 
 717. Near. "To be near," meaning "to be on the 
 point of," is rendered by etre sur le point de; as, " he 
 came near being expelled," il etait sur le point cVetre 
 chasse; " I came near going," j'etais sur le point dialler. 
 
§ 718-725.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 271 
 
 a. " To come near," meaning " to have liked to," is 
 rendered by peu ien faut que followed by ne; as, "he 
 came near being drowned," peu s>en estfallu qitil ne se 
 fUt noye. 
 
 718. Negative. "Is he not," "does he not," "will 
 they not," and all negative interrogatives which are sim- 
 ilarly employed in English after an affirmation, must be 
 expressed in French by the phrase rfest-ce pas, " vrai" 
 being understood ; as, " he is wealthy, is he not ?" il est 
 riche, rCest-cepasf " she will go, will she not?" elle ira, 
 n'est-ee pas f " they had some, had they not ?" Us en 
 avaient, n'est-ce pas f 
 
 719. Nose. "To speak through one's nose" is express- 
 ed by parler du nez: "this man speaks through his 
 nose," cet hotnmeparle du nez. 
 
 720. Nothing. " To be good for nothing" is render- 
 ed by ne valoir rien or rfetre bon d rien : " this ink is 
 good for nothing," cette encre ne vaut rien, or rfest bonne 
 a rien; "he is a good-for-nothing," c'est un vaurien. 
 
 721. Obligation. "To be under an obligation to" is 
 translated by avoir de V obligation d : " I am under great 
 obligations to him," je lui ai de grandes obligations. 
 
 722. Oblige. When this verb means " to do the favor 
 to," it is rendered by faire le plaisir de : " will you 
 oblige us with your company at dinner?" voulez-vous 
 nous faire le plaisir de diner avec nous? 
 
 723. Off. "He is off," il est parti ; "I am off," Je 
 rtfen vais; "hands off," a bas les mains; "off with his 
 head," d bas sa tete. 
 
 724. Old. The phrase "to be old" is rendered by 
 avoir — ans when it refers to the age of a person ; as, 
 " how old are you ?" quel age avez-vous f " I am ten 
 years old" j'ai dix ans; "I am not yet thirty years 
 old," je rtai pas encore trente ans. 
 
 725. On. When this preposition is used in English 
 
272 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 726-733. 
 
 before dates, such as " on the tenth," " on the second," 
 and before days of the week, as " on Sunday," " on Tues- 
 day," it is not translated in French, the article alone be- 
 ing employed : " I shall be there on the twentieth," fy 
 serai le vingt; "he will return on Wednesday," il re- 
 viendra le Mercredi or Mercredi. 
 
 726. Ought. This verb is translated by "devoir;" 
 but as the English word is defective, care must be taken 
 to ascertain the time referred to, whether present, past, 
 or future. " You ought not to do it," votes ne devez pas 
 lefaire; "he ought {should have) to have made a pleas- 
 ure of his duty," il aurait cM se /aire un plaisir de son 
 devoir. 
 
 727. Pain. "To take pains" is rendered by se donner 
 de la peine : " to have a pain in," sentir une douleur a ; 
 " he has a pain in his finger," il sent une douleur au doigt. 
 
 728. Part. "To act the part of," jouer le role de; 
 "he acts the part of the Knight in this piece," il joue le 
 rSle du "Chevalier" dans cette piece; "he acted or play- 
 ed his part w T ell," iljoua Men son rdle. 
 
 a. " For my part" is rendered by quant a moi. 
 
 729. Pass. "To come to pass," meaning "to happen," 
 is expressed by arriver or sefaire; as, "it came to pass 
 that — ," il arriva que — . 
 
 730. Peep. "To take a peep" is rendered hy jeter un 
 coup d'ceil. " Peep of day," point dujour; " they came 
 at the peep of day," Us arriver ent au point du jour. 
 
 731. Play, meaning "to assume," is rendered by 
 /aire; as, "he plays the fool," il fait le sot; "he likes 
 to play the man of influence," il aime d faire Vhomme 
 d'' importance. 
 
 732. Please. " If you please," sHl vou's plait; " if she 
 please," sHl lui plait; "if they please," sHlleur plait. 
 
 733. Pulse. "To feel the pulse," tdter le pouls; 
 " have you felt his pulse ?" lui avez-vous tdte le pouls f 
 

 § 734-743.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 273 
 
 734. Question. " To ask a question," faire une ques- 
 tion; "I wish to ask him a question," Je veitx lid faire 
 ane question. 
 
 735. Rather. "I would rather" is rendered by fai- 
 merais mieux; *"I had rather stay than go" f aimer ais 
 mieux rester que de partir. 
 
 736. Remember. "To remember one to" is expressed 
 by rappeler quelqiCun aic souvenir de; "remember me 
 to your wife," rappelez-moi au souvenir de votre epouse. 
 
 737. Respects. " To present one's respects to" is ren- 
 dered by presenter ses respects d; "give my respects to 
 your sister," presentez mes respects d Mademoiselle votre 
 sceur. 
 
 738. Ride. "To take a ride," se promener a cheval or 
 se promener en voiture, according as we mean to go on 
 a horse or in a carriage; thus, " will you take a ride 
 (on horseback) ?" voulez-vous vous promener d cheval f 
 " No, I will ride in my carriage," non, je vais me pro- 
 mener en voiture. 
 
 739. Right. "To be right" is rendered by avoir rai- 
 so)i; as, "he is right and I am wrong," il a raison et 
 fai tort. 
 
 740. Sake. "For the sake of," pour V 'amour de; "do 
 it for my sake," faites-le pour V amour de moi. 
 
 741. Same. "It is the same to me," or "it is all the 
 same to me," is rendered by ce m^est egal; c'est la meme 
 chose pour moi. 
 
 742. Send. "To send for" is expressed by envoyer 
 chercher or querir; as, "I sent for my friend," $ envoy ai 
 chercher mon ami; " send for the doctor," envoy ez cher- 
 cher le medecin. 
 
 743. Since. " It is a year since we have seen him," il 
 y a mi an que nous ne Vavons vu; " how long is it since 
 he died?" combien y a-t-il qiCil est mort. "Not long 
 since," il vCy a pas longtemps. 
 
 M2 
 
274 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 744-752. 
 
 744. Smell. " To smell of," in the sense of " savor," 
 is expressed by sentir alone; as, "this wine smells of 
 the soil," ce vin sent le terroir. 
 
 745. Sore. "To have sore — " is expressed by avoir 
 mal d; as, "to have sore eyes," avoivmal aux yeux ; 
 " he has a sore finger," il a mal au doigt. 
 
 746. Speech. " To lose one's speech," perdre V usage 
 de la parole; " he has lost his speech," il a perdu Vusage 
 de la parole. 
 
 747. Stand. "To stand," when it refers to the up- 
 right position literally, is rendered by rester or se tenir 
 debout; in other cases it is variously translated accord- 
 ing to its meaning: "he stood up," il se tint debout ; 
 " London stands (is) on the Thames," Londres est sur la 
 Tamise; "to stand in the highest rank," se trouver au 
 plus haut rang. 
 
 748. Stress. "To lay stress upon," tfappuyer sur; 
 "to lay great stress upon," s'appuyer fortement sur; 
 "he laid great stress upon this idea," il tfappuya forte- 
 ment sur cette pensee. 
 
 749. Take. "To take," meaning "to subscribe for 
 newspapers, journals," etc., is rendered by tfabonner d; 
 as, " what paper do you take ?" a quel journal vous 
 abonnez - vous f "I take the Harpers' Weekly,"^ 
 mbdbonne au journal hebdomadaire de Harper. 
 
 750. Teens. " To be in one's teens" is rendered by 
 rf avoir pas vingt ans; "she is yet in her teens," elle 
 n?a pas encore vingt ans. 
 
 751. There. This word may be expressed by y placed 
 before the verb, or by Id placed after it : "I was not 
 there," je rty etaispas; "put it there," mettez-le Id. 
 
 752. Throughout, dans tout or par tout; as, "we 
 looked for him throughout the town," nous Vavons 
 cherche par toute la ville; "throughout the course of a 
 long life," dans tout le cours dhme longice vie. 
 
§ 753-761.] IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 275 
 
 753. Time. "What time is it?" quelle heure est-ilf 
 " tell me the time," dites-moi Vheure. 
 
 754. Trouble. "To trouble one" is rendered by de- 
 ranger quelqiCun; as, "do not trouble him," ne le de- 
 rangez pas; "do not trouble yourself," ne vous de- 
 rangez pas. 
 
 755. Uttermost. "The uttermost parts," les parties 
 les plus reculees. 
 
 756. "Wage. "To wage war" is rendered by / aire la 
 guerre; as, "he waged war with his enemies," il Jit la 
 guerre d ses ennemis. 
 
 757. "Walk. "When "walk" signifies "the action of 
 walking," it is expressed by marcher; but when it 
 means "to walk for pleasure or amusement," se pro- 
 mener is employed. " He walked at a great pace," il 
 marcha d grands pas; "will you walk with me?" 
 voidez-vous vous promener avec moi f 
 
 758. "Want. " To want," meaning " to desire," is ren- 
 dered by voidoir; when it means " to need," by avoir 
 besoin; "what do you want?" que voidez-vous? "I 
 want nothing," je ne veux rien; " what do you want 
 (need)?" de quoi avez-vous besoin P 
 
 a. " To be in want of," manquer; " we are in want 
 of nothing," rien ne nous manque. 
 
 759. "Will and Shall are both expressed by vouloir 
 in French when they assert a determination, and by the 
 future tense when they assert a promise or refer to fu- 
 ture time ; as, " I will go," je veux aller; " I shall go," 
 firai; "he says that he will pay me to-morrow," il dit 
 quHl one paiera demain. 
 
 760. Worth. "To be worth the while," valoir la 
 peine; " it is not worth the while," il ne vaut pas la 
 peine; "to be worth," valoir; "how much is this 
 worth," eombien vaut celaP 
 
 761. There are in English a great many verbs which, 
 
276 FKENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 762. 
 
 when united to prepositions or adverbs, have another 
 signification, and must be translated according to their 
 derived meaning. Thus " to go" is rendered by aller, 
 but "to go down" by descendre; again, "to go up" 
 means " to ascend," and is translated by monter ; " to 
 take" is expressed by prendre, but " to take away" by 
 oter; " to speak," parler, but " to speak extempore" is 
 improviser ; "to let" is laisser, but "to let down" is 
 baisser ; " to pull," tirer, but " to pull out or up," ar- 
 racher ; " to run," courir, but " to run away," s'enfuir; 
 " to come," venir, but " to come forward," avancer. 
 
 FAMILIAR PHRASES AND DIALOGUES. 
 
 762. Que dites-vous du temps ? what do you say of the 
 
 weather ? 
 II va pleuvoir, it is going to rain. 
 Fera-t-il beau demain? will it he pleasant to-morrow? 
 Quelle heure est-il? what 6 ^ clock is it? 
 II est neuf heures moins dix, it is ten minutes to nine. 
 Votre montre avance, your watch is too fast. 
 Non, elle retarde, no, it is too slow. 
 Comment vous portez-vous ? how do you do ? 
 Je me porte assez bien, I am pretty icell. 
 Quel jour du mois est-ce? what day of the month 
 
 is it ? 
 C'est le vingt, it is the twentieth. 
 Je ne sais pas, I do not Tcnow. 
 
 Qui frappc a la porte? who is knocking at the door? 
 C'est moi ! c'est lui ! it is I! it is he! 
 Que faites-vous faire? what are you having made? 
 Je fais faire une belle robe, I am having a handsome 
 
 dress made. 
 Quel age avez-vous ? how old are you ? 
 Je suis age de vingt ans, or J'ai vingt ans, I am twenty 
 
 years old. 
 

 § 762.] FAMILIAR PHRASES. 277 
 
 Avez-vous vu le chemin de fer de Paris a Marseille ? have 
 you seen the Paris and Marseilles railway f 
 
 Oui, monsieur ; j'ai fait un voyage par ce chemin de fer, 
 yes, sir; I have traveled by that raihoay. 
 
 Avez-vous ete a Paris ? have you been at Paris f 
 
 Oui, monsieur ; j'ai ete dans la capitale de la France, yes, 
 sir; I have been in the capital of France. 
 
 La semaine a sept jours ; voici leurs noms : dimanche, 
 lundi, mardi, mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, samedi, the 
 week has seven days ; here are their names: Sunday, 
 Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, 
 Saturday. 
 
 L'annee a douze mois, dont voici les noms : Janvier, fev- 
 rier, mars (s vocal), avril, mai, juin, juillet, aout (oo), 
 septembre, octobre, novembre, decembre,* the year 
 has tioelve months, as folloics: January, February, 
 March, April, May, June, July, August, September, 
 October, November, December. 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau ? ichat is the news ?. 
 
 II y a eu une grande bataille, there has been a great battle. 
 
 Quand eut-elle lieu? when did it take place f 
 
 La semaine passee, le dix, last week, the tenth. 
 
 Qu'avez-vous ? what ails you f 
 
 J'ai sommeil, I am sleepy. 
 
 Nous ne l'avons pas vu depuis son retour, we have not 
 seen him since his return. 
 
 Combien y a-t-il qu'il est mort ? hoio long ago did he 
 die? 
 
 Je vous souhaite le bonsoir, I icish you a good evening. 
 
 Faisons un tour de promenade, let us take a walk. 
 
 Non, je me sens trop fatigue, no, I feel too tired. 
 
 Combien faites-vous ces gants? how much do you ask 
 for these gloves f 
 
 * The French write the names of the months and days of the 
 week with a small initial letter, not in capitals as in English. 
 
278 FRENCH GEAMHAE. [§ 762. 
 
 Xe faites pas de questions, ask no questions. 
 
 Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis je n'ai eu le plaisir 
 
 de vous voir ? how have you been since I have had 
 
 the pleasure of seeing you ? 
 Je me suis tres bien porte, merci, I have been very well, 
 
 thank you. 
 II fait froid, il fait chaud, it is cold, it is warm. 
 Parlez-vous francais ? do you speak French ? 
 Oui, monsieur; je le parle un peu, yes, sir; I speak it a 
 
 very little. 
 Je le lis mieux que je ne le parle, I read it better than I 
 
 speak it. 
 Vous devriez l'apprendre a parler, monsieur, you ought 
 
 to learn to speak it, sir. 
 Racontez-moi une petite histoire en francais, tell me a 
 
 little story in French. 
 "Vous en trouverez assez dans l'"Ami des Enfants," you 
 
 will find enough of them in the " Children's Friend" 
 Qu'est-ce que e'est que cela ? what is that ? 
 C'est un livre tres amusant par Berquin, it is a very en- 
 tertaining book by Berquin. 
 Aimez-vous a danser? do you like to dance? 
 J'aime mieux a etudier, I prefer to study. 
 Adieu, je m'en vais, good-by, Fm going. 
 II faut que j'aille chez moi, I must go home. 
 Ou as-tu appris le francais, ma fille ? as-tu ete en France ? 
 
 where have you learned French, my daughter? have 
 
 you been in France ? 
 Je n'ai pas ete en France; j'ai appris le francais aux 
 
 Etats-Unis, I have not been in France; I learned 
 
 French in the United States. 
 Ta mere est done Francaise? your mother is a French 
 
 woman, then ? 
 Xon, madame, ma mere est Americaine, mais nous avons 
 
 eu une gouvernante francaise et, pendant deux ans, on 
 
§ 762.] FAMILIAR PHEASES. 279 
 
 a parle francais dans notre faraille, no, madam, my 
 mother is an American lady, but toe have had a 
 French governess, and, for two years, French has 
 been spoken in our family. 
 
 Est-il vrai, mes amis, que vous ayez ete a Paris l'ete der- 
 nier ? is it true, my friends, that you icere at Fains 
 last summer f 
 
 Oui, monsieur, cela est vrai; nous avons ete dans cette 
 capitale pendant un mois, yes, sir, that is true; we ivere 
 a month in that metropolis. 
 
 Avez-vous ete au spectacle? were you at the theatre? 
 
 Nous avons ete dans plusieurs theatres, ice attended sev- 
 eral theatres. 
 
 Comment avez-vous trouve les rues et les places de 
 Paris ? how were you pleased with the streets and pub- 
 lic squares of Faris f 
 
 II y a dans cette capitale une quantite de belles rues et 
 plusieurs places magnifiques : par exemple, la place de 
 la Concorde ; mais en general les rues de Paris, sur- 
 tout dans la Cite, sont etroites et sales, there are in 
 this metropolis a number of handsome streets and sev- 
 eral superb squares: for example, Harmony Square; 
 but in general the streets of Faris, especially in that 
 part called " the City" are narrow and filthy. 
 
 Ou avez-vous demeure a Paris ? where did you, "put up" 
 in Faris f 
 
 Nous avons loge dans un hotel de la rue de Rivoli, pres 
 du Louvre, ice "put up" in a hotel on the Rue Bivoli, 
 near the Louvre. 
 
 On Pappelle le Grand Hotel du Louvre, n'est-ce pas ? it 
 is called the " Grand Hotel du Louvre," is it not f 
 
 Le Louvre est un grand et beau palais ou il y a mainte- 
 nant un musee, the Louvre is a large and beautiful 
 palace in lohich there is at present a museum. 
 
 Autrefois la statue du due d'Orleans, ills de Louis-Phil- 
 
280 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 763. 
 
 ippe, etait dans la cour de ce palais, formerly the statue 
 of the Duke of Orleans, son of Louis Philippe, stood 
 in the court of this palace. 
 
 No. III.— LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 763. In the subjoined list are comprehended the most 
 common abbreviations employed in commerce and lit- 
 erature. 
 
 A. Aceepte, Accepted. 
 
 A. Cte. A compte, On account. 
 
 A -p. A -nw • • (In the year of our 
 
 A. D. Anno Domini, \ _ .- . _ ^ 
 
 ( Lord. 
 
 . ~ ( Assurances eene- ) _, 
 
 A. (jt. \ , \ General insurance. 
 
 ( rales, ) 
 
 A.M. AnnoMundi, j Iu the year of the 
 
 ( world. 
 A. M. Assurance mutuelle, Mutual insurance. 
 
 A P. A protester. To be protested. 
 
 . T xr i Assurance pour la ) x . « . 
 A. P. L. V . ■{ r y Life insurance. 
 
 ( vie, ) 
 
 A o -r. a ./ *a' a (Accepted under pro- 
 
 A.S.P. Aceepte sous protet,-j *_ r 
 
 ( Acce P t6 soar P''°- | Accepted under pro- 
 A.S.P.C. j tet pour mettre J test on acc0Hnt . 
 
 { a compte, ; 
 
 c. a. d. e'est-a-dire, that is to say. 
 
 Cie. Compagnie, Company. 
 
 Com. Compte, Account. 
 
 Comp. R. Compagnie Royale, Royal company. 
 
 C te - Comte, Count. 
 
 C tesse - Comtesse, Countess. 
 
 C er - Chevalier, Chevalier, Knight. 
 
 P. Don ou Dom, Spanish title, " Don.''' 
 
 Dec. ou X bre - Decembre, December. 
 
§ 763.] 
 
 ABBKEVIATIO"NS. 
 
 281 
 
 Doctor in medicine. 
 
 Doctor. 
 
 East. '- 
 
 Pounds sterling. 
 Place of the seal. 
 Their Majesties. 
 
 D. M. Docteur Medecin, 
 Dr. Docteur, 
 
 E. Est, 
 J-C. Jesus-Christ. 
 L. St. Livres Sterlings, 
 L. S. Locus sigilli, 
 LL. MM. Leurs Majestes, 
 
 (Leurs Majestes Im- Their Imperial Majes- 
 ( periales, ties. 
 
 LL MM PR J Leurs Majestes Roy- Their Royal Majes- 
 ( ales, ties. 
 
 Leurs Altesses, Their Highnesses, 
 
 j Maison assuree con- House insured against 
 ( tre l'incendie, 
 Monsieur, 
 
 LL.MM.IL 
 
 LL.AA. 
 
 M.A.C.I 
 
 M. 
 
 MM. ■ 
 
 M. 
 
 M gr - 
 M d. 
 
 M de. 
 
 M me> 
 
 M lle. 
 
 Msc. 
 
 Mss. 
 
 N. 
 
 N°- 
 
 N.B. 
 
 N.-D. 
 
 N.S.J.-C. 
 
 N.S. 
 
 Neg'- 
 
 N. 
 
 Nov. ou 9 bre 
 
 Messieurs, 
 
 Midi, 
 
 Mon seigneur, 
 
 Marchand, 
 
 Marchande, 
 
 Madame, 
 
 Mademoiselle, 
 
 Manuscrit, 
 
 Manuscrits, 
 
 Napoleon, 
 
 Numero, 
 
 Nota bene, 
 
 Notre-Dame, 
 j Notre Seigneur Je- 
 ( sus-Christ, 
 
 Notre Seigneur, 
 
 Negociant, 
 
 Nord, 
 
 Novembre, 
 
 fire. 
 
 Sir, Mr., Gentleman. 
 ( Sirs, Messrs., Gentle^ 
 ( men. 
 
 Noon, South. 
 
 My lord. 
 
 Merchant, Dealer. 
 
 Merchant (fern.). 
 
 Mrs., Madam. 
 
 Miss. 
 
 Manuscript. 
 
 Manuscripts. 
 
 Napoleon. 
 
 Number. 
 
 Take notice. 
 
 Our Lady. 
 
 t O urLor d Jesus Christ. 
 
 Our Lord. 
 Merchant. 
 North. 
 November. 
 
282 
 
 O. 
 
 Oct. ou 8 bre - 
 
 P. 
 
 P.S. 
 
 p. ou pr. 
 
 P%. 
 
 P%o. 
 
 p. 
 
 Q.S. 
 
 Q. pu Qtl. 
 
 ,& 
 s.o. 
 
 S.E. 
 S.M. 
 
 Sept. ou 1 hre - 
 
 S.M. I. 
 S.M.B. 
 
 FRENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ V63. 
 
 Ouest, 
 
 Octobre, 
 
 Proteste, 
 
 Post-scriptum, 
 •pour ou par, 
 
 pour cent, 
 
 pour mille, 
 
 Page, 
 
 Quantite suffisante, 
 
 Quintal, 
 
 Sud, 
 
 Sud-Ouest, 
 
 Sud-Est, 
 
 Sa Majeste, 
 
 Septembre, 
 j Sa Majeste Impe- ) 
 ( riale, j 
 
 Sa Majeste Britan- 
 
 S.M.C. 
 
 S.M.T.C. 
 
 S.M.T.F. 
 
 S.A.R. 
 
 S.A.I. 
 
 S.Ex. 
 S.Era. 
 S.S.O. 
 
 S. 
 
 s.s. 
 
 S.H. 
 T.P. 
 
 ( nique. 
 
 j Sa Majeste Catho- j 
 
 ( lique, j 
 
 j Sa Majeste Tres 
 
 ( Chretienne, 
 
 j Sa Majeste Tres Fi- 
 
 ( dele, 
 
 Son Altesse Royale, 
 j Son Altesse Imperi- 
 ( ale, 
 
 Son Excellence, 
 
 Son Eminence, 
 
 Sud-Sud-Ouest, 
 
 Saint, 
 
 Sa Saintete, 
 
 Sa Hautesse, 
 j Travaux a perpetu- 
 ( ite, 
 
 West. 
 
 October. 
 
 Protested. 
 
 Postscript. 
 
 for or by. 
 
 per cent. 
 
 per thousand. 
 
 Page. 
 
 A sufficient quantity. 
 
 Hundred weight. 
 
 South. 
 
 South-west. 
 
 South-east. 
 
 His Majesty. 
 
 September. 
 
 His Imperial Majesty. 
 
 Her Britannic Majes- 
 
 His Catholic Majesty. 
 
 His Most Christian 
 Majesty. 
 
 His Most Faithful 
 Majesty. 
 
 His Royal Highness. 
 
 His Imperial High- 
 ness. 
 
 His Excellency. 
 
 His Eminence. 
 
 South-south-west. 
 
 Saint. 
 
 His Holiness. 
 
 His Highness. 
 
 Transportation for 
 life. 
 
§ 764.J 
 
 PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Y.A. 
 
 Votre Altesse, Your Highness. 
 
 V.E. 
 
 Yotre Excellence, Your Excellency. 
 
 V.M. 
 
 Yotre Majeste, Your Majesty. 
 
 VV. MM. 
 
 Yos Majestes, Your Majesties. 
 
 Y.G. 
 
 Yotre Grandeur, Your Grace. 
 
 283 
 
 No. IY.— PROPER NAMES. 
 
 764. The most common names of persons. Those 
 which are spelt the same in both languages will be 
 omitted. 
 
 Achille, Achilles. 
 Adelaide, Adelaide. 
 Adolphe, Adolphus. 
 Agathe, Agatha. 
 Agnes, Agnes. 
 Aimee, Amy. 
 Alain, Allen. 
 Alexandre, Alexander. 
 Alphee, Alpheus. 
 Alphonse, Alphonzo. 
 Ambroise, Ambrose. 
 Amelie, Amelia. 
 Andre, Andrew. 
 Anna, Hannah. 
 Anne, Ann, Anna. 
 Annette, Nancy. 
 Anselme, Anselm. 
 Antoine, Antony. 
 Apollon, Apollo. 
 Arabelle, Arabella. 
 Arnaud, Arnold. 
 Aser, Asher. 
 Auguste, Augustus. 
 
 Augustin, Austin. 
 Barthelemi, Bartholomew. 
 Basile, Basil. 
 Baudouin, Baldwin. 
 Benoit, Benedict, Bennet. 
 Berthe, Bertha. 
 Brigitte, Bridget. 
 Catherine, Catharine. 
 Cecile, Cecilia. 
 Celie, Celia. 
 Chariot, Charley. 
 Chloe, Chloe. 
 Chretien, Christian. 
 Christine, Christina. 
 Christophe, Christopher. 
 Clarisse, Clarissa. . 
 Claude, Claudius. 
 Claude, Claudia. 
 Clelie, Clelia. 
 Clement, Clement. 
 Clementine, Clementina. 
 Cleopatre, Cleopatra. 
 Clotilde, Clotilda. 
 
284 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ ?64. 
 
 Colomb, Columbus. 
 Cordelie, Cordelia. 
 Corinne, Corinna. 
 Corneille, Cornelius. 
 Cornelie, Cornelia. 
 Cupidon, Cupid. 
 Debora, Deborah. 
 Delie, Delia. 
 Dominique, Dominic. 
 Dorothee, Dorothy. 
 Drusille, Drusilla. 
 Dulcinee, Dulcinea. 
 Edmond, Edmund. 
 Edouard, Edward. 
 Eleonore, Eleanor. 
 Elie, Elias. 
 Elisabeth, Elizabeth. 
 Elise, Eliza. 
 Elisee, Elisha. 
 Emile, Emilius. 
 Emilie, Emily. 
 Erasrae, Erasmus. 
 Eraste, Erastus. 
 Esdras, Ezra. 
 Esope, JEsop. 
 Estienne, Stephens. 
 Etienne, Stephen. 
 Eugene, Eugene. 
 Eugenie, Eugenia. 
 Eustache, Eustace. 
 Felicie, Felicia. 
 Flore, Flora. 
 Francois, Francis. 
 Francoise, Frances. 
 Frederic, Frederick. 
 
 Gabrielle, Gabriella. 
 Gaspard, Jasper. 
 Gautier, Walter. 
 Gedeon, Gideon. 
 Geoffroy, Jeffry. 
 Georges, George. 
 Gilles, Giles. 
 Godefroy, Godfrey. 
 Gregoire, Gregory. 
 Guillaume, William. 
 Guillot, Will, Mil. 
 Gustave, Gustavus. 
 Helene, Helen. 
 Heloiise, Eloisa. 
 Henri, Henry. 
 Henriette, Henrietta. 
 Homfroi, Humphrey. 
 Hortense, Hortensia. 
 Hugues, Hugh. 
 Isabelle, Isabella. 
 Jacques, James. 
 Jean, John. 
 Jeanne, Jane. 
 Jeannette, Jenny. 
 Jeremie, Jeremy. 
 Josephe, Josephus. 
 Jo sue, Joshua. 
 Jules, Julius. 
 Julien, Julian. 
 Julienne, Juliana. 
 Juliette, Juliet. 
 Juste, Justus. 
 Laure, Laura. 
 Laurent, Lawrence. 
 Lavinie, Lavinia. 
 
§ 765.] 
 
 PKOPEE NAMES. 
 
 285 
 
 Lazare, Lazarus. 
 Leandre, Leander. 
 Lisette, Lizzie. 
 Livie, Livia. 
 Lothaire, Lothario. 
 Louis, Leiois. 
 Louise, Loitisa. 
 Luc, Lake. 
 Lucie, Lucy. 
 Lucien, Lucian. 
 Lucrece, Lucretia. 
 Lydie, Lydia. 
 Marc, Mark. 
 Marguerite, Margaret. 
 Marie, Mary. 
 Madeleine, Magdalene. 
 Marion, Molly. 
 Marthe, Martha. 
 Mathilde, Matilda. 
 Matthieu, Matthew. 
 Melisse, Melissa. 
 Michaud, Mike. 
 Michel, Michael. 
 Moi'se, Moses. 
 Nannette, Nancy. 
 Nicolas, Nicholas. 
 Ninon, Nina. 
 Olivie, Olivia. 
 
 Olivier, Oliver. 
 Ophelie, Ophelia. 
 Patrice, Patrick. 
 Phebe, Phebe. 
 Philippe, Philip. 
 Phinee, Phineas. 
 Pierre, Peter. 
 Priscille, Priscilla. 
 Randolph e, Randal. 
 Raoul, Ralph. 
 Renaud, Reynold. 
 Roland, Roicland. 
 Sara, Sarah. 
 Saul, Saul. 
 Seneque, Seneca. 
 Silvestre, Sylvester. 
 Sophie, Sophia. 
 Susanne, Susan. 
 Therese, Theresa. 
 Timothee, Timothy. 
 Urie, Uriah. 
 Ursule, Ursula. 
 Valentin, Valentine. 
 Victoire, Victoria. 
 Virginie, Virginia. 
 Wilhelmine, Wilhelmina. 
 Zacharie, Zachary. 
 
 165. The following embrace the names of the princi- 
 pal countries, cities, rivers, etc., which differ from the 
 English in orthography. The gender will be indicated 
 by the abbreviations "in." for masculine, and "f." for 
 feminine, placed after the proper name. 
 
 Acores, f., Azores. Afrique, f, Africa, 
 
286 
 
 FREXCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ M6. 
 
 Aix - la - Chapelle, Aix - la - 
 
 Chapelle. 
 Alexandrie, Alexandria. 
 Alger, Algiers. 
 Algerie, f., Algeria. 
 Allemagne, f., Germany. 
 Amazone, m., Amazon. 
 Amerique, f., America. 
 Amerique Centrale, Central 
 
 America. 
 Amerique du Sud, South 
 
 America. 
 Amerique du ISTord, North 
 
 America. 
 Andalousie, f., Andalusia. 
 Angleterre, f., England. 
 Antioche, Antioch. 
 Anvers, Antwerp. 
 Arabie, f., Arabia. 
 Archipel, m., Archipelago. 
 Annenie, f., Armenia. 
 Asie, f., Asia. 
 Asie Mineure, Asia Minor. 
 Assyrie, f., Assyria. 
 Athenes, Athens. 
 Australie, f., Australia. 
 Autriche, f., Austria. 
 Azin court, m., Agincourt. 
 Babylone, f., Babylon. 
 Bale, Basle. 
 Baltique, f., Baltic. 
 Barbade, f., Barbadoes. 
 Barbarie, f., Barbary. 
 Barcelone, Barcelona. 
 Baviere, f., Bavaria. 
 
 Belgique, f., Belgium. 
 Bermudes, f., Bermudas. 
 Boheme, f., Bohemia. 
 Bologne, Bologna. 
 Bordeaux, Bourdeaux. 
 Bosphore, m., Bosphorus. 
 Bourgogne, f., Burgundy. 
 Breme, Bremen. 
 Bresil, m., Brazil. 
 Bretagne, f., Brittany. 
 Cacbemire, Cashmire. 
 Caire, m., Cairo. 
 Californie, f., California. 
 
 Basse Californie, Lower 
 California. 
 
 Haute Californie, Upper 
 California. 
 Cantorbery, Canterbury. 
 Cap Blanc, Cape Blanco. 
 Cap Vert, Cape Verd. 
 Cap de Bonne Esperance, 
 
 Cape of Good Hope. 
 C ar th age n e, Carthage?ia. 
 Castille, f., Castile. 
 
 ISTouvelle Castille, New 
 Castile. 
 
 Vieille Castille, Old Cas- 
 tile. 
 Catalogne, f., Catalonia. 
 Ceylan, Ceylon. 
 Chaldee, f., Chaldea. 
 Chine, f., China. 
 Chypre, Cyprus. 
 Copenhague, Copenhagen. 
 Cordoue, f., Cordova. 
 
PROPER NAMES. 
 
 § M5.] 
 
 Corinthe, Corinth. 
 Corogne, f., Corunna. 
 Corse, f., Corsica. 
 Cracovie, Cracow. 
 Crimee, f., Crimea. 
 Damas, Damascus. 
 Danemarck, m., Denmark. 
 Dauphine, m., Dauphiny. 
 Douvres, Dover. 
 Dresde, Dresden. 
 Dunkerque, Dunkirk. 
 Ecosse, f., Scotland. 
 
 Nouvelle Ecosse, Nova 
 Scotia. 
 Edinbourg, Edinburgh. 
 Egypte, f., Egypt. 
 Ephese, f., Ephesus. 
 Escaut, m., Scheldt. 
 Espagne, f., Spain. 
 Estremadure, f., Estrema- 
 
 dura. 
 Etats - Unis, m., United 
 
 States. 
 Etats de PEglise, Pontifical 
 
 States. 
 Ethiopie, f., Ethiopia. 
 Euphrate, m., Euphrates. 
 Europe, f., Europe. 
 Ferrare, f., Ferrara. 
 Finlande, f., Finland. 
 Flandre, f., Flanders. 
 Flessingue, Flushing. 
 Frise, f., Friesland. 
 Galice, f., Qalicia. 
 Galles, f., Wales. 
 
 287 
 
 Nouvelle Galles, New 
 Wales. 
 
 Gand, Ghent. 
 
 Gascogne, f., Gascony. 
 
 Gaule, f., Gaul. 
 
 Genes, Genoa. 
 
 Geneve, Geneva. 
 
 Gottingue, Gottingen. 
 
 Grande Bretagne, f., Great 
 Britain. 
 
 Grece, f., Greece. 
 
 Grenade, Grenada. 
 
 Groenland, m., Greenland. 
 
 Gueldre, f., Guelder s. 
 
 Guyane, f., Guiana. 
 
 Guinee, f., Guinea. 
 
 Hainaut, m., Hainault. 
 
 Haiti, Hayti. 
 
 Havane, f., Havana. 
 
 Havre, ra., Havre. 
 
 Haye, f., Hague. 
 
 Hollande, f., Holland. 
 
 Hongrie, f., Hungary. 
 
 Iena, m., Jena. 
 
 Inde, f., India. 
 
 Indes Orientales, East In- 
 dies. 
 
 Indes Occidentals, West 
 Indies. 
 
 In do stan, m., Hindostan. 
 
 Irlande, f., Ireland. 
 
 Islande, f., Iceland. 
 
 Italie, f., Italy. 
 
 Jamaique, f., Jamaica. 
 
 Japon, m.j Japan. 
 
288 
 
 FEEXCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [§ 765. 
 
 Judee, f., Judea. 
 
 Laponie, £, Lapland. 
 
 Leyde, Ley den. 
 
 Liege, Liege. 
 
 Lille, Lisle. 
 
 Lisbonne, f., Lisbon. 
 
 Livourne, Leghorn. 
 
 Lombardie, f., Lombardy. 
 
 Londres, London. 
 
 Louisiane, f., Louisiana. 
 
 Lyon, Lyons. 
 
 Madere, Madeira. 
 
 Majorque, Majorca. 
 
 Malte, Malta. [nel. 
 
 La Manche, English Chan- 
 
 Mantoue, Mantua. 
 
 Maroc, m., Morocco. 
 
 Marseille, Marseilles. 
 
 Mayence, Mentz. \iiean. 
 
 Mediterranee, Mediterra- 
 
 Mer Blanche, White Sea. 
 
 Mer Jaune, Yellow Sea. 
 
 Mer Morte, Lead Sea. 
 
 Mer Rouge, Bed Sea. 
 
 Messine, Messina. 
 
 Mexique, m., Mexico. 
 
 Minorque, Minorca. 
 
 Modene, Modena. 
 
 Moscou, Moscow. 
 
 Nederlande, f., Nether- 
 lands. 
 
 Mmes, Nismes. 
 
 Norvege, f., Norway. 
 
 Nouvelle Angleterre, New 
 England. 
 
 Nouvelle Zemble, Nova 
 Zembla. 
 
 Oceanie, f., Oceanica. 
 
 Olympe, m., Olympus. 
 
 Orleans, Orleans. 
 
 Nouvelle Orleans, New 
 Orleans. 
 
 Otahiti, Otaheite. 
 
 Padoue, Padua. 
 
 Parme, Parma. 
 
 Patagonie, f., Patagonia. 
 
 Pays-Bas, m.-p.^Low Coun- 
 tries. 
 
 Perou, m., Peru. 
 
 Perse, f., Persia. 
 
 Phenicie, f., Phenicia. 
 
 Philadelphie, Philadelphia. 
 
 Philippines, f., Philippines. 
 
 Phrygie, f., Phrygia. 
 
 Piemont, m., Piedmont. 
 
 Pise, Pisa. 
 
 Plaisance, Piacenza. 
 
 Pologne, f., Poland. 
 
 Pont-Euxin, m., Euxine. 
 
 Provinces - Unies, United 
 Provinces. 
 
 Prusse, f., Prussia. 
 
 Ratisbonne, Ratisbon. 
 
 Ravenne, Ravenna. 
 
 Rhin, m., Rhine. 
 
 Bas Rhin, Loicer Rhine. 
 Haut Rhin, Upper Rhine. 
 
 Royaume - Uni , United 
 Kingdom. 
 
 Russie, f., Russia. 
 
§ 766.] 
 
 PJJOPER NAMES. 
 
 289 
 
 Saint-Domingue, Saint Do- 
 mingo. \lena. 
 
 Sainte-Helene, Saint He- 
 
 Saragosse, Saragossa. 
 
 Sardaigne, f., Sardinia. 
 
 Saverne, f., Severn. 
 
 Savoie, f., Savoy. 
 
 Saxe, f., Saxony. 
 
 Scanie, £, Scania. 
 
 Setuval, St. Ubes. 
 
 Seville, Seville. 
 
 Sicile, f., Sicily. 
 
 Sienne, Sienna. 
 
 Smyrne, Smyrna. 
 
 Souabe, f., Snabia. 
 
 Sparte, Sparta. 
 
 Spitzberg, Spitzbergen. 
 
 Strasbourg, Strasburg. 
 
 Suede, f., Sweden. 
 
 Suisse, f., Switzerland. 
 
 Syrie, f., Syria. 
 
 Tage, m., Tqgus. 
 
 Tamise, f., Thames. 
 
 Tauger, Tangiers. 
 
 Tarragone, Tarragona. 
 
 Tatarie, f., Tartary. 
 
 Terre de Diemen, Van Die- 
 men's Land. 
 
 Terre de Feu, f., Terra del 
 Fuego. 
 
 Terre-Neuve, f., Newfound- 
 land. 
 
 Terre-Sainte, Holy Land. 
 
 Thebes, Thebes. 
 
 Thessalie, f., TJiessaly. 
 
 Thessalonique, Thessaloni- 
 ca. 
 
 Tolede, Toledo. 
 
 Toscane, f., Tuscany. 
 
 Trente, Trent. 
 
 Treves, Treves. 
 
 Troie, f., Troy. 
 
 Turquie, f., Turkey. 
 
 Utique, Uiica. 
 
 Valachie, f., Wallachia. 
 
 Valence, Valencia. 
 
 Yarsovie, Wcirsaw. 
 
 Venetie, f., Venetia. 
 
 Venise, Venice. 
 
 Vesuve, m., Vesuvius. 
 
 Vienne, Vienna. 
 
 Villes Hanseatiques, JLanse 
 Towns. 
 
 Zelande, f., Zealand. 
 
 Nouvelle Zelande, New 
 Zealand. 
 
 ^QQ. Proper Adjectives derived from the names of 
 places, and applied to qualify nouns, are varied in their 
 endings according to the rules laid down for adjectives 
 in general. 
 
 Abyssin, Abyssinian. Algerien, Algerine. 
 
 Africain, African. Allemand, German. 
 
 N 
 
290 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ ™6. 
 
 Americain, American. 
 
 Andalous, Andalusian. 
 
 Anglais, Englishman, En- 
 glish. 
 
 Anversois, Antwerpian. 
 
 Arabe, Arab, Arabic. 
 
 Ai-menien, Armenian. 
 
 Asiatique, Asiatic. 
 
 Assyrieii, Assyrian. 
 
 Atbenien, Athenian. 
 
 Autricbien, Austrian. 
 
 Badois, of Baden. 
 
 Barcelonais, Barcelonese. 
 
 Basque, Biscay an. 
 
 Bavarois, Bavarian. 
 
 Beige, Belgian, Belgic. 
 
 Berlinois, of Berlin. 
 
 Bobemien, Bohemian. 
 
 Bolonais, Bolognese. 
 
 Bordelais, of Bourdeaux. 
 
 Bourguignon, Burgimdian. 
 
 Bresilien, Brazilian. 
 
 Breton, Briton. 
 
 Bruxellois, of Brussels. 
 
 Castillan, Castilian. 
 
 Catalan, Catalonian. 
 
 Cbinois, Chinese. 
 
 Copenbaguois, of Copen- 
 hagen. 
 
 Corse, Corsican. 
 
 Danois, Dane, Danish. 
 
 Ecossais, Scotch, Scotch- 
 man. 
 
 Egyptien, Egyptian. 
 
 Escla\'on, Sclave, Sclavonic. 
 
 Espagnol, Spaniard, Span- 
 ish. 
 
 Etbiopien, Ethiopean. 
 
 Europeen, European. 
 
 Finland ais, ) Finn. 
 
 Finnois, ) Finnish. 
 
 Flamand, Flemish, Fleming. 
 
 Florentin, Florentine. 
 
 Francais, French, French- 
 man. 
 
 Frison, Frieslander — die. 
 
 Gallois, Welsh, Welshman. 
 
 Gantois, of Ghent. 
 
 Genevois, Genevese. 
 
 Genois, Genoese. 
 
 Grec, Greek, Grecian. 
 
 Groenlandais, Greenlander 
 — die. 
 
 Hessois, Hessian. 
 
 Holland ais, Dutch, Dutch- 
 man. 
 
 Hongrois, Hungarian. 
 
 Indien, Indian. 
 
 Irlandais, Irish, Irishman. 
 
 Islandais, Icelander — die. 
 
 Italien, Itcdian. 
 
 Japonais, Japanese. 
 
 Lapon, laplander — dish. 
 
 Leipsicois, of Leipsic. 
 
 Lettonien, lettonian, Let- 
 tish. 
 
 Liegeois, of liege. 
 
 Limousin, of limoges. 
 
 Litbuanien, Lithuanian. 
 
 Livournin, of Leghorn. 
 
§ ^66.] 
 
 PROPER NAMES. 
 
 291 
 
 Londonien, Londoner. 
 Lyonnais, Lyonese. 
 Malais, Malay. 
 Maltais, Maltese. 
 Marseillais, of Marseilles. 
 Mexicain, Mexican. 
 Milan ais, Milanese. 
 Moldave, Moldavian. 
 Montenegrin, Tchernigo- 
 
 rian. 
 Morave, Moravian. 
 Moscovite, Muscovite. 
 Napolitain, Neapolitan'. 
 ISTeerlandais, JVetherkmd — 
 
 er. 
 Normand, Norman, 
 Norvegien, Nomcegian. 
 Parisien, Parisian. 
 Patagon, Patagonian. 
 Persan, Persian. 
 Piernontais, Piedmontese. 
 Polonais, Pole, Polish. 
 Portngais, Portuguese. 
 
 Proven9al, of Provence, Ro- 
 mance. 
 
 Prussien, Prussian. 
 
 Romain, Roman. 
 
 Russe, Russian. 
 
 Sarde, Sardinian. 
 
 Savoyard, Savoyard, of Sa- 
 voy. 
 
 Saxon, Saxon. 
 
 Servien, Servian. 
 
 Siamois, Siamese. 
 
 Sicilien, Sicilian. 
 
 Siennois, Siennese. 
 
 Suedois, Swede, Swedish. 
 
 Suisse, Swiss. 
 
 Texien, Texan. 
 
 Toscan, Tuscan. 
 
 Turc, Turk, Turkish. 
 
 Valaque, Wallachian. 
 
 Venitien, Venetian. 
 
 Viennois, Viennese. 
 
 Z 61 an dais, Zealander. 
 
PAKT FOURTH. 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES ON THE RULES CON- 
 TAINED IN PART SECOND. . 
 
 SECTION FIRST. 
 Remark. The figures inserted in the text refer the 
 learner to that paragraph or rule of the Grammar to 
 which the number corresponds. Throughout the Exer- 
 cises, "m." stands for masculine; u f." foY feminine ; 
 "pi." for plural; "sing." for singular. For the pro- 
 nunciation of any word in the book, see the Vocabula- 
 ry at the close. * 
 
 EXERCISE FIRST. 
 
 767. Vocabulary. 
 
 Garcon, m., boy. Francaise, i.,F)*ench-woman. 
 
 Fille, f., girl, daughter. Monsieur, m., gentleman, 
 
 Pere, m., father. sir. 
 
 Mere, f., mother. Chapeau, m., hat. 
 
 Enfant, m., {male) child. Chapeaux, pi., hats. 
 
 Sceur, f., sister. Messieurs, pi., gentlemen. 
 
 Frere, m., brother. Mari, m., husband. 
 
 Et, and. Argent, m., money. 
 
 Maison, f., house. Bon, good (before m. noun). 
 
 Donnez, give. Bonne, good (before f. 
 
 Francais, m., Frenchman. noun). 
 
 768. Hide. The article always agrees in gender and 
 number with the noun to which it belongs. 
 
§ 769-771.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 293 
 
 769. Rule. The plural of nouns and adjectives is 
 formed in general by adding an s to the singular. 
 
 769. a. Rule. The article must be repeated, in French, 
 before each noun of a series. 
 
 770. Translate into English. 
 
 Un enfant. La Francaise. Le pere et la mere. Les 
 soeurs. Da garcon (77). Aux chapeaux (77). L'argent 
 (74). De l'enfant (78). A la mere. Au mari (77). 
 Donnez le chapeau au monsieur. Les Franchises. La 
 bonne mere. Des bons peres. De la maison. Donnez 
 au garcon les chapeaux des enfants. A l'argent. Un 
 Francois. Une soeur et une mere. D'une bonne fille 
 (82). Le mari de la sceur et la mere du garcon. Une 
 Francaise et l'enfant. Donnez l'argent a un monsieur. 
 Aux maris des Franchises. A la maison. Le bon argent. 
 Du bon enfant. Au chapeau et a la bonne maison. La 
 bonne mere. Donnez l'enfant a la mere. Le garcon de 
 la Francaise. De l'argent. Donnez l'argent a l'enfant. 
 Les messieurs et les peres. Les bons chapeaux des 
 freres. Donnez les maisons aux messieurs. Un bon 
 mari. Une bonne mere. La fille d'une bonne mere. 
 Le bon frere d'un bon enfant. Donnez l'argent a un 
 bon Francais et a une bonne Francaise. L'enfant d'une 
 fille du Francais et de la Francaise. Les chapeaux des 
 peres des messieurs. 
 
 771. Translate into French. 
 
 The father (72). The mother (73). The money (74). 
 The brothers (76). The houses. Of the husband (77). 
 To the gentleman (77). Of the girls (77). Of the boys. 
 Of the children. To the Frenchman (77). To the sis- 
 ters. Of the money (78). Of the house (78). Of the 
 mother. To the French -woman (78). To the child. 
 The gentleman. A boy (79). A daughter (80). Of a 
 hat (82). Of a house (82). To a mother. To a gentle- 
 man. Give a hat to the boy. The children of a good 
 
294 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 112, 113. 
 
 father and of a good mother. The hats of the gentle- 
 men. To the French-women of the houses. To the 
 husbands of the sisters. A good daughter and a good 
 brother. The mother of the child. The house of the 
 gentleman. Give the good hat and the good house to 
 the father of the daughter. The money and the houses 
 of the sister. The children of the French-woman. Give 
 the husbands to the good daughters. The house of a 
 Frenchman. The gentleman and the gentlemen. To 
 the good father and to the good mother. The boys and 
 girls of the Frenchmen and French- women (769, a). 
 
 "A. / 
 
 
 SECTION SECOND. 
 
 EXERCISE SECOND. 
 
 112. Vocabulary. 
 
 
 11 a, he has. 
 
 Mauvaise, bad (before f. 
 
 A-t-il? has he? 
 
 nou?i). 
 
 J'ai, I have. 
 
 Bleu, blue (before on. noun). 
 
 Ai-je, have If 
 
 Bleue, blue (before/*, noun). 
 
 Avez-vous, have you f 
 
 Blanc, white (before m. 
 
 Vous avez, you have. 
 
 noun). 
 
 Que, ivhat f 
 
 Blanche, white (before f. 
 
 Pain, m., bread. 
 
 noun). 
 
 Viand e, f., meat. 
 
 Papier, m., paper. 
 
 Biscuit, m., biscuit. 
 
 Soie, f., silk. 
 
 En ere, f., ink. 
 
 The, m., tea. 
 
 Habit, m., coat. 
 
 Lait, m., milk. 
 
 Mauvais, bad (before m. Honneur, m., honor. 
 
 noun). Herbe, f., herb, grass. 
 
 113. Rule. Adjectives which denote color or form 
 are placed after the noun with which they agree in gen- 
 der and number. 
 
 Remark. Que is written qu' when it stands immedi- 
 
§ 774, 775.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 295 
 
 ately before a word commencing with a vowel or an h 
 mute. 
 
 ftriP^ The partitive expression some, any, may be em- 
 ployed or omitted in English, but in French their equiv- 
 alent is always expressed. 
 
 774. 3Iodel sentences. 
 
 Avez-vous du pain ? have you any bread? 
 
 II a des habits et des soies, he has some coats and silks. 
 
 A-t-il de bon pain? has he any good bread? 
 
 Vous avez de Z'encre bleue (773), you have some blue 
 ink. 
 
 Qu' avez-vous ? what have you ? 
 
 J'ai de la viande, I have some meat. 
 
 1 75. Translate into English. 
 
 Du papier (85). De l'honneur (85). De la soie (85), 
 Desherbes. A de la soie (86). A des enfants (86). A 
 du the. De mauvais lait et de la soie blanche (87, 88). 
 A de mauvaise encre (87). A de bonne viande. De 
 l'encre bleue (88). A des soies blanches (88). Qu'a- 
 vez vous ? J'ai des habits. A-t-il de la viande ? II a 
 de bon pain (87). II a le bon pain du pere de la Fran- 
 chise. Donnez des biscuits (85) et de la viande a la 
 bonne fille. Le garcon a (has) de l'honneur (85). Avez- 
 vous du the ? J'ai du the et il a du pain. Yous avez 
 de l'encre. A-t-il des herbes? II a de la soie et de 
 l'argent. Donnez de bons habits aux bons garcons". 
 Donnez de bon pain a de mauvais* enfants. Avez-vous 
 de l'argent? J'ai de mauvaises herbes et du papier 
 blanc. Qu'ai-je ? Vous avez du pain blanc et de l'encre 
 bleue. Donnez des biscuits a des filles. Avez-vous 
 l'habit du pere ? J'ai la maison du frere et de la soeur. 
 Qu'ai-je? Vous avez de bonne viande (87). 
 
 * Adjectives and nouns ending in s, x, or z, make no change in the 
 plural. 
 
296 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 776, 777. 
 
 776. Translate into French. 
 
 Give some bread (85) to the girl (78). Have you any 
 meat (85) ? I have some ink and some coats. What 
 has he? He has money and honor* (773, HP). To 
 some biscuits. To some children. To some ink and to 
 some paper. Give some good tea (87) to the sister of 
 the Frenchman. He has bad paper (773, (j£IP s ). What 
 have you? I have some white silk (88) and the blue 
 coats of the gentlemen. The gentleman has (a) some 
 hats. I have a good sister and some good brothers. 
 Has he a father and a mother? He has a father, a 
 mother, some sisters, and some brothers. Give some 
 meat to the French-woman. Have I any good ink and 
 any good paper ? The husband of the French-woman 
 has honor and money. Give the hats to some good 
 children. The bad child of the good Frenchman has 
 some tea and some bread. What have I? You have 
 herbs and white paper (773, B^IP)/! 
 
 SECTION THIRD 
 
 EXERCISE THIRD. 
 
 777. Vocabulary. 
 
 Oui, yes. Les messieurs, the gentlemen. 
 
 Non, no. J'aime, Hove, Hike. 
 
 !N"ous avons, we have. Aime-je? do I love? do 1 
 
 Avons-nous ? have ice P Mais, b ut. \like? 
 
 Madame, Madam, Mrs. Mesdames, ladies. 
 
 Dame, f, lady. Les dames, the ladies. 
 
 Mademoiselle, Miss. Mesdemoiselles, young la- 
 
 Demoiselle, f., young dies. [ladies. 
 
 lady. Les demoiselles, the young 
 Le monsieur, the gentleman. Le chemin de fer, m., the 
 
 Messieurs, gentlemen. railroad. 
 
 * Repeat the partitive before each noun. 
 
§ 778-780.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 297 
 
 Les chemins de fer, the rail- Du Havre, of or from 
 
 roads. Havre. 
 
 Est, is. Au Havre, to Havre, at 
 
 Sont, are. Havre. 
 
 Londres, London. Je vais, I am going. 
 
 Le Havre, Havre. Drap, in., cloth. 
 
 778. Ride. All determinative words, such as articles, 
 adjectives, etc., are in French repeated before each noun. 
 
 U-IT 3 Note carefully the French order in rule 105,. 
 Part Second ; before translating, for example, the " boy's 
 hat," resolve the phrase into the French order, thus, 
 " the hat of the boy." The same remark and caution 
 apply to rules 106, 107, for compound nouns. 
 
 779. Model sentences. 
 
 La fille du Francais, the Frenchman 's daughter. 
 Aimez-vous le chapeau de la Francaise? do you like 
 
 the French-womaiv } s hat? 
 Non, monsieur, mais j'aime le chapeau de Penfant, no, 
 
 sir, but I like the chilcVs hat. 
 Avez-vous un habit de drap, monsieur? have you a 
 
 cloth coat, sir 9 , 
 
 Je vais au Havre, I am going to Havre. 
 Londres est un port de mer, London is a seaport. 
 
 780. Translate into English. 
 
 La fille du Francais est la mere de Penfant. Les 
 chapeaux (102) des messieurs sont de soie (106). 
 Madame, donnez de la viande a la soeur du monsieur. 
 Avons-nous les habits de drap (106) de la dame? Nous 
 avons les maisons de pierre (106) du garcon blanc. 
 Qu'aimez-vous, mademoiselle? J'aime de bonnes mai- 
 sons (87) et de bons chapeaux (778). Le pere et la mere 
 sont a* la maison du Francais. Le Havre est un bon 
 port de mer (107). Le frere du monsieur est a Londres. 
 Qu'avez-vous, monsieur? J'ai un chapeau de papier. 
 * a means here, as often elsewhere, "at." 
 N2 
 
298 FREXCH GRAMMAR. [§ 781. 
 
 Je vais a Londres. Airne-je le garcon ? Non, mais 
 j'aime la demoiselle a la maison de la Francaise. Mes- 
 sieurs, avez-vous de l'honneur? Oui, mesdames, nous 
 avons de l'honneur. Je vais au chemin de fer. Avez- 
 vous de l'argent? ISTon, inesdemoiselles, mais, j'ai de la 
 viande, du pain et des biscuits. Le pere de la Francaise 
 a des chapeaux de soie et des habits de drap. Donnez 
 le pain de l'enfant a la fille de la dame. Les garcons de 
 Londres sont de mauvais enfants (87) et les garcons du 
 Havre sont de bons enfants. Non, les enfants de Lon- 
 dres* et du Havre sont bons et mauvais. Les chemins 
 de fer de Paris au Havre sont bons (108). J'ai les 
 papiers du mari de la Francaise. Avez-vous un mari, 
 madame ? Oui, monsieur, et nous avons une maison de 
 bois (icood). A-t-il de bons enfants? II a un bon gar- 
 con et une bonne fille. 
 
 781. Translate into French. 
 
 I am going to the house of the French-women. The 
 father of the good children is the brother of the ladies. 
 Have you any meat, sir? I have some good meat (87) 
 and some white bread (88, 773). The brothers and the 
 sisters are the children of the Frenchman. The gentle- 
 men, and the ladies of the good houses. The sister has 
 some paper hats (106), but you have a stone house (106). 
 What have we? We have some ink and some paper. 
 Give the silk hat to the mother of the good French- 
 woman. The child has some coats. Has he any cloth 
 coats (106) ? Yes, sir, he has some cloth coats and some 
 money. The Frenchman is the husband of the lady. 
 Madam, I am going to Paris. The children of the 
 French -women are at Havre {au Havre). Give the 
 biscuits to the ladies. I am going to the railroad (107). 
 I love the gentlemen and the ladies. Do I like the ink ? 
 No, miss, but I like the good boys. What have we ? 
 You have the stone houses (106) and the cloth coats of 
 the gentleman. \\ 
 
§ 782-785.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 299 
 
 SECTION FOUETH. 
 
 IdF 3 In the succeeding exercises many of the words introduced will 
 be found in Part Second, under the rules corresponding to the sec- 
 tion. As these words are already familiar to the student, they will 
 form the basis of the practical examples without being repeated in 
 the Vocabulary. 
 
 EXEKCISE EOUETII. 
 
 782. Vocabulary. 
 
 lis ont, they have. Elle, she. 
 
 Ont-ils, have they ? II, he. 
 
 II va, he goes, is going. Us, they, m., Elles, they, f. 
 
 Va-t-il, does he go ? lis aiment, they love, like. 
 
 Charpentier, m., carpenter. Aiment-ils, do they love? 
 
 Voisin, m., neighbor. Or, m., gold, [do they Wee f 
 
 Anglais, Englishman. Livre, m., book. 
 
 Americain, American. Plume, i.,pen. 
 
 Avec, with. II ecrit, he icrites, is writing. 
 
 Table, i., table. Oil, where f 
 
 Chevalier, m., knight. Ou, or. 
 
 Ecolier, m., scholar. Lettre, f., letter. 
 
 Rond-e, round. Rouge, red. 
 
 783. Mule. The adjective must agree in gender and 
 number with the noun or pronoun to which it relates. 
 
 784. A sentence is rendered negative by placing ne 
 immediately before the verb, and pas after it. 
 
 a. Ne is written rH when it precedes a verb commenc- 
 ing with a voicel or an h mute. 
 
 b. A verb is rendered interrogative, in French, by 
 placing its pronoun-subject after it with a hyphen. 
 
 785. Jlodel sentences. 
 
 Avez-vous la bonne plume et la mauvaise encre ? have 
 you the good pen and the bad ink? 
 
 J'ai une bonne plume et Pencre n'est pas mauvaise, I 
 have a good ]^en, and the ink is not bad. 
 
300 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 786. 
 
 N'aiment-ils pas la plume d'or de l'ecolier ? do they not 
 like the gold pen of the scholar f 
 
 II ne va pas a Paris, he does not go to Paris. 
 
 Ne va-t-il pas avec le voisin? does he not go icith the 
 neighbor f 
 
 786. Translate into English. 
 
 Avez-vous les petits (110) livres de l'ecolier? Je n'ai 
 pas les petits livres, raais j'ai les grands livres (110) ; je 
 n'aime pas les petits livres (83). Ou sont les tables des 
 charpentiers ? Les petites ou les grandes (783) ?* Elles 
 sont a la. maison des Americains. Le chevalier de la 
 table ronde ecrit une lettre au pere de l'ecolier. Le 
 charpentier va a la maison avec le mari de la Francaise. 
 J'aime les grands enfants de la sceur de l'Americain. 
 Ou est le voisin ? II est au Havre avec le pere de 1' An- 
 glais. !N"'avez-vous (784) pas de petits livres, monsieur? 
 N~on, mademoiselle, mais j'ai de (87) bons livres (110). 
 Ou est le frere du voisin, ne va-t-il pas a Londres ? Oui, 
 madame, il est au chemin de fer, et il va a Londres avec 
 la belle fille (121). Les charpentiers aiment les maisons 
 des Anglais. Les vieilles maisons (121, 122) des voisins 
 sont blanches (123, 783). Les Americains, les Francais 
 (101), et les Anglais ont de l'argent (85). Aiment-ils 
 Tor et l'honneur (83) ? Us aiment For rouge (773), mais 
 ils n'aiment pas le bel honneur (120). L'Americain ecrit 
 une longue (123) lettre a la jolie (116) fille de 1' Anglais. 
 Elle ecrit de jolies lettres (114, 122) au mari de la Fran- 
 caise, avec une plume d'or. Avez-vous un vieil (120) 
 habit, monsieur ? Non, mais j'ai un beau (120) chapeau 
 de soie. N'ont-ils pas des tables ? Ils ont des tables et 
 les chevaliers ont de l'honneur. Le pauvre (124) ecrit 
 une lettre a 1' enfant du voisin. La malheurense (124) 
 
 * Translate "the little ones or the large ones;" ones or one, after 
 an adjective standing without its noun expressed, is never translated 
 in French. 
 
§ 787.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 301 
 
 va au chemin de fer oi\ elle a un mari. Les pauvres (124) 
 aiment Pargent (83) et le pain. Les ecoliers ont de jolis 
 livres. Les charpentiers n'aiment pas les petites mai- 
 sons, mais les grandes. 
 
 787. Translate into French. 
 
 The pretty (114) daughter of the old (121) French- 
 woman. The neighbor wrlfcs long (123, 87) letters with 
 blue ink (88), and with a gold pen (pen of gold). Have 
 you not some money ? Yes, I have some good gold, and 
 the knight has a new coat (120). Where does the hus- 
 band of the pretty (116) French-woman go {where goes 
 the husband, etc.) ? He is going to London with the 
 sister of the knight. The railroads of London and Par- 
 is* are long (783). Where is the sister of the carpen- 
 ter? She is not (784) going (does not go) to the house 
 of the American; she is writing a long (123) letter to 
 the husband of the lady. Has she any good money ? 
 She has some good and some bad money. The knight 
 of the round table (773) has honor and gold (use parti- 
 tive). The husbands of the good ladies love gold and 
 honor (83). The beautiful (120) child of the neighbor 
 has a paper hat and a gold pen. Give some books to 
 the little children. The Americans love honor and mon- 
 ey (83). The carpenter has a new (121) table. The 
 scholar writes a long letter (123) to the daughter of the 
 good knight. Have they any sisters? The ladies of 
 Paris are poor ; no, they are not poor. The poor (men, 
 124) love money (83). 
 
 * Repeat the preposition de before Paris (778). 
 
302 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 788-793. 
 
 SECTION FIFTH. 
 
 EXERCISE FIFTH. 
 
 788. Vocabulary. 
 
 Chemin, m., way, road. Boulanger, m., baker. ■ 
 Ami, m., friend. Encrier, m., inkstand. 
 
 Ennemi, m., enemy. Wt&h who, ichich (relative). 
 
 Aimez-vous, do you like ? Que (qu' before a vowel), 
 
 do you love? which, whom, that. 
 
 Voyez-vous, do you see? Allez-vous, are you going? 
 Je vois, I see. do you go ? 
 
 L'homme, m., the man. Je vais, I go, am going. 
 Femme, f., woman, wife. Fort-e, strong. 
 Il trouva, he found. Chez, at the house of. 
 
 Ils'trouverent, they found. Brave, brave. 
 Tresor, m., treasure. Rlche, rich. 
 
 Dans, in. Meunier, m., miller. 
 
 Sage, wise. Ville, f., city. 
 
 789. In, after a superlative relative, is rendered by de. 
 
 790. The adjective in the superlative degree may be 
 placed after the noun, in which case the article is re- 
 peated ; as, le plus savant homme, or, l'homme le plus 
 savant. 
 
 791. Qui, which, is in the nominative case; que, the 
 objective. 
 
 792. Instead of d la maison de, "to the house of," or 
 "at the house of," it is better to employ chezj some- 
 times the possessive case is used in English in this sig- 
 nification, and then " to the house of" is implied ; but in 
 either case render the expression by chez, as directed. 
 
 793. When the adverbs of quantity— -plus or moins — 
 are followed by a noun, the preposition de (before a 
 vowel c7').is employed after them and after que, than, 
 which follows. 
 
§ 794, 795.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 303 
 
 794. Model sentences. 
 
 Le boulanger a plus c?'amis que <#'ennemis (793), the 
 baker has more friends than enemies. 
 
 II trouva moins de pain que de viande, he found less 
 bread than meat. 
 
 Le meunier trouva un tresor chez l'Americain, the mil- 
 ler found a treasure at the Americanos (792). 
 
 Allez-vous chez le voisin ? are you going to the neigh- 
 bor's? 
 
 Les tresors que les hommes trouverent sont grands, 
 the treasures which the men found are great (791). 
 
 Le meunier qui trouva le tresor est l'horarae le plus 
 riche du Havre, the miller who found the treasure 
 is the richest man in Havre (789, 791). \ 
 
 795. Translate into English. 
 
 La fille du meunier est moins belle (121) que la fille 
 du charpentier. Lelivre est tres beau (132). La dame 
 a une tres belle fille. Les femmes sont plus (128) belles 
 que les hommes. J'ai un livre qui est tres grand {large). 
 Monsieur, avez-vous un bel encrier ? Oui, j'ai un encrier 
 qui est beau. Les boulangers trouverent un tresor dans 
 le chemin. Le meunier est aussi riche que le charpentier 
 (127). La femme de PAnglais est aussi sage que le mari 
 de la Francaise. Les ecoliers sont tres heureux (132).. 
 L'homrae le plus riche (790) n'est pas le plus heureux. 
 La ville de Paris est tres belle. Que voyez-vous ? Je 
 vois le tresor le plus grand du monde (in the worlds 789). 
 Sont-ils aussi savants que les ecoliers ? lis ne sont pas 
 aussi savants que les ecoliers, mais ils aiment les livres. 
 Le livre que vous voyez est tres vieux. Allez-vous chez 
 Thomme (to the man's) ? Non, je vais chez le boulanger ; 
 il va a Paris avec la fille. Est-il plus fort que le meunier ? 
 II est moins fort et moins brave que le chevalier. Avez- 
 vous plus de (793) livres que l'ecolier? II a plus de 
 livres que de plumes. Les charpentiers sont les meil- 
 
304 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 796, 797. 
 
 leurs (133, 133, a) amis que j'ai. La meilleure (133, a) 
 plume est dans l'encrier. L'ecolier n'a pas moins de six 
 plumes (134). 
 
 796. Translate into French. 
 
 The child is very small (132). The daughters are very- 
 pretty (783). Are they {fern.) as pretty as the knights 
 (127) ? The knights are not pretty, but they are hand- 
 some {beaux). The boy is as brave as the girl. No, the 
 boys are braver than the girls (128). Did they find 
 (trouvhrent-ils) a very great treasure ? No, they did not 
 find (748) a very great treasure ; the boy found a gold 
 pen and the child found a pretty book. Is he as rich as 
 the neighbor ?_ He is richer than the neighbor, and he 
 is very wise. Do you see the book which the man has ? 
 I do not see the book which he has {qicHl «), but I see 
 the gold pen which the scholars have (ont). Are you 
 (etes-vous) as strong (127) as the baker? I am not so 
 strong as the baker, but I am (je suis) braver than the 
 miller. The knight is stronger and braver than the 
 Frenchman, he is the greatest man in London (789, 790). 
 The child has more bread than milk (793). The scholar 
 has fewer books (moins de livres) than pens (793). Who 
 (qui) is as wise as the scholar ? I am going to my sis- 
 ter's (chez ma sceur). Are you going to the house of 
 the rich (»ww, 124, 792) ? I see the miller who is going 
 (qui va) to the gentleman's house (chez le monsieur). 
 
 SECTION SIXTH. 
 
 EXERCISE SIXTH. 
 
 797. 'Vocabulary. 
 
 Combien, how much f hoio Deuxieme, (do-zee-aim), sec- 
 many f ond. 
 
 Seulement, only, but. Volume, m., volume. 
 
§ 798-801.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 305 
 
 Ouvrage, m., work. Chanson, f., song, ballad. 
 
 Oeuvres, f. pi., works. Annee, f., year. 
 
 Boilean, Boileau. Mois, m., month. 
 
 Corneille, Corneitte. Jour, m., day. 
 
 Main, f., hand. Ete, in., summer. 
 
 Pied, in., foot. Hiver, m., winter (ee-vair'). 
 
 Poire, f., pear. Agreable, pleasant. 
 
 Pomme, f., apple. Saison, f., season. 
 
 Fils, m., son (pron.feess). II y a, there is, there are. 
 
 II chante, he sings. Femme, f., woman (famm). 
 
 lis chantent, they sing. 
 
 798. " Cornbien" takes de or cV after it when a noun 
 follows. Cornbien de volumes avez-vons ? 
 
 799. "Deuxieme" and "second" both mean second; 
 " second" is employed in a series of two, " deuxieme" 
 supposes a third and a fourth, etc. 
 
 800. Model sentences. 
 
 Cornbien de freres avez-vous ? how many brothers have 
 you f 
 
 J'aitrois freres et une sc&\\r,Ihave three brothers and 
 one sister. 
 
 Aimez-vous les oeuvres de Boileau? do you like the 
 works of Boileau f 
 
 II chante de jolies chansons, he sings (some) pretty 
 ballads. 
 
 L'ouvrage a quatre volumes, le deuxieme est chez 
 l'ecolier, the icorlc has four volumes, the second is 
 at the scholars. 
 
 Les oeuvres de Corneille ont seulement deux volumes ; 
 le premier est chez le Francais et le second est au 
 Havre, the icoi^ks of Corneille have but two vol- 
 umes ; the first is at the Frenchman's and the sec- 
 ond is at Havre. 
 
 801. Translate into English. 
 
 Cornbien de mains (798) avez-vous? J'ai deux mains 
 
306 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§802. 
 
 et deux pieds. L'enfant a quatre freres. N'a-t-il pas 
 deux soeurs ? lis ont seulement un ami. Nous avons un 
 pere et une mere. Le petit garcon a quatre pommes et 
 cinq (135, a) poires. Aimez-vous les poires ? J'aime 
 les poires qui sont bonnes. Boileau ecrit une lettre au 
 fils de Racine. Avez-vous les 03uvres de Corneille? 
 Non, monsieur, maisjai le troisieme volume des oeuvres 
 de Boileau. Dans le deuxieme volume des ceuvres de 
 Moliere, il y a de jolies chansons. II y a quatre saisons 
 dans l'annee. L'hiver est plus agreable que l'ete. Les 
 jours de l'ete sont longs. Combien d'hommes (798) 
 voyez-vous? Je vois dix-huit (135, c) hommes, trente 
 femmes et cent enfants. Aimez-vous les enfants ? J'aime 
 les bons petits enfants, mais je n'aime pas les mauvais 
 enfants. L'homme chante trois jolies chansons, une de 
 Beranger et deux du fils de Racine. L'ete est la plus 
 belle et la plus agreable saison de l'annee. II y a trois 
 cent (136, b) soixante-cinq jours dans une annee. Le 
 mois a trente jours. Quel (which, what) jour du mois 
 avons-nous? Nous avons le quatre juillet* (136, c). II 
 est dans la belle saison. L'ecolier trouva des chansons 
 de Beranger. Donnez a l'enfant le seizieme volume des 
 oeuvres de Voltaire. Le garcon du charpentier a plus 
 de pommes que de poires (793). J'ai deux plumes d'or. 
 
 S02. Translate into French. 
 
 He is rich, he has a treasure. I see nine men (59, a). 
 How many (798) children have coats (some coats) ? He 
 writes three letters, one (135) to the neighbor who (qui) 
 is at Havre, and two to the Englishman who is at Lon- 
 don. The father has two houses. I have four tables. 
 The woman has only one child. How many gentlemen 
 do you see in the road ? I see twelve ladies, but I see 
 only eight gentlemen. How much money have I ? I 
 have a great treasure. I have five hundred (cents) francs. 
 * See note, page 277. 
 
§ 803.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 307 
 
 Do you see the third volume of the works of Boileau? 
 Boileau's works (the icorks of — ) are in two volumes 
 only. He is writing a work with a gold pen. The works 
 of Voltaire are in (en) (one) hundred volumes. I have 
 two hands. How many feet have you ? I have only one 
 foot. The man who has only one foot sings a very pretty 
 ballad. There are fifteen pears and six (135, a) apples 
 in the road. The son found twenty (135, d) apples in 
 the house. The scholar sings two songs which I like (que 
 Jaime). Beranger writes a song in the house of the 
 French-woman. They sing the songs of Beranger. The 
 year is long (fern.) ; it (die) has twelve months. There 
 are thirty days in one month, and three hundred and six- 
 ty-five in one year. The summer has only three months. 
 It (it) is the pleasantest season in the year (789). The 
 winter is not as pleasant as the summer. There are four 
 or five (135, a) months in the winter season (107, 106, a). 
 
 SECTION SEVENTH. 
 
 S^ 3 The student should give particular care to this section on the 
 Pronouns, and not fail to refer to the rule indicated by the figures 
 until he is thoroughly familiar with them all. The difference between 
 the two languages with respect to the position of the pronouns in the 
 objective case must be carefully noted. 
 
 EXERCISE SEVENTH. 
 
 803. Vocabulary. 
 
 Je donne, I give. Terre, f., ground, earth. 
 
 Savant-e, learned. Aussi, also. 
 
 Ignorant-e, ignorant. Sur, upon. 
 
 Gnillaume, William. Sous, under. 
 
 Jean, John. Ecrivez-vous, do you write ? ■ 
 
 Arbre, m., tree. Cherchez, seek, look for. 
 
 Jardin, m., garden. Apportez, bring. 
 
308 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 804-809. 
 
 Votre, your. Faire, to make, do. 
 
 Montrez, show. L'ebeniste, m., the cabinet- 
 
 Chercher, to look for, seek. maker. 
 
 Dormer, to give. II parla, he spoke. 
 
 Je suis, I am. J'ecris, I write, am writing. 
 
 Nous sorames, toe are. 
 
 804. The pronoun agrees in gender, number, and per- 
 son with the noun which it represents. 
 
 805. A verb is rendered interrogative by putting the 
 pronoun-subject after it as in English. If the verb ends 
 in a vowel in the third person singular, a-£-, called eu- 
 phonic, stands between the verb and pronoun. 
 
 806. The words do, does, did, which in English accom- 
 pany a verb used interrogatively or negatively, are not 
 expressed in French ; " he spoke" or " he did speak" is 
 translated in one way only, il parla. 
 
 807. When the subject of an interrogative phrase is a 
 noun, it stands before the verb in French, and the ques- 
 tion is indicated by a pronoun put after the verb, and 
 agreeing with the subject in gender, number, and per- 
 son; as, l'homme a-t-il? has the man? 
 
 808. Model sentences. 
 
 L'homme a-t-il le livre (807) ? has the man the book? 
 
 II l'a (145, a), he has it. 
 
 II ne les a pas, he has them not. 
 
 Yoyez-vous la fille ? do you see the daughter ? 
 
 Je la vois,Isee her. 
 
 Parla-t-il aux hommes (805) ? did he speak to the men? 
 
 II leur parla, he did speak to them. 
 
 II me parla, he spoke to me. 
 
 809. Translate into English. 
 
 L'ecolier me parla (146, 148). Je l'aime (147, 145, a). 
 
 •II est savant (145). Est-il riche (805) ? Le meunier 
 
 est-il ignorant (807) ? II est plus ignorant que l'ebeniste. 
 
 La fille a-t-elle un frere (807) ? J'ecris une longue lettre 
 
§ 809, 810.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 309 
 
 a Guillaume. Jean ne ni'ecrit pas (145, a, 148). Ecri- 
 vez-vous au boulanger ? Non, monsieur, je ne lui ecris 
 pas. Jean aime-t-il la plume d'or ? Oui, mademoiselle, 
 il l'aime et il ecrit une lettre avec elle (155, 152, i.e., 
 with la plume, which is fern.). Guillaume me voit (147). 
 II me donne des poires (148). Qui vous parla? II y a 
 des pommes sur Parbre, mais elles (i. e., pommes, fern.) 
 ne sont pas grandes (783). Le livre est sous la table, il 
 (it, i. e., the book) est un mauvais livre. Apportez-le-moi 
 (151). Apportez-nous des livres. Ne nous apportez 
 (151, a) pas les pommes, elles ne sont pas agreables. 
 Donnez-moi (146, a) votre main. Allez-vous me (146) 
 donner {are you going, etc.) votre main ? Je vais vous 
 la donner (149, 152). N'allez vous pas chercher du pain ? 
 Je ne vais pas le chercher (147). Guillaume vous voit- 
 il? II me voit et il* me parle. Montrez-moi (146, a) 
 votre pied et votre main. Je vous les montre ; les voyez- 
 vous (149, 147) ? Je les vois. 
 
 Aimez-vous les poires? Qui les aime plus que moi 
 (156) ! Lui ecrivez-vous deux lettres (146) ? Je les lui 
 ecris (150). Wean les leur ecrit (150, 153). Combien 
 d'arbres y a-t-il (805) dans le jardin? La terre est 
 ronde, elle est petite aussi (152). L'arbre donne (yields) 
 des pommes et des poires. Je leur ecris une lettre sur 
 (on) le tresor que votre frere trouva. Ou le trouva-t-il 
 (805) ? II le trouva ou les ebenistes trouverent les 
 tables. Ya-t-il chanter la chanson? II va la chanter 
 (152). 
 
 810. Translate into French. 
 
 Observe that "it" is translated by il or elle, and "they" by Us or 
 elks, according to the gender and number of the noun referred to. 
 
 I^F 3 The negative particle ne stands before the pronoun in one of 
 the objective cases, not between it and the verb. 
 
 The baker spoke to thee (146). We are rich (145, 
 * Always repeat the subject-pronoun ; never leave it implied. 
 
310 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 810. 
 
 783). I love him (145, a). Are we poor (145) ? Is the 
 scholar learned (807) ? He is less learned than the gen- 
 tleman. Has the lady a husband (807) ? I am writing 
 a long letter to John. William does not (806) write 
 (to) me (145, a, 148, 146). Are you writing a letter to 
 the lady? Yes, I write to her (148). Does John like 
 the pears (807) ? No, sir, he does not like them. Who 
 sees us (146) ? The cabinet-maker sees us (146). Are 
 there any apples on the trees in the garden ? Yes, but 
 they (elles) are very small (petites). Is he going to give 
 me (146, 148) any pears? Is the book which is on the 
 table bad (le livre qui, etc. — est-il, etc.) ? It is not good 
 (152). Bring it tome (151). Do not look for it (151, a). 
 Bring us some money (146, a). Do not bring us the 
 pears; they (elles) are not good (bo?i?ies). Show me your 
 foot. Are you going to look for your hat? I am go- 
 ing to bring it to you (149, 145, a). Does John love 
 me (Jean irt aime-t-il) ? He sees me and (he) loves me. 
 Show me your house (146, a). I do not see it (152). 
 Do you see it (it see you) ? I see them (147). I give 
 them to them (150). I give them to hkn (150). Do 
 you give it to him (150) ? I give it to them. He gave 
 it to me (149). Are you writing the letter to William ? 
 I am writing it (la) to him (150). Do you like ajDples 
 (the apples)? I like them (147). Who likes them less 
 than he (156) ? You and I (156). She is goiri*g with 
 them (masc, 155). How many (of) letters are you writ- 
 ing to them (146) ? I am writing two letters to them 
 (je leur ecris, etc.). How much money are you going to 
 give him (148) ? The apple is sweet (123), and it (152) 
 is round (ronde). Who found the treasure? John 
 found it (152, 146). Where did he find them (where 
 them found he) ? I speak to you (148). You speak to 
 me (vous me parlez). Does he sing the ballad? He 
 sings it (fern). I sing the ballad. I write a letter. We 
 
§ 811-814.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 311 
 
 esteem him (145, a). Speak to him (146, a). Give them 
 to me (151). Show it (masc.) to him (151). Bring it 
 to me. 
 
 SECTION EIGHTH. 
 EXERCISE EIGHTH. 
 
 811. Vocabulary. 
 
 Se porte, is (speaking of Chez moi, at my house. 
 health). Voici, here is, here are. 
 
 Malade, sick. Voila, there is, there are. 
 
 Epouse, f., wife. Comment, how ? 
 
 Pour, for. Domestique, m., servant. 
 
 Pourquoi, why ? Par, by, through. 
 
 Parce que, because. II prit, he took. 
 
 Temps, m., time. II frappa, he struck. 
 
 Montre, f., watch. Faites attention, give atten- 
 
 Clef, f., key (pron. May). tion. 
 
 Ni — ni, neither — nor. II dit, he said. 
 
 A la maison, at home. Chien, m., dog. 
 
 Chez lui, at his house. Frapp er, to strike. 
 
 Chez elle, at her house. Conge, m., leave. 
 
 Epais-se, thick. 
 
 812. The negative ne (before a vowel n*) must always 
 stand before a verb in sentences containing ni — ni. 
 
 813. The absolute possessive pronouns are expressed 
 by the preposition ^followed by a disjunctive personal 
 pronoun when they come after any form of the verb " to 
 be." 
 
 814. In making inquiries of others with respect to the 
 health, whereabouts, etc., of their relatives, the terms of 
 respect Monsieur, Messieurs, Madame, Mesdames, Made- 
 moiselle, Mesdemoiselles, are put before the possessive 
 pronoun ; thus, your father, monsieur votre pere / your 
 
312 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 815-819. 
 
 mother, madaine votre mere ; your sister, mademoiselle 
 votre soeur {if unmarried), madame votre soeur {if mar- 
 ried). 
 
 815. In speaking of parts of the body, the definite ar- 
 ticle is often substituted for the possessive pronoun. 
 
 816. To love to, to like to, followed by a verb in the in- 
 finitive mood, is rendered by " aimer a." 
 
 817. To be, to do, referring to the health of some one, 
 and in the formula "how do you do," "how does he 
 do," etc., is expressed in French by the reflective, verb 
 se porter, to carry one's self. Sow is your father? 
 monsieur (814) votre pere comment se porte-t-il? or 
 Comment se porte monsieur votre pere ? How are your 
 brothers ? comment se portent messieurs vos freres ? 
 How is your sister (married) ? comment se porte ma- 
 dame votre soeur? (if unmarried), mademoiselle votre 
 
 SG3U1* ? 
 
 818. Model sentences. 
 
 Je n'ai ni votre chapeau ni le sien, I have neither your 
 
 hat nor his. 
 N'avez-vous ni le mien ni le sien ? have you neither 
 
 mine nor his ? 
 Ou est monsieur votre pere? where is your father? 
 II est chez son ami, he is at his friends house. 
 Les pommes sont-elles a moi? are the apples mine? 
 Kon, elles sont a votre frere, no, they are your brother's. 
 Comment se porte madame votre mere ? how is your 
 
 mother ? 
 
 819. Translate into English. 
 
 Mon pere (161). Ma mere. Mes filles. Mes amis. 
 Sa mere. Notre enfant. Nos enfants. Votre plume. 
 Yos soies. Leur arbre. Leurs jardins (161 and Re- 
 mark). Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne (163).* Je 
 
 * Here la sienne is used because it takes the place of plume, which 
 is, fern. Translate his or hers. 
 
§ 819.] PEACTICAL EXEECISES. 313 
 
 n'ai (812) ni la v6tre (163) ni la sienne, j'ai la mienne 
 (my own). Votre encre n'est pas aussi bonne (fern.) 
 que la mienne. Mon encre (162) est epaisse, elle n'est 
 pas bonne. Ton epouse (fern.) est-elle malade (807) ? 
 Mon ame (162) est heureuse (118). A-t-il ma clef ou la 
 leur? Avez-vous mes clefs ou les leurs? Sa montre 
 estd'or. Monsieur votre pereest-il malade (814)? Com- 
 ment se porte madame votre mere (817) ? Messieurs 
 vos freres sont-ils dans le jardin ? Mesdemoiselles vos 
 soeurs ou sont-elles ? Elles sont a la maison. Son epouse 
 et son amie (lady-friend, 162) sont chez leur voisin. 
 J'ecris une lettre pour notre domestique. Ecrivez-vous 
 une lettre pour le sien aussi? Pourquoi ecrivez-vous 
 une lettre pour son domestique aussi?' Parce que je 
 l'aime. Parce qu'il (63, b) est tres malade. Ma montre 
 ne vapas. La mienne va tres bien (well). Les montres 
 sont a moi (813). La clef (de) est a eux (theirs, 813). 
 II va faire mes habits. Allez-vous me donner leurs clefs 
 (161, Hem.)? Je ne vais pas vous donner leurs clefs 
 mais les miennes. Ou allez-vous avec notre chien ? Je 
 vais chez lui avec votre chien. Voici mes deux enfants, 
 les aimez-vous? Voici votre domestique. Voici vos 
 lettres. Voila mon ami Jean. Le frere prit sa sceur 
 par la main (815). Guillaume frappa son frere avec le 
 pied (815). Faites attention, mes ecoliers. Le chevalier 
 prit conge de sa chere (116, a) epouse. II dit que je 
 suis un mauvais petit garcon. Je vais le frapper parce 
 qu'il le dit (said so, it). Est-il un de vos amis (165) ? 
 Non, il est seulement un de mes domestiques. Va-t-il a 
 mon jardin ou au votre (164, Hem.) ? II ne va ni au 
 mien ni au votre. Allez-vous a ses jardins ou aux leurs ? 
 Je ne vais ni aux siens ni aux notres. Son encre, sa 
 plume et ses papiers (162, a) sont sur la table. 
 
 O 
 
314 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 820. 
 
 820. Translate into French, 
 
 His hat (161). His daughter (161, Mem)* Her 
 watch. Our friends. Your mothers. My pens. Their 
 ink. Their trees. My wife (162). His ink (162). Of 
 thy letters. To thy lady-friend (amie, 162). Our let- 
 ters, papers, books, and inkstands are on the table (162, 
 a). Their house and mine (fern., 163). His keys and 
 thine (fem.pl.). Your ink and his (fern. sing.). Their 
 inkstands and ours. To my pen and to yours (a la 
 votre). To your watch and to his (164, Hem.). Of my 
 houses and of yours (des votres). Of his friend and of 
 mice. He is a brother of mine (165). She is a friend 
 (fern.) of yours (ime de, etc.). Is your neighbor sick 
 (your neigh., is he — ) ? My neighbor is very sick. Has 
 he my book or yours (163) ? He has neither (il rfa ni) 
 yours nor mine; he has his own (le sien). Has she your 
 volume or theirs ? She has neither (812) mine nor theirs. 
 Is her ink better (133, fern.) than mine (fern.)? Hers 
 is the best (la meiUeure). Thy wife is sick (162). Is 
 his ink thick (epaisse) ? Have you my keys or theirs 
 (163) ? I have neither yours nor theirs (pi). Is your 
 father sick (814) ? How are (81V) your brothers? How 
 is your wife (madame votre epouse) ? Are your sisters 
 home (d la maison) ? His wife and his friend (fern.) 
 are at (chez) the baker's. I am writing a letter for our 
 servants. Why do you write letters (partitive) for your 
 servants? Because I like to do it (d le /aire, 816). 
 Does my watch go? Yes, and yours goes also. The 
 watches and the keys are mine (d moi). The little boys 
 are thine (813). Thine (les tiens) are mine (813), and 
 mine are thine. What is he going to do ? He is going 
 to sing my ballad. Are you going to look for their 
 keys ? I am not going to look for their keys, but for 
 
 * Son, sa, ses, mean his, her, or its, according to the gender of the 
 antecedent. 
 
§ 821-823.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 315 
 
 mine.* Here are some letters {partitive) ; are they 
 (elles) yours (813) ? Here is my mother. There are his 
 friends. He struck me on my foot (815). My son took 
 leave of his mother. There is a friend of mine (165). 
 Do you see our houses? I do not see them (I see them 
 not). What do you love to do (or to make) ? I love to 
 make paper hats (hats of paper, 816). 
 
 SECTION NINTH. 
 
 EXERCISE NINTH. 
 
 821. Vocabulary. 
 Parlez-vous, do you speak? 
 Vous parlez, you speak. 
 Langue, f., language. 
 II parle, he speaks. 
 Francais-e, French. 
 Espagnol-e, Spanish. 
 Italien-ne, Italian. 
 Difficile, difficult. 
 Facile, easy. 
 Europe, Europe. 
 J'achete, I buy, am buying. 
 lis pleurent, they iveep. 
 II fait, he makes, does. 
 Celtique, Celtic. 
 Russe, Hussian. 
 
 Je crois, I think, believe. 
 
 Dieu, m., God. 
 
 Tete, f., head. 
 
 Yeux, m. pi., eyes. 
 
 ISTeveu, m., nepheio. 
 
 Rue, f, street. 
 
 Quelqne chose, something, 
 any thing. 
 
 J'offre, I offer. 
 
 Voulez-vous, loill youf do 
 you ivish f 
 
 Recevez-vous, do you re- 
 ceive f 
 
 Je recois, I receive. 
 
 Peintre, m., painter. 
 
 822. Adjectives derived from the names of nations are 
 written with a small initial letter; thus, Un livre/ran- 
 cais ; la langue espagnole ; not Francais, Espagnole. 
 
 823. Quelque chose takes the preposition de (<:?') after 
 it whenever it is followed by an adjective. 
 
 * For, hei*e, is not to be translated by pour, chercher alone signify- 
 ing to look for ; hence write mais les miennes. 
 
316 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 824, 825. 
 
 824. Model sentences. 
 
 L'homme qui est dans le jardin est mon pere, the man 
 
 loho is in the garden is my father. 
 La plume avec laquelle (170) j'ecris est d'or, the pen 
 
 with which Iiorite is of gold. 
 Quelque chose qu'il me dit, something which he told 
 
 me. 
 La maison dont vous parlez, the house of which you 
 
 speak. 
 La femme dans le jardin de laquelle nous sommes, est 
 
 riche, the woman in whose garden we are is rich. 
 Le chemin par ou je vais est agreable, the road by 
 
 which I go is pleasant. 
 
 825. Translate into English. 
 
 Voici l'homme qui me donna du pain. Voila les 
 femmes qui trouverent le tresor (168, a). J'ecris avec 
 la plume d'or que l'ecolier me donna (168). J'aime les 
 poires qui sont douces. Yoici les enfants que j'aime. 
 La lettre qu'il ecrit est pour la fille du peintre (168, b). 
 L'homme dont (or de qui) je parle fait des chapeaux 
 (169). Le livre dont vous parlez est rare. Les amis de 
 qui (or dont) il prit conge sont sous les arbres. La de- 
 moiselle a qui j'ecris la lettre est tres belle. L'enfant a 
 qui je parle n'ecrit pas. La dame a laquelle (1*70) il le 
 dit est malade. Le travail auquel je me livre {give my- 
 self) est difficile. L'ecolier chez qui (to tohose house) je 
 vais a un nouveau livre. La maison, dans laquelle il fait 
 les montres est sur la rue. L'homme, dont la fille est 
 malade me dit quelque chose. L'homme, dont la maison 
 est sur le chemin va a Paris. L'ebeniste, dont j'achete 
 les tables (173) est tres riche. Le meunier, dont j'aime 
 l'argent me frappa. L'homme, de la femme duquel vous 
 parlez est un bon Francais (174). Le boulanger de 
 (from) la mere duquel il prit l'argent, va le chercher. 
 La ville par ou (176) il va est grande. La maison d'ou. 
 
§ 826.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 317 
 
 je viens (176) est sur la rue. Parlez-vous francais (822), 
 monsieur ? Non, mademoiselle, je parle des langues qui 
 sont plus difficiles que la langue francaise. Je parle les 
 langues celtiques seulement. Y a-t-il des langues plus 
 difficiles que le francais ? Oui, il y a l'italien qui est plus 
 difficile, mais Pespagnol est plus facile que le francais. 
 La langue espagnole est la langue la plus facile de l'Eu- 
 rope, je crois. J'achete quelque chose qui est belle. Les 
 petits enfants que je vois dans le chemin pleurent. Pour- 
 quoi pleurent-ils ? lis pleurent parce qu'ils aiment a le 
 faire. Dieu aime les bons ecoliers qui l'aiment. Mon 
 neveu a qui j'offre le tresor est tres pauvre. Avez-vous 
 quelque chose de bon (823) ? J'ai quelque chose de joli 
 que je vous offre. Voulez-vous me faire un habit ? Je 
 n'ai pas le temps. Recevez-vous les pommes que je vous 
 offre? Je les recois. II frappa son frere sur la tete 
 avec le livre que Jean lui donna. 
 
 826. Translate into French. 
 
 Here is the boy who (168) struck his brother. Here 
 are the boys who found the treasure (168, a). There is 
 a child whom I love (168). Here are the apples which 
 I like. I do not offer (to) him the books which my 
 friend gave me. The song which (168, Hem.) he sings 
 is very pretty {fern.). The child who is in the garden 
 loves his mother. Will you give me the treasure which 
 (dont) you speak of (175, Hem.) ? The lady of whom I 
 write is the wife of the painter (169). The tables of 
 which I speak are for you. The friend of whom he took 
 leave is going to Paris. The lady to whom I write the 
 letter is very beautiful (fern.). She has two sons with 
 whom (171) I am going to Havre. The servant to whom 
 you speak does not write. The gentleman to whom he 
 said it is very rich. The work (travail) to which I give 
 myself (je me livre) is very difficult. The painter has 
 the treasure which the scholar found in the street. My 
 
318 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 827. 
 
 brother has a treasure which his servant found in the 
 city. The city in Avhich (171) John found the treasure 
 is large (grande) and beautiful. The women for whom 
 (171) William is-writing the letters are very beautiful 
 and rich. The baker to-whose-shop (chez qui) I go has 
 bread and meat. The house in which I buy my tables 
 is on the street. The boy whose sister (172) is sick told 
 me (said to me) something. The man whose friend is 
 in the road is going to Paris. The scholar with whose 
 pen (174) I am writing is learned and rich. The baker 
 whose bread I buy (173) has a wife and two pretty lit- 
 tle children. The miller, whose money he found, struck 
 him. The cabinet-maker, whose wife is beautiful, is go- 
 ing to the city. The boy from (de) whom you receive 
 the watch is the son of the Englishman. The house in 
 which there is a treasure is white (fe?n., 123). Do you 
 speak (the) Russian, miss ? No, I speak a language 
 which is easier; I speak French (822). Here are two 
 books which he found in the street. The Celtic lan- 
 guages are the most difficult languages in (of the) Eu- 
 rope. I see with my eyes the children who weep. 
 
 SECTION TENTH. 
 
 EXEECISE TENTH. 
 
 827. Vocabulary. 
 
 Voulez-vous, do you toish f Mangez-vous, do you eatf 
 
 Je veux, J toish. Manger, to eat. 
 
 Aller, to go. Vin, m., wine. 
 
 Beaucoup, much, many. Boire, to drink. 
 
 Demeurez-vous, do you live? Juge, m., judge. 
 
 J e demeure, I live, dwell. Medecin, m., physician. 
 
 Je viens, I come. Vrai-e, true. 
 
 Je mange, I eat. Cheval, m., horse. 
 
§ 828-831.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 319 
 
 Argent, m., silver, money. Etes-vous ? are you f 
 Feuille, f., leaf. Content-e, pleased, satisfied. 
 
 Nom, m., name. Ecrire, to write. 
 
 Assez, enough, plenty. Je fais, I make, I do. 
 
 828. The words "beaucoup" and "assez" are accom- 
 panied by de (d^) when they are followed by a noun. 
 
 a. In general, en must be employed in French when- 
 ever a noun used in its partitive sense is omitted, or 
 whenever en answers to the question "what?" "of 
 what?" "from what?" "from where?" etc. 
 
 829. To him, to them (persons), are expressed by "lui," 
 "leur," respectively; but to it, to them (things), are 
 translated by " y." See 153. 
 
 830. Model sentences. 
 
 En avez-vous beaucoup ? have you much (of it). 
 
 J'en ai assez, I have enough (of it) (179, B^T"). 
 
 Combien des poires recevez-vous ? how many of (the) 
 pears do you receive f 
 
 Je n'en recois pas (1*78, a), I receive none (of them). 
 
 Avez-vous beaucoup de sceurs ? have you many sis- 
 ters f 
 
 J'en ai deux seulement, I have only two (of them). 
 
 En etes-vous content ? are you satisfied with it ? 
 
 Y allez-vous ? are you going thither f 
 
 J'y suis, I am there. 
 
 831. Translate into Miglish. 
 
 Avez-vous du pain? J'en ai (1*78). Mangez-vous des 
 (any) pommes ? J'en mange. Recevez-vous du drap ? 
 J'en recois. Me donnez-vous des tresors ? Je vous en 
 donne. Voulez-vous de la viande ? J'en veux. Je n'en 
 veux pas (178, a). Wen voulez-vous pas (181) ? Voyez- 
 vous mes maisons ? Je ne vois pas les votres, mais j'en 
 vois de belles (87). Allez-vous boire du vin ? Non,je 
 ne veux pas en boire (178, a). Head Remark under 
 Ride 178. 
 
320 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 832. 
 
 Combien de (798) freres avez-vous ? J'en ai trois (179). 
 Avez-vous assez de (828) vin? Je n'en ai pas assez 
 (177, b). A-t-il beaucoup d'argent (828) ? II n'en a pas 
 assez, mais il en a beaucoup (828, a). Etes-vous content 
 de vos enfants? J'en suis content (179). Allez-vous 
 ecrire une lettre a la fille du medecin ? Je vais lui en 
 ecrire une (828, a). Venez-vous de Paris? J'en viens 
 (179). Voulez-vous donner des ehevaux au juge? Je 
 veux lui en donner. Combien voulez-vous lui en donner ? 
 Je veux lui en donner un (181). Avez-vous des pommes? 
 Oui, j'en ai. Donnez-m'en (181, i^^). Non, je n'en ai 
 pas assez. Vous en avez trois. Oui, mais je veux en 
 manger trois. Ou demeurez-vous ? Je demeure au Ha- 
 vre. Y demeurez-vous (184). Y allez-vous? J'y vais. 
 Allez-y (185). Y etes-vous ? J'y suis. Nous y sommes. 
 Voulez-vous l'y chercher (185, a) ? Je veux l'y cher- 
 cher. Je lui en offre. Voyez-vous des poires a Paris ? 
 J'y en vois (185, a). Donnez-lui-en. Donnez-1 cur-en. 
 Y a-t-il {are there) des feuilles sur les arbres ? II y en a 
 sur les arbres et il y en a aussi sur la terre. Etes-vous 
 l'homme dont le nom est Guillaume? Mon nom est 
 Guillaume, que (tohat) voulez-vous ? Je fais des habits, 
 en voulez-vous ? Oui, j'en veux un, mais je n'ai pas d'ar- 
 gent. 
 
 832. Translate into French. 
 
 Has he any brothers ? He has (181) some ; he has two 
 (177, a, b) . How much bread have you ? I have enough 
 (179, 181). Have you any ink? I have some. I have 
 some good {de bonne).* Do you eat any pears? I eat 
 some. Do you receive any letters? I receive some. 
 Do you receive many {of them, 828, a, 181). I do not 
 receive many (179, tdp 33 ). Do you give me some ap- 
 ples ? I give you some ("en" follows vous). Have I 
 
 * This "de" tefore the adjective following "en" is the partitive, 
 according to 87. It should always be employed in similar examples. 
 
§ 833.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 321 
 
 any good cloth? You have some good (de bon). Do 
 you wish any milk ? I wish none (I do not wish any, 
 178, a). Are you going to eat any bread? No, I am 
 not going to eat any. How many sisters have you ? I 
 have only two {of them, 179). Have you tea enough 
 (828, assez de the) ? I have not enough (of it). How 
 much (of it) do you wish ? I do not wish much. Are 
 you satisfied with (de) your name ? I am satisfied with 
 it (179). Are you going to write a letter to the paiut- 
 er ? I am going to write one to him (lui en ecrire une). 
 Do you come from there (179) ? I come from there. Do 
 you wish to give some money to the baker? I wish to 
 give some to him (181). How much do you wish to 
 give him (lui en donner) ? I wish to give him much. 
 Have you any apples? Yes, I have some (181). Give 
 me two (181, B^ 33 ). No, I have only one. Do you live 
 there (184, 185) ? I live there. Are you going there? 
 I am going there. Are you looking for him there (185, 
 a)? He took me to it (183). Do you see any there 
 (185, a) ? I make some. 
 
 SECTION ELEVENTH. 
 
 EXERCISE ELEVENTH. 
 
 833. Vocabulary. 
 
 Devoir, m., duty. Capitaine, m., captain. 
 
 II dit, he says. Espece, f., sort, kind. 
 
 Remplit-il, does he fulfill ? Soldat, m., soldier. 
 
 II remplit, he fulfills. Entends-je, do I hear ? 
 
 Soin, m., care. Musique, f., music. 
 
 Guerre, f., war. Etudiez-vous, do you study? 
 
 Triste, sad, gloomy. Etude, f., study. 
 
 Chaise, f., chair. II doit, he must, it must, 
 
 Epee, f., sword. fitre, to be. 
 -O 2 
 
322 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 834-837. 
 
 Le, so, it (object). Vous apprenez, you learn, 
 
 II s'assied, he sits. Vous dites, you say. 
 
 II lit, he reads, is reading. lis font, they make, do. 
 II apprend, he learns, is Malheur, m., misfortune, 
 learning. 
 
 834. The formulas "qui est-ce qui," "qui est-ce que," "qu'est-ce 
 qui," etc., are much used in ihejamiliar style instead of qui, que, etc. 
 Though interrogative, they require the subject of the verb to stand in 
 the same order as in affirmative sentences, i. e., before the verb; 
 qu'est-ce qu'il dit, not dit-il ? 
 
 835. In English there is great variety in the forms of the same 
 verb, according as it is negative, interrogative, emphatic, or progress- 
 ive ; thus we say, 1 sing, I do sing, or I am singing ; do I sing ? am 
 I singing? I do not sing; do I not sing? I did sing, etc., etc. In 
 French, however, the verb is varied in two ways only ; when affirma- 
 tive, the simple subject is placed before it, and when interrogative, 
 placed after it with the hyphen, or, if it end in a vowel in the third 
 person singular, with the euphonic t ; this is all the student has to 
 keep in mind, and consequently the above forms are to be rendered 
 je chante for the first three ; chante-je (sing I) ? for the fourth and 
 fifth ; and Je chanted (I sung), etc. In no case are equivalents to be 
 sought for do, did, and the, present participle with "to be." 
 
 836. The pronoun je is written with a small "j" when it does not 
 commence a sentence after a full stop. 
 
 a. Verbs which end in an e mute (as parle) in the first person sin- 
 gular require an acute accent over the e (e) as often as this form of 
 the verb is employed interrogatively ; as, chante-je ? parle-je ? ne 
 parle-je pas ? do I sing ? do I speak ? do I not speak ? 
 
 837. Model sentences. 
 
 Qui est-ce qui chante? who sings? is singing? etc. 
 
 (835.) 
 Qu'est-ce qu'il chante ? what does he sing (si?igs he) ? 
 Que chante-je ? ichat do I sing (sing I) ? 
 Que chante-t-il (805) ? what does he sing (sings he) ? 
 De qui avez-vous le cheval ? whose horse have you ? 
 Qui est-ce que vous cherchez? whom are you seeking ? 
 
 or, who is it whom you seek ? 
 Quels devoirs remplit-il? what duties fulfills he ? 
 
§ 838.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 323 
 
 838. Translate into English. 
 
 Qui vous airae ? Dieu nous aime. Qui aimez-vous 
 (187)? Que voulez-vous, or qu'est-ce que vous voulez 
 (834)? De qui parlez-vous ? De quoi (188) parlez- 
 vous ? A qui donnez-vous la poire ? A quoi (at) s'as- 
 sied-il ? Qui cherchez-vous, or qui est-ce que vous cher- 
 chez ? Que cherchez-vous, or qu'est-ce que vous cher- 
 chez ? Qui etes-vous ? Je suis le soldat. Quelle es- 
 pece de* soldat etes-vous (189) ? Je suis un soldat qui 
 aime a frapper les ennemis. Qu'avez-vous (188) ? J'ai 
 quelque chose de bon. Qu'avez-vous def bon ? Quel 
 livre l'ecolier lit-il (807) ? II lit le livre dont le nom est 
 "livre de devoirs." De qui mangez-vous la pomme 
 (191) ? Quels devoirs remplit le soldat? II remplit de 
 tristes devoirs (87). Qu'est-ce qu'il apprend? II ap- 
 prend la langue russe. Quelle est la langue (189, a) la 
 plus difficile de l'Europe? La langue la plus difficile 
 doit etre le russe. Non, ce (it) n'est pas la langue russe, 
 mais laquelle (190) est-ce? Que dit-il? Quelle femme 
 apprend le francais (189) ? Laquelle des deux filles ap- 
 prend l'espagnol ? Vous avez deux amis, lequel aimez- 
 vous ? Quelles pommes mangez-vous (189) ? Quels 
 soins prit-il ? Qu'est-ce que j'entends ? Qui est-ce que 
 j'entends ? Qu'apprenez-vous ? Je apprends la mu- 
 sique. Apprend-il le francais aussi ? Non, c'est (it is) 
 une langue qu'il n'aime pas. A quelle table s'assied-il? 
 La guerre qu'ils font (make, wage) est tres triste. Des 
 deux chaises qui sont chez l'ebeniste, laquelle aimez- 
 vous ? II s'assied a la table sur ma chaise. L'epee que 
 j'aime est chez le soldat (at the soldier's). Le capitaine 
 sous lequel le soldat va a la guerre, a beaucoup d'amis. 
 
 * The "a" in what kind of a is not translated in French, therefore 
 supply it in the above sentence. 
 
 t An adjective in the predicate after "que" interrogative, must be 
 preceded by "de" {of) — what have you (of) good? 
 
324 FRENCH GKAMMAE. [§ 839. 
 
 Qu'est-ce que vous etudiez ? L'etude de la langue fran- 
 caise est facile et agreable. II doit etre capitaine, il est 
 tres brave. Je le crois. Le livre dans lequel il lit est a 
 raoi. Que dites-vous? Quel est son malheur (189, a) ? 
 Quels habits (189) font-ils? 
 
 839. Translate into French. 
 
 Who is in the street (187) ? Who are you? Whom 
 do you seek? What (188) do you say? What have 
 you (188) ? I have the table at which (a laquelle) the 
 physician is sitting. What are you singing? I am 
 singing an old (vieille) song which my father loves. Of 
 whom do you speak (187) ? To whom did he say so 
 (said he so) ? I love the children who are wise. 
 
 Of what (188) does he speak {speaks he)? With (de) 
 what are you satisfied? To whom (187) do you wish 
 (wish you) to give the horse ? With (avec) what did 
 he strike his child? What has the carpenter? What 
 is he doing (does he) ? What do you see ? What are 
 you looking for (seek you) ? To whom are you writ- 
 ing ? Whom do I see (see I) ? Whom seek ye (you) ? 
 
 Whom does he love ? What are you writing (use sec- 
 ond ox familiar form) ? What book have you (189) ? 
 What or which man do you see ? Which woman is the 
 wife of the physician ? What duties does he fulfill (ful- 
 fills he)? What is your name (189, a) ? What are 
 your duties ? What letters must he write (doit-il 
 ecrire) ? In which house do you live (189) ? Which 
 (one) of the two houses do you like (190)? Here are 
 (void) two books ; which (one) are you studying ? 
 Which ones (lesquels) have you ? Which of the swords 
 is of silver (190) ? Which book (quel) do you receive ? 
 Which one (lequel) do you receive ? With which (avec 
 quelle) pen do you write? With which one (avec la- 
 quelle) do you write? Whose sword have you (191)? 
 Whose watch has the boy (le gargon de qui a-t-il la 
 
§ 840, 841.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 325 
 
 montre) ? Whose books are you studying (of whom 
 study you the hooks) ? In whose chair is he sitting (in 
 the chair of whom sits he) ? At (a) whose table do you 
 eat? 
 
 What a fine day (quel beau jour ; omit a or an after 
 " what" in exclamations) ! What a study (fern.) ! What 
 music ! What a war ! What good judges ! He must 
 go to the physician's. To what physician's (chez quel) ? 
 I believe so. What languages are you learning ? Which 
 languages do you like ? Why do you learn French 
 (franpais) ? Because it is easy, and because I like it. 
 What a misfortune ! 
 
 SECTION TWELFTH. 
 
 EXERCISE TWELFTH. 
 
 840. Vocabulary. 
 
 Heros, m., hero (41). Assidu-e, industrious. 
 
 Gant, m., glove. Heureux-se, happy. 
 
 Vaisseau, m., ship. Toujours, always. 
 
 Malle, f., trunk. Malheureux-se, unfortunate. 
 
 Mettez-vous, do you put, Est-ce, is it f 
 
 place ? Savez-vous, do. you know f 
 
 Travaille, (he) works. Connaissez-vous, are you ac- 
 
 Verite, f., truth. quainted with f 
 
 Diligence, f., stage (coach). Je puis, I can. 
 Diligent-e, prompt, diligent. Je sais, I know. [with. 
 
 Affaires, f. pi., business. Je connais, Jam acquainted 
 Reussira, (he) will succeed. Miserable, wretched. 
 Ffatte, flatters. Joie, f-,joy. 
 
 Reussite, f., success. Bonheur, m., happiness. 
 
 Sans, without. Pouvez-vous, can youf 
 
 841. Model sentences. 
 
 Aimez-vous ces gants-ci? do you like these gloves? 
 
326 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 842. 
 
 Je n'aime pas ceux-ci mais j'aime ceux-la, I do not like 
 these, but Hike those. 
 
 Voulez-vous cette pomme-ci ou celle-la ? do you wish 
 this apple or that one ? 
 
 Je ne veux ni celle-ci ni celle-la, I wish neither this 
 one nor that one. 
 
 Voyez-vous cet homme ou cet enfant, do you see tins 
 man or this child? 
 
 Je ne vois pas ce heros, I do not see this hero. 
 
 Avez-vous votre plume? have you your pen? 
 
 Non, j'ai celle du niedecin, no, I have the physician , s. 
 
 Avez-vous mes chapeaux? have you my hats? 
 
 J'ai ceux de Jean, I have Johrfs {those of John). 
 
 Mangez-vous ces poires? do you eat these pears? 
 
 ISTon, je mange celles de l'ecolier, no, I eat the scholar's 
 {those of, etc.). 
 
 842. Translate into English. 
 
 Mangez-vous ce pain (193)? Voyez-vous ce chien? 
 Avez-vous ce chapeau? Ce heros (193, 41) que fait-il? 
 Cet encrier (194) est de fer. Que mettez-vous dans cet 
 encrier ? Cet homme que trouva-t-il (194) ? Cette encre 
 est bleue (195). Aimez-vous cette viande ? Cette terre 
 est malheureuse (118). Pourquoi est-elle malheureuse? 
 Connaissez-vous cette dame? Qu' avez-vous dans cette 
 malle? Cette reussite me fait heureux. Connaissez- 
 vous ces hommes? Non, mais je connais ces dames 
 (196). Allez-vous chercher ces amis-ci (197) ou ceux-la 
 (200) ? Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui-la? Je n'ai ni celui- 
 ci ni celui-la. Va-t-il a Paris dans cette diligence-ci ou 
 dans celle-la (199). Ecrivez-vous une lettre a ce malheu- 
 reux ci ou a cette malheureuse-la (124). Avez-vous ces 
 malles-ci ou celles-la? Qui est miserable? Celui qui 
 est sans verite. Celui qui (198) travaille est heureux. 
 Celle qui chante la jolie chanson est l'epouse de l'Ameri- 
 cain. Celui que le garcon frappa est malade. Celle que 
 
§ 843.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 327 
 
 je vois est heureuse. Celle qu'il aime est malheureuse. 
 Ceux qui sont assidus (110, 783) sont heureux. Ceux 
 qui sont toujours malheureux sont miserables. Celles 
 qui sont toujours contentes sont toujours heureuses. 
 Celles qui font leurs devoirs ont du bonheur. Ceux que 
 je connais ont un tresor qu'ils trouverent dans le chemin. 
 Celles que les hommes cherchent {are looking for) ont 
 beaucoup d'amies et d'amis {friends both male and fe- 
 male), parce qu'elles sont belles et diligentes. Celui 
 dont je flatte l'honneur reussira dans ses affaires. Celle 
 de qui (198, b) je vous parle est la fils du heros. Voyez- 
 vous ce vaisseau-ci ou celui-la (200) ? Avez-vous mon 
 chapeau ou celui de mon neveu (199) ? Je n'ai ni le 
 votre ni celui de votre neveu. Pouvez-vous me donner 
 ce gant ou celui de votre ami ? Je ne puis vous donner 
 ni ces gants ni ceux de vos amis. Mettez-vous le chapeau 
 dans cette malle ou dans celle de Jean ? Lit-il ce livre- 
 ci ou celui-la? Connaissez-vous le garcon que je con- 
 nais ou celui que mon frere flatte (199, b). Le livre 
 qu'il lit et celui que mon frere lit sont bons. Travaille- 
 t-il dans ce vaisseau-ci ou dans celui-la (200) ? Lesquels 
 sont les plus miserables, ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? Dans quel 
 encrier mettez-vous votre plume, dans celui-ci ou dans 
 celui-la ? Quelles pommes mangez-vous, celles-ci ou celles- 
 la? J'ai des gants et des chapeaux, ceux-ci (200, a) 
 sont de drap et ceux-la sont de soie.* 
 
 Savez-vous cela (201) ? Pouvez-vous faire ceci (201) ? 
 Non, mais je puis faire cela. Donnez-moi cela. Mangez 
 {eat) ceci. Faites attention, mes enfants, a ce que (202) 
 je vous ecris. Ecrivez-vous ce qu'il dit ? Savez-vous ce 
 qu'il y a de vrai dans ce livre-la ? Mettez-vous dans le 
 vaisseau ce que vous voulez ? Je mange ce que je veux. 
 II dit ce qui est vrai (202). Est-ce vous ? Non, ce n'est 
 
 * Observe that the French reverse the order, and say " the latter' 
 and "the former." 
 
328 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 843. 
 
 pas moi (203). C'est vrai. Qu'est-ce que c'est ? C'est 
 un Fran9ais. Qui est-ce que je vois ? C'est lui, c'est le 
 fils du boulanger qui travaille dans la maison du medecin. 
 
 843. Translate into French. 
 
 This man (194). This horse (193). Those gloves 
 (196). This truth (195). This inkstand. These keys. 
 Those ladies (197) are the most beautiful women in the 
 city. This boy and his sister are wretched (phir.). This 
 Blue ink is better {fern) than that white paper. Have 
 you these gloves (197) or those (200) ? Do you know 
 this servant or that one (use connaissez-vous). I know 
 (je sais) this language, but I do not know that one (200). 
 How many languages does this gentleman know ? This 
 gentleman knows more (of them, en) than that one. 
 
 Do you know these languages ? I do not know these 
 (celles-ci), but I know those which (199, b) my brother 
 speaks. Do you see this man or the one who (198, celui 
 qui) is sitting at the table ? I see neither this one nor 
 that one (200), but I see the one whom (199,5) you are 
 looking for. Do you like these stages or those ? I like 
 neither these nor those ; I like the railroads. Do you 
 know (connaissez-vous) him of whom (198, a) I speak? 
 He who is contented is happy (198). Who is always 
 happy ? Those who love the truth. He whom you love 
 is sick. She who has my book must give it to me. She 
 whom I love is my best friend (fern.) on the earth. 
 Those who found a treasure are less happy than those 
 who found the truth. Those whom you are looking for 
 are singing at (chez) the painter's. Do you like these 
 hats better (inieux) than those of John (199, a) ? I like 
 those which you have better (mieux) than those which 
 (199, b) John has. Do you eat those apples or those of 
 the baker ? Here are some chairs ; do you wish this one 
 (/em., 200) ? Do you write these letters with the pens 
 which William gave you, or with those with which the 
 
§ 844.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 329 
 
 scholar is writing ? Do you study the book which the 
 scholar has, or the one which I have ? 
 
 The rich are always happy and the poor are always 
 wretched ; the latter have (200, a) much truth and the 
 former have much money. That (201) is not true. Will 
 you do this or that (201) ? Can you do that ? Do you 
 know that? This is unfortunate (malheureux). 
 
 What (202) I do, you know not (it). Do you know 
 what I wish to do ? Do you receive what you wish ? 
 What she says (dit, 202) is not true. He reads what 
 you learn. It (203) is I. It is they. It is (203) we 
 who have some (qui en avons). It is my son (203). 
 Those are (ce sont la) my neighbors. This hero sits at the 
 table with his friends. I offer (to) him this key because 
 I do not wish it (la). I am buying this house with the 
 money which my father gave me. Are you putting those 
 gloves on your hands? Do you put the trunks upon 
 that ship or upon this one (celui-ci) ? He works at (a) 
 his French books. The stage-coach is not very diligent 
 (fern.). He will succeed in his business. This success 
 flatters him. The industrious (woman, fern.) is happy, 
 and she does not always work without good success. I 
 am unhappy, because he will not succeed in his business. 
 Do you know the name of this wretched (man) ? Are 
 you acquainted with this gentleman ? I am not acquaint- 
 ed- with him. It is a wretched (man, 203). Can you 
 give us joy and happiness (partitive before each noun) ? 
 I can do it. 
 
 SECTION THIRTEENTH. 
 
 EXERCISE THIRTEENTH. 
 
 844. Vocabulary. 
 Propre, own. Quand, when. 
 
 Si, if. Defaut, m., fault. 
 
330 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 845, 846. 
 
 Remarquer, to notice. Douleur, f., grief, pain. 
 
 Vie, f., life. « Condition, f., condition. 
 
 Mort, f., death. Autant que, as much as. 
 
 Vraitnent, truly. Lecon, f., lesson. 
 
 Peut, (he) can. Roi, m., king. 
 
 Plaisir, m., pleasure. Remplir, to fulfill. 
 
 Je mets, I put, put on. Prochain, m., neighbor, f el* 
 
 lis mettent, they put, put on. low-creature. 
 
 Ici, here. Etat, m., state. 
 
 Mortel-le, mortal. Louis, Lewis. 
 
 845. Model sentences. 
 
 Si Ton peut (207, a), if one can. 
 
 Je ne vois personne, I see no one. 
 
 Personne ne l'aime (208), nobody loves him (or her). 
 
 Yous n'avez rien (211), you have nothing. 
 
 Je n'en sais rien, jETcnow nothing of it. 
 
 Je n'ai aucun defaut (218), I have nofaidt. 
 
 En voyez-vous quelques-uns (209, b) ? do you see any? 
 
 J'en vois plusieurs (222), I see several {of them). 
 
 Je demeure dans une telle maison (223), Hive in such 
 
 a house. 
 Tous les homines sont mortels (224, c), all men are 
 
 mortal. 
 Chaque age a ses lecons (216), every age has its lessons. 
 Chacun doit remarquer (206, b), every one must notice. 
 
 EXERCISES ON EIRST CLASS. 
 
 846. Translate into English. 
 
 II voit les defauts d'autrui (205) mais il ne voit pas 
 les siens. On ne doit pas chercher les defauts d'autrui. 
 II remplit ses propres devoirs, mais non pas (not) ceux 
 d'autrui. Chacun (206, b) dit la verite. Chacune de 
 ces dames a une bonne lecon (206, a). Chacun doit rem- 
 plir les devoirs de son etat (206, b). Chacun d'eux a un 
 cheval. Chacune de vous (fern.) sait sa lecon. Ici l'on 
 
§ 847.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 331 
 
 fait des habits (207, a). Si Ton est riche, on (207) a 
 beaucoup d'amis. On doit aimer son prochain au- 
 tant que soi-meme (219, a). Si l'on n'est pas riche, on 
 n'est pas toujours malheureux. Ici Ton parle francais. 
 Quelqu'un a-t-il les gants de ma soaur (209, a) ? Per- 
 sonne ne les a (208). Qui va a Paris? Personne n'y 
 va. Quelqu'un me parle-t-il fran9ais ? Personne ne 
 vous parle francais, mais quelqu'un vous parle italien. 
 Connaissez-vous quelqu'un? Je ne connais personne. 
 Savez-vous quelques-unes (209, b) de ces langues ? J'en 
 sais quelques-unes. Cherchez-vous quelqu'un (209, a) ? 
 Oui, je cherche quelques-uns de ces messieurs. Avez- 
 vous quelque chose (215)? Je n'ai rien (211). JSTe 
 mangez-vous rien ? Oui, je mange quelques-unes de ces 
 poires. Que cherche-t-il ? II ne cherche rien. Voyez- 
 vous cette encre et cette plume ? Je vois l'une et l'au- 
 tre (213). L'un et l'autre de ces chevaux sont beaux. 
 Les uns sont miserables, les autres sont heureux (212, 
 a). J'aime les unes (fern.) mais d'autres je n'aime pas. 
 Connaissez-vous l'une ou l'autre de ces dames ? Je ne 
 connais ni l'une ni l'autre (214). Sait-il cette lecon-ci 
 ou celle-la? II ne sait ni l'une ni l'autre. 
 
 847. Translate into French. 
 
 The faults of others (205) are not ours. Our faults 
 give us pain as much as those of others. The happiness 
 of others ought to be {doit etre) a pleasure to us. One 
 ought to notice the faults of others as much as our own 
 (les notres). Every body knows it (206, b). Every body 
 has pleasure when he (on) does (fulfills) his duty. Each 
 one of these lessons is difficult (206, a). Each one of 
 those ships has a captain (206, a). We love (on) to 
 give pleasure (partitive) to the poor (207). We ought 
 not (on) to notice the faults of our fellow-creatures, be- 
 cause we have (nous) them also. Here they speak (207, 
 a) of the sad war. If one can love his neighbor as much 
 
332 FKENCH GEAMMAK. [§ 847*. 
 
 as himself (soi-meme), one must be happy. In this life 
 one can be (peut etre) truly happy. Death (the death) 
 is life to the good. The condition of the bad after (apres 
 la) death is a state of misery (malheur). No one is (208) 
 acquainted with him (le connait). No one is without 
 faults. I see no one. She loves nobody. Louis (the) 
 Fourteenth said, " I am the state" (the state it is I), but 
 no one believes him (le croit). Some one has my book 
 (209, a). Somebody is singing. Somebody said what I 
 do not believe. Has any body my pen ? Are you ac- 
 quainted with any of these ladies (209, b) ? I am ac- 
 quainted with some (of them). Will you eat some of 
 these biscuits? I will eat some (of them). Has he any 
 thing? He has nothing (211). He said nothing. What 
 do you wish? I. wish nothing. He who wishes (veat) 
 nothing ought to be satisfied. They are pleased with 
 each other (the one with the other, 212). Some love to 
 drink wine, others (tfautres) love to eat apples (212, a). 
 Do you wish the letter and the paper ? I wish both 
 (213). Are you writing a letter or a book? I am writ- 
 ing both. I have neither (214). 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 847*. Translate into English. 
 
 Avez-vous quelque chose (215)? Oui, monsieur, j'ai 
 quelques gants. En avez-vous quelques-uns (215, Rem.) ? 
 Que chante-t-on ? On chante quelques chansons. On 
 en chante quelques-unes. II a quelques vaisseaux. II y 
 a quelques verites que je recois. Tous les hommes (224, 
 c) ont quelques defauts, et j'en ai quelques-uns aussi. 
 Chaque etat a ses devoirs. Je vais a un port de mer 
 chaque saison (216). Chaque soldat doit etre brave. 
 Chaque condition a ses soius. Je recois des lettres 
 chaque mois de mon neveu. Donnez-moi un livre quel- 
 conque (217). 
 
§ 848, 849.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 333 
 
 848. Translate into French. 
 
 Do you wish any thing (215) ? Yes, sir, I wish a few 
 apples (215). Do you wish any (of them, 215, Hem.)? 
 I wish some. I am buying a few books. Do you re- 
 ceive some letters? I receive some (or a few). Bring 
 me some gloves. I have only a few. Every man has 
 his faults (216). Every woman ought to fulfill the du- 
 ties of her household (menage, m.). Every object (216) 
 which I see gives me pleasure. Every thing has its sea- 
 son. I go to the city every winter. Every garden has 
 a few trees. Give me any pen (whatever), a gold one 
 (une (Tor) if you wish (217). 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 849. Translate into English. 
 
 Aucun ami ne m'aime autant que celui-ci (218). Je 
 ne veux aucune de ces lettres (218). Le meme vais- 
 seau (219). La meme malle. Nous avons les memes 
 lettres que votre frere a. Personne ne l'aime plus que 
 moi-meme (219, a). Nous n'avons pas meme le premier 
 volume de son ouvrage (219, b). Ne pouvez-vous pas 
 meme ecrire ? II ne peut pas meme lire. II parle meme 
 six langues. Nul ne s'assied a sa table. Nul homme 
 n'est toujours heureux (220). Pas un ne (220) nous 
 parla. Nulle femme n'y demeure. Pas un de ces juges 
 n'est riche. Pas une de ces dames n'est belle. Y a-t-il 
 une autre vie? Avez-vous une autre malle (221)? Le 
 jeune homme va chercher un autre plaisir. Je viens 
 par un autre chemin. Donnez-moi une autre epee, je 
 vais a la guerre. S'il y a (63, c) une autre vie la mort 
 n'est pas a craindre. Avez-vous plusieurs enfants (222) ? 
 Je mets plusieurs arbres dans mon jardin. Combien de 
 tables avez-vous? J'en ai plusieurs (222). Ne pouvez- 
 vous pas m'en donner ? Non, je n'en ai pas assez pour 
 moi-meme. Telle est (223) la condition des mortels 
 
334 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 850. 
 
 qu'ils (that they) ne sont pas contents de (with) ce qu'ils 
 ont. Connaissez-vous une telle (fern.) ? De telles choses 
 ne sont pas agreables. Une telle guerre ne doit pas 
 durer (to last). Qui vous donna ces gants? Un tel me 
 les donna. Combien de cette terre voulez-vous ? Don- 
 nez-m'en le tout (224). II me donne tout ce que je veux 
 (224, a), II prit tout. Tout horame a ses douieurs 
 (224, b). Toute femme a ses amies. J'achete toutes 
 les poires que je puis manger (224, c). II parle toutes 
 les langues de la terre. Non, il ne peut pas en parler 
 toutes, parce qu'ii yen a plus de trois mille. Tous les 
 hommes sont mortels, meme les rois (219, b). 
 
 850. Translate into French. 
 
 None of these ladies is beautiful (218). I do not wish 
 to write any (aucune) of these letters. The same day 
 (219). There is (voild) the same woman whom he 
 struck. I write a letter to the same man. It is the 
 same fault which I see in the lady. The king himself 
 (219, a) took leave of his soldiers. I wish to eat it my- 
 self. He is not even (219, b) satisfied when he has the 
 treasure. He does not speak even one language. No 
 one is always diligent (220). No one gave us a chair. 
 No one found a treasure there. Not one of these ap- 
 ples is sweet (douce). Not one of these pens is of gold. 
 Another time (221). Have you another watch ? There 
 is another life. Give me another book ; I am going to 
 read (lire). Has he another sister? He speaks several 
 languages (222). I have several pens. How many 
 brothers have you? I have several (of them). Such a 
 gentleman must be happy (223). Such a condition is 
 unfortunate. I like such pears. He took the whole 
 (of it, 224). All those who are industrious are happy 
 (224, c). My brother has all that (ce qu?) he can find 
 (trouver). All the ladies are good and happy. Every 
 book has leaves (224, b). 
 

 § 851-853.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 335 
 
 SECTION FOURTEENTH. 
 
 dEjfP Before proceeding to translate the remaining exercises, and 
 while the student is learning the verbs " avoir" and "etre," he would 
 do well to review thoroughly the foregoing sections, in order to fix 
 in mind the rules and inflections, which will be seldom referred to 
 hereafter. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE FOURTEENTH. 
 
 851. Vocabulary. 
 
 Pays, m., country. Pauvre, poor. 
 
 Aveugle, blind. UnioD, f., union. 
 
 Aveugle sur, blind to. Honnete, honest. 
 
 Vertu, f., virtue. Marchand, m., merchant. 
 
 Paresse, f., idleness, sloth. De, of, loith, from. 
 Vice, ra., vice. Mecontent-e, dissatisfied. 
 
 Bibliotheque, f., library. Bientot, soon. 
 Jour de fete, m., (national) Avoir faim, to be hungry. 
 
 holiday. Avoir soif, to be thirsty. 
 
 Conge, m., (of schools) hoi- Avoir peur, to be afraid. 
 
 iday. Etre fache-e contre, to be an- 
 
 Hier, yesterday. gry with. 
 
 Demain, to-morrow. Etre fache-e de, to be sorry 
 
 Eau, f., water. Monde, m., world. [for. 
 
 852. The verb " avoir" is used idiomatically with a 
 few words, where, in English, "to be" is employed. 
 
 853. The adjective in the predicate after the verb "to 
 be" must agree in gender and number with the subject. 
 
 I^ 5 When the subject is a personal pronoun of the first or second 
 persons singular and plural, the number and gender are not always 
 clearly distinguished; thus, ifje is used, we may put the adjective 
 in the feminine or masculine gender, according as a male or female 
 is speaking ; as, je suis content ; je suis contente. The same remark 
 applies to tu and nous, except, of course, that the adjective would al- 
 ways agree with the latter in the plural number. Vous is the only 
 pronoun which is employed in both numbers and genders ; when 
 used for the singular in addressing only one person, the adjective is 
 put in the singular, and its gender is determined by that of the per- 
 
336 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 854-856. 
 
 son spoken to ; as, vous etes content ; vous etes contente ; but when 
 vous applies to more than one, the adjective is plural, and feminine 
 or masculine according to the sex of the persons addressed. 
 
 854. The definite article is employed before words 
 taken in the full extent of their signification ; as, l'or, 
 (/old, that is, all gold ; le vice, vice, i. e., all vice, wher- 
 ever found or manifested. 
 
 855. Model sentences. 
 
 Avez-vous faim ou soif ? are you hungry or thirsty ? 
 
 De quoi avaient-ils peur? of what were they afraid? 
 
 La paresse est un vice, idleness is a vice (854). 
 
 L'homme est mortel, man is mortal (854). 
 
 Je (fern.) suis mecontente, I am dissatisfied. 
 
 Nous (fern.) sommes fachees contre vous, we are an- 
 gry with you. 
 
 Vous etes (pi. m.) contents, \ 
 
 Vous etes (2^1- f) contentes, [you are satisfied (853). 
 
 Vous etes (sing.f) contente,] 
 
 Elle fut avengle sur ses defauts, she was blind to her 
 (own) faults. 
 
 856. Translate into English. 
 
 Ou avez-vous ete? J'ai ete a la bibliotheque. A 
 quelle bibliotheque ? A celle du roi. Cet homme a ete 
 toujours aveugle. Qu'est-ce que vous aurez demain? 
 Nous aurons conge. En etes-vous faches or fachees (ac- 
 cording to the sex) ? Oh non, monsieur, les conges nous 
 sont tres agreables. lis ont peur de quelque chose (852). 
 De quoi ont-ils peur? lis ont peur de ce grand chien- 
 la. Quels jours de fete avez-vous dans votre pays? 
 Nous avons le quatre juillet et le vingt-cinq decembre. 
 Bientot je serai riche. Avez-vous soif? Si vous avez 
 soif, vous pouvez boire de l'eau. Je le sais. Quelle 
 espece d'homme est celui-la ? C'est un honnete homme, 
 mais il est aveugle. J'en suis fache. Je suis fache de 
 lui. Etes-vous fache contre lui ? Non, vraiment, pour- 
 
§857.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 337 
 
 quoi serais-je fache contre un pauvre aveugle ? Y a-t-il 
 une guerre dans ce pays-ci? Oui, monsieur, il y. a une 
 triste guerre. L'homme (854) ne doit pas etre fache 
 contre son prochain. J'ai une grande douleur. J'en suis 
 fache. Puis-je faire quelque chose pour vous, ruon ami? 
 ISTon, demain j'aurai le medecin ; je l'aurais eu hier si 
 mon fils n'avait pas ete dans la ville. Dans ce monde il 
 n'y a pas beaucoup de vertu. Oh, cela n'est pas vrai, il 
 y a plus de vertu que de vice. Je suis mecontent de ce 
 monde si la vertu est rare (rare). Quel -est le plus beau 
 pays de l'Europe ? A-t-il ete dans Paris ? Oui, il y de- 
 meure. Ayez de la vertu (partitive) et vous serez heu- 
 reux. Combien de livres avez-vous dans votre bibli- 
 otheque? J'en ai douze cents. Cet enfant a faim, 
 donnez-lui du pain. C'est le fils du pauvre aveugle. La 
 paresse (854) est le plus grand de tous les vices, je crois. 
 Ce marchand sera riche, il est tres assidu. Soyez hon- 
 netes, mes enfants, et vous serez heureux, sages, et bons. 
 II doit avoir faim, car (for) il ne mange pas beaucoup. 
 Quand je serai riche, j'aurai beaucoup d'amis. Ces mar- 
 chands sont mecontents de leurs affaires. Si vous etiez 
 riche vous auriez assez d'amis. 
 
 857. Translate into French. 
 
 Who is thirsty (852) ? The boy is hungry and thirsty. 
 This (cet) blind (man) is the one who sits in the road. 
 This merchant is blind to his interests (interets). Where 
 has he been ? He has been to the library. When will 
 he be (future) in (d) London? He will be there to- 
 morrow. Has he been always blind ? What are you 
 going to have to-morrow? We shall have (a) holiday 
 (conge). Are you sorry for it (en) ? Of what are they 
 afraid ? They are afraid of me because I am (a) soldier 
 (447). Are you afraid of them (cVeux) ? "No, I am an- 
 gry with them. I am sorry for you (de vous). I am 
 sorry for it (en). Have you many holidays (jours de 
 
 P 
 
338 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 858. 
 
 fete) in your country ? In this state and in all the states 
 of the American {fern.) Union we have the fourth (of) 
 July. Idleness (854) is a vice. Virtue (854) is pleasant. 
 These languages are very easy; do you study them? 
 With (de) what are you pleased ? I am dissatisfied with 
 (de) every thing (224, a). Yesterday I was pleased with 
 this book, but to-morrow I shall be dissatisfied with it 
 (e?i). When I am thirsty I drink some water. He is a 
 man poor but honest. He is the most honest man in 
 the world. There is a great library in (e?i) France, and 
 there are many volumes in it. He will soon be blind. 
 I am going from Paris to London. Will the king him- 
 self be in London? I have had a great grief. There is 
 much virtue in this world. If I had (avals) this treasure 
 I should be (serais) very rich. The rich are not always 
 happy. He will have his lesson to-morrow. Russia (la 
 Russie) is the largest country in Europe. What kind 
 of (a) language do they speak (on) there ? They (on) 
 speak the Russian language there. Is it (elle) difficult ? 
 It is less difficult than the German. Be (ye) industrious 
 and you will have many friends. Will you have (voulez^ 
 vous) an apple ? 
 
 SECTION FIFTEENTH. 
 
 EXEECISE FIFTEENTH. 
 
 858. Vocabulary. 
 
 Magnifique, magnificent. Generosite, f., generosity. 
 
 Richesse, f., riches, loealth. Soir, m., evening. 
 
 Fievre, f., fever. Pour, in order to, for. 
 
 Interet, m., interest. Mourut, (he) died. 
 
 Matin, m., morning. Mort-e, dead. 
 
 De bonne heure, early. Perdu-e, lost. 
 Heure, f., oi'cloc'k, hoar, time. Trouve-e, found. 
 

 § 859, 860.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 339 
 
 Bonte, f., goodness. An, in., year. 
 
 Patience, impatience. Exeraple, m., example. 
 
 Avoir honte, to be ashamed. Semaine, f., week. 
 Avoir sommeil, to be sleepy. J'irai, I shall go. 
 Aujourd'hui, to-day. Vous irez, you will go. 
 
 Nouveau, new (fern, nou- Lu-e, read (participle). 
 velle). 
 
 859. Model sentences. 
 
 A-t-il eu quelque chose ?^has he had any thing ? 
 
 Sont-ils morts ? are they dead? 
 
 Ont-ils trouve leurs meres? have they found their 
 
 mothers ? 
 Ai-je perdu mes gants ? have Host my gloves ? 
 Est-ce que vous aviez honte? were you ashamed? 
 Je n'ai pas eu la fievre, I have not had the fever. 
 N'avez-vous point (255) lu ce livre ? have you ?iot read 
 
 this book ? 
 N'avons-nous point eu la patience ? have we not had 
 
 the patience? 
 N'y ont-ils pas ete ? have they not been there ? 
 
 860. Translate into English. 
 
 Quelle heure est-il? II est six heures. Ou sont tes 
 freres? lis sont tous morts. II est seulement huit 
 heures et j'ai sommeil. N'avez-vous pas eu sommeil? 
 lis seront chez raoi demain matin de bonne heure. Ces 
 marchands ont beaucoup de generosite, ils donnent de 
 l'argent aux pauvres. Ou avez-vous ete ce soir? J'ai 
 ete chez le medecin pour chercher mon fils, mais je ne 
 J'ai pas trouve. Votre ami quand mourut-il? II mou- 
 rut hier matin a cinq heures. Est-ce que vous avez per- 
 du quelque chose (253)? Non, je n'ai rien perdu, mais 
 au contraire (on the contrary) j'ai trouve un riche tresor. 
 Ayez la bonte de (to) me donner votre nom. J'ai perdu 
 ma patience. On doit avoir de la patience dans toutes 
 les affaires de la vie. N'avez-vous pas honte, monsieur, 
 
340 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 861. 
 
 de ce que vous dites? J'ai sommeil et je ne puis pas 
 avoir honte quand j'ai sommeil. Aujourd'hui o'est la 
 plus grande fete (holiday) de l'annee. Est-ce que vous 
 avez ete a la ville cette semaine ? Xon, je n'y ai pas 
 ete, mais j'irai (184, a) demain. Avez- vous lu "les 
 Miserables" de Hugo ? Y avez-vou's beaucoup d'in> 
 teret? Oh, oui, c'est un livre magnifique. Est-ce 
 qu'elle est malade? Elle a la fievre. J'en suis bien 
 {very) fache. 
 
 861. Translate into French. 
 
 Have I any friends ? Am I unhappy? Is she sick? 
 Have we found our gloves? Are they ignorant? Has 
 he the time to (cV) go to the library? Has she found 
 her mother ? Have you been dissatisfied ? Have they 
 had any patience ? Has he been at the war ? Will he 
 have the treasure? Have they (fern.) had any new 
 hats ? Have they had any interest in (d) this war ? I 
 am not sick. She is not happy. They are not dead. 
 Have you not read the works of Boileau? He has ntft 
 had the patience to (cle) do it. Have they not been at 
 the festival (fete, f.) this week ? Did he not die (died 
 he not) of the fever ? Is she sleepy ? Are you ashamed ? 
 Are you not afraid ? She will not be afraid. The festi- 
 vals are not magnificent this week. What have you 
 lost? I have lost nothing (rien perdu). Are the riches 
 of these gentlemen great ? They (elles) are without 
 example. Shall you not go to the festival? No, my 
 brother is dead. Where did he die ? He died at the 
 war. Where have you been to-day? I have been at 
 the carpenter's, in order to look for my daughter. My 
 new (nouvel) coat is lost. The death of our soldiers in 
 this unhappy war is very sad. Every one has lost some 
 (quelque) friend. 
 
§ 862-865.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 341 
 
 SECTION SIXTEENTH. 
 EXERCISE SIXTEENTH. 
 
 862. Vocabulary. 
 
 Parler, to speak. Mai, ill, badly. 
 
 Dormer, to give. Autrefois, formerly. 
 
 Aimer, to love. President, m., president. 
 
 Porter, to carry, to wear. Deja, already. 
 
 Chercher, to seek, to look Combien de temps, hoio 
 
 for. long f 
 
 Demeurer, to live, to dwell. Combien de fois, Jioio many 
 Manger, to eat. times f hoio often. 
 
 Payer, to pay. Fois, f., time {a time). 
 
 Commencer, to begin. En, in, to (without the arti- 
 
 Appeler, to call. cle). 
 
 Jeter, to throw. • Entendu-e, heard. 
 
 Acheter, to buy. A l'eglise, at or to church. 
 
 Mener, to lead. A l'ecole, at or to school. 
 
 Bien, well. L'Espagne, Sjoain. 
 
 863. The verbs " aimer," " chercher," " commencer," 
 " appeler," in the vocabulary, require the preposition d 
 after them when they are followed by another verb in 
 the infinitive mood. 
 
 864. Payer, signifying "to pay," governs an object 
 directly as in English; but when it means to pay for, 
 it is accompanied by the direct object of the thing and 
 indirect object of the person; thus, "to pay some one 
 for something" is expressed in French by payer quelque 
 chose a quelqu'un, literally, to pay something to some 
 one; again, "I have paid him for it," je le lui ai pay 6, 
 literally, I have paid it to him. 
 
 865. The noun fois is employed with numerals; thus, 
 une fois, once; deux fois, twice; plusieurs fois, several 
 times ; vingt fois, ticenty times; la premiere fois, the 
 first time, etc. 
 
342 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 866-868. 
 
 866. The preposition en is employed before names of 
 countries without the article ; as, en Espagne, en France. 
 
 867. Model sentences. 
 
 II aime a parler fraugais (863), he loves to speak 
 
 French. 
 II commence a avoir faim, he begins to be hungry. 
 II paie ses dettes (864, 263), he pays his debts. 
 II tous paiera le chapeau (864), he will pay you for 
 
 the hat. 
 Combien de fois avez-vous ete en France ? how many 
 
 times have you been in France ? 
 J'y ai ete deux fois (865), I have been there twice. 
 Je vais en Espagne (866), I am going to Spain. 
 Appelez le medecin, call the p>hysician. 
 Je l'appellerai (264), I will call him. 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CON- 
 JUGATION. 
 
 868. Translate into English. 
 
 Je parle a votre frere. Je lui parle. J'en parle (of 
 it). Je parlais au president quand votre frere m'appela. 
 Je lui donne de l'argent parce qu'il est tres pauvre. 
 Combien d'argent donneriez-vous si vous etiez en Es- 
 pagne? Qui appelez-vous ? J'appelle (264) le medecin. 
 II parle bien. II commence a leur parler en italien. Ou 
 demeuriez-vous quand j'etais en France ? II mene (265) 
 une malheureuse vie. Combien de drap avez-vous achete 
 de ce marchand ? Avez-vous entendu la nouvelle chan- 
 son ? Mon petit enfant commence a aller (863) a l'ecole. 
 II parle mal, mais il parlera mieux (better) quand il aura 
 ete a l'ecole. Vous chantates la premiere chanson de la 
 saison. II porte un vieil habit. Les habits qu'ils portent 
 sont bleus. II mangea (262) des pommes a la maison de 
 son ami. J'ai entendu dire (say) qu'il parle beaucoup. 
 Je demeurais autrefois a Paris. Nous commencons 
 
§ 869.] PRACTICAL EXEECISES. 343 
 
 (261) a ecrire. Combien de temps avez-vous demeure 
 en Amerique ? L'Amerique est un beau pays; je com- 
 mence a l'aimer. Ne l'aimiez-vous pas autrefois ? Vous 
 avez achete un nouveau chapeau. L'avez-vous paye au 
 marchand (864) ? Combien le lui avez-vous paye ? Je. 
 paie (263) le chapeau au marchand. Je vous le paierai 
 quand j'aurai assez d'argent pour vous le payer. Jetez 
 la viande aux chiens. Non, je la jetterai (264) aux pau- 
 vres. Qui m'appelle (264) ? Je vous appelle pour aller 
 a l'eo-Hse. 
 
 869. Translate into French. 
 
 I speak. You speak. We were speaking. You loved 
 (imperf?) I live in France (866). He sought (p. clef.) 
 to (863) make me wise. I will give you some money. 
 Would you (conclit.) give me wealth if you (en) had 
 (imperf) any? What kind of (a) coat does he wear? 
 He wore (imperf.) formerly a blue coat. Lead this 
 horse to the physician's ; he wishes to drink. I will lead 
 (future, 262) him there; but he is not thirsty. How 
 long have you lived in Spain (866) ? I have lived there 
 two years and six months. Were you looking for your 
 horse when I called you (past clef) ? We looked for 
 him. We were looking for him. Shall you eat to-mor- 
 row morning early? No, I ate (262) enough this even- 
 ing. At what o'clock did you eat (262) ? I ate at elev- 
 en o'clock this evening. I pay. You pay. They were 
 paying. How much did you pay this man for your hat 
 (864) ? I paid (past clef.) him twelve francs for it (le lid 
 payai). You throw. I throw (264). He began (261) 
 to (863) call me. Have you heard him? They throw 
 (264). I buy (265). What do you buy ? He buys some 
 cloth in order to make a coat. I lead this (265) horse to 
 the water in order to drink, for (car) he is very (grancV) 
 thirsty. Twice (865) six make (font) twelve. How 
 many do twice four make ? Twice four make eight. I 
 
344 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 870. 
 
 sought him several times at church, but I have not found 
 him. They lead a happy life (265). Have you been at 
 school? No, I have heard of it (en ai entendu parler). 
 I have already said to him (dit) what you have not 
 heard. The president is at school. What have you 
 heard ? I can not write this letter. I do not like this 
 hat ; will you (voulez-vous) buy it ? The father has sought 
 for his son in all the streets of the city, but he has not 
 found him. He began to write a letter to his sister. I 
 will give you a few examples. I have already given him 
 much money, but he is dissatisfied with it (en). Former- 
 ly I lived where they lived. He has bought a new hat, 
 and he has already paid (864) the merchant for it. He 
 threw (past def.) a book. I am going to school in order 
 to begin to write. I am called to (863) go to look for 
 the son of the carpenter. How many chairs have you 
 bought (achetees) ? I have bought only ten (of them). 
 
 SECTION SEVENTEENTH. 
 
 EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH. 
 
 870. Vocabidary. 
 
 Avare, avaricious, greedy, ~L\hve,free. 
 
 n. m., miser. Eglise, f, church. 
 
 Batir, to build. Entre, between. 
 
 Choisir, to choose. Loi, f., law. 
 
 Obeir, to obey. Unir, to unite. 
 
 Reussir, to succeed. Dessein, m., purpose, plan. 
 
 Devoir, to owe (see 267). Entreprise, f., enterprise. 
 
 Fleuve, m., river. Fatigue-e, tired. 
 
 Apercevoir, to perceive. Encore, yet, still. 
 
 Distance, f., distance. Voiture, f., carriage. 
 
 Punir, to punish. A present, now, at present. 
 
 Etre bien aise, to be very Punir (de), to punish (for). 
 
 glad. Avoir mal a, to have — ache. 
 
 Chagrin, m., grief, sorrow. Dent, f., tooth. 
 
§ 871-874.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 345 
 
 871. "Avoir mal a" is an idiomatic phrase, corre- 
 sponding to the English expression to have a pain in; 
 as, il a mal aux dents, he has the teethache, i. e., he has a 
 pain in the teeth; j'ai mal a la tete, I have the head- 
 ache, i. e., I have a pain in the head. 
 
 872. The verb obeir (pron. 6-bay-eer') is accompanied 
 by an indirect regimen with a, expressed with nouns and 
 implied with personal pronouns ; as je lui obeis, I obey 
 (to) him ; j'y obeis, I obeyed (to) it. 
 
 873. Devoir, to owe, is accompanied by an indirect 
 object with d (expressed or implied) if the object is a 
 person, and by the direct object of the thing, as in En- 
 glish ; as, je lui do\s,Toioe (to) him/ je dus a cet homme, 
 I owed this man; je vous le dois, J owe it to you; je 
 vous en dois, I owe you for some. 
 
 a. Devoir is often employed like " should" or " ought" 
 in English; as, vous devez reussir, you ought, shoidd 
 succeed; sometimes it means to be to, as, vous devez obeir 
 a votre pere, you are to obey your father. 
 
 874. Model sentences. 
 
 Combien devez-vous ? how much do you owe f 
 
 Je devais vingt francs a ce medecin (873), I owed (was 
 
 owing) twenty francs to this physician, i. e., I 
 
 oioed this physician twenty fra?ics. 
 Avez-vous mal aux dents ? have you the teethache f 
 Vous devez toujours obeir a votre pere et a votre 
 
 mere, you ought always to obey (873, a) your 
 
 father and mother. 
 Vous devez unir vos interets a ceux de l'Etat, you are 
 
 to unite your interests to those of the state. 
 P2 
 
346 FEENCH GEAHMAE. [§ 875. 
 
 EXEECISES ON THE EEGULAE VEEBS OF THE SECOND 
 AND THIED CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 875. Translate into English. 
 
 Je finis. Je finissais. Je finis. Je finirai bientot* le 
 livre. Quand finira-t-il sa le9on ? II la finira bientot. 
 Que batissez-vous ? Je batis une maison pour le fils de 
 l'avare. J'ai re9u deux lettres, laquelle choisissez-vous ? 
 J'en choisirai Tune et l'autre. Vous etes bien {very) 
 avare. Je batirais cette eglise entre les deux chemins. 
 Obeiras-tu a la loi? Je n'y obeirai pas (872). Yous 
 devez (267) toujours obeir a la loi. Obeissez a votre 
 pere, car il est votre meilleur ami sur la terre. Savez- 
 vous combien vous me devez ? Je sais combien je vous 
 dois, mais je ne veux pas vous le payer a present. 
 Qu'est-ce que vous apercevez ? J'apercois (266) des en- 
 fants qui pleurent. J'apercevais a quelque distance des 
 charpentiers qui batissaient une eglise. Yous reussirez 
 si vous etes honnete et assidu. J'ai reussi dans mon en- 
 treprise. J'apei^us des gallons qui portaient un chien 
 au fleuve. Les Etats-Unis ont des lois, mais quelques-uns 
 n'y obeiront pas. On doit (873, a) punir les mauvais. 
 Son pere le punira de son defaut. On ne doit pas punir 
 quelqu'un de ses defauts. On le punit parce qu'il n'obeit 
 pas a sa mere. Re9utes-vous vos lettres de {from) la 
 main du domestique? Je les re9us (266) de sa main. 
 J'en suis bien aise. Dieu nous donne des chagrins, non 
 pas {not) pour nous punir, mais pour nous faire meilleurs. 
 II est bon, et nous devons lui obeir. Avez-vous encore 
 du chagrin? L'avare ne reussira pas dans ses entre- 
 prises. Qu' avez-vous ? J'aimalaux dents (871). Nous 
 
 * In French, the adverb usually stands after the verb in the sim- 
 ple tenses ; and in the compound tenses, between the auxiliary and 
 the participle. It never follows the pronoun-subject, as in English it 
 may do. 
 
§ 876.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 347 
 
 devrions obeir a la loi de Dieu. Etes-vous fatiguee, ma- 
 dame? Non, monsieur, mais vous devez {must) etre 
 fatio'ue. 
 
 o 
 
 876. Translate into French. 
 
 Thou finishest. She finishes. We finish. They were 
 finishing. I obeyed. You will choose. Have you re- 
 ceived any letters? He received some {past clef.). I 
 shall receive a letter to-day from my sister. I should 
 receive from him a letter (de lui) if he owed me one 
 (sHl m'en devait une). How much did you receive 
 (%>. def.) ? Do you perceive any thing in the distance ? 
 I perceive some children who are singing. He built a 
 house. Who built the first house which is in this street? 
 The carpenter, Mr. Mansard, built it. Which of the two 
 houses would you choose? I should choose the white 
 (blanche) house, because it (elle) stands (est) between 
 two roads. You ought (2^|) to choose the newest. 
 Choose the one whom (celui d qui) you will obey. I 
 obey my father (872). We obey the laws. You should 
 (vous devriez) obey the laws. The sdn obeys his father. 
 Some (men) will not obey the laws of their country. 
 This young man will succeed in his business. He is in- 
 dustrious and honest. The world would not receive 
 him. If your son is bad, you ought (vous devez) to pun- 
 ish him. We punish our children for (de) their faults 
 (fciutes) because we love them. He owes me some 
 money. How much does he owe you? He owes me 
 enough, but he will pay me soon. The avaricious (man) 
 perceived a treasure, and he was very glad of it. I per- 
 ceived a large (grand) river at some distance. I per- 
 ceive your plan now. Choose (ye) between life and 
 death. He is looking for an enterprise in which (ou) he 
 may succeed (subj.). Are the ladies yet tired? We 
 are not yet tired (fern.). What have you ? I have the 
 teethache (871). John can not go to school to-day; 
 
348 FRENCH GRAMMAR. ' [§ 877-879. 
 
 he has the headache. We ought to love God in grief 
 as well as iu (aussi Men que dans) joy. 
 
 SECTION EIGHTEENTH. 
 
 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH. 
 
 877. Vocabulary. 
 
 Rendre, to give back, re- Les tues, the kiUed. 
 
 store. Nouvelles, pi. f., news. 
 
 Entendre, to hear. Baton, m., stick, staff. 
 
 Rompre, to break (in two). Verre, m., glass, tumbler. 
 Casser, to break {in pieces). Araitie, f., friendship. 
 Perdre, to lose. Vieillesse, f., old age. 
 
 Penser a, to think of. Lu-e, read. 
 
 Esperer, to hope. Ecrit-e, written. 
 
 Attendre, to ic ait for. Soulier, m., shoe. 
 
 CoDJugaison, f., conjug* Traite, m., treatise. 
 
 tion. Appris-e, learned. 
 
 Verbe, m., verb. Morceau, m., piece. 
 
 Bruit, m., noise. Ciceron, Cicero. 
 
 Oter, to take off. Blesser, to hurt, to wound. 
 
 Exercice, m., exercise. Les blesses, the wounded. 
 
 Tuer, to kill. Nonibre, m., number. 
 
 878. Any past participle may be used adjectively, in 
 which case they assume the terminations of an adjec- 
 tive: e for the feminine singular, s for the masculine 
 plural, and es for the feminine plural. They always fol- 
 low the noun which they qualify. 
 
 879. The past participle with "avoir" agrees in gen- 
 der and number with its direct object when that object 
 precedes it ; but if the object follow the participle, no 
 change takes place in the latter. 
 
 a. The relative en, some of them, it, etc., never affects 
 the participle past, it not being regarded as a direct ob' 
 ject in the participial construction. 
 
 
§ 880, 881.] PRACTICAL EXEECISES. 349 
 
 b. The past participle always agrees in gender and 
 number with the subject when it is inflected with the 
 verb etre; as, il est alle, he has gone; elle est allee, she 
 has gone. 
 
 880. Model sentences. 
 
 Avez-vous entendu les nouvelles ? have you heard the 
 
 news f 
 Je les ai entendues (879), I have heard it (them). 
 J'ai entendu les nouvelles, I have heard the news. 
 Madame votre soeur a-t-elle (274) perdu son mari? has 
 
 your sister lost her husband? 
 Elle l'a perdu, she has lost him. 
 J'en ai rompu (879, a), I have broken some. 
 Est-ce qu'il pense a moi ? does he think of me 9 
 
 881. Translate into English. 
 
 Avez-vous vendu votre cheval? Oui, je l'ai vendu. 
 Quand aurez-vous vendu votre maison ? Je l'aurai 
 vendue (879) le vingt-cinquieme (jour) de ce mois. 
 A-t-il recu ses lettres? II les a recues (879). Avez- 
 vous fini votre lecon ? Je l'ai finie. Le domestique me 
 rendra-t-il mon habit (274). II vous le rendra. Quand 
 vendites-vous votre maison ? Je la vendis hier. Avez- 
 vous entendu ce que je vous ai lu ? Est-ce que vons 
 avez (272) recu les pommes que je vous ai donnees (879) ? 
 Qui est-ce qui a rompu les verres ? Personne ne les a 
 rompus, mais quelqu'un les a casses. Rompit-il (268) 
 votre baton ? II le rompit en deux morceaux. Avez- 
 vous recu des nouvelles de votre neveu? Je n'ai recu 
 aucunes nouveUes de lui. Combien de conjugaisons y 
 a-t-il dans la langue francaise ? Le verbe francais en a 
 quatre. Le garcon a-t-il achete des chevaux ? II en a 
 achete deux (879, a). L'amitie est trahie (879, b). A 
 qui pensez-vous? Je pense a Guillaume. Les traites 
 de Ciceron, dont les noms sont L'Amitie et La Vieil- 
 lesse, sont des ceuvres finies (878). Ces soldats sont 
 
350 FEENCH GEAMilAE. [§ 882. 
 
 blesses (879, b) a la mort (mortally). Quel est le bruit 
 que j'entends ? C'est seulemeut le bruit d'uue voiture 
 qui passe par {goes along) la rue. Avez-vous encore 
 ecrit vos exercices ? Je les ai ecrits. Combien de let- 
 tres a-t-il ecrites (879) aujourd'hui? II en a ecrit (879, 
 a) plusieurs. Otez raes souliers, ils me blessent. Yos 
 souliers vous blessent-ils ? Quels traites avez-vous 
 ecrits ? J'ai ecrit un traite sur l'aruitie et un autre 
 traite sur la vieillesse. Avez-vous beaucoup lu ? Qui, 
 monsieur, j'ai lu plusieurs niorceaux de Ciceron, et les 
 ceuvres frangaises de Boileau et de Racine. Je porte 
 toujours un baton a (in) la main, parce que j'ai peur des 
 chiens. Quelles nouvelles attendez-vous ? J'attends des 
 nouvelles de la guerre. Avez-vous lu les noms des tues 
 et des blesses ? Le gargon a-t-il casse un verre ? Ont- 
 ils appris leur legon. Ils l'ont apprise. Comment ap- 
 pelez-vous en francais celui qui fait des souliers ? Je l'ap- 
 pelle un " cordonnier." Celui que vous appelez cordon- 
 nier me fait des souliers qui me blessent. Avez-vous 
 faim ? Vous devez manger du pain. Je mangerais du 
 pain avec joie, si j'en avais. Donnez-lui-en. Avez-vous 
 encore fini votre exercice ? Je ne l'ai pas encore iini ; il 
 est tres long. Quelle espece de bibliotheque cet homme 
 a-t-il ? II a quelques livres qu'il va vendre. 
 
 882. Translate into French. 
 
 I have sold my watch. To whom have you sold it 
 (879) ? To the baker. How much has he paid you for 
 it (879) ? Have you received your letters ? I have re- 
 ceived them (879). What have you received ? I have 
 received news from my son. Has the scholar received 
 any news from the son of the captain (274)? He has 
 received sad. news from him (de tristes nouvelles de lui). 
 Was he sick ? Yes, he was mortally wounded (d la 
 mort). Has the boy finished his lesson (274) ? He has 
 finished it (879). The servant must give me back (me 
 
§ 882.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 351 
 
 rendre) my hat. I restore you your book. It is three 
 o'clock in the morning {die matin), and I have not yet 
 finished my exercise. Shall you sell your house ? I 
 have already sold {fern.) it. Have you heard what he 
 has broken ? I have heard that he has broken his staff. 
 Has he (273) eaten the apples which I have given him 
 (lui) ? Who broke {2Jast def.) the glasses ? Can you 
 hear me if I speak to you? In how many pieces {en 
 combien, etc.) has he broken the sticks ? He has broken 
 them in two pieces, and one of the pieces struck {f rap- 
 pa) my brother. Are you waiting-for some news ? 
 Yes ; I have heard that {que) my friend is wounded. I 
 have received no news from him. Are you studying the 
 French verb ? Yes, and I find it very easy. How do 
 you learn it ? I write the conjugations in a book. How 
 many conjugations have you learned {fern, pi., 879) ? I 
 have learned them all {fem.pl). What did the boy 
 buy at the festival {fete,/., 274)? He bought {past 
 def.) some shoes and some French books. The news is 
 {are) received {fem.pl., 879, b). The lesson is learned. 
 The exercises are lost. What was he thinking of {d 
 quoi) when he broke the glasses ? He was thinking of 
 {a) his friend, the baker. The treatises of Cicero on 
 {the) Friendship and {on the) Old Age are finished books 
 (878). Broken glasses (878). The lost child. Many 
 soldiers have been wounded in this war (879, b). 
 
 I hear a noise. You hear the noise of the water. 
 Have you yet written your letters ? I have not yet 
 {pas encore) written {fpl., 879) them. How many ex- 
 ercises has she written to-day (879) ? She has written 
 several {of them, 879, a). What are you taking-off? I 
 am taking off my shoes because they hurt me. Do your 
 shoes hurt you ? How many treatises have you writ- 
 ten ? I have written one treatise on {the) friendship and 
 another on {the) old age. He has read much ; he is 
 
352 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 883. . 
 
 very learned. I have read the works of Moliere and of 
 Boileau. Whom [qui) do you wait-for ? I-am-waiting- 
 for the carriage of the wounded which is to pass this 
 way (qui doit passer par ici). Have you seen (vu) the 
 letters which he has written (/em., 879).? Have you 
 learned your lesson ? I have not yet learned it ; it {die) 
 is very difficult. What is the French name of one who 
 (celui qui) makes coats ? We call him in French a tai- 
 lor (tailleur), because he cuts (taille) cloth in-order-to 
 make coats. Do these shoes hurt you (274) ? I am 
 thirsty. You ought to drink some water; there is (en 
 voild) enough (of it) in the tumbler. Give me some 
 water ; I am thirsty. When will he receive his money 
 (269) ? Do I break a glass (hi pieces) ? Do I break 
 your stick (272) ? Do I hear (273) ? Do I give back ? 
 Do I eat any meat ? Has the tailor finished my coat 
 (274)? Has the boy a new hat? Are my exercises 
 written ? Is my lesson learned ? Is the glass broken 
 (casse) ? Are the canes broken (rompus) ? 
 
 SECTION NINETEENTH. 
 
 EXERCISE NINETEENTH. 
 
 883. Vocabulary. 
 Mort-e, died. Pendant, during. 
 
 Tromper, to deceive. Doigt, m., finger. 
 
 Borner, to confine, to limit. Gloire, f, glory. 
 Parents, m. pi., relatives, Nation, f., nation. 
 
 p>arents. Dedier, to dedicate. 
 
 Apres-midi, f., afternoon. Palais, m., palace. 
 Changer, to change (follow- Patrie, f., country ( one's 
 
 ed by de). own). 
 
 Dernier-e, last. Cendres, f. pi., ashes. 
 
 Campagne, f., country (op- Demeure, f., residence, home. 
 
 posed to city). Borne, f., boundary, limit. 
 
 
§ 884-887.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 353 
 
 Laisser, to leave. Ancien-ne, ancient, old. 
 
 Georges, George (pron. jorj). Jamais, ever; with a nega- 
 Pierre, Peter (pron.^'-^r). tion, never. 
 Etranger-e, foreign. Lorsque, when. 
 
 Etranger, m., foreigner, Sacre-e, sacred. 
 
 stranger. Bord, m., shore, margin, 
 
 Moderne, modern. bank. 
 
 884. The verb "changer," meaning to change one 
 thing for another, is followed by the preposition de; 
 the English possessive pronoun is in such cases entirely 
 omitted ; thus, il a change de chapeau, he has changed 
 his hat; avez-vous change de demeure? have you 
 changed your residence? J'en ai change, I have 
 changed it. 
 
 885. The auxiliary " etre" is used to form the com- 
 pound tenses of many intransitive verbs ; such as mou- 
 rir, to die; demeurer, to remain ; aller, to go, etc.; as, 
 il est mort, he has died, i. e., is dead; ils sont morts, 
 they have died — are dead; elle est allee, she has gone. 
 
 886. Model sentences. 
 
 Ne leur donnerai-je pas de l'argent? shcdl I not give 
 
 them some money f 
 Je ne leur en donnerai pas, I shall not give them any. 
 N'avez-vous pas encore change d'habit ? have you not 
 
 yet changed your coat f 
 J'en ai change (884), I have changed it. 
 Je ne vous trompe point, I do not deceive you (255). 
 Ne m'a-t-il pas laisse ? has he not left me f 
 II est alle a la campagne, he has gone to the country. 
 Je ne vous le rendrai jamais, I will never restore it to 
 
 you. 
 Avez-vous jamais entendu de telles nouvelles? have 
 
 you ever heard such news f 
 
 887. Translate into English. 
 
 Ne me trompez-vous pas (277) ? Je ne vous trompe 
 
354 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 887, 
 
 pas. Je n'ai jamais trompe personne. Ne recevons- 
 nons pas ce que nous cherchons? Nous ne recevons 
 point tout ce que nous cherchons. Ne vend-il pas son 
 cheval? II ne veut pas vendre son cheval. Pourquoi 
 ne chantent-ils pas? Parce qu'ils ont honte? Non, 
 mais, parce qu'ils sont fatigues. Ne chantez-vous pas, 
 monsieur? Non, je n'ai jamais chante de (in) ma vie. 
 N'ont-ils pas encore fini leurs exercices ? Non, ils ne 
 les finiront jamais. Nul bon homme ne vendrait sa pa- 
 trie pour de l'or (220). Mais il y a des hommes qui 
 n'auraient point honte de (to) la vendre meme (219, b) 
 pour rien. N'aimons pas le vice. Ne vous rendra-t-il 
 pas votre baton ? II ne me le rendra point. Que ne 
 donneriez-vous pas pour trouver un tresor ? Est-ce que 
 je n'entends pas ce que vous dites ? Ne me rend-il pas 
 l'argent qu'il me doit ? Non, il me rend 1'argent que je 
 lui ai donne. 
 
 Les cendres de ceux qui sont morts (885) pour la pa- 
 trie sont sacrees. Le palais de Versailles a ete dedie a 
 toutes les gloires de la France. Nous ne devrions pas 
 tromper nos parents parce qu'ils nous ainient. N'avez- 
 vous pas encore appris les langues modernes ? Non, je 
 ne les ai pas apprises. N'avez-vous pas change de de- 
 meure (884) ? Je demeure a present chez mon frere 
 Georges. II changea (262) de maison pendant ma de- 
 meure a la campagne. Je veux aller chez l'etranger, il 
 parle plusieurs langues, entre autres, la langue francaise. 
 J'etais a Paris en dix-huit cent cinquante-huit, lorsque 
 l'empereur Napoleon dedia le nouveau boulevard Sevas- 
 topol. Les cendres de Napoleon premier reposent (rest) 
 a Paris, aux bords de la Seine. L'etranger a laisse sa 
 patrie pour demeurer dans un pays libre. Je vais a la 
 campagne cette apres-midi. George Washington est ap- 
 pele le pere de sa patrie. Pierre le Grand etait le pere 
 de la Russie. 
 
§ 888.] PRACTICAL EXEECISES. 355 
 
 888. Translate into French. 
 
 Does he not deceive me (27V) ? He does not deceive 
 me. He has never deceived any one. I do not receive 
 what I wish. Do I not receive all that (ce que) I wish ? 
 Do you not sell your horse ? I do not wish to sell my 
 horse. Why do you not sing ? I do not sing because 
 I am tired. Have you ever sung ? I have never sung 
 in (de) my life. Hast thou not yet finished thy exer- 
 cises ? I shall never finish them ; they are very diffi- 
 cult. "Would not this man sell his country for gold ? 
 No, he would not be ashamed to sell it for nothing 
 (rien). Let-us-seek (the) virtue. He will not sell me 
 his stick. Will he restore you your money? He will 
 not restore it to you. What would I not give to (fiour) 
 find money ! If you had riches you would not be hap- 
 pier. No, but I should be more contented. He will 
 not restore what I gave to him. How would you call 
 this in French? I should call it thus (ainsi). Would 
 you not give all that you have to possess (pour avoir) 
 the glory of Peter the Great ? No ; I would give much 
 to have the glory of George Washington. Have you 
 not changed your residence ? Yes, sir ; I live at pres- 
 ent at the house of my sister. Would you not like to 
 go to the country this afternoon ? The foreigner will 
 not obey the laws of this country. Have you ever seen 
 the palace at (of) Versailles ? It is dedicated in letters 
 of gold (cVor) to all the glories of France. I have never 
 seen it, because I have never been in foreign lands. 
 The ashes of those who have (885) died for their coun- 
 try is sacred to us. He took me with him to the bank 
 of the river. The book has been dedicated to all those 
 who love the French language. His relatives are living 
 in the (d la) country. The study of the modern lan- 
 guages is confined (bornee) to four or five languages of 
 (the) Europe. He will soon change his house (884). 
 What are the boundaries of this state? 
 
356 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 889-891. 
 
 SECTION TWENTIETH. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTIETH. 
 
 889. Vocabulary. 
 
 Colonel, m., colonel. Que, that (conjunction). 
 
 Tout le monde, every body. Couper, to cut. 
 
 Louer, to praise. Craindre, to fear. 
 
 Blamer, to blame, censure. Hai, hated (pron. ah-ee r ). 
 
 Desirer, to desire, wish. Paresseux-se, idle, lazy. 
 
 Louer, to let (as a house). User, to wear out. 
 
 Desir, m., desire. Habits, m. pi., clothes. 
 
 Selon, according to. Relier, to bind (as books). 
 
 Faute, f., fault. Souvent, often. 
 
 Innocent-e, innocent. Quelquefois, sometimes. 
 
 Coup able, guilty. On dit, they say, it is said. 
 
 890. Model sentences. 
 
 Le colonel a ete blesse, the colonel has been wounded. 
 
 lis sont loues, they are praised. 
 
 On me blame, I am blamed. 
 
 II s'appelle Jean (289), he is called John. 
 
 On l'a cherche, he has been sought — looked for. 
 
 On a trouve le livre, the book has been found. 
 
 Les soldats ont ete tues (288), the soldiers have been 
 
 killed. 
 Qui est a blamer (290) ? who is to be blamed f 
 Cette maison est a vendre, this house is to be sold. 
 Elle est aime de tout le monde, she is loved by every 
 
 body. 
 Vous etes blame par Pierre, you are censured by Peter. 
 
 891. Translate into English. 
 
 Le garcon est aime par (291) sa mere. Les garcons 
 sont blames par leur pere. La fille est aimee (288) de 
 (291) tout le monde. Les dames sont louees (288) parce 
 qu'elles sont belles. Yous etes puni parce que vous avez 
 vendu les pommes qui n'etaient point a vous. Elle est 
 
§ 892.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 357 
 
 punie par ses parents. Nous sommes perdus (288). lis 
 sont blesses par les ennemis. Elles sont trompees par 
 le chevalier. Ce livre a etQ relie. Ces livres out ete 
 vendus. Vos maisons seront baties. Le president sera 
 obei. Ces volumes ont ete dedies aux ecoliers. II etait 
 choisi. Nous sommes choisis de tout le monde. Ces 
 habits avaient ete uses lorsque je les achetai. La maison 
 fut batie par le charpentier. Cette eglise sera batie. 
 Nous serons loues de tout le monde. Le paresseux est 
 hai par cet ecolier. On dit qu'il a ete blame par le cap- 
 itaine. On dit qu'ils ont ete loues par le roi. Je serai 
 aime quand j'aurai fini mon exercice. II est hai parce 
 qu'il est savant. Soyez honnete et vous reussirez. 
 
 On le loue (289). On les blame. On punit les gar- 
 cons. On blesse les capitaines. On relie ces livres. On 
 desire les poires. On rend les habits. On choisit l'epee. 
 On le punit de (with) mort. On le tua dans la guerre. 
 Les livres se relient (289). Les colonels se blameut. La 
 fille se trompe. II s'appelle Guillaume. lis s'appellent 
 deux freres. Son doigt a ete coupe. On parle de la 
 musique. Ici l'on relie les livres. Ici l'on parle francais. 
 Ces habits sont uses. Souvent on nous trompe. Quelque- 
 fois on nous blame. On nous appelle paresseux. Cette 
 femme est a louer (290). Cette maison est a louer. Cet 
 arbre est a couper. Ces devoirs sont a remplir. Le 
 mauvais est a craindre. Ces chevaux sont a vendre. Ce 
 livre est a relier. C'est a craindre. Nos desirs sont a 
 borner. Le bon homme n'est pas a craindre. L'inno- 
 cent ne doit pas etre puni. Les fautes du garcon sont a 
 blamer. On blame le coupable mais on loue l'innocent. 
 
 892. Translate into French. 
 
 He is loved. She is praised (288). You ought (devez) 
 to be punished. We are censured. The girls are praised. 
 We are sought. They are chosen. She will be obeyed. 
 The house has been built. The men have been deceived. 
 
358 FREXCH GEAMMAE. [§ 892. 
 
 The colonel will be killed. The soldiers have been 
 wounded by (291) the enemy. The books have been 
 bound. The money will be restored. The lazy {man) 
 will be censured. The pen is lost. Are your houses 
 sold? No, they are to be sold (290). They have been 
 bought. The stick has been broken. The trunks have 
 been lost (288). The lesson will be learned. The let- 
 ter will be written. This volume has been dedicated to 
 the king. The French lady has been deceived. The 
 glasses were broken by the boy (291) . You were blamed 
 by the President. They had been praised by (de) every 
 body. This house has been built by the carpenter, 
 John will be called. A noise has been heard. If I suc- 
 ceed, I shall be praised. I should be hated if I blamed 
 him. "We should be killed if we deceived him. 
 
 He is praised (289). She is blamed {they blame her, 
 289). The boys are loved. The soldiers are wounded. 
 This book is bound. The pens are restored. The ap- 
 ples are eaten. The laws are obeyed. The boys have 
 been punished. He was wounded in the war. The 
 books are bound (288 — use reflective verb). The noise is 
 heard {hears itself). The women are deceived {deceive 
 themselves). He is called Peter. They are called the 
 enemies of the state. Italian is spoken here {here they 
 speak, etc.). These coats are worn out. Sometimes we 
 are censured. "We are often called idle. These houses 
 are to be sold (290). This house is to let (290). This 
 law is to be obeyed. His. faults are to be censured. 
 They are not to be feared. 
 
 
§ 893-895.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 359 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-FIRST. 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-FIRST. 
 
 893. Vocabulary. 
 
 Toniber*, to fall. Grandir, to grow tall. 
 
 Entrer*, to enter, to go in, Vieillir, to grow old. 
 
 to come in. Port, m.,port. 
 
 Venu*-e, come (participle). Doux, fe?n., douce, sweet. 
 Revenu*-e, come back, re- Jnger, to judge. 
 
 turned. Ne — que, only, but. 
 
 Arriver*, to arrive, to hap- Habitude, f., habit. 
 
 pen. Passer, to pass away, to be 
 
 Devenu*-e, become. over. 
 
 Sortir*, to go out. Matelot, ru., sailor. 
 
 Partir, to set out, to go. Paysan, m., peasant. 
 Aller*, to go. Bijoutier, m.,jeiceler. 
 
 Pester, to stay, to remain. Relieur, m., bookbinder. 
 
 894. Those verbs in the vocabulary which are marked 
 with an asterisk form their compound tenses by means 
 of etre. Those not so designated (with the exception 
 of juger) take "avoir" when they express action, and 
 " etre" when they denote state, or the result of an action. 
 
 895. "Derneurer" is conjugated with avoir when it 
 signifies to dwell, to live, and with etre when it means 
 to remain. 
 
 a. The verb "rester" is conjugated with avoir when 
 it signifies to remain temporarily, and with etre when 
 it means to remain permanently . 
 
 b. The adverb " only" may be expressed by settlement, 
 or by putting " ne" before the verb, and its complement 
 "que" after it; it then corresponds to the English 
 " but ;" as, je n'ai qu'un frere, I have but (only) one 
 brother ; il n'en a que deux, he has only two. 
 
 Model sentences. 
 
 Elle est tonibee dans l'eau, she has fatten into the water. 
 
360 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 895. 
 
 ffles-vous revenu ? have you returned? 
 
 Les beaux jours sont passes (894), the fine days have 
 passed {are over). 
 
 II est parti pour le Havre, he has set out for Havre. 
 
 Je n'ai que deux desirs, I have but {only) two desires. 
 
 II a demeure a Londres pendant la guerre, he has lived 
 at London during the war. 
 
 II est demeure ici, he has remained here. 
 
 La dame est sortie aujourd'hui deux fois, the lady has 
 gone out {been out) twice to-day. 
 
 Je ne suis reste a Paris qu'un jour, I have remained at 
 Paris only one day (895, a). 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 II est tombe (292, b). Elle n'est pas tombee. Nous 
 ne sommes pas encore tombes. lis sont tombes. Elles 
 sont rnortes {have died). Les dames sont entrees dans 
 l'eglise pour entendre la musique. II est entre dans 
 l'ecole pour apprendre la langue francaise. D'oi\ {ichence) 
 est-elle venue? Elles sont venues de mon pays. lis 
 seraient venus hier si l'on ne les avaient pas trompes. 
 Quand ils seront revenus, la patrie sera libre. Sont-elles 
 encore revenues de leur voyage {journey) ? On dit que 
 votre frere est arrive. Ils sont arrives tous deux {both) 
 dans une voiture. Elles etaient deja arrivees lorsque 
 j'entrai dans la maison. Qu'est-ce qu'il est devenu ? II 
 est devenu marchand (447). Ils etaient devenus libres. 
 Quand avez-vous sorti (292, c) ? J'ai sorti ce matin pour 
 aller a l'eglise. Est-il sorti ? Sont-elles sorties ? II est 
 parti. Ils sont partis. Combien de fois avez-vous parti ? 
 J'ai parti plusieurs fois, mais a present j'arriverai au port. 
 Monsieur votre pere oil est-il alle? Mon pere et ma 
 mere sont alles (467) a la campagne. Les jolies demoi- 
 selles sont allees chez le bijoutier. Vos freres sont-ils 
 alles a la guerre ? Le plus jeune est alle a la guerre 
 mais l'autre est reste a la maison {at home). Vous etes 
 
§ 896.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 361 
 
 bien grandi {grown much). II n'a pas beaucoup grandi 
 pendant l'hiver. Ces messieurs ont vieilli pendant leur 
 demeure en Europe. Cet etranger a beaucoup vieilli 
 pendant sa demeure aux Etats-Unis. Pour juger de ce 
 qui est arrive ou de ce qui arrivera, nous n'avons qu'a 
 penser a ce qui arrive a present. L'hiver est passe et 
 l'ete est venu. Les paysans ont vieilli dans leur travail. 
 La dame va chez le bijoutier pour y acheter une montre 
 d'or. Ses habitudes ont vieilli avec lui. 
 
 896. Translate into French. 
 
 Your son has fallen into the river (292, b). The sol- 
 diers had fallen upon the enemy (293). We have fallen 
 from the tree. They {fern.) had fallen from their horses. 
 Who has come-in? Somebody has come-in, but I do 
 not know who it is (qui ce soit). The lady has come in. 
 Why have the ladies gone into the church ? The music 
 has come, and they have gone-in to (pour) hear it. 
 Where has the scholar gone ? He has gone to school, 
 in order to learn (apprendre) his lessons. The foreigner 
 has come into (venu dans) this country in order to be- 
 come free. He has come from Paris in order to see 
 (voir) the country. Has your son come-back yet ? He 
 has not yet come-back; he is going to remain (rester) 
 some days longer (encore quelques jours). Who has 
 arrived ? The son of the physician has arrived. From 
 what place (lieu, m.) has the foreigner arrived ? 
 
 What have they become ? They have become jewel- 
 ers. She had become tired. She would have gone to 
 Paris if her father had not become sick. She has gone 
 out. My mother has gone out. He has (est) set out for 
 (the) Spain. When has he set out? She has gone to 
 the river. He has gone to the war. How long has he 
 staid there ? He has staid there some days. These men 
 have grown old. They are grown old. 
 
 The ship has entered into the port. The sweet wines 
 
 Q 
 
362 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 897, 898. 
 
 have come from the port of Bordeaux. The beautiful 
 season is over (est passee). The winter has arrived. 
 The summer has returned. The peasant has but one 
 coat (895, b). He has only a few (que quelques) habits. 
 The bookbinder has bound only a few (quelques) books. 
 The jeweler has sold only one gold watch. The ship, 
 with the sailor, has set out (est parti). My friends 
 whom I expected (que fattendais) have arrived. He 
 has become an enemy to his (native) country. We 
 ought not always to love only those (seulement ceux) 
 who love us ; we are to (nous devons) love every body. 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-SECOND. 
 EXEECISE TWENTY-SECOND. 
 
 897. Vocabulary. 
 
 Voeu, m., icish, vow. Se porter, to be or to do. 
 
 Se tromper, to be mistaken. Oiseau, m., bird. 
 Se flatter, to flatter onds Citoyen, m., citizen. 
 
 self. Revolution, f, revolution. 
 
 Se coucher, to go to bed, to Parisien-ne, JParisian. 
 
 lie down. Bataille, f., battle. 
 
 Se promener, to take a toalk. Mot, m., word, saying. 
 Se lever, to get up, to rise. Champ, m., field. 
 Se proposer (de), to propose Paix, f., peace. 
 
 (to). Enfin, at last, finally. 
 
 Se battre, to fight (345). Liberte, f., liberty. 
 
 898. Model sentences. 
 
 Comment vous portez-vous ? how do you do f 
 Comment vous etes-vous porte ? how have you been f 
 II se leve de bonne heure, he rises early. 
 Elle s'est promenee (297), she has taken a walk. 
 Nous nous sommes trompes, we have been mistaken. 
 .Ne vous couchez-vous pas de bonne heure? do you 
 not go to bed early f 
 
899, 900.] PEACTICAL EXEKCISES. 363 
 
 Les oiseaux se chantent l'un a l'autre, the birds sing 
 
 to each other. 
 Les filles se promenent l'une avec l'autre, the girls 
 
 walk with each other. 
 
 899. Translate into English. 
 
 Tu te trompes, mon ami. Ne me trompe-je pas (298, 
 ? Vous ne vous etes pas trompe. lis se sont 
 trompes (297). Elle s'est flattee (296). A quelle heure 
 se couch ent-ils ? Us se sont couches ce s'oir a neuf 
 heures. On ne se couche point sur le champ de bataille. 
 A quelle heure vous levez-vous? Je me leve (265) a 
 cinq heures. Ou s'est-elle promenee ? Elle s'est prome- 
 nee dans le jardin. Que vous proposez-vous de (to) 
 faire? Je me propose d'aller en France. Us se sont 
 propose (521, a) de se battre contre l'ennemi. Us se 
 sont battus. Je ne me porte pas bien. Comment s'est 
 porte" monsieur votre pere? II s'est bien porte (593, a). 
 Pendant la revolution les Francais s'appelaient citoyens. 
 Mes vc3ux.se sont trompes. Les Parisiens ne se levent 
 pas de bonne heure. Les soldats americains se battent 
 et se tuent (300) dans les champs de bataille. "Ne vous 
 flattez point, ne vous trompez point. Elles se sont levees 
 de bonne heure pour se promener. Comment vous por- 
 tez-vous ? Je me porte assez bien. Comment vous etes- 
 vousportes? Nous nous sommes bien portes. Nevous 
 portez-vous pas bien ? Les demoiselles se portent-elles 
 bien ? Elles se portent assez bien. Les hommes s'entre- 
 tuent a la guerre (300, b). lis se louent les uns les au- 
 tres. Jean et Pierre s'aiment l'un l'autre. 
 
 900. Translate into French. 
 
 Are you not mistaken? I am not mistaken. They 
 have been mistaken (297). You are mistaken. They 
 flattered themselves. He has flattered himself. You 
 have flattered yourselves. Where are you going? I 
 am going to lie down (me coucher). Thou hast gone to 
 
364 
 
 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [§ 901. 
 
 bed. He has gone to bed early. We have lain down 
 because we were tired. I take a walk. She has taken 
 a walk in the fields. The Parisians walk (se promenent) 
 in the gardens of the king. The ladies are taking a 
 walk. Have you ever taken a walk in the gardens of 
 the palace ? No, I have never taken a walk in them (y 
 before swis). At what o'clock do you get up? I get 
 up at six o'clock. What have you (plur.) proposed to 
 (de) do ? I have proposed to (de) give him his liberty. 
 Our friends love each other (300, a). The soldiers kill 
 each other (300). The ladies praise each other (300, b). 
 They have proposed a peace. The citizens fight for the 
 liberties of their {native) country. How do you do ? 
 I am well. How have you been ? We have been very 
 well. She has been ill (mal portee). The birds rise 
 early, and go to rest (se couchent) early also. They 
 have been mistaken in their wishes. The Parisians call- 
 ed themselves citizens during the French Revolution. 
 Many are fighting for the liberty of the country. 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-THIRD. 
 
 EXEECTSE TWENTY-THIED 
 
 901. Vocabulary. 
 Toute la journee, all day. 
 Toute la nuit, all night. 
 Tous les jours, every day. 
 Heine, f., queen. 
 Trop, too much, too many. 
 Nuit, f., night. 
 Gens, in., people. 
 Temps, m., weather, time. 
 Tard, late. 
 Juste, right, just. 
 
 Pardonner (a), to pardon. 
 Passe-e, past, last. 
 Partout, every ichere. 
 Mechant-e, wicked. 
 Etudier, to study. 
 Un peu, a little. 
 Poste, f., post-office. 
 Yivre, to live (374). 
 Paire, f., pair. 
 Bas, m., stocking. 
 
§ 902-906.] PRACTICAL EXEECISES. 365 
 
 902. The pronoun "il," with a unipersonal verb, is 
 rendered by it or there; as, il lui est arrive un malheur, 
 there has happened to him a misfortune ; but in all such 
 examples wherein the pronoun "il" is only the appa- 
 rent subject, it is better to omit it entirely in translat- 
 ing, and give the true subject its proper place; thus, 
 render the above, a misfortune has happened to him. 
 
 903. The noun "gens" is of the masculine gender; 
 but, by a strange freak of language, an adjective which 
 stands immediately before gens is put in the feminine 
 gender, while an adjective which stands after it is mas- 
 culine; thus, de tres dangereuses gens, des gens tres 
 dangereua?; quelles gens! certaines gens: very danger- 
 ous people, people very dangerous ; what people! cer- 
 tain people. 
 
 a. The pronoun " tout" forms the only exception to 
 the above. If an adjective stands between tout and gens 
 having a feminine termination different from its mascu- 
 line ending (as bon, bonwey innocent, innocente, etc.), 
 tout and this adjective are put in the feminine plural; 
 but if the intermediate adjective have the same termi- 
 nation in both genders (as honnete, fern, honnete ; ha- 
 bile, habile), tout is put in the masculine plural; as, 
 toutes ces bonnes gens, toutes ces vilaines gens, toutes 
 les xieilles gens, all these good, ugly, old people. But, 
 on the other hand, tous les habiles gens, tous les hon- 
 netes gens, all the clever, honest people. 
 
 904. "Trop" requires the preposition de (f?') after it 
 when followed by a noun. 
 
 905. "Tous les" is equivalent to every in such phrases 
 as tous les jours, tous les soirs, tous les mois, tous les 
 ans, etc. 
 
 906. Model sentences. 
 
 II a neige toute la journee, it has been snowing all day. 
 II fait beau temps (304), it is fine weather. 
 
366 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 907. 
 
 II y a eu une fete, there has been a festival. 
 
 II est noble de pardonner a nos ermemis, it is noble to 
 forgive our enemies. 
 
 II faut qu'il soit innocent, he must be innocent (308). 
 
 II me. faut une pake de souliers, I need a pair of 
 shoes (310). 
 
 II faut pardonner aux autres si nous esperons etre par- 
 donnes, we must pardon others if we hope to be 
 pardoned. 
 
 II y a de niechantes gens dans cette ville, there are 
 wicked people in this city. 
 
 Vous avez trop de bonte pour moi, you have too 
 'much kindness for me. 
 
 II leur est venu une lettre, a letter has come to them 
 (902). 
 
 907. Translate into English. 
 
 Quel temps fait-il (304) ? II neige. Combien de 
 temps a-t-il neige ? II a neige toute la nuit passee. II 
 pleut (301, a) tous les jours. Non, il fait beau quelque- 
 fois. II faut des soldats a la reine (310). II y a de me- 
 chantes gens partout (903). II est trop de bruit ici, 
 faites attention, mes ecoliers (306). II y eut des bruits 
 pendant la nuit. II lui est arrive un grand chagrin 
 (902). II lui est arrive une lettre de la poste. II y 
 aura une fete demain soir a sept heures (303). II faut 
 qu'il y ait (303, subjunc.) des malheurs pendant une 
 grande guerre. II y a eu un long conge dans cette 
 ecole. II faut manger (308) pour vivre et non pas (not) 
 vivre pour manger, voila un mot des anciens. II vaut 
 mieux se lever et se coucher de bonne heure que tard 
 (305). Ce sont d'innocentes gens (903). Ces gens sont 
 innocents (903). II est juste de pardonner aux jeunes 
 gens leurs fautes (307). II est juste de blamer les coup- 
 ables, mais il n'est pas juste de blamer les innocents. 
 Quelle heure est-il? II est encore de bonne heure (306). 
 
§ 908.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 367 
 
 II est cinq heures passees {past Jive). Venez avec moi 
 s'il n'est pas trop tard. II est trop tard d'aller (307) a 
 l'ecole. Non, il est {there is, 306) encore assez de temps. 
 II n'est pas bon d'etudier toute la nuit. Non, cela est 
 vrai, mais il est quelquefois necessaire. II faut etudier 
 si l'on veut devenir sage (308). Que faut-il faire? II 
 faut apprendre votre lecon. Faut-il que je leur donne 
 un conge (308) ? II faut qu'ils etudient {subj.) leurs 
 le9ons. Faut-il qu'ils obeissent {subj.) a leurs parents 
 (309) ? II faut que je remplisse mon devoir. II lui 
 faut finir son travail (308, a). 
 
 II me faut sortir. II nous faut ecrire une lettre au fils 
 du juge. Que vous faut-il faire? II ne leur faut pas 
 casser les verres. II me faut (310) des bas de soie. Que 
 vous faut-il (310) ? II lui faut une paire de souliers. II 
 faut un peu de temps a ce paresseux (310). II faut un 
 livre a cet ecolier qui veut etudier la langue francaise. 
 
 908. Translate into French. 
 
 What weather is it going {va-t-il) to be {faire, 304) ? 
 It is bad weather ; it is going to snow. It snows now. 
 Will it snow to-morrow ? It would snow to-day if it 
 were not too cold {s'il ne faisait pas trop froid). 
 How long will it snow ? It will snow all day, I believe. 
 Is it never pleasant {ne fait-il jamais beau) in this coun- 
 try? Oh, yes, it is finer weather here sometimes than 
 in France {qu'en France, 304). Are there many wicked 
 (mm, 903) in this country (303) ? There are wicked 
 {men) every where. Are there not more of them here 
 than elsewhere {qu'ailleurs) ? There are too many 
 glasses (904) on this table; take away some {otez-en). 
 Have you heard the noises that there were during last 
 night ? No ; they say that there have been (303) noises, 
 but I have not heard them. What has happened to him 
 (902) ? A letter has come to him from the post-office 
 (902. There has come to him a letter from the, etc.). 
 
368 FEENCH GRAMMAE. [§ 908. 
 
 There would have been (303) a festival this evening if it 
 had not (sHl rfavait pas) snowed. Is it necessary (faut- 
 il) that there be (subj., 303) any dissatified [men) during 
 this war ? There must be many (of them, 309). When 
 will there be a holiday in this nation (303) ? There will 
 be a grand holiday (jour defete) when this war shall be 
 finished. It is necessary to live in order to eat, and not 
 (non pas) to eat in order to live. No, you are mistaken 
 (897) ; it is necessary (308) to eat to live, and not to live 
 to eat. It is better (305) to die for one's country than 
 to live without honor. Those are (ce so?ii) wicked peo- 
 ple (903). These people are wicked (masc). It is sweet 
 to fight (307) for liberty and for honor. Is it right to 
 (307) blame the innocent ? No, but it is right to punish 
 the guilty. Is it late (306) ? It is only one o'clock. It 
 is past three (trois heures passees) . Will you (voulez- 
 vous) come with me; it is not yet late (306). l\"o, it is 
 early. It is unhealthy (malsain) to study too much 
 (307). It is better to study all day than all night (305). 
 It is necessary to obey the laws (308). What is it 
 necessary to write (308) ? You must write (que vous 
 ecriviez) a letter to the daughter of the carpenter (309). 
 We must finish our exercises (309). He must finish his 
 work (308, a). What must I do (308, a)? You must 
 study your lessons (309). We must forgive them (leur, 
 309). We need something (310). What do you need? 
 They must have (310) some silk stockings. The lazy 
 (fellow) must have a little time (310). This scholar 
 must have a book (310). It appears to me (301, b) that 
 that is right. There will be many apples and pears this 
 month (303). It is warm now, but it has been (a fait) 
 cold all the week (304). It is just to censure the lazy 
 (man, 307). 
 
 
• 
 
 § 909-911.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 369 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-EOURTH. 
 
 EXEECISES ON THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 I3F 3 For convenience of recitation, this section will be subdivided 
 into Exercises, each embracing a certain number of irregular verbs, 
 with rules for their use. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-FOURTH. 
 
 From "Alter" to "Mourvrf 
 
 909. Vocabulary. 
 
 Theatre, m., theatre, play. Yite, quick, fast. 
 Marche, m., market. Lentement, sloicly. 
 
 Emplette, f., purchase. Jusqu'a, as far as, up to. 
 
 Dejeuner, to take breakfast. Bout, m., end. 
 Coquin, m., rogue, rascal. Apres, after. 
 Aller chercher, to go for. Fleur, f.,floiver. 
 Envoyer chercher, to send Rose, f., rose. 
 Fortune, f., fortune, [for. Juste, just, righteous. 
 
 910. In the compound expressions "aller chercher," 
 " envoyer chercher" (literally, to go to seek, to send to 
 seek), the first verb is alone inflected, the second corre- 
 sponding, in these phrases, to the English "for," and of 
 course retaining the form of the infinitive in all situations. 
 
 911. Translate into English. 
 
 Ou allez-vous? Je vais au marche (312). Pourquoi 
 y allez-vous ? Pour y faire des emplettes. Yos parents 
 vont-ils au theatre ? lis n'y vont jamais, parce que ce 
 serait un mauvais exemple pour leurs enfants. Nous 
 allons a la fete. Ya chercher le medecin, mon fils, ton 
 frere est malade. Irez-vous a Paris demain? Non, je 
 n'irai pas (184, a). II faut que j'aille chez moi. Ou 
 faut-il que vous alliez? Allons au theatre, on va jouer 
 une belle piece ce soir. Mesdemoiselles vos sceurs ou 
 sont-elles allees? Elles sont allees a l'ecole. Je m'en 
 vais (314). Oil vous en allez-vous? lis s'en vont chez 
 Q 2 
 
370 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 912. 
 
 le paysan pour etudier les moeurs {the manners) de la 
 canrpagne. Va-t'en, coquin. II faut que je m'en aille. 
 Envoyez chercher la mere de l'enfant. Je vous en en- 
 verrai ce soir. II a ete envoye aux Etats-ITnis. Cet 
 homme a acquis une grande fortune (316). Le colonel 
 acquit beaucoup de gloire dans la guerre. II acquiert 
 tout ce qu'il veut. L'eau bout (318). II fait bouillir le 
 lait (319). Je ne puis pas faire bouillir le lait. Ce 
 garcon court (320) vite. Yous courez lentement. Je 
 courais apres le medecin (320). II courut jusqu'au bout 
 du chanip. Cours vite, mon enfant. Courez vite, mes 
 enfants. II faut que vous cueilliez (321) la rose parce 
 qu'elle est belle. Je cueillerai les fleurs qui sont au bout 
 du champ. Est-ce que tu dors encore, Guillaume (322) ? 
 II faut que je dorme encore une heure parce que j'ai 
 grand {very) sommeil. Je n'ai pas dormi la nuit passee. 
 Dors, mon enfant, jusqu'au matin. Je dormis (liJcefinir) 
 toute la journee, car j'etais tres fatigue. II hait son pro- 
 chain (325). Je ne hais personne. Hais-moi, tue-moi, 
 mais ne me donne pas le nora de coquin. Je le haissais 
 autrefois, mais je l'aime a, present. 
 
 912. Translate into French. 
 
 Where is he going {goes he) ? He is going to the 
 market. Why does be go there (312)? In order to 
 make {there) a few {quelques) purchases. Are your 
 friends going {go they) to the theatre ? They go there 
 sometimes, but they are not going there now. Are we 
 going to the festival ? We are going for the physician 
 (910) ; my brother is very sick. Shall you go to Lon- 
 don to-morrow ? No, I shall not go there (184, a). We 
 must go home (309). Where must I go ? Let us go to 
 the market in order to buy meat {partitive). Where 
 has your mother gone ? She has gone to church. Art- 
 thou going away (314) ? Where is he going {away) ? 
 Get thee hence (va-tfen), rogue. I must go {aicay, 309). 
 
§ 913-916.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 37l 
 
 Whom have you sent for (910) ? I will send for the 
 boy's father. This merchant has acquired (316) great 
 wealth (richesses). The soldiers will acquire glory in 
 the war. Does the water boil (318)? He is boiling 
 the milk (319). The man runs (320) slower than the 
 boys. Where are you running ? I am running home 
 (chez moi). He ran to the (jusqiCau) end of the field. 
 He gathers a rose (321). Which flowers are you gath- 
 ering? I am gathering the white flowers {blanches). 
 Thou sleepest too much, Peter (322). He sleeps all 
 night and all day. He must sleep much (309) because 
 he is still young. I have slept well during the past night. 
 How long did you sleep ? He hates me, but I do not 
 hate him (325). Hate no one, not even (pas meme) thy 
 enemy. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-FIFTH. 
 
 From "Mourir" to " Mouvoir." 
 
 913. Vocabulary. 
 
 Se mourir, to be dying. Porte, f., door, gate. 
 Faim, f., hunger. Fermer, to close, shut. 
 
 La moitie, half. Boite, f., box. 
 
 Maitre, m., master. Tonneau, m., cask. 
 
 Venir de, to have just. Tabac (c silent), m., tobacco. 
 
 Etre assis-e, to be seated. A cote de, by the side of. 
 Lendemain, m., next day. Ombre, f., shade. 
 
 914. "Sentir" signifies not only to feel, but also to 
 taste of, to smell of. Its object is always direct. 
 
 915. " Venir de" is followed by an infinitive in French, 
 which must be translated by a past participle ; as, il 
 vient d'arriver, he has just arrived (literally, he comes 
 from to arrive). 
 
 916. Translate into English. 
 
 Ou est votre ami. II vient de mourir (915, 326). Est- 
 
372 FKENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 917. 
 
 il ruort ? Oui, il est mort de chagrin. Cette fille est 
 morte de faim. II faut que nous mourions tous. Quand 
 mourut Moliere? II mourut a la derniere moitie du 
 dix-septieme siecle {century). Mon frere mourut dans 
 mes bras. II est triste de mourir loin (far) de sa (one's) 
 patrie. Je me meurs, dit le malade. Mon voisin est 
 mort hier. Ouvrez la porte, je veux entrer (327). J'ou- 
 vris la porte, mais je ne vis (saw) personne. Si vous 
 ouvrez la porte, vous trouverez quelque chose. La boite 
 est ouverte. La porte est toujours ouverte, fermez-la. 
 Je me sens mal (ill). Cette fleur sent bon (914). Sen- 
 tez-vous le tabac (914) ? Ce vin sent le tonneau (914). 
 De quoi vous servez-vous (329, a) ? Je me sers de vo- 
 tre generosite. La patrie se sert de ses citoyens dans 
 les temps de guerre. Tenez ferme (fast) ce que je vous 
 donne (330). Tenez mon cheval. D'ou venez-vous 
 (331) ? Je viens de la campagne. Pardonnez-moi, je 
 viendrai une autre fois. Je serais venu ce matin si j'a- 
 vaie eu le temps. Autrefois vous veniez nous voir tous 
 les soirs. II faut qu'il vienne. Asseyez-vous, mes en- 
 fants, je veux causer (chat) un peu avec vous (333). Si 
 vous vous assierez je m'assierai moi-meme aussi. Elle 
 etait assise a cote de sa mere. Mes soeurs s'etaient as- 
 sises sur l'herbe verte (green). Tout le monde est assis. 
 Asseyons-nous a l'ombre. II faudra que nous sortions. 
 II fallut qu'il fermat la porte. 
 
 917. Translate into French. 
 
 My friend has just died (915). When did he die? 
 He died (past inclef.) this morning at six o'clock. Of 
 what did he die? He died of a fever. These girls 
 died (past indef) of hunger. We must all die (309). 
 Voltaire died (past clef) in the last half of the eight- 
 eenth century (siecle, m.) My brother was dying (se 
 mourait) when I arrived. It is sad to die (307) on the 
 (au) field of battle, far (loin) from one's (ses) friends. 
 
 
§ 918, 919.] % PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 373 
 
 He is dying (913). My neighbors died {past i?idef.) yes- 
 terday. She died the next day. Who will open the 
 door (327) ? I will open the door. The door is open- 
 ed (or open). What is there in the box? I know not 
 (je ne sais) ; open it. The doors are always shut ; open 
 them. I feel well (je me sens). These flowers smell 
 (914) good. You smell (of) the tobacco. What do 
 you use (329, a) ? I use tobacco (329, a). You must 
 not use it (il faut que vous ne vous en serviez pas). 
 Hold fast (ferme) what he gives you (330). Hold this 
 money. Whence (d'ou) comes he? He comes from 
 the war. I shall come to-morrow (331). He would 
 have come this morning if he had had the time. You 
 used-to-come (vous veniez) every day. We must come 
 (309). Sit down, my child (2d pers.) ; I wish to speak 
 with thee. I will sit down, if you will (sit down). They 
 were seated by the side of their parents in the (d V) 
 shade. My brothers sat down on the green grass. 
 Every body is seated ; you must sit down also. We 
 shall be obliged to go out (it will be necessary that we 
 may go out). It was necessary that he should shut 
 (imperf. subj.) the box. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-SIXTH. 
 
 From " Mouvoir" to " BoireP 
 
 918. 'Vocabulary. 
 
 Peine, f., trouble. Presque, almost. 
 
 Franc, m., franc (coin). Peut-etre, perhaps. 
 Piastre, f., dollar. Ne — plus, no-longer. 
 
 919. The present tense of " pouvoir" is generally 
 translated by can, or by may when it is equivalent to 
 can. 
 
 a. In the past tenses " pouvoir" is generally rendered 
 by coidd or might. 
 
374 FEENCH GEAMMAE. % [§ 920, 921. 
 
 920. The conditional mood of " savoir" is employed 
 for the present tense of pouvoir only when accompanied 
 by the partial negative ne; as, il ne .saurait vivre, he 
 can not live. 
 
 a. The negative complement pas may be omitted 
 with the verbs pouvoir, savoir, cesser, and oser. 
 
 921. Translate into English. 
 
 II va pleuvoir (336). II commence a pleuvoir (336). 
 II pleuvait lorsque j'etais sur le chemin. II a plu pen- 
 dant la nuit. Pleut-il encore ? II pleuvra demain. II 
 ne pleuvra plus. Pouvez-vous me dire ce que je vou- 
 drais savoir (919)? Je ne puis vous le dire (920, a). 
 Si j'avais ma montre je pourrais (919, a) vous dire 
 l'heure. Pourrez-vous venir me voir demain? Je ne 
 saurais (920) vous dire aujourd'hui, mais je viendrai si 
 je puis. Savez-vous parler fran9ais? Je ne sais pas 
 (how) le parler. Je ne le sais pas. Savez-vous ce que 
 le medecin y pense (of it) ? Je ne saurais (920) vous 
 le dire. Je ne savais pas qu'il fut fache contre moi. 
 Cela ne vaut pas la peine. Combien d'argent vaut-il? 
 II vaut peut-etre soixante-quinze mille francs. Combien 
 cela vaut-il en notre argent (monnaie) ? Cela vaut 
 quinze mille piastres. Combien vaut ce drap-la? II 
 vaut presque dix piastres. Voyez-vous souvent le colo- 
 nel? Je le vois presque tous les jours. Quand j'etais 
 a Paris je voyais votre ami presque tous les jours. 
 Quand l'avez-vous vu ? Je ne l'ai vu qu'une fois dans 
 dix jours. II fallut que je le visse. Je vous verrai de- 
 main. Voulez-vous me donner un verre d'eau (343) ? 
 II veut de 1' argent (he wishes). Je voudrais qu'il vint 
 (subj.). II ne veut pas m'obeir. II ne voulait pas etu- 
 dier sa lecon. Veuillez (343, a) me payer ce que vous 
 me devez. Ce garcon est mechant parce qu'il bat (345) 
 son frere. Les mauvais gallons se battent les uns les 
 autres. Je viendrai si vous ne me battez point. 
 
§ 922.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 375 
 
 922. Translate into French. 
 
 HSF 3 The present tense of vouloir is rendered by "will" or "will- 
 ing," the past tenses by "would" when they are emphatic. 
 
 Is it going to rain ? It commences already to (a) rain. 
 Was it raining (imperf.) when you came in (etes entre) ? 
 It has rained all day. It is raining still. Will it rain 
 (fut.) to-morrow ? It will not rain (any) longer. Can 
 you tell me the hour (919)? I can not tell (it, fern.) 
 you ; I have lost my watch. Will you be able to take 
 a walk to-morrow ? I will take a walk (fut. of se prom- 
 ener) with you the next day, if I can ; I can not (920) 
 tell you (it) to-day. Do you know (how) to' speak Span- 
 ish ? I can (je sais) speak it and several other languages 
 also. How many languages can you (savez-vous) speak ? 
 Do you know what the physician thinks ? I know it. 
 I did not know (imperf.) that he was so (si) rich. Is 
 that worth (341) the trouble? How much are you 
 Avorth ? I am worth almost ten thousand dollars. He 
 was not worth so much when I saw him. He was worth, 
 perhaps, the half (of it, en before valait). How much is 
 a franc worth? It is worth a little more than (de) 
 eighteen cents. Is your coat worth twelve dollars ? It 
 was worth (imperf) thirty dollars in this country, or 
 (one) hundred (and) fifteen francs at Paris. Whom do 
 you see ? I see my old (ancien) friend, the physician. 
 Did you see the church of Our Lady when you were at 
 Paris? I saw it (fern.) almost every day. Have you 
 ever seen a handsomer book than the one which the 
 scholar has ? Will you (B£P*') show me your new book ? 
 I will show it to you (343). I wish (condition^) that he 
 would give (imperf. subj.) me some money. He will not 
 (HiP) give me what I desire. Were you not willing 
 to study your lesson ? Be so good as (343, a) to choose 
 one of these two swords. Good boys do not beat their 
 brothers. Will you come (fut.) if I do not beat you? 
 
376 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 923-927. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-SEVENTH. 
 
 From "Boire" to u JZesoudre." 
 
 923. Vocabulary. 
 
 Cafe, m., coffee. Pour que, in order that (with 
 
 Sante, f., health. Coin, m., corner. [subj.). 
 
 Bruit, m., rumor, report. Quelque part, somewhere. 
 Medecine, f., medicine. ISTulle part, noiohere (Avith 
 
 Adresse, f., address. Rarement, seldom.. [ne). 
 
 Maintenant, now. Jusqu'a present, hitherto. 
 
 Expliquer, to explain. Volontiers, willingly. 
 
 Regie, f., rule. Au juste, exactly. 
 
 924. The verb " craindre" is followed by the subjunc- 
 tive mood with the partial negative ne ; if a full negative 
 be required in English, ne—pas must be employed in 
 French ; as, je crains qu'il ne vienne, I fear that he will 
 come; but, je crains qu'il ne vienne pas, I fear that he 
 will not come (591). 
 
 925. "Faire" is often employed in a causative sense 
 when followed by an infinitive ; it then signifies to ren- 
 der, to cause, to have ; as, faire faire un habit, to have a 
 coat made (569 and foil.). 
 
 926. The verb "mettre," to put, to place, often has the 
 signification of to put on (as a garment, a hat, etc.). 
 
 a. The reflective verb " se mettre a" is followed by 
 an infinitive, and signifies to begin/ as, elle se mit a 
 pleurer, she began to .cry. 
 
 927. The expression teas born is translated by "na- 
 quit" (the past def. of naitre) when reference is made to 
 persons long since dead, and by " est ne or nee" if the 
 person indicated is still living ; as, Moliere naquit en mil 
 seize cent vingt-deux, Molihre was born in 1622; but, 
 Victor Hugo est ne a Besancon en dix-huit cent deux 
 (in 1802). 
 
§ 928.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 377 
 
 928. Translate into English. 
 
 Vous buvez trop de cafe. Je n'en bois que deux fois 
 par jour. lis boivent a notre sante, buvons a la leur. 
 Maintenant, je boirai avec vous ; que voulez-vous boire ? 
 Je ne boirai que de l'eau. Nous avons bu a sa sante, il 
 faut qu'il boive a la notre. 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne (924). Je crains qu'il ne 
 vienne pas (924). Ne craignez pas. II craint que je 
 n'aie pris la medecine (365). II craint que je n'aie pas 
 pris. la medecine (924). Que craignites-vous? Je 
 craignis qu'il ne fut arrive. Que croyez-vous ? Je crois 
 qu'il est malade. II croyait que j'allais venir le voir. 
 Elle se croit belle, mais elle se trompe. lis disent qu'ils 
 ne peuvent le trouver nulle part. Qu'en dites-vous? 
 Je pense qu'ils disent la verite. Dites-moi, pouvez-vous 
 m'expliquer ces regies ? II fallait que je disse quelque 
 chose. Je lui disais que je ne pouvais pas les lui expli- 
 quer. Que faites-vous? J'ecris une lettre. A qui en 
 ecrivez-vous une? J'ecrivis au marchand une longue 
 lettre, mais je n'ai pas pu la lui envoyer parce que je 
 n'avais pas son adresse. Combien de fois par mois vous 
 a-t-il ecrit? Jusqu'a present il m'a ecrit trois fois par 
 mois. Nous faisons au juste ce qu'il nous dit. II me 
 fait faire (925) un habit. Que fit-il batir? II faisait 
 batir une maison. Faites-le entrer (925). Qu'avez-vous 
 fait ce matin ? J'ai fait tous mes exercices. II faut que 
 je fasse mon devoir et je le ferai volontiers. Avez-vous 
 jamais lu les oeuvres de Moliere ? Je les lis maintenant. 
 II lit pour qu'il apprenne (like prendre, 365). II lisait 
 les tragedies de Corneille lorsque je le vis (saw). Mettez 
 votre habit, monsieur (926). Que mettez-vous dans la 
 boite? J'y mets mes bijoux (jewels). Quel habit 
 mettez-vous? Je mettrai mon chapeau. II se mit a 
 (926, a) expliquer les regies. Ou mirent-ils la boite ? 
 lis ne la mirent nulle part. II faut qu'ils l'aient mise 
 
378 FEENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 929. 
 
 quelque part. lis l'ont mise dans un coin. Boileau 
 naquit en seize cent trente-six. Quand est-il ne" ? II est 
 ne en dix-huit cent vingt trois. Avez-vous pris mon 
 chapeau ? Je ne l'ai pas pris. Pour qui me prenez-vous ?* 
 Je prendrai une de ces plumes. Prenez-en autant que 
 vous voudrez. Prend-il du cafe? II en prend. Je 
 prendrai toutes ces plumes et je les mettrai dans la boite. 
 
 929. Translate into French. 
 
 What do you drink? I am drinking coffee. Have 
 you ever drunk wine ? 3STo, I have never drunk any. 
 He drinks to our health. What will you drink (fut.) ? 
 *I will drink only water. Have you drunk to our health ? 
 Yes, and you must (ilfaut) drink to his (fern.). What 
 do you fear? We fear that he will come (924). We 
 fear that he will not come (924). Do not fear. Do you 
 fear that I have taken the medicine (sicbj.) ? I fear that 
 you have not taken (prise) it (fern). What did we 
 fear (past def.) ? We feared (imperf.) that he had not 
 (ne fut pas) arrived. What does he think ? He be- 
 lieves that I am sick. I thought (imperf.) that you 
 were going to send for him. He thinks himself wise, 
 but he is mistaken. He says that he can not find him 
 anywhere (nullepart). What say you of it? I think 
 that he says the truth. Tell me, can you explain this 
 rule to me ? I must say something to him. I told him 
 (imperf) that his friend would soon come (condition- 
 al). Are you writing a letter? I wrote a letter last 
 night {Kiev soir) while you (pendant que vous) were 
 sleeping. Shall you write to this merchant ? I should 
 write to him, but I have not his address. How many 
 times a year (par an) has he written to you ? Hitherto 
 he has only written to me once a month. Are you doing 
 exactly what I told you? I am having a coat made 
 (925). What is he having built (925) ? They are hav- 
 ing a church built. Cause him to get out (sortir). 
 
§ 930.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 379 
 
 What have you done this morning ? I have had {fait 
 finir) a pair of shoes finished (925). I will do (fat.) 
 my duty, and you nius"t do yours (subj.pres.). Would 
 you (condit.) do it willingly ? I would do it willingly. 
 Why do you read that book ? I read it because I like 
 it. What were you reading, when I saw you ? I was 
 reading a comedy (comedie, f.) of Moliere, called (fern.) 
 the avaricious (man). Have you ever read the works 
 of the ancients ? I have read those (celles) of the an- 
 cients and those of the moderns. I am reading them 
 now. You must read them (subj.pres.). Put the chair 
 in the (au) corner. I will put it (fat.) by the side of 
 the table. He is putting on his hat (926). I will put 
 on (fat.) my coat, and I will go with you. What did 
 he put in this box? He put nothing in it (y). He be- 
 gan to (926, a) learn his lesson in order that he might 
 go out (sortit). When was this author (auteur, m.) 
 born (naquit-il) ? He was born in 1600 (927). She 
 was born (nee) in 1840, and she is living still. Who 
 took my hat? I did not take it. Would you take 
 (condit.) me for a foreigner ? I should take you for a 
 Frenchman. Will he (fut.) take any (quelques-unes) 
 of these medicines ? He will take some. Do you take 
 coffee? I take only tea. I would take coffee also if 
 you (en) had any. 
 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-EIGHTH. 
 
 From "Hesoudre" to " VivreP 
 
 930. Vocabulary. 
 Rire de, to laugh at. Suffire, to be enough, to suf- 
 
 Fers, masc. pi., chains, fet- flee. 
 
 ters. Avis, pi. m., advice, counsels. 
 
 Opprimes, m. pi., oppressed. Armee, f., army. 
 
380 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 931, 932. 
 
 931. Translate into English. 
 
 De quoi riez-vous (367) ? II rit toujours. II roinpt 
 les fers des opprinies. RornpezT-vous leurs fers ? Je 
 romprai votre baton. A-t-il rompu son baton. II rom- 
 pit son bras. Cela suffira-t-il ? Cela suffit. Cet argent 
 ne lui suffira pas. Cela vous suffit-il ? Je suffis seul a 
 ce travail. Je vous suis (370). II me suivra. Suivez- 
 moi. Les autres le suivaient. II etait suivi d'un seul 
 domestique. II faut que vous suiviez le chemin de la 
 gloire. II y a temps de (to) parler et temps de se taire 
 (371). Taisez-vous. Je ne me tairai pas. Celui qui se 
 tait consent (co?ise?its) . Je ne puis ni'en taire (about it). 
 La mer et les vents se turent a sa voix. II a vaincu 
 (373) ses ennemis. II vaincra l'armee dans la bataille. 
 Une arrnee est vaincue quand elle perd le champ de 
 bataille ; elle est battue quand elle le perd en laissant 
 beaucoup de tues et de blesses. II faut que je vainque 
 ou que je nieure. II vit heureux dans sa famille (374). 
 II faut que tout le monde vive. Us vivent a la cam- 
 pagne. Nous vivions en paix avec tout le monde. Nous 
 ne vivrons pas jusqu'a ce temps. II vivra encore dix an- 
 nees. II vecut du temps de Milton. 
 
 932. Translate into French. 
 
 He lived at the (du) time of "Washington. He will 
 live ten years yet. We shall not live to (up to) that 
 time. We lived (imperf.) at (en) peace with every 
 body. They live in the country. Every body must live 
 (suhj.). He lives happy with (dans) his family. I must 
 conquer or die (subj.). An army is conquered when it 
 loses the field of battle. We will conquer the army in 
 the battle. He has conquered his enemies. The Son 
 of God came not to (pour) conquer the world, but to die 
 for the world. The sea and the winds were silent (past 
 def.) at his voice (voix, f.). I can not be silent about it 
 (en). He who is silent consents (consent). I will not 
 
§ 933, 934.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 381 
 
 be silent (fit.). Be silent, I tell you. There is a time 
 to (de) speak and a time to keep silent. You must fol- 
 low the way of glory. He was followed by a single 
 servant. The others followed (def.) him. Follow me; 
 I will show you (fut.) the way. He will follow me. I 
 follow you. I alone am sufficient for this work. Was 
 that enough for you ? This money will not be enough 
 for him (lui). That is enough. He would not (il ne 
 voulait pas) follow my advice (plur.). Will that be 
 enough ? He broke his arm. Have you broken his 
 cane (stick) ? I will break his cane. Do you break 
 their fetters ? He breaks the chains of the oppressed. 
 He is always laughing. At what are you laughing ? 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-FIFTH. 
 EXERCISE TWENTY-NINTH. 
 
 933. Vocabidary. 
 
 Fromage, m., cheese. Agir, to act. 
 
 Facilement, easily. Doucement, gently, siceetly. 
 
 Prudemmevit, prudently . Promptement, quickly. 
 Ordinairement, usually. Pensee, f., thought. 
 Sincerement, sincerely. Agreab\emeiit,2ileasantly. 
 
 S'exprimer, to express one's Rencontrer, to meet. 
 self. \ly. Depenser, to expend. 
 
 Contiuuellement, continual- Si, so, as. 
 Certain-e, certain, sure. Spacieux - se, roomy, spa- 
 
 Couter, to cost. cious. 
 
 Chambre, f., room. Ensuite, then, afterward. 
 
 934. Model sentences. 
 
 II parle facilement le francais, he speaks French with 
 
 facility. 
 lis vivent heureusement Tun avec l'autre, they live 
 
 happily with one another. 
 Elle chante faux (394), she sings out of tune. 
 
 
382 FRENCH GKAMMAE. [§ 935. 
 
 II a autant de pain que vous, he has as much tread as 
 you. 
 
 ISTous avons autant de courage que d'honneur, we have 
 as much courage as honor. 
 
 J'ai peu d'amis, I have few friends. 
 
 Elle ecrit mieux que vous, she icrites better than you. 
 
 Je n'y trouve point de plaisir, I find no pleasure in it 
 (397). 
 
 Je ne recois jamais de 1' argent, I never receive any 
 money. 
 
 935. Translate into English. 
 
 Avez-vous recu de bonnes nouvelles ? Je n'en ai pas 
 recu de bonnes (397). Comment parle votre sceur le 
 francais ? Elle le parle mieux que vous, elle le parle tres 
 facilement. Vous avez agi prudemment (393, d). II 
 s'exprime tres facilement et tres sincerement. Get habit 
 m'a coute* cher (394). Parlez plus bas, quelqu'un peut 
 nous entendre. Avez-vous bu assez de cafe? J'en ai 
 bu autant que je devrais. Mangez-vous plus de cette 
 viande-ci que de celle-la (395) ? Je mange moins de cette 
 viande-la que de celle-ci. J'ai tant d'habits que je ne 
 sais lequel je devrais mettre. Avez-vous beaucoup de 
 fromage? Je n'en ai guere (395). Jean parle bien l'es- 
 pagnol, mais Guillaume le parle mieux (396) et Pierre le 
 parle le mieux de tous. II ecrit mal, mais moi, j'ecris 
 encore pis (396). Avez-vous des pommes ? Je n'ai pas 
 de pommes a present, mais j'en ai eu hier soir (397). 
 N'avez-vous point de cafe ? Uous ne le buvons pas, 
 nous buvons toujours de Peau. ]SPa-t-il guere de fro- 
 mage? II n'en a guere (398) mais il en a assez. Avez- 
 vous quelque chose de joli dans votre boite ? Je n'y ai 
 rien de joli (399). II ne s'exprime jamais sincerement. 
 Je crains que vous n'ayez pas agi prudemment dans cette 
 affaire. Combien de lettres ecrit-il ordinairement par 
 jour? II en ecrit huit ou dix. Pouvez-vous vous ex- 
 
§ 936.] PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 383 
 
 primer encore en francais ? Je puis m'y exprimer si je 
 parle lentement. II etudie continuellement, il deviendra 
 savant un de ces jours. Etes-vous certain de cela ? Cer- 
 tainement (392, c) j'en suis sur. Combien d'argent avez- 
 vous depense pour (on) cette maison ? Elle m'a coute 
 cent cinquante mille francs. Cela est beaucoup d'argent. 
 II y a de belles chaises dans sa chambre. Ses chambres 
 sont spacieuses. D'abord je le rencontrai dans la maison 
 de mon frere et ensuite dans celle du peintre. Vos 
 chambres ne sont pas si spacieuses que les miennes. II 
 parle tres agreablement, ses pensees sont bien exprimees. 
 
 936. Translate into French. 
 
 Have you received any good news to-day ? I have 
 not received any (397) good, but I have received enough 
 bad (395). How does he speak French? He speaks it 
 as well as the scholar, and better than you (396). Has 
 he acted sincerely? He always acts prudently. How 
 does he express himself in Spanish ? He expresses him- 
 self less easily than you (396). This knife (couteau) was 
 sold at a high price (se vendit c7ier, 394). Do not speak 
 so loud (394) ; some one may (pent) hear you. Have you 
 eaten enough apples (395) ? I have not eaten as many 
 of them as I would \ike(je voudrais). Did you buy more 
 of these clothes than of those (395) ? I bought few- 
 er of these than of those. He has so many coats (395) 
 that he does not know which one he ought (il devrait) 
 to put on. Hast thou much cheese (395) ? I have but 
 little (395, 398), but I have (en) enough. I speak French 
 well ; he speaks it better, and you speak it the best of 
 all (396). We write badly, but you write still worse. 
 Have you any pears ? I have no pears (397) now, but 1 
 had some last evening (hier soir). Do you not drink 
 tea? We do not drink it; we drink only coffee and 
 water. Have you but little milk (398) ? I have only a 
 little (ofit),hi\t enough. Has he any thing handsome 
 
384 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 937. 
 
 in his box (399) ? He has nothing handsome (399) in 
 it (y). He never expresses himself sincerely. I fear that 
 you have not acted sincerely in this affair (affaire, f.). 
 How many letters does he usually write a (par) day ? 
 He has written eight or ten (of them). Can he express 
 himself in French yet? He can express himself in it 
 pretty (assez) well, if he speaks slowly. He studies con- 
 tinually ; he will become wise one of these days. - Are 
 you sure (sur) of that ? Certainly (393, c), I am sure of 
 it. How much money has he expended on (pour) these 
 houses ? I can not tell you (it) exactly. What has he 
 in his room ? He (y) has in it some beautiful chairs and 
 a large table. I have heard (entendu dire) that his rooms 
 were very spacious. Where did you meet him at first 
 (d'abord) ? At first I met him in the street, and then 
 in the house of my friend the painter. His rooms are 
 not as spacious (fern.) as yours. 
 
 SECTION TWENTY-SIXTH. 
 
 EXERCISE THIRTIETH. 
 
 937. Vocabulary. 
 
 Plaindre, to pity (348). Lachete, f., cowardice. 
 
 Souffrir, to suffer (327). Besoin, m., need, necessity. 
 
 Ordonner, to command. Orage, m.> storm, tempest. 
 
 Conserver, to preserve. Danger, m., danger. 
 
 Abandonner, to abandon. Esperance, f., hope. 
 
 Etre de retour, to be back. Chose, f., thing. 
 
 Present, m., present. Ensemble, together. 
 
 Somme, f., sum. Depart, m., departure. 
 
 Bras, m., arm."- Recu, m., receipt. 
 
 Cacher, to hide, to conceal. Rhin, m., Rhine (river). 
 
 Loin, far. Paraitre, to appear (364). 
 Hotel de ville, m., city hall. Qualite, f., quality. 
 
§ 938, 939.] PRACTICAL EXERCISES. . 385 
 
 938. Model sentences. 
 
 Je le rencontrai au milieu de sa famille (403), I met 
 him in the midst of his family. 
 
 Je lis au lieu d'ecrire (510), I read instead oficriti?ig. 
 
 Aussitot que j'eus recu votre lettre je partis, as soon 
 as I had received your letter I set out (418, a). 
 
 Vous pouvez sortir avec elle pourvu que vous appre- 
 iiiez votre lecon, you may go out icith her pro- 
 vided that you learn your lesson (418, IS). 
 
 C'est une chose difficile que de conserver ce qu'on a, it 
 is a difficult thing to preserve ichat one has (427). 
 
 939. Translate into English. 
 
 Apres le depart du medecin, l'enfant se porta mieux 
 (402). II viendra me voir avant trois jours. Concernant 
 cette affaire je ne vous donnerai pas d'avis. Tous sor- 
 tirent de la maison excepte lui. Malgre ses fautes, il a 
 un bon cceur. Yous ne devez pas parler contre votre 
 voisin, car il est votre frere. Je marchai avec lui a 
 travers les champs. Parmi tous mes ecoliers je n'en ai 
 qu'un qui est assidu. Je n'ai recu aucunes nouvelles de 
 Guillaume depuis son depart. J'ai achete quelques pre- 
 sents pour mes enfants. Outre cette somme d'argent il 
 recut uu beau cheval. Les soldats resteront ici pendant 
 l'hiver. Pendant l'espace de quatre semaines, j'ai ete 
 trois fois au Havre. Qu'a-t-il sous le bras ? . II a un 
 gros livre sous son bras. J'etais assis entre deux Fran- 
 9ais. J'ai trouve ce re9u parmi mes papiers; il etait 
 cache sous une lettre. Comment s'appelle le pays au 
 dela de ce fleuve (403) ? Je prendrai ce siege, faute de 
 mieux. II demeure vis a vis de l'hotel de ville. Nous 
 le cherchames le long du chemin. Je le rencontrai hors 
 de la ville. II sera bientot loin de nous ? Sa maison est 
 pres du theatre. II a voyage jusqu'au bout du monde 
 (404). II s'est promene aux environs de Paris. 
 
 Viendrez-vous avec moi ? ISTon, car je suis fatigue. 
 
 n 
 
386 FRENCH GEAMMAE. [§ 940. 
 
 Si vous voulez etre heureux, aimez la vertu et fuyez (324) 
 le vice. Lorsqu'on a souffert (327) ou qu'on (420) craint 
 de souffrir, on plaint ceux qui souffrent. A mesure qu'on 
 devient riche on devient avare. Pendant que je lui par- 
 lais on lui donna une lettre. C'est une qualite necessaire 
 dans une femme que la douceur (gentleness, 427). C'est 
 une lachete que d'abandonner son ami dans le malheur 
 (427, Rem). Qu'il est doux d'avoir des amis (422) ! II 
 faut pardonner a ses (one's) ennemis, parce que Dieu 
 l'ordonne. Je vous le dirai lorsque vous viendrez me 
 voir. Si je savais quand il sera de retoui* je vous le 
 dirais. Je ne sais si (whether) cela est vrai. II travaille 
 pendant que son frere se promene. Je pense qu'il parait 
 tres triste (419). 
 
 940. Translate into Ft'ench. 
 
 After your departure I shall write to you. I shall be 
 back before two days (402). He sat down (333) before 
 the fire (410). This merchant will appear (fat.) before 
 the judge to-morrow morning. I shall say nothing to 
 him touching this affair. They all went (allerent tons) 
 to the theatre except my brother, who was sick. They 
 came from Xew York, and they are going to (en) France. 
 In spite of his faults, I like him. Moliere has written a 
 comedy (comedie, f. ) called (fern.) " the physician in spite 
 of himself" (lui). We ought not to speak against any 
 one, for (car) God has commanded us to (cV) love our 
 neighbor as (comme) ourselves. He came through the 
 fields in order to speak to me. Among my books there 
 is one which explains the rules of (the) French grammar 
 (grammaire, f.). Have you had any news from your 
 son ? I have had no news from him since his depart- 
 ure. Have you any thing for me ? Yes, I have a few 
 presents for you. Besides a large sum of money, he 
 found a beautiful book. Where did he (has he found) 
 find them ? He found them not far (non loin) from the 
 
 
§ 940.] PRACTICAL EXEECISES. 387 
 
 church. How long shall you remain here? I shall re- 
 main during the summer. During the space (Vespace) of 
 one year they dwelt not far from our house. Has he not 
 something under his {the) arm ? He has a sum of money 
 concealed under his arm. He was seated between the 
 two French-women. Where have they found this re- 
 ceipt? Among their papers; it was hidden under a 
 book. Do you live on that side of the Rhine ? JSTo, I 
 live on this side of the river, near the shore (403). Where 
 will you sit down ? I will take this seat for want of a 
 better. My sister lives opposite the City Hall. We 
 walked along the river. I met him out of the city. He 
 will soon be far from us. His house is near the churcji. 
 He has traveled as far as Paris. Have you ever been as 
 far as Rome (404, Borne) ? He has (is) gone to take a 
 walk around Paris. Will you go with me to the theatre ? 
 No, for (41 7) I am too tired. If you wish to be happy, 
 love virtue and hate vice. When one has suffered, or 
 when (420) one fears to (de) suffer, one pities those who 
 suffer (do suffer). In proportion as one becomes rich, 
 one usually becomes avaricious. While I was walking 
 the old-man (vieillard) met me. Gentleness (la douceur) 
 is a necessary quality in a woman (427, Hem). It is 
 cowardice to abandon one's (son) friend in misfortune 
 (427). How sweet it is to (de) have friends (422) ! We 
 must pardon our enemies, because God commands it. I 
 will tell it you when you come (shall come) to see me. 
 If I knew when he will be back, I would tell (it) you. 
 He is working while his brother is walking (sepromlne). 
 
SUPPLEMENT TO PART FOURTH; 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES ON THE USE OF THE PAST 
 PARTICIPLE AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 SECTION FIRST. 
 
 EXERCISES OX THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The following exercises on the use of the past 
 participle are not to be studied until the learner has com- 
 pleted the Syntax, Part III., as far as the 525th section. 
 All the words employed in this and the following sec- 
 tions will be taken from the foregoing vocabularies, 
 which are now supposed to be familiar to the student. 
 
 EXERCISE FIRST. 
 
 941. Translate into English. 
 
 Le tresor est cache sous l'eglise (518). La plume est 
 inise (from mettre) dans l'encrier. Nous avons ete 
 abandonnes de tout le monde. Les dames etaient as- 
 sises pres da feu. Les livres sont relies. La lecon est 
 bien apprise. J'ai vu (519) presque tous les grands 
 fleuves de la terre. Les fleuves que j'ai vus (520) n'et- 
 aient pas grands. Avez-vous ecrit ces lettres? Non, 
 monsieur, je ne les ai pas ecrites (520). Avez-vous en- 
 core relie mes livres? Je ne les ai pas encore relies 
 (520). Avez-vous rencontre l'epouse qui demeure vis a 
 vis de l'hotel de ville ? Je ne l'ai jamais rencontree (520). 
 Quels habits a-t-il achetes (520) ? Avez-vous vendu votrc 
 
§ 942.] SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 389 
 
 maison (520, a) ? Je ne l'ai pas vendue (520). Avez- 
 vous jamais mange des pommes? J'en ai mange beau- 
 coup (520, b). A quelle heure s'est-elle levee (521) ? 
 lis se sont couches de bonne heure (521). Les soldats 
 se sont battus toute la journee. Comment vous etes- 
 vous portes depuis le depart de votre frere. Nous nous 
 sommes tres bien portes. Je me suis promenee si long- 
 temps que je me sens fatiguee, dit la fille a sa mere. 
 Elles se sont trompees. Qu'est-ce qu'ils se sont propose 
 (521, a) ? lis se sont propose d'aller a la campagne. 
 Les habits qu'ils se sont proposes (521,5) de faire, sont 
 deja finis. Elles se sont achete (521, a) des souliers et 
 des bas. Les souliers et les bas qu'elles se sont achetes 
 ne valent rien (521,5). Avez-vous vu les demoiselles? 
 Non, mais je les ai entendues chanter (522, Hem.). Les 
 enfants que j'ai vus passer etaient tres beaux. Avez-vous 
 entendu chanter ces chansons ? Je ne les ai pas entendu 
 chanter (522, a). Les tresors que j'ai vu cacher consis- 
 terent en or et en pierres precieuses. C'est une chose 
 que j'ai vu faire (522, a, Mem.). Avez-vous vu l'habit 
 neuf qu'il s'est fait faire (523) ? J'ai ete malade pendant 
 les chaleurs qu'il a fait (524). La pluie qu'il a fait {that 
 toe have had) cette semaine-ci, a gate les chemins. Elle 
 a fait tous les efforts qu'elle a pu (522, b). Je lui ai ac- 
 corde tous les plaisirs qu'elle a voulu (522, b). 
 
 942. Translate into French. 
 
 The impolite (impolis) are hated by every body (518). 
 Have you seen the stockings which I have bought (519, 
 520) ? I have read (519) the letter which you have writ- 
 ten (fern, sing.) to me (520). Have you read the books 
 which I have lent {pretes) to you ? It is a piece-of-news 
 (nouveUe, f.) which I have not read in any (aucwi) paper 
 (520). I have not yet read (519) the papers which you 
 have sent (520) me.. These hats are not the same which 
 I have seen. Do you know the reasons (raison, f.) which 
 
390 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 942. 
 
 lie has given me ? I have not learned the lesson which 
 you have given me. You speak to him of the things 
 which he has never learned (365). You speak of a wom- 
 an whom I have been acquainted-with (connue). You 
 speak of an affair which I have not forgotten (oubliee). 
 This is a thought which I have read somewhere. She 
 rose (has risen) at six o'clock (521). At what o'clock 
 have they risen (521) ? They rose (have risen) at seven 
 o'clock. They (fern.) have gone to bed early. The sol- 
 diers have fought all day. How have you been since the 
 departure of your brother ? We have been very well. 
 I have walked so long that I feel tired, said the lady to 
 her (son) husband. They (fern.) have been mistaken. 
 What have they proposed (to themselves ; 521, a) ? They 
 have proposed to (cV) go into the church. The clothes 
 which they have proposed to make are already finished 
 (521, b). They (fern) have bought (for themselves) 
 some shoes and some stockings (521, a). The shoes and 
 the stockings which they have bought (reflect.) are worth 
 nothing (5 2 1 , b) . Have you seen the young-ladies ? No, 
 but I have heard them singing (522). The children 
 which I have seen passing were very beautiful (522, 
 Mem.). The soldiers whom I have seen setting-out were 
 brave (522, Rem). I have seen them arriving. It is a 
 song which I have heard sung this week (522, a). It is 
 a thing which I have seen done. 
 
 SECTION SECOND. 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 £31^ The following Exercises should be studied in 
 connection with Rules 540 and following, in Part III. 
 
943.] SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 391 
 
 EXERCISE SECOND. 
 
 943. Translate into English. 
 
 A verb in the infinitive mood included within a parenthesis, 
 
 indicates that the verb is irregular, and is to be sought for in the al- 
 phabetical list (section 388 and foil) ; if its signification is unknown, 
 it will be found in the Vocabulary at the end of this work. 
 
 Que veut-il que vous lui donniez (541) ? II veut que 
 je lui donne de l'argent. II desire que vous ecriviez une 
 lettre au fils du marchand. Je desire que vous rem- 
 plissiez votre devoir. Que voulez-vous que je fasse ? Je 
 veux que vous appreniez (apprendre) votre lecou. Je 
 doutais qu'il vous ecrivit. Je craignais qu'il ne vlnt 
 (541, Rem?). Je ne doutais pas qu'il ne fut bien aise de 
 vous voir (592). Son mari a permis (permettre) qu'elle 
 allat (541) a la comedie. Croyez-vous qu'il ait ecrit la 
 lettre (542) ? II faut que je lui ecrive (543). Faut-il 
 que vous lui ecriviez (543) ? II est juste qu'elle soit 
 louee (543). II est injuste qu'il soit puni. II est neces- 
 saire qu'il y aille. II parait que vous le connaissez (543, b). 
 II semble qu'elle soit fachee (543). II semble que vous 
 le connaissiez. II semble qu'il ait raison. II ne semble 
 pas qu'elle soit malade (542). II me semble que vous 
 etes fache (543, a). II me semble qu'il est fort savant. 
 II lui semble qu'elle est tres jolie. II parait qu'il est 
 honnete homme (543, b). II parait qu'elle est surprise 
 {surprendre). II parait qu'il est fache. II est vrai que 
 je lui ai parle (543, b). II est vrai qu'il l'a vue. II est 
 vrai qu'elle lui a ecrit. II est vrai que mon pere le con- 
 natt. II est certain qu'il est mort (543, b). II est certain 
 qu'il ne le connait pas. II est stir qu'il lui a dit cette 
 nouvelle. II est sur qu'il lui a ecrit. II est sur qu'il 
 sait (savoir) sa lecon. II ne parait pas que vous le con- 
 naissiez (542). II ne parait pas qu'elle soit fachee. II 
 n'est pas vrai que je lui aie parle (542). II n'est pas 
 
392 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [§ 944. 
 
 vrai qu'elle lui ait ecrit. II n'est pas certain qu'il soit 
 mort. II n'est pas sllr qu'il lui ait dit cette nouvelle. 
 Donnez-moi un mouclioir qui soit blanc (544). Je cherche 
 un dornestique a qui je puisse (p>ouvoir) me fier (544). 
 II cherche nne femme qui soit riche. Est-il stir qu'il 
 vienne aujourd'hui (542) ? C'est la plus belle demoiselle 
 que vous ayez jamais vue (545). Ce sont les plus douces 
 poires que j'aie jamais mangees. C'est le meilleur homme 
 que je connaisse (connaitre). Voila le seul chapeau 
 que j'aie (546). Vous etes le premier qui me l'ait dit. 
 T a-t-il aucun qui puisse me blamer (546) ? Y a-t-il au- 
 cun qui l'ait vu ? Quelque riche qu'il soit il n'est pas 
 avare (547). Quelque riches que vous les ayez vus, ils 
 sont a present fort pauvres. Quelques amis qu'il ait il 
 ne reussira jamais. Envoyez-moi des nouvelles, quelles 
 qu'elles soient. Quelles que soient ses sceurs elles ne 
 sont pas si aimables qu'elle. Quoi qu'il puisse arriver, 
 il est toujours le meme. Au cas qu'il yienne (548) et 
 qu'il (549) demande des nouvelles de mon frere, dites-lui 
 qu'il arrivera dans huit jours. Ann que vous soyez con- 
 tent et que vous n'ayez pas sujet de vous plaindre de 
 moi, je vous donnerai plus que je ne vous (590) ai promis 
 (promettre). Bien qu'il me l'ait dit et que son frere me 
 l'ait confirme, je n'en crois rien. Si vous y alliez et que 
 vous lui parlassiez (549) vous lui feriez (faire) plaisir. 
 Si vous etudiez et que vous preniez {prendre) de la peine 
 {pains) vous apprendrez le francais en peu de temps. 
 
 944. Translate into Fre?ich. 
 
 "What do you wish me to do (541) ? I wish you to 
 learn your lesson (apprendre). Do you wish me to go 
 to school? No, I wish you to write a letter to the 
 daughter of the judge (541). What does he desire (541) 
 me to do ? He desires you to do your duty. I doubt 
 whether (que) he will write to you (541). Have you 
 ever doubted that he would give you his house (541, 
 592)? Will you permit me to go (that I may go) to 
 
§ 944.] SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 393 
 
 the theatre? Do they think that I have written the 
 letter (542) ? You must talk to him of this affair (543). 
 It is right that I buy a new coat. (543). Is it unjust that 
 he be punished (542) ? It is necessary that he go there. 
 It appears that you know him (543, b). It seems that 
 she is angry (543). It seems that you know him. It 
 does not seem as if she is sick {that she is, etc.). It 
 seems to me that you are angry (543, a). It seems to 
 me that he is very learned. It seems to him that she is 
 very pretty. It appears that she is blind (aveugle). It 
 is true that I have spoken to him (543, b). It is true 
 that he has seen her. It is true that she has written to 
 him. It is true that my brother is acquainted-with him. 
 It is certain (543, b) that he is dead. It is sure that he 
 has told her this news. It is sure that he has written to 
 her. Is it sure that she knows her lesson (542) ? It 
 does not appear that you know him (542). It does not 
 appear that she is angry (542). It is not true that I 
 have spoken to her. It is not certain that she is dead. 
 I fear that my father is dead (541, Hem.). I doubt 
 whether {que) you are (a) Frenchman (541). I seek a 
 servant in whom I can confide (544). He is looking for 
 a woman who is rich (544). Is it sure that he will come 
 to-day (542) ? You are the most learned man whom I am 
 acquainted-with (connaitre) (545). I do not know any 
 one who is as happy as you (546). These are the best 
 apples (545) that I have eaten this season. You are the 
 first friend whom I have met in this city (546). My son 
 is the only {one) on whom I can (pouvoir) rely {compter). 
 Whatever riches he possesses (ait) he is not avaricious 
 (54V). Send me' tidings (cles noiwelles,fe?n.), whatever 
 they may be. In case that he comes, (548) and asks (et 
 qiCil demande, 549) for news of my brother, tell him 
 that he will arrive in eight days. Unless you come 
 (548, with ne) with me, I will not go. 
 R2 
 
PAET FIFTH. 
 FRENCH READING LESSONS, 
 
 SECTION FIRST. 
 
 OP 33 In this section all verbs are printed in italics; 
 such as are irregular will either be indicated by a refer- 
 ence to the conjugation of the verb, or the infinitive will 
 be given in a parenthesis, and the verb must be sought 
 in the list. (See page 167 and following.) 
 
 I. MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES. 
 L'honneur 1 et la vertu 1 sont estimes 1 partout. La per- 
 sonne de Fenelon etait chere 3 meme 4 aux ennemis de son 
 pays. Le desir deparaitre 5 habile empeche* souvent 7 de 
 le 8 devenir. 9 II faut 10 (falloir) s'accoutumer 11 a sup- 
 porter les outrages de la fortune. 1 Apres avoir 5 long- 
 temps 7 souffert (souffrir) les maux 12 de la 1 guerre, on 13 
 seyit (sentir) doublement 14 le bonheur et le 15 prix de la 1 
 paix. La 1 vieillesse est pour le sage 16 un port tranquille 17 
 ou 18 il se troitve 19 a l'abri 20 des orages 1 et des perils. 1 
 Le 1 mepris est un puissant reraede contre le poison de 
 l'orgueil. 1 L'homme est place 21 libre entre le vice 1 et la 1 
 vertu. Dieu dispense les biens 22 et les maux 22 selon 23 la 
 
 I. 1 See 431.— 2 See 467.— 3 See 465, 116, a.— 4 See 219, &.— 5 See 
 510, 595. — 6 See 552, 498. — 7 See 593. — 8 See 491. — 9 See 388, 
 595.— 10 See 308.— " See 553, "to accustom one's self."— 12 See 104, 
 "evils."— 13 See 207.— 14 See 393.— 15 See 443.— 16 See 124.— 17 See 
 473.— ^ See 176.—" See 295, here=il est.— 20 See 403.— 21 See 287. 
 — 22 Translate "good and evil."— 23 See 402. 
 
HEADING. LESSONS. 395 
 
 force ou la faiblesse des hommes. 1 La marche du 1 temps 
 est terrible, car elle 24 est irrevocable et sans repos; mais 
 elle 24 est lente, 3 egale 3 et mesuree. — Tout 25 le temps de 
 cette 26 vie rfest qu'une 27 course rapide 17 vers la 1 mort. 
 L'homme le 28 plus heureux ne saurait 29 (savoir) se 
 passer 30 d'un ami. Depuis l'invention de la 1 poudre, les 
 batailles sont moins sanglantes 31 qu'elles ne 32 Yetaient 33 
 auparavant. Celui qui 34 merit (mentlr), fait (faire) mal; 
 celui qui 34 calomnie, fait 35 encore pis. 36 Les 1 plaisirs 
 sont des 37 fleurs semees 38 parmi les ronces de la 1 vie. 
 Les grandes 3 decouvertes immortalisent 39 ceux qui 34 les 
 ontfaites, 40 et ceux qui 34 les out perfectionnees. 40 
 
 II. MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES— (continued). 
 
 Quelqu'un 1 demandant 2 a Diogene comment on 3 pou- 
 vait 4 (pouvoir) se venger 5 de ses ennemis, celui-ci 6 repon- 
 dit : En 7 devenant (devenir) homme 8 de bien. 9 
 
 On augmente son bonheur en 7 le partageanf avec un 
 ami. Cest 11 en 7 ha'issant le vice que nous nous fortifiotis 12 
 dans l'amour de la vertu. Employez bien le temps de 
 votre jeunesse, pour que 14 vous puissiez 15 (pouvoir) un 
 jour 16 remplir dignement 13 les devoirs de votre etat. 
 Fuyez (fuir) les mediants 17 de peur 14 qu'ils ne 18 vous -en- 
 trainent 15 dans leurs vices. Avant que 14 le papier f&tf 5 
 (etre) invent^ on ecrivait 19 (ecrire) sur des 20 ecorces 
 d'arbres et sur 21 des 20 peaux. Celui qui 22 se souvient 23 
 
 24 See 152, elle, "if," here refers to marche, which is fern. — 25 See 
 224, c— 26 See 195.— 27 See 589, "is but a."— 2S See 484.— 29 See 340, 
 a, 587.— 30 See 578.— 3I See 122.— 32 See 590.— 33 See 491.— 34 See 
 198.— 35 See 356.— 36 See 396.— 37 See 85.— 38 See 517.— 39 See 498. 
 — 40 See 520, past part. fem. pi. 
 
 II. x See 209.— 2 See 561.— 3 See 207.— 4 See 919, a.— 5 See 295.— 
 6 See 200, a.— 1 See 515.— 8 See 447.— 9 "An honest man."— 10 See 262. 
 — n See 203.— 12 See 295.— 13 See 593.— 14 See 418, 6.— 15 See 548, 
 Remark, — 16 Un jour," some day," "one day." — 17 See 124. — ,8 See 
 591.— 19 See 528.— 20 See 85.— 21 See 623.— 22 See 198.— 23 Sec 560. 
 
396 FRENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 (se souvenir) des bienfaits qu'il a repus, 2 * prouve qu'il en 25 
 est cligne. Pour 26 nous consoler 21 des malheurs de la vie, 
 Dieu nous a donne la vertu et l'amitie. Le pauvre 17 
 jouit 28 souvent 13 mieux du 28 rosier de sa fenetre que le 
 riche 17 de 28 ses vastes jardins. 
 
 III. ON A VOYAGE. 
 Nous voici 1 en pleine 2 mer. Comment trouvez-yous le 
 mouvement du bateau a vapeur? 3 — Je ne Valine point 4 
 du tout, il me fait 5 malade. — Allez en bas. 6 — Non, je ne 
 veux (vouloir) pas descendre, il me fauf (falloir) de Pair 
 frais. 8 — Avez-Yous jamais ete en Europe? — Non, tfest 
 mon premier voyage. — Je n'ai jamais ete malade. — Com- 
 bien de fois avez-vous traverse la mer? — Je Vai deja 
 traversee 9 vingt fois ;- vous savez que je suis marehand 10 
 en gros, 11 et que je vais (aller) a Paris on a Lyon deux 
 fois 12 par an 13 pour y aeheter des marchandises. — Voyez- 
 vous ces poissons-la ; comment les appette-t u -on ? Ce 15 
 sont des 16 marsouins. — Quelquefois on voit (voir) des 
 baleines par ici. 6 — Le vapeur marche vite, bien vite a 
 present, et il fait 11 du vent. — Dans deux jours nous 
 serons au 18 Havre. — Eh bien, je m'en vais 19 descendre, je 
 me sens (sentir) un peu fatigue. 
 
 IV. ON LANDING IN EUROPE. 
 
 Xevez-Yous, mon ami, il 1 est tard et nous sommes deja 
 arrives 2 au port. — Comment! que dites 3 -Yousl JEJst-ce 
 
 24 See 520.— 25 See 179, en, "oftliem?—™ See 555.— 27 Nous consoler 
 de, " to console us for" — 28 See 560. 
 
 III. 1 See 622*.— 2 See 116, en pleine mer, "on the open sea."— 3 See 
 459.— 4 See 255, point du tout, " not at all."— 5 See 356.— 6 See 594.— 
 7 See 310. — 8 See 473, 88. — 9 See 520. — 10 See 447.— 1X En gros, 
 "wholesale. "— 12 See 485, d.— 13 See 448, a.— 14 See 269.— 15 See 203.— 
 16 See 447, a. — 17 See 569, a, ilfait du vent, "it is windy"' "it blows." 
 - 18 See 439, a.— 19 See 314. 
 
 IV. : See 306.— 2 See 292, b, 293.— 3 See 353. 
 
READING LESSONS. 397 
 
 que 4 nous sommes au Havre? — Assurement, nous y 5 
 sommes, et il faudra 6 debar quer sur-le-champ. 7 — Otez 
 votre passeport pour le /aire voir 8 en entrant dans la 
 douane. — Le voici 9 tout pret. — Voila les officiers de la 
 douane. — Messieurs, je vous prie u de /aire 11 examiner 
 raon bagage. — Oui, oui, a votre tour. — Mais ilfaut que 
 je parte 12 pour Paris a midi et derui. 13 — II vous faudra 6 
 attendre jusqu'a deux heures 14 de l'apres-midi. — Par- 
 bleu ! II y a beaucoup de formalites a 15 remplir dans 
 ce pays-ci. — A quel hotel vous rendrez-v ous? — Je loge 
 ordinairement a l'hotel de l'Europe. — Allons /aire 16 un 
 petit tour de promenade. — Eh bien ! voyez-\ous cet edi- 
 fice-la ? — Oui, monsieur, qxfest-ce que (Jest? 11 — Cest le 
 musee, et la statue que vous voyez sur le devant est 
 celle 18 de Bernardin de Saint Pierre, auteur 19 de la char- 
 man te histoire de Paul et Virginie. Entrons dans les 
 beaux jardins de l'hotel de ville, pour nous rafraichir, 20 
 ensuite nous reviendro?is (revenir) a l'hotel. 
 
 V. ON LANGUAGES. 
 JParlez-vous francais, monsieur? — Oui, monsieur, je suis 
 Fran9ais. 1 — JParlez-vous les langues modernes ? — Jeparle 
 ce 2 qu'on nomme ordinairement les langues modernes, 
 c'est-h-dire, 3 l'allemand, 4 le francais, l'espagnol, l'italien, 
 l'anglais et le portugais. — Laquelle 5 de toutes ces langues 
 comprenez 6 -YO\\s le mieux? 7 — Je comprends Q le francais 4 
 mieux 7 que l'allemand et l'espagnol mieux que l'italien. — 
 Laquelle 5 des langues europeennes 8 est la 9 plus facile ? — 
 
 4 See 253.— 5 See 184.— 6 See 334.— 7 See 594.— 8 See 569, d.~ 
 9 See 622*.— 10 See 552.— ll See 569, &.— 12 See 388, 543.— 13 A midi 
 et demi, "at half past twelve.'' 1 — 14 " Two o'clock." — 15 See 290. — 
 16 Faire, etc, " let us go and take a short walk." — 17 " What is it?" — 
 18 See 199, a.— 19 See 440.— 20 See 295. 
 
 V. l See 447.— 2 See 202.— 3 Cest-a-dire, u that is to say," l H. e." 
 — 4 The article may be employed or omitted in such cases. — 5 Soe 
 190. — 6 From comprendre, see prendre. — 7 See 396. — 8 See 117. — 
 9 Understand langtie, which is/e/w. 
 
398 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 L'espagnol et le hollandais 10 sont des langues tres faciles 11 
 a apprendre. — Lesquelles 12 sont les plus difficiles? — Je 
 ileum's 13 vous le dire au juste, 14 — le hongrois 10 et le po- 
 lonais sont tres difficiles, au contraire, le suedois et le 
 danois sont extrernement faciles. — Quelle langue est la 9 
 plus utile? — Cest le francais, parce que l'on 15 s'en sert 16 
 partout en Europe. — Je suis bien aise de V entendre, parce 
 que je Vapprends 11 a present. — Yous devez apprendre 
 aussi l'alleniand. — Pourquoi ? — Parce qu'il est la langue 
 litteraire du monde entier. — Je ne savais 18 pas cela. 
 
 VI. ON THE RAILWAY. 
 A. Mille pardons, 1 mesdames, 2 de 3 vous- deranger; 
 mais le conducteur me dit (dire) *d?entrer dans ce coupe. 
 B. Bhitrez, monsieur, il y a 5 encore de la 6 place ; nous 
 vous prier ons 1 seulement de 4 ne pas 8 f timer. A. Soyez 
 sans inquietude, madame, je neftmie jamais. C. Mon-' 
 sieur nefume 9 jamais? C'est bien rare en Allemagne. 
 B. Cest une grande economie pour monsieur* et un 
 grand agrement pour les dames qui voy agent avec lui. 11 
 A. Voila le train qui part ; 12 il par ait qu'on ne tfarrete 
 que 13 fort peu 14 aux stations. D. Oui, monsieur ; c?est un 
 convoi de grande vitesse. A. Bouvez 1 5 -vous (pouvoir) me 
 dire, monsieur, en combien 16 de temps ce train fait (faire) 
 le trajet de Berlin a Cologne ? D. En treize heures a 
 peu pres : nous sommes partis 11 de Berlin a six heures 
 
 10 See 41, 63.— " See 480.— 12 " Which ones?"—' 3 See 339, 587. 
 — ^ Au juste, "precisely," "exactly"— ± b See 207, a.— 16 See 329, 
 329, a. — 17 From apprendre, " I am learning." — 18 See 340. 
 
 VI. x Understand "je vous demande."— 2 See 464. — 3 De, "for.'" — 
 4 See 552.— 5 See 303.— 6 See 85.— 7 Future.— 8 See 278.— 9 Vous tie 
 fumez jamais would be rude in French; "you never smoke, sir?" — 
 10 Instead of "pour vous, monsieur" — n Eq;mls "vous" — J2 "The 
 train moves off" literally, " there is the train which goes." — 13 See 589. 
 — 14 Fort peu, "a very short time."— lb See 919.— 16 See 395.— 17 See 
 292, b. 
 
 / 
 
READING LESSONS. 399 
 
 et demie 18 da soir, et nous arriverons 1 a Cologne, au 
 plutot a Deutz, a huit heures du matin. C. En verite ? 
 mais 19 tiest superbe , : parcourir une distance de 84 milles 
 en 13 heures! D. Si Ton 20 tient (tenir) compte 21 du 
 temps qu'on perd aux stations, c'est beaucoup plus de 22 
 6 milles allemands par 23 heure. B. Combien 16 de temps, 
 messieurs, 2 fallait-\\ (falloir) a peu pres 24 Tpouv f aire le 
 voyage de Berlin a Cologne, il y a 25 cinquante a 26 soixante 
 ans ? A. Huit a 26 dix jours, madame, et meme 27 da- 
 vantage dans la saison ou 28 les chemins etaient mauvais. 
 
 VII. THE LETTER. 
 
 Charles. Quelle heure 1 est-il done 2 maintenant, ma 
 soeur ? 
 
 Louise. II est bientot une heure. 1 
 
 C. Deja si tard ! Je eroyais 3 qu'il xfetait pas encore 
 midi. 
 
 L. Ah ! par exemple, 4 tu 5 t'es 6 joliment trompe? 
 
 C. Vai encore une lettre a ecrire avant diner. 
 
 L. A qui done veux 8 -tu ecrire ? 
 
 C. Tu sais 9 bien que papa m'a dit de 10 prewnir notre 
 maitre d' anglais que demain nous ne pourrions^ 1 pas 
 pn*endre la lecon. 
 
 L. Comment! tu as oiiblie cela? Ecris X2 bien vite; 
 si la lettre tfest pas a la petite poste 13 avant deux heures, 1 
 il 14 ne Vaura pas ce soir. » 
 
 18 See 469.— 19 " Why, that is," etc.— 20 See 207, a.— 21 Tient compte, 
 " takes account of" i.e., " takes into the account."—* 2 See 134. — 23 See 
 448, a. — 24 A peu pres, "nearly," "about," qualifies combien de. — 
 25 See 649.— 26 A, we say "or" in like cases.— 27 See 219, b.— 28 See 
 176. 
 
 VII. " See 486.— 2 Done, "pray," "say."— 3 See 351.— * Par ex- 
 emple! "bless me!"— 5 See 489.— 6 See 296.— 7 " You have made a 
 pretty mistake."—* See 313.— 9 See 310.— 10 See 552.— n See 339. 
 ]2 See 355. — 13 Petite poste, "penny post." — 14 77, i. e., the Maitre 
 d 1 anglais. 
 
400 EEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 C. Pourrais l5 -tu me preter une feuille de papier 16 a 
 lettre, ma soeur ? 
 
 Zi. Volootiers ; en 17 voila 18 une. 19 As-tu. des plumes ? 
 
 O. Je crois (croire) que oui ; 20 mais ce ne sont 21 que 22 
 des plumes d'oie. 23 
 
 L. Voici 18 une plume metallique toute neuve, 24 et mon 
 meilleur porte-plume. 
 
 C. Je te remercie bien; maintenant laisse-moi, sans 
 cela 25 je m'embrouilk, 26 et yScris 26 des sottises. — Voila 
 qui 27 est fini. 
 
 JO. Xis-moi (lire) vite ce que tu as ecrit (ecrire). 
 
 C. Ce ne sont que 21 quatre lignes : 
 
 Monsieur, — Comme nous faisons 26 (faire) demain une 
 partie 28 de campagne, papa vous prie de 29 ne pas 30 venir 
 pour notre le9on d' 3 'anglais ; mais nous aurons l'honneur 
 de 32 vous attentive mardi prochain a l'heure ordinaire. 
 Je suis avec respect, monsieur, 
 
 Votre eleve, Charles. 
 
 Je ne sais (savoir) si yai des pains a cacheter 23 a present. 
 
 L. Tiens 3 ^ voila 18 de la cire d'Espagne ; 35 je vais 36 al- 
 lumer la bougie ; cherche ton cachet pendant ce temps-la. 
 
 C. Que 37 je mis etourdi! yai oiiblie de 32 dater ma let- 
 tre. Quel quantieme 38 avons-nous ? 
 
 L. Attends; c'etait lundi le huit, 39 mardi le neuf, 39 
 mercredi 1$ dix, 39 c'est aujourd'hui le onze. 40 
 
 15 See 339; "could you?"— 16 "Letter paper," see 459.— l7 See 
 179.— 18 See 622*.— 19 Une agrees in gender with feuille.— 20 Que is 
 here superfluous, "I think so."— 21 See 202, "they are only."— 22 See 
 589.— 23 Plumes oVoie, "quills" or " quill pens."— - 2i See 118.— 25 "Oth- 
 erwise." — 26 See 526. — 27 Voila qui, "there it is," like Latin "ecce 
 quod." — 28 Faire une partie de campagne, " to take an excursion into the 
 country."—™ See 552.— 30 See 278.— 31 d\ "in."— 52 Be, "to."— 
 33 Literally " loaves for sealing" =" wafers." — 34 "Hold." — 35 "Wax." 
 — 36 See 312.— 37 See 422.— 38 "What day of the month."— 39 See 
 136, c.— w See 63, d. 
 
READING LESSONS. 401 
 
 G. Bien, je te remercie. — (Jest plie ; maintenant, 
 l'adresse. — Cest 9a, 41 cachetons notre lettre. 
 
 L. Prends* 2 garde fteffacer l'adresse. 
 
 C. Waie pas peur, 43 yai mis du papier brouillard des- 
 sous. Bien, a present donne-moi ma casquette. 
 
 L. La voici. 18 
 
 C. Je vais 36 courir bien vite a la poste, je Grains** 
 qu'il ne 45 soit trop tard. 
 
 JO. II tfest qu'une heure 1 et demie. 46 IsTe marche pas 
 trop vite, tu arriveras* 1 encore a temps. 48 
 
 VIII. THE TRAVELER AND THE PARISIAN. 
 
 Le Vbyageur. Pardon, monsieur, auriez-Yous la bonte 
 de xn!indiquer la rue d'Antin ? 
 
 Le Parisien. Tres volontiers, monsieur; venez 1 avec 
 moi, et vous y 2 serez dans mi quart d'heure. 
 
 V. Je vous serai bien oblige. 
 
 P. Vous n'avez jamais ete a Paris, monsieur. 
 
 T 7 ^ N~on, monsieur, j'y 2 sw£s pour la premiere 3 fois. 
 y arrive a l'instant 4 par le chemin de fer, 5 et je veux 6 
 alter a pied 7 de l'embarcadere jusqu'a 8 l'hotel qu'un de 
 mes amis m'a recommande. 
 
 P. Quel est cet 9 hotel? 
 
 ~V. L'hotel des Etats-Unis, rue d'Antin. Ce sont 1() 
 certainement 11 les boulevards que nous trauersons main- 
 tenant? 
 
 P. Oui, monsieur ; on nomme boulevard des Italiens 
 la partie ou nous nous trouvons 12 a present. 
 
 41 Cest ga, " there it is." — 42 Prends garde de, "be careful not to." — 
 43 See 574.— 44 j3ee 348.— 45 See 591, 541 ; 541, Remark.—™ See 469. 
 47 Future. — i8 A temps, "in time." 
 
 VIII. l See 331.— 2 See 184.— 3 See 136.— 4 "This moment."— 
 5 See 107.— 6 See 343.— 7 Aller a pied, "to go on foot," "to walk."— 
 8 See 404.— 9 See 194.— 10 "These are."— 11 See 393, c— 12 Equals 
 "nous sommes." 
 
 
402 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 V. Quelle 13 rue magnifique, quels 14 beaux magasins, 
 et quelles 14 superbes glaces! Et quel 14 bruit dans les 
 rues de Paris! Les Parisiens doivenP b (devoir) avoir 
 un nombre prodigieux de ventures, je n'en ai jamais vu 16 
 autant qu'ici. 
 
 P. S'il 17 n'y avait 18 pas d' 19 indiscretion a vous adver- 
 ser cette question, je vous demanderais, monsieur, si 20 
 vous etes 21 etranger? 
 
 V. Oui, monsieur; je ne suis pas Francais, 21 je mis 
 Americain. 21 
 
 P. Vraiment ? Pour un Americain vous parlez tres 
 bien 22 francais. 
 
 V. Pourquoi dites-vous (dire) pour un Americain ? 
 est-ce que 23 mes compatriotes parlent ordinairement 22 
 plus mal 24 votre langue que d'autres etrangers ? 
 
 P. Non pas, 25 monsieur ; ils out seulement certaines 
 difficultes de prononciation qu'on ne trouve pas cbez 26 
 d'autres nations. Mais sans vous flatter, monsieur, votre 
 prononciation n'« pas ces defauts; vous articulez tres 
 bien 22 les voyelles, et vous distinguez parfaitement 22 les 
 differentes consonnes, qu'on ne doiP 5 pas eonfondre en 
 francais, comme cela se fait 21 (faire) dans quelques pays 
 de l'Angleterre. 
 
 V. Avez-vous ete en Amerique, monsieur ? 
 
 P. Oui, monsieur ; j'y ai ete deux fois, 28 mais je tfai 
 jamais sejourne plus de 29 *cinq a six jours dans la meme 30 
 ville. 
 
 V. /Savez-vous (savoir) l'anglais, monsieur ? 
 
 P. Je le parle tres peu et tres mal, mais assez pour 31 
 
 * 13 See 448.— 14 See 189.— 15 See 267.— 16 See 520, b.— 17 See 63, 
 c— 18 See 303.— ,9 See 397.— 20 See 629.— 21 See 447.— 22 See 593. 
 — 23 See 272. — 24 "Worse." — 25 Non pas, an emphatic negation, 
 "rco," '■'•not at all" — 26 Chez means here "among." — 27 Se fait, "is 
 done;" literally "does itself;" see 289.— 28 See 485, d— 29 See 134. 
 — 30 See 219.— 31 See 555. 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 403 
 
 me tirer d' affaire, 32 quand je suis avec des Americains 
 qui ne parlent que leur langue. 
 
 T 7 ". Aviez-\o\\& appris (apprendre) notre langue avant 33 
 Ratter en Amerique ? 
 
 JP. Tavais pris a Paris, pendant quelques mois, les 
 le9ons d'un naaitre d'anglais. Mais voici, monsieur, 
 l'hotel que vous cherchiez y jfai l'honneur de vous 
 saltier. 3 * 
 
 V. Monsieur, je vous remercie beaucoup de 35 votre 
 bonte. 
 
 IX. HENRY IV. AND THE PEASANT. 
 
 C'etait en 1600; Henri IV, apres avoir chasse 1 aux 
 environs 2 de son chateau de Nerac, revenait 3 (revenir) a 
 sa demeure royal e, fatigue et tourmente 4 d'une soif ar- 
 dente. Une chaumiere doffre (offrir) a sa vue, il s'en 
 approche 5 et voit (voir) un paysan qui tfoccupe dans son 
 jardin, a 6 cueittir des peche.s. — Tu as la de tres beaux 
 fruits, mon brave ! 7 lui dit 8 -i\, je ^assure que j'en man- 
 gerais bien 9 un avec plaisir. 
 
 Le paysan choisit aussitot les plus belles 10 peches et 
 les presente au monarque. Le prince, apres s'etre 11 ra- 
 fraichi, lui dit (dire) : Grand merci, 12 mon ami ; ap- 
 porte-moi demain au chateau de Nerac une corbeille de 
 tes peches, qui sont excellentes. — Sire, repond le paysan, 
 je n'y 13 manquerai pas. 
 
 Le lendemain, le villageois se met u (mettre) en route, 
 
 32 An idiomatic expression, "to serve my turn,'" lit. "to draw vie 
 out of a scrape." — 33 See 418, c. — 34 "To wish you a good day." — 
 35 De, "for." 
 
 IX. 1 "Been on a hunt.'" — 2 "In the neighborhood of' — 3 " Was 
 returning" — 4 D\ "with" or "by." — 5 See 560, "he draws near to 
 it."— 6 See 553, "in."— 7 "My good friend."— * See 353.— 9 Bien, 
 "certainly ;" "I should certainly take pleasure in eating one" — 10 See 
 121.— " See 296.— 12 "Many thanks."— 13 Y, "to it;" "I shall not 
 fail to do so." — 14 Se met en r., "sets out." 
 
- V 
 
 404 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 charge d' 4 une corbeille remplie 15 des 4 plus beaux fruits, 
 qu'il a arranges™ avec gout et entoures 16 de 4 quelques 
 fleurs. II est bientot 17 arrive'; mais quel est son eton- 
 nement lorsque le concierge du chateau Vemptche 1 * &en- 
 trer et le repousse durement. 
 
 Le pauvre homme parle en vain de l'ordre du roi. — 
 Chansons! lui repond le cerbere, 19 on Centre pas. 20 
 Alors le paysan se met a 21 raconter au concierge tout ce 
 qui s'est passe 11 la veille, 22 entre le prince et lui. 
 
 — A 23 d'autres ! £ eerie le gardien de la porte du roi, 
 a 23 d'autres ! nous ne sommes pas si credules. 
 
 En vain le villageois repe£e 24 -t-il dix fois 25 sen recit, 
 dont 26 il atteste la verite en invoquant 21 tous les saints, 
 il reste a la porte. Enfin le cerbere 19 de la derneure 
 royale lui clit : 8 Si tu me promets 28 la moitie de ce que 
 le roi te donnera pour tes fruits, je te laisserai 29 entrer. 
 
 D'abord le paysan repousse cette proposition avec in- 
 dignation, mais voyant qu'il n'y a pas d'autre moyen 
 Centre?', il accepte les dures conditions qu'on lui fait. 30 
 II parment (parvenir) enfin j usque 31 devant le roi. 
 
 — Ah ! te voila, 32 mon brave, 7 lui dit 8 Henri. Bien, 
 je suis content 33 de ton zele et je vais te reeompenser. 
 
 Aussitot il met (mettre) dans la main du paysan quel- 
 ques pieces d'or. Celui-ci 34 les examine en souriant 35 
 
 15 See 517.— X6 See 520.— 17 See 593.— 18 See 552, "prevents him 
 from." — 19 Cerbfre, an epithet applied to the porter, in allusion to 
 the three-headed monster of fable, who guarded the entrance to the 
 lower world. — 20 Familiar style for "tu n'entreras pas.'" — 21 "Begins 
 to;" see 639, 926, a.— 22 "The evening before."— 22 Understand con- 
 tez cela — "tell that" etc. — 2i The verb may assume the interrogative 
 form, even in affirmative locutions, when the sentence is introduced 
 by an adverb or an adverbial phrase. — 25 "Again and again." — 26 See 
 172, "of which."— 2l See 515.— 28 From promettre ; see 526.— 29 See 
 554. — 30 "Which are imposed upon him" lit., "which one makes to 
 him." — 31 "To before the ki?ig," i.e., "to the royal presence ." — 32 See 
 622. — 33 See 479. — 34 See 200, a.— 35 See 515, "smiling," from 
 " sourire." 
 
READING LESSONS. 405 
 
 d' 4 un air embarrasse. — JEst-CQ que tu n'es pas 36 content ? 
 lui dit le roi. — Bien au contraire, Sire. . . . Seulement, si 
 tout etait pour moi. . . — Mais, c'est bien 9 a toi seul que 
 yentends donner ces pieces d'or. — llfaut pourtant que 
 j'en remette 31 (remettre) la moitie au concierge de Votre 
 Majeste. 
 
 Le roi demande l'explication de ces paroles. Apres 
 quelques hesitations le paysan lui fait 38 un recit fidele 
 de ce qui s' 'est passe 11 a la porte du chateau. — Comment! 
 mon concierge veut (vouloir) partager avec toi? Eh 
 bien ! garde™ For que je te donne, tu vas i0 lui faire 
 part 41 d'une tout autre recompense. Prends (prendre) 
 ce baton, c'est avec cette monnaie que tu le paierasf 2 
 je te le permets (permettre), je te Vordonne meme. Ne 
 va 43 (aller) cependant pas le frapper trop fort. 
 
 Cette derniere recommandation du bon monarque 
 r? etait pas inutile ; la main demangeait^ bien fort au 
 paysan. II fait sa reverence au roi, cache le baton du 
 mieux qu'il 45 pent (pouvoir), traverse la cour du chateau 
 et arrive a la porte de la grille. Le concierge l'y at- 
 tendait deja avec impatience. 
 
 — Eh bien ! lui me-t-il, le roi 46 a-t-il ete genereux ? — 
 Le plus genereux du monde, 47 je vais (aller) te faire ta 
 part. 48 Le concierge tend (tendre) sa main, le paysan 
 la saisit avec force et administre au dos du cerbere une 
 volee de coups de baton. Le malheureux concierge ap- 
 pelle de toutes ses forces 49 au secours ; la garde accourt 
 
 36 See 253.— 37 See 543.— 38 Fait means here "gives."— 39 Garde 
 is in imperative mood, "keep." — 40 See 312. — 41 Faire part a — de, 
 means " to share something with some one;" translate from tu vas, etc., 
 '■'■go and give him his share in quite a different reward." — 42 See 263. 
 — 43 See 513. — 44 This whole phrase is idiomatic; translate "the 
 peasant was eager to obey;" literally, "the hand of (to) the peasant 
 itched exceedingly (for the work)." — 45 Du mienx, etc., "as well as 
 can." — 46 See 274. — 47 Translate whole phrase "extremely so." — 
 48 Te faire, etc., "to give you your share." — 49 De toutes, etc., "with 
 all his might. ," 
 
406 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 (accourir), et on allait arreter le paysan qui etait loin 
 d'etre fatigue, lorsque tout a coup 50 Henri IV parait 
 (paraitre). 
 
 — Laissez ce brave homme en paix, dit-il aux soldats, 
 il n'« agi que 51 d'apres mes ordres. Puis, s'adressant 
 au concierge : Cette fois, maitre coquin, tu en es quitte 52 
 pour quelques bons coups de baton. Si tu Vavises 53 en- 
 core une fois 54 de rcmponner mes sujets a la porte de 
 mon chateau, je te chasserai sans pitie. 
 
 X. THE ARAB AND HIS HORSE. 
 Les Arabes etendent leur humanite jusqu'a leurs che» 
 vaux ; jamais 1 ils ne les frappent. lis les dressent a force 
 de 2 caresses, et ils les rendent si dociles qu'il n'y en a 
 point 3 dans le monde qui leur soient* comparables en 
 beaute et en bonte. Ils ne les attaehent point dans leur 
 camp ; ils les laissent errer en fmissant 5 aux environs, 
 d'ou ils accourent (accourir) a la voix de leurs maitres. 
 Ces animaux dociles mennent (venir) la nuit 6 se couchef 
 dans leurs tentes, au milieu des enfants, sans jamais les 
 blesser. Si un cavalier tombe dans une course, son cheval 
 s'arrete sur-le-champ, 8 et reste auj)res de lui sans le quitter. 
 Ces peuples sont parvenu^ (parvenir), par 1'influence in- 
 vincible d'une education douce, 10 hfaire n de leurs ehe- 
 vaux les premiers coursiers de l'univers. On ne peut 
 lire sans attendrissement ce que rapporte™ a ce sujet le 
 vertueux consul d'Hervieux dans son voyage du Liban. 
 Un pauvre Arabe du desert avait pour tout bien 13 une 
 
 50 "Suddenly." — 5l "He has only acted in conformity to" etc. — 
 
 52 Tu en es quitte pour is an idiom: " You have come off with" — 
 
 53 S'aviser de," to think to" "to take it in ones head to.'''' — 54 Literal- 
 ly,."?/^ once," i.e., "again," "the second time." 
 
 X, x See 398.— 2 See 403.— 3 " There are none in," etc.— 4 See 546. 
 — 5 See 363 and 515.— 6 "At night."— 7 See 513.— 8 See 594.— 9 See 
 292, b. — 10 See 123. — :1 A /aire depends on parvenus, "succeeded in 
 making." — l2 Rapporte: the subject of this verb is consul. — 13 Avait 
 pour tout bien, "ivas reduced in his fortune to," etc. 
 
READING LESSONS. 407 
 
 magnifiqne juinent: le consul de France 14 a Seyde lui 
 proposal de la lui vendre, dans l'intention de Yenvoyer 
 a Louis XIY. L'Arabe presse par le besoin 16 balanpa 
 longtemps ; enfin il y consentit, et en demanda un prix 
 considerable. Le consul, n'osant de son chef 17 donner 
 une si grosse somnie, ecrivit (ecrire) a Versailles pour en 
 obtenir l'agrement de la cour. Louis XIY donna ordre 
 qu'elle flit 18 delivree. Le consul sur-le-champ 8 mande 
 l'Arabe, qui arrive monte sur la belle coursiere, et il lui 
 compte Tor qu'il lui 19 avait demande. L'Arabe, couvert 
 d'une pauvre natte, met 20 pied a terre, regarde Tor ; il 
 jette ensuite les yeux sur sa jument, il soicpire, et lui dit : 
 "A qui vais-je te Uvrer? a des Europeens qui Vattache- 
 ront, qui te battront, qui te rendront malheureuse : reviens 
 (revenir) avec moi, ma belle, ma mignoane, ma gazelle ; 
 sois la joie de mes enfants." En disant (dire) ces mots,- 
 il sauta dessus 2 " 1 et reprit 22 (reprendre) la route du desert. 
 *— Bernardin de St. Pierre. 
 
 LITERARY ANECDOTES. 
 XI. MOLIERE AND HIS GUESTS. 
 
 La societe habituelle de Moliere se composait 1 de Boi- 
 leau, de 2 La Fontaine, de 2 Racine, du 2 peintre Mignard 
 et de 2 Chapelle, poete epicurien et joyeux compagnon, 
 qui etait le boute-en-train cle la bande. On se reunissait 3 
 chez Boileau a Paris, ou chez Moliere, au village d'Au- 
 
 14 See 477. — 15 See 552. — )6 Par le besoin, "by want." — " De son 
 chef, "on his own responsibility." — 18 See 541. — l9 Lui, indirect object 
 of demande, render, "which he had asked (him)." — 20 Met pied a terre, 
 literally, "puts foot on the ground" i. e., "dismounts;" see 8G0. — 
 21 Dessus, " on her back. " — 22 Reprit, ' ' retraced his way across the, " etc. 
 
 XI. l See 289, "was made vp of." — 2 See 623. — 3 On se reunissait, 
 etc., " they were accustomed to meet at," etc. 
 
408 FEENCH GEAHMAE. 
 
 teuil. Moliere, si gai, si amusant sur la scene, eiait en 
 societe distrait, reveur et taciturne; ce quilui avaitfait 
 donner 4, par Boileau le surnorn de Contemplateur. 
 
 Cest dans line de ces reunions chez Moliere, qtfarriva 
 la fameuse aventure connue (connaitre) sous le nom de 
 jSouper cVAuteuil. 5 Un soir que 6 Moliere etait souffrant, 
 il laissa ses amis a table, et se retira dans sa chambre, en 
 prianP Chapelle de le remplacer. Chapelle aimait beau- 
 coup 8 le vin. II fit si Men les honneurs de la cave, que 
 tous les convives, meme le sage Boileau, s'enivr&rent. Au 
 milieu des discussions qui s'engagere?it, quelqu'un vinl* 
 a titer cette maxime d'un ancien : " Le premier bonheur 
 est de ne point naitre, et le second de mourir prompte- 
 ment." Les convives, la tete echauffiee 10 par le vin, s'ap- 
 pesantirent a l'«nvi n les uns des autres sur les maux de 
 cette vie. " Nous sommes tous des laches, s'ecria tout 
 a coup Chapelle ; que 12 ne cessons-nous de murmurer et 
 de vivre f La riviere est a 13 cent pas ; allons nous y 
 jeter.'''' lis applaudissent tous, ils se levent de table, ils 
 s'emb? , assent u pour la derniere fois, et ils prennent (pren- 
 dre) le chemiu de 15 la Seine. Moliere, averti de cette 
 folie, arrive a la hate. 11 II vit (voir) qu'ils etaient peu 
 disposes a 16 entendre la voix de la raison. " Comment ! 
 mes amis, vous formez le projet le plus courageux, et 
 vous ne voulez pas m'enfiaire part ? Croyez-Yous que je 
 meprise 11 moins la vie que vous? II a raison, 18 dit Cha- 
 pelle ; nous lui faisions 19 tort. Vie)is, 20 Moliere, mens te 
 noyer avec nous. — Un moment, reprit Moliere ; Q?est une 
 
 4 Literally, " which had caused to be given to him by B." etc., i. e., 
 "which had led B. to give him," etc. — 5 " Auteuil- banquet ." — 6 Que, 
 "when."— 1 See 552.— 8 See 593.— 9 Vint a, "chanced to."— 10 La tete 
 echauffee par, "excited by." — u See 594. — 12 See 423, 587. — 13 A cent 
 pas, " hundred yards distant.^ — 14 See 300. — 15 Chemin de, "road to." 
 — 16 See 480.— 17 See 542.— ls II a raison, "he is right;" see 574.— 
 19 See 450, e.— 20 See 489. 
 
READING LESSONS. 409 
 
 action trop belle pour que nous en perdions 21 le merite 
 aux yeux du monde. On pourrait dire que nous sommes 
 morts la nuit, 22 apres un long souper, comme des deses- 
 peres, ou comme des gens ivres. Attendons demain ; et 
 au grand jour, 23 bien a jeun, 24 nous viendrons nous Jeter 
 dans la riviere devant tout le monde. — II a raison, iecria 
 encore Chapelle ; oui, messieurs, ne nous noyons que 25 
 demain ; et, en attendant le jour, allons boire le vin qui 
 nous rested II est inutile de 26 dire que, le lendemain, nos 
 sombres philosophes ne songerent plus a 27 mettre en pra- 
 tique la maxime des anciens sur le mepris de la vie.— 
 Roche. 
 
 XII. GIBBON AND VOLTAIRE. 
 
 Gibbon habitait Lausanne en 1776, et travaillait a son 
 grand ouvrage sur la Decadence et la chute de V empire 
 romain. II entra en correspondance avec Yoltaire sans 
 V avoir jamais vu. Voltaire, qui avait peu de gout pour 
 lui, se permit (permettre) de lui decocher quelques traits. 
 L' Anglais, pour se venger,fit (faire) tine satire ou il 
 xfepargna pas les emportements, la malveillance, la jal- 
 ousie et la vanite du patriarch e de Ferney. Celui-ci 
 retorqua par une caricature de Gibbon, a qui il donnait 
 une taille de nain, 1 une tete enorme, un nez camus, etc., 
 et il osa la lui envoy er. Toute correspondance cessa. 
 
 Peu de temps 2 apres, Gibbon dit au 3 docteur Tron- 
 cliin : " Voltaire $?est moque de nioi. 4 On dit qu'il est 
 loin d'etre beau; je veux aller le voirP Tronchin, qui 
 s'amicsait des faiblesses de ces deux grands hommes, se 
 
 21 See 548. — 22 La nuit, "in the night." — ™ Au grand jour, "in broad 
 day." — 2i Bien a jeun, "on an empty stomach." — 25 Ne — que here signi- 
 fies " not— until"— ™ See 482.— 27 See 553. 
 
 XII. 1 Une taille de nain, "a dwarfish stature." — 2 Peu de temps, 
 "a short time."— 3 See 434.—* S'est moque de moi, "has been holding 
 me up to ridicule. " 
 
 s 
 
410 FRENCH GKAMMAE. 
 
 hdta Cannoneer cette visite a Ferney. Voltaire dit a 
 M me- Denis, sa niece, qui tenait sa maison : " Je suis 
 menace de 5 la visite d'un Anglais, qui est fort laid ; re- 
 cevez-le bien, car e'est un homme de merite. Mais je ne 
 veux pas le voir." La-dessus il s'enferma dans son cab- 
 inet. Le lenderaain, Gibbon arriva. M me - Denis \mfit 
 un accueil 6 fort aimable et lui exprima ses regrets de ce 
 que 7 son oncle ne pouvait pas le voir. "Eh bien! $at- 
 tendrai son bon plaisir," repondit Gibbon. II renvoya 
 la voiture qui Yavait amene, et il resta. La nuit venue? 
 on fut bien 9 oblige de lui donner une charnbre. Trois 
 jours se passerent. Le quatrierne, Voltaire impatiente™ 
 ecrivit a Gibbon : " Monsieur, Don Quichotte prenait des 
 auberges pour des chateaux; et vous, 11 vous^miez mon 
 chateau pour une auberge." 
 
 Gibbon partit, apres s'etre informe de toutes les habi- 
 tudes de Voltaire. II revint de grand matin, 12 quelques 
 sernaines apres, et il se glissa dans l'ecurie sans etre 
 apergu. "Mon ami, dit-i\ au cocher, je te promets un 
 bon pourboire si twfais courir 13 dans cette allee le cheval 
 favori de ton maitre." Le cocher ne se \ejlt pas dire 1 * 
 deux fois. II laclia le cheval, qui se mit a 15 trotter dans 
 le jardin. Voltaire Yentendit de sa bibliotheque, et il 
 accourut (accourir) en robe de charnbre et en bonnet 
 de nuit pour Yarreter. II avait alors quatre-vingt-deux 
 ans; 16 il etait d'une maigreur affreuse; il n'avait ni 
 levres, 17 ni dents, ni cheveux. L' Anglais, cache derriere 
 une charmille, put V examiner a son aise. Quand il s'en 
 
 5 "Threatened with" — 6 "Gave him a very cordial reception." — 
 -De ce que, "that." — 8 Venue, "having come." — 9 Bien, " of course." — 
 10 "Out of patience." — " See 158. — 12 De grand matin, "early in the 
 morning." — 13 Si tufais courir, " if you will let — run ;" see 569, b, and 
 526. — 14 Ne se left, etc., literally, "did not cause it to be said twice," 
 i. e., "did not need a second invitation." — 15 See 639. — 16 See 487. — 
 17 See 627. 
 
HEADING. LESSONS. 411 
 
 fat donne a coeur joie, 18 il battit des mains 19 et lui dit : 
 " Enfin, je vous vois, M. de Voltaire ; vous rfetes pas beau 
 non plus." 20 Voltaire, furieux 21 d? avoir ete surpris, ren- 
 tra dans sa bibliotheque et dit a son secretaire Wagniere: 
 " Courez apres cet Anglais et demandez-lm douze sous 
 pour avoir vu la bete." Wagniere atteignit (atteindre) 
 Gibbon pres de la grille et^ sa commission. "Vest 
 juste, ^Gibbon ; voila vingt-quatre sous. Vous direz 22 
 a votre maitre que j'«i paye pour deux seances ; je re- 
 viendrai demain." 
 
 Voltaire comprit (comprendre) qu'il tfavait -p&sjoue 
 le beau role dans cette aventure. " Cet Anglais est plus 
 malm que moi, dit-il ; c'est un homme capable de mejouer 
 quelque mauvais tour. II faut 23 que je fasse ma paix 
 avec lui. Wagniere, allez Vinviter a venir diner demain 
 avec moi." Le lendemain, il Venvoya chercher 2 * dans sa 
 voiture ; il Vattendit a son arrivee et \\x\fit l'accueil 6 le 
 plus gracieux. Gibbon, de son cote, Jut fort aimable et 
 se garda bien 25 de J hire allusion a ce qui s'etait passe la 
 veille. Depuis, nos deux grands homines ne cessdrent de 
 se voir 26 et de se traiter 26 en 27 amis. — Roche. 
 
 XII. VOLTAIRE AND PIRON. 
 
 Ces deux poetes se voyaient 1 qnelquefois au chateau 
 de Livry. Un matin, Piron trouva Voltaire seul au salon, 
 devant la cheminee,nonchalamment etendu dans un grand 
 fauteuil, les pieds poses sur les chenets. II sHnclina 
 quatre ou cinq fois, pour donner a entendre qu'il voulait 
 un peu de place au feu. 
 
 Voltaire jfttf un leger salut, mais ne bougea pas. Alors 
 
 18 S 'en fut, etc., "had indulged himself to his heart's content." — 
 19 "He clapped his hands:'— 20 See 627, a.— 21 See 479.— 22 See 534, 
 b, 353.— 23 See 309.— 24 See 910.— 25 Se garda bien de, "took good 
 care not to."— 26 See 300.— 27 En, "as." 
 
 XIII. 1 Sec 300: "met each other." 
 
412 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 Pirou roule un fauteuil et sefait 2 le plus de place 3 qu'il 
 pent. Voltaire tire sa montre, Piron sa tabatiere ; le 
 premier prend les pincettes, le second prend du tabac; 
 l'un se mouche, l'autre eternue. Voltaire, visiblement 
 contrarie, se met a bditter avec effort; Piron se met a 
 rire. Voltaire tire de sa poche une croute de pain et la 
 mange en la feasant craquer sous ses dents; Piron tire 
 de la sienne un flacon de vin et le boit lentement avec uu 
 admirable glouglou. Pour le coup, 4 M. de Voltaire se 
 fdche. " Monsieur, dit-il d'un air de 5 grand seigneur, 
 ^entends raillerie tout 6 comme un autre; mais votre 
 plaisanterie, si e'en est une, 7 passe les bornes. — Monsieur, 
 e'est si peu une plaisanterie que mon flacon est vide. — 
 Monsieur, reprend Voltaire, je sors 8 d'une maladie qui 
 hi' a laisse un besoin continuel de manger, et je mange. 
 — Mangez, monsieur, mangez, dit Piron ; dest a mer- 
 veille. Pour moi, je sors 9 de Bourgogne, avec un besoin 
 continuel de boire, et je bois." — Roche. 
 
 XIV. ANOTHER— YOLTAIEE AND PIRON. 
 Un autre jour, Voltaire lisait une tragedie, ou il y 
 avait quelques vers imites de Corneille et de Racine. 
 Chaque fois que Piron en reconnaissait (reconnattre) un, 
 ilfaisait une profonde reverence. Voltaire inpatients 
 fsinterrompit pour lui en demander la raison : "Attez 1 
 toujours, monsieur, ne faites pas attention, 2 repondit 
 Piron: ifai l'habitude 3 de scduer les gens de ma con- 
 naissance." — Id. 
 
 2 Sefait, "makes for himself" — 3 Le plus de place, "as much room 
 as." — * Pour le coup, "at this point." — 5 D'un air de, "with the air of 
 a." — 6 Tout comme, etc., "quite as well as." — 7 Si e'en est une, "if it 
 is such." — 8 Je sors, "I am recovering.'''' — 9 Je sors, "I am just from 
 Burgundy" (the wine district). 
 
 XIV. l Allez toujours, "go on." — 2 Ne faites pas attention, "do not 
 mind it." — 3 "I am accustomed to." 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 413 
 
 SECTION SECOND. 
 
 I^ 33 Throughout this section the most difficult irreg- 
 ular verbs alone will stand in italics. The selections 
 will be taken from writers of the current century. 
 
 XV. THE TWO NEIGHBORS. 
 
 Deux hommes etaient voisins, et chacun d'eux avait 
 une femme et plusieurs petits enfants, et son seul travail 
 [etait] pour les /aire vivre. 1 
 
 Et l'un de ces deux hommes s'inquietait en lui-meme, 
 disant: Si je meurs, ou que 2 je tombe malade, que de- 
 viendront 3 ma femme et mes enfants ? 
 
 Et cette pensee ne le quittait point, et elle rongeait 
 son goeur comme un ver ronge le fruit ou il est cache. 
 
 Or, bien que la meme pensee fdt venue* egalement a 
 l'autre pere, ilr ne s'y etait point arrete : car, disait-i], 
 Dieu, qui connait toutes ses creatures et qui veille sur 
 elles, veillera aussi sur moi, et sur ma femme et sur mes 
 enfants. 
 
 Et celui-ci vivait tranquille, tandis que le premier ne 
 goutait pas un instant de repos ni de joie interieurement. 
 
 Un jour qu'il travaillait aux champs, triste et abattu 
 a, cause de sa crainte, il vit quelques oiseaux entrer dans 
 un buisson, en sortir, et puis bientot y revenir encore. 
 
 Et s'etant approche il vit deux nids poses cote a cote, 
 et dans chacun plusieurs petits nouvellement eclos et en- 
 core sans plumes. 
 
 Et quand il fut retourne a son travail, de temps en 
 temps il levait les yeux et regardait ces oiseaux qui al- 
 laient et venaient portant la nourriture a leurs petits. 
 
 Or, voila qu'au moment ou l'une des meres rentrait 
 avec sa becquee un vautour la saisit, l'enleve, et la pauvre 
 
 XY. lu To maintain them:'— 2 See 549.— 3 "What will become o/," 
 188. — 4 Fut venue, "had come;" see 548, Rem., 296. 
 
414 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 mere, se debattant vivement dans sa serre, jetait des cris 
 percants. A cette vue, l'homme qui travaillait sentit son 
 ame plus troublee qu'auparavant ; car, pensait-il, la mort 
 de la mere, c'est la mort des enfants. 
 
 Les miens 9 n'ont que moi non plus : que deviendront- 
 ils si je leur manque? Et tout le jour il fut sombre et 
 triste, et la nuit il ne dormit point. 
 
 Le lendemain, de retour aux champs, il se dit: Je 
 veux voir les petits de cette pauvre mere ; plusieurs sans 
 doute ont peri. Et il s'achemina vers le buisson. 
 
 Et regardant, il vit les petits bien portants ; pas un 5 
 ne semblait avoir pati. 
 
 Et ceci l'ayant etonne, il se cacha pour observer ce qui 
 se passerait. 
 
 Et apres un peu de temps il entendit un leger c*i, et 
 il aperput la seconde mere rapportant en hate la nourri- 
 ture qu'elle avait recueillie, et elle la distribua a tous les 
 petits indistinctement, et il y en eut 6 pour tous, et les or- 
 phelins ne furent point delaisses dans leur misere. 
 
 Et le pere, qui s'etait defie de la Providence, raconta 
 le soir 8 a l'autre pere ce qu'il avait vu. 
 
 Et celui-ci lui dit: Pourquoi s'in quieter? Jamais 
 Dieu n'abandonne les siens. 9 Son amour a des secrets 
 que nous ne connaissons point. Croyons, esperons, ai- 
 mons, et poursuivons notre route en paix. Si je meurs 
 avant vous, vous serez le pere de mes enfants ; si vous 
 mourez avant moi je serai le pere des votres. Et si, l'un 
 et l'autre, nous mourons 1 avant qu'ils soient en age de 
 pourvoir eux-memes a leurs necessites, ils auront pour 
 pere le pere qui est dans les cieux. — Lamennais. 
 
 5 See 220.— 6 " There was some: 1 — 7 See 500, b.— 6 "In the even- 
 ing."— 9 See 495. 
 
READING LESSONS. . 415 
 
 XVI. THE EXILE. 
 
 II s'm allait errant sur la terre. Que 1 Dieu guide le 
 pauvre exile ! 
 
 J'ai passe a travers les peuples, et ils m'ont regarde, 
 et je les ai regardes, et nous ne nous sommes point re- 
 connus. L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 Lorsque je voyais, au declin du jour, s'elever du creux 
 d'un vallon la fumee de quelque chaumiere, je me 4 disais: 
 Heureux celui qui retrouve le soir 5 le foyer domestique, 
 et s'y assied au milieu des siens ! 2 L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 Oil vont ces nuages que 6 chasse la tempete ? Elle me 
 chasse comme eux, et qu'importe oi\ ? 3 L'exile partout 
 est seul. 
 
 Ces arbres sont beaux, ces fleurs sont belles ; mais ce 
 ne sont point les fleurs ni les arbres de mon pays ; ils ne 
 me disent rien. L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 Ce ruisseau coule mollement dans la plaine ; mais son 
 murmure n'est pas celui 6 qu'entendit mon enfance : il ne 
 rappelle a mon ame aucun souvenir. L'exile partout est 
 seul. '' 
 
 Ces chants sont doux, mais les tristesses et les joies 
 qu'ils reveillent ne sont ni mes tristesses ni mes joies. 
 L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 On m'a demande : Pourquoi pleurez-vous ? Et quand 
 je l'ai dit, nul n'a pleure, parce qu'on ne me comprenait 
 point. L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 J'ai vu des vieillards entoures d'enfants comme l'oli- 
 vier de ses rejetons; mais aucun de ces vieillards ne 
 m'appelait son fils, aucun de ces enfants ne m'appelait 
 son frere. L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 J'ai vu des 7 jeunes filles sourire, d'un sourire aussi pur 
 
 • 
 
 XVI. 1 See 426.— 2 See 495.— 3 "What matters it whither?"— 
 * "To myself." — 5 "At eventide." — 6 Que is object, tempete subject. — 
 7 See 88, a. 
 
416 - FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 que la brise du matin, a, celui que leur amour s'etait 
 choisi pour epoux ; mais pas une ne m'a souri. L'exile 
 partout est seul. 
 
 J'ai vu des 7 jeunes hommes, poitrine contre poitrine, 
 tfetreindre comme s'ils avaient voulu de deux vies ne 
 faire qu'une vie; mais pas un ne m'a serre la main. 
 L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 II n'y a d'amis, d'epouses, de peres et de freres que 
 dans la patrie. L'exile partout est seul. 
 
 Pauvre exile ! cesse de geinir, tous sont bannis comme 
 toi ; tous voient passer et s'evanouir peres, freres, epouses, 
 amis. La patrie n'est point ici-bas ; l'homme vainement 
 l'y cherche ; ce qu'il prend pour elle n'est que un gite 
 d'une nuit. 
 
 II s'en va errant sur la terre. Que Dieu guide le 
 pauvre exile ! — LAMEisrisrAis. 
 
 XVII. THE POETRY OF LAMAETINE CRITICISED BY 
 DIDOT 
 
 Un matin, je cachai sous mon habit le petit manuscrit 
 relie en carton vert ; x il contenait les poesies, ma der- 
 niere esperance. Je m'acheminai, 2 en hesitant 3 et en 
 chancelant 3 souvent dans mon dessein, vers la maison 
 d'un celebre editeur, dont 4 le nom est associe a la gloire 
 des lettres et de 5 la librairie francaise : M. Didot. Ce 
 nom m'attira le premier, parce que, independamment de 
 sa celebrite comme editeur, 6 M. Didot etait de plus 7 un 
 ecrivain assez considere alors. II avait publie ses pro- 
 pres vers avec tout le luxe et tout le retentissement d'un 
 poete qui possede les voix de sa propre renommee. Ar- 
 rive rue Jacob, 8 a la porte de M. Didot, porte tapissee 
 
 XVII. l See 473, c— a See 297, a*— 3 The preposition " en" is here 
 superfluous in English; see 515. — 4 See 172. — 5 See 623.— 6 "As a 
 publisher." — 7 De plus, "besides," "moreover." — 8 "Having arrived 
 at J. Street" 
 
READING LESSONS. 417 
 
 de gloires, il me fallut 9 un redoublement d' efforts sur 
 moi pour franchir le seuil, un autre pour monter l'esca- 
 lier, un autre enfin plus violent^ncore pour sonner a la 
 porte de son cabinet. Mais je voyais derriere moi le 
 visage adore 10 de Julie qui m'encourageait, et sa main 
 qui me poussait. J'osai tout. 
 
 M. Didot, homme 11 d'un age mur, d'une figure precise 
 et commerciale, d'une parole nette 12 et breve 13 comme 
 celle 14 d'un homme qui salt le prix des minutes, me recut 
 avec politesse. II me demanda ce que j'avais a lui dire. 
 Je balbutiai assez longtemps. Je m'embarrassai dans 
 ces contours de phrases anibigues, 15 ou se cache une 
 pensee qui veut 16 et qui ne veut pas aboutir au fait. Je 
 croyais gagner du courage en 17 gagnant du temps. A 
 la fin 18 je deboutonnai mon habit. J'en 19 tirai le petit 
 volume. Je le presentai humblement, 20 d'une main trem- 
 blante, 21 a M. Didot. Je lui dis qui j'avais ecrit ces vers, 
 que je desirais lesfaire 22 imprimer pour m'attirer sinon 
 la gloire, dont je n'avais pas la ridicule illusion, au moins 
 l'attention et la bienveillance des hommes puissants de 23 
 la litterature ; que ma pauvrete ne me permettait pas de 
 faire 2i les frais cle cette impression; que je venais lui 
 soumettre mon 03uvre et lui demander de la publier, si, 
 apres l'avoir parcourue, il la jugeait digne de quelque 
 indulgence ou de quelque faveur des esprits cultives. 
 M. Didot sourit avec une ironie melee de bonte, hocha la 
 tete,^n^ le manuscrit entre deux doigts habitues afrois- 
 ser dedaigneusement le papier, posa mes vers sur la ta- 
 
 9 ll I was compelled to make ;" lit., "there was necessary to ??*e," etc. 
 — 10 See 473, a.— 11 See 446.— 12 See 117.— 13 See 118.— 14 See 199, 
 a. — 15 See 65, a. — 16 Qui veut, etc., "which desires and. yet dreads to 
 come to the point" — l7 See 515. — 18 "At last" — 19 En, "from it." — 
 20 U, "ivith."— 21 See 473, /;.— 22 See 569, b, "to have them printed." 
 — 23 De, "in." — 24 "To incur the expense." 
 
 S2 
 
418 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 ble, et m'ajourna a huit jours pour me donner une reponse 
 sur l'objet de ma visite. Je sortis. 
 
 Ces huit jours me pa^irent huit siecles. Mon avenir, 
 ma fortune, ma renomrnee, la consolation ou le desespoir 
 de ma pauvre mere, enfin, ma vie et ma mort etaient 
 dans les mains de M. Didot. Tantot je me figurais qu'il 
 lisait ces vers avec la meme ivresse qui me les avait 
 dictes 25 sur les montagnes ou au bord des torrents de 
 mon pays ; 26 qu'il y retrouvait la rosee de mon ame, les 
 larmes de mes yeux, le sang de mes jeunes veines ; 26 qu'ii 
 reunissait les hommes de lettres ses amis pour entendre 
 ces vers ; que 26 j'entendais moi-meme, du fond de mon 
 alcove, le bruit de leurs applaudissements. 
 
 Tantot je rougissais en moi-meme 27 d'avoir livre aux 
 regards d'un inconnu une oeuvre si indigne de la lumiere ; 
 27 d' avoir devoile ma faiblesse et ma nudite pour un vain 
 espoir de succes qui se changerait en humiliation sur 
 mon front au lieu de se convertir en joie et en or entre 
 mes mains. Cependant l'esperance, aussi obstinee que 
 mon indigence, reprenait le dessus 28 dans mes reves, et 
 me conduisait d'heure en heure 29 jusqu'a, l'heure assignee 
 par M. Didot. 
 
 Le cceur 30 me manqua en 17 montant, le huitieme jour, 
 son escalier. Je restai longtemps debout 31 sur le palier 
 de la porte, sans oser sonner. Quelqu'un sortit. La 
 porte restait ouverte. II fallut bien entrer. Le visage 
 de M. Didot etait inexpressif et ambigu comme l'ora- 
 cle. 32 II me jit asseoir, et, cherchant mon volume enfoui 
 sous plusieurs piles de papier : " J'ai lu vos vers, mon- 
 
 25 Dictes agrees with "les," and remotely with "vers;" see 520. — 
 26 Qu 1 depends on il je me figurais" above. — ^ D 1 avoir, "at having." — 
 28 "Gained the ascendency." — 29 "From hour to hour." — 30 "My heart 
 failed me." — 31 There is no single term in French for "to stand;" 
 "etre," or " rester debout," is employed as the equivalent. — 32 We say 
 " as an oracle." 
 
READING LESSONS. 419 
 
 sieur, me dit-il, ils ne sont pas sans talent, mais ils sont 
 sans etude. Ils ne ressemblent a 33 rien de ce qui est 
 recu et recherche dans nos poetes. On ne sait ou vous 
 avez pris la langue, les idees, les images de la poesie. 
 Elle 34 ne se classe dans aucun genre defini. C'est dom- 
 mage, il y a de l'harmonie. Renoncez a 33 ces nouveautes 
 qui depayseraient le genie fran9ais. JLisez nos maitres, 
 Delille, Parny, Michaud, Raynouard, Luce de Lancival, 
 Fontanes; voila des poetes cheris du public. Ressem- 
 blez a 33 quelqu'un, si vous voidez qu'on 35 vous reconnaisse 
 et qu'on vous Use ! Je vous donnerais un mauvais con- 
 seil en vous engageant a publier ce volume, et je vous 
 rendrais mauvais service en le publiant a mes frais." En 
 me parlant ainsi, il se leva et me rendit le manuscrit. Je 
 ne cherchai point a contester avec la destinee ; elle par- 
 lait pour moi par la bouche de cet oracle. Je remis le 
 volume sous mon habit. Je remerciai M. Didot. Je 
 m'excusai du temps que je lui 36 avais fait perdre, e^je 
 descendis, les 37 jambes brisees et les yeux humides, les 
 marches de l'escalier. 
 
 Ah ! si M. Didot, homme bon, sensible, patron des let- 
 tres, avait^9i^ lire au fond de mon cceur et comprendre 
 que ce n'etait ni la fortune ni la gloire que 38 venait men- 
 dier, son 37 ceuvre a la main, ce jeune inconnu, mais que 
 c'etait la vie que je lui demandais, je suis convaincu 
 qu'il aurait imprime le volume. Le ciel, au moins, lui 
 en aurait rendu le prix ! — Lamaetine. 
 
 33 See 561. — 34 Elle, i. e., la poesie. — 35 "If you wish to be recog- 
 nized." — 36 See 563. — 37 Understand avec. — 38 Inconnu is the subject 
 of venait mendicr. 
 
420 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 XVIII. A DREAM. 
 
 Je t'ai raconte bien des 1 fois un reve que je fais 2 sou- 
 vent et qui 3 m'a toujours laisse, apres le sommeil, une im- 
 pression de bonheur et de melancolie. Au commence- 
 ment de ce reve, je me vois assis sur une rive deserte, et 
 une barque, pleine d'amis qui chantent des airs delicieux, 
 vient a moi sur le fleuve rapide. lis m'appellent, ils me 
 tendent les bras, et je m'elance avec eux dans la barque, 
 lis me disent : " Nous allons a . . . (ils nomment un pays 
 inconnu), hatons-nous d'y arriver." On laisse les instru- 
 ments, on interrompt les chants. Chacun prend la rame. 
 Nous abordons ... a quelle rive encbantee ? II me se- 
 rait impossible de la decrire ; mais je l'ai vue vingt fois, 
 je la connais; elle doit exister quelque part sur la terre 
 ou dans quelqu'une de ces planetes dont tu aimes a con- 
 templer la pale lumiere dans les bois au coucher de la 
 lune. Nous sautons a terre, nous nous elancons, en 
 courant et en cbantant, a travers les buissons embaumes. 
 Mais alors tout disparait, et je m'eveille. J'ai recom- 
 mence souvent ce beau reve, et je n'ai jamais pu le mener 
 plus loin. 
 
 Ce qu'il y a d'etrange, c'est que ces amis, qui me con- 
 viennent et qui m'entrainent, je ne les ai jamais vus dans 
 la vie reelle. Quand je m'eveille, mon imagination ne 
 se 4 les represente plus. J'oublie leurs traits, leurs noms, 
 leur nombre et leur age. Je sais confusement qu'ils sont 
 beaux et jeunes ; hommes 5 et femmes sont couronnes 6 de 
 rleurs, et leurs cheveux flottent sur leurs epaules. La 
 barque est grande, et elle est pleine. Ils ne sont pas 
 divises par couples, ils vo?it pele-mele se choisir, 7 et sem- 
 blent s'aimer 7 tous egalement, mais d'un amour tout 
 
 XVIII. 2 See 450, c; Exc. — 2 "A dream which I have" — 3 Me is 
 the indirect objective, here equivalent to en moi, "on me." — 4 Se, "to 
 itself."—* See 442.— 6 See 467.— 7 See 300. 
 
READING LESSORS. 421 
 
 divin. Leurs chants et leurs voix ne sont pas de ce 
 monde. Chaque fois que je fais 2 ce reve, je retrouve 
 aussitot la memoire des reves precedents ou je les ai 
 vus ; mais elle n'est distincte que dans ce moment-la ; le 
 re veil la trouble et 1' efface. 
 
 Lorsque la barque parait sur l'eau,je ne songe a 8 rien. 
 Je ne l'attends pas, je suis triste; et'une des occupa- 
 tions ou elle me surprend le plus souvent c'est de 9 laver 
 mes pieds dans la premiere onde du rivage. Mais cette 
 occupation est toujours inutile. Aussitot que je/azs 10 
 un pas sur la greve, je m'enfonce dans une fange nou- 
 velle, et j'eprouve un sentiment de detresse puerile. 
 Alors la barque parait au loin; j'entends vaguement les 
 chants. Puis ils se rapprochent, et je reconndis ces voix 
 qui me sont si cheres. Quelquefois, apres le re veil, je 
 conserve le souvenir de quelques lambeaux des vers 
 qu'ils chantent ; mais ce sont des phrases bizarres et qui 
 ne presentent plus aucun sens a l'esprit eveille. II y 
 aurait peut-etre moyen, en les commentant, d'em're le 
 poeme le plus fantastique que le siecle ait encore produit. 
 Mais je m'en garderai bien, car je serais desespere de 
 composer sur mon reve, et de changer ou d'ajouter 
 quelque chose au vague souvenir qu'il me laisse. Je 
 brule de savoir s'il y a dans les songes quelque sens 
 prophetique, quelque revelation de l'avenir, soit pour 
 cette vie, soit pour P autre. Je ne voudrais pourtant pas 
 qu'on xviapprit ce qui en est, et qu'on m'otat le plaisir 
 de chercher. — George Sand. 
 
 XIX. PROCLAMATION TO THE ARMY. 
 
 {Mai, 1796.) 
 Soldats, vous vous etes precipites comme un torrent 
 du haut de l'Apennin ; vous avez culbute, disperse tout 
 
 8 Songer, like penser, is followed by the preposition a. — 9 Cest de 
 laver, "is that of washing." — 10 Faire un pas, "to take a step.' 1 '' 
 
422 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 ce qui s'opposait a votre marche. Le Piemont, delivre 
 de la tyrannie des Autrichiens, s'est livre a ses senti- 
 ments naturels de paix et d'amitie pour la France. Mi- 
 lan est a vous, et le pavilion republicain flotte dans toute 
 la Lombardie. Les dues de Parme et de Modene ne 
 doivent leur existence politique qu'a votre generosite. 
 L'armee qui vous mena9ait avec orgueil ne trouve plus 
 de barriere qui la rassure contrje votre courage ; le Po, 
 le Tesin, l'Adda, n'ont pu vous arreter un seul jour, ces 
 boulevards tant vantes de l'ltalie ont ete insuffisants; 
 vous les avez francbis aussi bien que l'Apennin. Tant 
 de succes ont porte la joie dans le sein de la patrie; vos 
 representants ont ordonne une fete dediee a vos victoires, 
 celebree dans toutes les communes de la Republique. 
 La vos peres, vos meres, vos epouses, vos soeurs se re- 
 jouissent de vos succes, et se vantent avec orgueil de 
 vous appartenir. Oui, soldats, vous avez beaucoup/a^ 
 .... Mais ne vous reste-t-il done rien a faire ? . . . . 
 Dira-t-on de nous que nous avons su vabicre, mais que 
 nous n'avons pas su jDrofiter de la victoire ? La posterite 
 vous reprochera-t-elle d'avoir trouve Capoue dans la 
 Lombardie ! Mais je vous vois deja courir aux armes . . . 
 Eh bien! partons! Nous avons encore des marches 
 forcees hfaire^ des ennemis a soumettre, des lauriers a 
 cueillir, des injures a venger . . . Yos victoires feront 
 epoque dans la posterite : vous avez la gloire immortelle 
 de changer la face de la plus belle partie de l'Europe. 
 Le peuple francais, libre, respecte du monde entier, don- 
 nera a l'Europe une paix glorieuse qui l'indemnisera des 
 sacrifices de toute espece qu'il a fails depuis six ans. 
 Vous rentrerez alors dans vos foyers, et vos concitoyens 
 diront en vous montrant : u il etait de Varmee d^ItalieV 
 
 Napoleon Bonapaete. 
 
READING LESSONS. 423 
 
 XX. PROCLAMATION TO THE ARMY ON THE EVE OF 
 THE BATTLE OF AUSTERLITZ. 
 
 (Decembre, 1805.) 
 
 Sold ats, — L'armee russe se presente devant vous pour 
 venger l'armee autrichienne d'Ulm. Ce sont ces niemes 
 bataillons que vous avez battus a Hollabrtinn, et que de- 
 puis vous avez constamment poursuivis jusqu'ici. 
 
 Les positions que nous occupons sont formidables ; 
 et, pendant qu'ils marcheront pour tourner ma droite, 
 ils me presenteront le flanc. 
 
 Soldats, je dirigerai moi-meme vos bataillons. Je me 
 tiendrai loin du feu si, avec votre bravoure accoutumee, 
 vous portez le desordre et la confusion dans les rangs 
 ennemis. Mais si la victoire etait un moment incertaine, 
 vous verriez votre empereur s'exposer aux premiers 
 coups; car la victoire ne saurait hesiter, dans cette 
 journee surtout ou il s'agit de l'honneur de l'infanterie 
 francaise, qui importe tant a l'honneur de toute la nation. 
 
 Que,* sous pretexte d'emmener les blesses, on ne de- 
 garnisse pas les rangs, et que chacun soit bien penetre 
 de cette pensee, q<QL\\faut vaincre ces stipendies de l'An- 
 gleterre, qui sont animes d'une si grande haine contre 
 notre nation. 
 
 Cette victoire finira la campagne, et nous pourrons 
 reprendre nos quartiers d'hiver, oi\ nous serous joints par 
 les nouvelles armees qui se forment en France, et alors 
 la paix que je feral sera digne de mon peuple, de vous 
 et de moi. — Napoleon I er - 
 
 * Que belongs to the principal sentence {on we, etc.), from which 
 it is separated by the subordinate clause (sous pretexte, etc.) ; read, 
 " let not your ranks be reduced under the pretense of carrying off," etc.; 
 see 426. 
 
424 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 SECTION THIRD. 
 
 The remaining selections will illustrate the more 
 idiomatic style of composition ; the notes, therefore, ex- 
 plaining the most difficult passages, will be quite full. 
 The irregular verbs will not be italicized. 
 
 .XXL A SERIO-COMIC ADVENTURE. 
 
 Vos lettres sont rares, chere cousine ; vous faites bien, 
 je m'y accoutumerais, 1 et je ne pourrais plus m'en pas- 
 ser. 2 Tout de bon, 3 je suis en colere ; vos douceurs ne 
 m'apaisent point. Comment, cousine, depuis trois ans, 
 voila deux fois que vous m'ecrivez ! 4 En verite, mam'- 
 selle Sophie. . . . Mais quoi! si je vous querelle, vous ne 
 m'ecrirez plus du tout. Je vous pardonne done, crainte 
 de pis. 5 
 
 Oui, surement, je vous conterai mes aventures, bonnes 
 et mauvaises, tristes et gaies, car il m'en arrive des unes 
 et des autres ; 6 il y a plaisir a les entendre, 7 et plus en- 
 core, je m'imagine, a vous les conter ; e'est une expe- 
 rience que nous ferons au coin du feu quelque jour : j'en 
 ai pour tout un hiver. 8 J'ai de quoi 9 vous amuser, et 
 par consequent vous plaire, sans vanite, tout ce temps- 
 la; de quoi 9 vous attendrir, vous faire rire, vous faire 
 peur, 10 vous faire dormir. . . . Voici, en attendant, 11 un 
 petit echantillon de mon histoire ; mais e'est du noir, 12 
 prenez-y garde. 13 ~Ne lisez pas cela en vous couchant, 
 
 XXI. * " I ?night accustom myself to it. 1 " — 2 " And I should not be 
 able to dispense with them the better for that." — 3 "But jesting aside." 
 — * "You have written me twice in three years.' 1 ' 1 — 5 "For fear of some- 
 thing worse." — 6 "For I meet with both." — 7 " In hearing them." — 8 "I 
 have enough for a whole winter." — 9 Avoir de quoi, "to have the means." 
 — 10 " Of frightening you." — ll "In the mean time." — 12 "It is a dis* 
 mal one." — 13 "So take care." 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 425 
 
 vous en reveriez, et pour rien au monde jg ne voudrais 
 vous avoir donne le cauchemar. 
 
 Un jour je voyageais en Calabre. C'est un pays de 
 mechantes gens, qui, je crois, n'aiment personne, et en 
 veulent surtout aux 14 Fran9ais. De vous dire pourquoi, 
 cela sera long; suffit 15 qu'ils nous haissent a mort, et 
 qu'on passe fort mal son temps 16 lorsqu'on tombe entre 
 leurs mains. J'avais pour compagnon un jeune homme. 
 
 Dans ces montagnes les chemins sont des precipices, 
 nos chevaux marchaient avec beaucoup de peine ; mon 
 camarade allant devant, un sentier qui lui parut plus 
 practicable et plus court nous egara. Ce fiit ma faute ; 
 devais-je me fier a 17 une tete de vingt ans ? Nous cher- 
 chames, tant qu'il fit jour, 18 notre chemin a travers ces. 
 bois ; mais, plus 19 nous cherchions, plus 19 nous nous per- 
 dions, et il etait nuit noire quand nous arrivames pres 
 d'une maison fort noire. Nous y entrames, non sans 
 soupcon ; mais comment faire ? 20 La nous trouvons 
 toute une famille de charbonniers a table, ou du premier 
 mot on nous invita. Mon jeune homme ne se fit pas 
 prier : 21 nous voila 22 mangeant et buvant, lui du moins, 
 car pour moi 23 j'examinais le lieu et la mine de nos 
 notes. Nos hotes avaient bien mine 24 de charbonniers ; 
 mais la maison, vous l'eussiez prise pour un arsenal. Ce 
 n'etaient que 25 fusils, pistolets, sabres, couteaux, coutelas. 
 Tout me deplut, et je vis bien que je deplaisais aussi. 
 Mon camarade au contraire, il etait de la famille ; 26 il 
 riait, il causait avec eux ; et par une imprudence que 
 j'aurais du prevoir 27 (mais quoi ! s'il etait ecrit !) il dit 
 
 14 En vouloir a,' "to hold a grudge against ;" see 571. — 15 II is here 
 omitted, il suffit. — 16 "One gets on very uncomfortably.'" — 17 "Should 
 I have trusted to." — 18 "As long as daylight lasted." — 19 See 455. — 
 20 " What could we do?"— 21 " Did not wait to le asked."—' 2 " There 
 we were.'''' — 23 "For my part." — 24 " Evidently looked as if they icere." 
 — 25 "Nothing was to be seen but." — 26 "He was at home." — 2 ' "Which 
 I might have foreseen." 
 
426 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 d'abord d'oi\ nous sommes, oil nous allions, que nous 
 etions Fran9ais, imaginez un peu ! chez nos plus raor- 
 tels eunemis, seuls, egares, si loin de tout secours hu- 
 main! et puis, pour ne rien omettre de ce qui pouvait 
 nous perdre, il fit le riche, 28 promit a ces gens, pour la 
 depense et pour nos guides le lendemain, ce qu'ils vou- 
 lurent. Enfiu, il parla de sa valise, priant fort qu'on en 
 eu.t grand soin, 29 qu'on la mit au chevet de son lit ; il 
 ne voulait point, disait-il, d'autre traversin. Ah ! jeu- 
 nesse ! jeunesse ! que 30 votre age est a plaindre ! Cou- 
 sine, on crut que nous portions les diamants de la cou- 
 ronne. . . . 
 
 Le souper fini, on nous laisse ; nos botes coucbaient 
 en bas, nous dans une cbambre haute ou nous avions 
 mange; une soupente elevee de sept a buit pieds, ou 
 Ton montait par une ecbelle, c'etait la le coucher qui 
 nous attendait, espece de nid dans lequel on s'introduisait 
 en rampant sous des solives chargees de provisions pour 
 toute l'annee. Mon camarade y grimpa seul, et se coucha 
 tout endormi la tete sur sa precieuse valise. Moi, de- 
 termine a veiller, je fis bon feu et m'assis aupres. La 
 nuit s'etait deja passee presque entiere assez tranquille- 
 ment, et je commencais a m'assurer, quand, sur l'heure 
 ou il me semblait que le jour ne pouvait etre loin, j'en- 
 tendis au-dessous de moi notre bote et sa femme parler 
 et se disputer ; et, pretant l'oreille 31 par la cheminee, qui 
 communiquait avec celle d'en bas, 32 je distinguai par- 
 faitement ces propres mots du mari: "Eh bien! enfin, 
 voyons, faut-il les tuer tous deux ?" A quoi la femme 
 repondit : " Oui," et je n'entendis plus rien. Que vous 
 dirai-je ? je restai respirant a peine, tout mon corps froid 
 
 23 u He set himself up for a man of wealth" — 29 " Requesting that 
 great care should be taken of it." — 30 Que, in sentences expressive of 
 wonder or surprise, signifies "how." — 3l "Prefer l'oreille, "to lis- 
 ten." — 32 "With the one down stairs." 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 427 
 
 eomme un marbre; a me voir, 33 vous n'eussiez su si 
 j'etais mort ou vivant. Dieu ! quand j'y pense encore ! 
 .... Nous deux presque sans armes, contre eux douze 
 ou quinze qui en avaient tant. Et mon camarade mort 
 de sommeil et de fatigue ! L'appeler, faire du bruit, je 
 n'osais ; m'echapper tout seul, je ne pouvais ; la fenetre 
 n'etait guere haute, mais en bas deux gros dogues hur- 
 lant comme des loups .... En quelle peine je me trou- 
 vais, imaginez-le, si vous pouvez. Au bout d'un quart 
 d'heure, qui fut long, j'entends sur Fescalier quelqu'un, 
 et par les fentes de la porte je vis le pere, sa lampe dans 
 une main, dans l'autre un de ses grands couteaux. II 
 montait, sa femme apres lui; moi derriere la porte: il 
 ouvrit; mais, avant d'entrer, il posa la lampe, que sa 
 femme vint prendre ; puis il entre pieds nus, 34 et elle, de 
 dehors, lui disait a voix basse, masquant avec ses doigts 
 le trop de lumiere de la lampe : " Doucement, va douce- 
 ment." Quand il fut a l'echelle, il monte, son couteau 
 entre les dents, et venu 35 a la hauteur du lit, ce pauvre 
 jeune homme etendu, offrant sa gorge decouverte, d'une 
 main il prend son couteau, et de l'autre . . . Ah ! cousine 
 . . . il saisit un jambon qui pendait au plancher, en coupe 
 une tranche, et se retire comme il etait venu. La porte 
 se referme, la lampe s'en va, et je reste seul a mes re- 
 flexions. 
 
 Des que le jour parut, toute la famille, a grand bruit, 
 vient nous eveiller, comme nous l'avions recommande. 
 On apporte a manger: 36 on sert 37 un dejeuner fort pro- 
 pre, fort bon, je vous assure. Deux chapons en faisaient 
 partie, dont il fallait, dit notre hotesse, emporter l'un et 
 manger l'autre. En les voyant, je compris enfin le sens 
 de ces terribles mots : " Faut-il les tuer tous deux ?" Et 
 
 33 Literally, " to see wie," i. e., "if you had seen me" — 3 * See 469. — 
 35 Venu, "having come." — 36 Literally, "they bring on to eat" i.e., 
 "food is brought on." — 37 Sert comes from servir. 
 
428 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 je vous crois 38 assez de penetration pour deviner a pre- 
 sent ce que cela signifiait. — Coueiee. 
 
 XXII. "POURBOIRES" ON THE RHINE. 
 
 Le plaisir de voir toutes ces choses belles ou curieuses, 
 musees, eglises, hotels de ville, est tempere, il faut le 
 dire, par la grave importunite du pourboire. 1 Sur les 
 bords du Rhin, comme d'ailleurs dans toutes les contrees 
 tres visitees, le pourboire est un moustique fort importun, 
 lequel revient, a chaque instant et a tout propos, piquer 
 non votre peau, mais votre bourse. Or, la bourse du 
 voyageur, cette bourse precieuse contient tout pour lui, 
 puisque la sainte hospitalite n'est plus la pour le recevoir 
 au seuil des niaisons, avec son doux sourire et sa cor- 
 dialite auguste. Voici a quel degre de puissance les in- 
 telligents naturels de ce pays ont eleve le pourboire. 
 J'expose les faits, je n'exagere rien. 
 
 Vous entrez dans un lieu quelconque ; a la porte de la 
 ville, un estafier s'informe de l'hotel ou vous comptez 
 descendre, vous demande votre passe-port, le prend et le 
 garde. La voiture s'arrete dans la cour de la poste ; le 
 conducteur, qui ne vous a pas adresse un regard pendant 
 toute la route, se presente, vous ouvre la portiere d'un 
 air beat. Pourboire. 
 
 Un moment apres, le postilion arrive a son tour, at- 
 tendu que cela lui est defendu par les reglements de po- 
 lice, et vous adresse une harangue, charabia qui veut 
 dire — pourboire. 
 
 On debache ; un grand drole prend sur la voiture et 
 
 38 Literally, "I suppose to you enough" etc., i. e., " I give you credit 
 for enough,'''' etc. 
 
 XXII. l Pourboire — a term not yet naturalized in English ; liter- 
 ally, " drink-money'' 1 — a gratuity claimed for service rendered in ad- 
 dition to the legal charge. Italian, " buona mano ;" German, "Tiink- 
 geld;^ Spanish, " propina ;" Russian, "na vodku ;" Persian, "bakh- 
 shish" (give), etc. 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 429 
 
 depose a terre votre valise et votre sac de nuit. Pour- 
 boire. 
 
 Un autre drole met le bagage sur une brouette, vous 
 demande a quel hotel vous allez, et se met a courir de- 
 van t vous poussant sa brouette. Arrives a l'hotel, l'hote 
 surgit et entaine avec vous ce petit dialogue, qu'on de- 
 vrait ecrire, dans toutes les langues, sur la porte de toutes 
 les auberges : 
 
 — Bonjour, monsieur. 
 
 — Monsieur, je voudrais une chambre. 
 
 — C'est fort bien, monsieur. 
 
 — Conduisez monsieur au numero 4. 
 
 — Monsieur, je voudrais diner. 
 
 — Tout de suite, monsieur, etc., etc. 
 
 Vous montez au numero 4. Votre bagage y est deja. 
 Un homme apparait ; c'est celui qui Fa brouette a l'hotel. 
 Pourboire. 
 
 Un second arrive ; que veut-il ? C'est lui qui a ap- 
 porte vos effets dans la chambre. Vous lui dites : C'est 
 bon, je vous donnerai en partant comme aux autres do- 
 mestiques. 
 
 — Monsieur, repond l'homme, je n'appartiens pas a 
 l'hotel. Pourboire. 
 
 Vous sortez. Une eglise se presente, une belle eglise. 
 II faut y entrer. Vous tournez alentour, vous regardez, 
 vous cherchez. Les portes sont fermees. Les pretres 
 devraient tenir les portes ouvertes, mais les bedeaux les 
 ferment pour gagner trente sous. Cependant une vieille 
 femme a vu votre embarras ; elle vient a vous, et vous 
 designe une sonnette a cote d'un petit guichet. Vous 
 comprenez, vous sonnez, le guichet s'ouvre, le bedeau se 
 montre ; vous demandez a voir l'eglise, le bedeau prend 
 un trousseau de clefs et se dirige vers le portail. Au 
 moment ou vous allez entrer dans l'eglise, vous vous 
 sentez tirer par la manche : c'est l'obligeante vieille que 
 
430 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 vous avez oubliee, ingrat, et qui vous a snivi. Pour- 
 boire. 
 
 Vous voila dans l'eglise ; vous contemplez, vous ad- 
 mirez, vous vous recriez. 
 
 — Pourquoi ce rideau vert sur ce tableau ? 
 
 — Parce que c'est le plus beau de l'eglise, dit le be- 
 deau. 
 
 — Bon, reprenez-vous, ici on cache les beaux tableaux ; 
 ailleurs on les montrerait. De qui est ce tableau ? 
 
 — De Rubens. 
 
 — Je voudrais le voir. 
 
 Le bedeau vous quitte et revient quelques moments 
 apres avec un individu fort grave et fort triste. C'est 
 le custode. Ce brave homme presse un ressort, le rideau 
 s'ouvre, vous voyez le tableau. »Le tableau vu, le rideau 
 se referme, et le custode vous fait un salut significatif. 
 Pourboire. 
 
 En continuant votre promenade dans l'eglise, toujours 
 remorque par le bedeau, vous arrivez a la grille clu chceur, 
 qui est parfaitement verrouillee et devant laquelle se 
 tient debout un magnifique personnage splendidement 
 harnache : c'est le suisse, qui a ete prevenu de votre 
 passage et qui vous attend. Le chceur est au suisse. 
 Vous en faites le tour. Au moment ou vous sortez, 
 votre cicerone empanache et galonne vous salue majes- 
 tueusement. Pourboire. 
 
 Le suisse vous rend au bedeau. Vous passez devant 
 la sacristie. O miracle ! elle est ouverte. Vous y en- 
 trez. II y a un sacristain. Le bedeau s'eloigne avec 
 dignite, car il convient de laisser au sacristain sa proie. 
 Le sacristain s'empare de vous, vous montre les ciboires, 
 les chasubles, les vitraux que vous verriez fort bien sans 
 lui, les mitres de l'eveque, et, sous une vitre, dans une 
 boite garnie de satin blanc fane, quelque squelette de 
 
HEADING LESSONS. 431 
 
 saint habille en troubadour. 2 La sacristie est vue, reste 
 le sacristain. Pourboire. 
 
 Le bedeau vous reprend. Voici l'escalier des tours. 
 La vue da haut du grand clocher doit etre belle, vous 
 voulez y monter. Le bedeau pousse silencieusement la 
 porte; vous esealadez une trentaine de marches. Puis 
 le passage vous est barre brusquement. C'est une porte 
 fermee. Vous vous retournez. Vous etes seul; le be- 
 deau n'est plus la. Vous frappez. Une face apparait a 
 un judas. C'est le sonneur. II ouvre, et il vous dit : 
 " Montez, monsieur." Pourboire. 
 
 Vous montez, le sonneur ne vous suit pas ; tant mieux, 
 pensez-vous ; vous respirez, vous jouissez d'etre seul, 
 vous parvenez ainsi gaiement a la haute plate-forme de 
 la tour. La, vous regardez, vous allez et venez, le ciel 
 est bleu, le paysage est superbe, l'horizon est immense. 
 Tout a coup vous apercevez que depuis quelques in- 
 stants un etre importun vous suit et vous coudoie, et 
 vous bourclonne aux oreilles des choses obscures. Ceci 
 est l'explicateur jure et privilegie, charge de commenter 
 aux etrangers les magnificences du clocher, de l'eglise et 
 du paysage. Cet homme-la est ordinairement un begue. 
 Quelquefois il est begue et sourd. 
 
 Vous ne l'ecoutez pas, vous le laissez baragouiner tout 
 a son aise, et vous l'oubliez en contemplant l'enorme 
 croupe de l'eglise d'ou les arcs-boutants sortent comme 
 des cotes dissequees, les mille details de la fleche de 
 pierre, les toits, les rues, les pignons, les routes qui s'en- 
 fuient dans tous les sens comme les rayons d'une roue 
 dont l'horizon est la jante et dont la ville est le moyeu, 
 les plain es, les arbres, les rivieres, les collines. Quand 
 vous avez bien tout vu, vous songez a redescendre, vous 
 vous dirigez vers la tourelle de l'escalier; l'homme se 
 
 2 il A skeleton of some saint dressed out like a Troubadour" i. e., 
 u Jantasiicalli/.'" 
 
432 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 dresse devant vous. Pourboire. — " C'est fort bien, mon- 
 sieur, vous dit-il en empochant ; maintenant voulez-vous 
 me donner pour moi? — Comment ! et ce que je viens de 
 vous donner! — C'est pour la fabrique, monsieur, a la- 
 quelle je dois deux francs par personne; mais a present 
 monsieur comprend bien qu'il me faut quelque petite 
 chose pour moi." Pourboire. 
 
 Yous redescendez. Tout a coup une trappe s'ouvre 
 a cote de vous. C'est la cage des cloches. II faut bien 
 voir les cloches de ce beau clocher. Un jenne gaillard 
 vous les montre et vous les nomme. Pourboire. Au 
 bas du clocher vous retrouvez le bedeau qui vous a at- 
 tendu patiemment, et qui vous reconduit avec respect 
 jasqu'au seuil de l'eglise. Pourboire. 
 
 Yous rentrez a votre hotel, et vous vous gardez bien 
 de demander votre chemin a quelque passant, car le 
 pourboire saisirait cette occasion. A peine avez-vous 
 mis le pied dans l'auberge que vous voyez venir a vous 
 d'un air amical une figure qui vous est tout a fait incon- 
 nue. C'est l'estafier qui vous rapporte votre passe-port. 
 Pourboire. Yous dinez, l'heure du depart arrive, le do- 
 mestique vous apporte la carte a payer. Pourboire. 
 Un garcon d'ecurie porte votre bagage a la diligence. 
 Pourboire. Un facteur le hisse sur l'imperiale. Pour- 
 boire. Yous montez en voiture, on part, la nuit tombe ; 
 vous recommencerez le lendemain. 
 
 Recapitulons : Pourboire au conducteur, pourboire au 
 postilion, pourboire au debacheur, pourboire au brouet- 
 teur, pourboire a l'homme qui n'est pas de F hotel, pour- 
 boire a la vieille femme, pourboire a Rubens, pourboire 
 au suisse, pourboire au sacristain, pourboire au sonneur, 
 pourboire au baragouineur, pourboire a la fabrique, 
 pourboire au sous-sonneur, pourboire au bedeau, pour- 
 boire a l'estafier, pourboire aux domestiques, pourboire 
 au garcon d'ecurie, pourboire au facteur : voila dix-huit 
 pourboires dans une journee. 
 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 433 
 
 Otez Peglise, qui est fort chere ; il en reste neuf. 
 
 Maintenant calculez tous ces pourboires d'apres un 
 minimum de cinquante centimes et un maximum de 
 deux francs, qui est quelquefois obligatoire, et vous au- 
 rez une somme assez inquietante. N'oubliez pas que 
 tout pourboire doit ^tre une piece d'argent. Les sous 
 et la monnaie de cuivre sont copeaux et balayures que 
 le dernier goujat regarde avec un inexprimable dedain. 
 
 Pour ces peuples ingenieux, le voyageur n'est qu'un 
 sac d'ecus qu'il s'agit 3 de desenfler le plus vite possible. 
 Chacun s'y acharne de son cote. Le gouvernement lui- 
 meme s'en mele 4 quelquefois ; il vous prend votre malle 
 et votre porte-manteau, les charge sur ses epaules et 
 vous tend la main. Dans les grandes villes, les porteurs 
 de bagages redoivent au tresor royal douze sous et deux 
 liards par voyageur. Je n'etais pas 5 depuis un quart 
 d'heure a Aix-la-Chapelle, que j'avais deja donne pour- 
 boire au roi de Prusse. — Victor Hugo. 
 
 XXIII. A FROZEN NOSE. 
 
 Un jour, je me decidai de faire mes courses 1 en me 
 promenant. 2 Je m'armai de pied en cap contre les hos- 
 tilites du froid, je m'enveloppai d'une grande redingote 
 d'astracan, 3 je m'enfoncai un bonnet fourre sur les oreil- 
 les, je roulai autour de mon cou une cravate de cache- 
 mire, et je m'aventurai dans la rue, n'ayant de toute ma 
 personne que le bout du nez a l'air. 
 
 D'abord tout alia a merveille ; je m'etonnai meme du 
 peu d'impression que me causait le froid, et je riais tout 
 
 3 " Qu'il s'agit de," etc., "which is to be reduced (disinflated) in the 
 shortest possible space of time." — 4 "Engages in it occasionally." — 
 
 5 "I had not been at fifteen minutes before (que) I had given a 
 
 pourboire to the King of Prussia," i. e., indirectly, of course. 
 
 XXIII. The subject of this extract is a fencing-master, who gives 
 lessons in St. Petersburg, Russia. — l " To go my rounds." — 2 "While 
 on my walk." — 3 "Astrachan surtout," called by Russians "shuba" 
 
 T 
 
434 FEENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 bas de tous les contes que j'en avais entendu faire; 4 
 j'etais, au reste, enchante que le hasard m'eut donne 
 cette occasion pour m'acclimater. Neanrnoins, comme 
 les deux premiers ecoliers chez lesquels je me rendais 
 n'etaient point chez eux, je commen9ais a trouver que 
 le hasard faisait trop bien les choses, lorsque je crus 5 re- 
 marquer que ceux que je croisais me regardaient avec 
 une certaine inquietude, mais cependant sans me rien 6 
 dire. Bientot un monsieur, plus causeur, a ce qu'il pa- 
 rait, 7 que les autres, me dit en passant : noss / 8 Comme 
 je ne savais pas un mot de russe, je crus que ce 
 n'etait pas la peine de m'arreter pour un monosyllabe, 
 et je continual mon chemin. Au coin de la rue des 
 Pois, je rencontrai un iostchik 9 qui passait ventre a 
 terre en conduisant son traineau; mais, si rapide que 
 fut 10 sa course, il se crut oblige de me parler a son tour 
 et me cria : noss ! noss ! ! Enfin, en arrivant sur la 
 place de l'Amiraute, je me trouvai en face d'un moujik, 11 
 qui ne me cria rien du tout, mais qui, ramassant une 
 poignee de neige, se jeta sur moi, et avant que j'eusse 
 pu me debarrasser de tout mon attirail se mit a me de- 
 barbouiller la figure et a me frotter particulierement le 
 nez de toute sa force. Je trouvai la plaisanterie assez 
 mediocre, surtout par le temps qu'il faisait, 12 et tirant 
 un de mes bras d'une de mes poches, je lui allongeai un 
 coup de poing qui l'envoya rouler a dix pas. 13 Mal- 
 heureusement ou heureusement pour moi, deux pay sans 
 passaient en ce moment qui, apres m'avoir regarde un 
 
 4 Faire, " told;" "which I had heard told of it," i. e., "the. cold.'" — 
 5 See 559. — 6 " Without saying any thing to me."— "* "As it seems," 
 "apparently." — 8 Noss, a Russian word signifying "nose." — 9 Iost- 
 chik (?) : this word does not exist in Russian ; the author probably in- 
 tended to use vostchik or izvostchik, eitber of which means "a driver," 
 "a carrier." — 10 "However swift might be," etc. — " Movjilc, " a Rus- 
 sian peasant," "a rustic." — 12 Par le temps, etc., "especially in such 
 weather. 1 ''— 13 " Ten paces off." 
 
READING LESSONS. 435 
 
 instant, se jeterent sur moi, et malgre ma defense me 
 maintinrent les bras, 14 tandis que mon enrage moujik 
 ramassait une autre poignee de neige, et, comme s'il ne 
 voulait pas en avoir le dementi, se precipitait de nou- 
 veau sur moi. Cette fois, profitant de l'impossibilite ou 
 j'etais de me defendre, il se mit a recommencer ses fric- 
 tions. Mais, si j'avais les bras pris, j'avais la langue li- 
 bre: croyant que j'etais la victime de quelque meprise 
 ou de quelque guet-apens, j'appelai de toute ma force au 
 secours. 15 Un officier accourut et me demanda en fran- 
 cais a qui j'en avais. 16 
 
 " Comment, monsieur !" m'ecriai-je en faisant un der- 
 nier effort et en me debarrassant de mes trois hommes, 
 qui, de Pair le plus tranquille du monde, se remirent a 
 continuer leur chemin, l'un vers la Perspective, 17 et les 
 deux autres du cote du quai Anglais — "vous ne voyez 
 done pas ce que ces droles me faisaient? — Que vous 
 faisaient-ils done ? — Mais ils me frottaient la figure avec 
 de la neige. Est-ce que vous trouveriez cela une plai- 
 santerie de bon gout, par hasard, avec le temps qu'il 
 fait? 12 — Mais, monsieur, ils vous rendaient un enorme 
 service, me repondit mon interlocuteur en me regardant 
 comme nous disons, nous autres 18 Francais, dans le blanc 
 des yeux. — Comment cela ? — Sans doute, vous aviez le 
 nez gele. — Misericorde ! m'ecriai-je en portant la main a 
 la partie menacee. — Monsieur, dit un passant en s'adres- 
 sant a l'interlocuteur, monsieur l'officier, je vous pre- 
 viens que votre nez gele. — Merci, monsieur," dit l'officier 
 comme si on l'eut prevenu de la chose la plus naturelle 
 du monde. 
 
 Et se baissant, il ramassa une poignee de neige et ren- 
 
 14 See 497. — l5 Au secours, u for help.' 1 '' — 16 A qui fen avais, '•'■with 
 whom I was at variance.'''' — 17 Perspective, i. e., the "Nefski Pros- 
 pect," the name of a street in the city. — 18 Nous autres, "the like of 
 ms" or u we" 
 
436 FRENCH GEAMMAE. 
 
 dit a lui-meme le service que m'avait rendu le pauvre 
 moujik que j'avais si brutalement recompense de son 
 obligeance. 
 
 " C'est-a-dire alors, monsieur, que sans cet homme . . . 
 — Vous n'auriez plus de nez, continua l'officier en se frot- 
 tant le sien. 
 
 " Alors, monsieur, permettez . . ." 
 
 Et je me mis a courir apres mon moujik, qui, croyant 
 que je voulais achever de l'assommer, se mit a courir de 
 son cote, de sorte que, comme la crainte est naturelle- 
 ment plus agile que la reconnaissance, je ne l'eusse pro- 
 bablement jamais rattrape si quelques personnes, en le 
 voyant fuir et en me voyant le poursuivre, ne l'eussent 
 pris pour un voleur, et ne lui eussent barre le chernin. 
 Lorsque j'arrivai, je le trouvai parlant avec une grande 
 volubilite, afiu de faire comprendre qu'il n'etait coupable 
 que de trop de philanthropic ; dix roubles que je lui 
 donnai expliquerent la chose. Le moujik me baisa les 
 mains, et un des assistants, qui parlait francais, m'invita 
 a faire desormais plus d'attention a mon nez. L'invita- 
 tion etait inutile ; pendant tout le reste de ma course, je 
 ne le perdis pas de vue. 19 — Alexandre Dumas. 
 
 XXIV. OF FABLES. 
 
 On lit des fables a, tous les ages de la vie, et les memes 
 fables ; a chaque age elles donnent tout le plaisir qu'on 
 peut tirer d'un ouvrage de l'esprit, et un profit propor- 
 tionne. 
 
 Dans l'enfance ce n'est pas la morale de la fable qui 
 frappe, ni le rapport du precepte a l'exemple ; mais on 
 s'y interesse aux proprietes des animaux et a la diversi- 
 te de leurs caracteres. Les enfants y reconnaissent les 
 moeurs du chien qu'ils caressent, du chat dont ils abu- 
 sent, de la souris dont ils ont peur ; toute la basse-cour, 
 
 19 "I did not lose sight of it." 
 
 
READING LESSONS. 437 
 
 ou ils se plaisent mieux qu'a l'ecole. Pour les animaux 
 feroces, ils y retrouvent ce que leur mere leur en a dit : 
 le loup dont on menace les mechants enfants, le renard 
 qui rode autour du poulailler, le lion dont on leur a vante 
 les moeurs clementes. Ils s'amusent singulierement des 
 petits drames dans lesquels figurent ces personnages ; ils 
 y prennent parti pour le faible contre le fort, pour le 
 modeste contre le superbe, pour l'innocent contre le cou- 
 pable. Ils en tirent ainsi une premiere idee de la justice. 
 Les plus avises, ceux devant lesquels on ne dit rien im- 
 punement, vont plus loin ; ils savent saisir une premiere 
 ressemblance entre les caracteres des homines et ceux 
 des animaux : j'en sais qui ont cru voir telle 1 de ces fa- 
 bles se jouer dans la maison paternelle. L'esprit de 
 comparaison se forme insensiblement dans leurs tendres 
 intelligences. Ils apprennent par le livre a reconnaitre 
 leurs impressions, a se representer leurs souvenirs. En 
 voyant peint si au vif ce qu'ils ont senti, ils s'exercent a 
 sentir vivement. Ils regardent mieux et avec plus d'in- 
 teret. C'est la, pour cet age, le profit proportionne dont 
 j'ai parle. 
 
 Les fables ne sont pas le livre des jeunes gens; ils 
 preferent les illustres seducteurs qui les trompent sur 
 eux-memes, 2 et leur persuadent qu'ils peuvent tout ce 
 qu'ils veulent, que leur force est sans bornes et leur vie 
 inepuisable. Ils sont trop superbes pour gouter ce qu' en- 
 fants 3 on leur a donne a lire. C'etait une lecture de 
 pere de famille, dans le temps des conseils minutieux et 
 reiteres, oil le fabuliste etait complice des reprimandes, 
 et le docteur de la morale domestique. Mais si, dans 
 cet orgueil de la vie, il en est un qui, par desoeuvrement 
 
 XXIV. 1 "Who have believed that they have seen such or such a fa- 
 ble represented under the paternal roof.'''' — 2 Sur, "with regard to. — 
 3 Enfants, "as children" or "when they were children was given them 
 to read." 
 
438 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ou par fatigue des plaisirs que son imagination avait 
 grossis, ouvre le livre dedaigne, quelle n'est pas sa sur- 
 prise, en se retrouvant parnii ces animaux auxquels il 
 s'etait interesse enfant, 3 de reconnaitre par sa propre re- 
 flexion, non plus sur la parole du maitre ou du pere, la 
 ressemblance de leurs aventures avec la vie, et la verite 
 des le9ons que le fabuliste en a tirees ! 
 
 Ce temps d'ivresse passe, quand chacun a trouve enfin 
 la mesure de sa taille en s' appro chant d'un plus grand ; 
 de ses forces, en luttant avec un plus fort ; de son intel- 
 ligence, en voyant le prix remporte par un plus habile; 
 quand la maladie, la fatigue lui ont appris qu'il n'y a 
 qu'une mesure de vie ; quand il en est arrive a se defier 
 merne de ses esperances, alors revient le fabuliste qui 
 savait tout cela, qui le lui dit, et qui le console, non par 
 d'autres illusions, mais en lui montrant son mal au vrai, 
 et tout ce qu'on en peut oter de pointes par la compa^ 
 raison avec le mal d'autrui. 
 
 Yieillards enfin, arrives au terme " du long espoir et 
 des vastes pensees," le fabuliste nous aide a nous souve- 
 nir. II nous remet notre vie sous nos yeux, laissant la 
 peine dans le passe, et nous rechauffant par les images 
 du plaisir. Enfermes dans ce petit espace de jours pre- 
 caires et comptes, quand la vie n'est plus que le dernier 
 combat contre la mort, il nous en rappelle le commence- 
 ment et nous en cache la fin. Tout nous y plait: la 
 morale qui se confond avec notre propre experience, en 
 sorte que lire le fabuliste c'est ruminer ; l'art, dont nous 
 somnies touches jusqu'a la fin de notre vie, comme d'une 
 verite superieure et immortelle ; les mceurs et les carac- 
 teres des animaux, auxquels nous prenons le merne plaisir 
 qu'etant enfants, soit ressouvenir des imperfections des 
 hommes, soit l'effet de cette ressemblance justement re- 
 marquee entre les gouts de la vieillesse et ceux de l'en- 
 fance. II est peu de vieillards qui n'aient quelque animal 
 
READING LESSONS. 439 
 
 familier: c'est quelquefois le dernier ami; celui-la, du 
 moins, est eprouve. II souffre nos humeurs, il joue avec 
 la meme grace pour le vieillard que pour l'enfant. Le 
 raaitre du chien n'a ni age, ni condition, ni fortune ; le 
 faible est pour le chien le seul puissant de ce monde ; le 
 vieillard lui est un enfant auxfraiches couleurs ; le pauvre 
 lui est roi. — Nisard. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 n.f, "Noxxn feminine. 
 n. m., Noun masculine. 
 num., Numeral. 
 part., Participle. 
 p. die/*., Past definite. 
 pi, Plural. 
 prep., Preposition. 
 pres., Present. 
 pron., Pronoun. 
 
 sing. 
 
 adj., Adjective. 
 adv., Adverb, 
 art., Article. 
 condit., Conditional. 
 conj., Conjunction. 
 fut., Future. 
 imper. , Imperative. 
 imperf, Imperfect. 
 ind., Indicative. 
 int., Interjection. 
 
 GP The letters -e, -se, -ve, -trice, etc., following an adjective or par 
 ticiple, denote the feminine form. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 v. a., Verb active. 
 v. aux., Verb auxiliary. 
 v. defect. ,Yerb defective. 
 v. ir., Verb irregular. 
 v. n., Verb neuter. 
 v. refl., Verb reflective. 
 v. unip.,Verb unipersonal. 
 
 NOTE. 
 
 In the following Vocabulary an attempt has been made to represent, 
 in ordinary English letters, the pronunciation of the French words, 
 according to the subjoined scale : 
 
 THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 These have their usual English sounds. It must be noted, how- 
 ever, that 
 
 s has its sibilant sound, as in see. 
 wa as in match — representing oi. 
 y as in yet. 
 z as in zone. 
 
 zh as z in azure or s in pleasure. 
 n^ as n, with an after-sound of y in year- 
 
 THE VOWELS, 
 a as a in add. 
 a as a in father or ah. 
 
 ai as in fair — representing e, e, and ai not final, 
 ay as in say — representing e, er, and ai final. 
 e as in met. 
 
 6 as in the, pronounced without accent ; thus, the house. 
 ee as in see. 
 6 as o in note. 
 6 as in corps. 
 oo as in boot. 
 
 T 2 
 
 -representing gne final. 
 
442 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 o as u in fur, % in bird, or o in word — representing, as nearly as possi- 
 ble, the French eu and ozu. 
 
 ii represents the French u. It has no precise equivalent in English. 
 
 iy as i in pine, with an after-sound of?/ in year. 
 
 aiy as aim fair, " " " " 
 
 eey as ee in see, " " " " 
 
 6^ as u in fur, " " " " 
 
 THE NASALS. 
 These sounds are not found in the English language. They are 
 
 produced by the association of a vowel or diphthong with either of 
 
 the letters in or n. They will be represented thus : 
 
 a~ represents the First Class of Nasals (see page 17). 
 a~ " Second " " " 
 
 o" " Third 
 
 6~ " Fourth " 
 
 The mark (') indicates that the principal stress falls on that sylla- 
 ble over which it is placed. 
 
 ABU 
 
 A [aA], prep., to, at, in, on', for. 
 
 A \ali\, ind. pres., 3d sing., has; 
 is. 
 
 s'Abaisser [sa-bai-say'~\, v. refl., to 
 humble one's self; to stoop. 
 
 Abandonne [a-ba~-don'~\, ind. or 
 subj. pres., 1st or 3d sing., aban- 
 dons ; deserts; may abandon. 
 
 Abaudonner [a-ba~-do-nay'~\, v. a., 
 to abandon ; to forsake. 
 
 Abattre [a-batr'~\, v. ir., to throw 
 down. 
 
 Abattu-e [a-ba-tu'~\, part., cast 
 down ; adj., dejected. 
 
 Abbaye \a-bay-ee'\ n. f., abbey. 
 
 Aboi [a-bwa~\, n. m., bark; bark- 
 ing. 
 
 Abord [a-bor'^, n. m., approach , 
 d'abord [da-bor'~\, adv., at first. 
 
 Aborder [a-bor-daf], v. a., to ap- 
 proach. 
 
 Aboutir [a-boo-ieer'~\, v. n., to end, 
 
 Abri \a-bree'\ n. m., shelter ; I 
 Fabri de [a-la-bree'-de], pi*ep.. 
 sheltered from. 
 
 s'Abstenir [sabs-te-neer'~\, v. ir., tc 
 refrain. 
 
 Abstraire [abs-trair''], v. ir., to ab 
 stract. 
 
 Abuser [a-bu-zay'"], v. n., to abuse , 
 to misuse (foil, by de). 
 
 ACH 
 
 Accepter [ak-sep-tay'~\, v. a., to ac- 
 cept. 
 
 s'Acclimater [sa-klee-ma-tay'], v. 
 refl., to become acclimated. 
 
 Accord [a-kor'2, n. m., harmony ; 
 strain. 
 
 s'Accorder [sa-kor-day'~\,\. refl., to 
 accord ; to agree. 
 
 Accourent \a-koor'~\, ind. or subj. 
 pres., 3d plur., (they) run up; 
 hasten. 
 
 Accourir \_d-koo-reer''\, v. ir., to run 
 up ; to hasten up. 
 
 Accourut [a-koo-ru~\, ind., p. def., 
 3d sing. , hastened up ; ran up. 
 
 Accoutume-e [a-koo-tu-may'~\, part., 
 accustomed ; wonted. 
 
 Accoutumer [a-koo-tu-may'~\, v. a., 
 to accustom. 
 
 sAccoutumer [sa-koo-tu-may'~\, v. 
 refl., to accustom one's self. 
 
 Accroitre [a-krwa-tr], v. ir., to in- 
 crease. 
 
 Accueil [a-kdy'~\, n. m., welcome ; 
 reception ; faire accueil a, to wel- 
 come. 
 
 Accueillir [a-ko-yeer'~\, v. ir., to re- 
 ceive ; to welcome. 
 
 Accuser [a-kii-zay'~\, v. a., to accuse. 
 
 sAcharner [sa-shar-naf], v. refl., 
 to become maddened. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 443 
 
 AFF 
 
 s'Achemina [sash-mee-nah'], ind., 
 p. def., 3d sing., (he) set out; 
 proceeded. 
 
 m'Acheminai [mash-mee-nay'], ind., 
 p. def., 1st sing., (/) walked on; 
 proceeded. 
 
 s' Acheminer [ sash-mee-nay' ], v. 
 refl., to proceed ; to walk on. 
 
 Achete [a-shaif], ind. or sub., 1st 
 or 3d sing., buy ; buys. 
 
 Acheter [ash-tay'], v. a., to buy. 
 
 Achever [ash-vay], v. a., to finish ; 
 to complete. 
 
 Achille [a-sheel], Achilles. 
 
 Acier [d-see-ay'], n. ra., steel. 
 
 Action [ak-see-o"'], n. f., action; 
 deed. 
 
 Adda [d-dah'], name of a river. 
 
 Adjoindre [ad-zhwd"~'-dr], v. ir., to 
 adjoin. 
 
 Admettre [ad-mettr'], v. ir., to ad- 
 mit. 
 
 Administre [ad-mee-nee '-str], ind. 
 pres., 3d sing., inflicts. 
 
 Administrer [ad-mee-nee-stray 1 ], v. 
 a., to administer ; to inflict. 
 
 Admirable [dd-mee-rabl 1 ], adj., ad- 
 mirable. 
 
 Admirer [dd-mee-ray], v. a., to ad- 
 mire. 
 
 s'Adonner [sd-do-nay'], v. refl., to 
 give one's self up to. 
 
 Adore'-e [d-do-ray'], part., adored. 
 
 s'Adressant [sd-dress-d""'], pres, 
 part., addressing. 
 
 Adresse [d-dress'], n. f., address. 
 
 Adresse-e [d-dress-ay'], part., ad 
 dressed. 
 
 Adresser [a-dress-ay''], v. a., to ad- 
 
 Adulateur - trice [d-dii-ld- tor', 
 ■ ' -eess'], adj., adulatory. 
 
 Affaire [d-fair'], n. f., affair ; pi., 
 business. 
 
 Affecter [d-fek-tay'], v. a., to affect. 
 
 Affirmer [d-feer-may'], v. a., to af- 
 firm. 
 
 Affliger [d-flee-zhay'], v. a., to af- 
 flict. 
 
 Atfreux-se [d-fro', -frdz'], adj 
 frightful; shocking. 
 
 AIR 
 
 Afin de [a fa"' dS], conj., in order 
 
 to ; to. 
 Afin que [d-faT'-ke], conj., in order 
 
 that; so that (with subj.). 
 Age [dzh], n. m., age. 
 Age'-e [d-zhay'], adj., aged; of age. 
 Agi-e [d-shee'], part., acted. 
 Agile [d-sheel], adj., nimble; act- 
 ive. 
 Agir [d-zheer'], v. n., to act. 
 s'Agit. II s'agit [eel-sd-zhee 1 ], v. 
 
 unip., the question is. 
 Agneau [dn-yo'], n. m., lamb. 
 Agreable [d-gray-d'-bl], adj., agree- 
 able; pleasant. 
 Agreablement [d-gray-d-ble-ma'], 
 
 adv., agreeably. 
 Agrement [d-gray-md""], n. m., ap- 
 probation ; consent ; gratification. 
 s'Aguerrir [sd-ghai-reer'], v. refl., 
 
 to-become inured to. 
 Ah [ah], int., ah; oh. 
 Ai [ay], ind. pres., 1st sing., from 
 
 avoir, (/) have ; am. 
 Aider [ai-day'], v. a., to help ; to 
 
 aid. 
 Aie [ay], imper., 2d sing., have. 
 Aient [ay], subj. pres , 3d pi., may 
 
 have. 
 Aieul [i-yol'], n. m., grandfather. 
 A'ieux [i-yo], n. m., pi., ancestors. 
 Aigu-e [ai-gii'], adj., acute. 
 Aigue [ai-gii'],t'em. of aigu. 
 Ailleurs [d-yor 1 ], adv., elsewhere ; 
 
 d'ailleurs [dd-yor'], elsewhere ; 
 
 besides. 
 Aimable [ay-ma -bl], adj., lovely ; 
 
 kind; agreeable. 
 Aime'-e [ay-may 1 ], part., loved. 
 Aiment [aim], ind. pres., 3d pi., 
 
 love ; like. 
 Aimer [ay-may'], v. a., to love; to 
 
 like ; aimer mieux, to prefer. 
 Aimez [ay-may'], ind. pres., 2d 
 . pi., or imper., (you) love; like; 
 
 love (ye). 
 Aimons [ay-mo"'], imper., 1st pi., 
 
 let tis love ; let us like. 
 Ainsi [a~-see'], adv., so ; thus. 
 Air [air], n.'m.,air; manner; tone; 
 
 strain. 
 
444 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 AME 
 
 Aise [_aiz] y adj., glad; etre bien 
 aise, to be very glad. 
 
 Aise [cdz], n. f., ease; a son aise 
 [a-so^-naiz''], at his or her ease. 
 
 Ajourna [a-zhoor-na"~], ind., p. def., 
 3d sing., put off. 
 
 Ajourner \_a-zhoor-nay'\ v. a., to 
 put off ; to adjourn. 
 
 Ajouter [a-zhoo-tay'~\, v. a., to add. 
 
 Alcove [al-kov'~\, n. f., alcove; re- 
 cess. 
 
 Alentour [a-la'-toor'~\, adv., about; 
 around. 
 
 Allaient [a-Zai'j, ind., impeif., 3d 
 pi., went ; were going. 
 
 Alle-e [a-lay'~], part. , gone. 
 
 Alle'e [a-lay], n. f., alley ; court- 
 yard. 
 
 Allemagne [al-mari*'], n. f., Ger- 
 many. 
 
 Allemand-e [al-md~', -md~d'~], adj., 
 German. 
 
 Allemand \atma' r \ ) u. m., German. 
 
 Aller [a-lay'], v. ir., to go; aller 
 chercher, to go for. 
 
 s'en Aller \sa na-lay'\ v. ir., to go 
 away ; to go off. 
 
 Allez [a-/</y'],imper. or ind., pres., 
 2d pi., go ; (you) are going. 
 
 Allions \a-lee-o~'\ ind., imperf., or 
 subj. pres., 1st pi., (we) went; 
 (xoe) were going ; (ice) go. 
 
 Allongeai [a.-lo"-zhay'~\, ind., p. 
 def., 1st sing.,(7) made a lunge 
 at. 
 
 Allonger [a-lo"-zhay'~], v. a., to deal; 
 to lunge ; allonger un coup de 
 poing, to make a lunge with the 
 fist. 
 
 Allons [a-/o~'], imper., 1st pi., let 
 tis go. 
 
 Allumer [a-lu-may''], v. a., to light. 
 
 Allusion [a-lu-zee-o~'], n. f., allu- 
 sion ; hint. 
 
 Alors [a-lor^, adv., then; at that 
 time. 
 
 Ambigu-e [a~-bee-gu~\, adj., am- 
 biguous. 
 
 Ambitieux-se [a"-bee-see-o, -oz'~\, 
 adj., ambitious. 
 
 Arae [a?n], n. f., soul ; mind. 
 
 APA 
 
 Amen [a-menn'~], n. m., amen. 
 
 Amene-e [am-nay''], part., brought. 
 
 Amener [am-nay'~\, v. a., to bring.' 
 
 Amer-e [a-mair'~\, adj., bitter. 
 
 Americain-e \a-mair-ee-ka' , -kain'~\, 
 adj . , American ; n.,A merican . 
 
 Amerique [a-mair-eek'~\, n.f., Amer- 
 ica. 
 
 Ami [a-mee'~\, n. m., friend. 
 
 Amical-e [d-jnee-kal"], adj., friend- 
 ly 
 
 Amie [&-mee'~], n. f., friend. 
 
 Amiraute [a-mee-rd-tay'~], n. f., ad- 
 miralty. 
 
 Amitie' \a-mee-tee-ay'\ n.f.,friend- 
 
 ^ ship. 
 
 A moins que [a mwa' ke~\, conj., 
 unless (with subj.). 
 
 Amour \a-moor'~\, n. m., love. 
 
 Amour-propre [a-moor' -pro'-pr~], n. 
 m., self-love. 
 
 Ample [a"-]>r\, adj., ample. 
 
 Amusant-e [a-mu-za~\ -zat'\ adj., 
 entertaining. 
 
 Amuser [a-mii-zay r ], v. a., to amuse. 
 
 s'Amuser [sa-mu-zay'~\, v. refl., to 
 be amused ; to be entertained ; to 
 entertain one's self. 
 
 An [<T], n. m., year. 
 
 Ancien-ne \a~-see-a~', -enn'~\, adj., 
 ancient ; old ; former. 
 
 Ange [a"zK], n. m., angel. 
 
 Anglais-e [cT-glai', -glaiz'j, adj., 
 English. 
 
 Anglais-e, n. m. or f., Englishman ; 
 English-woman. 
 
 Angle terre \a" -gle-tair'~\, n.f., En- 
 gland. 
 
 Animal [a-nee-mal'~], n. m., ani- 
 mal. 
 
 Animaux [a-nee-mo'~\, n. m., pi., 
 animals. 
 
 Anime-e \a-nee-may'\ part., ani- 
 mated ; fired (with, de). 
 
 Animer \a-nee-may'~\, v. a., to ani- 
 mate. 
 
 Annee [a.-nay''], n. f.,year. 
 
 Annoncer [a-nd"-say'~] i v. a., to an- 
 nounce. 
 
 Apaisent [a-paiz'~\, pres. ind., 3d 
 pi., (they) pacify . 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 445 
 
 APP 
 
 Apaiser [d-pai-zay'], v. a., to pacify. 
 s'Apaiser [sd-pai-zay'], v. reft., to 
 
 be pacified. 
 Apennin [d-pai-nd"'], n. m., Apen- 
 
 nine (mountains). 
 Apercevez [d-pairss-vay'], ind. 
 
 pres., 2d pi., (you) perceive . 
 Apercevoir [d-pairss-vwdr'], v. a., 
 
 to perceive. 
 Apercu-e [d-pair-su], part., per- 
 ceived. 
 Apercut [d-pair-su'], ind., p. def., 
 
 3d sing., perceived. 
 Apparait [d-pdr-ai'], ind. pres., 3d 
 
 sing., appears. 
 Apparaitre [d-pdr-ai' -tr], v. ii\, to 
 
 appear. 
 Appartenir [d-pdr-fneer'], v. ii\, to 
 
 Appartiens [a -par -tee -a"'], ind. 
 
 pres., 1st sing., (/) belong. 
 s'Appauvrir [sd-po-vreer'], v. refl., 
 
 to become impoverished. 
 Appelait [d-pg-lai'], ind. imperf., 
 
 3d sing., called; was calling. 
 Appeler [d-pe-lay'], v. a., to call. 
 s'Appeler [sd-pS-lay'], v. refl., to be 
 
 called. 
 Appelle [a -pell'], ind. pres., 3d 
 
 sing., calls. 
 s'Appellent [sd-peW], are called. 
 s'Appesantir [sd-pe-zd~-teer'], v. 
 
 refl., to expatiate. 
 s'Appesantirent [sd-p%-za "-teer'], 
 
 ind., p. def., 3d pi., expatiated. 
 Applaudir [d-plo-deer], v. a., to 
 
 commend. 
 Applaudissement [d -plo - deess - 
 
 ma"'], n. in., acclaim ; applause. 
 Applaudissent [d-plo-deess'], ind 
 
 pres., 3d pi., commend. 
 s'Appliquer [sd-plee-kay'], v. refl. 
 
 to apply one's self. 
 Apporte [d-port'], ind. pres., 3d 
 
 sing., brings. 
 Apporter [a-por-tay'], v. a., to 
 
 bring. 
 Apportez [a-por-tay''], ind. pres.. 
 
 2d pi. or imper., bring-. 
 Apprehender [d-pray-d"-day'], v, 
 
 a., to apprehend. 
 
 ARM 
 
 Apprend [a-pra"'], ind. pres., 3d 
 sing., learns. 
 
 Apprendre [d-pra"' -dr], v. ir., to 
 learn; to teach. 
 
 Apprends [d-prd~'], ind. pres., 1st 
 sing., (I) learn, inform. 
 
 Apprenez [d-pre-nay 1 ], ind. pres., 
 2d pi., learn ; know. 
 
 Apprennent [a-prenn'], 3d plur., 
 (they) learn. 
 
 Appris-e [d-pree', -preez], part., 
 learned; informed; taught. 
 
 Apprit [d-pree 1 ], imperf. subj., 3d 
 sing., (he) would inform. 
 
 s'Approche [sa-pros'h'], 3d sing., 
 draws near. 
 
 Approche-e [d-prd-shay'], part., 
 approached ; drawn near. 
 
 s'Approcher [sd-pro-shay'], v. refl., 
 to approach; to draw near; to 
 approximate. 
 
 Appuyer [d-pilee-yay'], v.n., to lean. 
 
 Appuyez [d-puee-yay f ], lean. 
 
 Apres [d-prai 1 ], prep., after ; d'a- 
 pres, froin; after. 
 
 Apres, adv., afterward. 
 
 Apres-midi [d-prai' -mee-dee'], n. 
 f. and m., afternoon. 
 
 Arabe [d-rdb'], n. m., Arab, Ara- 
 bian. 
 
 Arabe, adj., Arabian; Arabic. 
 
 Arbitraire [dr-bee-trair'], adj., ar- 
 bitrary. 
 
 Arbre [dr'-br], n. m., tree. 
 
 Arc [ark], n. m., bow. 
 
 Arc-boutant [dr-boo-td"'], n. m., 
 abutment. 
 
 Arc-en-ciel [dr-kd" '-see-ell'], n. m., 
 rainbow. 
 
 Archer [dr-shay'], n. m., archer. 
 
 Ardent-e [dr-dd"', -dd"t'], adj., ar- 
 dent ; excessive. 
 
 Argent [dr-zhd"'], n. m., money ; 
 silver. 
 
 Aristocratie [dr-iss-tok-rd-see'], n. 
 f., aristocracy. 
 
 Armee [ar-may'], n. f., army. 
 
 s'Armer [sdr-may'], v. refl., to se- 
 cure one's self; to arm one's self 
 
 Armes [an??], n. f., pi., arms ; weap- 
 ons ; aux armes, to arms ! 
 
446 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ASS ATT 
 
 Arrange-e [_ar-ra"-zhay'~\, part., ar- s' Assurer [sa-su-ray'], v. refl., to 
 
 ranged. feel assured. 
 
 Arreter [dr-rai-tay'\ v.- a., to ar- JAstreindre [a-sfra~'-c?/-J, v. ir., to 
 
 rest; to stop ; to catch. \ constrain. 
 
 s' Arreter [_sdr-rai-tay'~\, v. refl., to Attachement [a-tash-md"''], n. m., 
 
 stop ; to stand still. j attachment. 
 
 Arrive-e \dr-ree-vay'\ part., ar- Attacher [a-^asA-cry'], v. a., to tie ; 
 
 rived; happened. j to fasten. 
 
 Arrivee \dr-ree-vay'\ n. f., arrival, s' Attacher [sd-tdsh-ay'], v. refl., to 
 Arriver [a;--ree-t-ay'], v. n., fo ar-j be attached. 
 
 rive; to come up; to reach; to Atteignit [a-tain-yee'~\, ind., p. def., 
 
 happen. 3d sing., overtook. 
 
 Arsenal [ar-se-nal'~\, n.m., arsenal. Atteindre [a-ta'-dr~], v. ir., to ctf- 
 Art [a/ - ], n. m., a?-£. I tain. 
 
 Artieuler \_dr-tee-ku-lay'~\, v. a., to Attend \a-ta"~\, ind. pres., 3d sing., 
 
 enunciate ; to articulate. | aicaits. 
 
 As [a], ind. pres., 2d sing., from Attendait [a-td"-dai'\ iniperf., 3d 
 
 avoir, (thou) hast. I sing., awaited ; was awaiting. 
 
 Aspirer [a-spee-ray'~\, v. n., to as- Attendant [a-td-da''], part. , wait- 
 
 pire. j ing for. 
 
 Asseoir [a-swdr'~\,v. ir., to lay ; to Attendit \a-ta-dee'\ p. def., 3d 
 
 ])lace. j sing., awaited. 
 
 s' Asseoir [sa-sirar'], v. refl., to s^Attendrai \a-ta~-dray'~], 1st fut. 
 
 down ; to take a scat. 
 
 Assez [a-say'^\, adv., enough; quite. 
 
 Assidu-e [a-see-ofo'], adj., indus- 
 trious. 
 
 1st sing., (7) icill or s/<a// icaif^ 
 (7) shall await. 
 Attendre [a-td"'-dr~], v. ir., to wait 
 for; to wait; to await; to expect. 
 
 s'Assied [sa-see-ai'~], ind. pres., 3d s'Attendre [sa-ta"'-dr~\, v. refl., to 
 
 sing., (Ae) sits down. \ expect. 
 
 Assieds [a-see-ai'~], ind. pres., 1st Attendrir [a-ta'-dreer r ], v. a., to 
 
 sing., (I) place. 
 
 Assiette [a-see-etf], n. f., plate. 
 
 Assigne-e [a-scen-yo.y'~\, part., des- 
 ignated. 
 
 Assigner [a-seen-yay'~], v. a., to as- 
 sig?i ; to designate. 
 
 Assis-e [a-see', -seez'~\, part., seat- 
 ed; etre assis, to be seated. 
 
 m'Assis [wa-see'], ind., p. def., 1st 
 sing., (/) sat clown. 
 
 move ; to melt. 
 Attendrissement [a-td~~-drees-md~' / ~\, 
 
 n. m., emotion. 
 Attends [a-fcT'], pres., 1st sing, or 
 
 imper., wait; expect. _ 
 Attendu-e [a-td" -dii'~\, part., waited 
 
 for. 
 Attendu que [a-ttV-du ke], conj., 
 
 whereas ; because. 
 Attention [a-tdT-see-o~'~\, n. f., at- 
 
 Assistant [a-see-sta~'~\, n. m., by-\ tention ; faire attention, to pay at- 
 
 stander. \ tention. 
 
 Associe-e [a-so-see-ay'~\, part., as- Attester [a-tess-tay'], v. a., to at- 
 
 sociated. j test. 
 
 Assommer \_a-sd-may'~\, v. a., to Attira [a-tee-rd'\ p. def, 3d sing., 
 
 kill ; to batter. I attracted. 
 
 Assujettir [a-su-zhay-teer'~\, v. a.,Attirail \a-tee-r$'\ n. m., gear ; 
 
 to subject. j luggage. 
 
 Assurement [a-su-ray-ma~'~\, adv.,'Attirer [a-tee-ray''], v. a., to attract. 
 
 certainly; assuredly. s'Attirer [sa-tee-ray''], v. refl., to 
 
 Assurer [a-su-ray'~\, v. a., to assure.] get ; to gain for ones self. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 447 
 
 AUT 
 Attraire [a-trair'~\, v. ir., to attract. 
 Au [6], art., at the ; to the; in the. 
 Auberge [o-bairzh'~], n. f., tavern; 
 
 public house. 
 An cas que [o Tea! &£'], conj., in 
 
 case .that. 
 Aucun-e [o-ko^, -kun'~\, m-on.,any; 
 
 no; not any (with ne). 
 Au-dessous de [o-dg-sood'~], prep., 
 
 under ; beneath. 
 Augmente [og-mat''], pres., 3d 
 
 sing., augments ; increases. 
 Augmenter \og-ma'-tay'~\, v. a., to 
 
 augment; to increase. 
 Auguste \o-gust'~], adj., pompous ; 
 
 august. 
 Anjourd'hui [5-zhoor-duee'~\, adv., 
 
 to-day. 
 Auparavant [p-pa-rd-vcT'], adv., 
 
 before. 
 Aupres [o-prai'~], prep., near (foil. 
 
 by de) ; adv. , near ; close by. 
 Aura [p-ra~\, fut., 3d sing., loill 
 
 have. 
 Aurai [5-ray'~\, fut., 1st sing., (/) 
 
 shall have. 
 Aurez [p-ray'~], fut., 2d pi., (you) 
 
 icill have. 
 Auriez [5-ree-ay''], condit., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) would have. 
 Aurons [p-ro~'~\, fut., 1st pi., (we) 
 
 shall have. 
 Auront [o-rtf], fut., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 ivill have. 
 Aussi [o-see'], adv. , so ; as ; alt 
 
 too. 
 Aussi bien que \_o-see' bee-a' ke"\ 
 
 conj., as well as. 
 Aussitot \o-see-to'\ adv., at once 
 
 immediately ; directly. 
 Aussitot que [o-see-td' he"'], conj., 
 
 as soon as. 
 Autant [o-fcT'], adv., so much; so 
 
 many ; as much ; as many. 
 Autant que \o-ta"' &£'], conj., as 
 
 much as. 
 Autel [o-teW], n. m., altar. 
 Auteur [5-tdr'~], n. m., author. 
 Auteuil [o-/6'y'], name of a place. 
 Autoriser [o-tor-ee-zay'~\, v. a., to 
 
 authorize. 
 
 BAI 
 
 [o - toor' 
 
 Autour de \b~-toor 1 d$~\, prep., 
 around. 
 
 Autre [otr], pron., other ; un autre, 
 another. 
 
 Autrefois \o-tre-fwa~\, adv., for- 
 merly. 
 
 Autrichien-ne [o - tree - shee - a"', 
 -enn'~\, adj., Austrian; n. m., 
 Austrian. 
 
 Autrui [o-iru-ee'2, pron., others. 
 
 Aux [o], art., to the ; in the. 
 
 Auxerre [o-sai?*'^, Auxerre. 
 
 Avaient [av-ai'~\, imperf., 3d pi., 
 had. 
 
 Avais [av-ai'~\, imperf., 1st sing., 
 (/) had. 
 
 Avait [av-ai''], imperf., 3d sing., 
 had. 
 
 Avant [av-d~ / ~], prep., before. 
 
 Avant de, prep., before (with infin.). 
 
 Avant que [Are], conj., before ; ere. 
 
 Avare \av-ar'~\, adj., greedy; ava- 
 ricious; -a.m., miser. 
 
 Avec [av-ek'~], prep., with. 
 
 Avenir [av-neer], n. m., future. 
 
 A venture \_a-va-tilr'~\, n. f., affair ; 
 occurrence ; adventure. 
 
 s'A venturer \_sd - va- tu - ray'\ v. 
 refi., to venture. 
 
 Avert i-e [a-vair-tee'~\, part., ap- 
 prised. 
 
 Avertir [a-vair-teer''], v. a., to warn ; 
 to apprise. 
 
 Aviez [av-ee-ay'], imperf., 2d pi., 
 (you) had. 
 
 Avis [au-ee'j, n. m., opinion; ad- 
 vice. 
 
 Avise-e \a-vee-zay'~\, adj., prudent. 
 
 s'Aviser [sa-vee-zay'~\, v. refl., to 
 think (to, de). 
 
 Avoir [av-icar'~\, v. aux., to have; 
 avoir a, to have to ; must. 
 
 Avons [ay-o~'], pres., 1st pi., (we) 
 have. 
 
 Avouer [av-oo-ay'~\, v. a., to confess. 
 
 Ayant {jay-ya'''], part., having. 
 
 B. 
 
 Bagage [ba-gazh'~], n. m., baggage. 
 Bail [6£y], n. m., lease. 
 Bailli [ba-yee'~\, n. m., bailiff. 
 
448 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 BAT 
 
 Battler [ba-yay'], v. n., to gape ; to 
 yawn. 
 
 Baiser [bai-zay'], v. a.., to Jciss ; to 
 salute. 
 
 se Baissant [sg bai-sd"'], part., 
 stooping down. 
 
 se Baisser [se bai-say'], v. refl., to 
 stoop down. 
 
 Bal [bal], n. m., ball. 
 
 Balai [bdl-ay'], n. m., broom. 
 
 Balancer [bdl-d~-say'], v. a., to re- 
 flect. 
 
 Balayures [bdhay-yur'], n. f., pi., 
 sweepings. 
 
 Balbutiai [bdl-bii-see-ay'], p. def., 
 1st sing., (/) stammered. 
 
 Balbutier [bdl-bii-see-ay'], v. n., to 
 stammer. 
 
 Baleine [bdl-ain'], n. f., whale. 
 
 Bande [bd"d], n. f., company ; troop. 
 
 Banni-e [bd-nee'], part., banished. 
 
 Banque [bd~k], n. f., bank. 
 
 Baragouiner [bdr-d-goo-ee-nay'], v. 
 n., to jabber. 
 
 Baragouineur [bdr-d-goo-ee-nd?-'], 
 
 . n. m., jabberer. 
 
 Baril [bd-ree'], n. m., barrel. 
 
 Barque [bark], n. f., barque. 
 
 Barriere [bd?--ree-ai?-'], n. f., bar- 
 rier. 
 
 Barre-e [bd-ray'], part., obstructed; 
 stopped. 
 
 Bas [bd], n. m., stocking. 
 
 Bas-se [pa, bass'], adj., foa? ; en bas, 
 down stairs ; below ; ici bas, here 
 below. 
 
 Basse-cour [bdss-koor'], n.f., poul- 
 try-yard. 
 
 Bataille [bd-tiy], n. f., battle. 
 
 Bataillon [bd-td-yo"'], n. m., bat- 
 talion. 
 
 Bateau [bd-to'], n. m., boat; ba- 
 teau a vapeur, steamer. 
 
 Batiment [bd - tee - md""'], n. m., 
 building; ship. 
 
 Batir [bd-teer'], v. a., to Zraj7c?. 
 
 Baton [bd-to"'], n.m., stick ; cane. 
 
 Battit [6<z-?ee'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 beat; struck. 
 
 Battre \batr~], v. ir., to beat; to 
 strike. 
 
 BIS 
 
 se Battre [sS bdtr], v. refl., to fight. 
 
 Battront [bd-tro"'], frit., 3d plur., 
 (they) will beat. 
 
 Battu-e [bd-tu], part., beaten; rout- 
 ed. 
 
 Beat-e [bay-d', -at'], adj., devout ; 
 pious. 
 
 Beau [60], fem., belle [bell], adj., 
 ,/zwe ; beautiful ; handsome ; noble. 
 
 Beaucoup [bo-koo'], adv., much; 
 many. 
 
 Beau-frere [bo' -frair'], n. m., broth- 
 er-in-law. 
 
 Beaute [bo-tay 1 ], n. f., beauty. 
 
 Beaux [60], pi. m. of beau. 
 
 Becquee [bek-ay'], n. f., beak full; 
 billfull. 
 
 Bedeau [be-do], n. m., beadle. 
 
 Begue [baig], n. m., stammerer; 
 stutterer. 
 
 Bel [bell], same as beau; stands 
 before a masc. noun commenc- 
 ing with a vowel. 
 
 Belle [bell], f. of beau. 
 
 Benin [bay-no,"'], f. benigne [bay- 
 neeny'], adj., kind; benign. 
 
 Benit-e [bay-nee', -neet'], adj., holy. 
 
 Bergere [bair-zhair'], n. f., shep- 
 herdess. 
 
 Besoin [be-zwd"'], n. m., need; 
 want ; necessity ; desire. 
 
 Betail [bay-tiy'], n. m., cattle. 
 
 Bete [bait], n.f., beast ; animal. 
 
 Beurre [bo?-], n. m., butter. 
 
 Bibliotbeque [bee-blee-o-taik'], n. 
 f., library. 
 
 Bien [bee-a"'], adv., well; very; 
 quite; bien du, des, etc., much; 
 ?nany. 
 
 Bien, n. m., good; blessing. 
 
 Bienfait [bee-a-fai'], n. m., bene- 
 fit; advantage. 
 
 Bien que [bee-a"' ke'], conj., though; 
 although. 
 
 Bientot [bee-a -to'], adv., soon f 
 pretty soon. 
 
 Bienveillance [bee-d"-vai-yd"ss'], n. 
 f., good-will ; favor. 
 
 Bijoutier [bee-zhoo-tee-ay r ], n. m., 
 jeweler. 
 
 Biscuit [biss-kii-ee 1 ], n. m., biscuit. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 449 
 
 BOU 
 
 Bizarre [bee-zdr'], adj., odd; fan- 
 tastical. 
 
 Blamer [bld-?nay'], v. a., to blame. 
 
 Blanc [bid"], f., blanche [bld"sh], 
 adj., white. 
 
 Blanche, f. of blanc. 
 
 Ble [blaif], n. m., corn. 
 
 Blesse-e [bless-ay'], part., wounded. 
 
 Blesser [bless-ay'], v. a. , to hurt ; 
 to wound ; to injure. 
 
 Bleu-e [6/0], adj., blue. 
 
 Boileau [bwd-lo'], proper name. 
 
 Boire [bwdr], v. ir., to drink. 
 
 Bois [bwd], n. m., wood; icoods ; 
 forest. 
 
 Bois [bwd], pres., 1st sing., (/) 
 drink. 
 
 Boit [bwa], pres., 3d sing., drinks. 
 
 Boite [bivdt], n. f., box ; case. 
 
 Bon-ne [bo~, bon], adj., good. 
 
 Bonheur [bon-nar'], n. m., happi- 
 ness ; joy. 
 
 Bonjour [bo"-zhoor ! ], n. m., good 
 day. 
 
 Bonne [bon], f. of bon. 
 
 Bonnet [bon-nai'], n. m., hat; cap ; 
 bonnet de nuit, night-cap. 
 
 Bonte [boT-tay'], n. f., goodness; 
 kindness (de, toi). 
 
 Bord [6or], n. m., shore; margin; 
 bank ; au bord de, by ; beside. 
 
 Border [bor-day'], v. a., to border. 
 
 Borne [born], n. f., bound ; bound- 
 ary ; limit. 
 
 Borner [bor-nay'], v. a., to limit ; to 
 confine. 
 
 Bouche [boosh], n. f., mouth ; lips. 
 
 Boucher [boo-shay'], n. m., butcher. 
 
 Boue [boo], n. f., mud ; filth. 
 
 Bougea [boo-zha], p. def., 3d sing., 
 moved; stirred. 
 
 Bouger [boo-zhay'], v. n., to move; 
 to stir. 
 
 Bouilli [boo-yee'], n. m., boiled meat. 
 
 Boulanger [boo-lcT-zhay'], n. m., 
 baker. 
 
 Boulevard [bool-vdr'], n. ra., bul- 
 iv ark ; boulevard. 
 
 Bourbon [boor-bo"'], n.m., Bourbon. 
 
 Bourgogne [boor-gon?'], f., Bur- 
 gundy. 
 
 CAB 
 
 Bourdonne [boor-don'], pres., 3d 
 sing., buzzes ; hums. 
 
 Bourdonner [boor-do-nay'], v. n., 
 to buzz, to hum. 
 
 Bourse [boorss], n. f., purse ; Ex- 
 change. 
 
 Bout [boo], n. m.,end; extremity. 
 
 Boute-en-train [boot-d"-tra], n. 
 m., the life and soul (of a com- 
 pany). 
 
 Bras [bra], n. m., arm. 
 
 Brave [brav], adj., worthy; brave. 
 
 Bravoure [brdv-oor'], n. f., gal- 
 lantry. 
 
 Bref-ve [breff, braiv], adj., short ; 
 concise. 
 
 Brillant-e [bree-yd"', -yd~t'], adj., 
 brilliant. 
 
 Brise [breez], n. f., breeze. 
 
 Brise-e [bree-zay'], part., broken; 
 bruised; bowed. 
 
 Briser [bree-zay'], v. a., to break. 
 
 Brouette [broo-etf], n. f., wheel- 
 barrow. 
 
 Brouette-e [broo - ett - ay'], part., 
 wheeled. 
 
 Brouetteur [broo-ett-dr'], n. m., 
 wheel-barrow-man. 
 
 Brouillard [broo-ydr'], adj., for 
 blotting ; papier brouillard, blot- 
 ting-paper. 
 
 Bruit [brti-ee], n. m., noise ; sound. 
 
 Bruler [brii-lay'], v. a., to burn; to 
 long. 
 
 Brusquement [brUsk-md"'], adv., 
 abruptly. 
 
 Brutalement [brU-tdll-md"'], adv.* 
 brutally. 
 
 Bruxelles [bru-sell'], Brussels. 
 
 Bu-e [bit], part., drunk ; drunken. 
 
 Buisson [bii-ee-so"'], n. m., bush; 
 thicket. 
 
 Buvant [bii-vd"'], part., d?ink- 
 ing. 
 
 C. 
 
 Ca [sah], contraction of "cela," 
 
 that. 
 Ca [sah], adv., here. 
 Cabinet [ka-bee-nai'], n. m., room; 
 
 study. 
 
450 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 se Cacha 
 
 CAR | CER 
 
 kasha'], p. def., 3d Casquette [kds-kett'], n. f., 
 
 sing., hid himself or herself. 
 Cache-e [kd-shay'], part., concealed. 
 Cachemire [leash - meer'], n. m., 
 
 cashmere. 
 Cacher [kd-shay], v. a., to conceal; 
 
 to hide. 
 se Cacher [sS kd-shay'], v. refl., to 
 
 hide one's self; to be concealed. 
 Cachet [kd-shai'], n. m., seal. 
 Cacheter [kdsh-tay'], v. a., to seal. 
 Cachetons [kdsh-to''], imper., 1st 
 
 pi., let us seal. 
 Cadeau [kd-do'], n. m., present; 
 
 gift- 
 
 Cadran [kd-drd"'], n. m., dial. 
 
 Caduc-que [kd-diik'], adj., decay- 
 ing. 
 
 Cafe' [kd-fay'], n. m., coffee. 
 
 Cage [kdzh], n. f., cage; housing 
 (for bells). 
 
 Caillou [kd-yoo'], n. m., pebble. 
 
 Calabre [kd-ld-br], n. f., Calabria 
 
 Calculer [kdl-kii-lay'~], v. a., to com- 
 pute ; to reckon. 
 
 Calomnie [kdl-om-nee'], ind. pres., 
 
 cap. 
 
 Calomnier [kdl-om-nee-ay'], v. a., 
 to slander. 
 
 Camarade [kdm - a - rdd '], n. m., 
 comrade. 
 
 Camp [&<T], n. m., camp. 
 
 Campagne [kd^-pdny'], n. f., field ; 
 country ; campaign. 
 
 Camus-e [kd-mii', -muz], adj., 
 flat ; snub (of a nose). 
 
 Capable [kd-pd'-bl], adj., capable. 
 
 Capitaine [kd-pee-tain'], n. m., cap- 
 tain. *" 
 
 Capone [kd-poo'], n., Capua. 
 
 Car [kdr~], cow]., for. 
 
 Caractere [kar-dk-tair'], n. m., 
 character ; characteristic. 
 
 Caresse [kdr-ess'], n. f., caress. 
 
 Caresser [kdr-ess-ay], v. a., to fon- 
 dle; to caress. 
 
 Caricature [kdr-ee-kd-tuY], n. f., 
 caricature. 
 
 Carte [karf], n. f., chart; carte a, 
 payer, bill; account. 
 
 Carton [kar-to""'], n. m., pasteboard. 
 
 Casser [ka-say'], v. a., to break. 
 Caton [kd-to '], n. m., Cafo. 
 Cauchemar [A:osA - ?«d>'], n. m., 
 
 nightmare. 
 Causait [ko-zai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 chatted. 
 Cause [koz], n. f., cause; a cause 
 
 de, on account of 
 Causer [ko-zay'], v. a., to occasion; 
 
 v. n., to chat. 
 Causeur [ko-zdr'l, n. ra., talker; 
 
 tattler. 
 Cavalier [kd -vdl-yay'], n. m., 
 
 trooper. 
 Cave [kdv], n. f., cellar. 
 Ce [se], pron., ifos; Mo/. 
 Ceci [se-see'], pron., this. 
 Ceder [say-day'],\. n., to give place; 
 
 to yield. 
 Ceindre [sd~"-dr], v. ir., to sur- 
 round. 
 Cela [sS-lah'], pron., that. 
 Celebre [say-lai'-br], adj., distin- 
 guished. 
 Celebre'-e [say -lay -bray'], part., 
 
 celebrated. 
 Celebrite [say-lay-bree-tay'], n. f., 
 
 distinction. 
 Celle [sell], pron. f., Maf ; the one. 
 Celtique [sel-teelc], adj., Celtic. 
 Celui [se/-iiee'], pron. m., he; the 
 
 one (who, qui ; whom, que). 
 Celui-ci [sel-iiee-see'], pron., the 
 
 latter. 
 Celui-la [sel-uee-lah'], pron., the 
 
 former. 
 Cendres [sa~'dr], n. f., pi., ashes. 
 Cent [sa], num., a or one hundred. 
 Centime [sd" -teem'], n. m., centime 
 
 (hundredth part of a franc). 
 Cependant [spd~-da~'], adv., still; 
 
 however; yet. 
 Ce que [se kg'], that which ; what ; 
 
 that. 
 Ce qui [se kee'], which ; what. 
 Cerbere [sair-bair'], n. m., Cerbe- 
 rus. 
 Cerise [se-reez'], n. f., cherry. 
 Certain-e [sair-taT\ -tain'], adj., 
 
 sure; certain. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 451 
 
 CHA 
 
 Certainement [mir-tam-ma'], adv., 
 
 certainly ; surely. 
 Cerveau [sair-vo], n. m., brains. 
 Ces [say], pron. pi., these; those. 
 Ce sont^[s£ so''], they are; those 
 
 are. 
 Cesse [sess], from cesser ; cease. 
 Cesser [sess-ay'], v. n., to cease ; to 
 
 stop. 
 Cesserent [sess-air'], p. def., 3d pi., 
 
 {they) ceased. 
 C'est [sai], it is ; that is. 
 C'est-a-dire [sai-ta-deer'], that is to 
 
 say ; i. e. 
 Cet [sett], pron., this; that. 
 Ceux [so], pron. pi., those. 
 Chacun-e [shd-ko"', -kiln], pron 
 
 each ; each one. 
 Chagrin [shd-grd"'], n. m., sorrow ; 
 
 grief. 
 Chagriner [shd-gree-nay'], v, a., to 
 
 grieve ; to afflict. 
 Chair [shair], n. f., flesh. 
 Chaise [shaiz], n. f., chair. 
 Chambre [sha'-br], n. £, room; 
 
 chamber. 
 Champ [sha"], n. m., field ; sur-le- 
 
 champ, immediately ; at once. 
 Chancelant [shcTss - la"'], part., 
 . wavering. 
 Chandelier [shd"-de-lyay'], n. m., 
 
 candlestick. 
 Changement [shd"zh-md"'], n. m., 
 
 change. 
 Changer [slid" - zhay'], v. a., to 
 
 change. 
 se Changerait [se shd"zh-rai'], con- 
 
 dit., 3d sing., would be changed. 
 Chanson [sha -so"'], n. f., song; 
 
 ballad; chansons, nonsense. 
 Chant [sha"], n. m., song. 
 Chante [slid t], from chanter. 
 Chantent [sha t], from chanter. 
 Chanter [shd"-tay'], v. a., to sing ; 
 
 to chant. 
 Chanterai [sha"- t - ray'], fut., 1st 
 
 sing., (/) shall sing. 
 Chapeau [shd-po"'], n. m., hat. 
 Chapelier [shdp-e-lyay 1 ], n. m., hat- 
 ter. 
 Chapon [shd-po"'], n. m., capon. 
 
 CHE 
 
 Chaque [shdk], pron., each; every. 
 
 Charabia [shar-db-ee-ah'], n., jar- 
 gon. 
 
 Charbonnier [shdr-bon-yay'], n. m., 
 coalman. 
 
 Charge [sharzh], 3d sing., pres., 
 charges ; lays ; puts. 
 
 Charge'-e [shar-zhay'], part. , laden ; 
 loaded down ; commissioned (with, 
 de). 
 
 Charger [shar-zhay'], v. a., to 
 charge; to load; to lay. 
 
 Charite [shdr-ee~tay'], n. f., char- 
 ity. 
 
 Charles [sharl], Charles. 
 
 Charmant-e [shdr-md"', -md"t'], 
 adj., delightful. 
 
 Charme [shdrm], n. m., charm. 
 
 Charmille [shdr-jneey'], n. f., hedge. 
 
 Charpentier [shdr-pd"-tyay / ], n. 
 m., carpenter. 
 
 Chasser [shd-say'], v. a., to drive 
 away ; to drive off ; to dismiss ; 
 to urge on. 
 
 Chasuble [shd-zu-bl], n. f., chasu- 
 ble (priest's robe). 
 
 Chat [shah], n. m., cat. 
 
 Chateau [shd-to], n. m., castle; 
 country-seat. . 
 
 Chaumiere [sho-mee-air'], n. f., 
 cottage; hut. 
 
 Chemin [she-ma"'], n. m., road; 
 way ; chemin de fer, railway. 
 
 Cheminee [she - mee - nay'], n. f., 
 fireplace ; chimney. 
 
 Chene [shain], n. m., oak. 
 
 Chenets [she-nai'], n. m., pi., and- 
 irons. 
 
 Cher-e [shair], adj., dear. 
 
 Cherchai [shair-shay'], p. def., 1st 
 sing., (7) sought; strove. 
 
 Cherchant [shaii-slm'], part., look- 
 ing \for. 
 
 Cherche [shairsli], pres., 3d sing., 
 seeks; looks for. 
 
 Chercher [shair-shay'], v. a., to 
 look for ; to seek ; to strive (a, 
 to). 
 
 Cheri-e [shay-ree'], adj., beloved; 
 admired. 
 
 Cheval [she-vat'], n. m., horse. 
 
452 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 CLA 
 
 Chevalier [shg-val-yay''], n. m., 
 
 knight; gentleman. 
 Chevaux [she-vb"\ n.m., pi., horses. 
 Chevet [shS-vai'2, n. m., head (of a 
 
 bed). 
 Cheveux [she-vd'~\, n. ra., pi., hair ; 
 
 locks. 
 Chez [shay], prep., at; with; at 
 
 the house of; in. 
 Chien [shee-a'~\, n. m., dog. 
 Chimie [shee-mee'~], n. f, chemistry. 
 Choeur \kdr~\, n. m., choir. 
 Choisi-e [shwd-zee'\ part., chosen. 
 Choisir [shwd-zeer'~\, v. a., to choose ; 
 
 to make choice. 
 Choisit [shwd-zee'~\, pres. or p. def., 
 
 3d sing., selects; selected. 
 Chose \_shoz~], n. f., thing. 
 Christ [krist], n., Christ (Je'sus- 
 
 Christ is pronounced zhay-zu- 
 
 kree'). 
 Chute [shut], n. f.,fall. 
 Ci [see], adv., here. 
 Ciboire [see-bwdr'~\, n. m., pyx; 
 
 ciborium. 
 Ciceron [see-say-ro"'], Cicero. 
 Cicerone [see-say-ron'~\, n. ra., cice- 
 rone ; guide. 
 Ciel [see-ell~], n.m., heaven ; sky. 
 Cieux [see-o], n. m., pi., heavens ; 
 
 skies. 
 Cigue \see-gu~\, n. f., hemlock. 
 Ci-joint-e [see-zhwa, -zhwat], 
 
 adj., annexed. 
 Cinq [sank; before a consonant 
 
 s<T], num., Jive. 
 Cinquante [sd~-ka""t r ], num., fifty. 
 Circonscrire [seer-ko~-skreer'~\, v. 
 
 ir., to circumscribe. 
 Circonvenir [seer-ko"-ve-neer'~\, v. 
 
 ir., to circumvent. 
 Ciseau [see-zo'~\, n. m., scissors. 
 Citer [see-tay \, v. a., to cite; to 
 
 summon ; to mention. 
 Citoyen [see-twd-ya'~\, n. m., citi- 
 zen. 
 Citron [see-tro~ r \, n. m., citron; 
 
 lime. 
 se Classe [se kltiss~], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 classes itself. 
 Classer [kid-say'], v. a., to class. 
 
 COM 
 
 Clef \Jclay], n. f., key. 
 
 Clement-e [May-ma", ~md"t], adj., 
 
 merciful ; clement. 
 Clerc [klair~\, n. m., clerk. 
 Climat [klee-md'~], n. m., climate. 
 Cloclie [kldsh~], n. f., bell. 
 Clocher [klo-shay'~\, n. m., steeple ; 
 
 belfy. 
 Cocher [kd-shay'~\, n. m., coachman. 
 Cceur [&6'r], n. m., heart; courage. 
 Cognee [kon-yay'~\, n. f., axe; 
 
 hatchet. 
 Coin [kwa'\ n. m., corner. 
 Colere [kd-lair'\ n. f., anger ; en 
 
 colere, angry. 
 Colline [kol-hen r \, n. f., hill. 
 Colonel [ko-lo-nell'\ n.m., colonel 
 Colossal-e [ko-ld-sal'~\, adj., colos-, 
 
 sal. 
 Combat [ko~-ba], n. m., struggle) 
 
 contest. 
 Combat [ko"-bd'~\, pres., 3d sing., 
 
 fights. 
 Combattre [ko~-bdt'-r~\, v. ir., to 
 
 fight. 
 Combien [ko~-bee-a~"'~\, adv., how 
 
 much; how many; combien de 
 
 temps, how long; combien de 
 
 fois, how often. 
 Commandent [ko-md~d~\, 3d pi., 
 
 (they) command ; order. 
 Commander [ko-ma~-day'~\, v. a., 
 
 to command ; to order. 
 Comme [kom~], adv.,4ike; as. 
 Commencement [ko-ma'ss-md"'], 
 
 n. m., commencement; beginning. 
 Commencer [ko-md~~-say'~], v. a., to 
 
 commence ; to begin. 
 Comment [ko-vw'~\, adv., how. 
 Commentant [ko-md~-td~''], part., 
 
 annotating. 
 Commenter [ko-md"-tay'~\, v. a., to 
 
 comment on. 
 Commercial-e [ko - mair - see - &l'~\, 
 
 adj., btisiness-like. 
 Commettre [ko-mettr'~\, v. ir., to 
 
 commit. 
 Commission [ko-mee-see-o~'], n. f., 
 
 errand. 
 Commune [ko-miin'], n. f., com- 
 mune; parish. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 453 
 
 CON 
 
 Communiquait [ko-mu-nee-kai'~], 
 imperf., 3d sing., communicated. 
 
 Compagne [ko~-pdny'], n. f., com- 
 panion. 
 
 Compagnie []co~ '-pan-yee'\ n. f., 
 company; society. 
 
 Compagnon [ko~-pan-yo~'~\, n. m., 
 companion. 
 
 Comparable \ko~-par-a -bl\ adj., 
 to be compared ; comparable. 
 
 Comparaison \ko~ -par-ai-zo~'\ n. 
 f., comparison. 
 
 Comparaitre \_ko~-par-ai'-tr~], v. ir., 
 to appear. 
 
 Compatriote \ko" '-pd-tree-of], n.m., 
 countryman. 
 
 Complaire \]co~-plair'\ v. ir., to 
 humor. 
 
 Complet-e \ko~~-phi', -plait'\ adj., 
 complete ; full. 
 
 Complice [ko^-pleess^, adj., accom- 
 plice ; accessory to. 
 
 Composer \]co~-po-zay'~], v. a., to 
 compose ; v. refl., to be made up. 
 
 Comprenait \ko~-pre J -nai'\ imperf., 
 3d sing, of comprendre ; under- 
 stood. 
 
 Comprend \ko"-prcT r \, pres., 3d 
 sing., understands. 
 
 Comprendre [ko'-prd~ / -dr~], v. ir., 
 to understand. 
 
 Comprends [ko~-prd~'], pres., 1st 
 •sing., (/) understand. 
 
 Comprenez \_ko~-pre-nay'\ pres., 
 2d pi. , (you) understand. 
 
 Compris-e \ko'-pree\ -preez'~], part., 
 understood. 
 
 Compris \ko~-pree'~\, p. def., 1st 
 sing., (7) xinderstood. 
 
 Comprit \]co "-pree'~\, p. def., 3d 
 sing., understood; saw clearly. 
 
 Compromettre \]co~-pro-mettr'\ v. 
 ir., to compromise. 
 
 Comptais \ko~-tai'~\, from compter. 
 
 Compte \_ko~t], n. m., computation. 
 
 Compte-e \ko~-tay'~\, part., num- 
 bered. 
 
 Compter []co~-tay'~\, v. a., to count 
 out ; to count ; to intend. 
 
 Concierge \lco~-see-airzh'~\, n. m 
 porter ; door-keeper. 
 
 CON 
 
 Concitoyen \ko~-see-twd-yd"'\ n. 
 m. , fellow -citizen. 
 
 Concourir \ko~ -koo-reer'\ v. ir., to 
 concur. 
 
 Condamnev [ko~-da-nay'~], v. a., to 
 condemn. 
 
 Condescendre \ko~-de-sa"'-dr~\, v. 
 n., to condescend. 
 
 Condition \ko~ -dee-see-o~'~\, n. f., 
 station ; condition. 
 
 Conducteur [_ko"-duk-tor''], n. m., 
 conductor; guard (of a stage- 
 coachj. 
 
 Conduire \ko~ -du-eer'~\, v. ir., to 
 conduct ; to lead. 
 
 Conduisait [ko~ " -du-ee-zai'\ imperf., 
 3d sing., guided ; brought. 
 
 Conduisant \]co"-du-ee-za'\ part., 
 driving. 
 
 Conduisez \ko~-du-ee-zay\ show; 
 guide, from conduire. 
 
 Confesser [_ko~-fess-ay'~\, v. a., to 
 confess. 
 
 Confire \kd~-feer'\ v. ir., to pre- 
 serve. 
 
 se Confond [s8 ko~-fo~'~\, pres., 3d 
 sing., blends. 
 
 Confondre [ko~-fo~ r -dr~], v. ir., to 
 confound ; to blend. 
 
 se Confondre [se ko~-fo~'-dr~\, v. 
 refl., to be confused ; to blend. 
 
 Confus-e [ko"-fu, -fuz'~], part.,cora- 
 fused. 
 
 Confinement [ko"-fu - zay - ma'\ 
 adv. , confusedly ; je sais confuse- 
 ment, I have a confused knowl- 
 edge of. 
 
 Confusion \]coT-fu-zee-o'\ n. f., 
 confusion. 
 
 Conge \ko~-zhay'\ n. m., leave ; ab- 
 sence ; vacation. 
 
 Conjoindre []co~-zhwa''-dr], v. ir., 
 to join. 
 
 Conjugaison \Jco~-zM-gai-zo~'~\, n. 
 f., conjugation. 
 
 Conjure-e \ko~-zhu-ray'~\, part., 
 conjured ; conspired. 
 
 Conjurer \ko~ zhu-ray'~\, v. a., to 
 conjure ; to conspire against. 
 
 Connais \ko-nai'~\, pres., 1st sing., 
 (/) know ; am acquainted with. 
 
454 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 CON CON 
 
 Connaissance [ko-nai-sd~ss% n. f.J to gaze upon ; to survey ; to med- 
 
 know ledge ; acquaintance. \ itate ; to contemplate. 
 
 Connaissez [ko-nai-say'~\, know ; are Contenait [ko~-t-nai'~], imperf., 3d 
 
 acquainted with ; from connaitre. sing., contained. 
 Connait [}:o-nai~\, pres., 3d sing., Contenir [ko~-t-neer'~\, x. ir., to con- 
 is acquainted with. | tain. 
 Connaitre [ko-nai' -tr~], x. ir., to Content-e \Jco~-td~', -ta~t'~], adj., 
 
 know; to be acquainted with ; se satisfied; contented. 
 
 faire connaitre a, to make one's Conter [ko~-tay'~\, v. a., io relate ; 
 
 self known to. to tell; to talk. 
 
 Connu-e [ko-riW], part., known. jConterai \_ko~-t-ray'~\, fat., 1st sing., 
 Conquerir \_ko"-kay-reer'~\, x. a., to\ (7) shall relate. 
 
 conquer. iContester [fco^'-tess-tay''], v. a., to 
 
 Conseil [ko^-saiy''], n. m., advice. | dispute. 
 Conseiller [ko~-sai-yay'~\, v. a., to Contient [ko"~ tee - of'], pres., 3d 
 
 counsel; to advise. sing., contains. 
 
 Consentir [ko~-sd~-teer'], x. ir., to Continuant \ko~-tee-nu-a~'~\, part., 
 
 consent ; to agree. I pursuing. 
 
 Consentit [ko~-sd~-tee''], p. def., 3d Continuei-le \ko~-tee-nu-ell'~\, adj., 
 
 sing., consented ; agreed. incessant. 
 
 Consequent \_ko~- say - ka'~\ ; par Continuellement [}:o~- tee -nil- ell- 
 
 consequent, adv., consequently, j via~'~\, adv., continually. 
 Conserve \ko~ -sairv'~\, pres., (7) Continuer \}zo" -tee-nu-ay'\ v. n., to 
 
 preserve or {he) preserves. | continue; to keep on. 
 
 Conserver \ko~-sair-vay'~\, v. a., to, Contour [&o~ioor'J, n. m., maze; 
 
 preserve. \ quirk. 
 
 Considerable \ko~ -see-day-ra -hi], Contraindre \Jco~-tra''-dr'], v. ir., to 
 
 adj., considerable. | compel ; to restrain. 
 
 Considere-e [ko^- see - day - ray'~], Contraire \}co~-trair'~\, adj., contra- 
 
 part., respected ; looked up to. | ry ; au contraire, on the contrary. 
 Consister \}co" -see-stay'\ x. n., to Contrarie-e \ko" -trd-ree-ay'\ part., 
 
 consist. annoyed ; vexed. 
 
 Consolateur - trice \Jco~- so -la-tor'. Contre \ko"'-tr\ ) prep., against; 
 
 -treess'~\, adj., consoling. I with. 
 
 Consolation [ko~'-sd-ld-see-o'~'~], n. Contredire [ko'-tre-deer'], x. ir., to 
 
 f., solace. j gainsay; to contradict. 
 
 Consoler [ko"-so-lay r ], x. a., to coh- Con tree [£©~-*ray'], n. f., region; 
 
 sole ; io comfort. | country. 
 
 Consonne [^ro'-so^'], n. f., conso- Contrefaire [/.V-fre^/hzr'], x. ir., 
 
 raaTrt. | io imitate. 
 
 Constant-e \]:o"-stcr\ sta~t'~\. adj.,Contrevenir \J:o~-t? , e-v-neer'], v. ir., 
 
 constant ; steadfast. J io violate ; to infringe. 
 
 Constamment [ko""-std-md~'~\, adv.,|Contribner \}io"-tree-bu-ay'\ x. a., 
 
 constantly. j to contribute. 
 
 Construire \ko~-stru-eer'\ x. ir., to Convaincre [foT-vif-kr], x. ir., to 
 
 build; to construct. I convince. 
 
 Consul [ko~-sul^\, n. m., consul. jConvaincu-e \Jco"-va'-ku r \, part., 
 Conte [ko~i], n. m., story; tale. \ convinced. 
 Contemplateur \ L ko~-ta-pld-tor''], Convcnir \ko" '-ve-neer'\ x. ir., to 
 
 n. m., dreamer. j agree; to suit ; to please. 
 
 Contenipler \ko~-ta~-play'\ v. a., se Convertir [se ko ' -vair-teer'\ x^ 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 455 
 
 COU 
 
 refl., to be changed; to be con- 
 verted. 
 
 Conviennent \ko" -vee-enn'], 3d pi., 
 pres., (they) please. 
 
 Convient [ko'-vee-a], v. unip., it is 
 proper. 
 
 Convive [ko~-veev']', n. m. f., guest. 
 
 Convoi [ko"-vwd'], n. m., train ; 
 convoi de grande vitesse, ex- 
 press-train. 
 
 Copeau [ko-po'], n. m., chip ; shav- 
 ing. 
 
 Coquin [/co-fop], n.m., knave; ras- 
 cal; rogue ; maitre coquin, arch- 
 rogue. 
 
 Corbeille [kor-bai^], n. f., basket. 
 
 Cordialite [kor-dee-dl-ee-tay 1 ], n. 
 f., cordiality. 
 
 Corneille {/cor-ncd?'], name of a 
 jjoet. 
 
 Corps [kor], n. m., body. 
 
 Correct-e [kor-rek', -rekt'], adj., 
 correct. 
 
 Correspondance {kor - ress -po~- 
 dd"ss'], n. f., correspondence. 
 
 Corrompre [kor-rcT'-pr], v. ir., to 
 corrupt. 
 
 Corsaire [kor-sair'], n.m., corsair. 
 
 Cortege [kor-taizh'], n. m., suite; 
 train. 
 
 Cote [/cot], n. f., rib ; cote a cote, 
 side by aide. 
 
 Cote' [ko-tay'], n. m., side ; de son 
 cote', on his part ; a cote de, by 
 the side of. 
 
 Cotillon [ko-tee-yo""], n. m., petti- 
 coat. 
 
 Cou [koo], n. m., neck. 
 
 Couehsiient [koo-shai'], imperf., 3d 
 pi., (they) slept. 
 
 se Couchant [se koo-sltbT'], part., 
 going to bed. 
 
 Coucher [koo-shay'], v. n., to sleep; 
 to lie down. 
 
 Coucher [koo-shay'], n. m., setting; 
 bed. 
 
 se Coucher [sg koo-shay'], v. refl., 
 to go to bed; to lie down; to 
 rest ; to retire. 
 
 Coudoie [koo-dwd'], pres., 3d sing., 
 Che) elbows ; jogs. 
 
 CKA 
 
 Coudoyer [koo-dwa-yay'], v. a., to 
 elbow. 
 
 Couler [koo- lay'], v. n., to flow ; to 
 glide. 
 
 Couleur [koo-lor'], n. f., complex- 
 ion ; color. 
 
 Coup [koo], n. in., blow ; stroke; 
 tout a coup, all at once ; sudden- 
 ly ; coup de baton, blow. 
 
 Coupable [koo-pd'-bl], adj., guilty. 
 
 Coupe [koo-pay'], n. in., car ; car- 
 riage. 
 
 Couper [koo-pay'], v. a., to cut. 
 
 Couple [koo' -pi], n. f., couple. 
 
 Cour [koor], n. f., court; yard. 
 
 Courage [koor-azh], n. m., courage. 
 
 Courageux-se [koor-dzh-o' , -6z'], 
 adj., courageous. 
 
 Couvez [koo-ray'], run. 
 
 Courir [koo-reer'], v. ir., to run. 
 
 Couronne [koo-ron'], n. f., crown. 
 
 Couronne-e [koo -r 6 -nay'], part., 
 crowned. 
 
 Course [koorss], n. f., race; course; 
 gait. 
 
 Coursier [koor - see - ay'], n. m., 
 courser; steed. 
 
 Coursiere [koor - see - ah-'], n. f., 
 steed. 
 
 Court-e [koor, koo?-t], adj., short. 
 
 Cousine [koo-zeen'], n. f., cousin. 
 
 Coute [koot], pres., costs. 
 
 Couteau [koo-to'], n.m., knife. 
 
 Coutelas [koot-ld], n. m., cutlass. 
 
 Couter [koo-tay'], y. a., to cost. 
 
 Couvert-e [koo-vair', -vairt], part., 
 covered. 
 
 Couvrir [koo-vreer']. v. ir., to cover. 
 
 Craie [krai], n. f., chalk. 
 
 Craignez [krain-yay'\fear. 
 
 Craindre [hra'-dr], v. ir., to fear. 
 
 Crains [krd"], from craindre ; fear ; 
 (I) far. 
 
 Craint-e [krd~ ,krd~t], part., feared. 
 
 Crainte [kra~t], n. f., fear; de 
 crainte de — que, for fear of — 
 that. 
 
 Crane [krdn], n. m., skull. 
 
 Craquer [krd-kay'], v. a., to crack ; 
 to crisp. 
 
 Cravate [krd-vdf], n. f., cravat. 
 
456 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 CUS 
 
 Creature [kray-d-tiir'], n. f., crea- 
 ture. 
 
 Credule [kray-d'dl'], adj., credulous. 
 
 Creux [krd], n. m., depth; hollow. 
 
 Cri [kree], n. m., cry. 
 
 Cria [kree-ah'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 called out ; exclaimed. 
 
 Crie [kree], pres., 3d sing., ex- 
 claims. 
 
 Crier [kree-ay'], v. n., to exclaim ; 
 to call out. 
 
 Crin [kraT], n. m., hair ; mane. 
 
 Croira [krwd-rah'], fut., 3d sing., 
 will think ; will believe. 
 
 Croire [krwdr], v. ir., to think; to 
 suppose; to believe. 
 
 Crois [krwd], pres., 1st sing, 
 think; suppose; believe. 
 
 Croiser [krwd-zay'], v. a., to pass. 
 
 Croups [kroop], n. f., roof (of a 
 church). 
 
 Croute [kroot], n. f., crust. 
 
 Croyais [krwd-yai'], imperf., 1st 
 sing., (/) thought ; (/) supposed. 
 
 Croyant [krwd-yd"'], part., believ- 
 ing. 
 
 Ci'oyez-vous [krwd-yay-voo'], do 
 you suppose? 
 
 Croyons [krwd-yo" r ], imper., 1st 
 pi., let us trust ; let us believe. 
 
 Cru-e [&ntj, part., believed; sup- 
 posed. 
 
 Cruel-le [kril-eW], adj., cruel. 
 
 Crus [kru], p. def., 1st sing., (7) 
 thought. 
 
 Crut [kru], p. def., 3d sing., (he) 
 thought; supposed; believed. 
 
 Cueillir [ko-yeer'], v. ir., to gather ; 
 to win. 
 
 Cuire [kileer], v. ir., to cook. 
 
 Cuisine [kilee-zeen'], n. f., kitchen. 
 
 Cuivre [kiiee'-vr], n. m., copper. 
 
 Culbute-e [kiil-bii-tay'], part., over- 
 thrown. 
 
 Cultive-e [kill-tee-vay'], part., cul- 
 tivated. 
 
 Curiaces [kil-ree-ass'], n. m., pi., 
 the Curiatii. 
 
 Curie ux-se [kii-ree-o', -6z'], adj., 
 curious. 
 
 Custode [kiis-tod'], n. ra., guardian. 
 
 DEC 
 D. 
 
 , for de, before a vowel or h mute. 
 D'abord [da-bor'], adv., at first. 
 Daigner [dain-yay'], v. n., to deign. 
 Daim [da''], n. m., deer; buck. 
 Dame [dam], n. f., lady. 
 Danger [dd'-zhay'], n. m., danger. 
 Dangereux-se [dazh-ro', -roz'], 
 
 adj., dangerous. 
 Danois-e [dan-wa, -wdz'], adj., 
 
 Danish. 
 Dans [da"], prep., in; into ; with. 
 Dater [dd-tay'], v. a., to date. 
 Davantage [ddv - a"- tdzh'], adv., 
 
 more. 
 /De [de], prep., of; from; with; 
 
 by ; for ; to ; at. 
 De [day], n. m., thimble. 
 De'bacher [day-bd-shay'], v. a., to 
 
 unload. 
 De'bacheur [day-bd-shbr], n. m., 
 
 the one who unloads. 
 Debarbouiller [day-bar-boo-yay'], 
 
 v. a., to wash. 
 Debarquer [day-bar-kay'], v. a., to 
 
 land. 
 se Debarrasser [se day-bar-d-say'], 
 
 v. refl., to rid one's self of . 
 se Debattant [se day-bd-td "], pres. 
 
 part., struggling. 
 Debattre [day-bat' -tr], v. ir., to de- 
 bate; v. refl., to struggle. 
 Debout [dS-boo'], adv., standing; 
 
 restai debout, I stood. 
 Deboutonnai [day -boo -to -nay'], p. 
 
 def., 1st sing., I unbuttoned. 
 Deboutonner [day-boo-to -nay'], v. 
 
 a., to unbutton. 
 Debut [day-bu], n. m., beginning ; 
 
 entrance. 
 Decadence [day-ka-dd"ss'], n. f., 
 
 decline. 
 se Decider [se day -see-day'], v. refl., 
 
 to decide. 
 Declarer [day-kld-ray'], v. a., to de- 
 clare. 
 Declin [day - kld~'], n. m., close; 
 
 fall. 
 Declore [day-klor], v. defect., to 
 
 unclose. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 457 
 
 DEF I DEM 
 
 Decocher [day-ko-shay'], v. a., to se Defier [se day-fee-ay'], v. refl., 
 
 discharge ; to let fly. to distrust. 
 
 Deconfire [day-koT-feer'], v. ir., to Defini-e [day -fee - nee], adj., def 
 
 discomjit. inite. 
 
 Decoudre [day-kod '-dr], v. ir., ioDegarnir [day-gar -neer'], v. a., to 
 
 unsew ; to rip. 
 
 De'courager [day-koo-ra-zhay'], v. 
 a., to discourage. 
 
 Decouvert-e [day-koo-vair' , -vairt'], 
 part., discovered ; exposed. 
 
 Decouverte [day-koo-vairt'], n. f., 
 discovery. 
 
 Decouvrir [day-koo-vreer], v. ir., 
 to discover. 
 
 De crainte [dS kra~t'], for fear 
 (que) that ; (de) of. 
 
 Decrire [day-kreer'], v. ir., to de 
 scribe. 
 
 Decroitre [day-krwd'-tr], v. ir., to 
 decrease. 
 
 Dedaigne-e [day-dain-yay'], part., 
 despised. 
 
 Dedaigner [day-dain-yay'], v. a., to 
 disdain; to despise. 
 
 Dedaigneusement [day-dain-yoz- 
 ma~'], adv., scornfully. 
 
 Dedain [day-da 1 ], n. m., contempt; 
 disgust. 
 
 De'die'-e [day -dee-ay'], part., dedi- 
 cated. 
 
 Dedier [day-dee-ay'], v. a., to dedi- 
 cate. 
 
 se Dedire [s<? day-deer'], v. refl., to 
 disown. 
 
 Deduire [day-dil-eer'], v. ir., to 
 duct. 
 
 Defaire [day-fair'], v. ir., to defeat; 
 to undo. 
 
 Defaut [day -Jo'], n. m., defeat ; de- 
 fect ; fault. 
 
 Defendre [day-fa '-dr], v. a., to de 
 fend. 
 
 se Defendre [sS day-fa"' -dr], v., 
 refl., to defend one's self. 
 
 Defendu-e [day- fa -da], part., for 
 bidden ; defended. 
 
 Defense [day-fcTss'], n. f., defense, 
 
 Defie-e [day-fee-ay'], part., mis- 
 trusted ; refused to rely on. 
 
 Defier [day -fee-ay'], v. a., to dis- 
 trust. 
 
 weaken; to reduce. 
 Degarnisse [day-gar-neess 1 ], subj. 
 
 pres., may weaken; may thin; 
 
 may reduce. 
 Degre [dS-gray'], n. m., degree. 
 Dehors [de-or'], adv., outside ; out 
 
 of doors ; de dehors, from out- 
 side. 
 
 Deja [day-zha!], adv., already. 
 Dejeuner [day - zhd - nay'], n. m., 
 
 breakfast. 
 Dejoindre [day-zhwa' -dr], v. ir., 
 
 to disjoin. 
 Delaisse-e [day-lai-say'], adj., for- 
 saken. 
 Delicieux-se [day-lee-see-d', -oz'], 
 
 adj., delightful. 
 Delivre-e [day-lee-vray'], part., 
 
 freed; delivered. 
 Demain [de-ma"'], adv., to-morrow. 
 Demandant [de-ma -da"'], part., 
 
 asking. 
 Demander [de-ma -day'], v. a., to 
 
 ask ; to ask for. 
 Demanderais [de-ma -d-r-ai'], con- 
 
 dit., 1st sing., 7 would ask. 
 Demandez [dZ-ma-day 1 ], imper., 
 
 ask ; ask of. 
 Dementi [day-ma -tee'], n. m., dis- 
 appointment ; en avoir le demen^ 
 
 ti, to be disappointed. 
 Dementir [day-ma -teer'], v. ir., to 
 
 give the lie (to). 
 se Demettre [sS day-met' -tr], v. 
 
 refl., to resign. 
 Demeure [de-mdr'], n. f., dwelling ; 
 
 residence. 
 Demeure [de-mdr'], pres., 1st sing., 
 
 (I) dwell; stay; remain. 
 Demeurer [de-md-ray'], v. n., to 
 
 dwell; to remain; to stay. 
 Demeurez [dS -mo-ray'], remain; 
 
 dwell; stay. 
 Demi-e [dS-mee'], adj., half. 
 Democratic [day-mo-krd-see'], n, 
 
 f. democracy. 
 
458 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 DES 
 
 Demoiselle [de-mwd-zeW], n. f., 
 
 young lady. 
 Dent [da*], n. f., tooth. 
 Dentelle [da* -tell'], n. f., lace. 
 Depart [day-par'], n. in., depart- 
 ure; going. 
 se Departir [se day-par-teer'], v. 
 
 refl., to desist. 
 Depayser [day-pay-ee-zay'], v. a., 
 
 to expatriate ; to estrange. 
 Depayseraient [day-pay-ee-ze-rai], 
 
 condit., 3d pi., would expatriate ; 
 
 would banish ; would estrange. 
 se Depecher [se day-pai-shay], v. 
 
 refl., to make haste. 
 
 DET 
 
 Descendis [de-sd*-dee'], p. def.,lst 
 
 sing., / went down. 
 Descendre [de-sd*'-dr], v. n., to go 
 
 down ; to get out ; to get off. 
 Desenfler [day-za '-flay'], v. a., to 
 
 reduce. 
 Desert-e [day-zair', -zairt'], adj., 
 
 desert; baiven. 
 Desert [day-zair'], n. m., desert. 
 De'sespere-e [day- zess-pay-ray'], 
 
 part., in despair. 
 Desesperer [day-zess-pay-ray'], v. 
 
 n., to despair. 
 Desespoir [day-zess-pwdr'], n. m., 
 
 despair ; despondency. 
 
 Depeindre [day-pa*' -dr], v. h\, to se Deshabituer [se day-zd-bee-tii 
 
 describe. 
 
 Depend [day-pd"'], ind. pres., 3d 
 sing., depends. 
 
 Dependre [day-pd* 1 ' -dr], v. n., to 
 depend. 
 
 Depense [day-pd" ss'], n. f., expense ; 
 outlay. 
 
 Depenser [day-pd" -say'], v. a., to 
 expend. 
 
 De peur que [depor ke'], con]., lest. 
 
 Deplaire [day-plair'], v. ir., to dis- 
 please. 
 
 Deplaisais [day-plai-zqi'~], imperf., 
 1st sing., I was disagreeable. 
 
 Deplut [day-plii'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 displeased. 
 
 Deposer [day-po-zay'], v. a., to set 
 down. 
 
 De'pot [day-pa'}, n. m., depot; de- 
 posit. 
 
 Depuis [dS-piiee'], prep., since ;for; 
 adv., since ; from that time. 
 
 De'ranger [day-rd"-zhay'], v. a., to 
 disturb. 
 
 Dernier-e [dair-nee-ay' ', -air'}, adj., 
 last; lowest; meanest. 
 
 Derriere [dair-ree-air'~\, prep., be- 
 hind. 
 
 Des [day], art., of the ; from the ; 
 with the ; some ; any. 
 
 Des [dai], prep., /row. 
 
 Desapprendre [day-zd-prd"' -dr], v. 
 ir., to unlearn. 
 
 Desavouer [day-zd-voo-af], v. a., 
 to disavow. 
 
 ay'], v. refl., to break one's self 
 (of). 
 
 Designer [day-zeen-yay'], v. a., to 
 point out. 
 
 Desir [day-zeer'], n. m., desire. 
 
 Desirais [day-zee-rai], imperf., 1st 
 sing. , I desired. 
 
 Desirer [day -zee-ray'], v. a., to de- 
 sire ; to wish. 
 
 Desoeuvrement [day-zo-vre'-md*'], 
 n. m., want of occupation. 
 
 Desoler [day -zo -lay'], v. a., to des- 
 olate ; to lay waste. 
 
 Desordre [day-zor'-dr], n. m., con- 
 fusion ; disoj'der. 
 
 Desormais [day - zor - mai'], adv., 
 henceforth. 
 
 Des que [dai kg'], conj., as soon as. 
 
 Dessein [dS-sa"'], n. m., design; 
 plan. 
 
 Desservir '[dS-sair-veer'], v. ir., to 
 take away. 
 
 Dessous" [de-soo'], prep., under; 
 adv., under it ; under. 
 
 Dessus [de-su], prep. , above ; re- 
 prenait le dessus, (he) resumed 
 the ascendant. 
 
 Destin [dess-td"'], n. m., destiny ; 
 fate. 
 
 Destine-e [dess-tee-nay'], p., des- 
 tined. 
 
 Destinee [dess-tee-nay'], n. f.,fate; 
 destiny. 
 
 Detail [day-tiy'], n. m., detail; par- 
 ticular. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 459 
 
 DEV I 
 
 Deteindre [day-taT' -dr], v. ir., to, 
 discolor. 
 
 Detenir [day-t-neer'], v. ir., to de-\ 
 tain. 
 
 Determine-e [day-tair-mee-nay'], 
 part., resolved. 
 
 Determiner [day-tair-mee-nay'], v. 
 a., to determine. 
 
 se Determiner [sS day-tair-mee- 
 nay'], v. refl., to determine ; ta re- 
 solve. 
 
 Detourner [day-toor-nay'], v. a., to 
 turn aside ; to turn off. 
 
 Detresse [day-tress''], n. f., afflic- 
 tion ; anguish. 
 
 Detruire [day-trii-eer'], v. ir., to de- 
 stroy. 
 
 Detruit-e [day-trUee', -trileet'], part., 
 destroyed. 
 
 Deux [do], num., two ; deux fois, 
 twice. 
 
 Deuxieme [do -zee-aim'], num., sec- 
 ond. 
 
 Devais [dS-vai'], imperf.,lst sing., 
 I ought ; I should. 
 
 Devant [dS-vd"'], prep., before ; sur 
 le devant, in front. 
 
 Devenant [dev-nd"'], part., becom- 
 ing. 
 
 Devenir [dev-neer'], v. ir., to be- 
 come. 
 
 Devenu-e [dev-nu], part., become. 
 
 se Devetir [se day-vay-teer'], v. 
 refl., to undress. 
 
 Devez [de-vay'], pres., 2d pi., (you) 
 must; ought; owe. 
 
 Deviendront [dev-ee-a-dro"'], fat., 
 3d pi., (they) shall or will be- 
 come. 
 
 Devient [dS-vee-a''], pres., 3d sing., 
 becomes. 
 
 Deviner [de-vee-nay], v. a., to guess. 
 
 Devint [de-vd""'], p. def., 3d sing 
 became. 
 
 Devoile-e [day-vwd-lay'], part., dis- 
 closed; revealed. 
 
 Devoir [dS-vwdr'], n. m., duty 
 
 Devoir [de-vwdr], v. a. and n., to 
 owe ; ought ; must. 
 
 Devraient [dev-rai'], condit., 3d 
 pi., (they) ought ; should. 
 
 DIR 
 
 Dialogue [dee-d-log'], n. m., dia- 
 
 Diamant [dee-d-nm'], n. m., dia- 
 mond. 
 
 Dicte-e [deek-tay'], part., suggest- 
 ed; dictated. 
 
 Dictiorinaire [deek-see-o-nair'], n. 
 m., dictionary. 
 
 Didot [dee-do], name of a French 
 publisher. 
 
 Dieu [dee-o], n. m.,God. 
 
 Different-e [dee-fay-rd"', -rd"t'], 
 adj., different. 
 
 Differer [dee-fay-ray'], v. a., to de- 
 fer ; to delay. 
 
 Difficile [dee-fee-seel], adj., diffi- 
 cult. 
 
 Difficulte' [dee-fee-kill-tay'], n. f., 
 difficultness ; difficulty. 
 
 Digne [deeny], adj., worthy. 
 
 Dignement £ deeny -md"' ], adv., 
 icorthily. 
 
 Dignite [deen-yee-tay'], n. f., dig- 
 nity. 
 
 Diligence [dee-lee-zhd~"ss r ], n. f., 
 stage-coach. 
 
 Diligent-e [dee-lee-zhd"' ', -zhd^t'], 
 adj., diligent. 
 
 Dimanche [dee-md"sh r ], n. m., Sun- 
 day. 
 
 Diner [dee-nay'], v. n., to dine ; to 
 take dinner. 
 
 Diogene [dee-o-zhain'], n. m., Di- 
 ogenes. 
 
 Dira [dee-rd'], fut., 3d sing., will 
 say ; will tell. 
 
 Dirai [dee-ray'], fut., 1st sing., (I) 
 shall say ; shall tell. 
 
 Dire [dee?-], v. ir., to say ; to tell. 
 
 Direz [dee-ray'], fut., 2d \>\.,(you) 
 will say. 
 
 se Dirige [s8 dee-reezh'], pres., 3d 
 sing., directs his steps. 
 
 Diriger [dee - ree - zhay'], v. a., to 
 lead; to direct. 
 
 se Diriger [se dee-ree-zhay'], v. 
 refl., to direct one's steps. 
 
 Dirigerai [dee-reezh-ray 1 ], fut., 1st 
 sing., (I) will lead ; will direct. 
 
 vous Dirigez [voo dee-ree-zhay'], 
 you direct your steps. 
 
460 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 DIS 
 
 Dis [dee], p. def., 1st sing., I said ; 
 
 I told. 
 Disais [dee-zai'], imperf.,lst sing., 
 
 I said ; I was saying. 
 Disait [dee-zai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 (he) said; (he) was saying. 
 Disant [dee-zd"'], part., saying. 
 Discontinuer [deess-ko~-tee-nii-ay'], 
 
 v. a., to discontinue; to leave off. 
 Disconvenir [deess-ko^-v'neer], v. 
 
 ir., to disagree. 
 Discourir [deess-koo-reer'], v. ir., 
 
 to discourse. 
 Discret-e [deess-krai' , -krait'], adj., 
 
 discreet. 
 Disculper [deess-kul-pay'], v. a., to 
 
 exculpate. 
 Discussion [deess-kii-see-o"'], n. f. 
 
 debate ; discussion. 
 Discuter [deess-kii-tay'], v. a., to 
 
 discuss ; to debate. 
 Disent [deez], pres.,3d pi., (they) 
 
 say. 
 Disjoindre [deess-zhwd~"-dr], v. ir, 
 
 to disjoin. 
 Disons [dee-zo"'], pres., 1st pi., we 
 
 say. 
 Disparait [deess-pd-rai'], pres., 3d 
 
 sing., disappears. 
 Disparaitre [deess-pd-rai' '-tr], v. ir., 
 
 to disappear. 
 Dispense [deess-pd^ss'], pres., 3d 
 
 sing., metes out ; distributes. 
 Dispenser [deess-pd"-say'], v. a., to 
 
 mete out ; to distribute. 
 Disperse-e [deess-pair-say'], part 
 
 scattered. 
 Dispose'-e [deess-po-zay'], part., in- 
 clined; disposed. 
 Disposer [deess-po-zay'], v. a., to 
 
 dispose ; to incline. 
 se Disputer [sS deess-pU-tay'], v. 
 
 refl., to dispute. 
 Disseque-e [dee-say-kay'], part., 
 
 dissected. 
 Dissoudre [dis-soo' -dr], v. ir., to 
 
 dissolve. 
 Dissuader [dis-siid-day'], v. a., to 
 
 dissuade. 
 Distance [deess-td" 'ss'], n. f., dis- 
 tance. 
 
 DOM 
 
 Distincte-e [dis-td"k', -td~kt'~\, adj., 
 distinct. 
 
 Distinguai [deess-td" -gay'], p. def., 
 1st sing., 1 distinguished. 
 
 Distinguer [deess-td^ -gay'], v. a., 
 to distinguish. 
 
 Distraire [deess-trair'], v. ir., to dis- 
 tract. 
 
 Distrait-e [deess-trai', -trait'], adj., 
 absent-minded. 
 
 Distribua [deess-tree-bii-a], p. def., 
 3d sing., (he) divided ; meted out. 
 
 Distributer [deess-tree-bu-ay], v. a., 
 to distribute ; to divide. 
 
 Dit [dee], p. def., 3d sing., (he) 
 said; told. 
 
 Dit [dee], pres., 3d sing., he says. 
 
 Dit-e [dee, deet], part., said; told. 
 
 Dites [deet], pres., 2d pi., {you) 
 say ; tell. 
 
 Diversite [dee-vair-see-tay'], n. f., 
 variety. 
 
 Divertir [dee-vair-teer'], v. a., to di- 
 vert. 
 
 Divin-e [dee-vd"\ -veen'], adj., di- 
 vine. 
 
 Divise-e [dee-vee-zay'], part., di- 
 vided. 
 
 Dix [deess ; before consonant, dee ; 
 before vowel or h mute, deez], 
 num., ten. 
 
 Dix-huit [dee-ziieet'], num., eigh- 
 teen. 
 
 Dixieme [dee-zee-aim'], num., tenth. 
 
 Docile [do-seel'], adj., docile; tract- 
 able. 
 
 Docteur [dole-tor'], n. m., doctor ; 
 teacher. 
 
 Dogue [dog], n.m., watch-dog. 
 
 Doigt [diva], n. m., finger. 
 
 Dois [dwd], pres., 1st sing., I owe; 
 must; ought. 
 
 Doit [dwd], pres., 3d sing., (he) 
 owes; must; ought. 
 
 Doivent [dwdv],-pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 owe; must. 
 
 Domestique [do-mess-teek'], n. m. 
 and f., domestic. 
 
 Domestique, adj., domestic. 
 
 Dommage [do-mdzh'], n.m. .harm ; 
 e'est dommage, it is a pity. 
 
VOCABULAKY. 
 
 461 
 
 DU 
 
 Done [do""], adv., then ; pray ; now 
 Donnaient [do-nai'], imperf., 3d 
 
 pi. , (they) gave ; were giving. 
 Donne [don], pres., 3d sing., gives 
 Donne-e [do-nay'], part., given. 
 Donnent [don], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 give. 
 Donner [do-nay'], v. a., to give. 
 Donnera [don-raf], fut., 3d sing., 
 
 will give. 
 Donnez [dd-nay'], pres., 2d pi. 
 
 (you) give. 
 Don Quichotte [do" kee-slwt'], Don 
 
 Quixote. 
 Dont [do"], pron., of whom; of 
 
 which ; whose. 
 Dormez [dor-may'], pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) sleep. 
 Dor mir [dor-meer'], v. ir., to sleep 
 Dormit [dor-mee'], p.def., 3d sing., 
 
 slept. 
 Dos [do], n. m., lack. 
 Douane [doo -an'], n. f., custom- 
 house. 
 Douanier [doo-d-nee-ay'], n. m., 
 
 custom-house officer. 
 Douce [dooss], fern, of doux. 
 Doucement [dooss-md"'], adv., gen- 
 tly ; softly; still. 
 Douceur [doo-sdr'], n. f., gentle- 
 ness ; moderation ; sweetness. 
 Douleur [doo -lor'], n. f., pain; 
 
 grief 
 Doute [doot], n. m., doubt. 
 Doux [doo], fem., douce [dooss], 
 
 adj., sweet ; mild. 
 Douze [dooz], num., twelve. 
 Douzieme [doo - zee - aim'], num., 
 
 twelfth. 
 Drame [dram], n. m., drama. 
 Drap [drd], n. m., cloth. 
 se Dresse [s£ dress'], pres., 3d 
 
 sing., stands. 
 Dresser [dress-ay'], v. a., to set up ; 
 
 to train (animals), 
 se Dresser [se dress-ay'], v. refl., to 
 
 stand. * 
 
 Droite [drwdt], n. f., right. 
 Drole [drol], n. m., rogue; knave. 
 Du [dil], art., of the; from the; 
 
 with the ; some ; any. 
 
 ECR 
 
 Due [duk], n. m., duke. 
 
 Du moins [dil mwd""'], adv., at 
 
 least. 
 Duo [dti-o'] n. m., two. 
 Dur-e [diir], adj., hard. 
 Durement [dur-md^'], adv., rudely. 
 
 E. 
 
 Eau [o], n. f., water. 
 Ebeniste [ay-bay-neesf], n. m., cab- 
 ^ inet-maker. 
 
 Ebranler [ay-brd"- lay'], v. a., to 
 ^ shake. 
 Echantillon [ay-shd~-tee-yo~'], n. 
 
 m., pattern ; sample. 
 Echappe'-e [ay-shap-pay'], part., 
 
 escaped. 
 Echapper [ay-shap-pay'], v. a., to 
 
 escape. 
 s'Echapper [say-shap-pay'], v. refl., 
 
 to escape. 
 Echauffe-e [ay -slid -fay'], part., 
 
 warmed ; heated. 
 Echelle [ay-shell], n. f., ladder. 
 Eclos-e [ay -kid', -kloz'], part., 
 
 hatched. 
 Ecole [ay-kol'], n. f., school. 
 Ecolier [ay-ko-lee-ay'], n. m., schol- 
 ar; pupil. 
 Econome [ay-ko-nom'], n. m., econ- 
 omist. 
 Economie [ay-ko-no-mee'], n. f., 
 
 economy. 
 ^Icorce [ay-korss'], n. f., bark. 
 Ecouter [ay-koo-tay'],r. a., to hear ; 
 
 to listen to. 
 s'Ecria [say-kree-a], p. def., 3d 
 
 sing., exclaimed. 
 m'Ecriai [may-kree-ay'], p. def., 1st 
 
 sing., / cried ; I exclaimed. 
 'Eerie [say-kree'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 exclaims. 
 s'Ecrier [say-kree-ay'\- v. refl., to 
 
 exclaim ; to cry. 
 ^crire [ay-kreer], v. ir., to write. 
 Ecrirez [ay-kree-ray'], fut., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) shall or iv ill write. 
 Ecris [ay-kree'], pres., 1st sing., / 
 
 write; imper., write. 
 Ecrit-e [ay-kree\ -kreet'], part., 
 
 written. 
 
462 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 ELA 
 
 £crit [ay-kree'J, pres., 3d sing. 
 writes. 
 
 ^crivain [ay - kree - va'], n. m., 
 writer. 
 
 iEcrivait [ay-kree-vai], imperf., 3d 
 sing., (lie) wrote ; used to write. 
 
 ICcrivez [ay-kree-vay'], pres., 2d 
 pi., write. 
 
 lilcrivit [ay-kree-vee 1 ], p. def., 3d 
 sing., wrote. 
 
 !^cu [ay-ku'], n. m., crown; pi., 
 money. 
 
 Ecureuil [ay-ku-rdV], n. m., squir- 
 rel. 
 
 Ecurie [ay-kii-ree'], n. f., stable. 
 
 'Eden [ay-den'], n. m., Eden. 
 
 Edifice [ay-dee-feess], n. m., build- 
 ing ; edifice. 
 
 iMiteur [ay-dee-tor''], n. m., pub- 
 lisher. 
 
 Edredon [ay-drS-do"'], n.m., eider- 
 down; down. 
 
 Education [ay-dil-kd-see-d" 1 ], n. f., 
 education ; training. 
 
 Effacer [ef- fa-say'], v. a., to dissi- 
 pate; to drive off ; to blot. 
 
 Effet [ef-fai'], n. m., effect; pi., 
 tilings; baggage. 
 
 s'Efforcer [sef-for-say'], v. refl., to 
 strive ; to endeavor. 
 
 Effort [ef-for'], n. m., effort. 
 
 Effrayer [ef-fray-yaif], v. a., to 
 frighten. 
 
 Egal-e [ay-gal 1 ], adj., equal; even. 
 
 lilgalement [ay -gal -ma''], adv., 
 equally ; also. 
 
 Egard [ay-gar'], n. m., respect. 
 
 Egare-e [ay-gar-ay'], part., lost; 
 strayed. 
 
 Egarer [ay-gar-ay'], v. a., to mis- 
 lead. 
 
 Egaux [ay-go'], masc. pi. of e'gal. 
 
 Eglise [ay-gleez], n. f., church. 
 
 Eh bien [ay bee-d"'], int., well! 
 
 Elan [ay-la'], n. m., start ; burst. 
 
 m'Elance [?/zoy - la's], pres., 1st 
 sing., (JT) rush on. 
 
 s'^lancer [say-lcT-say'], v. refl., to 
 rush on. 
 
 nous Elancons [nooz ay -Id" -so"'] 
 pres., 1st pi., (we) rush on. 
 
 Ife 
 
 EMP 
 
 ve [ay-fei'u'], n. m. f., pupil. 
 
 Eleve-e [ail-cay'], adj., elevated; 
 high. 
 
 sjElever [sa'd-vay'], v. refl., to rise. 
 
 Elire [a?/-/ee?-'], v. ir., to elect. 
 
 Elle [ell], nxon., she; it; her. 
 
 Elles [ell], pron., they ; them. 
 
 s'Eloigner [say-lwdn-yay'], v. refl., 
 to withdraw. 
 
 Embarcadere [d"-bar-ka-dair'~], n. 
 f., depot. 
 
 Embarras [a-bar-ra], n. m., con- 
 fusion ; embarrassment. 
 
 m'Embarrassai [ma-bar-ra-say'], 
 p. def., 1st sing.,/ became en- 
 tangled. 
 
 Embarrasse-e [ a"- bar -rd- say' ], 
 part., confused; embarrassed. 
 
 s'Embarrasser [sd"-bar-rd-say], v. 
 refl., to be confused; to become 
 entangled. 
 
 Embaume-e [a"- bo -may'], part., 
 perfumed. 
 
 s'Embrassent [sd" -brass'], pres., 3d 
 pi., (they) embrace each other. 
 
 s'Embrasser [sd"-bra-say'], v. re- 
 cip., to embrace one another. 
 
 m'Embrouille [md~-brooy'], pres., 
 1st sing., I get confused. 
 
 s'Embrouiller [sd~-broo-yay'], v. 
 refl., to get confused. 
 
 Emettre [ay-met -tr\, v. ir., to emit. 
 
 Emmener [d"-mnay], v. a., to take 
 away ; to carry away. 
 
 ^moudre [ay - moo'- dr], v. ir., to 
 whet. 
 
 Emouvoir [ay-moo-vwar'], v. ir., to 
 move. 
 
 Empanache-e [a"- pa -na- shay'], 
 part., plumed. 
 
 s'Emparer [sd* -pa-ray'], v. refl., to 
 take possession of. 
 
 Empeche [d"-paish'], pres., 3d sing., 
 hinders. 
 
 Empecher [d"-pai-shay'], v. a., to 
 hinder; to prevent. 
 
 Empereur [d'-p-r{0], n. m., em- 
 peror. 
 
 Empire [a" -peer'], n. m., empire. 
 
 Emplette [d"-plett], n. f., pur- 
 chase. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 463 
 
 END 
 
 Emploient \a-plwd'], pres.,3dpl., 
 
 employ. 
 Employer [aT-plwa-yay'], v. a., to 
 
 employ. 
 Employ ez [oT-plwd-yay'], imper., 
 
 2d pi., employ ; spend. 
 Empochant [cT-po - shd"'], part., 
 
 pocketing. 
 Emporte-e \cT-por-tay'], part., car- 
 ried away ; carried off. 
 Emportement [d~ -port-ma"'], n. m., 
 
 rage; passion. 
 Emporter [cT-por-tay'], v. a., to car- 
 ry ; to take away. 
 Empreindre [a"-pra"''-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 imprint. 
 s'Empresser [sdT -press-ay'], v. refl. 
 
 to be eager. 
 Emprunte-e [a'-pro'-tay'], part., 
 
 borrowed. 
 En [a"], pron., of it; from it; of 
 
 them; with it; for it; to it 
 
 some; any. 
 En [a~], adv., like ; as. 
 En [a v ], prep., in; by ; into. 
 En cas que [a" lea. kg'], conj., if 
 
 in case that. 
 Enceindre {cT-sa'-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 surround. 
 Enchante-e \_a-sha-tay'], part., 
 
 enchanted ; cliarmed. 
 Enclore [a"-kldr'], v. ir., to inclose. 
 Encore {cT-kor'], adv., yet; still 
 
 again ; encore que, conj., though. 
 Encourageait [cT- koo -rd- zhai'], 
 
 imperf., 3d sing., encouraged. 
 Encourager [d"-koo-rd-zhay'], v. 
 
 a. , to encourage. 
 Encourir [a~-koo-reer'], v. ir., to in 
 
 cur. 
 Encre [eT'-kr], n. f., ink. 
 Encrier [dT-kree-ay'], n. m., ink 
 
 stand. 
 Endormi-e [ a-dor-mee' ], part. 
 
 sleepy ; drowsy. 
 Endormir [cT-dor-meer'], v. ir., to 
 
 lull; to lull to sleep. 
 s'Endormir [sd~-dor-meer f ], v. refl 
 
 to fall asleep. 
 YAidi\nxe,[a""-du-eer'],\ .\v.,to plaster. 
 Enfance [a~-fass'~], n. f., childhood. 
 
 ENN 
 Enfant \a~-fa "'], n. m. f., child. 
 Enfer [cT-fair'], n. m., hell. 
 Enferme-e [cT- fair - may'], part., 
 
 encompassed; inclosed. 
 'Enfermer [sd~ -fair -may '],v . refl., 
 
 to lock one's self up. 
 Enfin \_a-fa'], adv., at last; 
 
 finally. 
 s'Enfoncer \sd"-fo'"-say'], v. refl., 
 
 to sink into. 
 Enfoui-e \a-foo-ee'], part., buried 
 
 up; concealed. 
 Enfreindre [oT-fra'-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 infringe. 
 s'Enfuient [sa-fu-ee'], pres., 3d 
 
 pi., (they) extend away. 
 s'Enfuir [sa"-fu-eer'], v. refl., to run 
 
 aivay. 
 Engageant [cT-gd-zhd""'], part., 
 
 pledging. 
 Engager \a-gd-zhay'], v. a., to 
 
 pledge. 
 s'Engager [sd^-gd-zhay'], v. refl., 
 
 to pledge one's self. 
 s'Engagerent [saT-gd-zhair'], p. 
 
 def., 3d pi., (engagements) were 
 
 entered into. 
 s'Enhardir [sdT-dr-deer'], v. refl., 
 
 to make bold. 
 s'Enivrer [sa~-nee-vray r ], v. refl., to 
 
 be intoxicated. 
 s'Enivrerent [sd~-nee-vrair'], p. 
 
 def., 3d pi., (they) became i?itox- 
 
 icated. 
 Enjoindre [a"zhwa'-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 enjoin. 
 Enleve \oT-laiv'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 carries off. 
 Enlever \a-U-vay'], v. a., to carry 
 
 off. 
 Ennemi \_enn-mee'], n. m., enemy ; 
 
 foe. 
 Ennemi-e [enn-mee'], adj., hostile. 
 Ennoblir [cf-no-bleer'], v. a., to en- 
 noble. 
 Ennui [cT-nuee'], n. m., weariness ; 
 
 "ennui." 
 Ennuyer [cT-nuee-yay'], v. a., to 
 
 weary ; to tire. 
 Ennuyeux-se [cT-nuee-yo ', -ydz'], 
 
 adj., tiresome ; tedious. 
 
464 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ENT 
 
 Enorgueillir [d"-nor-ghd-yeer'], v. 
 a., to render proud. 
 
 Enorme [ay-norm'], adj., enormous ; 
 monstrous. 
 
 s'Enquerir [sd"-kay-reer'], v. refl., 
 to inquire. 
 
 Enrage-e [a" -rd-zhay], part., en- 
 raged. 
 
 Enrager [a -rd-zhay 1 ], v. a., to en- 
 rage. 
 
 s'Enrichir [sd"-ree-sheer'], v. refl., 
 to enrich one's self. 
 
 Enseigne [a~- sainy'], n. m., en- 
 sign. 
 
 Enseigner [a"-sain-yay'], v. a., to 
 teach. 
 
 Ensemble [<T- so"'- bl], adv., to- 
 gether. 
 
 Ensuite [cTsueetl, adv., then; aft- 
 erward. 
 
 Entame [d"-tam'], pres., 3d sing., 
 begins. 
 
 Entamer [d"-td-may'], v. a., to be- 
 gin. 
 
 Entendais [d~-td~-dai'], irnperf.,lst 
 sing., I heard. 
 
 Entendez [a" -td" -day'], pres., 2d 
 pi., hear. 
 
 Entendit [d~-td"-dee r ], p. def.,hc ard. 
 
 Entendre [d""-ta~'-dr],\. a., to hear ; 
 to understand ; to intend; to mean. 
 
 Entends [d"-td"'], pres., 1st sing., 
 (I) hear; understand; intend; 
 mean. 
 
 Entendu-e [a'-ta'-du'J, part., heard. 
 
 s'Enteter [sd^-tai-tay'], v. refl., to 
 become obstinate. 
 
 Entier-e [a" -tee-ay' , -air''], adj., 
 whole ; entire ; all. 
 
 Entoure-e [d"-too-ray'], part., sur- 
 rounded. 
 
 Entrainent [a 1 - train'], pres. , 3d 
 pi., {they') drag; lead away ; (they) 
 may allure ; may involve. 
 
 Entrainer [d~~-trai-nay'], v. a., to 
 drag ; to lead aicay. 
 
 Entre [d~'-tr], prep., between; in 
 
 s'Entremettre \sd~- tr - met'- tr~\, v. 
 refl., to meditate. 
 
 Entreprendre [d"-ti--prd"'-dr], v. 
 ir., to undertake. 
 
 ES 
 Entreprise [d"-tr-preez r ], n. f., en- 
 terprise ; undertaking. 
 Entrer [d"-tray'], v. n., to enter. 
 Entretenir [d'-trS-te-neer'], v. ir., 
 
 to keep up ; to entertain. 
 Entrevoir [d~-trg-vwdr'], v. ir., to 
 
 have a glimpse of. 
 Entrons [d~-tro~], imper., 1st pi., 
 
 let us go into ; let us enter. 
 Entr'ouvrir [d~~-troo-vreer'], v. ir., 
 
 to partly open. 
 s'Envelopper [sd"-vlo-pay], v. refl., 
 
 to wrap one's self up in. 
 Envi [cT-vee'] ; a l'envi les uns des 
 
 autres, vying with each other. 
 Envie [dT-vee 1 ], n. f., desire ; mind. 
 Environs [a~-vee-ro~'~\, n. m. pi., 
 
 environs ; neighborhood. 
 Envoyev [a'-vv:d-yay l ], v. a., to 
 
 send; to send for ; envoyer cher- 
 
 cher, to send for. 
 Epais-se [uy-pai', -paiss'], adj., 
 
 thick. 
 ^Ipargner [oy-parn-yay], v. a., to 
 
 sjmre. 
 Epaule [ay-poV], n. f., shoulder. 
 Epee [ay-pay'], n. f., sword. 
 Epicier [ay -pee - see - ay'], n. m., 
 
 grocer. 
 Epicurien - ne [ ay-pee-ku-ree-d" ', 
 
 -enn'], adj., epicurian. 
 Epoque [ay-pok'], n. f., epoch; pe- 
 riod. 
 Spouse [ay-pooz'], n. f., wife. 
 Epouvanter [ay-poo-va-tay'], v. a., 
 
 to frighten. 
 lilpoux [ay -poo'], n. m., husband. 
 s'Eprendre [say-prd"' -dr], v. refl., 
 
 to be smitten. 
 Eprouve-e [ay-proo-vay'], part., 
 
 tried; proved. 
 ^Iprouver [ay-proo-vay'], v. a., to 
 
 experience ; to meet with. 
 ^Iquivaloir [ay-kee-vdl-wdr'], v. ir., 
 
 to be of great value ; to equal. 
 Errant [air-rd"'], part., icandering. 
 Errer [air-ray'], v. n., to wander; 
 
 to stray. 
 Erreur [air-ror'], n. f., error. 
 Es [ax], from etre, pres., 2d sing., 
 
 (thou) art. 
 
VOCABULAKY. 
 
 465 
 
 ETE 
 
 Escalader [ess-kdl-d-day 1 ], v. a., to 
 
 climb up ; to climb over. 
 Escalier [ess-kdl-ee-ay'] / n. m., 
 
 staircase. 
 Esclave [ess-kldv'], n. m., slave. 
 Espace [ess-pass'], n. m., space. 
 Espagne [ess-pan? '], n. f., Spain. 
 Espagnol-e [ess-pdn-yol'], adj., 
 
 Spanish. 
 Espece [ess-paiss'],n.f.,kind ; sort. 
 Esperance [ess-pay-rd"ss'], n. f., 
 
 hope. 
 Esperer [ess - pay - ray'], v. a., to 
 
 hope. 
 Esperons [ess-pay-ro"'], imper., 1st 
 
 pi., let us hope. 
 Espoir [ess-pwdr'], n. m., hope. 
 Esprit [ess-pree 1 ], n. m., mind; 
 
 spirit; wit. 
 Essai [essay''], n. m., essay. 
 Est [ai], from etre, pres., 3d sing., 
 
 is ; est a, belongs to. 
 Est-ce [aiss or ace], is it ; is that. 
 Estafier [ess-td-fee-ay'], n. m., run- 
 ner ; footman. 
 Estime-e [ess-tee-may'], part., es- 
 
 Estimer [ess-tee-may'], v. a., to es 
 
 teem. 
 Estimons [ess-tee-mo~'], pres., (we) 
 
 esteem. 
 Estime [ess-teem'], pres., esteems. 
 Et [ay], conj., and. 
 Etaient [ay-tai'], imperf., 3d pi., 
 
 were. 
 Etait [ay-tai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 was. 
 33tat [ay-ta], n. m., state ; condition. 
 Etats-Unis [ay-td' -zii-nee'], n. m., 
 
 pi., United States. 
 Etc. =et csetera [ait say-tay-rd'], 
 
 and so forth. 
 Ete [ay-tay'], pai't., been. 
 Ete [ay-tay'], n. m., summer. 
 Etendent [ay-ta" d'], pres., 3d pi., 
 
 (they) extend. 
 Etendre [ay-ta"' dr],v. a., to extend. 
 Etendu-e [ay-td" ~-du], part., stretch- 
 ed out ; extended. 
 Eternuer [ay -tair -nil-ay'], v. n., to 
 
 sneeze. 
 
 EVE 
 
 Etes [ait], pres., 2d pi., (you) are. 
 
 Ethere-e [ay-tay -ray'], adj., ethe- 
 real. 
 
 Etions [ay-tee-o"'], imperf., 1st pi., 
 (we) were. 
 
 Etonne-e [ay-to-nay'], part., aston- 
 ished. 
 
 Etonner [ay-to-nay'], v. a., to as- 
 tonish. 
 
 Etonnement [ay-ton-md"'], n. m., 
 astonishment. 
 
 s'Etonner [say-to-nay'], v. refl., to 
 wonder at. 
 
 Etourdi-e [ay-toor-dee'], adj., heed- 
 less ; thoughtless. 
 
 Etrange [ay-trd"zh'], adj., strange; 
 odd. 
 
 ^Itranger-e [ay-trbT-zhay', -zhair'], 
 adj., foreign; strange. 
 
 Etranger [ay - Ira"- zhay'], n. m., 
 stranger ; foreigner. 
 
 Etre [ai'-tr], n. m., being. 
 
 Etre [ai'-tr], v. aux., to be ; etre a, 
 to belong to. 
 
 s'Etreindre [say-trd"' -dr], v. refl., 
 to clasp ; to hug one another. 
 
 I^tude [ay-tiid'], n. f., study. 
 
 Etudie-e [ay - til - dee - ay'], part., 
 studied. 
 
 Etadier [ay -til- dee - ay'], v. a., to 
 study. 
 
 s'Etudier [say-tu-dee-ay'], v. refl., 
 to study (to). 
 
 Etudiez [ay-tu-dee-ay'], pres., 2d 
 pi. or imper., study. 
 
 Europe [d-rop'], n. f., Europe. 
 
 Europeen-ne [o-ro-pay-a"' ', -enn'], 
 adj., European. 
 
 Eus [ii], from avoir, p. def., 1st 
 sing., I had. 
 
 Eusse [uss], imperf. subj., I might 
 have. 
 
 Eussiez [ii-see-ay'], imperf. subj., 
 2d \A.,(you) might have. 
 
 Enx [6], pron. , them ; they. 
 
 s'Evanouir [say - van - oo - eer'], y. 
 refl., to vanish. 
 
 Eveille - e [ay - vai - yay'], part., 
 awake; when awake. 
 
 Eveiller [ay - vai - yay'], v. a., to 
 awake; to wake up. 
 
 U2 
 
466 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 EXP 
 
 s'Eveiller [say-vai-yay 1 ], v. refl., to 
 icake up. 
 
 lilveque [ay-vaik'], n. m., bishop. 
 
 Eviter [ay-vee-tay'], v. a., to avoid. 
 
 Evitez [ay-vee-tay'], avoid. 
 
 Exagere [eg-zd-zhair'], pres., 1st 
 sing., I overdraw ; I exaggerate. 
 
 Exagerer [eg-zd-zhay-ray'], v. a., to 
 exaggerate. 
 
 Examiner [eg-zdm-ee-nay'], v. a., 
 to examine, to survey. 
 
 Exaucer [eg-zo-say'],y. a., to listen 
 to. 
 
 Excellent-e [ek-sel-ld"' ', -l<Tt'], adj., 
 excelltnt. 
 
 Exciter [ek-see-tay'], v. a., to ex 
 cite ; to arouse. 
 
 Exclure [eks - kl'dr'], v. ir., to ex 
 elude. 
 
 m'Excusai [meks-kii-zay'], p. def., 
 1st sing., I apologized. 
 
 s'Excuser [seks-ku-zay'], v. refl., to 
 excuse one's self; to apologize. 
 
 Exemple [eg-za'-pl], n. m., example. 
 
 Exercer [eg - zair - say'], v. a., to 
 practice ; to exercise. 
 
 s'Exercer [seg-zair-say], v. refl., to 
 practice. 
 
 Exercice [eg-zair-seess'], n. m., ex- 
 ercise. 
 
 Extorter [eg-zor-tay'], v. a., to ex- 
 hort. 
 
 Exile [eg -zee-lay'], n. m., exile. 
 
 Existence [eg-zeess-ta~s'], n. f., ex- 
 istence. 
 
 Exister [eg - zeess - tay'], v. n., to 
 exist. 
 
 Experience [eks-pay-ree-a"s^], n. 
 f., experiment ; experience. 
 
 Explicateur [eks-plee-kd-tdi''], n. 
 m., explainer ; expounder. 
 
 Explication [eks-plee-kd-see-o"'], n. 
 f., explanation. 
 
 Expliquer [eks-plee-kay'], v. a., to 
 explain. 
 
 Expliquerent [eks -plee - kair'~\, p. 
 def., 3d pi., explained. 
 
 Expose [eks-poz'], pres., 1st sing., 
 I set forth. 
 
 Exposer [eks-p o-zay'], v. a., to ex- 
 pose. 
 
 FAI 
 
 s'Exposer [seks-po-zay'], v. refl., to 
 expose one's self. 
 
 Expvimer [eks-pree-may'], y. a., to 
 express. 
 
 s'Exprimer [seks -pree - may'~\, y. 
 refl., to express one's self. 
 
 Extraire [ek - strair'], y. ir., to ex- 
 tract. 
 
 Extreme [eks - traim'], adj., ex- 
 treme. 
 
 Extremement [eks-trai-me-mcT'~\, 
 adv., extremely. 
 
 F. 
 
 Fable [fdJ-bl], n. I, fable. 
 
 Fabrique [fa - breek'], n. f., build- 
 ing ; vestry-board. 
 
 Fabuliste [fa-bu-leest'], n. m. fab- 
 ulist. 
 
 'Face [fdss], n .f., face; surface. 
 
 se Fache [sefasli], pres., 3d sing., 
 gets angry. 
 
 Fache - e [fa - shay'], adj. , sorry ; 
 angry. 
 
 se Facher [se fa-shay''], y. refl., to 
 get angry. 
 
 Facile [fd-seel'], adj., easy. 
 
 Facilement [fa - seel- md" r ], adv., 
 easily. 
 
 Facon [/a-s(f],n.f., fashion; man- 
 . iter. 
 
 Facteur [fdk-tdr], n. m., earner. 
 
 Fade '[fad], adj., insipid. 
 
 Faible [fai'-bl], adj., weak; fee- 
 ble. 
 
 Faiblesse [fai-bless'], n. f., foible ; 
 iceakness. 
 
 Faim [fa"], n. f., hunger; avoir 
 faim, to be hungry. 
 
 Faire [fair], v. ir., to do; to 
 make. 
 
 Fais [fai], pres., 2d sing., (thou) 
 causest ; makest ; doest. 
 
 Faisaient [fez-ai'], imperf., 3d pi., 
 (they) were doing. 
 
 Faisais [fez-ai'], imperf.. 1st sing., 
 / teas making ; I was doing. 
 
 Faisait [fez-ai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 was doing ; was making. 
 
 Faisant [fez- a"'], part., making; 
 doing ; causing. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 467 
 
 FAV 
 
 Faisions [fez-ee-o"'], imperf., 1st 
 
 pi., (we) were doing. 
 Faisons [fez-o~'], pres., 1st pi., 
 
 (we) do ; we make ; imper., let 
 
 us do ; let us make. 
 Fait-e [fai, fait], part., made; 
 
 done ; fait de moi, over with 
 
 me. 
 Fait [fat], pres., 3d sing., makes ; 
 
 does. 
 Fait [fai], n. m., deed; fact; 
 
 point ; en fait de, in point of. 
 Faites [fait], pres., 2d pi., (you) 
 
 do ; (you) make. 
 Fallait [fal-ai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 was necessary ; did. need; did re- 
 quire. 
 Falloir [fdl-wdr'], v. ir., to be nee- 
 
 essary ; to leant. 
 Fallut [fdl-u], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 it was necessary ; il me fallut, I 
 
 needed. 
 Fameux-se [fa-mo ', -moz'], adj. 
 
 famous ; well known. 
 Familier-e [fdm-ee-lee-ay' , -air'] 
 
 adj., familiar. 
 Famille [fd-m ee?'], n. f., family. 
 Fane-e [fa-nay'], -part., faded. 
 Fange [fcTzh], n. f., mud; mire. 
 Fantastique [fcT-tass-teek'], adj., 
 
 fantastic, 
 Fasse [fass], pres. subj., 1st sing., 
 
 may make ; may do. 
 Fatal-e [fa-taV], adj., fatal. 
 Fatigue [fa. - teegh'], n. f., iveari 
 
 ness ; fatigue. 
 Fatigue-e [fa-tee-gay'], adj., tired 
 
 iveary. 
 Faudra [fo-dra], fat., 3d sing., it 
 
 will be necessary. 
 Faudrait [fo-drai'], condit., 3d 
 
 sing., it would be necessary. 
 Faut [fo], pres., 3d sing 
 
 necessary ; must. 
 
 FIN 
 
 Favori-te [fdv-o-ree', -reet'], adj., 
 favorite. 
 
 Feindre [fcT'-dr], v. ir., to feign. 
 
 Felicite [fay - lee - see - tay'], n. f., 
 happiness. 
 
 Femme [fam], n. f., woman ; wife. 
 
 Fenelon [fain-lo"'], Fenelon. 
 
 Fenetre [fZ-nai'-tr], n. f., window. 
 
 Fente [fa~t], n. f., chink; crack. ■ 
 
 Fer [fair], n. m., iron; pi., fetters; 
 chains. 
 
 Ferai [ft- ray'], fut, 1st sing., / 
 shall or will make. 
 
 Fermer [fair-may 1 ], v. a., to close; 
 to shut. 
 
 Ferney [fair - nay'], name of Vol- 
 taire's residence. 
 
 Feroce [fay-ross'], adj., fierce; 
 cruel; wild. 
 
 Ferons [f8-ro~'], fut., 1st pi., (we) 
 
 will make. 
 Feront [f2-ro~'], fut., 3d pi., 
 
 (they) will make. 
 Fete [fait], n. i., festival; triumph; 
 
 jour de fete, holiday. 
 Feu [fo], n. m.,fre. 
 Feuille [fo?], n. f., leaf; sheet (of 
 
 paper). 
 Fidele [fee-dail], adj., faithful. 
 Fier-e [fee -air], adj., haughty; 
 
 proud. 
 se Fier [se fee-ay'], v. refl., to trust. 
 Fievre [fee-aivr'], n .f., fever. 
 me Figurais [me fee-gu-rai'], im- 
 perf., 1st sing., I imagined. 
 Figure [fee-giir'], n. f., shape; 
 
 face ; figure ; form ; air. 
 Figurer [fee-gii-ray'], v. n., to ap- 
 pear; to figure. 
 se Figurer [se fee-gii-ray'], v, refl., 
 
 to imagine. 
 Fil [feel], n. m., thread, 
 it is Fille [feey], n. f., daughter; girl. 
 JFils [feess], n. m., son. 
 Faute [fot], n. f., fault; faute de, Fin [fa~], n. f., end; a la fin, at 
 
 for want of. \ last. 
 
 Fauteuil [fo-to?'], n. m., arm- Final-e [fee-naf], adj., final, 
 chair. Fini-e [fee-nee'], part., ended. 
 
 Faux [fo], fern., fausse [foss], Finir [fee-neer'], v. a., to finish. 
 
 adj., false. Finira [fee-nee-ra], fut., 3d sing., 
 
 Favour [fdv-or'], n. f., favor. \ will finish; will end. 
 
 - 
 
468 
 
 VOCABULAKY. 
 
 FOR 
 
 Fit [fee], p. def., 3d sing., (he) 
 made; did; performed; com- 
 posed. 
 
 Flacon [fla-ko"'], n. m., flash. 
 
 Flamme [flam], n. f., flame. 
 
 Flanc [fld~], n. m., side; flank. 
 
 Flatte [flat], pres., 3d sing., flat- 
 ters. 
 
 Flatter [fla-tay'], v. a., to flatter. 
 
 se Flatter [se fla-tay'], v. refl., to 
 flatter ones self. 
 
 Flatteur [fld-tbr'], n. m., flatterer. 
 
 Fleche [flaish], n. f., spire; ar- 
 row. 
 
 Fleur [flor], n. f., flower. 
 
 Fleuve [flov], n. m., river; stream. 
 
 Flotter [flo-tay'], v. n., to float ; to 
 wave. 
 
 Flute [flut], n. f., flute. 
 
 Foin [fwa], n. m., hay. 
 
 Fois [fwa], n. f., time; combien 
 de fois, how often ? 
 
 Fol [foil], adj., mad ; foolish. 
 
 Folie [fo-lee'], n. f., madness ; piece 
 offolly. 
 
 Folle [>//], f. of fou. 
 
 Fonction [ffk-see-o""'], nonfunc- 
 tion ; duty. 
 
 Fond [fo~], n. m., remotest part ; 
 depth. 
 
 Fond [fo~], pres., 3d sing., ?«e#s. 
 
 Fondre [fo"'-dr], v. a., *o melt. 
 
 Font [/cT], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 make ; do. 
 
 Force [forss], n. f., force; might; 
 strength ; avec force, tightly ; by 
 force ; a force de, by dint of. 
 
 Force-e [for-say 1 ], part., forced. 
 
 Formalite [for-mdl-ee-tay'], n. f., 
 form; ceremony. 
 
 se Forment [seform], pres., 3d pi., 
 are forming ; are being formed. 
 
 Former [for-may'], v. a., to form; 
 to shape. 
 
 Formidable [for-mee-da-bT], adj., 
 formidable. 
 
 Fort-e [for, fort], adj., strong. 
 
 Fort [for], adv., ue?-?/; Zsarrf; se- 
 verely. 
 
 Fortifions [for-tee-fee-o""'], pres., 
 1st pi., (we) fortify ; strengthen. 
 
 FRU 
 
 Fortifier [for-tee-fee-ay'], v. a., to 
 fortify. 
 
 Fortune [for-tun'], n. f., fortune. 
 
 Fou [foo], fern, folle, adj., mad; 
 crazy ; foolish. 
 
 Fouet [foo-ai'], n. m., whip. 
 
 Fourre'-e [foo-ray'], part., furred. 
 
 Foyer [fwa-yay 1 ], n. m., hearth; 
 fireside. 
 
 Fraiche [faish], f. of frais. 
 
 Frais [frai], fem. fraiche [fraish], 
 adj., fresh. 
 
 Frais [frai], n. m. pi., expenses; 
 cost. 
 
 Franc [/?'<T], n. m., franc (coin). 
 
 Franc [/?'«], fem., franche 
 [frd"sh], adj., free; frank. 
 
 Francais [fra'-sai'], n. m., French- 
 man ; French. 
 
 Francais-e [frd"~-sai', -saiz'], adj., 
 French. 
 
 Francaise [frbT-saiz], n.f., French- 
 woman. 
 
 France [frcTs], n. f., France. 
 
 Franchi-e [fra-shee'], part., cross- 
 ed ; overcome. 
 
 Franchir [fr a -sheer'], v. a., to 
 cross. 
 
 Francois [fra-swd'], n. m., Frank; 
 Francis. 
 
 Frappa [fra-pa], p. def., 3d sing., 
 struck. 
 
 Frappe-e [fra-pay'], part., struck. 
 
 Frapper [fra-pay'], v. a., to strike; 
 to beat ; to rap ; to impress. 
 
 Frein [frcT], n. m., check; re- 
 straint. 
 
 Fremir [ fray-meer'], v. n., to shud- 
 der ; to tremble. 
 
 Frere [frair], n. m., brother. 
 
 Friction [frik-see-o"'], n. f., fric- 
 tion; rubbing. 
 
 Froid [frwd], n. m., cold. 
 
 Froisser [frwd-say'], v. a., to fum- 
 ble ; to handle. 
 
 Fromage [fro-mdzh 1 ], n. m., cheese. 
 
 Front [fro~], n. m., brow ; fore- 
 head. 
 
 Frotter [fro-tay'], v. a., to rub. 
 
 Frugal-e [frii-gal 1 ], adj., frugal. 
 
 Fruit [friiee], n. m., fruit. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 469 
 
 GEM 
 
 Fuir [fii-eer'], v. ir., to flee; to 
 
 shun; to avoid. 
 Fumee [fit-may'], n. f., smoke. 
 Fumer [fu-may'], v. a., to smoke. 
 Parent [fur], p. def., 3d pi., {they) 
 
 were. 
 Fureur [fu-ror'], n. f., rage ;fury. 
 Furieux-se [fu-ree-o', -oz'], adj., 
 
 enraged (de, at). 
 Fusil [fix-zee'], n. m., gun. 
 Fut [fit], p. def., 3d sing., was. 
 Fut [/ii], imperf. subj., 3d sing., 
 
 should be ; might be ; was. 
 Fuyez [fuee-yay'], imper., 2d pi., 
 
 shun; avoid. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gage [gdzli], n. m., pledge. 
 
 Gagner [gdn-yay'], v. a., to gain. 
 
 Gai-e [gay], lively ; jocund. 
 
 Gaiement [gay-ma ], adv., lively ; 
 cheerfully. 
 
 Gaillard [gd-ydr'], n. m., jolly fel- 
 low ; fellow. 
 
 Galien [gdl-ee-d"'], Galen. 
 
 Galonne-e [gdl-o-nay'], part., trim- 
 vied in gold lace. 
 
 Gant [gd"], n. m., glove. 
 
 Garcon [gar-so~'], n. m., boy ; wait- 
 er ; garcon d'ecurie, stable-boy. 
 
 Gai-de [gard], n. m. and f., guard. 
 
 Garde [gar d], pres., 3d sing., 
 keeps. 
 
 Garder [gar-day], v. a., to keep. 
 
 se Garder [se gar-day'], v. refl., to 
 forbear; to refrain ; to beware. 
 
 Garderai. Je m'en garderai [md" 
 gard-ray'], I shall refrain from it. 
 
 Gardien [gar-dee-cT'], n. m., guar- 
 dian. 
 
 Garni-e [gar -nee'], part., lined; 
 adorned. 
 
 Gate-e [gd-tay'], part., spoiled. 
 
 Gater [gd-tay'], v. a., to spoil; to 
 waste. 
 
 Gazelle [gd-zell'], n. f., gazelle. 
 
 Gele'-e [zhe-lay'], part., frozen. 
 
 Gele [zhail], pi'es., 3d sing., is 
 freezing. 
 
 Gemir [zhay-meer'], v. n., to groan ; 
 to sigh. 
 
 GRE 
 
 Gene'ral-e [zhay - nay - rdl'], adj., 
 
 general. 
 Genereux-se [zhay -nay -ro' , -roz'], 
 
 adj., liberal. 
 Gene'rosite [zhay -nay -ro-zee-tay'], 
 
 n. f., generosity. 
 Ge'nie [zhay-nee'], n. m., genius. 
 Genou [zhe-noo'], n. m., knee. 
 Genre [zhd~-r], n. m., kind ; class. 
 Gens [zhd""], n. m. and f., people; 
 
 folks. 
 Geole [zhol], n. m.,jail. 
 Georges [zhorzh], George. 
 Germanique [zhair-man-eek'], adj., 
 
 Germanic. 
 Git [zhee], from "gesir," pres., 3d 
 
 sing., lies. 
 Gite [zheet], n. f., lodging ; house. 
 Glace [glass], n. f., ice ; window. 
 Glacial-e [gld-see-dl'], adj., icy. 
 se Glisser [s£ glee-say'], v. refl., to 
 
 glide in stealthily. 
 Gloire [glwdr], n. f., glory. 
 Glorieux-se [glo-ree-o, -6z'], adj., 
 
 glorious ; full of honor. 
 Glouglou [gloo-gloo], n. m., gur- 
 gle. 
 Gorge [gorzh], n. f., throat. 
 Goujat [goo -zhd'], n. m., Wac£- 
 
 guard ; loafer. 
 Goulu [yoo-/ii'], n. m., glutton. 
 Gout [#oo], n. m., tote; liking. 
 Goutait [goo-tai'], imperf., 3d 
 
 sing., enjoyed; tasted. 
 Gouter [goo -toy'], v. a., to enjoy ; 
 
 to relish. 
 Gouvernement [goo-vairn-md'"'], n 
 
 m., government. 
 Grace [grass], n. f., charm ; grace; 
 
 acceptance. 
 Gracieux-se [grd-see-b", -oz'], adj., 
 
 courteous ; kind. 
 Gracques [grdk], the Gracchi. 
 Grammaire [gram - mair'], n. f., 
 
 grammar. 
 Grand-e [grd", grd"d], adj., great; 
 
 tall; large; high-born. 
 Grandir [grd" '-deer'], v. n., to grow 
 
 tall. 
 Grave [grdv], adj., grave; serious. 
 Gre [gray], n. m., wish ; opinion. 
 
470 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 HAI 
 
 Grec [grek], fem., grecque [grek], 
 
 adj., Greek ; Grecian. 
 Greve [graiv], n. f., strand. 
 Grille [greev], n. f., iron fence; 
 
 gate; grate. 
 Grimpa [grd"-pd'], p. def., 3d 
 
 sing., clambered up. 
 Grimper [_gra~-pay'], v. a., to 
 
 climb ; to clamber. 
 Gros-se \_gro, gross], adj., 
 
 big ; en gros, wholesale. 
 Grossi-e [gro-see'], part., magnified, 
 Guere [gair], adv., but little; but 
 
 few (with ne). 
 Guerir [gay-reer'], v. a., to heal. 
 Guerre [gair], n. f., war. 
 Guet-apens [gai - td - pd~], n. m., 
 
 ambuscade. 
 Guichet [ghee-shai'], n. m., icicket- 
 
 door. 
 Guide [gheed], n. m., guide. 
 Guider {ghee-day'], v. a., to guide; 
 
 to direct. 
 Guillaume [ghee-yom'], William. 
 Guitare [ghee-tdr'], n. f., guitar. 
 
 H. 
 
 Habile [a-beel'], adj., clever ; skill- 
 ful. ^ 
 
 Habille-e [d-bee-yay'], part., dress- 
 ed ; clothed. 
 
 Habit [d-bee'], n. m., coat; pi.. 
 clothes. 
 
 Habiter [d-bee-tay'], v. a., to dwell ; 
 to live in ; to live at. 
 
 Habitue-e [d-bee-tu-ay'], part., ac- 
 customed; used. 
 
 Habitude [a-bee-tud"],n. f., habit. 
 
 Habituel-le [a -bee -tu- ell'], adj, 
 habitual. 
 
 s'Habituer [sd-bee-tu-ay'], v. refl. 
 to accustom one's self. 
 
 Hache [ash], n. f., axe. 
 
 Hagard-e [a- gar', -gard'], adj. 
 haggard. 
 
 Hai-e [d-ee'], part., hated. 
 
 Haie [ay], n. f., hedge. 
 
 Haillon [d-yo" / ], n. m., rag. 
 
 Haine [ain], n. f., hate; hatred. 
 . Hair [d-eer], v. a., to hate. 
 
 Haissant [d-ee-sd""'], part., hating 
 
 HES 
 
 Haissent [d-eess r ], pres., 3d pi., 
 (they) hate; haissent a mort, bear 
 a mortal hatred. 
 
 Haleine [d-lain'], n. f., breath. 
 
 Haletant-e [dl-td~', -td~t'], adj., 
 panting. 
 
 Halle [a/], n.f., market. 
 
 Harangue [ar-d~gh], n. f.,. speech ; 
 harangue. 
 
 Harasser [ar-d-say'], v. a., to har- 
 ass. 
 
 Hardes [ard], n. f. pi., clothing; 
 things. 
 
 Hardi-e [ar-dee'], adj., bold. 
 
 Hardiesse [ar-dee-ess'], n. f., bold- 
 ness. 
 
 Haricot [dr-ee-ko'], n. m., bean. 
 
 Harmonie [ar-mo-nee'], n. f., har- 
 mony. 
 
 Harnache-e [ar-nd-shay'], part., 
 harnessed. 
 
 Harnais [ar-nai'], n. m., harness. 
 
 Hasard [d-zar'], n. m., danger; 
 chance. 
 
 Hate [dt], n. f., haste; a la hate, 
 in haste. 
 
 Hater [d-tay], v. a., to hasten. 
 
 se Hater [se d-tay'], v. refl., to 
 hasten ; to make haste. 
 
 Hatons-nous [d-to"-noo'], imper., 
 1st pi., let us hasten. 
 
 Haut-e [o, dt], adj., high; upper; 
 du ha.\xt, from the top. 
 
 Hautesse [o-tess'], n. f., highness. 
 
 Hauteur [o-tor'], n. f., height ; a la 
 hauteur de, on a level with. 
 
 le Havre [18 d'-vr], n. m., Havre. 
 
 Havre [d'-vr], n. m., harbor. 
 
 Hemistiche [ay-mee-steesh'], n. m., 
 hemistich. 
 
 Henri [d~-ree r ], Henry. 
 
 Heraut [ay-ro'], n. m., herald. 
 
 Herbe [airb], n. f. , grass. 
 
 Heroine [ay - ro - een'], n. f., hero- 
 ine. 
 
 Heros [ay-ro'], n. m., hero. 
 
 Hervieux [air-vee-o], Hervieux. 
 
 Hesitant [ay-zee-td"'], part., hesi- 
 tating. 
 
 Hesitation [ay-zee-td-see-o~'\ n. f., 
 hesitation. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 471 
 
 HOR 
 
 Hesiter \ay-zee-tay'\ v. n., to hesi- 
 tate. 
 
 Hetre [aitr], n. m., beech; leech- 
 tree. 
 
 Heure [or], n. f., hour; o'clock; 
 time ; d'heure en heure, from 
 hour to hour. 
 
 Heureusement [o-r6z-md"' f ~\, adv., 
 fortunately ; happily. 
 
 Heureux-se [o-ro', -roz'], adj., 
 happy. 
 
 Hibou [ee-ooo'], n. in., owl. 
 
 Hideux-se \ee-do' , -doz'~], adj., hid- 
 eous. 
 
 Hier [ee-mV], adv., yesterday. 
 
 Hisse [eess], pres., 3d sing., hoists 
 lifts. 
 
 Hisser [ee-say''], v. a. , to hoist ; to 
 lift. 
 
 Histoire [eess-twdr'^, n. f., history 
 story. 
 
 Hiver [ee-vair'~\, n. m., winter; 
 quartiers d'hiver, winter -quar- 
 ters. 
 
 Hocha [5-sha'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) tossed. 
 
 Hochement [osh-md"'~\, n. m., toss 
 ing. 
 
 Hocher \o-shay'~\, v. a., to shake 
 to loss. 
 
 Hollandais-e \ol-ld"-dai', -daiz'~\, 
 n. or adj., Dutch ; Dutchman. 
 
 Hollande \ol-ld"d'\ n. f., Holland. 
 
 Homme [om], n. m., man. 
 
 Hongrois-e [o~-grwd', -grwdz'\ n. 
 or adj., Hungarian. 
 
 Honnete [on-naW], adj., honest. 
 
 Honneur [on-ndr'~\, n. m., honor. 
 
 Honorent [o-nor'\ pres., 3d pi., 
 (they) honor. 
 
 Honorer \o-no-ray'~\, v. a., to honor. 
 
 Honte \p~t~], n. f., shame; avoir 
 honte, to be ashamed. 
 
 Honteusement [o~-toz-md~'~\, adv., 
 shamefully. 
 
 Honteux-se [o~-to', -t'6z'~\, adj., 
 shameful. 
 
 Hoquet \o-kai'~\, n. m., hiccough. 
 
 Horaces [o-rass'~\, pi. , Horatii. 
 
 Horde [ord], n. f., horde. 
 
 Horizon \o-ree-zo"\ n. m., horizon. 
 
 IMA 
 
 Hors [or], prep., out (de, of). 
 Hospitalite \oss-pee-tal-ee-tay'~\, n. 
 
 f . , hospitality. 
 Hostilite [oss - tee - lee-tay'\ n. f., 
 
 hostility. 
 Hote [ot], n. m., host; landlord. 
 Hotel [o-tell'~\, n. m., hotel; hotel 
 
 de ville, city hall. 
 Hotesse [o-tess'~\, n. f., landlady ; 
 
 hostess. 
 Houlette [oo-lef], n. f., shepherd's 
 
 crook. 
 Huit [iieet ; before consonant wee], 
 
 num., eight. 
 Huitieme [iiee - tee - aim'~\, num., 
 
 eighth. 
 Humain-e \u-md~~', -main'~\, adj., 
 
 human; humane. 
 Humanite \u-man-ee-tay'\ n. f., hu- 
 maneness. 
 Humblement [o^-ble-md^, adv., 
 
 humbly. 
 Humeur [w-woV], n. f., mood; 
 
 whim ; caprice. 
 Humide \ii-meed'~], adj., moist; wet. 
 Humiliation \u-mee-lee-d-see-o~'\ 
 
 n.f., humiliation. 
 Humilite [u-mee-lee-tay''], n. f., hu- 
 mility. 
 Hurlant \jS.r-ld"'~\, part., howling ; 
 
 growling. 
 Hymen [ee-men'~\, n. in., wedlock. 
 
 Ici [ee-see'], adv., here; par ici, 
 hereabouts; this way; ici bas, 
 here below. 
 
 Idee \ee-day'~\, n. f., idea. 
 
 Ignoble [een-yo' '-&/], adj., ignoble. 
 
 Ignorance [eerc-s/o-raV], n. f., ig- 
 norance. 
 
 Ignorant-e [een - yo - ra\ -rd~"t'~\, 
 adj., ignorant. 
 
 II \eel\ pron., he; it. 
 
 Illusion [il-lii-zee-o~'~\, n. f., illusion. 
 
 Illustre [il-liis'-tr], adj., illustrious. 
 
 lis [ee/], pron., they. 
 
 Image \ee-mdzh'\ n. f., image; 
 imagery ; picture. 
 
 Imagination [ee-md-zhee-nd-see-o"''], 
 n.f., imagination ; fancy. 
 
472 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 IMP 
 
 s'Imaginer [see-md-zhee-nay'], v. 
 
 refl., to fancy ; to imagine. 
 Imaginez [ee-ma-zhee-nay'], imper., 
 
 2d pi., fancy. 
 Imite-e [ee-mee-tay'], part., imi- 
 tated. 
 Immense \im-md~s'], adj., immense. 
 Immortalisent [im - mor - tal- eez'], 
 
 pres., 3d jA.,{they) immortalize. 
 Immortaliser [im-mor-tal-ee-zay'], 
 
 v. a., to immortalize. 
 Immortel-le [im-mor-tell], adj., un- 
 dying ; immortal. 
 Imparfait-e [a~-par-fai\ -fait'], 
 
 adj., imperfect. 
 Impatience \a~-pd-see-a's'], n. f., 
 
 impatience. 
 Impatiente-e [a"-pd-see -d"- tay'], 
 
 part., provoked ; out of patience. 
 Imperfection [a"-pair-fek-see-o~'], 
 
 n. f., imperfection. 
 Imperiale \_d"-pay-ree-al], n. f., 
 
 outside ; top (of a stage-coach). 
 Impoli-e \oT-po-lee'], adj., impolite. 
 Importe [cT-port'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 it avails; it matters; it is of 
 
 consequence ; qu'importe, what 
 
 matters it ? 
 Importun-e [ST-por - to"', -tiin''] 
 . adj., importunate ; obtrusive. 
 Importunite [a '-por-tii-nee-tay'], n. 
 
 f., importunity. 
 Impossible [a~-po - see'- hl'~], adj., 
 
 impossible. 
 Impossibility \a~-po-see-bee-lee-tay'], 
 
 n. f., impossibility. 
 Impot [a~-po'~], n. m., tax. 
 Impression [a'-press-ee-o"'], n. f., 
 
 impression. 
 Imprime-e [a"-pree-may'], part., 
 
 printed. 
 Im primer [a"-pree-may'], v. a., to 
 
 print. 
 Imprudence \_a~-pru-dd~s'], n. f., 
 
 indiscretion ; imprudence. 
 Impuissant-e \a~-piiee-sd""', -sd~t'], 
 
 a.d}.,poiverless. 
 Impunement [_a~-pu - nay - md"'], 
 
 adv., with impunity. 
 Imputer [a"-pu-tay] 7 v. a., to im- 
 pute. 
 
 INF 
 
 Incertain-e [a~-sair-ta"\ -tain''], 
 adj., uncertain. 
 
 Incliner [a" -k lee-nay'], v. n., to in- 
 cline. 
 
 s'Incliner {sd"-klee-nay'], v. refl., 
 to bow. 
 
 Inconnu-e [cT-ko-nu], adj.,' un- 
 known ; n. m., stranger. 
 
 Inculte [aT-kult'], adj., unculti- 
 vated. 
 
 Indemnisera [a~- dam - neez - ra], 
 fut., 3d sing., will repay; will 
 indemnify. 
 
 Indemniser [a"-dam-nee-zay r ], v. 
 a., to indemnify. 
 
 Independamment [a~-day-pa~-da- 
 md"'], adv., independently. 
 
 Indigence \jf-dee-zha~ss'], n. f., 
 
 I poverty. 
 
 Indignation [a~-deen-ya-see-o~"'], n. 
 f. , indignation. 
 
 Indigne \_a~-deeny'], adj., unworthy. 
 
 Indiquer [a"- dee - kay'], v. a., to 
 point out ; to show. 
 
 Indiscretion [a"-deess-kray-see-o'~'], 
 n. f., indiscretion. 
 
 Indistinctement [a" - diss - ta~kt - 
 ma"'], adv., without distinction. 
 
 Individu [a~-dee-vee-dii'], n. m., in- 
 dividual; person. 
 
 Induire [cT-dii-eer'], v. ir., to in- 
 duce. 
 
 Indulgence [cT-dul-zhcTss'], n. f., 
 indulgence. 
 
 Industrie [a~~-du-stree'], n. f., indus- 
 try. 
 
 Inepuisable [ee -nay -puee - zd'- bt], 
 adj., inexhaustible. 
 
 Inexorable [ee-nek-so-ra-bl], adj., 
 inexorable. 
 
 Inexpressif-ve [een-ek-spress-eef , 
 -eev'], adj., inexpressive. 
 
 Inexprimable [ee-neek-spree-ma - 
 bl], adj., inexpressible. 
 
 Infanterie [a~fcT-te-ree'], n. f., in- 
 fantry. 
 
 Infect-e \a~-fekt'], adj., infectious. 
 
 Infertile \a~ - fair - teel'], adj., un- 
 fruitful. 
 
 Influence \a~flu-d~ss'], n. f., influ- 
 ence. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 473 
 
 INT 
 
 s'Informer \sa~-for-may''], v. refl., 
 to inquire ; to learn. 
 
 Ingenieux-se [a~-zhay-nee-6\ -02'], 
 adj., ingenious. 
 
 s'Ingerer [sa~-zhay-ray'~], v. refl., 
 to meddle with. 
 
 Ingrat-e [a"-grd' y -grat'\ adj., un- 
 grateful. 
 
 Initial-e \ee-nee-see-dl'\ adj., in- 
 itial. 
 
 Injure \a~-zh\xr'\ n. f., wrong ; in- 
 jury. 
 
 Innocent-e \ee-no-sa , -sd~t!\ adj., 
 innocent. 
 
 Inquiet-e [a~-kee-ai' } -aW], adj., 
 restless. 
 
 Inquietant \a~-kee-ay-td~'~\, part., 
 alarming. 
 
 s'Inquieter [sa~-kee-ay-tay'],v. refl., 
 to be disquieted. 
 
 Inquietude [a"-kee-ay-tud'~], n. f., 
 uneasiness ; anxiety ; solicitude. 
 
 Inscrire \cT-skreer'\ v. ii\, to in- 
 scribe. 
 
 Insecte [a~-sekt'~], n. m., insect. 
 
 Inspirer [a~-spee-ray'~\, v. a., to in- 
 spire. 
 
 Insensiblement \a~- sd" - see - blS - 
 mo"'], adv., imperceptibly. 
 
 Instant [a~-std~'i, n. m., moment ; 
 instant. 
 
 Instruire \a~-strueer'~\, v. ir., to in- 
 struct. 
 
 Instrument \a"'-stru-md~''\ i n. m., 
 instrument. 
 
 Insuffisant-e [a~-su-fee-zd~\ -zd~t'~], 
 adj., inadequate; insufficient. 
 
 Intelligence [a~-tel-lee-zhd"ss''], n. 
 f., intelligence ; mind. 
 
 Intelligent - e [cT '- tel - lee - zhd" 1 ', 
 -zhd~t'\ adj., intelligent. 
 
 Intention [a~-td~-see-o~ / ^, n. f., in- 
 tention. 
 
 Interdire \a" -tair-deer'\ v. ir., to 
 interdict. 
 
 s'Interesser [sd~-tay-ress-ay'~\, v. 
 refl., to become interested (a, in). 
 
 Interet \cT-tay-rai'~\, n. m., inter- 
 est. 
 
 Interieurement [a~ - tay - ree - or - 
 wj<T'], adv., within. 
 
 IVR 
 
 Interlocuteur [a"-tair-lo-ku-tdr'J, 
 n. m., interrogator. 
 
 s'Interrompit [sa""-tair-ro~-pee , ~], p. 
 def., 3d sing., broke off". 
 
 Interrompre [a~-tair-ro'~'-pr~\,v. ir., 
 to interrupt. 
 
 Inter rompt [cT-tair-ro~''~\, pres., 3d 
 sing., breaks off; stops. 
 
 Intervenir \aT-tair-v'neer'\ v. ir., to 
 intervene. 
 
 Introduire {cT-tro-diieer''], v. ir., to 
 introduce. 
 
 s'Introduisait \sd~-tro - dii.ee - zai'~\, 
 imperf., 3d sing., introduced him- 
 self. 
 
 Inutile \ee-nu-teel'\ adj., useless. 
 
 Invente-e [a~-vd"'-tay'~], part., in- 
 vented. 
 
 Invention [a'-vd~'-see-o~'~\, n. f., in- 
 vention. 
 
 Invincible \a" -vd" -see' -bl\ adj., in- 
 vincible. 
 
 Invitation [a~-vee-td-see-o~'], n. f., 
 invitation. 
 
 Inviter [cT-vee- tay'\ v. a., to in- 
 vite. 
 
 Invoquant [a~-vo-kd~ r ], part., in- 
 voking. 
 
 Invoquer [cT-vo-kay'~\, v. a., to in- 
 voke. 
 
 Irai \_ee-ray'\ fut., 1st sing, of " al- 
 ler," / shall or will go. 
 
 Irez [ee-raf], fut., 2d pi., you will 
 go. 
 
 Irlandais-e [eer - Id"- dai', -daiz'~], 
 adj., Irish. 
 
 Ironie \ee-ro-nee'\ n. f., irony. 
 
 Irrevocable [eer-ray-vo-kd'-bQ, adj., 
 irrevocable ; can not be called 
 back. 
 
 Isabeau [ee-zd-bo''], n. f., Isabeau. 
 
 Italie \ee-tal-ee'\ n. f., Italy. 
 
 Italien-ne [ee-tal-ee-d"~\ -en'J, adj., 
 Italian. 
 
 Italienne [ee - tdl- ee - en'\ fem. of 
 Italien. 
 
 Ivre [ee'-vr\ adj., drunk ; intoxica- 
 ted. 
 
 Ivresse [ee - vress^, n. f., intoxica- 
 tion ; frenzy. 
 
474 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 JOU 
 J. 
 
 J', forje, before vowel or h mute. 
 
 Jalousie [zhal-oo-zee'~\, n. f., jeal- 
 ousy. 
 
 Jaloux-se \_zhal-oo\ -ooz'~\, adj., 
 jealous. 
 
 Jamais [zham-ai'~], adv., ever; with 
 "ne," never. 
 
 Jambe [zhd~U], n. f., leg ; limb. 
 
 Jambon [_zhcT-bo~'~\, n. m., ham. 
 
 Jante [zhcTt], n. f., felloe (of a 
 wheel). 
 
 Japon [zha-po~ r ], Japan. 
 
 Jardin [_zhar-da~'~\, n. m., garden; 
 yard. 
 
 Jaune [zAorc], adj., yellow. 
 
 Je [zA£], pron., Z 
 
 Jean [zhd~], n. m., *7b7/n. 
 
 Jerusalem \_zhay-ru-zd-lem'\ Jeru- 
 salem. 
 
 se Jeta [sdzh-td'~], p. def., 3d sing., 
 threw himself. 
 
 Jeter [z/je-to/'J, v. a. , Zo Mrow ; to 
 cast. 
 
 Jette [z/iett], pres., 3d sing., throws. 
 
 Jeu fzAo], n. m.,play. 
 
 Jeuue [zkori], adj., young. 
 
 Jeunesse \zhd-ness'\ n. f., youth. 
 
 Jeux [sAtfj, n. m. pi., plays. 
 
 Joie [sAwa], n. f.,joy; delight. 
 
 Joindra [zliwa-dra\fx\t., 3d sing., 
 will join. 
 
 Joindre [zhwa"' -df\, v. ir., to join. 
 
 Joint -e [zhwa", zhwa~C], part., 
 joined; met. 
 
 Joli-e \zho-lee'\ adj., pretty ; fine. 
 
 Joliment \_zho-lee-md"'\ adv., pret- 
 tily ; finely. 
 
 Joue-e \zhoo-ay'\ part., played; 
 acted. 
 
 Jouer [zhoo-ay'~], v. n., to play. 
 
 Jouet \_zhoo-ai'~\, n. m.,toy ; sport. 
 
 Jouir \_zhoo-eer'\ v. n., to en- 
 
 j°y- 
 
 Jouissez \zhoo-ee-say'~\, pres., 2d 
 Y>\., (you) enjoy. 
 
 Jouit \zhoo-ee'\ pres., 3d sing., en- 
 joys (foil, by de). 
 
 Joujou \zhoo-zhoo'\ n. m., play 
 thing. 
 
 LAI 
 
 Jour \zhoor\ n. m., day; daylight; 
 tous les jours, every day. 
 
 Journee [zhoor-naf], n. f., day; 
 day of battle. 
 
 Joyeux-se [zhwd-yo, -yoz'\ adj., 
 joyous; merry. 
 
 Judas [zhii-dd'2, n. in., peephole ; 
 aperture. 
 
 Juge [zhtizK], n. m., judge. 
 
 Jugeait [zhu - zhai'~\, imperf., 3d 
 smg.,judged ; regarded. 
 
 Juger \zhu-zhay'\ v. a., to judge. 
 
 Julie [zAii-Zee'], n. f., Julia. 
 
 Jument [zAw-mcT'], n. f., horse; 
 pony. 
 
 Jure-e [zhu-ray'~\, part., sworn. 
 
 Jurer [zAw-ra?/'], v. n., to swear. 
 
 Juste [zhtist], adj., right; proper; 
 au juste, precisely; exactly. 
 
 Justement \_zhtist-md~~'~\, adv., just- 
 ly. 
 
 Justice \zliuss-teess'~\, n. f., justice. 
 
 Jusqu'a \zhuss-kd'\ prep., even to; 
 as far as; until; up to; jusqu'- 
 ici, up to here ; as far as here ; 
 hitherto ; jusqu'a present, hither- 
 to. 
 
 Jusqu'a ce que [zhii-slcd s&e'],conj., 
 until; till. 
 
 Jusque [zhiislc], prep., as far as. 
 
 L. 
 
 L', for le, before a vowel or h mute. 
 
 La \lah~\, art., the; pron., her ; it. 
 
 La [lah\ adv., there; la-bas, down 
 there; yonder. 
 
 Labial-e [ld-bee-al'~\, adj., labial. 
 
 Lache [IdsK], n. m., coward. 
 
 Lacher [ld-shay'~\, v. a., to let loose. 
 
 Lachete [ldsh-tay'~\, n. f., cowardice. 
 
 La-dessus [lah-de-sii''], adv., there- 
 upon. 
 
 La Fontaine [lah fo~-tain'\ La 
 Fontaine (French fabulist). 
 
 Laid-e [lai, laid~\, adj., ugly ; plain. 
 
 La'ique \lah-eek'\ adj., lay; laic. 
 
 Laissant [lai-sd~' / ~], part., leaving; 
 letting. 
 
 Laisse-e \lai-say'~], part., left; let. 
 
 Laisser [lai-say'\ v. a., to let; to 
 allow ; to leave. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 475 
 
 LEV 
 
 Lait [lai], n. m., milk. 
 
 Lambeau [ld"-bo'], n. m., fragment 
 
 Lampe [lap], n. f., lamp. 
 
 Langage [la'-gdzh'], n. m., lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Langue [ld~gh], n. f., tongue ; lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Laquelle [lah-kelV], pron.f., which. 
 
 Larme [larm], n. f., tear. 
 
 Las-se \_ld, lass~], adj., tired; weary. 
 
 Laurier [lo-ree-ay'], n. m., laurel; 
 glory. 
 
 Lausanne [lo-zdn'], Lausanne. 
 
 Laver [Id-vay 1 ], v. a., to wash; to 
 lave. 
 
 Le [le], art., the; pron. ,him; it; 
 so. 
 
 Lecon [le-so~'], n. f., lesson. 
 
 Lecture [lek-tur'], n. f., reading ; 
 perusal. 
 
 Leger-e [lay-zhair'], adj., light; 
 slight. 
 
 Legua [lay-ga], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) bequeathed. 
 
 Legue-e [lay-gay'], part., bequeath- 
 ed. 
 
 Lendemain [ld"-de-ma"'], n. m., 
 next day. 
 
 Lent-e [Id", ld"t], adj., slow. 
 
 Lentement [la't-md"'], adv., slowly. 
 
 Lenteur [laT-tdr'], n. f., slowness. 
 
 Lequel [U-kell], pron. m., which. 
 
 Les [lay], art., the; pron., them. 
 
 Lesquelles [lay-kelt], pron., pi. f., 
 which. 
 
 Lettre [lettr], n. f., letter; pi., lit- 
 erature. 
 
 Leur [lor], pron., them ; to them. 
 
 Leur [lor], pron., their (with le or 
 
 se Leva [sS le-va], p. def. , 3d sing. , 
 
 arose; got up. 
 Levait [le-vai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 raised. 
 se Levent [se laiv'], pres., 3d pi., 
 
 get up ; rise. 
 Lever [lS-vay'], v. a., to raise. 
 se Lever [se le-vay'], v. refl., to get 
 
 up ; to rise. 
 Levez-vous [le-vay-voo'], imper., 
 
 2d pi., get up ; rise. 
 
 LOI 
 
 Levres [lai'-vr], n. f. pi., lips. 
 
 Liaison [lee-ai-zo~'], n. f., connec- 
 tion. 
 
 Liard [lee-dr'], n. m., farthing. 
 
 Liban (le) [le lee-bd"'], Lebanon. 
 
 Liberalement [ lee-bay-rdl-md" '], 
 adv., liberally ; largely. 
 
 Liberte [lee-bair-tay'], n. f., liberty. 
 
 Librairie [lee-brai-ree'], n. f., book- 
 selling ; book-store. 
 
 Libre [lee'br], adj., free; at liberty. 
 
 Lie [lee], n. f., lees ; dregs. 
 
 Lien [lee-aT], n. m., bpnd. 
 
 Lieu [lee-o], n. m., place; au lieu 
 de, instead of. 
 
 Ligne [leeny], n. f., line. 
 
 Ligue-e [lee-gay'], part., leagued. 
 
 Linge [la y zh], n.m., linen. 
 
 Lion [lee-o""'], n. m., lion. 
 
 Lire [leer], v. ir., to read. 
 
 Lis [lee], pres., 1st sin g., L read. 
 
 Lisait [lee-zai], imperf., 3d sing., 
 read ; was reading. 
 
 Lise [leez], subj., 1st or 3d sing., 
 (/ or he) may read. 
 
 Lisez [lee-zay'], imper., 2d pi., 
 read. 
 
 Lit [lee], n. m., bed. 
 
 Lit [lee], pres., 3d sing., reads. 
 
 Litteraire [lit- ay -r air'], adj., lit- 
 erary. 
 
 Litterature [Jit-ay -rd-tiir'], n. f., 
 literature. 
 
 Livre [lee'-vr], n. m., book ; n. f., 
 pound,. 
 
 Livre-e [lee-vray'], part., surren- 
 dered. 
 
 Livrer [lee-vray'], v. a., to yield ; to 
 transfer. 
 
 se Livrer [se lee-vray'], v. refl., to 
 yield to. 
 
 Loger [lo-zhay'], v. n., to board ; to 
 live ; to dwell. 
 
 Logique [lo-zheek'], n. f., logic. 
 
 Loi [Iwd], n. f., law. 
 
 Loin [Iwd"], adv., far ; plus loin, 
 farther; au loin, «ra the distance; 
 loin de, far from; loin que, /a?' 
 
 Lointain [Twof-ftr'], n. m., dis- 
 tance. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 MAI 
 
 Lombardie [lo"-bar-dee'],n. f., Lom- 
 bard//. 
 
 Londres [lo"dr], London. 
 
 Long [Jo ], f., longue [lo"gh], adj., 
 long. 
 
 Longtemps [lo"-td"'], adv., long; 
 a long time. 
 
 Longueur [lo"-gh'6r'], n. f., length. 
 
 Lorsque [lors-ke], adv., when. 
 
 Louange [loo-d" zh'], n. f., praise. 
 
 Louer [loo-ay'], v. a., to praise. 
 
 Louer [loo-ay'], v. n., to let, 
 
 Louis [/oo-ee',~], Lewis. 
 
 Loup [loo], n. m., wolf. 
 
 Loyal-e [Iwd-ydl], adj., loyal. 
 
 Lu-e [I'd], part., read. 
 
 Lueur [lii-or], n. f., ^/eaw ; glim- 
 mer. 
 
 Lui [/wee], pron., to him; him; to 
 it; at him ; he; of him. 
 
 Luire [f'd-eer], v. ir., to shine. 
 
 Lumiere [lii-mee-air], n. f., light. 
 
 Lundi [lo'-dee], n. m., Monday. 
 
 Lune [I'dn], n. f., moon. 
 
 Lunette [ld-nett\, n. f., spy-glass ; 
 pi., spectacles. 
 
 Luttant [lii-ta""], part., struggling. 
 
 Luxe [lilks], n. m., elegance. 
 
 Lyon [/ee-o "'], Lyons (city). 
 
 M. 
 
 M', for me, before a vowel or h 
 
 mute. 
 M., abbreviation for Monsieur. 
 Ma [mali], pron. f, my. 
 Macon [md-so"'], n. ra., mason. 
 Madame [ma -dam'], n. f., Mrs.; 
 
 lady ; madams. 
 Mademoiselle [mad-mwd-zell], n. 
 
 f., Miss ; young lady. 
 Magasin [mq-gd-zd"'], n. m., store. 
 Magnanime [mdn-yd-neem], adj., 
 
 high-minded. 
 Magnificence [man-yee-fee-sd' V], 
 
 n. f., grandeur. 
 Magnifique [man-yee-feek'], adj., 
 
 gorgeous ; stately ; magnificent. 
 Mai [may], n. va.,May. 
 Maigreur [may - gi'or'], n. f., lean- 
 ness ; thinness. 
 Main [md"], n. f., hand. 
 
 MAN 
 
 Maintenant [?«a~-?e-wa~'], adv., 
 now. 
 
 Maintenir [ma~-te-neer'], v. ir., to 
 maintain. 
 
 Maintinrent \ma~-ta~'-r\, p. def., 
 3d pi., {they) maintained ; se- 
 cured. 
 
 Mais [maf\, conj., but. 
 
 Maison [mai-zo"'], n. f., house. 
 
 Maitre [mai'-tr], n. m., master; 
 owner; teacher. 
 
 Majeste' [md-zhess-tay'], n. f., maj- 
 esty. 
 
 Majestueusement [md-zhess-tii-dz- 
 md"'], adv., majestically. 
 
 Majeur-e [md-zhor'], adj., major; 
 greater. 
 
 Mai, adv., badly; evil ; wrong; ill; 
 plus mal, worse. 
 
 Mai, n. m., evil; ill; avoir mal a, 
 to have the — ache ; to have a 
 pain in. 
 
 Malade [mal-dd], adj., sick. 
 
 Maladie [mal-d-dee'], n. f., disease; 
 sickness. 
 
 Male [mal], n. m., male. 
 
 Malgre [mal-gray 1 ], prep., in spite 
 of; malgre que, conj., notwith- 
 standing that ; for all that. 
 
 Malheur [mal -or'], n. m., viisfor- 
 tune. 
 
 Malheureusement[wa/-o>-d£-?wr'], 
 adv., unfortunately. 
 
 Malheureux-se [mal- or - o, -oz'], 
 adj., unhappy; unfortunate; un- 
 lucky. 
 
 Malin [md - la"'], fern., maligne 
 [ma-ken?'], adj., malicious ; sly; 
 shrewd. 
 
 Malle [mal], n. f., trunk. 
 
 Malveillance [mal-vai-yd"s / ], n. f., 
 ill-will ; malevolence. 
 
 Mam'selle, contraction for made- 
 moiselle. 
 
 Manche [md"sh], n. f., sleeve. 
 
 Mander [md"-day'], v. a., to sum- 
 mon. 
 
 Mange [»ta~sA],pres., 3d sir\v.,eats. 
 
 Mangea [ma"- zha], p. def, 3d 
 sing., ate. 
 
 Manger [md"-zhay'],v. a., to eat. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 417 
 
 MEC 
 
 Mangez {jnbT-zhay''] 1 pres. or im- 
 
 per., 2d p]., eat. 
 Manqua [wio~-^a'],p. def.,3dsing., 
 
 failed. 
 Manquer \rncT-kay'~] } v. n., to want; 
 
 to fail. 
 Manuscrit [_man-u-skree'~\, n. m.. 
 
 manuscript. 
 Marbre [mar'-br], n. m., marble; 
 
 grave-stone; slab. 
 Marchand [inar-shd""'~\, n. m., mer- 
 chant ; dealer. 
 Marchandises \_mar-shcT-deez'~\, n. 
 
 f. pi., goods; wares. 
 Marche \_marsh\ n. f., march ; 
 
 course ; advance ; pi. , steps. 
 Marche \inarsh~], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 goes. 
 Marche \_mar-shay'~\, n. m., market. 
 Marcher \jnar-shay'],v. n., to walk; 
 
 to go. 
 Marcheront [marsh-i-o"''], fut., 3d 
 
 pi., (they) will march ; will go. 
 Mardi [rnar-dee'~\, n. m., Tuesday. 
 Mari \ina-ree'~\, n. m., husband. 
 Marie \_ma-ree'\ Mary. 
 Marque [nioriQi n - £j ww&« 
 Marquer [/Har-&oy'],v. a., to mark; 
 
 to indicate. 
 Mars [wiarss], n. m., March. 
 Marsouin [_mar-soo-aT'~\, n. va., por- 
 poise. 
 Marteau [inar-to''], n. m., hammer. 
 Masquant \jnass-kd~'], part., mask- 
 ing. 
 Matelot [inat-lo'1, n - m -> sailor. 
 Matin [///a-ZeT'], n. m., morning. 
 Mauvais-e \_mo-vai', -vaiz'~\, adj., 
 
 bad; ugly. 
 Maux [/ho], n. m. pi., mVs; ills. 
 Maxime [mak-seem' - ], n. f., maxim. 
 Maximum [jnak-see-mdm'^, n. m., 
 
 maximum. 
 Me [/ne], pron., me; to vie; for 
 
 me ; to myself. 
 Mediant -e \jnay -sha", -shcTt'~\ 
 
 adj., wicked ; bad; evil-disposed 
 Meconnaitre \jnay-ko-nai'-tr~\,v. ir. 
 
 not to know again. 
 Me'content-e [inay-ko"-ta' 7 -tcTt'~] 
 
 adj., dissatisfied. 
 
 MER 
 
 Medecin [inay-d-sa"'~\, n. m., phy- 
 sician. 
 
 Medecine [may-d-seeri~\, n. f., med- 
 icine. 
 
 Medial-e [inay-dee-al'^\, adj., medial. 
 
 Mediocre [inay-dee-d -kr~], adj., or- 
 dinary ; hardly passable. 
 
 Mediocrit e [ may-dee-o-kree-tay'~\, 
 n. f., mediocrity. 
 
 Medire \_may-deer'~\, v. ir., to slan- 
 der. 
 
 Mediter \jnay-dee-tay'\ v. a., to 
 meditate. 
 
 Mefaire [inay-fair'\ v. ir., to do 
 wrong. 
 
 Meilleur-e \jnai-yor'~\, adj., better; 
 best. 
 
 Melancolie \jnay-la -ko-lee'\ n. f., 
 sadness. 
 
 Mele-e \jnai-lay'], part., mixed; 
 mingled. 
 
 se Meier [se mai-lay'~\, v. refl., to 
 meddle ; to mix. 
 
 Meme \jnaim'], pron., self; same ; 
 adv., even. 
 
 Memoire finay-mwdr''], n. f., mem- 
 ory. 
 
 Menace-e [///'na-saj/'], part., threat- 
 ened. 
 
 Menacer [m'na - say '], v. a., to 
 threaten. 
 
 Mendier [ind"-dee-ay'~], v. a., to 
 beg. 
 
 Mener [m'nay'], v. a., to lead; to 
 carry. 
 
 Ment \jna\ pres., 3d sing., falsi- 
 fies; lies. 
 
 Mention [jH<T-see-o~'], n. f,, men- 
 tion. 
 
 Mentir [witT-teer'], v. ir., to lie ; to 
 falsify. 
 
 se Meprendre [se may-pra"-dr~\, v. 
 refl., fo mistake. 
 
 Mepris [r)iay-pree'~\, n. m., contempt ; 
 scorn. 
 
 Me'prise \inay-preez'~\, n. f., mistake. 
 
 Mepriser \_may-pree-zay'\ v. a., fo 
 Qfesyrwse. 
 
 Mer \jnair\ n. f., sea. 
 
 Merci [/h air-see'], n. m., thanks; 
 thank you. 
 
478 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 MIL 
 
 Mercredi [mair-kre-dee'], n. m 
 
 Wednesday. 
 Mere [mair], n. f., mother. 
 Merite [may -reef], n. m., merit ; 
 
 approval. 
 Meriter [may-ree-tay'], v. a., to 
 
 merit ; to deserve. 
 Merveille [?nair-vaiJ r ], n. f., won 
 
 der ; a merveille, marvelously 
 
 wonderfully. 
 Mes [may], pron. pi., my. 
 Mesdames [may-dam'^, n. f. pi., la- 
 dies ; Mrs. 
 Mesdemoiselles [may-d-mwd-zell], 
 
 young ladies ; misses. 
 Messieurs [may-see-o], n. m. pi., 
 
 gentlemen ; sirs. 
 Mesure [me-zur'], n. f., measure. 
 Mesure-e [me-zil-ray'], part., meas- 
 ured. 
 Met [mat], pres., 3d sing., puts ; 
 
 sets ; levies ; se met a, begins to. 
 Metalliqne [may - tal - leek'], adj., 
 
 metallic; steel. 
 Mets [mat], pres., 1st sing., or im- 
 
 per., 2d sing., put; put on. 
 Mettent [met], pres., 3d pi., {they) 
 
 put; place. 
 Mettez [met-tay 1 ], imper., 2d pi. 
 
 put ; put on. 
 Mettons [met-to"'], imper., 1st pi., 
 
 let us put ; (we) put. 
 Mettre [met'-tr], v. ir., to put ; to 
 
 place; to set. 
 Meung [mo"], Meung (place). 
 Meunier [mo-nee-ay'], n. m., miller 
 Meurs [mor], pres., 1st sing., I die. 
 Midi [mee-dee'], n. m., noon ; midi 
 
 et demi, half past twelve. 
 Mien-ne [mee -a', -en'], pron., 
 
 mine (with le or la). 
 Mieux [mee-d 1 ], adv., better ; best; 
 
 more. 
 Mignon [meen-yo~'] , n. m. , favorite. 
 Mignonne [meen-yon'], n. f., favor- 
 ite; darling. 
 Mil [meet], num., one thousand. 
 Milan \jnee-la'], Milan. 
 Milieu [mee-lee-o], n. m., midst 
 
 au milieu de, in the midst of. 
 Mille [meel], n. f., mile. 
 
 MON 
 
 Mille [meel], num., one thousand. 
 
 Mine [meen], n. f., appearance; 
 look. 
 
 Minimum [mee-nee-moin'], n. m., 
 minimum. 
 
 Minute [mee-niif ], n. f., minute. 
 
 Minutieux-se [mee-nii-see-6' , -bz'], 
 adj., minute ; circumstantial. 
 
 Miracle [mee-ra-kl], n. m., prodi- 
 gy ; wonder. 
 
 Miroir [mee-rwdr'], n. m., looking, 
 glass; mirror. 
 
 Mis [mee], p. def., 1st sing., I put; 
 je me mis a, / began to. 
 
 Mis-e [mee, meez], part., put; set. 
 
 Miserable [ mee-zay-ra! -bl], adj., 
 wretched; miserable. 
 
 Misere [mee-zair'], n. f., misery. 
 
 Misericorde [mee-zay-ree-kord'], n. 
 f., mercy. 
 
 Mit [mee], p. def., 3d sing., put ; 
 se mit a, began ; commenced. 
 
 Mit [mee], imperf. subj., 3.d sing., 
 should put ; should place. 
 
 Mitre [mee'-t?-], n. f., mitre. 
 
 Mme., abbreviation of madame. 
 
 Mode [mode], n. f, fashion; mode. 
 
 Modene [mo-dain'], Mddena. 
 
 Moderne [mo-dairn'], a.dj. } 7>wdern. 
 
 Modeste [mo-dest'], adj., meek; un- 
 pretending. 
 
 Mceurs [morss], n. f. pi., habits ; in- 
 clinations ; manners. 
 
 Moi [mwa], pron.,/; me; moi- 
 meme, myself. 
 
 Moindre [mwa"'-dr], adj., less; 
 least. 
 
 Moins [mwa"], adv., less ; fewer ; 
 least ; au or du moins, at least. 
 
 Mois [mwa], n. m., month. 
 
 Mo'ise [mo-eez'], Moses. 
 
 Moitie [mwd-tee-ay'], n. f., half. 
 
 Mol [mol], adj., soft. 
 
 Molle [mol], f. of mou. 
 
 Mollement [mol-ma'], adv., quiet- 
 ly ; softly ; slowly. 
 
 Moment [mo-md~ r ], n. m., moment. 
 
 Mon [mo"], pron., my. 
 
 Monarque [mo-narkf], n. m., mon- 
 arch. % 
 
 Monceau [mo"-so'], n. m., heap. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 479 
 
 MOU 
 
 Monde [mo~d], n. m., world ; tout 
 
 le monde, every body. 
 Monnaie [mo-nay'], n. f., money; 
 
 coin. 
 Monosyllabe [ mo-no-see-lab' ], n. 
 
 m., monosyllable. 
 Monsieur [mo-see-6'], n. m., Mr. ; 
 
 gentleman; sir. 
 Montagne [mo"-tan7'], n. f., mount- 
 ain. 
 Montant [mo~-td~"'], part., going up ; 
 
 ascending. 
 Monte-e [mo"-tay'], part., mounted. 
 Monter [mo"-tay'], v. a., to ascend; 
 
 to go up. 
 Montrant [moT-tra"'], part., show- 
 ing ; pointing out. 
 Montre [mo~'-tr], n. f., watch. 
 Montrer [mo~-tray'], v. a. , to show. 
 Montrez [mo"- tray'], imper., 2d 
 
 pi., show. 
 se Moquer [sS mo-hay'], v. refl., to 
 
 laugh at ; to ridicule. 
 Morale [mo-rdl'], n. f., moral; 
 
 morals. 
 Morceau [mor-so'], n. ra., piece; bit. 
 Mort [?nor], n. f., death. 
 Mort-e \jnoi', mort], part., died; 
 
 adj., dead. 
 Mortel-le [mor-tell 1 ], adj., mortal. 
 Mot [wo], n. ra., ivord. 
 Mou [1/100], f. raolle [moll], adj., 
 
 soft. 
 se Moucher [se moo-shay'], v. refl., 
 
 to blow one's nose. 
 Mouille-e [moo-yay'], part., liquid. 
 Moulin [moo-ld^], n. m., mill. 
 Moulu-e [moo-lu], part., ground. 
 Mourez [moo-ray'], pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) die. 
 Mourir [moo-reer'], v. ir., to die. 
 se Mourir [sg moo-reer'], v. refl., 
 
 to be dying. 
 Mourons [moo-ro""], pres., 1st pi., 
 
 we die. 
 Mourut [moo-rii'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 died. 
 Moustique [moos-teeh'], n. m., mus- 
 
 quito. 
 se Mouvaient [s8 moo-vai'], imperf., 
 
 3d pi., (they) moved. 
 
 NEI 
 
 Mouvement [moov - md~'], n. m., 
 motion ; movement. 
 
 se Mou voir [sS moo-vwdr'], v. refl., 
 to move. 
 
 Moyen [mwd-ya'], n. m., means ; 
 matter. 
 
 Moyeu [mwd-y'6'], n. m.,hub; nave 
 (of a wheel). 
 
 Muet-te [mii-ai', -ett'], adj., mute. 
 
 Mugir [mii-zheer'], v. n., to roar. 
 
 Mur [miir], n.m., wall. 
 
 Mur-e [miir], adj.,r«j»e; mature. 
 
 Murmure [mur-miir / ], n. m., mur- 
 mur. 
 
 Murmurer [mur-mu-ray 1 ], v. n., to 
 murmur. 
 
 Muse [miize], n. f., muse. 
 
 Muse'e [mii-zay'], n. m., museum. 
 
 Musique [mii-zeek'], n. f., music. 
 
 N. 
 
 N', contracted from ne. 
 
 Naif [nd-eef], f. naive [nd-eev'], 
 
 adj., simple. 
 Naitre [nai'-tr], v. ir., to be born. 
 Naquit [nd-kee'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 (he) was born. 
 Nasal-e [nd-zdl'], adj., nasal. 
 Natal-e [nd-tdl'], adj., natal. 
 Nation [nd-see-o"'], n. f, nation. 
 Natte [natt], n. f., mat. 
 Nature [na-tiir'], n. f., nature. 
 Naturel-le [nd-tii-rell'], adj., natural. 
 Naturel [nd-tii-rell'], n. m., nature ; 
 
 disposition. 
 Naturellement [nd - tii - rel- ma"'], 
 
 adv., naturally. 
 Naval-e [nd-vdl'], adj., naval. 
 Ne [we], adv., not (with pas or 
 
 point) ; ne— que, only ; but ; not 
 
 until. 
 Neanmoins [nay-d~-mwd~'], conj., 
 
 nevertheless. 
 Necessite [nay-sess-ee-tay'], n. f., 
 
 need; necessity. 
 Negliger [nay-glee-zhay'], v. a., to 
 
 neglect. 
 Neige [naizh], n. f, snow. 
 Neiger [nai-zliay'], v. n.,to snow. 
 Neigerait [nai-zh-rai'], condit., 3d 
 
 sing., would snow. 
 
 
480 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 NOU 
 Net-te [nai, nett], adj., clear ; plain ; 
 
 open. 
 Nettoyer [net-wd-yay'], v. a., to 
 
 cleanse. 
 Neuf [nof], f. neuve [ndv], adj. 
 
 wew. 
 Neuf [nof], num., nine. 
 Neuve [wdf], f. of neuf. 
 Neveu [ne-v'6], n. m., nephew. 
 Nez [nay], n. m., nose. 
 Ni [wee], conj., neither ; nor. 
 Nia [nee-a], P- def., 3d sing., de 
 
 nied. 
 Niais-e [nee-ai', -aiz'], adj., silly. 
 Nid [wee], n. m., nest. 
 Niece [nee-ais'], n. f., niece. 
 Nier [wee-ay'], v. a., to deny. 
 Niveau [wee-uo'], n. m., /eye/. 
 Noce [woss], n. f., marriage. 
 Noir-e [wm-'oV], adj., black; dark. 
 Noircir [nwdr-seer'], v. a., to 6£tzc&- 
 
 erc. 
 Nom [wo"], n. m., waffle. 
 Nombre [wo"'-6r], u.m., number. 
 Nomme [wow*], pres., 3d sing 
 
 calls ; names. 
 Nommer [no-may'], v. a., to men- 
 tion ; to call; to name. 
 Non [wo"], adv., 720; not; nonplus, 
 
 neither ; either ; non pas, oh no ! 
 Nonchalamment [noT-shaUd-ma"], 
 
 adv., carelessly ; listlessly. 
 Nonobstant que [no"-nob-std"' ke], 
 
 notwithstanding that. 
 Non que [wo" ke'], conj., not 
 
 that. 
 Nos [wo], pron. pi., our. 
 Nourriture [woo - ree - tuY], n. f., 
 
 food. 
 Nous [woo], pron., ive ; us ; to us; 
 
 ourselves. 
 Nouveau [woo-ro'], fern., nouvelle 
 
 [noo-vell 1 ], adj., new ; fresh ; de 
 
 nouveau, adv., anew. 
 Nouveaute [noo-vo-tay'~\, n. f., wou- 
 
 elty ; innovation. 
 Nouveaux [noo-vo 1 ], adj., pi. of 
 
 nouveau. 
 Nouvel [noo-vell'], adj., new. 
 Nouvelle [noo-vell'], adj., f. of wow- 
 
 veau ; n. f. , news. 
 
 occ 
 
 Nouvellement [noo-vel-moT''], adv., 
 newly; lately. 
 
 Nouvelles [woo-i;e// ], n. f. pi., 
 news. 
 
 se Noyer [sS nicd-yay'], v. refl., to 
 drown one's self ; to be drowned. 
 
 Noyons-nous [nwd-yo~'-noo'], im- 
 per., 1st pi., let us drown our- 
 selves. 
 
 Nu-e [nu], adj., bare. 
 
 Nuage [nti-azh'], n. m., cloud. 
 
 Nudite' [nu-dee-tay], n. f. , nudity ; 
 insufficiency. 
 
 Nuire [ntieer'], v. ir., to harm; to 
 hurt. 
 
 Nuisible [niiee-zee'-bl], adj., injuri- 
 ous ; hurtful. 
 
 Nuit [wwee], n. f., night. 
 
 Nul-le [nul], adj., no one. 
 
 Nulle part [niilpdr], adv., nowhere. 
 
 Numero [nu-may-ro], n. m., num- 
 ber. 
 
 O. 
 
 Obeir [o-bay-eer'], v. a., to obey 
 
 (foil, by a). 
 Obeit [o-bay-ee'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 Objet [ob-zhai'], n. m., object. 
 
 Obligatoire [ob-lee-gd-twdr'], adj., 
 compulsory. 
 
 Oblige-e [ob-lee-zhay'], part., cowi- 
 pelled; obliged. 
 
 Obligeance \ob-lee-zhd~s'], n. f., 
 obligingness. 
 
 Obligeant-e [o-blee-zhd~ r , -zhd"t'], 
 adj., kind ; obliging. 
 
 Obscur-e [ob-skur'], adj., dark ; ob- 
 scure. 
 
 Observer [ob-sair-vay'], v. a., to ob- 
 serve ; to watch. 
 
 Obstine-e [ob-stee-nay], adj., obsti- 
 nate. 
 
 Obstiner [ob-stee-nay'], v. a., to ren- 
 der obstinate. 
 
 Obtenir [ob-te-neer'], v. ir., to ob- 
 tain. 
 
 Occasion [o-kd-zee-o"'], n. f., oppor- 
 tunity. 
 
 Occupation [o-ku-pa-see-o~'], n. f., 
 occupation. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 481 
 
 ORD PAI 
 
 s'Occupe [so-kiip''], pres., 3d sing.,: Ordinaire [or-dee-nair'], adj., ordi- 
 
 is busy ; is occupied (a, in). nary ; usual. 
 
 Occuper [o-kii-pay''],v. a., to occupy. Ordinairement [or-dee-nair-md*"~\, 
 
 s'Occuper [so-kii-pay'], v. refl 
 occupy one's self. 
 
 Occupons [o-ku-po~'~\, pres., 1st pi., 
 (we) hold; (ice) occupy. 
 
 CEil [o- v ], n. m., eye. 
 
 CEuvre [S'-vr], n. f., work. 
 
 CEuvres [o'-vr~\, n. f. pi., works. 
 
 Officier [o-fee-see-ay~\, n. m., offi- 
 cer. 
 
 Offrant [o -fra~'~\, part., yielding ; 
 offering. 
 
 adv., usually. 
 
 Ordonne-e [or-do-nay'], part., or- 
 dered. 
 
 Ordonner [or-do-nay'~],x. a., to com- 
 mand; to order. 
 
 Oreille [o-rai?~\, n. f., ear. 
 
 Orgueil [or-ghoy], ri. m., pride; 
 haughtiness. 
 
 Orphelin [or-f-la"~\, n. m., orphan. 
 
 Osai [o-zay'], p. det'., 1st sing*, (/) 
 dared; (I) ventured. 
 
 Oft're [o'-fr], pres., 1st or 3d sing., Oser [o-zay'], v. n., to dare ; to ven- 
 
 (I) offer or (he) offers. A £«re. 
 
 s'OfFre [so'^r], pres., 3d sing., pre- Otat [6-fa], imperf. subj., 3d sing., 
 
 sents itself 
 
 Offrir [o-/?-'eer'], v. a., to offer. 
 
 Oie [ica], n. f., goose; plume d'oie, 
 quill-pen ; quill. 
 
 Oindre [wcT'-dr], v. ir., to anoint. 
 
 Oiseau [wd-zo'~\, n. m., bird. 
 
 Olivier [o-lee-vee-ay'\ n. m.,olive; 
 olive-tree. 
 
 Ombre [o~'-br~], n. f., shade. 
 
 Omettre [o-met'-r'], v. ir., to omit ; 
 to overlook. 
 
 On [o~], pron., owe; *fo#; people. 
 
 Oncle [o~'-H], n. m., wHe/e. 
 
 Onde [o~cT], n - f-> ^aue. 
 
 Ont [o~], pres., 3d pi. of avoir, 
 they have. 
 
 Onze [oV], num., eleven. 
 
 Onzieme [V-zee-cu/H'], num., elev- 
 enth. 
 
 s'Opiniatrer [so-pee-nee-d-tray'], v. 
 refl., to be obstinate. 
 
 s'Opposer [so - po - zay'~\, v. refl., to 
 oppose. 
 
 Opprime-e [o-pree-may'~\, part., op- 
 pressed. 
 
 Or [or], n. m., <7o/c7. 
 
 Or [o?-], adv., now. 
 
 Oracle [o-rakl], n. m., oracle. 
 
 Orage [o-razh'], n. m., storm; tem- 
 pest. 
 
 Orcbestre [or- kess'-tr], n. m., or- 
 chestra. 
 
 Ordre [or'-dr~\, n. m., command; 
 order. 
 
 A should take away. 
 
 Oter [o-tay'~\, v. a., to take off; to 
 
 take away ; to take out. 
 Oil [oo~], adv., where; in which; 
 
 d'oii, whence. 
 Ou [oo~], conj., or; either. 
 Oublie [oo-blee'], pres., 1st sing., 
 
 (I) forget. 
 Oublie-e [oo-ofce-o?/'], part..yb?^of- 
 
 Oublier [oo-blee-ay'~\,v. a., to for- 
 get. 
 
 Oui [oo-ee], adv., yes. 
 
 Outil [oo-*ee'],n. m., tool. 
 
 Outrage [oo-trdzh'~], n. m., injury ; 
 attack. 
 
 Ouvert-e [oo-vair', -vairt'~\, part., 
 open; opened. 
 
 Ouvrage [oo-vrazh'~], n. m., work. 
 
 Ouvre [oo'-vr], pres., 3d sing., 
 opens. 
 
 Ouvrir [oo-vreer'], v. ir., to open. 
 
 Ouvrit [oo-vree], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) opened. 
 
 P. 
 
 Page [pazJi], n. f.,page. 
 Pa'ien [pd-ycT'], n.m., pagan. 
 Paierai [pay-ray''], fut.,lst sing., 
 
 I shall pay. 
 Paieras [pay-rd^, fut., 2d sing., 
 
 (thou) wilt pay. 
 Pain [pa"], n. m., bread. 
 Paire [pair], n. f.,pair ; couple. 
 
 X 
 
482 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 PAR 
 
 Paissant [pai-sa"'], part., grazing ; 
 
 feeding. 
 Paix [pat], n. f., peace. 
 Palais [pal-ai], n. m., palace. 
 Pale [pal - ], adj., pale. 
 Paleur [pd-lor], n. f., pallor. 
 Palier [pal-ee-ay'], n. m., head of 
 
 the stairs ; landing-place. 
 Papa [pa-pa], n. m.,papa. 
 Papier [pa-pee-ay'], n. m., paper, 
 Par [/>ar], prep., %; through; a; 
 
 per. 
 Para^ [pa-rat], pres., 3d sing. 
 
 appears ; seems. 
 Paraitre [par-ai'-tr], v. ir. , to ap 
 
 pear ; to seem. 
 Parbleu [par-bid'], int., zounds. 
 Parce que [parss ke"], conj., be 
 
 cause. 
 Parcourir [par-koo-recr], v. ir., to 
 
 run over ; to traverse. 
 Parcouru-e [par - koo - rut], part 
 
 examined ; read through. 
 Pardon [par-do"'], n. m., pardon. 
 Pardonne [par - don'~\, pres., 1st 
 
 sing., I forgive. 
 Pardonner [par-do-nay'], v. a., to 
 
 forgive (foil, by a). 
 Pareil-le [par-aiy'], adj., such; like. 
 Parent [pa-rat 1 ], n. m., parent; 
 
 relative. 
 Paresse [pa-ress'], n. f., idleness. 
 Paresseux-se [pa-ress-o , -oz'], adj. , 
 
 lazy; idle. 
 Parfait-e [par-fat, -fait], adj., 
 
 perfect. 
 Parfaitement [par-f ait-mat'], adv., 
 
 perfectly; clearly. 
 Parfum [par-f'6"], n. m., perfume. 
 Parisien-ne [pa-ree-zee-at' , -en'], 
 
 adj., Parisian. 
 Parla [par-la], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 (he) spoke. 
 Parlant [par-la"''], part., speaking. 
 Parle [part], pres., 3d sing., speaks ; 
 
 imper., speak. 
 Parler [par-lay'], v. a., to speak; 
 
 to talk. 
 Parlez [par -lay'], pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) speak ; imper., speak. 
 Parme [parm], Parma. 
 
 PAS 
 
 Parmi [par-mee'], prep., among. 
 
 Parnasse [par-nass'], n. m., Par- 
 nassus. 
 
 Parole [pa-rot], n. f., word; test- 
 imony ; speech ; address. 
 
 Part [pa?-] pres., 3d sing., goes; 
 on part, you start off. 
 
 Part [pa?], n. i.,part ; share ; par- 
 ty ; faire part, to acquaint ; to 
 give a share to. 
 
 Partage [par-tazh'], n. m., share. 
 
 Partageant [par-ta-zha"'], part., 
 sharing. 
 
 Partager [par-ta-zhay'], v. a., to 
 share. 
 
 Parte [part], pres. subj.,3d sing., 
 may leave. 
 
 Parti [par -tee'], n. m., party; 
 side. 
 
 Parti-e [par-tee'], part., set out; 
 started. 
 
 Particulierement [par-teek-u-lee- 
 air-mat'], adv., especially. 
 
 Partie [par-tee'], n.f., part; quar- 
 ter. 
 
 Partir [par-teer], v. ir., to set out ; 
 to go. 
 
 Partit [par-tee'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) set out ; departed. 
 
 Partons [par-to"'], imper., 1st pi., 
 let us go ; let us set out. 
 
 Partout [par -too], adv., every 
 where. 
 
 Parurent [pa-rur], p. def., 3d pi., 
 (they) seemed. 
 
 Parut [pa-rii], p. def., 3d sing., 
 appeared. 
 
 Parvenez [parv-nay"], pres., 2d pi., 
 you succeed to ; you reach. 
 
 Parvenir [parv - neer'], v. ir., to 
 reach ; to succeed (a, in). 
 
 Pai'venu-e [parv-nii'], part., suc- 
 ceeded. 
 
 Parvient [par-vee-a'], pres., 3d 
 sing., penetrates. 
 
 Pas [pa], n. m.,pace; step; adv., 
 720* (complement of ne). 
 
 Passage [pa-sazh'], n. m., passing ; 
 passage; way. 
 
 Passaient [pa-sat], imperf., 3d 
 pi., (they) went by ; 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 483 
 
 PEI 
 
 Passait [pa-sai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 went by ; passed. 
 
 Passant [pa-sd~ r ], part., passing 
 by ; n. m., passer by. 
 
 Passe [pass], pres., 3d sing., ex- 
 ceeds. 
 
 Passe [pa-say''], n. in., past. 
 
 Passe-e [pa-say'], part., passed; 
 last. 
 
 Passeport [pass-por'], n. m.,^ass- 
 port. 
 
 Passer [pa-say 1 ], v. n., to pass; to 
 pass away ; to be over. 
 
 se Passer [sS pa-say'], v. refl., to 
 pass ; to pass away ; to do with- 
 out ; to get rid (of, de). 
 
 se Passerait [sS pass-rai'], condit., 
 3d sing., would take place. 
 
 se Passerent [sS pa-sair'], p. def., 
 3d pi., (they) passed away. 
 
 Passion [pa-see-o""'], n. f., passion. 
 
 Pate [pd-tay'], n. m.,pie. 
 
 Paternel-le [pd-tair-nel], adj.,/>a- 
 ternal. 
 
 Pati-e [pd-tee'], part., suffered. 
 
 Patiemment [pa-see-d-mcT'], adv., 
 patiently. 
 
 Patience [pa-see-cTs'], n. f., pa- 
 tience. 
 
 Patriarche [pa-tree-arsh'], n. m., 
 patriarch. 
 
 Patrie [pa-tree'], n.f., native coun- 
 try. 
 
 Patron [pa-tro~'], n. m., patron. 
 
 Pauvre [po'-vr], adj., poor ; wretch- 
 ed ; n. m.,poor man. 
 
 Pauvrete [po-vr2-tay'], n. f., pov- 
 erty. 
 
 Pavilion [pa-vee-yo 1 '], n. m.,flag ; 
 banner. 
 
 Paye-e [pay-yay'], \>QXt.,paid. 
 
 Payer [pay-yay'], v. a., to pay ; to 
 pay for. 
 
 Pays [pay-ee'], n. m., country. 
 
 Paysage [pay-ee-zdzh'], n. m., land- 
 scape. 
 
 Paysan [pay-ee-zd"'], n. m.,peas- 
 ant. 
 
 Peau [po], n. f., skin; hide. 
 
 Peche [paish], n. f., peach. 
 
 Peindre [pa"'-dr], v. ir., to paint. 
 
 PER 
 Peine [pain], n. f., difficulty; 
 
 trouble; labor ; a peine, scarce- 
 ly. 
 Peint-e [paT, pa t], part., painted ; 
 
 described. 
 Peintre [pcT'-tr], n. m., painter. 
 Pele-mele [pail-mail'], adv., helter- 
 skelter. 
 Pendait [pa - dai'], imperf., 3d 
 
 sing., hung. 
 Pendant [pa -da'], prep., during ; 
 
 pendant que, conj., while. 
 Pendre [pa'-dr], v. n., to hang. 
 Penetration [pay-nay-trd-see-o~'], 
 
 n. f., shrewdness ; penetration. 
 Penetre-e [pay-nay-tray'], part., 
 
 impressed. 
 Pensee [pcT-say 1 ], n. f., thought; 
 
 idea. 
 Penser [pa" -say'], v. n., to think 
 
 (of, a). 
 Per9ant-e [pair-sd"', -sd"t'], adj., 
 
 piercing. 
 Perd [paii-], pres., 3d sing., loses. 
 Perdions [pair-dee-o"'], imperf., 
 
 1st pi., (we) lost our way ; subj. 
 
 pres., 1st pi., (we) may lose. 
 Perdis [pair-dee 1 ], p. def., 1st sing., 
 
 (/) lost ; je perdis de vue, / lost 
 
 sight of. 
 Perd re [pair'-d?-], v. a., to lose; to 
 
 ruin ; to undo ; se perdre, to lose 
 
 one's self — one's way. 
 Perdu-e [pair-du'], part., lost. 
 Pere [pair], n, m., father. 
 Perfection [pair-fek-see-o"'], n. f., 
 
 perfection. 
 Perfectionne-e [pair-fek-see-o- 
 
 nay'], part., perfected. 
 Pe'ri-e [pay-ree'], part., perished. 
 Peril [pay-ree'], n. m., peril; dan- 
 ger. 
 Permets [pair-mai'], pres., 1st 
 
 sing., I permit ; 2d sing., (thou) 
 
 permittest. 
 Permettez [ pair-met-tay'], imper., 
 
 2d pi., allow. 
 Permettrait [pair-met-trai'], con- 
 dit., 3d sing., would j)ermit. 
 Permettre [pair-met' -tr], v. ir., to 
 
 permit ; to allow. 
 
484 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 PIQ 
 
 se Permit [se pair-mee'], p. def., 3d 
 
 sing., permitted himself. 
 Persister [pai?--see-stay'], v. n., to 
 
 persist. 
 Personnage [pair-so-nazh'], n. m., 
 
 character ; pei*sonage. 
 Personne [pair-son''], pron., no one; 
 
 not any body (with ne). 
 Personne [pair-son], n. f., person; 
 
 individual; body ; par personne, 
 
 a head. 
 Persuader [pair-s'dd-day'], v. a., to 
 
 persuade. 
 Petit-e [pe-tee' , -teet'], adj., little; 
 
 small ; n. m. pi., little ones; young 
 
 (of animals). 
 Peu [po], adv., little ; peu de, little ; 
 few ; un peu, a little; rather ; a 
 
 peu pres, nearly ; about. 
 Peuple [po-pl],x\. m., people; na- 
 tion; pi., nations. 
 Peur [por], n. f.,fear; avoir peur, 
 
 to be afraid ; de peur que, for 
 fear that. 
 Peut [po], pres. , 3d sing., can; is 
 
 able ; may. 
 Peut-etre [po-tai' -tr], adv., per- 
 haps. 
 Peuvent [pov], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 can do ; are able. 
 Philanthropic [fee-lcT -tro-pee'], n. 
 
 f., philanthropy. 
 Philosophe [fee-lo-zof], n. m., 
 
 philosopher. 
 Phrase [/'?•&], n. f., phraseology ; 
 
 phrase. 
 Piastre [ pee-as s' -tr], n. f., dollar. 
 Piece [pee-aiss'], n. f., piece. 
 Pied [pee-ay'], n.m. ,foot; de pied 
 
 en cap, from head to foot. 
 Piemont [pee-ay-mo"'], Piedmont. 
 Pierre [pee-air'], n. f., stone; n. 
 
 in., Peter, Pierre. 
 Pigeon [pee-zho"'], n. m., pigeon. 
 Pignon [peen - yo~'\ n. m., gable 
 
 (of a house). 
 Pile [pee/], n. f., heap. 
 Piller [pee-yay 1 ], v. a., to pillage. 
 Pincettes [paT-set'], n. f. pi., tongs. 
 Piquer [pee-kay'], v. a., to bite ; to 
 
 sting. 
 
 PLU 
 
 se Piquer [sZ pee-kay'], v. refl., to 
 boast of; to pride one's self (in, 
 de). 
 
 Pire [peer], adj., worse; ivorst. 
 
 Pis [pee], adv., worse; icorst. 
 
 Pistolet [pee-sto-lai], n. m., pistol. 
 
 Pitie' [pee-tee-ay'], n. f.,pity ; mer- 
 cy. 
 
 Placat [p/a-sa'], imperf. subj., 3d 
 sing., (he) might place. 
 
 Place [pldss], n. f., space; room; 
 square. 
 
 Place'-e [pld-say'], part., placed. 
 
 Plaie [play], n. f., wound. 
 
 Plaindre [pld"'-dr], v. ir., to pity. 
 
 se Plaindre [se* ptiT'-dr], v. refl., 
 fo complain. 
 
 Plaine [plain], n. t, plain. 
 
 Plainte [pld"t], n. f., complaint. 
 
 Plaire [plair], v. ir., to please. 
 
 Plaisanterie [plai-zd^-tS-ree'], n. f., 
 humor ; fun ; waggish trick. 
 
 sePlaisent [seplaiz'], pres., 3d pi., 
 {they) take delight. 
 
 Plaisir \_plai-zeer'], n. m., pleasure. 
 
 Plait [/>^m], pres., 3d sing. , pleases. 
 
 Plancher [pld"~-shay'], n. m., ceil- 
 ing. 
 
 Planete [pld-nait'], n. f., planet. 
 
 Plante [pld^t], n. f., plant. 
 
 Plat [pld], n. m., dish. 
 
 Plate -forme [plat -for ?n'], n. f., 
 platform. 
 
 Plein-e [/>/<T, plain], adj., full; 
 open. 
 
 Pleurent [plor], pres., 3d \>\.,(they) 
 weep. 
 
 Pleurer [plo-ray'], v. n., to weep ; 
 to cry. 
 
 Plie [plee], n. f.,fold. 
 
 Plie-e [plee-ay'], part., folded. 
 
 Plomb [plo~], n. m., lead. 
 
 Pluie [pluee], n. f., rmra. 
 
 Plume [plum], n. i., pen; feather. 
 
 Plupart [plii-par'], n. f., the great- 
 er part ; the most. 
 
 Plus [p&], adv., more; most; ne 
 ■ — plus, ?20 — longer ; no — more ; 
 de plus, besides. 
 
 Plusieurs [plu-zee-or 1 ], pron., sew 
 
 I era/; sundry. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 485 
 
 POR 
 
 Plutot [plii-to'], adv., sooner; rather. 
 Yd, name of a river in Italy. 
 Poche [posh], n. f., pocket. 
 Poele [po-ail'], n. m., stove. 
 Poeme [po-aim'], n. m.,poem. 
 Poesie [po - ay - zee'], n. % poem; 
 
 poetry. 
 Poete [po-mY], n.m.,poet. 
 Poetique [po-ay-teek'], adj., j9oe£- 
 
 ical ; n. f., ar£ of poetry. 
 Poignee [pwdn-yay'], n. f., Aa»c?- 
 
 ful. 
 Poindre [pwcT'-dr], v. ir., to </a»n. 
 Poing [jowcT], n. m.,fst; coup de 
 
 poing, &/ow with the fist. 
 Point [/jwaf], adv., not (with ne) ; 
 
 point du tout, not at all. 
 Pointe [pwcTt], n. f., point ; sting. 
 Poire [pwdr], n. f., pear. 
 Pois [pwa], n. m. pi., peas ; name 
 
 of a street in St. Petersburg h. 
 Poison [pwd-zo^'], w.va.,jioison. 
 Poisson [pwd-so"'], n. n\.,fish. 
 Poitrine [ pwd-treen'], n. f., breast ; 
 
 chest. 
 Poivre [pwd'-vr], n. m., pepper. 
 Poli-e [po-lee'], adj., polite. 
 Police [po-leess], n. f., police. 
 Politesse [po-lee-tess'], n. impolite- 
 ness. 
 Politique [po-lee-teek'], adj., polit- 
 ical. 
 Pologne [po-lony'], n. f., Poland. 
 Polonais-e [po-lo-nai\ -naiz'], adj., 
 
 Polish. 
 Pomme [pom], n. f., apple. 
 Pont [po"], n. m., bridge. 
 Port [po?*], n. m., harbor ; port ; 
 
 haven. 
 Portail [por-tiy],n. m., doorway. 
 Portant [por-td'], part., carrying ; 
 
 bearing; bien portant, in good 
 
 health; well. 
 Porte [port], n. f., door; gate; 
 
 doorway. 
 se Porte [sS port], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 carries himself; is. 
 Porte-e [por-tay'], part., brought; 
 
 carried. 
 Porte-manteau [port-ma* -to'] } n. 
 
 m. , portmanteau. 
 
 POU 
 
 Portent [port], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 carry ; bear. 
 
 Porte-plume [port-plum'], n. m., 
 pen-case. 
 
 Porter [por-tay'], v. a., to carry ; to 
 wear. 
 
 se Porter [se por-tay'], v. refl., to 
 be ; to carry one's self. 
 
 Porteur [por-tor'], n. in., earner. 
 
 Portez [por-tay'], pres., 2d pi., 
 (you) bring ; carry. 
 
 Portiere [por-tee-air'], n. f., door 
 (of a carriage). 
 
 Portions [por-tee-o"'], imperf., 1st 
 pi., (we) were carrying. 
 
 Portugais-e [por-tii-gai', -gaiz'~], 
 adj., Portuguese. 
 
 Posa [po-za], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) placed ; set down ; laid. 
 
 Pose-e [po-zay'], part., placed; 
 perched. 
 
 Pose que [po-zay ke'], conj., grant- 
 ing that. 
 
 Poser [po-zay'], v. a., to place. 
 
 Position [po-zee-see-o"'], n. f., po- 
 sition. 
 
 Possede [j>o-said], pres., 3d sing., 
 possesses. 
 
 Posseder [po- say -day'], v. a., to 
 possess. 
 
 Poste [post], n. f., post-house ; post- 
 office. 
 
 Posterite [pos-iay' -ree-tay'], n. f., 
 posterity. 
 
 Postilion \_po-stee-yo""'], n. m. y pos- 
 tillion. 
 
 Pou [poo], n. m., louse. 
 
 Poudre [poo'-dr], n. f., powder. 
 
 Poulailler [poo-la-yay'], n. m., 
 poultry-yard ; poultry -house. 
 
 Pour [poor], prep., for ; in order 
 to; to. 
 
 Pourboire [poor - bwdr'], n. m., 
 drink-money ; gratuity. 
 
 Pour que [poor ke'], conj., in or- 
 der that ; that. 
 
 Pourquoi [poor-kwa], adv., why. 
 
 Pourrais [poo-rai], condit., 1st or 
 2d sing., / coidd; (thou) couldst. 
 
 Pourrait [poo-rai'], condit., 3d 
 sing. , might ; would be able. 
 
486 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 PRE PRE 
 
 Pourrions [poo-ree-o"'], condit., Preferent I pray-fair''], pres., 3d 
 1st pi., (we) should be able. pi., (they) prefer. 
 
 Pourrons [poo-ro~'\ fut., 1st pl.JPreferer [pray-f ay-ray], v. a., to 
 (ice) shall be able. prefer. 
 
 Poursuivi-e [poor-siiee-vee r ], part.,jPremier-e [pre-mee-ay' , -air'], adj., 
 pursued ; followed. I first ; former ; chief. 
 
 Poursuivons [poor-siiee-vo" r ], im-,Premiere [pre-mee-air], f. of pre- 
 
 per., 1st pi., let us pursue. 
 
 Poursuivre [poor-siiee' -vr], v. ir., 
 to pursue. 
 
 Pourtant [poor -to."'], conj., how- 
 ever ; nevertheless. 
 
 inter. 
 
 Prenait [prg-nai'], imperf., 3d 
 sing., took ; was talcing. 
 
 Prend [prd"], pres., 3d sing., 
 takes. 
 
 Pourvoir [jjoor - vwdr'], v. ir., to Prendre [prcT'-dr], v. ir., to take. 
 
 provide. jPrends [prd"], imper., 2d sing., 
 
 Pourvu que [poor-vii ke'], conj.,| take. 
 
 provided that. Prennent [pren], pres., 3d pi., 
 
 Poussait [poo-sai], imperf., 3d (they) take; ils prennent parti 
 
 sing., urged forward. pour, they side with. 
 
 Poussant [poo-sd'], part., pushing Prenons [pre-no"'], pres., 1st pi., 
 
 forward. | (ice) take. 
 
 Pousser [jwo-say], v. a., to push ; Preparer [pray-pd-ray'], v. a., to 
 
 to urge. | prepare. 
 
 Pouvait \_poo - vai'~\, imperf, 3d Pres [prut], adv., near; pres de, 
 
 sing., could ; was able. prep., near ; a peu pres, nearly. 
 
 Pouvez [poo-vay'], pres., 2d pi., Prescrire [press-kreer'], v. ir., to 
 
 {you) can ; are able. \ prescribe. 
 
 Pouvoir [poo-vwdr'], v. ir., to be Present-e [pray-zd"', -zd"t'], adj., 
 
 present ; a present, noiv ; at pres- 
 ent. 
 
 Presentai [pray-za '-tay'], p. def., 
 1st sing., I presented. 
 
 Presentent [pi-ay-zd"t], pres., 3d 
 pi . , (they) furnish. 
 
 able 
 Practicable [pralc-tee-ka -bl], adj., 
 
 feasible. 
 Pratique [prd-teek'], n. f., prac- 
 tice. 
 Pre' [pray], n. m., meadow. 
 Pre'caire [pray-kair'], adj., j9?*eca-!Presenter [pray-zd" -tay'], v. a., to 
 
 rious. present ; to tender. 
 
 Pre'cedent-e [pray-say-dd"\ -dd"t'], jse Presenter [se pray-zd" -tay'], v. 
 
 adj., preceding. refl., to present one s self 
 
 Pre'cepte [pray-sept'], n. m., pre- Presenteront [pray-zd"t-ro"'], fut., 
 
 cept. 3d pi., (they) will present. 
 
 Precieux-se [pray -see- o', -02'], President [pray-zee-dd"'], n. m., 
 
 adj., precious; valuable. j president. 
 
 Precipice [pray-see-peess'~], n. m.,Presque [presk], adv., almost; 
 
 precipice. nearly. 
 
 Precipite-e [pray - see -pee - tay'~\, Pressentir [pre-sd" '-teer'], v. ir., to 
 
 part., hurled down. foresee. 
 
 se Pre'cipiter [se pray-see-pee-tay'], [Presse'-e [pre-say'], part., urged; 
 
 v. refl., to cast one's self upon. driven. 
 
 Precis-e [pray-see', -seez'~\, adj., Presser [pre-say'], v. a., to press. 
 
 precise, ; exact. [Presumer [ pray-zil-may'], v. a., to 
 
 Predire [pray-deer'], v. ir., toforeA presume. 
 
 tell. |Pret-e [prai, prait], adj., ready. 
 
PRO 
 
 Pre tend re [pray-taT'-dr], i 
 pretend. 
 
 Preter [prai-iay r ], v. a., to lend. 
 
 Pretexte [pray-text'], n. m. pre- 
 tense. 
 
 Prelez [prai-tay'], pres., 2d pi., 
 lend. 
 
 Pretre [prai'-tr], n.m., priest. 
 
 Prevaloir [pray-vdl-wdr], v. ii\, 
 to prevail. 
 
 Prevenir [pray-v-neer'], v. ir., to 
 prevent ; to inform ; to advise., 
 
 Pre'venu-e [pray-v-nu], part., in- 
 formed ; warned. 
 
 Previens [pray-vee-a'\ pres., 1st 
 sing., / inform. 
 
 Prevoir [pray - viodr'], v. ir., to 
 foresee. 
 
 Priant [pree - <T'], part., begging ; 
 requesting ; praying. 
 
 Prie [pree], pres., / beg ; he begs ; 
 imper., beg. 
 
 Prier [pree - ay'], v. a. , to ask ; to 
 beg. 
 
 Prierons [pree-Zr-o~]' , fut., 1st pi., 
 (we) shall ask ; shall beg. 
 
 Prince [prcTs], n. m., prince. 
 
 Printemps [pra^-td"'], n. m., 
 spring. 
 
 Pris-e [pree, preez], part., taken; 
 drawn ; secured. 
 
 Prit [pree], p. def., 3d sing., took. 
 
 Privile'gie-e [pree-vee-lay-zhee-ay'], 
 part., licensed. 
 
 Prix [pree'], n. m., price; worth; 
 value ; prize. 
 
 Probablement [pro-bd-ble-md"'], 
 adv., probably. 
 
 Prochain - e [pro - shd~", - shain'~], 
 adj., next; n. m., neighbor ; fel- 
 low-creature. 
 
 Prodigieux-se [pro - dee - zhee - 6", 
 -oz'], adj., vast. 
 
 Prod aire [pro-d'deer'], v. ir., to pro- 
 duce. 
 
 Prodnit-e [pro-dilee', -dueet'],ipart., 
 produced. 
 
 Profit [pro-fee''], n. m., profit ; ad- 
 vantage. 
 
 Profitant [pro-fee-td"'], part., prof- 
 iting ; taking advantage. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 I 
 
 487 
 
 PRO 
 
 to Profiler [pro-fee-tay 1 ], v. n., to 
 
 profit (by, de) ; to take advantage 
 
 (of, de). 
 Profond-e [pro-fo"', -fo"d], adj., 
 
 low; profound. 
 Proie [prwd], n. f.,prey„ 
 Projet [pro-zhai'], n. m., plan ; de- 
 sign. 
 Promenade [pro - m - nad'], n. f., 
 
 walk; walking. 
 se Prornenant [sg pro - m - nd"'], 
 
 part., taking a walk. 
 se Promener [sS pro-m-nay'], v. 
 
 refl., to take a walk; to go. 
 Promet [pro-mai'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 promises. 
 Promets [pro - mai'], pres., 1st or 
 
 2d sing., I promise ; (thou) prom- 
 
 isest. 
 Promettre [pro-met '-r], v. ir., to 
 
 promise. 
 Promit [pro-mee],^. def., 3d sing., 
 
 promised. 
 Promouvoir [pro-?noo-vwdr'],v . ir., 
 
 to promote. 
 Promptement [pro~t -?«<T], adv., 
 
 promptly ; quickly ; suddenly. 
 Prononciation [pro-no~-see-d-see- 
 
 o"'], n. f., pronunciation. 
 Propbetie [pro -fay - see'], n. f., 
 
 prophecy. 
 Prophetique [pro-fay-teek']. adj., 
 
 prophetic. 
 Proportionne-e [pro -por - see-o- 
 
 nay'], part., proportionate. 
 Propos [pro-po'], n. m., purpose; 
 
 a propos, opportunely. 
 Proposer [pro - po - zay'], v. a., to 
 
 propose; v refl., to propose. 
 Propre [pro'-pr], adj., appropri- 
 ate ; own ; very. 
 Propriere' [pro-pree-ay-tay'], n. f, 
 
 peculiarity. 
 Proscrire [ pro - skreer'], v. ir., to 
 
 proscribe. c 
 
 Provenir [pro-v-neer'], v. ir., to 
 
 proceed. 
 Providence [pro-vee-dd~s'], n. f., 
 
 proviuence. 
 Provision [pro-vee-zee-o"'], n. f., 
 
 pirovision ; food. 
 
488 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 QUA RAM 
 
 Prouve [proov], pres., 3d sing.,|Quatrieme [/cat - ree - aim'], num., 
 
 proves. fourth. 
 
 Prouver [proo - vay'], v. a., to Que [ke],vron., which; that; whom; 
 
 what. 
 Que [kg], conj., that; as; how; 
 than ; why ; if; may ; let. 
 
 prove. 
 Prudemment [pru-dd-md"'], adv. 
 
 prudently. 
 Prusse [prilss], n. f., Prussia. 
 
 Pu-e [pu], part., been able. 
 
 Public [pii-bleek 1 ], f., publique [pii 
 bleek'], adj., public. 
 
 Public [pii-bleek'], n. m., public. 
 
 Publie-e [pii-blee-ay'], part., pub- 
 lished. 
 
 Publier [pii-blee-ay], v. a., to pub- 
 lish. 
 
 Pueril-e [ pii-ay-reel'], adj., child- 
 ish. 
 
 Puis [p'dee], adv., ^en. 
 
 Puis [/Jtiee], pres., 1st sing., lean; 
 am able. 
 
 Puisque [piieess-ke], conj., since. 
 
 Puissance [piiee-sd's'], n. t, pow- 
 er ; dominion. 
 
 Puissant-e [p'dee-sd"' ', -saT], adj 
 powerful; mighty. 
 
 Puissiez [piiee-see-ay'], subj. pres 
 2d pi., (#0#) »*«# be able. 
 
 Punir [pii-neer'], v. a., to punish 
 (dejbr). 
 
 Pupitre [pii- pee' -tr], n. m., desk 
 
 P u r-e [ p iir] , adj . , ;«<re . 
 
 Put [/>«], p. def., 3d sing., was 
 able; could. * 
 
 Q. 
 
 Qu', contraction for que. 
 
 Quai [kay], n. m., quay ; wharf 
 
 Qualite' [kal-ee-tay 1 ], n. f., quality. 
 
 Quand [kd~], adv., ivhen. 
 
 Quant a [ha" td"~], prep., as to. 
 
 Quantieme [kd^ -tee-aim'], n. m., 
 day of the month. 
 
 Quantite [kd^-tee-tay'], n. f., quan- 
 tity. 
 
 Quart [£ar}, n. m., quarter; un 
 quart d'heure, quarter of an hour. 
 
 Quartier [kar-tee-ay / ], n. m., quar- 
 ter. 
 
 Quatre [kat'-r], num. ,foi*. 
 
 Quatre-vingts [kat-rg-vd"*'], num., 
 eighty. 
 
 Quel-le [/cell], pron., which; what; 
 
 what a. 
 Quelconque [kel-ko"k'], pron., any 
 
 whatever. 
 Quelque [kel'-ke], pron., some; 
 
 any; a few. 
 Quelque chose [kel-ke shoz'], pron., 
 
 something ; any thing. 
 Quelque Ibis [kel-ke fed'], adv., 
 
 sometimes ; occasionally. 
 Quelque part [kel-ke par'], adv., 
 
 somewhere. 
 Quelqu'un-e \JceUcd"\ -£««'], pron., 
 
 some one ; any one ; some ; any. 
 Quereller [kair - el - lay'], v. a., to 
 
 scold. 
 Question [kess-tee-o""], n. f., ques- 
 tion. 
 Qui [£ee],pron., who; which; that; 
 
 whom. 
 Quinze [kd"z], num., fifteen. 
 Quitter [kee-tay'], v. a., to leave. 
 Quoi [kwd], pron., what. 
 Quoique [kwd-ke'], con j., although. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rabattre [rd-bat'-r], v. ir., to abate. 
 
 Race [rass], n. f., race. 
 
 Racine [ra-seen'], Racine. 
 
 Raconta [rd-ko~-ta], p. def., re- 
 lated. 
 
 Raconte'-e [rd-ko"-tay'], part., re- 
 lated. 
 
 Raconter \ra-ko~-tay'],\. a., to re- 
 late. 
 
 se Rafraichir [se rd-frai-sheer'], v. 
 refiL, to rest; to refresh one's 
 
 ■ self. 
 
 Rage [rdzh], n. f., rage. 
 
 Raillerie [rd-ye-ree], n. f, joking; 
 jesting. 
 
 Raison [rai-zo~'], n. f., reason; 
 right. 
 
 Ramassant [rd - ma - sd~"], part., 
 picking up. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 489 
 
 EEC 
 
 Ramasser [ra - ma - say'~\, v. a., to 
 
 pick up. 
 Rame [ram], n. f., oar. 
 Rampant \ra~ -pa~ r ], part., creep- 
 ing; crawling. 
 Ran9on \_ra~-so~'~\, n. f., ransom. 
 Ranconner \i'a~-so-nay'~\, v. a., to 
 
 impose upon; to fleece. 
 Rang \ra\ n. m., ran/:. 
 Ranimer \_rd-nee-may'], v. a., to re- 
 
 store. 
 Rapide \rd-peed'\ adj., swift; rapid. 
 Rappelle \ra-pell'\ pres., 3d sing., 
 
 recalls ; calls up. 
 Rappeler [rap-fay'], v. a., to re- 
 
 call. 
 Rapport [ra-por r \, n. m., relation. 
 Rapportant \j-d-por-ta'\ part., 
 
 bringing back. 
 Rapporte \j'd-port'\ pres., 3d sing., 
 
 brings back. 
 Rapporter \_ra-por-tay'\v. a., to re- 
 late. 
 se Rapprochant [sS ra-pro-shcf'], 
 
 part., drawing near. 
 se Rapprochent [sS ra-prosh'~\, 
 
 pres., 3d pi., (they) draw near. 
 Rare [ra>], adj., rare. 
 Rarement [rar-j/ia"'], adv., rarely. 
 Rarete [rdr-tay'], n. f., scarcity. 
 se Rasseoir [se ra-swar'']j v. refl., 
 
 to sit again. 
 Rassnrer [?-a - sii - ray'], v. a., to 
 
 strengthen. 
 Ratteindre \ra-ta" -dr~\, v. ir., to 
 
 overtake again. 
 Rattrape-e \j-a- lra-pay'~], part., 
 
 overtaken. 
 Rayon [ray-yo"''], n. m., spoke (of 
 
 a wheel). 
 Rebattre [rg-bat'-r], v. ir., to beat 
 
 again. 
 Rebouillir [re-boo-yeer'], v. ir., to 
 
 boil again. 
 Re'capitulons \ray-ka-pee-tii-lo"'"] 
 
 imper., 1st pi., let us recapitidate 
 
 let us sum up. 
 Recevez \_ress-vay'~\, imper., 2d pi. 
 
 receive. • 
 
 Recevoir [_ress-vwdr'~\, v. a., to re 
 
 ceive. 
 
 X 
 
 REC 
 
 Rechauffant [ray-sho-fa*''], part., 
 
 reviving one's ardor. 
 Recherche'-e \_re-shair-shay'~\, adj., 
 
 in request ; in demand. 
 Recit [ray-see'], n. m., story ; ac- 
 count. 
 Recois [re-swa], pres., 1st sing., I 
 
 receive. 
 Recommandation \re-ko-md~~-dd- 
 
 see-cT'], n. f., recommendation. 
 Recommande'-e \re-ko-md~-day'], 
 
 part., requested ; recommended. 
 Recommander [re-ko-md'"-day'], v. 
 
 a., to recommend. 
 Recommence'-e [?e - ko- ma"- say'], 
 
 part., commenced again. 
 Recommencer \jx-ko-md"-say'], v. 
 
 a., to begin anew. 
 Recompense [_ray-ko~~-pd"s'], n. f., 
 
 reward. 
 Recompense-e \i-ay-ko~-pa~-say'], 
 
 part., rewarded.. 
 Re'compenser [i-ay-ko'-pa"'-say'], v. 
 
 a., to reward. 
 Reconduire \iS-ko~-dueer],y. ir., to 
 
 lead back. 
 Reconduit [r8-ko"-duee'], pres., 3d 
 
 sing., conducts back. 
 Reconnais \re-ko-nai'], pres., 1st 
 
 sing. , / recognize. 
 Reconnaissait [?-g-ko-imi-sai'~], im- 
 
 perf., 3d sing., (he or it) recog- 
 nized. 
 Reconnaissance \_re-ko-nai-sd~ s'], 
 
 n. f., gratitude. 
 Reconnaisse [rS-ko-naiss'], subj. 
 
 pres., 3d sing., may acknowledge. 
 Reconnaissent [rg-ko-naiss], pres., 
 
 3d pi. , (they) recognize. 
 Reconnaitre [re-ko-nai'-tr], v. ir., 
 
 to recognize; to acknowledge. 
 Reconnu-e [rS-ko-nii'], part., rec- 
 ognized. 
 Reconque'rir [rS-ko"-kay-reer'], v. 
 
 ir., to reconquer. 
 Reconstruire \j-^-ko"-stru-eer'\ v. 
 
 ir., to rebuild. 
 Recoudre \_re-koo'-dr], v. ir., to sew 
 
 again. 
 Recourir [re-koo-reer'], v. ir., to re- 
 i cur | 
 
 2 
 
490 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 REG | ^ REM 
 
 Recouvrir [re-koov-reer'], v. ir., foRegne [rainy'], n. m.^kingdom. 
 
 cover again. sRegne [rainy], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 se Recrier [se ray-kree-ay'], v. refl. , | reigns. 
 
 to cry out ; to exclaim. Regret [re-grai'], n. m., regret. 
 
 Recrire [ray-kreer'], v. ir., to write Regretter [re-gret-ay'], v. a., to re- 
 
 again. 
 
 Recu [re-su], n. m., receipt. 
 
 Recu-e [re-sii 1 ], part., received. 
 
 Recueilli-e [re-ko-yee'], part., gath- 
 ered; collected. 
 
 Recueillir [re-ko-yeer], v. ir., io 
 gather. 
 
 Re9ut [re-su], p. def., 3d sing., re- 
 ceived. 
 
 Redescendez [re-d-scT-day'], pres., 
 2d pi., (you) go down again. 
 
 Redescendre [rS-d-sa" '-dr], v. n., 
 .to go down again. 
 
 Redevenir [re-dev-neer'], v. ir, 
 become again. 
 
 Red ire [re-deer'], v. ir., to say 
 again. 
 
 Redoivent [re-dwdv'], pres., 3d 
 pi., they owe. 
 
 Redoublement [re - doo - hie- ma"'], 
 n. m., redoubling ; vast increase. 
 
 Reduire [ray- d'deer'], v. ir., to re- 
 duce. 
 
 Reel-le [ray-el'], adj., real ; actual. 
 
 Re'elire [ray-ay-lee/], v. ir., to re- 
 elect. 4 
 
 Refaire [re- fair'], v. ir., to do again. 
 
 Refermer [re-fair-may'], v. a., to 
 shut again. 
 
 Re'flexion [ray-flek-see-o"'], n. f., 
 reflection. 
 
 Refuser [re-fd-zay'], v. a., to re- 
 fuse ; to decline. 
 
 Regard [re-gar'], n. m., examina- 
 tion ; look. 
 
 Regardait [re-gar-dai'], imperf.,3d 
 sing. , {he) looked at. 
 
 Regardant [re - gar - da"'], part., 
 looking. 
 
 Regarde-e [re - gar - day'], part. , 
 gazed at ; looked at. 
 
 Regarder [re-gar-day'], v. a., to 
 look at ; to look. 
 
 Regie [rai'-gl], n. f., rule. 
 
 Reglement [rai-gle-ma"'], n. m., 
 rule. 
 
 gret. 
 Reine [rain], n. f., queen. 
 Reitere-e [ray-ee-tay-ray'], part., 
 
 reiterated. 
 Rejeton [rezh-to"'], n. m., shoot ; 
 
 sprout. 
 Rejoindre [r$-zhwa~'-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 join again. 
 se Rejouir [se ray-zhoo-eer'], v. 
 
 refi., to rejoice. 
 se Rejouissent [se ray-zhoo-eess'], 
 
 pres., 3d pi., (they) rejoice. 
 Relie-e [re-lee-ay 1 ], part., bound. 
 foRelier [re-lee-ay'], v. a., to bind. 
 Relieur [re - lee - or'], n. m., book- 
 binder. 
 Relire [re - leer'], v. ir., to read 
 
 again. 
 Reluire [rc-l'deer'], v. ir., to shine. 
 Remarque-e [re-mar-kay'], part., 
 
 distinguished ; remarked. 
 Remarquer [re-mar-kay'], v. a., to 
 
 notice ; to observe. 
 Remede [re-maid], n. m., remedy. 
 Remerciai [re-mair-see-ay'], p. def., 
 
 1st sing., I thanked. 
 Remercie [re-mair-see'], pres., 1st 
 
 sing., / thank. 
 Remercier [re-mair-see-ay'], v. a., 
 
 to thank. 
 Remet [re mai'], pres., 3d sing., re- 
 stores / puts back. 
 Remette [re-met'], subj., 3d sing., 
 
 may give. 
 Remettre [re-met' -tr], v. ir., to pat 
 
 again ; to put back ; to restore. 
 se Remirent [se re-meer'], p. def., 
 
 3d pi., {they) commenced again to. 
 Remis [re-mee'], p. def., 1st sing., 
 
 (/) placed back. 
 Remorque-e [re-mor-kay'], part., 
 
 towed along. 
 Remoudre [re-moo' -dr], v. ir., to 
 
 grind again. 
 Rem placer [raT-pld-say'], v. a., to 
 
 replace. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 491 
 
 KEN 
 
 Rempli-e \rd~ -plee'~\, part., filled 
 
 (de, ivith). 
 Remplir [j-a~-j)leer'~\, v. a., to fill ; 
 
 to fulfill. 
 Remplit [rd~-plee'~\, pres., 3d sing., 
 
 fills ; fulfills. 
 Remporte-e [rcT-por-tay r ], part., 
 
 obtained. 
 Remua [rS-mii-d'2, P- def., 3d sing., 
 
 moved: shook. 
 
 I REP 
 
 Rentrez [rd~-tray'\ pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) return. 
 Renvoya [rd"-vwd-yd'}, p. def., 3d 
 
 sing., (he) dismissed; sent away. 
 Renvoyer [rd ~-vwd-yay'\ v. a., to 
 
 send back. 
 Repaitre [rg-pai'- ir}, v. ir., to 
 
 feed 
 Repartir [re-par-teer'}, v. ir., to set 
 
 out again ; to reply. 
 
 Rsnaitre [re - nai'- tr], v. ir., to fejlepeindre [re-/>a~'-dr], v. ir. 
 
 born again 
 Renard [re-ndr'~\, n. m.,fox. 
 Rencontrer [rd"-ko"-tray'~\, v. a., 
 
 to meet. 
 Rend [rd"}, pres., 3d sing., re- 
 stores. 
 Rendaient [rd"-dai'}, imperf., 3d 
 
 pi., were rendering. 
 me Rendais [mi rd"-dai'}, imperf., 
 
 1st sing., / was going. 
 Rendent [rd'd}, pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 render. 
 Rendit [rd"-dee'}, p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 restored; returned; administered. 
 se Rendormir [se rd~-dor-meer'}, v. 
 
 refl., to fall asleep again. 
 Rendrais [rd~- drai'}, condit., 1st 
 
 sing., / should render. 
 Rendre [rd~'-dr}, v. a., to render; 
 
 to restore ; to give back. 
 se Rendre [se rd"'-dr\ v. refl., to 
 
 go ; to put up. 
 Rendu-e [rd"-dii'}, part., restored; 
 
 given back. 
 Renferme-e [rd" -fair-may'}, part., 
 
 inclosed. 
 Renommee [rS-no-may'},x\. f.,fame; 
 
 renown. 
 Renoncer [rS - no"- say'}, v. n., to 
 
 yield up ; to surrender (foil, by 
 
 a). 
 Renoncez [re-no" -say'}, imper., 2d 
 
 pi., give up. 
 Rente [«Tf], n. f., revenue. 
 Rentraire [rd" - trair'}, v. ir., to 
 
 darn. 
 Rentrer [rd"- tray'}, v. n., to go 
 
 back; to return. 
 Rentrerez [rd~-tre-ray'}, fut., 2d 
 
 pi., (you) will retire; will return. 
 
 paint again. 
 Repenser [rS-pd"-say'}, v. n., to re- 
 consider. 
 se Repentir [se rZ-pd" -teer\v . refl., 
 
 to repent. 
 Re'jjeter [ray-jiay-tay'}, v. a., to re- 
 peat. 
 Repond [ray-]>o"'}, pres., 3d sing., 
 ■ replies. 
 Repondit [ray-po"-dee'}, p. def., 3d 
 
 sing., replied ; answered. 
 Repondre [ray-po"'-dr}, v. n., to 
 
 answer. 
 Reponse [ray-po"s'},x\. f., reply; 
 
 answer. 
 Repos [ri-po'}, n. m., rest. 
 Repousser [re - poo - say''}, v. a., to 
 
 drive away ; to repel; to reject. 
 Reprenait [re-pre-nai}, imperf., 3d 
 
 sing., regained ; recovered. 
 Reprend [re-prd"'}, pres., 3d sing., 
 
 retorts ; rejoins ; replies. 
 Reprendre [re-prd"'-dr}, v. ir., to 
 
 resume ; to rejoin ; to take back ; 
 
 to blame. 
 Reprenez [re -pre -nay'], pres., 2d 
 
 pi., (you) rejoin. 
 Representant [re-pray- zd"-td"'}, n. 
 
 m., representative. 
 Represente [re-pray-zd"t'}, pres., 
 
 3d sing., represents. 
 se Representer [se re-pray-zd"-tay'}, 
 
 v. refl., to picture to one's self; 
 
 to reproduce. 
 Reprimande [ray-pree-md"d'}, n. 
 
 f., reproof. 
 Reprimander [ray-pree-md"-day'}, 
 
 v. a. , to reprove. 
 Reprit [rS-pree'}, p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 replied; rejoined. 
 
492 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 EET REV 
 
 Reproche [re -prosh'], n. nj., re-se Retirer [se re-tee-ray'], v. refl., 
 
 proach. \ to withdraw. 
 
 Reprocher [re-pro-shay'], v. a., to Re'torquer [ray-tor-kay'"], v. n., to 
 
 reproach. \ retort. 
 
 Reprochera [re-pro-sh-ra], fut., 3d Retour [re-foo?*'], n. m., return ; de 
 
 sing., m«7/ reproach 
 Reproduire [je-pro-dueer'], v. ii 
 
 to reproduce. 
 Republicain-e [ra?/ -/>m - blee - &a 
 
 -£aiV], adj., republican. 
 Republique [ray -pu - bleek'], n. f„ 
 
 republic. 
 Requerir [re-kay-reer 1 ], v. ir., to 
 
 require. 
 Resigner [ray-zeen-yay'], v. a., to 
 
 resign. 
 se Resoudre [se ray -zoo' -dr], v. refl. , 
 
 to resolve. 
 Respect [rZ-spekT], n. m., respect. 
 Respecte-e \j-e-spelc-tay'], part., re- 
 
 Respirant [rS-spee - ra~'\ part., 
 
 breathing. 
 Respirer [rg - spee - ray'], v. n., to 
 
 breathe. 
 Ressemblance [rS-sd"-bld"s'], n. f., 
 
 likeness. 
 Ressemblent [re-sd"'-bl], pres., 3d 
 
 pi., (they) are like; resemble. 
 Ressemblez [re-scT-blay'], imper., 
 
 2d pi., be like. 
 Ressentir [re-sa -teer'], v. ir., to re- 
 sent. 
 Ressort [rS-sor'], n. m., spring. 
 Ressortir [re-sor-teer'], v. ir., to go 
 
 out again. 
 Ressouvenir [rZ-soo-v-neer'], n. m., 
 
 remembrance. 
 se Ressouvenir [se re-soo-v-neer'], 
 
 v. refl., to remember. 
 Reste [rest], n. m., remainder; 
 
 rest; au reste, besides. 
 Reste [res*], pres., 3d sing., re- 
 mains ; is left. 
 Rester [ress-tay'], v. n., to remain; 
 
 to stay. 
 Restreindre [re-straT' -dr], v. ir., to 
 
 restrain. 
 Retenir [re-t-neer'], v. ir.,Zo retain. 
 Retentissement [re-ta~-teess-md"'], 
 
 n. m., sound; echo. 
 
 retour, back; on his or her re- 
 turn. 
 
 Retourne-e [re-toor-nay'], part., 
 returned. 
 
 se Retourner [se re-toor-nay'], v. 
 refl., to turn about. 
 
 Retraire [re-trai/], v. ir., to re- 
 deem. 
 
 Retrouvait [re-troo-vai'], imperf., 
 3d sing., met ; descried. 
 
 Retrouve [?-e - troov'], pres., 3d 
 sing., recovers ; Jinds again. 
 
 Retrouver [re-troo-vay 1 ], v. a., to 
 find again ; to meet. 
 
 Re'union [ray-u-nee-o"'], n. f., meet- 
 ing. 
 
 se Eeunir [s8 ray-u-neer'], v. refl., 
 to meet ; to come together. 
 
 Reunissait [ray-u-nee-sai'], imperf., 
 3d sing., called together ; sum- 
 moned. 
 
 Reussir [)-ay-ii-seer'] l v. n., to suc- 
 ceed. 
 
 Reussira [ray-il-see-ra], fut., 3d 
 sing., will succeed. 
 
 Reussite [ray-u-seef], n. f., suc- 
 cess. 
 
 Revaloir [re-val-war], v. ir., to be 
 even with. 
 
 Reve [raiv], n. m., dream ; fancy. 
 
 Reveil [ray-vai?'], n. m., waking ; 
 alarm-clock. 
 
 Reveiller [ray-vai-yay'], v. a. and 
 n., to awaken; to wake; to awake; 
 to arouse. 
 
 Revelation [ray-vay-ld-see-o"'], n. 
 f., revelation. 
 
 Revenait [rev-nai'], imperf., 3d 
 sing., was returning. 
 
 Revenir [rev-neer'],v : ir., to return; 
 to come back ; to go back. 
 
 Revenu-e [rev-nu], part., returned; 
 come back. 
 
 Reve'rence [ray-vay-rd~s'], n. f, 
 bow. 
 
 Reverie [rai-vS-ree'], n. f., reverie. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 EOL 
 
 Reveriez [rai-v-ree-ay'], condit., 
 2d pi., (you) might dream. 
 
 Revetir [re-vai-teer'], v. ir., to in- 
 vest (with). 
 
 Reveur [rai-vor'], f., reveuse [rai- 
 voz'], adj., pensive. 
 
 Reviendrai [re-vee-d" -dray'], fut., 
 1st sing., I shall return. 
 
 Reviendrons [rS-vee-d"-drd"'], (we) 
 shall return. 
 
 Reviens [re-vee-a~'], imper., 2d 
 sing., return ; come back. 
 
 Revient [re-vee-d"'], pres., 3d sing., 
 conies back. 
 
 Revint [re-vd~'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 (he) returned. 
 
 Revivre [re-vee'-vr], v. ir., to re- 
 vive. 
 
 Revoir [? 8 - vwdr'], v. ir., to see 
 again. 
 
 Revolution [ray-vo-lu-see-o"'], n. f., 
 revolution. 
 
 Rhin [ref], n. m., Rhine. 
 
 Ria [ree-a], p. def., 3d sing. 
 laughed. 
 
 Rials [ree-ai'], imperf., 1st sing., / 
 laughed. 
 
 Riait [ree-ai''], imperf., 3d sing., 
 (he) laughed. 
 
 Riant-e \ree-5T', -d"t'], adj., smil- 
 ing; cheerful. 
 
 Riche [reesh], adj., rich. 
 
 Richesse [ree-shess'], n. f., riches ; 
 wealth. 
 
 Rideau [ree-do'], n. m., curtain. 
 
 Ridicule [ree-dee-kiil'], adj., ridic 
 ulous. 
 
 Rien [ree-a'], adv., any thing 
 (with ne) nothing. 
 
 Riez [ree-ay'], pres., 2d pi., (you) 
 laugh. 
 
 Rire [reer], v. ir., to laugh (de, at) 
 
 Rivage [ree-vazh], n. m., shore 
 bank. 
 
 Rive [reeu], n. f., shore ; bank. 
 
 Riviere [ree-vee-air'], n. f., river. 
 
 Robe [rob'], n. f., dress; robe de 
 cbambre, morning-gown. 
 
 Roder [ro-day'], v. n., to prowl. 
 
 Roi [rwd],fi. m., king. 
 
 Role [rol], n. m.,part (in a play) 
 
 493 
 
 main'], adj., 
 
 Romain-e [ro-md"', 
 
 Roman. 
 
 Rompre [ro"'-pr], v. a., to break. 
 Ronce |Vo~.v], n. f., brier ; bramble. 
 Rond-e [ro~, ro~d], adj., round. 
 Rondeau [rd~-do], n. rn.j rondeau. 
 Rongeait [ro"zh-ai'], imperf., 3d 
 
 sing., preyed upon. 
 Ronger [ro'-zhay], v. a., to gnaw ; 
 
 to devour. 
 Rose [roz], n. f., rose. 
 Rose'e [ro-zay'], n. f., dew ; oozing 
 
 forth. 
 Rosier [ro-zee-ay'], n. m., rose; 
 
 rose-bush. 
 Roti [ro-tee 1 ], n. m., roast meat. 
 Rouble [roo'-bl], n. m., ruble (Rus- 
 sian coin). 
 Roue [rod], n. f., wheel. 
 Rouge [roozh], adj., red. 
 Rougeole [roo-zhol'], n. f., measles. 
 Rougir [roo-zheer'], v. n., to blush 
 
 (de, at). 
 Rougissais [roo-zhee-sai 1 ], imperf., 
 
 1st sing., I blushed. 
 Rouler [roo-lay'], v. a., to roll ; to 
 
 wind ; to ivheel up. 
 Route [root], n. f., road; way; 
 
 course. 
 Rouvrir [roo-vreer'], v. ir., to open 
 
 again. 
 Roux [roo], f. rousse [rooss], adj., 
 
 red. 
 Royal-e [rwd-yal'], adj., royal. 
 Royaume [ricd-yom'], n. m., realm ; 
 
 kingdom. 
 Rubens [ru'-bens or ru-ba~'], Ru- 
 bens. 
 Rue [rii], n. f., street; rue Jacob, 
 
 Jacob Street. 
 se Ruiner [se rii-ee-nay'], v. refl., 
 
 to ruin one's self; to decay. 
 Ruisseau [rUee-so'], n. m., stream; 
 
 brook; rivulet. 
 Ruminer [ru-mee-nay'], v. n., to 
 
 muse ; to ponder. 
 Russe [rilss], adj., Russian. 
 
 S. 
 
 S', for se, before a vowel or h mute. 
 S', for si, before il or its. 
 
494 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SAU 
 
 Sa [sd], f. of son, pron., his ; her ; 
 
 its. 
 Sabre [sd'-br], n. m., sabre. 
 Sac [sale], n. m., bag ; sac de nuit, 
 
 carpet bag. 
 Sacre-e [sak-ray'], adj., sacred. 
 Sacrifice \_sak - ree -feess'], n. m., 
 
 sacrifice. 
 Sacrifier \_sak-ree-fee-ay'~\, v. a., to 
 
 sacrifice. 
 Sacristain [sak - ree - sta"'], n. m., 
 
 sexton. 
 Sacristie [sak-ree-stee'], n. f., ves- 
 try. 
 Sage [sdzh], adj., wise; sage; n. 
 
 m., a wise man. 
 Sain-e [sa", sain], adj., healthy ; 
 
 sound. 
 Saint - e [sa", sa"t], adj., holy ; 
 
 saint ; n. m., saint. 
 Sais [sai], pres., 1st sing., I know. 
 Saisir [sai-zeer], v. a., to lay hold 
 
 of; to apprehend. 
 Saisirait [sai-zee-rai'], condit., 3d 
 
 sing., would lay hold of. 
 Saisit [sai-zee'], p. def. or pres., 3d 
 
 sing., grasped; seized; g?'asps ; 
 
 seizes. 
 Saison [sai-zo""'], n. f., season. 
 Sait [sai], pres., 3d sing., knows. 
 Salon [sa-lo"'], n. m., drawing- 
 room. 
 Salut [sa-lu], n. m., bow ; nod. 
 Saluer [sd-lu-ay'], v. a., to salute; 
 
 to bow ; to nod to. 
 Sang [sa"], n. m., blood. 
 Sanglant-e [sd"-gld"', -gld "f], adj., 
 
 bloody. 
 Sans [sa"], prep., without. 
 Sans que [sa" kg'], conj., without. 
 Sante [sa'-fa?/'], n. f., health. 
 Satin [.s<z-Za~'], n. m., satin. 
 Satire [sd-teer'], n. f., burlesque; 
 
 satwe. 
 Satisfaire [sd-teess-fai)-'], v. ir., to 
 
 satisfy. 
 Satisfait-e [sa - teess -fai', -fait'], 
 
 part., satisfied. 
 Saul [sa-iil'], Said. 
 Saurait [so-rai], condit., 3d sing., 
 
 might knoiv ; (with ne), can not. 
 
 SEM 
 
 Sauter [so-tay'],v. n.,to leap; to 
 jump. 
 
 Savais [sd-vai], imperf., 1st sing., 
 I knew. 
 
 Savait [sa-vai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 knew. 
 
 Savant -e [sd-vd~', -vd"t'], adj., 
 learned. 
 
 Savent [sdv], pres., 3d pi., {they) 
 know how. 
 
 Savez [sd-vay'], pres. 2d pi., (you) 
 know. 
 
 Savoir [sav-wdr], v. ir., to know ; 
 to know how. 
 
 Scandaliser [skd"-ddl-ee-zay'], v. 
 a., to scandalize. 
 
 Scene [sain], n. f., scene; stage. 
 
 Science [see-d"s], n. f., science; 
 knowledge. 
 
 Se [se], pron., one's self; himself; 
 herself ; itself ; themselves ; to 
 himself. 
 
 Seance [say-d"s'], n. i.,seat; ses- 
 sion; admission. 
 
 Sec [sek], f. seche [saish], adj., dry. 
 
 Second-e [sg-go"', -go"d], adj., sec- 
 ond; latter. 
 
 Secouer [sS-koo-ay'], v. a., to shake. 
 
 Secourir [sg-koo-reer'], v. a., to suc- 
 cor. 
 
 Secours [sg-koor'], n. m., succor ; 
 help. 
 
 Secret-e [sg-krai', -k^ait'], adj., se- 
 cret ; n. m., secret. 
 
 Secretaire [sg-kray-tair'], n. m., 
 secretary. 
 
 Seducteur [say - duk - tor'], n. m., 
 enticer. 
 
 Seduire [say - diieer'], v. ir., to se- 
 duce. 
 
 Seigneur [sain-ydr r ], n. m.,lord; 
 gentleman. 
 
 Sein [sa"], n. m., bosom; heart. 
 
 Seine [sain], Seine (river). 
 
 Seize [sazz], num , sixteen. 
 
 Sejour [say - zhoor'], n. m., stay ; 
 habitation. 
 
 Sejourne-e [say-zhoor-nay'], part., 
 staid; tarried. 
 
 Selon [se-lo"'], prep., (tocording to. 
 
 Semaine [sg-main'], n. f., iveek. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 495 
 
 SEU 
 
 Sembler [sd" -blay'], v. n., to ap- 
 pear ; to seem. 
 Seme-e [se-may'], part., sowed . 
 
 sown. 
 Sens [sd"], n. m., sense. 
 Sens [sd"], pres., 1st sing., I feel. 
 me Sens [me sd"'], pres., 1st sing.. 
 
 I feel (myself). 
 Sense-e [sd"-say'], adj., intelligent 
 Sensible [sd~-see'-bl], adj., kind- 
 hearted ; sensitive. 
 Sent [sd"], pres., 3d sing.,yee/s. 
 Sentent [sd"t], pres., 3d pi., {they) 
 
 feel. 
 Sentez[seT-ta?/'], pres., 2d pi., {you) 
 
 feel. 
 Senti-e [sd"-tee'], part.,/e&; per 
 
 ceived. 
 Sender [sd" -tee-ay'], n. m., path. 
 Sentiment [s<T -tee-md"'], n. m. 
 
 sentiment ; feeling :' 
 Sentir [sd"-teer], v. ir., to feel; to 
 
 perceive. 
 Sentit [sd"-tee'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 felt. 
 Sept [set; before a consonant, sat], 
 
 num., seven. 
 Sera [sS-ra], fut., 3d sing., icill be. 
 Serai [se-ray'], fut., 1st sing., I 
 
 shall be. 
 Seraient [se-rai'], condit., 3d pi., 
 
 {they) might be. 
 Serez [se-ray'], fut., 2d pi., {you) 
 
 shall be. 
 Serons [se-ro~'] } fut., 1st pi., (we) 
 
 will be. 
 Serre [sdir], n. f., talon. 
 Serre-e [sair-ray'], part. , clasped ; 
 
 grasped. 
 se Sert [se saif% pres., 3d sing., 
 
 avails himself of. 
 Service [sair-veess'], n. m., service; 
 
 favor. 
 Servir [sair - veer'"], v. a., to serve; 
 
 to serve up. 
 se Servir [se sair-veer'~], v. refl., to 
 
 avail one's self of . 
 Ses [say], pron., his; her; its; 
 
 one's. 
 Seuil \_so*~\, n. m., threshold; en- 
 trance. 
 
 SOI 
 
 Seul-e [sol], adj., alone ; only ; sin- 
 gle. 
 
 Seulement [sdl-md"], adv., only; 
 simply. 
 
 Severe [say-vair'], adj., severe; 
 strict. 
 
 Sexe [seks], n. m., sex. 
 
 Seyde [say-eed'], Sidon or Saida. 
 
 Si [see], con}., if ; whether. 
 
 Si [see], adv., so. 
 
 Siecle [see-ai'-kl], n. m., century ; 
 age. 
 
 Sien-ne [see-d"', -en'], pron., his; 
 hers; his own; his family. 
 
 Signe [seenr], n. m., sign. 
 
 Signifiait [seen-yee-fee-ai '], imperf , 
 3d sing., meant; signifed. 
 
 Significatif-ve [seen - yee -fee - kd- 
 teef, -teev'\ adj., significant; 
 meaning. 
 
 Silencieusement [see - Id"- see - 6z- 
 md"'], adv., in silence; silently. 
 
 Sincerement [sd"-sair-md"'], adv., 
 sincerely. 
 
 Singulierement [sd"- gu - lee - air - 
 ma""'], adv., pecidiarly. 
 
 Sinon [see-no~'], adv., only ; if not. 
 
 Si peu que [seepo ke'], conj., how- 
 ever. 
 
 Sire [sco-], n. m., sire. 
 
 Six [seess ; before a consonant, 
 see; before a vowel, sees], num., 
 six. 
 
 Soeiete [so-see-ay-tay'], n. f., so- 
 ciety. 
 
 Sceur [sdr], n. f., sister. 
 
 Soie [swd], n. f., silk. 
 
 Soient [swd], subj., 3d pi., {they) 
 may be ; are. 
 
 Soif [swdf], n. f., thirst; avoir 
 soif, to be thirsty. 
 
 Soigne-e [sivdn-yay 1 ], part., taken 
 care of. 
 
 Soin [swd"], n. m., care. 
 
 Soir [swd?-], n. m., evening; du 
 soir, in the evening. 
 
 Sois [swd], imper., 2d sing.,ie. 
 
 Soit [s?ra], subj., 3d sing., may be. 
 
 Soit — soit, conj., whether — or; ei- 
 ther — or. 
 
 Soit que [swd kg'], conj., whether. 
 
496 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SOU 
 
 Soixante [sica-sa~t'], num., sixty. 
 Soldat [sol-da], n. m., soldier. 
 Solive [so-leev 1 ], n. t, joist; beam. 
 Sombre [soT'-br], adj., melancholy ; 
 
 sombre. 
 Somme [som], n. f., sum; amount. 
 Sommeii [so-mai?'], n. m., sleep; 
 
 avoir s., to be sleepy. 
 Sommer [so-may'], v. a., to sum- 
 mon. 
 Sommes [som], pres., 1st pi., (ice) 
 
 are. 
 Sommet [so-mai'], n. m., summit ; 
 
 top. 
 Son [so~], pron., his; her; its. 
 Songe [scTzh], n. m., dream. 
 Songeons [so"-zhoT], pres., 1st pi., 
 
 (ice) think; dream. 
 Songer [so"-zhay'], v. n., to think ; 
 
 songer a, to think of. 
 Sonne-e [so -nay'], part., rung; 
 
 struck. 
 Sonner [so-nay'], v. n., to ring (a 
 
 bell). 
 Sonnette [so-netf], n. f., bell. 
 Sonneur [so-nor'], n. m., bell-ringer. 
 Sont [so"], pies., 3d pi., they are. 
 Sophie [so-fee'], f., Sophia. 
 Sors [sor], pres., 1st sing., / a?/i re- 
 covering ; I come from. 
 Sorte [sort]. De sorte que, conj., 
 
 so that. 
 Sortent [sort], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 jut out. 
 Sortez [sor-tay'], pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) go out. 
 Sortie [sor-tee^], n. f., issue; exit; 
 
 egress. 
 Sortir [sor-teer'], v. n,, to go out;] 
 
 to come out. 
 Sortis [sor-tee'], p. def., 1st sing., 
 
 I went out ; I went away. 
 Sortit [sor-tee'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 went out. 
 Sot [so], n. vn.,fool. 
 Sot rise [so-teez], n. f., nonsense; 
 
 foolish saying. 
 Sou [soo], n. m., sou; cent. 
 Souffert-e [soo-fair', fairt'], part 
 
 suffered. 
 Soufflet [soo-jlai'], n. m.,bellows. 
 
 SPA 
 
 Souffrant [soo-fra"'], part, suffer- 
 ing ; in pain ; ailing. 
 
 Souffre [soo'-fr], pres., 3d sing., 
 tolerates. 
 
 SoufFrir [soo-freer], v. ir., to suf- 
 fer. _ 
 
 Souhaiter [soo-ai-tay'], v. a., to 
 wish. 
 
 Soulier [soo-lee-ay'], n. m., shoe. 
 
 Soumettre [soo-met' -tr], v. ir., to 
 submit ; to subdue. 
 
 Soupcon [soop-so"'], n. m., suspi- 
 \ cion. 
 iSoupconner [soop-so-nay'], v. a., 
 
 to suspect. 
 jSoupente [soo-pdY], n. f., loft. 
 
 Souper [soo-pay'], n. m., supper; 
 
 I banquet. 
 
 Soupirer [soo - pee - ray'], v. n., fo 
 | sigh. 
 
 Sourd-e [soor, soord], adj., deaf; 
 n. m., deaf man. 
 
 Souri-e [soo-ree'], part., smiled. 
 
 Souriant [soo-ree-d"'], part., s?m7- 
 
 Sourire [soo-reer'], n. m., srm/e. 
 Sourire [soo-reer'], v. ir., ?o s?m7e. 
 Souris [soo-ree], n. f., mouse. 
 Sourit [soo-ree'], p. def., 3d sing., 
 
 smiled. 
 Sous [soo], prep. , under. 
 Souscrire [soo - skreer'], v. ir., to 
 
 subscribe. 
 Sous-sonneur [soo-so-ndr 1 ], n. m., 
 
 deputy bell-ringer. 
 Soustraire [soo-strair'], v. ir., to 
 
 subtract. 
 Soutenir [soo-t-neer'], v. ir., to sup- 
 
 port. 
 Souvenir [soo-v-neer'], n. m., mem- 
 ory ; remembrance; recollection. 
 .se Souvenir [sS soo-v-nee?-'], v. 
 
 refl., to remember; to call to 
 
 mind. 
 Souvent [soo-vd"'], adv., often. 
 se Souvient [se soo-vee-a'], pres., 
 
 3d siug., remembers (foil, by de~). 
 Sovez [swd-yay'], imper., 2d pi., 
 
 be. 
 Spacieux-se [spd-see-b', -bz'], adj., 
 
 roomy ; spacious. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 497 
 
 SUR 
 
 Splendidement [spld~-deed-md~"], 
 adv., exquisitely ; magnificently. 
 
 Squelette [skel - ett'], n. m., skel- 
 eton. 
 
 St., abbreviation of hrint. 
 
 Station [sta-see-o~'], n. f., station. 
 
 Statue [sta-tu], n. f., statue. 
 
 Stipendie' [stee-pa '-dee-ay'], n. m., 
 hireling. 
 
 Stratageme [sira-td-zhaim'], n. m., 
 stratagem. 
 
 Strict-e [strikt], adj., strict. 
 
 Studieux-se [stti-dee-o, -oz'], adj., 
 studious. 
 
 Su-e [sti], part., knoio ; known hoiv. 
 
 Subvenir [stib - v - neer'], \ . ir., to 
 come tinder. 
 
 Succes [siiksai']', n. m., success. 
 
 Suedois-e [stiay-dwd' , -dwdz'], adj., 
 Swedish. 
 
 Suffire [sii-feer'], v. ir., to suffice; 
 to be sufficient ; to be enough. 
 
 Suffit [sii-fee'], pres., 3d sing., (it) 
 is enough. 
 
 Suis [stiee], pres., 1st sing., I am. 
 
 Suisse [stieess'], n. m., beadle ; 
 Swiss. 
 
 Suit [stiee'], pres., 3d s\r\g., follows. 
 
 Suite [sweei'i, n. f., sequel; tout de 
 suite, adv., immediately ; at once, 
 
 Suivi-e [stiee-vee'], part., followed. 
 
 Sujet [sii-zhai'], n. m., subject. 
 
 Superbe [sii-pairb'], adj., arrogant 
 proud; splendid; magnificent. 
 
 Superieur-e [sti-pay-ree-or'], adj. 
 sw/>m'or. 
 
 Supplier [sti-plee-ay'], v. a., to be- 
 seech. 
 
 Supporter [sti-por -tay'], v. a., to 
 bear ; to endure. 
 
 Suppose que [sti-po-zay' ke], conj., 
 supposing that. 
 
 Sur [siir], prep., upon ; on; over; 
 about. 
 
 Sur-e [*2r], adj., sure. 
 
 Suremcnr [siir-md~!], adv., surely. 
 
 Surfaire [stir -fair''], v. ir., to over- 
 charge. 
 
 Surgit [stir-zhee], pres., 3d sing., 
 springs up. 
 
 Surnom [stir-no'*'], n. m., surname. 
 
 TAU 
 Surprend [sur - prd~''}, pres., 3d 
 
 sing., surprises ; detects. 
 Surprendre [sur-prd~'-dr], v. ir., to 
 
 surprise. 
 Surpris-e [stir-pree', -preez'], part., 
 
 surprised ; detected. 
 Surprise [siir-preez'], n. f., surprise. 
 Surtout [silr-too'], adv., above all; 
 
 especially. 
 Survenir [stir - v - neer], x . ir., to 
 
 come unexpectedly. 
 Survivre [stir-vee' -vr], v. ir., to sur- 
 vive. 
 Suspende [sti-spd*d'], subj., may 
 
 suspend. 
 Suspendre [su-spd* 1 '-dr], v. a., to 
 
 suspend. 
 
 T. 
 
 T', contraction for te and toi. 
 
 Tabac [ta - ba], n. m., tobacco ; 
 snuff. 
 
 Tabatiere [ta -ba- tee - air'], n. f., 
 snuff-box. 
 
 Table [td-bl], n. f., table. 
 
 Tableau [tab - lo'], n. m., picture ; 
 painting. 
 
 Tablier [tdb-lee-ay'], n. m., apron. 
 
 Tacher [td-shay'], v. a., to try. 
 
 Taciturne [td-see-ttirn'], adj., taci- 
 turn. 
 
 Taille [ft'y], n. f., stature; size. 
 
 Tailleur [td-yor'], n. m., tailor. 
 
 Taire [taiV], v. ir., to conceal. 
 
 se Taire [se tair'], v. refl., to be si- 
 lent. 
 
 se Taisent [sg taiz'], pres., 3d pi., 
 (they) are silent. 
 
 Talent [tal-a*'], n. m., talent; gen- 
 ius. 
 
 Tandis que [to,"- dee W], conj., 
 ivhile. 
 
 Tant [ta*], adv., so much ; so 
 many ; tant mieux, so much the 
 better. 
 
 Tan tot [td~-to f ], adv., sometimes. 
 
 Tapisse-e [ta -pee- say'], part., 
 adorned; decked. 
 
 Tard-e [tar, tdrd] y adj., late. 
 
 Tarder [tar-day'], v. a., to delay. 
 
 Taureau [to-ro'], n. m., bull. 
 
498 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 TIG 
 Te [te], pron., thee; to thee; thy 
 
 self. 
 Teindre [ta~ f -dr], v. ir. 5 to dye. 
 Tel-le [tell"], pron., such; such a 
 
 one. 
 Temeraire [tay - may - rair], adj., 
 
 rash. 
 Tempere-e [td" -pay -ray'], adj. and 
 
 part., modified. 
 Tempete [la'-pait'], n. f., tempest 
 
 storm. 
 Temps [td"], n. m., time ; de temps 
 
 en temps, y'rowi time to time. 
 Tenait [tS-nai], imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 kept ; held. 
 Tend [for], pres., 3d sing., stretches 
 
 out; extends. 
 Tendent [ford], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 
 stretch out. 
 Tendre \_td~'-dr], v. a., to stretch ; 
 
 to extend. 
 Tendre [td~'-dr], adj., young ; ten- 
 der. 
 Tcndu-e [td"-du], part., stretched 
 
 bent. 
 Tenir [te-neer], v. ir., to keep ; to 
 
 hold. 
 Tente [td"t], r\.f., tent. 
 Tenter [td'-tay'], v. a., to tempt. 
 Terme [tairm], n. m., term ; limit. 
 Terre [tair],n. f., ground ; earth; 
 
 land. 
 Terrible [tair-ree'-bl], adj., terri- 
 ble ; fearful. 
 Tes [tay], pron., thy. 
 Tesin [tay-zd"'], m., Ticino (river). 
 Tete [tait], n. f., head. 
 The [tay], n. m., tea. 
 Theatral-e [tay-d-trdl'^], adj., the- 
 atrical. 
 Theatre [tay-d'-tr], n. m., theatre. 
 Thebain [tay-ba""'], n. m., Theban. 
 me Tiendrai [me tee-a" -dray'], fiat.-, 
 
 1st sing., I will keep myself; I 
 
 shall stand. 
 Tient [tee - a"'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 holds ; keeps. 
 se Tient [se tee-a"'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 holds himself; se tient debout, 
 
 stands. 
 Tigre [tee'-gr], n. m., tiger. 
 
 TRA 
 
 Timbre [ta~"-br], n. m., bell; 
 
 stamp. 
 Tirai [tee-ray'], p. def., 1st sing., 
 
 I drew. 
 Tirer [tee-rS§'], v. a., to pull; to 
 
 draw ; to take out ; to derive. 
 Toi [fo^a], pron., thou; thyself; 
 
 thee. 
 Toisc [twdz], n. f., fathom. 
 Toit [twd], n. m., rcof; building. 
 Tombe [to'b], pres., 3d sing.,/«//s. 
 Tomber [to" -bay'], v. n., to fall. 
 Ton [to"], pron., thy. 
 Tonneau [to-no], n. m., cask. 
 Torrent [tor-rd"'], n. m., torrent; 
 
 stream. 
 Tort [for], n. m., wrong. 
 Tot [fo], adv., soow. 
 Totalue' [to-td-lee-tay'], n. f., fo- 
 
 tality. 
 Touche-e [too-shay'], part., moved; 
 
 touched. 
 Toujours [too-zhoor 1 ], adv., always ; 
 
 ever ; allez toujours, keep on. 
 Tour [foor], n. m., trick; game; 
 
 turn ; circuit ; walk ; a VOtre t. , 
 
 in your turn. 
 Tour [tuor], n. f., tower. 
 Tourelle [too-?-e//'], n. f., turret. 
 Tourner [loor-nay], v. a. and n., to 
 
 turn. 
 Tons [too], adj. pi., a//; tous deux, 
 
 both. 
 Tout-e [too, toot], adj., all; every ; 
 
 adv., quite; n. m., ever^/ thing; 
 
 tout a fait, yzn'fo ; dju tout, at all. 
 Toute [foo*], f. of tout. 
 Traduiie [tra - dueer'], v. ir., fo 
 
 translate. 
 Tragedie [2ra - s/w?/ - dee'], n. f., 
 
 tragedy. 
 Train [frvT], n. m., frazrc. 
 Traineau [trai-no'], n. m., sledge; 
 
 deigh. 
 Trait [frm], n. m., arrow ; shaft ; 
 
 pi., features ; lineaments. 
 Trait e prai-fo?/'], n. m., treatise. 
 se Traiter [.se trai-tay'], v.-refl., to 
 
 treat ; to use one another. 
 Trajet [trd-zhai'], n. m., journey ; 
 
 trip. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 499 
 
 TEO 
 
 Tranche [trd"sh], n. f., slice ; flitch. 
 Tranquille [trd'-keey'], adj., calm; 
 
 quiet. 
 Tranquillement [tra-kee* - ma"'], 
 
 adv., quietly. 
 Transcrire [tra'-skreer'], v. if., to 
 
 transcribe. 
 Transmettre [trd"s-met'-tr], v. ir., 
 
 to transmit. 
 Trappe [trap], n. f., trap-door. 
 Travail [trd-vi?'], n. m., work; 
 
 toil. 
 Travaille [tra-viy'], pres., 3d sing., 
 
 works ; toils. 
 Travailler [trd-vd-yay'], v. n., to 
 
 work ; to labor. 
 Travcrs [trd- vair']. A travers. 
 
 prep., through ; across; among. 
 Traverse-e [trd-vair-say'], part. 
 
 crossed. 
 Traverser [trd-vaii--say'], v. a., to 
 
 cross. 
 Traversin [trd - vair - sd^'], n. m., 
 
 bolster. 
 Traversons [trd-vair-so"'], imper., 
 
 1st pi., let us cross. 
 Treize [traiz], num., thirteen. 
 Tremblant [tra~-bld~'], part., trem- 
 bling. 
 Trentaine [tra-tain'~\, n. f., thirty ; 
 
 a score and a half. 
 Trente [tra't], num., thirty. 
 Trepas [tray-pa'], n. m., death. 
 Tres [trai], adv., very ; very much. 
 Tresor [tray-zor'], n. m., treasure; 
 
 treasury. 
 Tressaillir [tre-sd-yeer'], v. ir., to 
 
 start up. 
 Tribun [tree-b%~'], n. m., tribune 
 Triompher [tree-o" -fay'], v. n., 
 
 triumph. 
 Triste [freest], adj., sad; melan- 
 choly. 
 Tristesse [tree-stess'], n.f., sadness ; 
 
 sorrow. 
 Trois [trwd], num., three. 
 Trompe-e [tro"-pay'], part., de- 
 ceived. 
 
 Tromper [tro~-pay'],x. a., to deceive. 
 se Tromper [sS tro~-pay'],x. refl., 
 
 to be mistaken. 
 
 VA 
 
 Trompeur [tro~-pdr'], f. , trompeuse 
 [tro"-poz'], adj., deceitful. 
 
 Trop [tro], adv., too ; too much ; 
 too many. 
 
 Trotter [tro-tay'], v. n., to trot 
 about. 
 
 Trouble [troo'-bl], n. m., trouble; 
 confusion. 
 
 Trouble-e [troo-blay'], part., troub- 
 led ; perplexed. 
 
 Troubler [troo-blay'], v. a., to dis- 
 turb. 
 
 Trousseau [troo-so'], n. m., bunch 
 of keys. 
 
 Trouva [troo-va], p. def., 3d sing., 
 found. 
 
 Trouve [troov],. pres., 3d sing., 
 finds. 
 
 se Trouve [sS troov], pres., 3d 
 sing.,j^??Gfc hhnself; is. 
 
 Trouve-e [troo-vay'], pari., found. 
 
 Trouver [troo-vay'], v. a., to find ; 
 to think. 
 
 Trouverent [troo-vair 1 ], p. def., 3d 
 pi., (they) found. 
 
 Troyen [trwd-yaT], n. m., Trojan. 
 
 Tu [til], pron., thou. 
 
 Tue-e [til-ay], part., killed. 
 
 Tuer [til-ay 1 ], v. a. , to kill. 
 
 Turc [tiirk], f., turque [tilrk], adj., 
 Turkish. 
 
 Tyran [tee-ra'], n. m., tyrant. 
 
 Tyrannie [tee -rd- nee'], n. f., tyr- 
 anny. 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulm [iihn], Ulm. 
 
 Un [o ], art., a; an; num., owe. 
 
 Une [tin], art. f., a ; an ; num., one. 
 to Uni-e [ti-nee'], part., united. 
 
 Union [ti-nee-o~'], n. f., union. 
 
 Unir [ti-nee?-'], v. a., to unite. 
 
 Univers [ii-nee-vair'], n. m., uni- 
 verse. 
 
 User [ti-zay'], v. a. and n., to wear 
 out. 
 
 Utile [il-teel'], adj., useful. 
 
 Va [yd], imper., 2d sing., go; 
 pres., 3d sing., goes. 
 
500 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 VEN 
 
 s'en Va [sd"~ va], pres., 3d sing., 
 goes away ; goes off. 
 
 Vache [vash], n. f., cow. 
 
 Vague [vdgh], adj., vague. 
 
 Vaguement [vagh - ma"''], adv., 
 vaguely. 
 
 Vain-e [va", vain], adj., vain. 
 
 Vaincre [vcT'-kr], v. ir., to con- 
 quer; to overcome. 
 
 Vainement [vain -ma"''], adv., in 
 vain; vainly. 
 
 Vainqueur [vcT-kdr], n. m., con- 
 queror. 
 
 Vais [vai], pres., 1st sing., I go. 
 
 Vaisseau [vai -so'], n. m., ship; 
 vessel. 
 
 Valise [val-eez'], n. f., valise; port- 
 manteau. 
 
 Vallee [va-lay'], n. f., valley. 
 
 Vallon [vd-lo"'], n. fa., valley ; dale. 
 
 Valoir [vai -war'], v. ir., to be 
 worth; valoir mieux, to be bet- 
 ter ; to be worth more. 
 
 Vanite [vdn-ee-tay'], n. f., vanity. 
 
 Vante-e [vd~-tay'], part., extolled ; 
 praised ; boasted of. 
 
 S3 Vanter [se vd"-tay'], v. refl., to 
 boast ; to be proud. 
 
 Vapeur [vd-por'], n. m., steamer. 
 
 Vas [va], pres., 2d sing., (thou) go- 
 est. 
 
 Vaste [vast], adj., vast ; extensive. 
 
 Vautour [vo-toor], n. m., vulture. 
 
 Ve'cu-e [vay-kii'], part., lived. 
 
 Veille [vaiy], n. f., the day before ; 
 the night previous. 
 
 Veille-e [vai-yay'], part., watched. 
 
 Veiller [vai-yay'], v. n., to watch ; 
 to be awake. 
 
 Veillera [vai-yg-ra], fut., 3d sing., 
 will watch. 
 
 Veine [vain], n. f., vein. 
 
 Velours [vHoor'], n. m., velvet. 
 
 Venaient [ve-nai'], imperf.,3d pi., 
 (they) were coming ; (they) came. 
 
 Venais [ve-nai 1 ], imperf., 1st sing., 
 I came ; was coming. 
 
 Venait [vjS-nai'], imperf., 3d sing., 
 came. 
 
 Vend [yd"], pres., 3d sing., sells ; 
 se vend, is sold. 
 
 VIE 
 
 Vendre [vd~'-dr], v. a., to sell 
 
 Venez [ve-nay'], pres., 2d pi., (you) 
 co i ne ; imper., come. 
 
 Vengeance [yd"-zhd"s], n. f., re- 
 venge ; vengeance. 
 
 Venger [yd~-zhay'], v. a,, to avenge. 
 
 se Venger [se vd'-zhay], v. reii., 
 to take vengeance; to have re- 
 venge. 
 
 Venir [vg-neer'], v. ir., to come; 
 venir de, to have just. 
 
 Venitien [vay-nee-see-d"'], n. m., 
 Venitian. 
 
 Vent [tvF], n. m., wind. 
 
 Ventre [vd~'-tr], n.m., belly; ven- 
 tre a terre, at, full speed. 
 
 Venu-e [ve-nu], part., come. 
 
 Ver [vair], n. ra., worm. 
 
 Verbe [vairb], n. m., verb. 
 
 Verge [vairzh], n. f., yard. 
 
 Ve'rite' [vay-ree-tay'], n. f., truth; 
 en ve'rite, truly ; indeed. 
 
 Verre [vair], n. m., glass. 
 
 Verriez [vair-ree-ay'], condit., 2d 
 pi., (you) would or might see. 
 
 Verrouille'-e [oair-roo-yay'], part., 
 bolted. 
 
 Vers [vair], n.m., verse. 
 
 Vers [vair], prep., toward; to. 
 
 Versailles [vair-siy'], Versailles. 
 
 Vert-e [vair, vairt], adj., green. 
 
 Vertu [vair-tu], n. f., virtue. 
 
 Vertueux-se [vair-tu-o, -oz], adj., 
 virtuous ; worthy. 
 
 Vetu-e [vai-tu], part., dressed. 
 
 Veulent [vol], pres., 3d pi., (they) 
 wish. 
 
 Veut [vo], pres., 3d sing., wishes ; 
 is willing ; veut dife, means ; sig- 
 nifies. 
 
 Veuve [vov], n. f., widow. 
 
 Veux [vo], pres., 1st sing., / wish ; 
 I will. 
 
 Viande [yee-d"d'], n. f., meat. 
 
 Vice [ree.?.s], n. m., vice. 
 
 Victime [veek-teem'], n. f., victim. 
 
 Victoire [veek-twdr' \, n. f., victory. 
 
 Vide [veed], adj., empty. 
 
 Vie [vee], n. f., life. 
 
 Vieillard [vee - ai - yar'], n. m., old 
 man. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 501 
 
 VIT 
 
 Vieille \yee-aiy'~\, adj., f. oivieux 
 
 n. f., old woman. 
 Vieillesse [vee - ai - yess'~\, 11. f.,old 
 
 age. 
 Vieillir [yee-ai-yeer'\~v . n., to grow 
 
 old. 
 Viendrons \vee-ST -dro"'\ fut., 1st 
 
 pi., (toe) shall come. 
 Vienne [yee-enn'\ Vienna. 
 Viennent [yee-enn'\ pres., 3d pi., 
 
 (they) come. 
 Viens [yee-a~'~], imper., 2d sing., 
 
 come ; come along ; viens de, / 
 
 have just. 
 Vient [vee-cT'], pves., 3d sing., 
 
 comes. 
 Vieux [yee-6'~\, f., vieille [yee-aiy''], 
 
 adj., old. 
 Vif-ve [veef veev], adj., lively ; au 
 
 vif, to the life; life-like. 
 Vilain-e [vee-ld"''], adj., ugly. 
 Village [vee-lazh'~], n. m., village. 
 Villageois [yee - lazh - wd'\ n. m., 
 
 villager. 
 Ville [yeel], n. f., city ; town; hotel 
 
 de ville, city hall. 
 Vin [ugT], n. m., wine. 
 Vingt [yd~\ num., twenty. 
 Vingt-quatre [ya't-kd' -tr\ num., 
 
 twenty-four. 
 Vint \ya\ p. def., 3d sing., came; 
 
 vint a, chanced to. 
 Violent-e [vee-o-ld"' , -la~t'\ adj., 
 
 violent. 
 Virginie [veer-zhee-nee'~\, Virginia. 
 Visage [yee - zdzh'\ n. m., counte- 
 nance ; face. 
 Viser [yee-zay'\ v. n., to aim. 
 Visiblement [vee - zee - ble - mcT'~]i 
 
 adv., evidently. 
 Visite [vee-zeef], n. A visit. 
 Visite-e [yee-zee-tay'\ part., vis- 
 ited. 
 Vit [vee], p. def., 3d sing., saw. 
 Vite [veet\ adv., quick; fast; 
 
 speedily ; le plus vite possible, in 
 
 the quickest possible manner. 
 Vitesse [vee-tess'~], n. f., speed. 
 Vitraux [vee-tro'~], n. m. pi., glass 
 
 windows (of churches). 
 Vitre [vee'-tr~], n. f. ? glass. 
 
 voy 
 
 Vivait [yee-vai'\ imperf., 3d sing , 
 
 lived. 
 Vivant-e [vee-vd"', -raY], adj., 
 
 living ; alive. 
 Vivement [veev-md~'~\, adv., vivid- 
 ly ; deeply ; vigorously. 
 Vivre [vee'-vr], v. ir., to live. 
 Vceu [fo], n. m., wish ; vow. 
 Voici [vwd-see'~\, prep., behold; 
 
 here is ; here are. 
 Voient [vwd~\, pres., 3dpl., (themk 
 
 see. 
 Voila [ywd-ld'\ prep., behold; there 
 
 is ; there are. 
 Voile [vwdl~\, n. m., veil. 
 Voir [vwdr], v. ir., to see; to look 
 
 at; faire voir, to show. 
 Voirie [ywd-ree'\ n. f., sewer. 
 Vois [ywd\ pres., 1st sing., I see. 
 Voisin [vwa-zd~'^\, n. m., neighbor. 
 Voit [vwd~], pres., 3d sing., sees. 
 Voix [vwd], n. f., voice; vote; 
 
 sound ; call. 
 Voleur [ro-foV], n. m., robber; 
 
 thief. 
 Volle'e [vo-lay'~], n. f., volley ; rapid 
 
 succession. 
 Volontiers [vo-lo"- tee-ay'~\, adv., 
 
 willingly. 
 Volubilite [yo-lu-bee-lee-tay'\ n. f., 
 
 volubility. 
 Volume [vo-lum'\ n. m., volume. 
 Vont [yo"\ pres., 3d pi., (they) go. 
 Vos [ro], pron. pi. ,your. 
 Votre [vo'-ti-], pron., your; le or 
 
 la votre, yours. 
 Voudrais [voo-drai'~\, condit., 1st 
 
 sing., I would or should like. 
 Voulait [voo-lai'~\, imperf., 3d sing., 
 
 wished; desired; was willing. 
 Voulez [yoo-lay'\ pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) wish ; are willing. 
 Vouloir [vool-wdr''], v. ir., to be 
 
 willing ; to wish ; to will. 
 Voulu-e [voo-lu~], part., wished; 
 
 been willing. 
 Voulurent [voo-liir'~\, p. def., 3d pi., 
 
 (they) wished. 
 Vous [uoo], pron., you. 
 Voyage [vwd-ydzh'~], n.m., voyage; 
 
 journey. 
 
502 
 
 VOCABULABY. 
 
 VUE 
 
 Voyager [vwd-ya-zhay'l, v. n., to 
 
 travel. 
 Voyageur \ywa-ya-zkar'\ n. m., 
 
 traveler. 
 Voyais [ viva -yoi'\ imperf., 1st 
 
 sing., I saw ; ivas seeing. 
 Voyelle [ywd-yell'], n. f., vowel. 
 Voyez \ywa-yay'\ pres., 2d pi., 
 
 (you) see; imper., see. 
 Voyons [ywa-yoT'~\, imper., 1st pi., 
 \ let us see. 
 Vrai-e [y'ray~], adj., true ; au vrai, 
 
 in a true light. 
 Vraiment \yray-ma~'~\, adv., truly ; 
 
 indeed. 
 Vu-e [vu], part., seen. 
 Vue [vu], n. f., sight ; view. 
 
 ZEL 
 
 W. 
 
 Wagon [va-go~'~\, n. m., carriage. 
 Wallon [yd-lo~'~], n. m., Walloon. 
 
 X. 
 
 Xante [gzcTt], Xante. 
 Xavier [gzd-vee-ay'~\, Xavier. 
 Xe'nophon [gzay - no -fo~ r ], Xeno- 
 
 phon. 
 Xerxes [gzairk-sais r ], Xerxes. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y [ee], pron., to it ; in it; there. 
 Yeux [ee-o'], n. m. pi., eyes. 
 
 Zele [zail'~], n. m., zeal. 
 
 THE END. 
 
LB r 
 

 .